JP2023120908A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a new display performance.SOLUTION: As a read-ahead performance that changes a display mode of a standby reservation display, a game machine can execute a first performance in which a moving display of the standby reservation display is executed while a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and a second performance in which at least one decorative symbol is varied at high speed while displaying a suggestion display. Further, the game machine can execute a notice performance that provides a sense of expectation for a winning during the moving display of the standby reservation display in the first performance. In the notice performance, any operation is not requested to a player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 399

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") and a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine capable of executing a display effect is conventionally known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2001-137471

However, there is still room for improvement in performance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of executing a devised effect.

A game machine according to [Means 1] acquires lottery information regarding a win based on the establishment of a start condition, and determines means for determining whether or not a win is achieved based on the lottery information; means, a display device capable of displaying a predetermined image, displaying a decorative design on the display device, executing a variable display of the decorative design based on establishment of a start condition, and at the end of the variable display of the decorative design. decorative pattern variation means for indicating the result of the determination; and holding means for storing the lottery information up to a predetermined number when the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied. pre-judgment means for judging whether or not there is a win based on the lottery information stored by the holding means before the start condition is satisfied; and the lottery information is stored by the holding means. a first display mode in which recognition of the decorative design is difficult or impossible as a mode of variable display of the decorative design; and There is a second display mode in which the decorative pattern is easy to recognize, it is possible to move the pending display displayed on the display device, and the effects include a first effect and a second effect, In the first effect, when the holding display displayed on the display device starts to move, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode, and the display device displayed on the display device is the second display mode. Even when the movement of the pending display ends, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode, and until a predetermined time elapses after the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device ends. is an effect in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode, and the second effect is a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display displayed on the display device changes. At least one of the decorative symbols is set to the first display mode when the suggestive display displayed by is displayed, and the pending display is shown in the display mode after the display of the suggestive display is finished and changed. When all the decorative patterns are in the first display mode, a period from the start to the end of the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device in the first effect. , is capable of executing a notice effect that provides a sense of expectation for a hit, and the notice effect does not require the player to operate (for example, paragraphs 3418 to 3419, 3472, Figures 398 to 405, etc.). According to the gaming machine according to "means 1", it is possible to provide the player with a new effect display.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of executing a devised effect.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends; FIG. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37; (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a portion of the operation button is cut away to show the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of an operation button to be hidden by a first button decorative portion, a button frame, or the like in a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit. is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56; It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63, viewed from behind; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 75; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the door frame side liquid crystal display device; It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; FIG. 90 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in FIG. 89 to the peripheral control boards; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper tray liquid crystal; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S5234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and normal electric accessary goods control processing (step S116). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing (step S5402). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (step S5403). BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission state in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission state in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the display mode of the game board side effect display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting effect state, according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the display mode of the game board side effect display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting effect state, according to the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the display area in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the display mode of the display area in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the display area in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the obstacle nail and panel board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the obstacle nail, the panel board, and the game ball in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the game board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the game board in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the housing|casing in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the housing|casing in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an image diagram showing the movement of the self-tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an image diagram showing the movement of the self-tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game state in this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the present embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a moving image displayed in a display area in this embodiment; It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. 4 is a diagram showing display priorities of display images in the embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing an image and the like displayed in a display area in the embodiment; FIG. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing an image and the like displayed in a display area in the embodiment; FIG. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing an image and the like displayed in a display area in the embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing an image and the like displayed in a display area in the embodiment; FIG. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing an image and the like displayed in a display area in the embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the light-guide plate etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the light-guide plate etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing an image and the like displayed in a display area in the embodiment; FIG. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a table which shows the production|presentation mode in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game parlor, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a vertically extending quadrangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100.例文帳に追加A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the plate unit 320 and a plate unit 320 attached to the center of the plate unit 320. According to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a, the player can A performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory performance, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600, which is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse side mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in the front view to pay out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and are paid one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and to release the game balls according to the state of storage of the game balls on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. An upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges from either a normal discharge port 850d or a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 that guides game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and guides forward game balls released from the full tank release port 850e to guide the game balls forward and guides the game balls forward from the front end to the full ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway 862 leading to the tank ball receptacle 274 .

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921 , a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 . An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 installed across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are housed therein. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front, and a flat plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game ball with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . When the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game parlor.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side surface) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700, which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 has engaging cutouts 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11 . In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting stepped portions 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging cutout portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is mounted.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in shapes symmetrical to each other in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the lateral outer side surfaces. It has concave portions 31 and 41 and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game parlor or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows the game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in the assembled state with the outer frame 2 . The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 .

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward extending portion 62 to the center of the front extending portion 62 toward the front and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . The horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable bar-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a left side of the horizontal portion 71 which rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 are penetrated vertically and only one game ball can pass through. and a sized discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D, which connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. be.

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. , and the right ejection hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-section cut along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a door frame base unit 100 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 300 attached to the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 .

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball shooting device 680; and a ball shooting device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. and a foul cover unit 270 for receiving a game ball which is shot by and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower tray 322. - 特許庁

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 rotates the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, which will be described later in detail. The ball can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball extraction button 327 for extracting game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and within the range of the balance of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning the cash or prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and the cash put into the ball lending machine. and a ball rental/return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc.; A lower tray ball ejection button 333 for discharging game balls downward from the tray unit 320 is provided.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is possible. Although the details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display the effect image. and a display device 460 .

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the through hole 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4 . The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower corner of the front surface, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 are attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111 and the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and projecting from the main body frame 4. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 are detachably mounted. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 for closing the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. - 特許庁

Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , the upper speaker 573 , etc., and a door body relay board for relaying connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4 .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 110 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a through-hole 111 formed in a generally rectangular shape extending vertically in the inner peripheral shape when viewed from the front. The through-hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, and is close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 110 , and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 110 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the through holes 111 penetrating therethrough in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. A cylinder mounting portion 113 to which a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view between the and the cylinder mounting portion 113, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates in the front and rear at the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 110 penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage opening 116 for a lower tray and a through-ball passage 273 of a foul cover unit 270 are penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-opening 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the through opening 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 penetrates in the front and rear direction at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending to the left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a middle reinforcing sheet metal extending to the left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 . A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front view left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement sheet attached along the front view right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A metal plate 134 and a lock engaging portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and engages the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 .

In the reinforcement unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the lock engaging portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110 .

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, each of which has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part not only increases the strength and rigidity, but also prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 includes a door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a that are separated vertically, and a pair of projections of the door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. and a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. It is shaped like a letter. The door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects a pair of protruding pieces 141a and is attached to the rear surface of the door-frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes upward from the upper projecting piece 141a. Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower projecting piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. As shown in FIG.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 . The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has its upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and its lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

In the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by a lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 or removed downward. can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view is moved. , can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 4 .

Further, the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door-frame-side upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket 141 is attached to the door frame of the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 . As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 .

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a that extends forward, and A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a. is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower door frame hinge pin 152 has a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 to be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 .

The door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 . can support

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decoration board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in the front view to the height near the center of the through opening 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the position below the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117 a substrate 162;

A door-frame left-side upper decorative board 161 and a door-frame left-side lower decorative board 162 of the door-frame left-side decorative board 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind a door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, with the door frame 3 assembled. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably mount the glass unit 190 . The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base portion 171 mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a protrusion 172 that

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

With the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 , the glass unit mounting member 170 rotates so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 . The rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 is brought into contact with the rear side of the glass unit 190 to restrict the upper portion of the glass unit 190 from moving rearward.

The center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is positioned within the projecting portion 172 because the protruding portion 172 protrudes from the disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110 . . Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 and is stable. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110 .

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 . 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of ( In this example, three) ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws while the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 .

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300 . One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side inside the tubular portion 181 and the remaining two are provided on the lower side inside the tubular portion 181 . These three ridges 183 are formed on the handle base 301 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 180, the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical portion The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118 , and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191 . The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 191a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. A mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can abut against a projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 . The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is obtained by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110 .

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 .

The body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 201 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed along substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the body portion 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201. As shown in FIG. A rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball shooting device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is within the game area 5a. It does not interfere with hitting the game ball into.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 . Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110 .

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear projecting piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 positioned between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the vicinity of the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 to rotate a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits rotation to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of .

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts 212a that are cut out in the same direction. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and projections of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 are inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the lock unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of flat plate-like side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in directions away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in front view is attached to the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 . As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100 , the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213 a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 extends from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the cylinder insertion hole. 114 and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. A front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of a cylinder mounting metal plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into the main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. is.

The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, and the center side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and the operation button 410 that the player can press and operate, and the production operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having an operation button 410 and a decoration board unit 420 attached to the front side, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 and effecting A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the center side bulges forward. It has an annular button frame 412 attached thereto, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a member that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 extends for a predetermined length toward the center (inner side) in a recessed state with a W-shaped cross section from the rear surface of the button frame 412 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A first button decorative portion 411a extends on an axis toward the center in a recessed state with an arcuate cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decorative portion 411a, and is arranged in a circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range. and a plurality (six) of second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the drawing, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends toward the center from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer toward the center than

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three each on the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG.

The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light due to unevennesses having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be seen clearly.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality (six) of frame openings 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction in an arc shape with a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorations 411 b of the button lens 411 . This button frame 412 has a plated layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a. A plurality (three) of detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in the form of a band plate and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d extending forward and backward through the flange portion 413b on the outer side of the main body portion 413a and along the outer circumference for a predetermined length. A plurality (six) of base openings 413e are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a. and an inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. 413 d of three detection pieces are arrange|positioned at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two may be distribute|arranged to the upper side and one to the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main-body part 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumference. The inner diameter of the inwardly tapering front end of the inner extending portion 413 f substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412 .

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), and is formed transparently. can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and is operated by the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Forced forward. The front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 abuts against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 . By pressing against the , it moves rearward until the rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430 . When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 . Detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440 means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 .

Further, the operation button 410 has a button lens 411 and a button frame 412 that close the front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 . A transparent portion that allows the rear to be visually recognized is formed so as to narrow from the outer periphery to the inner side with respect to the outer diameter of 410 . The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 .

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a ) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and extends from the front surface of the decoration board unit 420 . It will protrude backwards. As a result, the lights emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are emitted from the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413 . Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower interior decoration board 436 from illuminating the parts other than the part to be luminous decoration, and the luminous decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4b. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the frame, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. there is

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in rows in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c having a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 . As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening portion 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 also has a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening portion 416a and the outer peripheral opening portion 416b, and has a cutout portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. In the state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is arranged so that the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively arranged. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, respectively, and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portions 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the notch portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal cover on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) across the central opening 416a. A glossy plated layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 three each, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without unevenness on the front side, and a plurality of unevenness along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple unevennesses, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concave and convex portions extending in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side and arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen because light is refracted by these unevennesses.

In the frame unit 415, in a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. , and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon can be decorated with light. .

[3-4c. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from the front. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400 .

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The board base 421 has an inner circumference that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415 .

The operation button left external decoration board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button left external decoration board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right external decoration board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. Both front and rear surfaces of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end side of the cylindrical main body part 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421 . Further, in the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the frame The inner tubular portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 illuminates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decoration board unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 400. FIG.

[3-4d. Effects of production operation unit]
Operations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit in FIG. 37. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 400. The player can be entertained by participating in the performance presented to the player by operating the button 410.例文帳に追加

The performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The effect operation unit 400 has the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 . When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the performance operation unit 400). Since it is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438. As shown in FIG. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the operation button spring 438 pushes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 toward the frame unit 415 . It abuts on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 (center axis line CL side). there is In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 , the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 . When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the presentation operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. is installed with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. A portion of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are flat surfaces, When a part of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can be done. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attachment part. , the entire effect operation unit 400 can be greatly (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player pressing the operation button 410 It is possible to transmit strong vibrations to the player, and the player can be surprised and entertained with the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck, the frame is not held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the portion 326a and the like, and to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed and an effect is presented to the player, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is not pressed. Since the 400 or the like is not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the decrease in interest of the player, and increase the burden on the game parlor side by making it difficult to damage. can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, so that the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are higher than those of the conventional case, and even if the button lens 411 is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

46, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the back side is located on the front side (player side). ). In addition, since the plate thickness changes in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with unevenness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 . Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), there are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button. 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap is positioned from the front side (player side) to close the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the operating button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided inside the operating button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operating button 410 from deteriorating in appearance. It is possible to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling, and it is possible to arrange the operation button internal decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 are arranged so that the outer circumference of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is adjusted. The unit base 431, the decoration board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) of the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411.例文帳に追加Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the dashed-dotted line is made invisible to the player. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, in turn, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape around the center axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the concave-convex line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). With the second button inner decoration part 432g, a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the player can see the decoration with movement, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player by using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest and have a high appeal.

In addition, in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decorative member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button An upper interior decoration board 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof emit light, thereby causing the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 to emit light. can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 , the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 , the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 , and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 . As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are as follows. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body portion 413a, so that the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body portion 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 positioned near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b. A first LED 422a and a first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board A second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of lenses mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. , the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. A plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to near the rear end of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the side of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is arranged above the tray unit 320 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160). It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100 . The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent property arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit top that is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536 .

A left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear directions. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 has LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the door frame 3 is assembled. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. As shown in FIG. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface itself of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion (left portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffuser lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffuser lens member 532A and a lower diffuser lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion that is square in front view and corresponds to the square opening 531a. and a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and square lens portion 532b. formed.

A circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged in the rear can be emitted forward in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and an input lens portion 532e on the rear surface that extends forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. and a forward reflecting portion 532f that is slanted for movement.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffuser lens portion 532d has grooves recessed rearward in an arc shape in a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves extends forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the peak portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line that divides it in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portions are formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a triangular cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with peaks between grooves sharpening rearward, and is formed in a serrated shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. In addition, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line dividing the portion in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line that divides in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward into a curved surface (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels forward in parallel. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is directed perpendicularly to the longitudinally extending axis (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. direction), and travels outward along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b from the center side. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected outward from the central side in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (see Figure 50). As a result, light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwardly reflected by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions. light can be emitted substantially uniformly forward (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the .

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves with the dividing lines as boundaries. are shifted in the radial direction, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern of light and shade. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light forward with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 . The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion positioned in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and a portion positioned in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. and a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in a vertical direction on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is shaped like this. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 of the door frame right side unit 550, respectively.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536 . Also, the left unit decorative lens member has a circular decorative portion that is projected forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is projected forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. By the light irradiated to each of them, they are decorated with light emission.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular tube extending back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery thereof, which is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U shape that opens upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530 . The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion that is bent rearward. A V-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped part and the upper end of the lower V-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and a.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. Fig. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 .

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. and a door frame right side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front and back direction. A transparent plate-like right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member. and a transparent plate-like right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, and on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the right side of the center in front view and the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. there is

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is open on the front and right sides. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and an opaque right light shielding member 559 attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right diffuser having a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is mounted on the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561 , the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front and rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563 . Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting with the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The right unit base 551 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 itself is made of a reflective material such as metal or resin. It is also possible to provide such as by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion (right portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a left LED 552b mounted on the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. and a plurality of medium LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for lighting up the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, the right LED 552b is for lighting up and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of notch portions 553c are cut out in a rectangular shape leftward from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. 554, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in a plurality in the vertical direction, and the right surface side of the main body portion 553a in front view. A plurality of side reflection portions 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is positioned at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a vertically extending quadrangular shape in side view. It is formed in a shape that is slanted to move to the Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the body portion 553 a projects forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The right end of the rear wall portion 553 b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . When the door-frame right-side unit 550 is assembled, the inner LEDs 552c of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c. can be decorated.

The housing recess 553 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is vertically divided into 6 equal parts, it is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a concave portion forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 553e are positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 553f are formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines separating the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface of the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the body portion 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 553f and is reflected leftward in the front view, and then outward from the left surface of the body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main portion 553a and the light emitted rightward from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted from the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 to the left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the body portion 553a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 553f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of lines extending radially, and the plurality of concentric circular grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form concentric circular grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate leftward light with more uniform intensity. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the side reflection lens member 553 formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body portion 553a (the side where the accommodating recessed portion 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting short to the left in front view from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. 556b, a plurality of notch portions 556c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right when viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A front view of a housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a vertically extending quadrangular front end with an upper corner notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side extending upward toward the front. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to the right direction, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in the front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the main body portion 556 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled with the door frame right side unit 550 . The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 556c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. As shown in FIG. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening penetrating back and forth between the notch portion 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is vertically divided into six equal parts, it is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves circumferentially divided by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 556e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 556f are formed so that the groove portions and the ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with respect to the radial line that divides the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the main body portion 556a moves leftward in a front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the body portion 556a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 556f, is reflected rightward in front view, and travels outward from the right surface of the body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is irradiated to the right side. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main portion 556a and the light emitted leftward from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right direction and passed through the body portion 556a is irradiated to the right side, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit attached to the right side of the body portion 556a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing lines as boundaries to form the concentric arc grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. It is possible to irradiate rightward light with more uniform density. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent member, it is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a in front view (the side on which the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right decorative member 557 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555 . Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 when viewed from the side. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, and a rear wall portion 559b. A plurality of notch portions 559c are cut leftward from the right end of the wall portion 559b in a front view and have a plurality of cutout portions 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcement portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in which the upper corners on the front end side are notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side extends upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right from the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 559c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, respectively. Therefore, when the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, one pair of reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563 . The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are enhanced by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right light shielding member 560 of the right unit has a shape in a side view, which is a vertically extending quadrangular shape in which the upper corner of the front end side is obliquely notched in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 . The right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the horizontal direction. . Through the space formed between the body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is emitted from the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 illuminate forward, respectively. The light emitted is prevented from interfering with each other. Only the middle LED 552c can be used for luminous decoration.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. It is possible to prevent light from interfering between the spaces by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, which is located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561. , can be decorated independently. That is, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be vertically divided into a plurality of (four) areas, and each area can be decorated with light independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons made up of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed into a shape as shown.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b divided into four spaces by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three regions located in the front, the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction is provided with one multifaceted decorative portion 561b on each of the upper and lower sides. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged in the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561 . The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . This right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 . The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is made of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 vertically divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 530 protrudes forward in a large plate shape, and slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. there is The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both projecting left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. can be decorated with luminescence.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the amusement arcade, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exhibit a function and effect like a partition between. As a result, the players playing the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, and the players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in an amusement arcade where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility can be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game parlor where many pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book can be seen from a distance. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides By making the member 561 or the like luminous and decorated in a peculiar manner, the clerk of the game parlor can immediately be notified of the occurrence of the trouble and be made to recognize it, and can quickly deal with the trouble. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved early, and the player's frustration and loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the center base 571 that is mounted in the center in the horizontal direction above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 . A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending to the left and right, with the center in the left and right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a passing through the pair of upper speakers 573 in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box-like shape with an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) extending vertically and penetrating them in the front-rear direction. A unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the top inner decorative member 576 having translucency, and to the rear side of the top inner decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, respectively, and left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top inner decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration. A top center left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top center decorative member 576 to near the center side end of the opening 574a, and A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and LEDs are mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, respectively. A door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on both left and right sides of the rear side of the unit main body 271 in the center in the left and right direction are penetrated. A pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the respective portions where the LEDs 586a and 587a are attached, and a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a are mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. It is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and door frame top center right decoration board 587 and the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and door frame top center right decoration board 587 respectively. and a pair of light shielding members 588 .

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit main body 271, and a central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. An attached relay board cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and a unit cover 591 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. and a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271 .

A central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. The center base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of unevenness on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the respective front surfaces thereof are obliquely attached so that the side closer to the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone speakers capable of outputting sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending in the left and right direction bulge downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that a square extending in the left and right direction is notched with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower end side when viewed from the front. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view, and a portion of about 1/2 of the total width (length in the horizontal direction) centered on the center in the horizontal direction on the front edge side of the rectangle. A trapezoid protruding forward and a quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are combined to form a shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 is arranged such that both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are aligned with the lines connecting the left-right end portions of the unit main body 271 and the left-right direction end portions of the front ends of the portions protruding forward. It is located posteriorly (recessed).

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions extending from the right and left ends of the front surface to positions outside the portions projecting forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and that penetrate in the front-rear direction at a portion that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface and that extends obliquely. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend laterally from the vicinity of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271, which extends obliquely forward, to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Also, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be separated vertically by three.

The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c formed by notching forward from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d formed by notching from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , is equipped with An upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower opening 574 d is closed by a lower cover 592 .

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape when viewed from the front that is a modified pentagon bent so that the center of the lower side of the substantially square in the horizontal direction is positioned downward, and extends laterally outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape as if it were a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the edge and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the modified pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is arranged behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to follow the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 . side mounted. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top interior decoration substrate 577, and the interior top decoration member 576 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271 protruding forward. The side near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 is defined as the end side, and the side near the center is defined as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height, and the circular arc portion 578b has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. there is

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and formed of sawtooth irregularities, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the circular arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities, It has

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. FIG. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. As the light travels toward the center inside, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of them is decorated with light emission.

Light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 , or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 . By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be decorated with good (uniform) light.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 579 a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574 e of the unit body 271 . That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578 .

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 580 a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids projecting forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574 f of the unit body 271 . That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584 a and 587 a of a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578 .

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580 . The top center right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted directed rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted directed leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. By means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical with each other. The substrate base 585 includes side walls that are substantially square in side view and have sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is square in front view and extends outward in the horizontal direction at right angles from the rear sides of the side walls, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The line connecting the upper sides of the side walls to the middle is the oblique side, and the upper side of a substantially right-angled triangle connects the upper sides of the side wall and the back wall. and a right-angled triangular lower wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271 . A door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or a door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left rear side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 . be done. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted on the door frame top center left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 586 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to light-embellish a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the right side of the left-right center so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. be done. The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted on the door frame top center right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 587 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to light-embellish a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

A pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at positions between the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271 . The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 which are arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a and 587a positioned immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 579 can be guided forward. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top center right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550 . The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590 .

The door frame top unit 570 has a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved backward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 attaches the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 . It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated with the door frame top unit 570 .

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each in the vicinity of both left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated vertically from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be listened to by the player in good condition, and the player can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Further, the door-frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top right decorative lens member 580, so that the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 583 are arranged. Light from substrate 584, door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be directed to top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, and top left decorative lens member. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light-embellish the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 .

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
Effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a through-hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, which is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. , the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , corresponds to a game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 400 having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides (the front surface of the front lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) is hollowed backward (the front ends of the left and right ends of the plate unit 320, The left and right front surfaces of the production operation unit 400 are formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the production operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400 . As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude forward greatly, so that the performance operation unit 400 is made conspicuous and emphasized to the player. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

The door frame 3 tilts the performance operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large semispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her line of sight and presses the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly recognized, and the expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 can be heightened. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 which is large in diameter and bulges forward in a round manner and has approximately the same diameter as the total height of the plate unit 320, when operating the operation button 410, the hand can be moved over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is mounted in a tilted state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be operated satisfactorily even from the front or from the front, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the production operation unit 400 in a state of being suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 for generating vibrations in the lower part of the production operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is startled by pressing the operation button. The production using 410 can be made even more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) extending over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and appeal strongly attracting the interest of the players. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be obtained.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that opens on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the capacity of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his or her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his or her finger on the lower plate opening 326d, Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game and increasing the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The fact that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that can also be made tactilely recognizable.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower outlet for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in front view. That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower tray 322 of the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c. As a result, the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 or the like to the lower tray 322 is immediately discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below as soon as it enters the lower tray 322. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the dollar box through the lower tray 322 is also prevented. can't see This allows the player to have the illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 or the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper tray 321 being full are directly discharged to the cash box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 is erected on the right side of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is obliquely curved to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is directly discharged. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or it can be reflected by the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the ball hole 322a. As a result, while the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is located in the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. (Lower tray first area A1), since it can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is not visible to the player. Game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 or approaches it, the player can feel the vibration caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 forwardly output from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a plate-shaped right side unit 550 projecting greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game parlor, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is there, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around.

Further, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light on the front end and the left and right sides of the plate-shaped right side unit 550 of the door frame, which protrudes greatly forward. In the above, the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing to the players because the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from a lateral direction along the island facilities, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned in front of the machine. can be 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a top inner decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the top inner decorative member 576 are The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 is more concave than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decorative member 576 can be conspicuously emphasized to the player, and the top can be seen to be emphasized. Strong attention can be drawn to the middle decorative member 576 .

By the way, the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other to the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 has a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A speaker 573 is provided, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of a central top middle decorative member 576 through the front of a speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the upper part of the front face of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to the player by allowing the player to recognize at a glance that it is there, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to present to the player a decoration with a sense of unity in the top and bottom in which the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and at the same time, the decoration gives a sophisticated feeling. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction protrude forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 or the like.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. As shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. Thus, the second starting port 2004 is driven so that the game balls can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 according to the result of the ordinary lottery. The movable piece 2004a, and the acceptance of the game ball is possible in any of the first special lottery results or the second special lottery results drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a large prize winning opening 2005.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It has an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable production unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The front structural member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 which is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front structural member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004. from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 includes the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially vertically, the outer side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1008 projects backward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has a plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002 . By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 , the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearwardly from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (the game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. FIG.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1011 is aligned with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are circular holes arranged near the outer circumference and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged near the outer circumference at the lower left portion and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , is equipped with These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5 a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging stepped portions 1115 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging stepped portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110, and has a holding stepped portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and an inside of the holding stepped portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a and extending in the front-rear direction. and a through hole 1122 penetrating through.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the same as the panel holder 1120 . Almost flush with the front surface. Further, the holding stepped portion 1121 is formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 on the front inner peripheral surface thereof. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding stepped portion 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It extends and has a plurality of projecting pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 . By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It protrudes toward and elastically engages with the engaging stepped portion 1115 . The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . The engaging piece 1125 is arranged along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 on the upper side ( center side) by a predetermined amount. By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 , the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the rear lower side of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126. - 特許庁

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1127 is aligned with the notch 1011 of the front structural member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 penetrate the lower full ball path unit 860. Front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front structural member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front structural member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front structural member 1000. 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127 . The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129 .

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 .

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000 . The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the rear lower side of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the cutout portion 1011 of the front structural member 1000 and a cutout portion 1152 which penetrates in the front-view left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and which is open downward, and which is located above the cutout portion 1152 in the vertical direction. and a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000 in the same manner as the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharging portion 1201 that is positioned.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, game ball payout, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Each of the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 is provided as a transparent member so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. there is That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to anti-fraud measures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. Ordinary pattern display 1402 consisting of, normal holding indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 A first special design indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 A number indicator 1404, a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a second start port 2004 A second special reservation number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the big winning opening 2005 A round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is capable of displaying still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves which are open on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into 3010c from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 which enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starter opening unit 2100, the first starter opening 2002 opens upward to a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the big winning opening 2005 receives a plurality of game balls at once ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) extend to the left and right with an acceptable size, and are formed so as to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front in the game area 5a, at the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is directed to the right (game area 5a). center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference except for the lower side, and a game ball hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball which has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released into a frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the game panel 1100 . Also, behind the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the line and housing the performance drive board.

The back unit 3000 includes a back left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable production unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a with a gap therebetween. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. , and a notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 includes a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are released by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and game balls are placed on the obstacle nails. By abutting, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves left and right, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because it is positioned directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting), On the downstream side, the water flows through a region provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 .

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.3 to 10 seconds), it becomes an open state, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 becomes possible. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results is set to four, and even if the game balls pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the amusement arcade side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 sets an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery for the special lottery result that generates a medium hit, a small win, a variable probability win, a reduced time win, etc. is performed. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R big hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time saving (time reduction) hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball is received in the big winning opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 output a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 830. A game ball is paid out to the upper tray 321. - 特許庁Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 can receive the game balls, by making the big winning hole 2005 accept the game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) to accept a game ball. Repeat the opening and closing pattern multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of accepting a game ball, or the opening to the large winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state is set. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the amusement arcade side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and a special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is variably displayed by changing each symbol row in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the drawn special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED flashing time (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates). A longer time is set for the function display unit 1400 than the time until the finalized image is displayed.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 is displayed according to the special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the game can be played by various effects. It is possible to keep the player's interest in the game from declining.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 protruding forward in the door frame 3 can be opened from the outside. When viewed, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 overlap, the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, Since it is possible to show the player a decoration full of decorativeness with a sense of perspective that has never existed before, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing.

In addition, the button lens 411 (operation button 410) is arranged along the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the button lens 411 can be moved by the player's operation using the unit base 431. Since it is supported so as to be movable, when the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g approach or separate. Therefore, due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g), the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g) appear to overlap. can be changed, and the decoration (intersecting mode) by the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g can be changed by the player himself, which entertains the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decorative member 432, a space is formed between them. At this time, the distance between the button lens 411 and the first button decoration portion 411a and the distance between the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the second button inner decoration portion 432g differ greatly, and the button lens 411 is operated. Even in a state in which the player does not move the buttons, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the intersecting state (overlapping condition) between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g changes. It can be shown to the player and can strongly attract the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The inner operation button decorative member 432 on the back side and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized well through the button lens 411, and the player's line of sight is directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the radial decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411 .

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with the second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of polygonal decorations concentrically centered around the center, the button lens 411 can be seen from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to players by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g conspicuous. can.

In addition, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g To make a player's line of sight and interest directed to the door frame side performance display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button inner decorative member 432 by the decoration, and to enjoy the decoration (performance image) of the door frame side performance display device 460.例文帳に追加can be done.

Further, when the LEDs mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are caused to emit light, operation is performed by the light. The button interior decoration member 432 can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. can also entertain players. At this time, light from each LED of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior decoration substrate 436 is emitted by the second button interior decoration portion 432g. In the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436. The first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with light emission by the indirect light diffused by the second button inner decoration portion 432g, while the light emission decoration is performed by direct light from each LED. Since the two-button interior decoration portion 432g is decorated with strong light emission, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with weak light emission. When the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are viewed from the outside while the LEDs of the decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are illuminated, the perspective is further emphasized. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to strongly attract the player's interest by showing the decoration to the player.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 moves to a portion outside the outer circumference of the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 . There is no need to secure a space, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 can be expanded outward to be made as large as possible. can stand out. In addition, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the whole pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative and highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of players by improving its appearance.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, the button lens 411 has a flat shape when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. Compared to the case, the applied impact force is more likely to disperse over the entire button lens 411, so the button lens 411 can be made less likely to break (be less likely to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the breakage of the button lens 411 during the game, which interrupts the game and makes some players feel frustrated and lose interest. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game parlor side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the front through the through hole 111 in the door frame 3. On the unit base 431 of the production operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side, a circular shape of about 15 cm with an outer diameter within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm is attached to the player. , a decorative member 432 inside the operation button that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a door frame side effect display device 460, and the operation button 410. Since a frame-shaped frame unit 415 arranged in the frame is attached, the operation button 410 is as large as possible at a position where the game ball storage tray is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the operation unit 400 can be seen, the player can recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The second button decoration portion 411b is attached to the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 attached to the unit base 431 behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a for luminous decoration and second LEDs 422b and 423b for luminous decoration of the frame side lens 417 are provided, and between the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b Since the frame main body 416 has an inner cylindrical portion 416d for partitioning, and the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f for partitioning the second button decorative portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411 from the button base 413, Light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the central side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the cylindrical portion 416d, the body portion 413a, and the inner extension portion 413f. It is possible to prevent the two-button decorative portion 411b from being illuminated, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b adjacent to each other can be independently decorated with light emission. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc., for the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. In preparation for the substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431, so that the second button decoration portion 411b (operation button 410) Compared to the case where the substrate is provided, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away from the second button decoration portion 411b as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diffused. The button decoration portion 411b can be irradiated. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 422 and 423 are mounted on the unit base 431 as the operation button 410 advances and retreats. The wiring connected to the 423 is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. The player can be entertained with the luminous decoration without any problem, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, since the second button decorative portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460. When viewed, the outer edge of the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is decorated with the second button decoration part 411b, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. The first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b are appropriately illuminated to decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411, from which the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission in various patterns. It is possible to entertain the light emitting effect, the operation of the operation button 410, the effect image by the door frame side effect display device 460, etc., and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decorative portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when executing the player-participation type production, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light emission, thereby attracting the attention of the player to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not decorated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened so that it is positioned backward. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized in a good condition through the transparent button lens 411. Thus, the player can be sufficiently entertained with decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lenses 417, the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are arranged on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. never do. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably blocks the light by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the rear side of the operation button 410 has the second button decorative portion 411b. and the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are located near the end (rear end) of the main body 413 a near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 . , the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and light from entering the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be seen through the transparent button lens 411. It can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the decoration, the light emitting effect, etc., and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration portion 411b is located in front of the outer portion of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Through the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432, the members outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the rear side (deep side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration portion 411b. It is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 . Also, at this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b is increased relative to the outside and rear side of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it becomes very dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members outside and behind the operation button inner decorative member 432 . Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like can be further improved, and the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, it is possible to create a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can be kept from getting bored with various light-emitting effects, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 321 used for the game by hitting the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a is formed. At the same time, the effect operation unit 400 is detachably attached to the front side and the lower part of the upper plate 321 to form the remaining space of the installation space 326j of a predetermined size behind the effect operation unit 400, and the remaining space of the installation space 326j. A portion corresponding to the lower tray first area A1 in the lower tray main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the space, and the portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is arranged in the remaining space of the mounting space 326j from that portion. Since the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached by extending the part, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front, and the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 can be easily conspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 can be seen at the position where the upper and lower trays are arranged vertically in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see the performance operation unit 400 at a glance. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players by making them recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine.

In addition, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower tray 322 from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to prevent the supplied game balls and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from contacting or pressing the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 . Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the production operation unit 400, and the rear side of the production operation unit 400 is not damaged by the game ball. It is possible to prevent the interest of players from being lowered, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the side of the game parlor where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided in the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to prevent game balls from moving to the remaining space side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. , it is possible to prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 is covered by the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the portion of the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is covered by the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the player can easily move the lower tray main body 325 toward the lower tray first area A1 (lower tray opening). 326d) into the lower tray second area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. can be prevented from being injured by contacting the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, and the player can play in a safe state.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400, even if the lower tray covers 340, 340A are subjected to impact, pressure, etc. due to the contact of the game ball, There is no transmission from the covers 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400, and damage to the production operation unit 400 can be reliably prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, since the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is and be discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, so that the game ball is prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 from being damaged, reduce the interruption of the game, and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is tilted. The moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated by climbing the bottom surface. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball contacts the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired only by replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left-right direction bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, and a performance operation unit 400 is detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging portion thereof, and the plate unit cover 326 is separated from the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322. The storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) is provided with a lower tray first area A1 positioned outside the production operation unit 400 in front view and the production operation in front view. Since it has the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j behind the unit 400, the effect operation unit 400 can be conspicuous when viewed from the front. The storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, since the conspicuous effect operation unit 400 can be seen in the portion where the upper tray and the lower tray are visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the player can recognize at a glance that the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing and can strongly attract the interest of the players.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion where the lower plate 322 is opened on the surface of the plate unit cover 326 is small, but the effect is achieved when viewed from the front. A first extension portion 325B, a second extension portion 325C, and a bottom plate cover 340 of the bottom plate main body 325 having the bottom plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the operation unit 400, 340A is provided, game balls can be stored in a range (lower tray second region A2) of the lower tray 322 that is not visible from the front. Therefore, since a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured contrary to the appearance from the front, the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

Further, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension section 325B and the second extension section Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like having different sizes are prepared in advance. , By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of sizes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space behind the mounting space 326j. Since the size of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward projection of the production operation unit 400, the lower plate 322 can be adapted to various production operation units 400 with different rearward projection amounts. The versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a downwardly recessed container shape, and the game ball can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have the cover vertical wall section 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body vertical wall section 325b of the lower tray main body 325, various shapes of the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, etc., various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed on the part where the load of the game balls is increased due to the storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower tray cover 340, 340A will not be pulled away from the lower tray main body 325. It does not work, and can prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off the lower tray main body 325.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is performed such that the game balls are accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and half of the lower plate 322 including a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by a performance operation unit 400 arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since the above is made invisible (hardly visible) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing. In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 makes it difficult to visually recognize the game balls heading from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, it is difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, by the performance operation unit 400, between the bottom plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate ball extraction hole 322a of the bottom plate 322 that guides the game ball from the bottom plate ball supply port 323c to the bottom plate ball extraction hole 322a Since the game balls guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d are made invisible, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the lower tray ball supply port 323c The game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, so that the player can play the game without passing through the lower tray 322. It is possible to give the illusion that the balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box). As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since more than half of the lower tray 322 including the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, etc. is made invisible from the front by the effect operation unit 400, it is likely that the lower tray ball supply port 323c , the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, etc. are located behind the effect operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. In other words, since more than half of the lower tray 322 is wrapped around to the rear of the production operation unit 400, the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 seen from the front. Since it is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Also, in the state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 Since the guide means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball hole 322a, the ball can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged to the bottom of the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , the game ball can be prevented from circulating in the lower tray 322, and the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 can be reliably made invisible from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is immediately released by the ball guiding part 322c or the like without the player noticing it. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in plan view of the lower tray 322 is made invisible from the front by the effect operation unit 400, the size of the lower tray 322 seen from the front is Since the actual bottom plate 322 is more than double the visible size, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls to be stored, like the bottom plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 protruding forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A production operation unit mounting portion 326a for mounting a large production operation unit 400 having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 is provided in the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the horizontal direction of the plate unit 320, and Since the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped rearward, the effect operation unit is installed. The effect operation unit 400 attached to the attachment part 326a can be made to appear to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 can be conspicuous. Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper and lower trays are arranged vertically in a conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to recognize that it is different from the pachinko machine, and has a high appeal. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, and a part of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed. Since the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 (capacity of the lower tray 322) can be sufficiently secured, the player can play while worrying about the lower tray 322 being filled with game balls. It is possible to make the player devote himself to the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322 (dish unit base). 323), the lower tray cover 340, etc. can be made difficult to touch. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive that a sufficient amount of game balls is secured even by touch, and in a state in which the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, Since it can be recognized that many game balls are stored in the game, the player can be given a feeling of satisfaction, and the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player feels the same as the lower tray in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to a player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine, and to reassure the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the performance operation unit 400 while securing a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322, to increase the appeal to the player, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. can be made

In addition, since the lower plate cover 340 covers the sides and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322, his fingertips, etc. can be prevented from being injured by touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326, the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400, etc., and the player can play in a safe state. Also, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326 .

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 is arranged in the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the performance operation unit 400 can be made more conspicuous from the player's side, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be provided, the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 can be made visible, and the decoration and performance of the performance operation unit 400 can be enjoyed to reduce the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine can be used. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when a player accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine plays a game with this pachinko machine 1, the function of the lower tray 322 will not be confused and the same as the conventional one. The game can be played with a feeling of relaxation, and the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the lower tray ball supply opening 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a can be seen from the front. The pachinko machine 1 can be made invisible from the player's side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neater and the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the interest of the player and has a high appealing power.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3, the plate unit 320 protruding forward is A base unit 430 of a performance operation unit 400 attached to a plate unit cover 326 is attached with an operation button interior decoration member 432 decorating the outside of a door frame side performance display device 460 capable of presenting performance to a player. , an operation button 410 having an outer diameter of about 15 cm and a transparent button lens 411 bulging in a direction away from the base unit 430 (outward) at the center so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432, A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 side. , the first button decorative portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like allow the outer edge of the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the inner side (rear side) of the operation button interior decoration member 432 to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432. can be reduced, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the internal operation button decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460, etc., and suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411 a , the second button decoration portion 411 b , the button frame 412 , and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the inner decoration member of the operation button to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the inner decoration member 432 of the operation button. Since it is possible to obscure the outer edge of 432 and the inner side of the operation button 432, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 becomes relatively large by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. , the first button decorative portion 411a and the like can satisfactorily be hidden, so that the large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be embodied without problems while preventing deterioration in appearance. . Therefore, since the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal by strongly attracting the interest of the players. can do.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 side is provided, the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 can be seen obliquely. At this time, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the objects outside the operation button internal decoration member 432 to make them invisible, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 , the surface of the button lens 411 in the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the button base 413 . and a state in which it is inclined with respect to a plane formed by the opening on the front end side (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, a plane perpendicular to the advancing/retreating direction of the operation button 410). As a result, the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form a space between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432. It is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge of the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the inner side of the operation button interior member 432 through the gap, and to reliably achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases. The side effect display device 460 can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device 460 that entertains the player can be easily provided in the operation button 410, so that the game can be played more easily. A pachinko machine 1 that entertains people can be embodied.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with design (decorativeness). can be made to face, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the inner side of the operation button 410, the inner decoration member 432, etc. of the operation button from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the inner decoration member 432 of the operation button, and reduce deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410, etc. can make it look better.

In addition, the button frame 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 covering the entire circumference with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 to the inside. Since the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the gap between the main body portion 413a and the operation button inner decorative member 432 can be closed. It is possible to increase the size, and accordingly, it is possible to easily secure a space for the operation buttons 410 to move, so that they can be moved satisfactorily.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be moved smoothly and easily because there is no directivity in the outer periphery compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is made large, when the player participatory effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since the operation button 410 can be easily touched and pressed, the player can easily participate in the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, which amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 is provided in the operation button 410, the effect image is presented according to the game state, thereby arousing the interest of the player. It is possible to strongly attract the player to the door frame side effect display device 460, and it is possible to entertain the player with the effect image and light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460. The operation can be urged, and the decline in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player-participation type performance and entertaining the player. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be done.

In addition, since the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a), the pachinko machine can be viewed by the player. 1 operation button 410 can be made to immediately recognize that it is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be realized. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 in the operation button 410, and suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decorative portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may be employed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed along the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the button base 413 (main body) protrudes cylindrically from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432. Although the portion 413a) is shown, it is not limited to this, and at least one portion protrudes toward the base unit 430 so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432. It can be anything. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411 . The button base 413 may have decorations at least on the inner wall side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the portion on the left outer side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The bottom plate 322 may be recessed rearward from both the left and right sides of the operation unit 400 and connected to each other at the rear of the production operation unit 400, or may be recessed rearward only from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 and partly You may make it wrap behind the production|presentation operation unit 400. FIG.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved rearward. Although an example of a concave shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be concave like a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is "equipped with an operation device such as an operation dial, a touch panel, etc." , ``equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface'', ``equipped with a decorative body having a decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body'', ``a character in line with the concept of a game machine, Items, logos, scenes (diorama), etc. that are three-dimensionally modeled”, “Characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in line with the concept of the game machine, stickers or prints You may attach members, such as a unit or a panel provided with "the thing given by etc.". Moreover, the member attached to the attachment space 326j (the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400. However, the effect is not limited to this. A dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the operation unit 400 is provided behind the dish unit cover, and an attachment space 326j (or an attachment space 326j) may be used. It should be noted that the front surface of such a plate unit cover should preferably be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in line with the concept of the game machine by means of stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, or the like. .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 as a covering section so as to be difficult to see from the front. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be possible to make the area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be visually confirmed from the front. You may make it difficult.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arranged in an arc shape partially in the circumferential direction. , and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The decoration is not limited to this, and the second inner button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including ovals) centering on the center.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69; FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control section.

The pachinko machine 1 has, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. , and a second control unit SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931 will be described in this order. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that stores various control programs such as a main control program that controls game operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset to be described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system, which will be described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs a signal based on it from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. is entered in 60, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetism detection sensor 4024 attached to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet is supplied to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5, and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or outputs a drive signal to the predetermined output port of the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161, and through the function display unit 1400 first special symbol display 1403 , Second special symbol indicator 1405, first special reservation number indicator 1404, second special reservation number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main control with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting sensor 4002, the second starting sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. For the general winning hole sensor 4020, a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starter sensor 4002, the second starter sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game balls. For this reason, the count sensor 4005 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 4020 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 4020 .

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it sends a signal (main pay ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It outputs to the circuit 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power on. Is output from the payout control board 951, through the main control input circuit 1310b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU1310a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU1310a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Out of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes, as shown in FIG. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting drive signals to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952 d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952 e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 . The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer that monitors the operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud are also built in.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially converts various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout to the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and payout control is started, the payout When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball run-out detection sensor 827 for detecting run-out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. It should be noted that the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will simply be referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification for the sake of the explanation below.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the housing space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls is first transmitted to the handle relay terminal plate 315, the power supply board 931, and then the payout terminal board 315. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the form of serial data at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data. When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the dispensing device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball engage near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, and the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached the preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (electrical connection at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via resistors (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computers installed in the game balls. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. In addition to preventing the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout etc. It is designed to prevent malfunction or failure due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending/returning display unit 330. This signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 , the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 , and this signal is input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

In addition, the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

On the part surface of the frequency display plate 365, a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the return button 329, functioning as the ball lending/returning display section 330. A segment indicator is implemented. A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the part surface of the degree display plate 365 . The display mode of the segment display and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d are configured to be visually recognizable from the player, so that the player and the game store clerk can confirm the display mode and the light emission mode. .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (turned ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is transmitted through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. input to the CR unit 6.

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 is composed of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the segment displays of the three digits are sequentially driven one by one by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The lighting of the digit segment indicators is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error in the CR unit 6 . The ball rental/return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a single-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the designated single-digit segment display. segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays are displayed. The contents indicated by the light emission of the vessel can be visually recognized from the outside.

A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the degree display plate 365 at a position adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and the light emission mode can be visually recognized from the outside. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 through the current limiting resistance mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the machine for renting game balls, etc. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power board]
Next, the power board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control unit 953 that controls shooting by the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 680 and ball sending control by the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250 .

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (shooting) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 951 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the ball launching device 680 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For such a first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, a performance display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side performance display device 1600 and a door. While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are controlled by rotating the knob. and a volume adjustment volume 4140a that is adjusted by operation.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and light emission modes such as various LEDs and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing effect flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e ".) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time during which the power is immediately restored after an instantaneous power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a fixed period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the effect selection left button 331, the detection signal from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the effect selection right button 332, and the operation of the press operation button 410 A detection signal from the press detection switch for detection is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized performance operation unit detection data is sent to the door-side serial transmission circuit. , through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, is input to the serial I/O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a comprises a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. It reads and writes various data via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading and writing are performed with respect to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. to read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period (until the timer expires), it is reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a decision notice lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state has been decided. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. , noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has an important meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LEDs is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

Peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to volume control volume 4140a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and from mute to maximum volume. can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above.
As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. and a track number for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a backup area stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to be cleared to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as an object. The names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly explained here. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed every time, "Bank 0", "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. It is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies is set. Based on the detection signals from the various detection switches that detect the operation of the production selection left button 331, the production selection right button 332, various information obtained by the operation of the operation button 410 (for example, the production selection left button 331, the production selection right operation history information created based on detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the operation of the button 332 and the operation button 410, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak contains an effect display. When the drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the peripheral control board 1510 and judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it is output based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between the connections between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is transferred to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac as effect backup information (1ms) each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This page is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the first backup area 1511cb has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for management as a page. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the power-on, it instructs the start of the effect). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, or the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is now displayed. By operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, and the operation button 410 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, when a jackpot game state occurs History, etc.) can be cleared, but the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 1511db to a second backup area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. In "(SRAM)", various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are drawn. Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a for control, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is a forced switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal, and is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input; It has The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores image data used for displaying images displayed in the display areas of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Image data, background image data used to display a background image, tone adjustment image data used to display a volume adjustment image, standby image data used to display a standby image, and the like are stored as character data.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting various control data from the control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the top dish side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460. frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer method" is to hold drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

When the above-described sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, and the operation button 410 by shifting to a setting mode. In the setting mode, for example, the operation of the effect selection left button 331 decreases the sub-volume value, the operation of the effect selection right button 332 increases the sub-volume value, and the operation button 410 determines the sub-volume value.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 4140a with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is amplified to the master volume value, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. Synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, the sub-volume value of the track containing the sound effect is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track containing this sound effect, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the Synthesize the sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume, and change the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the informational sound It amplifies to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sounds that actually flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound that is progressing according to the schedule data for the application is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a (at this time, the left effect selection button 331, When the production selection right button 332 or the operation button 410 is operated to shift to the setting mode and is adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 It is designed to flow from

In this way, when the performance sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the informational sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point where the information sound started to flow, but continues to flow according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, the positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are synthesized by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 to form one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , the green video signal, and the blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronous signal, and a vertical synchronous signal. and a clock signal, and serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it is very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported to the main body frame 4 so that it can be freely opened and closed, the lock unit 700 provided along the open side of the main body frame 4 is opposite to the closed side. Various boards and door frames provided on the main body frame 4 side, such as a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, for example. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the 3 side. However, on the closing side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged. Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 is arranged in which a power board 931 and the like to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facilities are integrated into a unit. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even if a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" is adopted by Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, such a hardware configuration alone will not cause damage due to electrostatic discharge of game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data different from normal data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wire length for sending the drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration Therefore, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be reduced by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. However, if the defect occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the side of the body frame 4, various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 and various wirings provided on the side of the door frame 3' can be connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, The power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the wiring patterns for video transmission are formed separately from the power wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and among the harnesses, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which is provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and will be described later. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 . The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

Door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and if it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to convey that fact. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the effect display device on the door frame side. Please call the store clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and a notification sound to convey that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree and reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

Thus, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date and time of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332 and the operation button 410, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. In the setting mode, for example, the operation of the effect selection left button 331 reduces the brightness, the effect selection right button 332 increases the brightness, and the operation button 410 determines the brightness. When the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, or the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, operating the left effect selection button 331, the right selection right button 332, or the operation button 410 during the period when the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is changed. A screen for performing is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, and the operation button 410 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be adjusted. It is possible to adjust the desired brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in luminance that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the currently set luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is the correction information acquired by adding 5%. and lights up, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., which are output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the player is notified that there is a high possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state. etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, the left effect selection button 331 and the right effect selection button By operating 332 or the operation button 410, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, or the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, operating the left effect selection button 331, the right selection right button 332, or the operation button 410 during the period when the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is changed. A screen for performing is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, and the operation button 410 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, or the operation button 410, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. ing. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, and the operation buttons There are two ways to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of 410 . Since the volume control volume 4140 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can turn the knob of the volume control volume 4140a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, and the operation button 410 are operated within a predetermined time, or the customer waits for a customer, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. is performed, if the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332 or the operation button 410 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, and the operation button 410 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, if the hall clerk feels that the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is too low to hear the music and sound effects, the player can press the left button of the effect selection button. 331. The production selection right button 332 or the operation button 410 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the left button 331, the right effect selection button 332, and the operation button 410, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, and the operation button 410, and can play the game by sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time. If the player who has been playing feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game presses the left effect selection button 331 and the right effect selection button 331. By operating the button 332 or the operation button 410, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 931 includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 680 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 .

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a of the firing control section 953 and to the power generating circuit 935d.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

A shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 953 uses the +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and shoots the game ball with a launch strength (launch strength) that matches the rotational position of the handle 302. While adjusting the drive current for hitting (shooting) toward the ball and controlling the output to the shooting solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 A feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and performs control to feed the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball launching device 680 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d converts the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to +5V DC (+5V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (+12V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned to the payout control board 951 and then again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 in the forward direction due to the diode MD0. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the memory contents are retained. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The three types of voltages +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, are supplied to the peripheral They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, for example. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in a game parlor (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. In addition, +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310, either.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 76(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be more accurately grasped than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and noise components removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. are smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25 V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is connected to the vibration sensor 2405, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal of , an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and error cancellation after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

It should be noted that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952 a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21 to which +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of resistor MR21. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when +24V is interrupted or instantaneously interrupted, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). A logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q is inverted in logic to be negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a D input terminal 1D terminal and a clock input terminal 1CK terminal that are both grounded (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the voltage is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to a CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting to be output in the main control side power-on processing, which will be described later, performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as the payout power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control board 951 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side to turn on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510.

In this way, a main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is issued to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is transmitted to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 μF) shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND). As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off by turning off the MTR50, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 as a communication voltage for main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being omitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate command failures immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. It is an output figure. First, the payout control filter circuit 951a will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board 1310, and various output signals to the external terminal board 784 will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end grounded (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is grounded (GND) and the capacitor PC4 which is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 935d of the power source substrate 931 shown in FIG. Since it is designed to be supplied to the payout control board 951 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying VBB. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, and peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor PC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. The payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is connected to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power failure notice signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. circuit, handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3a. Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4, the switch is turned ON (conducting), and the door frame 3 is connected to the body frame 4. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. terminal and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and this signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5 V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 on. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3b. Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame open switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR23, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR24 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage variations from the body frame open switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit made up of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit made up of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off to turn off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3c. Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 has one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor PR40. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an output power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage notice through the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above through the wiring (harness), and the output power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power outage notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3d. Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 is input to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 . The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 951. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. FIG.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is inputted to the payout control board 951, while the storage space is filled with the stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board 951. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and having a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the payout control board. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path through which the detection signal is transmitted is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the accommodation space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of game balls stored. When the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC 50 to remove the noise component so that such a problem does not occur. adopted.

[10-2-3e. Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end and the other end of the capacitor PC41. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the subsequent stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact forming the operation switch 954 repeats ON/OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel an error after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM is cleared, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and error cancellation is performed when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a judges that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing Motor Drive Circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through a Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the payout motor 834 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG generated from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 80 through ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible, is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC74 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power outage notice signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which notifies completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal described above, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca with a payout ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal, and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 provides, in addition to the above-described main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Jackpot information including a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big win information output signal and a 2 round big win information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots with two rounds (2-round jackpot ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round big wins and the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even when the player starts playing, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal as the big win information output signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2-round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15-round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. do not have.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also in the state where the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from generation to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when the 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement arcade (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. As shown in FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is generated when the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened, which the player does not normally do during the game. The prize ball number information output signal is a signal to inform that each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 70 reaches 10 balls. Yes, the main prize ball number information output signal is applied to game balls that enter various prize winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A 15-round big win information output signal indicates that a 15-round big win is occurring every time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls reaches 10. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the probability fluctuation information output signal is a state that probability fluctuation is occurring. , and the special symbol display information output signal is the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 End (stop) The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol fluctuation display has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. is a signal that conveys the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that a time saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 60 or the second starting opening 2004, every time a game ball enters, it is a signal to notify that effect.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. It is designed to be output from the terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are open, which is unlikely to occur during a normal game. Yes, and in this embodiment, output is made from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can be grasped that the body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send it to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round big win information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to inform that every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls to be put out. can do. In addition, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering various prize winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. The signals are output at intervals of 0.128 seconds so that the signals are not continuous.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 951 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. can be prevented from being connected to each other. Various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center toward the right side, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main winning ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is, for example, when game balls stored in the prize ball tank 802 run out in a state where game balls are not supplied to the prize ball tank 802 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. 2, when a 15-round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 802 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so that the game balls cannot be paid out ( Also, for example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 70 reaches ten. Since it is a signal that conveys that every time, when game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 outputs a winning ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 802 to identify the position of the clogged ball (or, Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball or the position of the jammed ball and resolving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even in a situation where the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress. When the payout state is restored, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control is performed even though the 15-round big win has ended and the 15-round big win has not occurred. The circuit board 951 outputs a winning ball number information output signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, and outputs the winning ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. will be conveyed to As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , a problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the payout control board 951 outputs the prize ball number information output signal. As a signal, the main control board 1310 is based on the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the signal is output via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal plate 784. , to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging or ball jamming in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state are prevented. The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. It mainly comprises a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for drawing in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 . FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for drawing in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. As shown in FIG.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are sent as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits as described above, , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signals from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is sent to the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effects, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and the capacitor SDC2 is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power supply line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the effect display drive board 4450. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door. A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals, ie, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal for notifying whether the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Upon input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 which are storage trays (a device that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H. , 2 prize balls are specified, and 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game parlor (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and command 2EH designates a prize ball. 15 spheres are specified. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H designates a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the transmission of the command, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Toku-zu 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of Toku-zu 1 synchronization production, the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and time saving state. In addition, in the probability and time saving state, a low probability time saving state that indicates that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability state that indicates that it is a time saving state and a low It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal game state , low-probability non-working hours are set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time during which patterns are variably displayed as compared with a non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stop-displaying in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery to be described later in a predetermined time is obtained. While increasing the number of times of stop display compared to the non-time saving state, furthermore, the period of opening and closing the movable piece 2004a which the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60 has is compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state) By increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. Compared to the non-time saving state, the number of times to determine whether to open and close the movable piece 2004a is increased, and when the movable piece 2004a is to be opened and closed, the period of the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 2004a is lengthened. It is a state in which the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the starting port 2004 is increased.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display device 1405 of. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 N-th display command is the start during the opening of the big win 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 60). During or start of opening of the N-th round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is the start of closing the large winning opening 1 between rounds (opening of the starting opening unit 2100). 69), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from 0 to 10 has been counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning design display command It instructs the display of pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit or opening start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and big winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during a small hit is detected , and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (of the starter unit 2100 When the large winning opening 2005 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is transmitted when the large winning opening 1 is closed (start closing the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 and when the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the jackpot is opened (when the jackpot 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened) ).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small winning), The small hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle and large winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is , Sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category is composed of a command named Power-on State and Main Control Return Destination at Power-on. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on), the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information to instruct when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). .) In the above-mentioned, low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state, low probability non-short working hours state, and high probability non short working hours state Information that indicates whether to return in which state (probability and short working hours state) , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which work belongs to which copyright, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol is changed is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited and a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As for the transmission timing of the power-on state command and the main control recovery target command at power-on, when the main control board power is turned on ) is sent to Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time processing described later is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands with the names of normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation regarding the device 1402. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, as described above, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state High probability It consists of a time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state ( As a normal game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal design fluctuation time elapses (normal design determination), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal design win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric role effect relates to the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, which is opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. , it consists of commands named opening per normal map, opening display per normal map, and ending per normal map. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern opening command is for instructing the general pattern opening start, and the general pattern open display command indicates that the general pattern is open during start (the movable piece 2004a is opened in the left and right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). , or when expanding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal per pattern opening command is transmitted at the start of per normal per pattern opening, and the general power open display command is transmitted at the time of normal power opening (movable piece 2004a moves left and right by driving start solenoid 2107) When expanding to), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the winning opening is entered except during the big winning (when the condition device is in operation). is detected by the count sensor 4005). It instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality. 4005 or the like, it instructs the start of disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display. It instructs the start of the magnetism detection switch abnormality notification when a Further, when an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command for instructing start of notification of vibration detection switch abnormality is transmitted.

Further, the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the door frame closing command instructs the door open notification, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . It instructs the end of the door open notification when it is in the state of being opened. On the other hand, the body frame open command is shown in FIG. When the body frame is in the open state, the body frame closing command instructs the body frame open notification. When the door is in a closed state, it instructs to end the notification of opening the body frame.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (during operation of the condition device), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 It is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display is divided into commands named Frame status 1 command (equivalent to error occurrence command), Error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to error cancellation command) and Frame status 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration board shown in FIG. 72). This is for inspecting various substrates such as the driving amplifier substrate 194).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command. is still used for variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reservations)), and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60) The second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normal symbol 1 reservation 0 to 4 It conveys the number of balls (the number of balls (retained number) that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60 and are not yet used for the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400). There is, and the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is read ahead before the special symbol 1 reservation is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 It is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display device 1403 based on, the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is the special symbol 2 hold Before being used for variable display of special symbols in the device 1405, it prefetches and instructs the start of the look-ahead effect to announce the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is issued at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the first starting entrance 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting entrance sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit to notify that effect by voice, and fluctuate The shortened operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation has been fixed for the specified number of times (after the stop period has passed), and the high probability end designation command is sent in the case of "high probability N times". It is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested and the change is confirmed (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is when the number of special symbol 1 operation pending balls changes (the game ball at the first start port 2002 has entered the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbols. When the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations, the special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 When the number of pending balls in operation changes (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where there is a pending number that has not yet been used for variable display of special symbols. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reservations increases, the number of reservations is reduced by using the second special symbol display 1405 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations. ), and the normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 changes the normal symbol) In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal pattern display device 1402 is used for variable display of normal patterns. When the number of reservations has decreased), the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls increases (when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the number of reservations increases ), and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead performance command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls increases (when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued when the starting opening wins (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 transmit mainly voice to notify that effect. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not announce it by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. Frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection, and unconnected CR. represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for ball catching, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. An error sets bit 3 (B3) to the value 1, and a retry error sets the value 1 to bit 4 (B4). Here, the "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is malfunctioning. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 in B0, a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is provided with "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, at the time of frame state change, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. Reach determination random number for use in determination, shown in FIG. 69, the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1403 and a second special pattern display device 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot pattern. A random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 when generating the small winning game state. A small-hit symbol random number for use in determining a small-hit symbol and a small-hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the small-hit symbol random number are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece 2004a of the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per pattern for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and the normal value for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. Random numbers for symbol variation display patterns and the like are prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit judging random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control internal hardware random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first receives a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (a clock signal output from the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total is stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this extracted ID code, performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per determination. It is a mechanism that executes and sets this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 2004a can not be opened and closed to generate a game state in which a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

92 and 93, the above-described main control program performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage section).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts clocking, and the watchdog timer clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control program performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power failure clear processing, first, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power failure clear process, first, by starting to output a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with the logic being LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Subsequently, in power failure clear processing, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is Determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the logic HI, and passes through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, is LOW in logic, it outputs a power failure notice signal from its 1Q terminal, which is its output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. This is done depending on whether or not the Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by judging that it is an instruction to clear the RAM.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. do). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When it is determined in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing to be described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as when power is restored ( step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the term “recovery of power” refers to the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processes being performed. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, the main control program writes all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a executes processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs RAM clearing and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal design per determination. Perform an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and this fixed value is set to the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state by hardware In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to latch and acquire the random number, the hard random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a high-speed predetermined clock signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. A random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), FIG. A power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, even if the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored. be. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control program issues an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing is started. Execution of game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt will be regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing based on the concept of time-sharing to use the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Triggered by the input, the RAM clear processing is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear processing is regulated even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( Game control side normal operation control means), handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced as a game memory unit for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Main control built-in RAM (and payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit) function as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the game ball It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear processing of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. , 2nd special reservation number display 1406, normal design display 1402, normal design memory display 1188, state display 1401, round display 1407 etc. stop the drive signal which is output (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting the RAM access prohibition, access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) becomes impossible, so that updating of the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, in the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22, and subsequent processing is performed. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, charges the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the power from the pachinko island facility will be restored by applying +5V charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power has been cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control-side main process or a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed without fail.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts to count, and immediately before reaching the waiting time. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in hardware such as the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 , the interrupt initialization is performed, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and even if the hall clerk or the like does not express the intention of clearing the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the processing at the time of power failure on the main control side, which is composed of an infinite loop. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64). Since the determination is made, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when power is restored from the main control MPU 1310a and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if a power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating the determination, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. When the timer cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then step S52 It is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the part provided by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and the power supply on the main control side The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are covered by hardware so that the interruption process is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, power is turned on (power restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this, a power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. As described above, this main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. there is Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and the information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, the attacker Driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the state in which the big winning port 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a is shifted to the state in which it is opened.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2005a, for example, when finishing the 4th round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the large prize winning port 1 closing display command instructing the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, start of closing between rounds of the large winning port 2005 of the starting port unit 2100) When the information is transmitted to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a. A 5th big winning gate opening display command for instructing the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the 5th round of the big winning gate 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. becomes.

Further, for example, a screen (for example, a screen indicating that the movable piece 2004a is expanded) indicates that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. to the player) is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2107 and the display shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the built-in control RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. , the movable piece 2004a shifts from a state in which it rises substantially vertically to a state in which it spreads in the left-right direction.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and can be returned, it becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen for telling the presence of the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. In spite of this, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the state command at power-on and the command to return to main control at power-on classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member 2005a. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the state of ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2005a. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored, and For example, in the above-described example, in the state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then it is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen (for example, "movable piece Please play the game so that the game ball enters the opened starting hole.” It is possible to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored by displaying it in the display area. As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the state command at power-on and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored in As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the main control return destination command at power-on is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on status command is shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to perform RAM clearing, information to instruct that effect, and when power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is (Including when the power is restored.) Return in any state (probability and time saving state) from the above-mentioned low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-working time saving state, and high probability non working time saving state and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the copyright of any work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs in a state where the game is played 30 times or 70 times.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register bank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric auditors control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are sent to the payout control board 951. Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the receiver has been received normally is input. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program detects, for example, the detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 60, a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. Vibration sensor 2405 for detecting a fraudulent act of vibrating the game machine shown in 69 and the fact that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. , and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start hole 2002, the detection from the second start hole sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start hole 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start-up winning command shown in FIG. 90 and classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starter sensor 4002, a starter winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 4004. Then, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 2001, and a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 2005. , a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004. , and a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are read first when this switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, , respectively are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 for the first time. False detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc., by performing a total of two readings by performing two readings for comparison from the third time to the third time, and two readings for the second to fourth times. can be avoided, so the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 is increased. be able to.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win-lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up to the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. When the number of scheduled game balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 60, a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is generated. has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payout control board 951 does not receive the payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command normally, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951 . If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the excess number of balls will In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is calculated. is reached, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state displays shown in FIG. to send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954 . In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by state display in FIG. 90 (frame state 1 command, error release The navigation command and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error generation command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input in the non-jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005), etc. , a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (random number) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this acquired random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. And the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, whether or not (Determine whether or not to generate a big hit game state (referred to as "special lottery")), take out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the big hit pattern, and store it in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the probability variation per determination value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control), and the built-in main control When judging whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot judgment random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start sensor 4002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In some cases, create various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning performance shown in FIG. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, and store it in the output information storage area described above as the output information do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1) classified as related to big win shown in FIG. Closed display command, big winning opening 1 count display command, big winning ending command, and big winning pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member of the big winning mouth 2005 shown in FIG. 2005a is set to output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the number of times (round) that the big winning port 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times. , the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the output of a lighting signal to the state indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of probability variation is lit in a predetermined color, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th division, the 1st division, the 2nd division, and the 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol memory display 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2004a is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece 2004a is expanded in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received into the second start opening 2004. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player. become a state. This determination and the corresponding normal symbol variation display pattern are determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, and various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the above-described transmission information storage area, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 so as to light the normal design display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2004a, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the value of the taken-out normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal symbol per determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol is based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A variable display pattern is determined, various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 has been normally received, the payout control board 951 Or, when in the jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2005a of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 2004a. In addition to outputting the main prize number information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal , Information output information during time saving, various information (game information) signals related to the game such as the start winning prize information output signal are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands categorized as related to big wins (for example, when detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 (see FIG. 8), a big winning hole based on a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) Large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, as shown in FIG. Various commands classified as information display (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main-circumference serial data. When the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. , as main peripheral serial data, status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes a power-on state command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, and the game information is read according to this game information. various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (rendering control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the clocking, thereby preventing the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information that has executed the backup process as a return destination for the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. 89, which instructs the driving state of the starting solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical driving sources, by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. It is designed to be able to output to That is, the main control board 1310 is the main controller in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), a power-on state command and a power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Send to Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Effect display can be performed in the display area of . As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the device is out of order because the player sees the device in the broken state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data constitutes the power-on state command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to the inspection equipment in the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of special symbol changes is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[15-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, and the process of setting the wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs from the main control board 1310, shown in FIGS. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 1fr) are compared, and effect backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. ) are compared, and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared. When the contents match, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr) which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , to Bank0 (1 ms), and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms), are copied back to perform a hot start. In other words, when there is no match), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Write 0 forcibly to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be cleared to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process to be described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 etc. is operated based on the detection signal from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. Performances by multiple LEDs and multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and performances by music, sound effects, etc. that match the various performances from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization of .

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into differential serial data with a positive signal and a negative signal, and sends the data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the first screen data is stored in the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the head light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the drive data to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler updating process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the performance control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, starting mouth winning command for instructing the start of the starting mouth winning effect, the number of normal symbols pending Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of the pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of starting reservations changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present. In addition, this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a body frame open command, a body frame close command, a door open command or a door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame open command , door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the second error cancellation command), frame status 1 command (equivalent to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands classified, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. It extracts from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of anomalies can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly before the anomaly is resolved after the occurrence of one anomaly. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side Effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), lamp (effect device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside ( error reporting means). By doing so, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RTC acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program stores in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). The look-ahead effect control process executes the process related to the look-ahead effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when receiving a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or a special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command (hereinafter referred to as "prefetch effect command"), for executing the prefetch effect Make settings. Details of the look-ahead effect control processing will be described later.

The look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when the game ball wins the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 . In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a prefetch effect command, a prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the look-ahead effect control process, if the look-ahead effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether to execute the look-ahead effect based on the contents of the look-ahead effect command. That is, in this embodiment, even when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to actually execute the prefetch effect.

Then, when the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the state of the pending display of the starting memory displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed as the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect). In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed to change the state of the pending display each time the starting memory for the preceding execution of the variable display is consumed. do. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the case where the number of starting memories that have not been digested is equal to or greater than a certain number, or the case where there is a high degree of expectation that the outcome of the variable display game based on the starting memories to be read ahead will be a big win. may

In addition to changing the display mode of the pending display, the contents of the look-ahead effect include display effects such as character display and background image change, display effects in the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission effects such as lamps, etc. It may be a performance by voice output from a speaker, a performance such as the movement of a movable body, or the like.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the effect display device on the game board side. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 4140a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁Control the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and transmit the audio data as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low volume, the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in a first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs a peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the second backup area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac is specified to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db are copied in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed with the . When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 96 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control section steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 of the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, the effect that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, ie, a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 95, will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is started by the 1ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by 1 (step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf are transferred 1 byte each to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created. 73 is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are transferred byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device acquires the frequency of failure and the failure occurrence state between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. 460 drawing state can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank 0 (1 ms) which is a backup target includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah. , and the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored as effect backup information (1 ms) in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb. The control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously stored in units of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are successively transferred to Bank4 ( 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit will not be affected by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt. After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510 . In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the receive buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are Stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral controller reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 75, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 microseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are extinguished, and so on. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac Then, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc. 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copying is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[15-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creating process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. This signal is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal (normal data). predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the transmission of the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted to the highest bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. , toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since a value of 1 or 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[15-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of connection failure determination processing executed as one processing of the warning processing in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

72, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. FIG. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal output to notify that effect. and to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 (step S1522). This determination is to determine whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in step S1522. (to count the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is designed to restore the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

In step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative count determined as a state in which a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the calculated cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not established when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0 respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

[15-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. and to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the schedule data for screen generation among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is being activated (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the order of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is indicated. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. When performance is completed along with the data and updating of the pointer is all completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation has not started. In addition, in this determination, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the time period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be judged based on the schedule data for screen generation whether or not it is a period of time, and the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. When the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the game board side effect display device 1600 is not in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simple state of waiting for customers), This routine is terminated as it is.

In step S1540, when the effect is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine ends as it is. When the presentation is completed and the pointer is completely updated, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 (step S1542). 101. As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set in step S1522 of the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (to count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then this process is performed as it is. While terminating the routine, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG is set when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. is set to 0 when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of , does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the signal for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is output. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 . This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is executed. (step S1548) and terminate this routine. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. process to draw to For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message saying "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state are displayed. During the period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing processing to display in the display area of the board side effect display device 1600, an information sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.") is repeated from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Do the flow process. At this time, it is also possible to carry out a process of turning on all the LEDs for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 .

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the unit steady processing etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on time processing shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 is 1 round to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), when game balls enter the big winning opening 2005 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and every time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, from the main control board 1310 Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that left decorative symbols are displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and middle decorative symbols are displayed in the center. , and on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed even in the design or the second special design. When the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern become translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the middle decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design correspond to the stopped displayed design. The left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and started to be displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are started to be variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and are stop-displayed, are synchronized.

Peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 Upon receipt of a command from the main control board 1310 to convey the result of the special lottery, the game board shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is to be output to the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the data is displayed according to the schedule data for screen generation. Since the effect is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design is started. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process is such that the routine is forcibly terminated.

As a result, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the communication check counters CC-CNT are counted until the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the (connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is determined to be in a state of failure even once, the SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are connected. and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. There is a problem with the side effect display device. Please call the store clerk." In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d. display.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control section shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the hour process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated in the scheduler update process, and the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the power supply to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine ends as it is, while the communication check counter When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT is reached. If not, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and terminates the routine. That is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC 1512d are displayed. If there is even one failure in the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number determined to be present does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred in the door frame side effects display device. Please call the store clerk." The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is validated.

The variable display of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design is started in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and is stopped, and the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed again. During the interval period until is started, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are activated. A state in which a failure occurs in the connection with the receiver IC SDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it reaches (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A notification process is performed by displaying a message "There is a problem with the effect display device on the door frame side. Please call a clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), the left decorative design and the middle decorative design are displayed because the schedule data for screen generation is being activated as described above. , and until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if there are times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display processing of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then the display is stopped, and the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed again. In the interval period until the start of the variable display of the pattern, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is validated. On the other hand, during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 to the stop display, the door frame side production transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is because the result of the stop display of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that the player is most interested in, and the player will benefit. Since the player can determine whether or not the jackpot game state in which the Then, until the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise etc. and is not correct. Even if it becomes a state where drawing is not possible, instead of interrupting the production in the middle and recovering to a state where drawing can be performed correctly, left decorative patterns, middle decorative patterns, and By stop-displaying the right decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the customer waiting state. This is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing a demonstration. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of execution, it is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals that have been differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The forced switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection so as to transmit the two signals when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . When the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has a different data format. Output to the control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and tells the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no trouble has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a trouble has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 assuming that a trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputting a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no failure in the door frame side effect display device 460. When the signal is not input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is malfunctioning. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning, the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection recovery processing of FIG. 102 can be executed as notification processing. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the fact by executing the notification process. A hall clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not the door frame side performance display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without much trouble. ing. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without much effort.

In addition, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for door frame side effects. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be received normally, the receiver IC SDIC0 receives the image due to a communication failure between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data is abnormal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, generates a connection confirmation signal indicating the start of transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems during image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the problem. It's like Therefore, by finding and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When normal reception is not possible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication problem occurrence signal, to indicate that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. This generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a quickly discovers a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the hall clerk or the like or directly inform the hall clerk or the like who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk or the like can be notified when the trouble occurs. You can start working on resolving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and elimination of the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the side effects receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication failures during image communication when the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of accumulation does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , can be output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication problem can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is generated to validate the LOCKN signal and eliminate the communication failure during image communication. The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d sends a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to inform the start of transmission to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and plays the game. , the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect stops outputting the connection confirmation signal. (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It's like Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output a connection confirmation signal, which is a signal for resolving a problem, only during the period in which the game is not progressing by starting and displaying a stop display, the communication problem can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and stops displaying. Only during the period in which the progress of the game is not executed, when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 (disturbance of the image) Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 restarts and ends the progress of the game (every time (interval period) between timing K1 and timing K2), it can be made to go in the direction of elimination.

Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 . The main control board 1310 includes a first start port 2002 and a second start port 2002, which are start regions where game balls shot by the ball shooting device 680 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 are provided in the game area 5a. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the ball has entered the starting hole 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is mounted with a payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball command output from the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has a main control built-in RAM, and the main control built-in RAM can store game information even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, has a payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an operation switch 954 . When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game information stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. In order to output the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within the period during which the payout control unit power-on processing is performed from the time of power-on, the payout control built-in RAM A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), an error that occurred regarding the dispensing device 830 is detected. It also has an error cancellation function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal for cancellation to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor. be.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information about is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the operation is performed within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on, A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. When operated after the period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the payout device 830 An error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. Since it has both functions, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, respectively, by operating one operation switch 954 . Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error cancellation function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control of the game progress and effects will be summarized below.

The main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the pachinko machine 1 as a whole, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the game board side effect display device 1600 (decorative patterns, background images, characters, display images such as characters, etc.) based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310. ) and various members that contribute to production (production operation unit 400, movable members, etc.).

In the main control board 1310, a special symbol process process is performed each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special symbol process processing, first, the first and second start opening winning processing is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and when it is determined that it has won, the corresponding special symbol side Processing for increasing the number of reservations by 1 is performed.

When the first/second starting opening winning process is finished, if the process flag is "0", the fluctuation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and after memorizing the result of this jackpot determination (hitting or losing, its type, etc.) , update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the process flag is "1" when the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the stored result of the big hit determination and the current game state. After determining and setting a pattern (fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the special pattern to the stop display, etc.) and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, losing pattern, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is "2" when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the changing process is executed. In this fluctuation process, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 Stop the variable display. After that, when the result of the big hit determination stored in the variation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big win determination stored in the change start process is not a big win (loss). , the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process is restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is "3" when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2005a is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the type of the jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process is restarted.

As the variation pattern, a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, the game board side effect display device 1600 It is possible to determine the type of production pattern that appears in. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation, a variation pattern for loss reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The big win variation is a change that is performed when the result of the judgment of the big win is a big win, and in the game board side performance display device 1600, after the ready-to-win performance, the variable display of the decorative pattern finally causes the big win pattern to be fixed and stopped. A production that develops like this is executed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. After that, an effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is finally developed so that the missing symbols are fixed and stopped. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is not determined to perform the reach in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the game board side effect display device 1600 performs the reach effect. After a short period of time, an effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the missing symbols are finally fixed and stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side. In addition, it may be configured so that a small hit occurs as a result of the big hit determination. In this case, a variation pattern for small hit variation is selected as the variation pattern, and variation corresponding to the variation pattern for small hit variation is performed. Finally, it is preferable that the small winning symbol is fixed and stopped.

The peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby executing the variation display of the decorative symbols based on the variation pattern in the game board side effect display device 1600. making it possible to In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 changes the aspect of the effect display (background or reserved image) in the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, executes display related to the degree of expectation, or performs effect display. Control is performed to change the mode (display mode or action mode) in the operation unit 400 or to operate the movable member such as the back-bottom movable effect unit 3100 or the like.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires operation information for the operation button 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the center accessory 2500, and can also execute control related to presentation according to these information.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), the random number for judging the first big hit is obtained from the random number counter. The first start opening passage processing such as storing this in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( Second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big-hit execution flag indicating that the big-hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times. Control to the jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) After that, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 16 times to control to a 16R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variable jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 8 times to control to the 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, it is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated twice.

In this embodiment, both the game ball that has passed through the left side of the center role 2500 and the game ball that has passed through the right side of the center role 2500 may enter the big winning hole 2005. A game area 5a is configured. It should be noted that only the game ball that has passed through the left side of the center accessory 2500 may enter the big winning hole 2005 . Alternatively, only the game ball that has passed the right side of the center accessory 2500 can enter the big winning hole 2005 .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in a situation where time-saving control is executed, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting, and in situations where time-saving control is not executed, left-handed hitting is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. It is advantageous for those who In the left-handed state, even if the jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the reception of the game ball into the first start port 2002, the jackpot game state (generally open for a long time of 8 rounds at maximum) 1000 game balls can be acquired) only occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2004, the probability is about 50% (the allocation rate of the winning species ), 16 rounds of long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained) are executed, and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot Therefore, when the ball is shifted to the right-handed state, it can be expected to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than when the left-handed state is used.

In the big hit control process, when starting the opening control of such a big winning hole 2005, first, the process of starting the operation of the condition device, the process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after such opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, as shown in FIG. 110, a high probability flag , Execute each set processing of the time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109 to be described later. It is set when the big hit game state based on the probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) is ended, and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) is reset by

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot game state It is set when ending the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B), and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without being elected to the jackpot after the occurrence of the low-probability time-saving state, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation number counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbols after the variation number counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 to be described later. It is updated (for example, counted up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when starting a big hit game state based on.

Also, if the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the process of step S5236, whether or not the small hitting executing flag indicating that the small hitting game state is controlled is set. determine whether And as a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, small hit control processing (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, the process of opening the big winning opening 2005 only for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time saving flag, a time saving Each set processing such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(A), no small win is won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small hit running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for the second big hit determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special design 2nd special design process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol in the pending state (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Only the lottery for the random number for judging the second big hit is performed continuously without interruption (priority execution), regardless of the pending status of the lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player maintains hitting (right hitting) of the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) Only by doing so, only the lottery (judgment processing) for the random number for judging the second big hit can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. The variable display of the special symbols may be started in the order in which the starting winnings have occurred. In this case, a table is provided to store data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occurred, and from the stored data, which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used to start the execution of the variable display. should be determined.

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the processing of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control The main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for judging the big hit, random number for judging the reach, random number for the big winning symbol, random number for the variation display pattern) from the random number counter. get.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is its maximum value (upper limit value ) (step S5242). In the processing of this step S5242, when it is determined that the number of pending first special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (judgment processing for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. Therefore, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

First, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 addition). Then, as the process of step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241, stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM .

Next, the 1st special figure look-ahead processing for executing the look-ahead effect on the 1st special figure side is executed, and the processing ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side is required to determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the look-ahead effect (information related to win-loss for look-ahead determination, information related to symbol type for look-ahead determination information, information related to the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second big hit determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second big hit symbol, second variation display pattern random number) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the second special design is the maximum value. 4” is determined (step S5252). In the processing of this step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the second special symbol variation display control (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. Therefore, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

First, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 addition). Then, as the process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251, stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM .

Next, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the second special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the second special symbol is an effect that preliminarily suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (win-lose information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the effect, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of pending of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of step S5253 to step S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the gaming ball entering the first start port 2002, a command ( First reservation number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). A command (second hold number designation commands 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process are the same. , and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for judging a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the random number for judging a big hit, a lottery process for a display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. 1st special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. Executed in correspondence with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600 First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

4. 1st special design fluctuation processing (step S5283) which waits until the fluctuation display of the 1st special design in 1st special design indicator 1403 is stopped

5. So that the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first big hit determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first big hit symbol random number, the first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in is read out from the main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S5304, while counting down the first special reservation number counter, fluctuation display of the first special design stored in each storage area of the first special design reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM Random numbers related to the display mode at the time of stop (for example, random numbers for first big hit determination, first random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for first big hit symbols, random numbers for first variation display patterns) are first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) shift operation in the manner of

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbols has been suspended is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the second start port 2004 Random numbers extracted by the first (earliest) area are stored in order. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension).

After that, as the process of step S5305, the big hit determination process, which is the process of determining whether or not the big win is hit or lost, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process moves to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the big hit determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the jackpot at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) Select the determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) (step S5313), selected The big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability ( Low-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state) Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in case of high probability (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state) High probability to be used when the game state is high probability and a jackpot determination table at the time. In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 204 kinds of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The random numbers for judging the first big hit (65536 types) are respectively associated so that the random number for judging the first big hit of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating that it is a loss (the probability of a big hit at low probability; "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the second special symbol jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table to be referred to, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the player won the jackpot, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the losers. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other so as to coincide with the judgment value indicating that the odds are the same (probability of a big hit at a low probability; roughly "1/321").

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination values, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match. The random numbers for judging the first big hits are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the judgment value for winning (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process , 2040 types of random numbers for judging the second big hit match the big hit judging value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the random numbers for judging the second big hit of 63496 types match with the judgment value indicating that the above-mentioned loss. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other (probability of big win at high probability; approximately "1/32"). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (jackpot determination value The number may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the low-probability jackpot determination table and the high-probability jackpot determination table may have different jackpot determination values (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S5315 ), a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has won a jackpot is set (step S5316), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

Further, in step S5315, when it is determined that the big hit has been lost, the read-out big-hit determination random number coincides with the small-hit determination value indicating that the small-hit has been won based on the selected big-hit determination table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, since the random number for big hit determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that a small hit has not been won (determined as a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be lost in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the reach determination table at the time of the high probability non-time saving state used when the game state is the high probability non time saving state, and the game state is the high probability time saving state. A ready-to-reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in a case and a ready-to-reach determination table in a low-probability state used when a game state is in a low-probability state (low-probability non-time-saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table at the time of the high probability time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach Random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match. However, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. By doing so, it may be prevented from matching with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, at the time of the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased from the time of the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the same reach-judgment random number as the reach-judgment random number set in the reach-judgment table in the high-probability time-saving state and the low-probability state Five types of reach judgment including random numbers The random numbers for reach determination are associated so that the random numbers for reach match with the reach determination values indicating reach, and the random numbers for reach determination of 67 kinds match with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach determination do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-working time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is made the same as the low probability non-working time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319). A reach flag indicating that the change is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S5321).

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is discriminated. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, total 200 (random number for the first jackpot pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol contains the second big hit symbol random number ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big win design. The symbol determination table of this example is set so that the kind of big win determined based on the random numbers for the first big-hit pattern and the kind of big-win determined based on the random numbers for the second big-hit pattern are different. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability variable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot pattern The expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined based on the second big win symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined by the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.

1. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the number of winning nine game balls in the big winning hole 2005 is counted. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game state. After that, it is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins is performed, and a high-probability time-saving effect is performed. 8R probability variable big hit A controlled to the production mode indicated by the game board side production display device 1600 that it is in a relatively advantageous state in the state

2. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the number of winning nine game balls in the big winning hole 2005 is counted. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game state. After that, control is performed in a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special symbols is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are digested), and the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state. In the middle, a battle production (battle defeat production) is performed in which a specific character is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, it is controlled to the production mode indicated by the game board side production display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state. 8R normal jackpot

3. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the number of winning nine game balls in the big winning hole 2005 is counted. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) closed when detected by a sensor 4005 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big win game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 16R big win game state. After that, control to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ( After a predetermined period of time has passed after the additional challenge performance in which the success performance is performed is performed, and the game board side performance display device 1600 indicates that the state is relatively advantageous after the lapse of a predetermined period after being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state. 16R probability variable jackpot controlled by mode

4. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the number of winning nine game balls in the big winning hole 2005 is counted. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game state. After that, control to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ( An additional challenge performance in which failure performance is performed is performed, and the game board side performance display device 1600 shows that the game board side performance display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after the lapse of a predetermined period after being controlled to the high probability time saving state. 8R probability variable jackpot B controlled by mode

5. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005 as described above. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 twice, the game ball is controlled to a 2R big winning game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2005, and after this 2R big winning game state. is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special symbols is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are digested), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state 2R is controlled to a production mode in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat production), and in a low-probability time-saving state, the game board-side production display device 1600 indicates a relatively disadvantageous state. normal jackpot

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece 2004a is not driven to open the second starting port 2004. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the big hits (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol are generated. Similarly, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and the big hits (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) related to the second special symbol are generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at maximum, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum.

In addition, when the 8R probability variation big hit A is determined in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, the 8R probability variation big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the big hit pattern. decide. In addition, although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is determined, the 8R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit symbol. When the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

Also, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 decides on the losing design as the aspect of stopping the fluctuation of the special design (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. .

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337, as the process of step S5337, the lottery result (big hit type, small win, reach loss, or loss) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). In addition, a command may be set to instruct the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the game board side effect display device 1600 to stop and display the decorative symbols after variably displaying them based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. Specifically, the left, middle, and right decorative designs are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative design, the right decorative design, and the middle decorative design. The left, middle, and right decorative patterns may be synchronously variably displayed with the same pattern and stopped at the same time. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle and right decorative symbols are arranged when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when the 2R normal jackpot is won, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of left, middle and right decorative patterns is not the same as other patterns) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss When the missing pattern is specified, the missing pattern (combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined. The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (when the game effect is finished).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) at the time of the win to appear before the start of the big win game, so that the big win game can be played. is started, the effect display during the jackpot game is made to appear.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. If (step S5341), select a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342), small hit flag is set. If it is (step S5343), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S5346), and if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), the variation pattern at the time of loss A table (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set to start the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process is terminated. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time determined in this way, and in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the game board side effect display device 1600 Production control will be performed.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table is a judgment result based on the random number for judging the jackpot (random number for judging the first jackpot, the random number for judging the second jackpot) and the random number for the jackpot design (random number for the first jackpot design, random number for the second jackpot design). There are multiple types for each. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). They are stored so as to correspond to the random numbers for the variable display pattern. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for the big hit symbol. By comparing with the random number for the variable display pattern read and acquiring the variable time information associated with the read random number for the variable display pattern from this table, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Variation determine the pattern. As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since there is no winning of a small hit, the variation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, a small win is not won, but a small win may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the random number for the variation display pattern. It is For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of variable display pattern random numbers out of 241 types of variable display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 Random numbers for variation display patterns of types are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating execution of one of super ready-to-win performances with low expectations for big wins, and 18 types of random numbers for variation display patterns have high expectations for big wins. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super ready-to-win effects is executed.

In addition, the super reach performance (SP performance) is a player who has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach performance, and a player who wants to generate a big hit game state when the super reach performance is executed. expectations are rising. That is, such a super ready-to-win effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of the big win, and even if a loss is finally displayed by this, the player's expectation of the big win game state. will be able to increase However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectations for the jackpot game state, during the period when the super reach effect is being executed, a high-expectation notice effect that is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol provided corresponding to the random number for the first big hit determination and the random number for the first big hit pattern, the non-time saving state and the time saving state , and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to as a time saving state A variable time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variable time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-working time saving state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 As well as prompting, the time for the player to enter the game ball to the second start port 2004 is ensured.

Also, if 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) Discharge without being subjected to lottery processing is suppressed.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the area directly above the gate portion 2003 . Then, when the game ball is received in the gate unit 2003 from this area while in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), a hit as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100 %), the movable piece 2004a involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is kept open for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously received one after another (almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) around ``about 1/32''. become possible.

And in this example, since the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds when the player is operating the handle 302, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.), the second Game balls are often received at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 is extremely It can be set to a short time of 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the pattern variation is completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. , 1 is subtracted from the variable timer for which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variable pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the randomly selected variable time has passed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the processing of this step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284), this processing ends.

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 even though the variable timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derived display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the above is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

In addition, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating starting the big hit game state (step S5387), and the big hit game The waiting time until the start of the state (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is set. Reset (step S5389), further reset the fluctuation number counter, the first special design process flag is the initial value when the first special design normal process is updated so as to be process transition (step S5394), this process exit. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the jackpot game is played in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a). state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R variable jackpot, 8R variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) are set. As a result, the production of the jackpot game state (battle production or additional challenge production) corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the game board side production display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, and the like. .

On the other hand, in the processing of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and time saving The function is stopped and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). And as a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. Waiting time until the start of the state (time for displaying the effect of starting the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, set a small winning in-execution flag indicating that the small winning game state is being executed (step S5396), so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the small hit is set in the process of step S5236, and in the small hit control process (step S5240b). A small winning game state is executed. It should be noted that, unlike the case where a big win is won, the game state is not changed when such a small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the big hit or the flag during execution of the small hit is not set (steps S5235, S5236), and a new game is started according to the state of suspension. (Lottery and symbol control) processing related to progress is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, the main control board 1310 is changed as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a, as the process of step S5402, first, acquires the normal random number of the normal design from the random number counter and stores it in the normal design reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. The normal random number stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read normal random number, the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed Normal symbol normal processing (step S5403 )
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S5404) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device 1402 based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number
3. Normal design fluctuation processing (step S5405) to wait until the normal design fluctuation display in the normal design display device 1402 is stopped
4. The variable display of normal symbols is stopped so that the mode of normal symbol variation control stop determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of normal symbol variation control stop is displayed on a normal symbol display device 1402.例文帳に追加normal design stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern hit", the movable piece 2004a is opened and the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S5407)

In addition, the normal design process flag is set so that the initial value indicates that the normal design process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, the main control board 1310 is changed as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the processing of steps S5412 to S5414 below is performed in order to newly suspend the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols. It will be done. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5413, normal random numbers and normal pattern fluctuation random numbers are obtained from the random number counter. And next, as the processing of step S5414, each random number thus obtained, of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in the normal design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter .

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the number counter, it is determined whether or not there is the variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the processing of step S5422, it is stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) related to the display mode of the normal pattern is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, while counting down the normal reservation number counter, when the fluctuation display of normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal design reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 in order from the first (earmost) area. do. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. Then, when the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are established, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. The stored random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S5425), normal figure per determination table (not shown) during time saving Select (step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), non-time saving normal figure per determination table (not shown) is selected (step S5427), and the selected normal pattern per determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal process (step S5428).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is time saving (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state). And, it is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-time saving used when the game state is non-time saving (low probability non-working time saving state, high probability non-working time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. Ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the normal diagram deviation judgment value indicating that it is a deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003, the game ball to the second start port 2004 is always won in the normal game, and the movable piece 2004a is opened. Acceptance is controlled. Not all of the 255 types, but more normal random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be matched with the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that the normal pattern is won.

In addition, in the non-short-time normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per decision value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in non-working hours, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, because there is no winning per normal figure, the movable piece 2004a is in the open state to the second start port 2004 There is no control over the acceptance of game balls. However, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a normal pattern hit even in a non-time-saving state, in this case, the winning probability (eg, 50%) is lower than the time-saving state, and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a hit. When the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, after enabling the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the movable piece 2004a You may make it impossible to accept the game ball to the 2nd start opening 2004 by making it into a closed state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparison between the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of normal pattern normal processing, when it is determined to be per normal pattern (step S5429) , After setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern (step S5430), the normal pattern per pattern as a mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern) (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of comparison with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal design normal processing with the selected normal design per determination table, when it is determined to be off, normal design fluctuation control A normal pattern losing pattern is determined as a mode (stop pattern of a normal pattern) at the time of stop (step S5432). And after that, when the above-mentioned normal design process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process ends.

While such control by the main control MPU 1310a is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the peripheral control unit regular processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022). )), it is possible to grasp the game situation each time and execute an effect according to the game situation.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a starting prize has occurred, and when in this state, performs control related to pending display and look-ahead effect according to the starting prize. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot Either in-game processing or jackpot end effect processing is executed.

Variation pattern specification command reception waiting process: During the period until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the design is not in a variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed (demonstration etc.) Along with performing control, when receiving a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the performance symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, advance notice production, etc.) in the pattern fluctuation period are determined based on the fluctuation pattern command, etc., and the variation of the decoration pattern is started based on the determined production contents. to control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation.

Production design fluctuation processing: Various production contents determined in production design fluctuation start processing are controlled to start at each timing during the design fluctuation period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is changed to production design Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.

Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design determination command) instructing to stop all designs, stop the fluctuation of the decorative design and perform control such as deriving and displaying the display result (stop design). When the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the big win pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big win display process, and when the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the losing pattern, the value of the process flag is changed to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process. Update to the corresponding value.

Big win display processing: Controls effects (such as display effects for notifying the occurrence of a big win on the game board side effect display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative symbols stop at the big win symbols until the start of the big win game. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the jackpot game.

During jackpot game processing: Various effects are controlled during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect in the period from the end of the big win game state to the change allowable state (display effect to inform the player that the big win game state is over) to control. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specifying command reception waiting process.

Here, the control of the look-ahead effect executed at the time of starting winning will be described.

When the game ball wins in the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), the main control board 1310 performs first starting opening passage processing (FIG. 105) or The second start opening passing process (FIG. 106) is executed, and a random value is extracted (acquired) as start memory (steps S5241, S5251). Then, in the first special figure prefetching process (S5245) or the second special figure prefetching process (S5255), based on the extracted random number or the lottery result based on the random number, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or special symbol 2 A memory prefetch effect command (refer to FIG. 90, hereinafter referred to as “special figure prefetch effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure prefetch effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect based on the received command. Commands from the main control board 1310 are stored in the peripheral controller reception ring buffer by the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 98). Then, the received command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing (S1022) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 95).

When the special figure prefetch effect command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the prefetch effect control process in the reception command analysis process. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the pending display is executed. It should be noted that the prefetch effect control process may be called in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95) by setting a flag indicating that the prefetch effect command has been received in the received command analysis process. good.

In the processing for executing the normal prefetching performance for changing the pending display, a lottery is drawn based on the special figure prefetching performance command, and the display mode of the post-change pending display is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the display mode of the pending display may be changed only when shifting to the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure prefetch effect command. As for changing the display mode of the pending display, for example, it is preferable to change the color or shape of the pending display. Then, normal look-ahead effect setting processing is executed for changing the state of the reserved memory display. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending display, and at the timing of changing the display mode of the pending display, a sound effect is output, a lamp is lit, and a character is moved. Make settings for

1 to 8 and the like, an embodiment in which the door frame 3 provided in the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, the door frame top unit 570, etc. is shown. 2 shows an embodiment in which a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) used for presentation and decoration is provided to the door frame 3 provided in the pachinko machine 1. FIG.

118(A) to 118(E) show a door frame top unit 570 that constitutes the door frame 3 and a right ear frame movable body 7100 imitating the ear of an animal (specifically, a rabbit) as a frame movable body. An embodiment in which a left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are movable in the vertical direction, and specific structures and operation modes will be described later.

118(A) and 118(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 118(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 118(D) and 118(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 118(A), 118(C), and 118(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 118(B) and 118(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. FIG. 118(D) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 .

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided above the door frame 3 . A glass unit 190 is provided in the central part of the door frame 3. Through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located behind, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board are displayed. is visible. A plate unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided below the door frame 3 . In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has an operation button 410, and can receive an operation input by the player. In the figure, illustration of the upper tray 321, the lower tray 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, etc. is omitted.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its upper surface, right side surface and left side surface correspond to the upper surface, right side surface and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 constituting the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. They are provided so as to overlap when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of a white translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of several millimeters and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to a vertically movable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a door corresponding to a vertically movable left ear frame movable body 7200. and a left ear opening 7010 on the frame top unit.

As shown in FIGS. 118(A) to 118(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. there is Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 basically have the same structure, only right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative in the following description.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. ing. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is composed of a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 is provided. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are outside the right ear frame movable body first surface. It is made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114 . The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 in a front view. Further, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 in a front view. The light-emitting part 7116 inside the right ear frame movable body is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated with a white protective film on both sides, and a light-emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on its surface. It is The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and can emit light forward in a predetermined light emitting manner. The movable body inner light emitting part 7116 can light-embellish the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112, and the right ear frame movable body outer first surface light emitting part 7118 can light-embellish the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114. is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. 118(B) and 118(E) from the standby position (first state) in the door frame top unit 570, vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) protruding to the side. The upper surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. It is The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal's ear, and project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the state of moving.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several millimeters. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118A, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame movable body 7116 When the movable body outer light emitting part 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly illuminated. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it in the state where it is held.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, and the left ear frame movable body When the movable body inner light emitting part 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part of the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 7112, the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114, the left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7212 of the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210, and the left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7214 can be directly viewed by the player in a predetermined lighting effect state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body), a part of the frame movable body moves from the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is positioned above the top surface, the area occupied by the player's field of vision when looking up increases, and the volume of the housing appears to have increased, giving the player unprecedented surprises and fun. It is possible to give to

Next, referring to FIGS. 119A to 120B, a specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the game board side according to the motion mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit). Mode of accepting player's operation, right ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7116, right ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7118, left ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7216, left ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7218 (hereinafter referred to as frame Shown below is an example of a presentation that combines the light emission mode, etc., of a movable body light emitting section.

119(A) to 120(B) respectively show an operation mode of the movable frame and a display of a simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of a movable frame light emitting unit.

In the time charts shown in FIGS. 119(A) to 120(B), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. Moreover, these points are not limited to this embodiment, and are the same when similar notations are used in other embodiments described later.

FIG. 119A shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 119(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 120(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 120(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 119A to 120B, the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the manner in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes effective, and the operation instruction display are performed. The start timing and the timing at which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body changes from the light-emitting effect state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body changes from the off state to the light-emitting effect state or the specific light-emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 119(A) to 120(B).

119(A) to 120(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as first state or standby state). In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise at the same time. is started (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. The frame movable body simulated image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 . As for the simulated image of the movable frame, the image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the image simulating the movable left ear frame 7200 rise in accordance with the rise of the real movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200. dynamically displayed in a manner that The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the rising of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 ends (timing t9). The rise of the image simulating the body 7200 is completed, and after that it continues to be displayed in a mode indicating a stopped state (after timing t9). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete their rising at timing t9 two seconds after starting to rise at timing t7 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or rising state). Become.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light-emitting sections are turned off from the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 119(A) and 119(B) show the effects when an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 119(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the light emitting unit of the movable frame changes from the off state to the normal state. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the light emission effect state. In this way, when the frame movable body light-emitting portion is brought into the specific light-emitting effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win.

On the other hand, FIG. 119(B) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a loss. It will be in a light emitting state. In this way, the movable frame body light-emitting portion is brought into the normal light-emitting effect state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In the specific lighting effect state, compared with the light emitting state in the normal lighting effect state, the flashing state of the light becomes faster, the amount of light becomes stronger, and the number of colors increases. It is preferable to employ a light emission mode. In this way, the special lottery result indicates a big win to the player by allowing the player to visually recognize the effect state of the specific light emission mode which is different from the normal state. Specifically, in the specific lighting effect state, the inner portion of the movable frame body and the outer portion of the movable frame body may be set to the light emitting state in different manners. For example, the inner portion of the movable frame body may be configured to be visually recognizable in a more irritating light emission mode than the outer portion of the movable frame body. It should be noted that this definition of the specific light-emitting effect state and the normal light-emitting effect state may be applied to other embodiments.

120(A) and 120(B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, This shows an effect mode when the operation effective period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined period of time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 120(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits specific light different from the normal light emitting effect state. It is in the production state. In this way, when the frame movable body light-emitting portion is brought into the specific light-emitting effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win.

On the other hand, FIG. 120(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the light emitting part of the frame movable body enters the normal light emitting effect state. . In this way, the light-emitting portion is brought into the normal light-emitting effect state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 119A to 120B, at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the valid operation period, the changing decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 119A and 120A, the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production patterns shown in FIGS. 119(B) and 120(B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) is displayed. ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves to the raised position (the second state) while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. ) to the retracted position (first state). At the same time, the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed in a manner in which it descends in accordance with the actual downward movement of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200 . At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the movable frame body to the retracted position is completed, the simulated image of the movable frame body changes to a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent movement of the movable frame body. Display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the light emission state of the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

121(A) to 121(C) show the moving state of the movable frame, the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame, and the reception of the operation unit when the performance pattern shown in FIG. 119(A) is executed. 4 schematically shows changes in the state, the state of the operation instruction display, and the light emitting state of the frame movable body with the lapse of time. As described above, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 119(A) is the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a big win.

FIG. 121(A) shows the state at timing t5, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the frame movable body is in the retracted position (first state) in the normal light emitting state, The frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 121(B) shows the state at timing t8, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting state from the retracted position (first state) to the raised position (second state). The simulated image of the movable frame is a display simulating a state during movement from the retracted position (first state) to the raised position (second state), and the operation section is disabled. It is a period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 121(C) shows the state at timing t11, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the movable frame is in the extinguished state and in the raised position (second state), and the simulated image of the movable frame is A display simulating the frame movable body positioned at the raised position (second state) is provided, and an operation valid period is started in the operation section, and an image simulating the operation section is displayed as an instruction display as an operation instruction display. ing.

FIG. 122(A) shows the state at timing t19, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the special light emitting state, and the frame movable body is simulated. The image is displayed simulating the raised position (second state), the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 122(B) shows the state at timing t23, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a grid mode (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) in the special lighting effect state, and the simulated image of the frame movable body moves from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position ( The display simulates the state during movement to the first state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 122(C) shows the state at timing t28, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a grid mode (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is positioned at the retracted position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed. .

In this way, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame at the timing when the movable frame starts to move, it is possible to change the lighting mode according to the operation of the movable frame and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the In addition, the movable frame body appears at a position not conventionally available in response to the result of the special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect), so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. In addition, by changing the lighting mode of the movable frame light-emitting part when the player operates the operation part, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he/she has decided the result of the special lottery. becomes.

When the frame movable body operates, the performance pattern is selected so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern is a big hit is higher than when the frame movable body does not operate. It should be configured as follows. For example, the degree of expectation when the frame movable body does not operate may be set to 3%, and the degree of expectation when the frame movable body operates may be set to 20%. With such a configuration, when the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed, the player may turn his/her eyes to the movable frame and notice that the movable frame is in motion. , will have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the frame movable body, and the player's interest, which was conventionally within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, is directed outward. It is possible to expand.

The volume of the fluctuating effect sound may be changed from a normal state to a suppressed state in which the volume is reduced during the operation of the frame movable body.
The fluctuating effect sound is a sound that a predetermined musical piece is reproduced in accordance with the fluctuation of the decoration pattern, and the player recognizes it as background music. For example, a piece of music composed of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the variation of decorative patterns seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and a different song may be started to be played at the timing when the playback of a certain song is finished to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with the change of the game state, the music that has been reproduced so far may be faded out in the middle of reproduction, and another music different from the music that has been reproduced so far may be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the volume of such fluctuating effect sound is suppressed in accordance with the timing at which the frame movable body operates, thereby suppressing a state in which the effect is excessive.

In addition, a special sound may be played for a short period of time to remind the player that the movable frame body is moving or that the movable frame body has been moved. , instead of emitting a sound that is recognized as a series of songs played for a long time like a fluctuating effect sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping-pong") is played in one second, or a short period ( For example, it is preferable to reproduce a piece of music whose reproduction is finished in 2 seconds, or to reproduce a sound like a drum being continuously beaten (for example, a sound such as "thumping") for several seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sound constituting the special evocation sound does not include the instrumental sound used as part of the fluctuating effect sound. Also, the special wake-up sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the fluctuating effect sound. For example, even in a normal state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is not suppressed, and in a suppressed state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed, the special awakening sound is output at a predetermined volume. Also, the volume of the special evocative sound should be higher than the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in the suppression state.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound and generating a special evocative sound in accordance with the operation of the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the effect provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

By operating the frame movable body, instead of notifying the player of the high expectation of the occurrence of a big win, which is in an advantageous state for the player, a game other than the expectation of the occurrence of the big win is played. It may be configured to inform the player of the degree of expectation for the content to occur.

For example, it is possible to notify the content of the profit to be given to the player during the big win, even though the big win is confirmed. As for the contents of profit, for example, the type of profit may be notified, or the amount of profit may be notified.

Alternatively, it may be configured to inform the content of the profit to be given to the player after the big hit. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit to be given to the player after the big win, or to notify the amount of profit to be given to the player after the big win. .

In this way, not only the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state), but also the amount of profit given to the player in a state advantageous to the player (for example, Expectations regarding the number of balls to be played and the number of openings of the big winning mouth, etc., and new favorable conditions for the player that may occur after the end of the favorable conditions for the player (for example, variable conditions and electric chew support state), the type of benefit given to the player in the game that newly occurs after the end of the state advantageous to the player (for example, the variable state and the electric chew support state) As an example, it may be configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the probability variable state continues and the number of fluctuations in which the electric chew support continues).

By executing a predetermined performance mode out of a plurality of different performance modes, the player is notified by the operation of the frame movable body that there is a high degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win that is advantageous to the player. good.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation may be notified to the player not only by the action of the movable frame body but also by other forms that the player can perceive. For example, the display mode in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the mode of the sound output from the predetermined speaker, the light emission mode based on the light output from the predetermined light source, the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration source, etc. , the player may be notified of the degree of expectation by means of various aspects that the player can perceive.

Further, the degree of expectation may be configured to include the occurrence of a predetermined advantageous state (occurrence of a 100% advantageous state). For example, when a predetermined effect mode is executed, the degree of expectation that a predetermined advantageous state will occur is set to 10%, and the degree of expectation that a predetermined advantageous state will occur when another effect mode is executed is set to 100%. %.

In addition, it is preferable to configure such that the rate of execution of the effect mode with a higher degree of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous state is lower. For example, the ratio of the number of executions of a predetermined presentation mode with a low expectation of occurrence of an advantageous state to the number of executions of a predetermined presentation mode with a high expectation of occurrence of an advantageous state is, for example, 90:10. It is preferable to set the execution ratio of the effect mode as follows. According to such a configuration, when a predetermined performance mode with a low probability of occurrence is executed, the player can experience the joy of experiencing the performance with a low probability of occurrence and the expectation of an advantageous state. It is possible to experience both sides and enhance the interest in the game.

As an effect display performed in the display area of the effect display device, there is known a look-ahead effect display that is performed over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the specific holding causing the look-ahead performance display is stopped in a manner in which the decorative symbols indicate the occurrence of a big win, compared with the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the look-ahead performance display is not performed. The probability of being displayed is set high. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect display is executed, the player has an expectation that a big win will occur.

On the other hand, in the display area of the effect display device, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and a plurality of effect displays corresponding to the decorative symbols that are being variably displayed (for example, the variable decorative symbols indicate a big hit) Effect display indicating the degree of expectation that is stopped and displayed in the form, etc.) is also performed. For this reason, the player can read the look-ahead effect display suggesting the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols several times ahead, as well as the variable display mode of the currently variable decorative symbols and the display contents of the effect display corresponding to the currently variable decorative symbols. At the same time, it is becoming a situation where it is necessary to visually recognize.

In such a situation, although the game can be made more interesting, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully grasp the contents indicated by these effect displays. In particular, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display of decorative symbols that are currently changing and various effects displays corresponding to the variable display, the look-ahead effect display is relatively inconspicuous. There is a problem that the player may lose consciousness of the execution and the approaching start of variation of the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display.

Therefore, when executing the look-ahead effect display, the player can easily grasp that the look-ahead effect display is being executed and that the timing of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display is approaching. and embodiment.

Below, with reference to FIG. 123, first, various images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when executing the look-ahead effect display will be described.
Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation performed when the result of the special lottery performed corresponding to the winning to the first start port 2002 is lost. 123(A) to 123(F), an example of rendering in the display area will be described. 123(A) to 123(A) to 123(A)-FIG. 123(D), FIG. 123(G), and FIG. 123(H).
In this specification, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

FIG. 123(A) shows a state in which three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It also shows a state in which the pending image corresponding to the stopped decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which there are three holds corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "3" is placed as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "5" is placed as the middle decorative pattern at equal intervals from the left in the approximate center of the display area in the vertical direction. , and decorative patterns with the number "2" as the right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern consists of a background area (white part in the figure) consisting of an image forming the outline of the decorative pattern in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a number area consisting of an image showing any number from "1" to "9" ( black part in the figure). As shown in the figure, the number area is centered in the background area.

It is preferable that an image having a color different from the color of the background area and the color of the number area constituting the decorative pattern is used. For example, it is preferable to set the color of the background area to white and the color of the number area to black. Note that the outline of the rectangular shape that forms the outline of the background area may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the suspension display area, the first suspension display area, the second suspension display area, the third suspension display area, and the fourth suspension display area are set. A state is shown in which the reserved image is displayed in the display area, and the reserved images are displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. Although the fourth reserved display area is indicated by a dotted line in the drawing for explanation, the dotted line is not actually displayed in the display area as a display state, and the reserved image is displayed in the following drawings. In principle, such a dotted line indicating the intended position of the vehicle is not shown.

In FIG. 123(A), the pending image displayed in the pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed. Further, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends. Further, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is completed. be. Further, the pending image displayed in the third pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is completed. be.

FIG. 123(B) shows a display state at the start of variation of decorative symbols corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area described with reference to FIG. 123(A).
Specifically, the upper edge of the decorative design that is one before in the display order is below the left decorative design to the right decorative design, and the decorative design that is one after in the display order is above the left decorative design to the right decorative design. Bottom edge is displayed. Also, the display of the pending display ends.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are always displayed in front of the decorative design. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and basically white in color. Also, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.

FIG. 123(C) shows a state in which the left decorative design to the right decorative design are displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a manner of scrolling downward in the display area.

Specifically, the lower side of a certain decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable display is first displayed on the upper side of the display area, and then the decorative pattern moves downward to fill the display area. The entire decorative pattern is displayed, and after the lower end of the decorative pattern reaches the lower side of the display area, only a part of the upper side of the decorative pattern is displayed. The upper end of the decorative pattern reaches the lower side of the display area, and the decorative pattern is not displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes its display state in such a flow that it changes from a state not displayed in the display area to a state displayed in the display area and then to a state not displayed in the display area.

The display order is set for the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Specifically, following a decorative pattern with a certain number (eg, "1"), decorative patterns with the next number (eg, "2") appear in order from the upper side of the display area. will be displayed. The order of the numbers attached to the decorative patterns is the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", and "9". . After the decorative pattern with the number "9", the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 123(C), the left decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the lower side and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the upper side are displayed. , both left decorative patterns scroll downward, and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative pattern with the number "3". , appear from the upper side of the display area.

With reference to FIG. 123(B), it has been explained that the display of the reserved image that has been displayed in the reserved display area until then ends at the same time as the decorative pattern starts to change, but the display of the reserved image ends At the same time, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed so as to move to the left while being enlarged, and displayed as the pending image in the pending display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. Enlargement of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left are performed over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.67 seconds). FIG. 123(C) shows the state after such a pending image is moved.

FIG. 123(D) shows a state in which the left decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative design and the right decorative design are being variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design with the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which a new pending image is displayed in the third pending display area in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 .

Here, the temporary stop display will be described. A temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it were stopped at a display position where the decorative pattern is finally displayed stopped or in the vicinity thereof. is. Specifically, for example, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is gently moved up and down to the extent that the number attached to the decorative pattern is clearly visible, with reference to the display position where the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed. The temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed by displaying it so as to move or display it so as to sway. Alternatively, display may be performed by rotating within a range of a predetermined angle (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) about the vertical direction. In either case, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols continue to be displayed in the display area.
In this way, by performing the temporary stop display, the decorative symbols being changed are visually recognized as if they are stopped by the player, and the player can confirm the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. . It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state without such vertical movement or swinging display.
Although the end of the variable display is taken as an example, the temporary stop display may be performed for a predetermined time at the start of the variable display.
In addition, during the variable display, at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped for a predetermined period of time, and then all of the decorative symbols may be changed again at high speed. Such a display mode is used, for example, in a "pseudo-continuous effect".
The mode of the temporary stop display may be changed according to the timing of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols (progress of the variable display, etc.) and the game state. For example, one or both of the vertical movement period and amplitude of the decorative pattern may be different. Further, as the swinging direction, a horizontal direction or an oblique direction may be adopted instead of the vertical direction. In addition, instead of displaying in a manner rotated about the vertical direction, display is performed in which the horizontal direction is used as the axis, or the diagonal direction is used as the axis and rotated within a predetermined angle range (for example, 5 to 10 degrees). may
Note that the fluctuation state in which the temporary stop display is performed may be referred to as "shaking fluctuation" in this specification.

When the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is changed to the finally stopped decorative pattern, or the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is scrolled and displayed again, There is a case where variable display is performed so that decorative symbols with other numbers are finally stopped and displayed, but the details will be described later.

In FIG. 123(D), arc-shaped lines are added to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative pattern with the number "2". This line indicates that the symbol is in a state of being temporarily stopped. Also, in other drawings, such arcuate lines may be attached to the decorative design, and in this case also, it indicates that the decorative design is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 123(E) shows a state in which the right decorative design is temporarily stopped following the left decorative design, and the middle decorative design is being variably displayed. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" as the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 123(F) shows a state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design, the left decorative design and the right decorative design, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in the figure, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decoration with the number "7" attached to the middle decorative pattern As for the patterns, the decorative patterns in which the number "4" is added to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the fact that the special lottery results are lost is indicated by the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), after which the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is newly started. be. In addition, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending image ends at the same timing as the timing when the change of the new decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 123(G) shows a state in which, following the left decorative design, the right decorative design is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative design is being variably displayed from the display state shown with reference to FIG. 123(D). ing. Specifically, the left decorative pattern with the number "2" and the right decorative pattern with the number "2" are temporarily stopped, respectively, indicating that the ready-to-win state has occurred. state.

FIG. 123(H) shows a state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design, the left decorative design and the right decorative design, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decoration with the number "2" attached to the middle decorative pattern are shown in the figure. As for the patterns, the decorative patterns in which the number "2" is attached to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns indicates that the special lottery result is a big win. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. After the stop display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the left decorative design to the right decorative design are no longer displayed. After that, the jackpot game state is started, and at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is resumed, and after that, it corresponds to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The variable display of decorative patterns is newly started.

Although the example of displaying the reserved image in the reserved image display area until the timing when the new decorative pattern starts to change has been shown, the display of the reserved image ends at the same time when the variable display of the decorative pattern stops. may Alternatively, the display of the pending image may be terminated at a predetermined timing between when the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped and before the variable display of the new decorative symbols is started.

Thus, in the variable display example of the decorative symbols described with reference to FIG. 123, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 2002. After the variable display is started from the state, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped in this order, and then the middle decorative design is stopped. In addition, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are simultaneously displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design. In addition, by stopping the decorative patterns with the same number as the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a big win. In addition, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a loss by stopping at least one of the left to right decorative patterns to which a different number is attached as the decorative pattern.
The period during which all of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are stop-displayed is, for example, one second (see FIG. 124, etc., which will be described later). This period may be referred to as a "fixed stop period" (or a "fixed display period").

Note that one such variable display (from the start to the end of the variable display) may be referred to as a "game", and the number of times of the variable display may be referred to as the "number of games". For example, it is used in a mode such as "the number of times of time saving is 100 games" and "the specific effect is not executed again within 4 games after the end of the game in which the specific effect is executed".

The reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area, and the reserved image is displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas. The current pending image and the pending image may be referred to as standby pending images. Also, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is the first pending pending image, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is the second pending pending image, and the pending image displayed in the third pending display area is the third The 3 standby reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the 4th reserved display area may be referred to as the 4th standby reserved image.
Also, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area (or the lottery information corresponding to this pending image) may be referred to as "Hold 1". Similarly, pending images displayed in the second to fourth pending display areas (or lottery information corresponding to these pending images) may be referred to as "H2" to "H4".

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 123 will be described below with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. FIG. 124 is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this example of effect. In FIG. 125, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, and the display mode of the reserved image in the first to fourth reserved display areas are The display mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 123 unless otherwise noted. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

FIG. 124 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 125(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "6", "4", and "5" from the left are stopped and displayed. From this state, at timing t0, the variable display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is newly started. FIG. 125(B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of variable display, and shows a state in which variable display of left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols is being performed. there is

In the time chart shown in FIG. 124(A), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the presentation. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 124, at the timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this starting winning as a trigger, the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Also, in response to the look-ahead effect display, a specific pending image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of the normal pending image. The color of the specific reserved image is green. FIG. 125(C) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Also, the third reserved display area shows a state in which a specific reserved image having a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of a normal reserved image having a circular shape.

In the look-ahead effect display, a look-ahead effect image surrounding the display area in a frame shape is displayed in such a manner as to hide a part of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed so as to scroll downward. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which a plurality (specifically, six) of shapes resembling pine branches with leaves protrude toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead effect image is slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the display of the specific pending image are performed based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball wins the first start opening 2002, and only the normal pending image with a perfect circular shape and white color is displayed. The performance execution ratio is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image are displayed than when they are displayed. For example, when a normal pending image is displayed, the probability of a big hit is 0.3%, and when a look-ahead effect image and a specific pending image are displayed, the probability of a big win is 10.0%. is configured to be

With such a configuration, the player can display the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image, and when the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image is changed, the normal pending image is displayed. Compared to the case where the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image is performed, there is an expectation that the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a stop mode indicating that a big win will occur as a result of the variation of the decorative pattern. You will feel.

From timing t2 to timing t4, while the look-ahead effect image is displayed, the left decorative design to the right decorative design are variably displayed. A look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the variable display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is performed in a state that a part of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is hidden by the look-ahead effect image. In addition, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area The specific pending image is displayed on the front side of each decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 125(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the front-to-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side. In addition, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area The specific pending image is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols positioned above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 125(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" as the left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but the number "1" is attached until just before timing t4. On the upper side of the decorative pattern is the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2", and on the lower side of the decorative pattern with the number "1" is the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9". is displayed. By adopting such a configuration, only the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed stand out and can be visually recognized by the player.

The stop display of the decorative pattern continues from timing t4 to timing t5. Also, during this period, the display mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the front-to-back effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are switched again, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. display mode.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols positioned above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. The display of the decorative patterns positioned above and below the pattern is also resumed. For example, in FIG. 125(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern. , the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed, and the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed with the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9". The downward moving display of each decorative pattern is instantaneously started.

Thereafter, in accordance with the start and stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the front-rear effect image and the left to right decorative symbols are interchanged. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued, but the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and timing t14 are continued. to timing t15, similarly, the display mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At the timing t15, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the start winning that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started. In FIG. 125(E), at a predetermined timing after timing t15 (for example, timing t16), the look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative design to the right decorative design, and the specific pending image is displayed in the pending display area. Shows the displayed state.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Also, at timing t25, the display of the prefetch effect image that has been displayed until then ends, and the prefetch effect image is not displayed. FIG. 125F shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-win state occurs and the display of the look-ahead effect image ends at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern.

FIG. 125(G) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative design with a number "3" attached as a middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at timing t34, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending display area ends. On the other hand, the stop display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued until the game ball newly wins the first starting port 2002. - 特許庁

On the other hand, FIG. 125(H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative design with a numeral "2" attached as a middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the display of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are finished, and the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance image is displayed closer to the viewer than the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols are displayed closer to the viewer than the look-ahead performance images while the decorative symbols are stopped. ing.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image can be displayed without confirming the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that one has approached the fluctuation display of .

In addition, the area occupied in the display area of the look-ahead effect image is larger than the area occupied in the display area of the specific reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image is closer to the stop position of the decorative pattern than the specific reserved image. Since it is displayed, even if the player concentrates on visually recognizing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, it becomes possible to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image is one step closer. .

Further, by displaying the decorative pattern and the read-ahead performance image at overlapping positions, the sizes of both the decorative pattern and the read-ahead performance image can be increased, and the utilization efficiency of the display area can be improved. Furthermore, the display can be optimized by configuring the image to be displayed on the front side to be switched between the decorative design and the pre-reading effect image according to the conditions.

Specifically, during the variation of the decorative symbols, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side, so that the player is greatly affected by the approaching timing of performing the variation display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image. It can give you hope. On the other hand, while the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped, the stopping mode of the decorative symbols is not hindered by the look-ahead performance image, and the whole of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed can be clearly shown to the player. .

It should be noted that it may be configured such that an effect mode in which only one of the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is displayed can be executed. In this case, compared to the case where only one of the look-ahead effect image and the specific hold image is displayed, if both the look-ahead effect image and the specific hold image are displayed, the expectation level will be higher Good to configure.

Although an example of displaying a specific reserved image having a shape imitating a pine branch with leaves attached is shown as the specific reserved image, the specific reserved image may be displayed in another form.
For example, the normal pending image may be a white circular shape and the specific pending image may be a red circular shape. Also, a plurality of specific reserved images may be provided. For example, reserved images of blue, green, red, and gold (yellow) can be displayed as the specific reserved images, and expectations may increase in order of blue, green, red, and gold (yellow).

By the way, in this embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted in the obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. Specifically, the obstruction nail 1201 is held by the panel plate 1110 by engaging the obstruction nail helical portion 1201c provided at the tip portion of the obstruction nail 1201 so as to bite into the panel plate 1110 . Also, the panel plate 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and through the panel plate 1110, it is possible to visually recognize the movable accessory and the light-emitting decorative portion arranged behind the panel plate 1110. However, by engaging the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail with the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is scratched or cracked, resulting in a cloudy portion (hereinafter collectively referred to as the whitened portion HKB). There is a problem that these parts become visible to the player, and the appearance deteriorates. The manufacturing method and structure of the game panel 1100 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG.

FIG. 126(a) is a side view showing an obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel plate 1110. FIG. FIG. 126(b) is a sectional view of the panel plate 1110 and the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 viewed from the right side. FIG. 126(c) is a cross-sectional view of the state in which the obstructing nail 1201 is implanted in the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 126(d) is a cross-sectional view viewed from the right side of a portion A where the whitened portion HKB may occur around the obstructing nail 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110. FIG. FIG. 126(e) is a cross-sectional view of an example of a state in which a whitened portion HKB is actually generated around the obstacle nail 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 127(a) shows the dimensions of each part constituting the obstacle nail 1201, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing the dimensions of each member shown. Note that some symbols are omitted in the drawing.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be described with reference to FIG. 126(a). The obstacle nail 1201 is entirely made of brass and has a certain elasticity. In addition, in a white light irradiation environment, the whole is visually recognized as having a metallic luster tinged with yellow. The obstructing nail 1201 is composed of, from the left side, an obstructing nail head part 1201a, an obstructing nail first body part 1201b, an obstructing nail spiral part 1201c, an obstructing nail second body part 1201d, and an obstructing nail tip part 1201e from the left side. It's becoming The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The shape of the obstructing nail head 1201a is a dome-shaped round head, and is a perfect circle when viewed from the front. The obstacle nail head 1201a has a diameter L2 of 4 mm in front view and a thickness L3 of 1 mm in side view. The shape of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201b is cylindrical. The length L4 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 2 mm. The shape of the helical portion of the obstructing nail is substantially cylindrical. The length L7 of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is 4 mm. The diameter of the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. The shape of the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d is cylindrical. The length L8 of the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d is 1 mm. The diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body portion 1201d is 2 mm, which is the same as the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b. The shape of the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e is conical. The length L9 of the obstructing nail tip portion 1201e is 1 mm.

Next, referring to FIGS. 126(b) and 127(b), the structure of the panel plate 1110 before the obstruction nail 1201 is implanted will be described. The panel plate 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material. The front and rear surfaces of the panel plate 1110 are formed to be smooth, and through the panel plate 1110 it is possible to clearly see the members located behind. The panel plate 1110 may be made of a plate material made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like. The thickness L10 of the panel plate 1110 is 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 is provided with an obstruction nail through-hole 1110a for implanting the obstruction nail 1201 therein. The obstacle nail through-hole 1110a has a columnar shape and a diameter L11 of 2 mm. The obstacle nail through-holes 1110 a are formed by cutting the panel plate 1110 . Therefore, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly opaque and visually recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 126(c) and 127(b), a method of implanting the obstructing nail 1201 into the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 will be described. The obstructing nail tip portion 1201e of the obstructing nail 1201 is pushed into the obstructing nail through hole 1110a, and the obstructing nail helical portion 1201c, the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstructing nail tip portion 1201e are entirely inside the obstructing nail through hole 1110a. , and a force is applied backward (to the right in the figure) until a part of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is positioned in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, thereby removing the obstacle against the panel plate 1110. Implantation of nail 1201 is completed. It should be noted that the impeding nail 1201 is implanted by a nailing machine. The length L4 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 20 mm. The length L13 of the portion located on the front side of the front surface is 17 mm. FIG. 126(c) shows a state in which the installation of the obstacle nail 1201 to the panel plate 1110 is completed.

The distance L14 between the tip of the obstructing nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is 1 mm. With such a configuration, even if a game machine manufacturer or a store clerk carelessly touches the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 due to the obstruction nail tip portion 1201e, the obstruction nail 1201 may cause an injury. It is possible to prevent

The shape of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a to penetrate the panel plate 1110 is that the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a was shaved when the obstacle nail 1201 was implanted into the panel plate 1110. This is to expel the acrylic resin powder from behind the panel plate 1110 to the outside.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body 1201d are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the obstructing nail spiral 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly deformed by the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c. When the obstruction nail 1201 has been pushed in, the obstruction nail helical portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a, and the obstruction nail 1201 is firmly held against the panel plate 1110. .

Incidentally, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body 1201d, and more than the diameter of the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c. may also be configured to be slightly smaller. In this case, in a state in which the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a There will be a small gap between the With such a configuration, when a game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is elastically deformed, the elastic deformation of the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed by this gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail 1201 from breaking when the game ball repeatedly collides with the obstacle nail 1201 .

By the way, in the step of implanting the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c moves backward in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, so that the inside of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 is damaged. There is a problem that it is visually recognized as white.

The obstacle nail through hole 1110 a is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110 and has a shape that penetrates the panel plate 1110 . By being formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through-hole is rough and visually recognized as white. In particular, since the obstruction nail tip portion 1201e is implanted while remaining in the panel plate 1110, the hindmost portion of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a itself can be seen in a whitened state.

In addition, when the obstacle nail 1201 is completely implanted, the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is elastically deformed to maintain the engagement state with the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c, but when the elastic deformation limit is exceeded. , cracks may occur outward from the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a with which the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages.

Further, in a game on a gaming machine installed in a game parlor, the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 many times, and the kinetic energy of the game ball is transferred to the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. It may be transmitted to the inner wall of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a via the portion located inside, and a crack may occur on the front side of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Further, cracks may occur around the portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages (inside the panel plate 1110).

In addition, in a game machine installed in a game arcade, an illegal act such as forcibly bending the obstacle nail 1201 is performed in order to make the winning rate to a predetermined winning hole advantageous to the player. After cleaning the front surface of the panel plate 1110 with the door frame 3 in the open state, the store clerk moved the door frame 3 in the closing direction to close the door frame 3. 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 by mistake. Even in such a case, a large force is applied to the obstructing nail 1201, and the force passes through the obstructing nail through hole 1110a through the portion of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201b located within the obstructing nail through hole 1110a. It may be transmitted to the inner wall and crack may occur on the front side of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Further, cracks may occur around the portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages (inside the panel plate 1110).

In FIG. 126(d), A indicates a portion where the game ball YGK collides and thus a whitened portion HKB may occur. Also, FIGS. 126(e) and 127(b) show an example of a state in which the whitened portion HKB is actually generated. 126(e) and 127(b) show a state in which the force applied to the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, and a whitened portion HKB is generated on the front surface of the panel plate 1110. ing. It also shows a state in which a whitened portion HKB is generated inside the panel plate 1110 starting from a portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the spiral-shaped portion 1201c of the obstacle nail engages. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Furthermore, the longer the operating period at the amusement arcade, the higher the possibility that the panel board 1110 will have the whitened portion HKB. In addition, once the whitened portion HKB occurs, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitened portion HKB is weakened, and the whitened portion HKB gradually expands starting from that site. A situation may also occur in which the whitened portion HKB extends outward from the center.

The shape of one whitened portion HKB generated in this manner is generally planar, and its area is approximately 1 to 2 mm square. may occur radially when viewed from the front. In addition, such a whitened portion HKB may occur in each of a plurality of obstructing nails 1201 .

Furthermore, the occurrence of such a whitened portion HKB may weaken the strength of engagement between the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a and the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c. In this case, the repulsion mode when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 is weaker than what was assumed at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 1 (even if the game ball hits the nail, it does not rebound much and absorbs momentum. ), and there is a possibility that the winning rate to the winning opening will change.

In addition, in a game on a game machine installed in a game shop, a situation may occur in which the obstacle nail 1201 is broken due to the operation in the game shop for a long period of time. will be replaced.

In this way, when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel plate 1110 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, a predetermined movable accessory and a predetermined light-emitting decorative portion located behind the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. As a result, although the appearance is improved, the vicinity of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a into which the obstruction nail 1201 is implanted appears white, thereby degrading the aesthetic appearance. Means for solving these problems are shown below.

FIG. 128 shows an embodiment in which the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. FIG. 128(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Illustration of the obstructing nail head 1201a is omitted. Therefore, the circles indicating the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 shown in the figure are actually the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232. 1 indicates the thickness of the body portion 1201b. It can also be said that this indicates the thickness of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. These points are the same for each drawing describing an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128 .

FIG. 128(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 128(a). FIG. 128(b) schematically shows a cross section obtained by cutting the site where the life nail 1230 located on the left side in front view is implanted. This point also applies to each drawing describing an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128 .

FIG. 128(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. The tilt angle in this cabinet view is 45 degrees. In the figure, illustration of the fine structure of the obstructing nail 1201 such as the obstructing nail head 1201a, the obstructing nail spiral shape part 1201c, the obstructing nail tip part 1201e, etc. is omitted, and the obstructing nail 1201 as a whole is shown as one cylinder. ing. In this cylinder, the solid line indicates the obstructing nail head portion 1201 a of the obstructing nail 1201 and the portion of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201 b located in front of the panel plate 1110 . In this cylinder, the portions indicated by dotted lines are the portion of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b located inside the panel plate 1110, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstacle nail. Tip 1201e indicates the rear end of obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same for each drawing explaining a modified example in which the embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 128 is changed.

Note that in FIG. 128(a), illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted. Also in FIG. 128(c), although the illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted, the whitened portion HKB is generated around the portion indicated by the dotted line of the obstacle nail 1201 . 128(a) to 128(c), the illustration of the first starting port 2002 is omitted. Note that these points are the same for each drawing explaining a modified example in which the embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 128 is changed.

The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 to a thickness of about 1 mm. As the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, a lens cut shape or a satin finish may be employed. The light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light installed in the amusement parlor from the front or rear of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b thus formed. When the light from another gaming machine is incident, the light is irregularly reflected at the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board, and is visually recognized as whitish.

As shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 128(c), the portion of the panel plate 1110 where the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is provided is viewed from the front or obliquely above the left with respect to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, it is visually recognized by the player in a state where it overlaps with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate.

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), the bright color visible portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b), it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the implantation site of the obstructing nail 1201 inconspicuous by the bright color visually recognized portion visually recognized in white.

In addition, white is visible when visible light of all wavelengths of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is diffusely reflected almost uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) regardless of the wavelength range of the predetermined object. It refers to the color that is supposed to be. In addition, light color means that light in a specific wavelength region of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is partly absorbed by the predetermined object and light in the remaining wavelength region is roughly reflected diffusely. , creams, light grays, and bright yellows that are considered visible. On the other hand, black color means that the surface of a given object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of the natural light irradiated to the given object, and part of the irradiated natural light (20 to several %) It refers to the color that becomes visible when diffusely reflected. In addition, dark color means that most of the wavelength range of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is uniformly absorbed, and only a part of the irradiated light (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. However, in a specific wavelength region, it refers to a color close to black, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as a dark blue color due to the difference in light absorption. These definitions may be adopted as the definition of each color in this specification. In addition, in the embodiment described in the specification of the present application, the white portion may be light-colored, or the light-colored portion may be white. For example, instead of irradiating white light from a predetermined light emitting member, bright light may be emitted. Alternatively, the black portion may be darkened, or the dark portion may be blackened.

FIG. 128(d) is a diagram showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128(a). In the example shown in FIG. 128(d), a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110, white light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced to the panel plate 1110, and the panel The plate back rough surface portion 1110b is configured to diffusely reflect the introduced white light. In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized by the player with white light. The panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, instead of below the panel plate 1110, a light emitting part similar to the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided on the side or above the panel plate 1110 instead of or in addition to the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, The light-emitting portion provided in this way may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the panel plate lower light-emitting substrate 2400 .

With such a configuration, the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed in the amusement arcade is weak, and the light from the gaming machines installed in the amusement arcade is weak (for example, when a game is played). Machines that are not turned on automatically go into power saving mode, reducing the amount of light emitted by the machine. Even in this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visible together, and the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the implanted portion of the obstructing nail 1201 is visible. It is possible to make it inconspicuous. In this state, the whitened portion HKB itself also diffusely reflects the introduced white light and is visually recognized as white. Since a large amount of light is irregularly reflected behind the whitening portion HKB, it is possible to prevent the whitening portion HKB from being conspicuous.

Although a plurality of modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128 will be described below, the technical contents shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical contents shown in other embodiments.

Although an example in which white light is introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 toward the side of the panel plate 1110 is shown, yellow light may be introduced instead of the white light. . In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visually recognized in yellow by the player due to the introduced light. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visible in yellow due to the introduced light. By the way, as described above, the obstructing nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the color of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually similar to each other, and the existence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In the pachinko machine 1, since the obstruction nail 1201 has been used for several decades, the portion of the obstruction nail 1201 located in front of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the obstruction nail head 1201a and the obstruction nail No. 1201a). This is because the player rarely feels uncomfortable with the color and shape of the part of the body part 1201b that is not embedded in the panel plate 1110).

The embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128 will be modified below to provide an embodiment in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 capable of diffusely reflecting light is provided close to the back surface of the panel plate 1110. , with reference to FIG.

FIG. 129(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 129(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 129(a). FIG. 129(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method. FIG. 129(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by subjecting the front side to lens cutting or satin finishing. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects ambient light, and is visually recognized in a whitish color. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 because the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member is arranged closer to the whitened portion HKB than when provided on the rear surface. This is because the whitening portion HKB can be viewed more integrally with the whitening portion HKB.

Behind the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the left guide nail 1232, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is positioned. there is

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), the irregular reflection portion (panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, etc.), the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the planting site of the obstructing nail 1201 can be made inconspicuous by the irregular reflection portion visually recognized in white. It becomes possible. Further, by providing the irregular reflection part on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the irregular reflection part and the whitening part HKB can be made closer, and the irregular reflection part and the whitening part HKB can be visually recognized more integrally. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the front surface of the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member, etc.) included in the decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) is plated with metal to form unevenness. It may be configured to form a certain metallic luster.

As shown in FIG. 129(d), the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow), and the light is irradiated on the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. It may be configured to reflect light. Also, the light emission mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member can be visually recognized whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

Below, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 is modified to provide an embodiment in which a panel plate rear substrate 2420 capable of reflecting light is provided close to the back surface of the panel plate 1110. Description will be made with reference to FIG.

FIG. 130(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 130(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 by oblique projection. FIG. 130(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 130(a). FIG. 130(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 made of a white printed circuit board is configured to be directly visible through the panel plate 1110 . Even with such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the panel plate rear substrate 2420 which is visually recognized in white. It should be noted that the light-emitting diodes mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 are preferably light-colored ones.

In this embodiment, a light-emitting diode that emits light to the side may be employed as the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 . In this case, the entire front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 can be irradiated with light from the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 .

An embodiment combining the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 130 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 131(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 131(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 131(a). FIG. 131(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, behind the obstacle nail 1201, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a front surface subjected to lens cut processing is arranged. A white panel board rear substrate 2420 with 2425 is disposed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous especially when the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is turned off.

In this embodiment, the panel board rear board 2420 is composed of a panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a capable of diffusely reflecting light emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 and a white printed circuit board. Since the light is reflected between and, the entire rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member is uniformly irradiated with light, and the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is improved. is also possible.

129 to 131, one or both of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are arranged behind the panel plate 1110 to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Although shown, as an effect, one or both of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be movable or pivotable. Further, it is preferable that this movement effect is executed under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by this moving effect. A driving mechanism for moving and rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 may be driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 .

By the way, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are configured to be movable in this manner, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 which have been positioned at the standby position can be used to move the panel board rear board 2420. There is a possibility that the whitened portion HKB, which has been made inconspicuous, will become conspicuous when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move to the moving positions. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming conspicuous, the following embodiments may be adopted.

FIG. 132 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is vertically movable. FIG. 132(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the standby position. FIG. 132(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the first movement position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (10 mm). It is located at a position overlapping with the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. FIG. 132(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the second movement position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm). The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is positioned so as not to overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, when a decorative member having an irregularly reflecting portion (for example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410) moves from the standby position to the first movement position in the movement effect, the obstructing nail 1201 is positioned behind the panel board in a front view. By being positioned so as to overlap with the decorative member 2410, a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous can be maintained.

In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved to the first movement position, it is desirable that all the obstructing nails 1201 overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. Even when only the nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in a front view, the whitened portion HKB can be kept inconspicuous.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position, which is a position farther than the first movement position, the impact on the player increases due to the large amount of movement. The obstacle nail 1201 shown in 132(c) and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 do not overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, the execution frequency of moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the first movement position and then returning to the standby position without moving to the second movement position, and the panel board rear decoration member As for the execution frequency of the effect of moving the 2410 from the standby position to the second movement position and then returning to the standby position, it is preferable to increase the execution frequency of the former effect. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence frequency of situations in which the whitened portion HKB is conspicuous while realizing diversification of presentation modes in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is moved.

When moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to move the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 integrally. Alternatively, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved integrally. Then, in a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is at the first movement position or the second movement position, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be brought into the light emitting state.

Further, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is at the first movement position and when it is at the second movement position, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel board rear board 2420 is made to emit light in different states, thereby The decorative member 2410 may be configured to be in a light emitting state in which the decorative member 2410 is visually recognized in different light emitting states. Also, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed simultaneously corresponding to this light emitting effect state. Also, different effect images may be displayed when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the first movement position and when it is at the second movement position. A single character or an integrated effect can be achieved by the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the first movement position or the second movement position and the special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. may be configured to represent For example, as a special effect image, it may be configured to display a raining state or a snowy state as a special effect image on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 representing a mountain range. In addition, it may be configured such that a different degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by such a plurality of presentation modes.

With such a configuration, the player's attention is focused on the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the game board side effect display device 1600 positioned in the direction in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves. Even if the decoration member 2410 moves to the second movement position and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 in a front view, the player's consciousness can be diverted from the whitened portion HKB. becomes.

FIG. 133 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are modified in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 131 so as to be vertically movable.

FIG. 133(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 131(a), showing a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position.

FIG. 133(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 131(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves upward by a predetermined distance (20 mm) in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110. Although the decorative member 2410 is positioned to overlap in front view, the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned to overlap in front view.

FIG. 133(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 131(a), showing a state in which the panel board rear substrate 2420 is at the moving position. When the panel board rear board 2420 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm). 2420 are positioned so as not to overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are positioned to overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is moved from the standby position to the moving position at a certain timing, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board are moved. 2420 may not move to the moving position at the same time. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved so as to appear and disappear alternately in the vertical direction.

By adopting such a configuration, even when the movement effect of moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 to the movement position is executed, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear are Since it is positioned so as to overlap with one of the substrates 2420 that has not moved in a front view, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous. An embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are respectively moved from the standby position to the moving position has been shown, but the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is provided instead of the panel board rear substrate 2420 and overlaps in the front-rear direction. The two panel board rear decorative members 2410 may be moved in the same manner. Alternatively, a panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided instead of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the two panel plate rear substrates 2420 overlapping in the front-rear direction may be similarly moved. Also, the positions of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be reversed in the front-rear direction, and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be arranged in the front and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged in the rear, and they may be moved in the same manner. . Also, a plurality of decoration units each composed of the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be stacked and arranged and moved in the same manner.

FIG. 133(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 131(a), showing a state in which both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved upward in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm) by moving from the standby position to the moving position. Both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned so as not to overlap with the nail 1201 when viewed from the front. In this case, the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 may become conspicuous.

Therefore, in a state in which both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved by causing the panel board rear substrate 2420 to emit light of a predetermined emission color. You may comprise so that it may be in a light emission production|presentation state. Also, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed simultaneously corresponding to this light emitting effect state. A single character or the like may be represented by the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the moving position and a special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . Note that the same aspect as the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 132 may be adopted.

With such a configuration, the player's interest is focused on the side of the game board located in the direction in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear board 2420, or the panel board rear board 2420 moves. Since the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position to face the effect display device 1600, the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in a front view. Even in such a state, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

A predetermined pattern or the like is applied to the front surface of the movable panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel board rear substrate 2420 at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. A decorative member that is visually recognized in a bright color or metallic luster is provided, and the decorative member is visually recognized in a state in which both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It may be configured to allow Even when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided, the same decorative means may be employed. With such a configuration, even when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position, the whitened portion HKB can be kept inconspicuous.

FIG. 134 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 is rotatable about the lateral direction. FIG. 134(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the standby position. FIG. 134(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotates from the standby position to the moving position, it rotates clockwise by about 30 degrees when viewed from the right side. They are located at overlapping positions when viewed from the front. FIG. 134(c) is a modification of the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 134(b), showing a state where the game board side effect display device 1600 is positioned behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410. FIG.

In this way, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable about the panel plate rear decorative member rotating shaft 2410c, and can take a standby state parallel to the panel plate 1110 and a moving state not parallel to the panel plate 1110. may be configured to allow In addition, it is preferable that the action of moving to the moving state can be executed as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of rotation angles at the movement position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested by the rotation angles. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not parallel to the panel board 1110, the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 positioned behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is shown in FIG. 134(c). It is preferable that the light from the area is directly incident on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 . In this case, the light emitted from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is irregularly reflected by the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In addition, when the display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is to flash a predetermined image at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to further make the presence of the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

It should be noted that not only the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 but also other members capable of irradiating light irradiate the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotated by a predetermined angle. It may be configured to

In this way, with respect to the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 which is originally provided at an angle or is in an inclined state, the game board side effect display device 1600 and other light-emitting decorative members have a high degree of expectation for a big hit. may be directly irradiated with white light that indicates In this case, since the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated in white, the whitened portion HKB is less conspicuous than when illuminated in other colors. Note that yellow light may be used for illumination instead of white light.

By the way, game machines may be installed in game shops for several years. On the other hand, the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in transparent panel boards is shorter than the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in wooden panel boards. It is only in the last 10 years or so that game machines installed on simple panel boards have been installed in amusement arcades in earnest. Furthermore, the playability of the game machine itself is constantly evolving. For this reason, the construction of the gauge formed by driving the obstacle nails and the device provided on the game board change each time, and the number of obstacle nails planted in the transparent panel plate and the number of obstacle nails implanted are changed accordingly. The position, spacing between obstructing nails, etc. also change. For this reason, it is necessary to verify whether the pattern of the gauge configuration that can be generated in various ways is likely to cause the whitening portion HKB or whether the whitening portion HKB is less likely to occur. It is in the current situation that it takes a month.

Until now, as obstacle nails that receive an impact due to collision from a game ball, especially immediately after launching, for example, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the game area 5a, and a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the right side of the game area 5a. There is a predetermined blocking nail 1201 of the plurality of blocking nails 1201 . Further, after that, as an obstacle nail 1201 on which game balls that flow down and roll in the game area concentrate according to the game state, for example, a game ball that rolls from the upper left of the game area 5a that concentrates during a normal game is specified. A plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted on the left side of the game area 5a that collide with each other with probability, and an obstacle nail 1201 (jump nail) provided corresponding to the rolling path from the upper left of the game area 5a to the first start opening 2002 1231, a life nail 1230, a left guide nail 1232), and an obstruction nail 1201 provided near the big winning opening 2005, which is concentrated during a big win game, is presumed to deteriorate the whitened portion HKB.

In the embodiment described below, before a quality problem that may affect the progress of a game or the aesthetics perceived by a player occurs in the operation of a certain gaming machine in a gaming parlor, such a An embodiment is described that allows a store clerk to determine whether a quality problem is likely to occur.

In order to make the whitened part HKB inconspicuous, a bright color visible part, a diffused reflection part, and a metallic luster part are provided behind the planted part of the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front. Although an example has been shown, in order to solve the above problem, a configuration may be employed in which the whitened portion HKB is intentionally implanted in a conspicuous position for a predetermined obstructing nail 1201 among the obstructing nails 1201 .

Specifically, among the obstructing nails 1201 constituting the left guiding nail 1232, the first obstructing nail 1201 and the second obstructing nail 1201 from the left are decorative members that are not bright in front view (preferably dark decorations). member).

By adopting such a configuration, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB of some predetermined obstructive nails 1201 can be clearly visually recognized while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous for many of the obstructive nails 1201 . Therefore, it is possible to easily estimate the accumulated operating time of the game machine, and to use it as an index of whether or not the game machine is likely to have a quality problem.

As the dark-colored decorative member, it is desirable to employ a decorative member having a black-based decoration, for example, in order to make the whitened portion HKB more conspicuous. Alternatively, a liquid crystal display device or the like, which is often used as a performance display device, may be used as a basic device that constitutes a game machine. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is viewed as a black plane on the front side.

FIG. 135 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. In this embodiment, a game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind a colorless and transparent panel plate 1110, and a life nail 1230, a jump nail 1231, a left guiding nail 1232, and other obstacles planted in the panel plate 1110 are displayed. A part of the nail 1201 is provided at a position overlapping the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front surface of the display area 1600a is visually recognized as a black plane.

In this way, the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is visually recognized as a dark decorative member or a black surface, overlaps in a front view, or in a predetermined direction centered on the center position of the pachinko machine as described above. If a prescribed obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a position overlapping with a dark decorative member or a display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted at a prescribed angle, a whitened portion HKB in the prescribed obstacle nail 1201 is formed. It becomes easy to confirm the occurrence state of

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to determine the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB with respect to the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 planted at a position that overlaps the dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It becomes easy to confirm. It should be noted that, instead of viewing from the front, as described above, a dark-colored decorative member or a game board side is placed at a position overlapping the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction about the center position of the pachinko machine. It may be configured such that the display area 1600a of the effect display device 1600 is positioned. Also, this configuration may be adopted for the obstructing nail 1201 in another embodiment to improve the visibility of the whitened portion HKB.

FIG. 136 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. In this embodiment, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. The life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the part of the left guide nail 1232 implanted in the panel plate 1110 are provided at positions overlapping the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b visually recognized in bright color in front view. On the other hand, some of the left guide nails 1232 (the upper left two obstacle nails 1201) and the other obstacle nails 1201 do not overlap the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate when viewed from the front. It is provided so as to overlap with the display area 1600a.

With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstacle nails 1201 can be made inconspicuous at all times, and the other obstacle nails 1201 can be prevented when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. By displaying a bright color or yellow effect image in the display area 1600a in the manner described above according to the game state, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. , it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 136, by applying the above-described embodiment in place of the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate, the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstructing nails 1201 is configured to be inconspicuous. You may For example, at least one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be provided instead of or in addition to the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b. The shape of these members when viewed from the front is preferably the same as the shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front.

Conventionally, game machines provided with operating means have been studied. Hereinafter, a game machine which is provided with a plurality of operating means and effectively utilizes the plurality of operating means in production will be described. As shown in FIG. 137, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a mission button 3700, an attack button 3710, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, and a defense button 3740 that can be operated by the player under the door frame 3. .

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is capable of displaying an image of the own tank in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In this production, the own tank travels along various paths, and during the movement to the destination it goes through battles with enemy tanks. ing. Also, during the movement of the own tank or during the battle between the own tank and the enemy tank, the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, the defense button 3740, etc. By accepting a player's operation on the operation means, it is possible to change the performance content such as the mode of suggesting the variation result of the decorative symbols.
In this specification, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various manners in the display of the own tank. The attack button 3710 is a button that can mainly attack the enemy unit in the display of the own tank. The defense button 3740 is a button that can mainly defend against attacks from enemy tanks in the display of the own tank. Each button can be pressed downward by a predetermined distance. The pachinko machine 1 can detect each button pressing operation by the player with a sensor (not shown), input the information to the peripheral control board 1510, and use it for production. When the button is not pressed by the player, it is moved upward by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like.

The left lever 3720 is a bar-shaped operating means that can be used for direction input. The base of the left lever 3720 is pivotally supported and can be tilted in any direction of 360 degrees. The maximum tiltable angle is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 is structured to return to a vertical state (not tilted in any direction) by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like when the player releases the left lever 3720 . The pachinko machine 1 can detect the tilted direction and the tilted angle of the left lever 3720 with a sensor (not shown), input them to the peripheral control board 1510, and use them for performance. The player can perform an operation input by gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting it in a predetermined direction by a predetermined angle.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibration is incorporated below the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured by a stepping motor having an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft or a reciprocating solenoid. The left lever vibration source 3722 can generate vibration by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . Vibration generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 is transmitted to the palm of the player holding the left lever 3720, so that the vibration can be used as an effect. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration mode in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720 . Also, the vibrating mode may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for an event that is advantageous to the player, such as a big win.

A plurality of left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided within the left lever 3720 . For example, left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided in the upper half of left lever 3720 and the lower half of left lever 3720, respectively. Only one of them may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated simultaneously.

A left lever light emitting source 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color is built in above the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever 3720 is made of a milky white synthetic resin, and the entire left lever 3720 can be decorated with light according to the color of the light emitted from the left lever light source 3724 . The left lever light emitting source 3724 is specifically composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs and a driving circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the driving circuit by the peripheral control board 1510 . Mainly the upper half of the left lever 3720 can be decorated with light emission by the left lever light emission source 3724, and it is possible to use light emission modes such as light emission colors and flashing/lighting as effects. For example, light may be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode when an operation is performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720 . Further, it may be constructed such that the degree of expectation for an event that is advantageous to the player, such as a big win, is indicated by the light emission mode. It should be noted that the left lever 3720 may be formed using other material as long as it can transmit light, for example, it may be formed using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut.

Right lever 3730 has a structure and function similar to left lever 3720 . For example, the right lever 3730 can accept operational input. Further, similarly to the left lever 3720, a right lever vibration source 3732 and a right lever light emission source 3734 are provided in the right lever 3730, and can be used for effects similar to those of the left lever 3720.

The layout of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 shows an embodiment in which an attack button 3710 is placed on the upper end of the left lever 3720 and a defense button 3740 is placed on the upper end of the right lever 3730 . In this case, it is possible to press the attack button 3710 at the upper end of the left lever 3720 with the thumb while gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting the left lever 3720 . Similarly, while gripping the right lever 3730 and tilting the right lever 3730, it is possible to press the defense button 3740 at the upper end of the right lever 3730 with the thumb.

The attack button 3710 is made of a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light source 3724 is set to a predetermined light emission mode according to the operation of the attack button 3710. good too. Similarly, the defense button 3740 is made of a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light source 3734 is set to a predetermined light emission mode according to the operation of the defense button 3740, so that the defense button 3740 can be set to a predetermined light emission mode. may be

Instead of installing the attack button 3710 on the upper end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 on the upper end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 is installed on the upper end of the left lever 3720 instead of the attack button 3710. good too. Alternatively, the defense button 3740 may be replaced with the upper end of the right lever 3730 . Alternatively, two or three of these buttons may be arranged at the upper end of one lever.
With such a configuration, the tilting operation of the lever and the pressing operation of one or more buttons can be performed with one hand.

FIG. 139 shows an embodiment configured so that the effect of displaying the own tank is executed as a ready-to-win effect while the decorative symbols are changing. FIG. 139(a) shows a state in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the start winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 occurs, the left, middle and right decorative patterns start to change.

FIG. 139(b) shows a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed in such a manner that they appear from above the display area and disappear below. The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a loss without forming a ready-to-win state, and when a ready-to-win state is formed and a pattern indicating losing is stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state is formed and a big win is achieved. There are cases where it is stopped and displayed with a symbol representing .

FIG. 139(c) shows a state in which the left and right "3" symbols are temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win state is formed. In this embodiment, as the ready-to-reach effect, it is possible to execute a tank ready-to-reach effect in which the own tank is displayed in the display area and moves forward.

FIG. 139(d) shows a state in which an effect for displaying own tank has started as a tank ready-to-reach effect. Specifically, the own tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left of the display area.

FIG. 139(e) shows a state in which the own tank and the enemy tank are fighting. Also, FIG. 139(f) shows a state in which the own tank has arrived at its destination. These function as effects that suggest the result of the special lottery. For example, as shown in FIG. 139(e), an effect display indicating whether or not the own tank can defeat the enemy tank or whether or not the own tank will be defeated by the enemy tank is executed. is suggested. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 139(f), an effect display is executed to indicate whether or not the own tank can reach its destination without being beaten by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the result of the special lottery. .

FIG. 139(g) shows a variable display stop mode of decorative symbols when the result of the special lottery is a loss. Also, FIG. 139(h) shows a mode of stopping variable display of decorative symbols when the result of the special lottery is a big win. The display of the images of own tank, enemy tank, road, etc. ends just before the variation of the decorative pattern stops.

With reference to FIG. 139, an example of displaying the self-tank is shown as the ready-to-win effect in the display area. can be configured to For example, by foreseeing the special lottery result related to the hold caused by the game ball winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the execution of the effect of displaying the own tank is started, and multiple times It may be configured to run across symbol variations and suggest variation results of decorative symbols corresponding to prefetched holds. Alternatively, an effect of displaying the own tank is executed from the start to the end of the big win, or an effect of displaying the tank is performed from the end of the big win until the decorative pattern is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). By executing it, it is suggested what kind of game state the game state changed at the end of the big win (for example, whether the probability of being judged as a big win in the special lottery is a high probability state or a low probability state). It may be configured to In this way, the target suggested by the effect of displaying one's own tank is not limited to the special lottery result (for example, the degree of expectation that a big win will occur). good.

FIG. 140 shows an effect situation in which it is required to operate either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 with the left hand and rotate the handle 302 with the right hand. During the display of the own tank, the own tank basically advances forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank or move it in the left and right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward from the player's point of view, it is possible to increase the speed of the own tank. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the own tank. In addition, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the right. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as seen from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the left.

An embodiment in which one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move one's own tank has been shown, but it may be possible to perform an effect in which the left lever 3720 is operated with the left hand and the right lever 3730 is operated with the right hand. . In addition, since there is a ready-to-win effect, in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the variation of the normal decoration pattern, the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, and can use both hands to operate the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3720. Since various buttons such as lever 3730 and mission button 3700 can be operated, it is possible to enhance the entertainment as a production.

During the display of the own tank, the own tank basically advances forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the tank and move it in the horizontal direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as viewed from the player, the speed of the tank can be increased. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen from the player, the speed of the tank can be reduced. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen from the player, the tank can be moved to the right. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as seen from the player, the tank can be moved to the left.

Also, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted forward at the same time as seen from the player, the speed can be greatly increased as compared with the case where only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted backward as viewed from the player, the speed can be greatly reduced compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. . In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the right side as viewed from the player, the tank can be moved to the right side more greatly than when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. is. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted to the left at the same time as seen from the player, the tank can be moved to the left by a large amount compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. It is possible.

In this way, when the tank moves forward, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can be used to change the movement direction of the tank, thereby avoiding attacks from enemy units and setting up in the field. It is possible to execute effects such as avoiding obstacles such as mines and rocks and moving forward.

A basic mode of use of the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, and the defense button 3740 in tank reach will be described. By operating the mission button 3700, it becomes possible to fire a bullet forward from the machine gun mounted on the own tank. Further, by operating the attack button 3710, it becomes possible to fire a cannonball forward from the battery mounted on the own tank. Also, by operating the defense button 3740, it is possible to provide a defense shield in front of the own tank to defend against attacks from enemy tanks. It should be noted that the function applied to each button may be different depending on the situation of production.

By the way, in this embodiment, a new condition is employed as the condition for changing the game state. New conditions for changing the game state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. FIG.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, the first special symbol display device 1403 performs a variable display of special symbols and displays the first special lottery result. Also, in the display area of the game board side effect display device, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the variable display of the special symbols.
Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second special symbol display device 1405 displays the special symbols in a variable manner, and displays the second special lottery result. Also, in the display area of the game board side effect display device, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the variable display of the special symbols.
In addition, when the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball through the gate part 2003 is "win", the second start port 2004 accepts the game ball from the state where it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball. It is possible to change to a possible state.

In the present embodiment, regarding the lottery mode of the special symbols, there is a low probability (probability: 1/300) that the lottery result of the special symbols will be a ``big win'', and a lottery in which the lottery result of the special symbols is a ``big hit''. It is possible to have a state with a high probability of being the result (probability: 1/30).
In addition, regarding the lottery mode of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is long (30 seconds on average), and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a “hit” lottery result is low (probability: 1/100). It is possible to take a state in which the variation time is short (average 2.0 seconds) and the probability that the lottery result of normal symbols will be a "win" lottery result is high (probability: 1/1.2).
Then, it is possible to take the following four game states by combining these.
1: A normal state in which the special pattern lottery result has a low probability of becoming a "big win" lottery result, the normal pattern variation time is long, and the normal lottery result has a low probability of becoming a "hit" lottery result.
2: A short-time state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern will be a "big hit" lottery result is low, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is short, and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is high.
3: A non-time-saving variable state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern will be the lottery result of "big hit" is high, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is long, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal lottery result will be the lottery result of "hit" is low. .
4: A variable state in which the special pattern lottery result has a high probability of becoming a "big hit" lottery result, the normal pattern fluctuation time is short, and the normal lottery result has a high probability of becoming a "hit" lottery result.
Also, apart from these game states, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit", the following states are taken.
5: A big win state in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. It should be noted that the variable display of special symbols is not performed during the jackpot state.
FIG. 142 is a table showing these five game states.
Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to take five game states. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game, the game state changes from one game state to another game state. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing transition conditions for game states.

The time saving state shifts to the normal state on the condition that the number of occurrences of the special lottery result of losing after the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times. For example, when the jackpot state ends, the state shifts to the time saving state, and in the time saving state, when the number of variations of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal state.
The non-time-saving definite variable state and the definite variable state are continued until a big hit game state occurs.

In this embodiment, as the special lottery results, three lottery results of "losing", "losing with time saving", and "big win" are provided.

When the special lottery result is "losing", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the large prize winning opening 2005 is not opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the ordinary lottery result is "win". In addition to increasing the probability of becoming ", there is no occurrence of a "time saving state" in which the time until the ordinary lottery result is displayed is short.

When the special lottery result is "losing with time saving", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the general lottery result is "hit" without opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. The game state shifts to a "time saving state" in which the probability of becoming is increased and the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short. Even if the special lottery result is "losing with time saving", if the game state is the time saving state, the non-time saving variable state, or the probability variable state, the shift to the time saving state is not performed. It should be noted that it is preferable to generate the "loss with time saving" with a predetermined probability. For example, among the special lottery results, the probability of occurrence of "big hit" may be 1/300, the probability of occurrence of "loss" may be 298/300, and the probability of occurrence of "loss with reduced time" may be 1/300.

When the special lottery result is a "big win", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. After the big win state is finished, the game state shifts to any one of the normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving definite variable state, and definite variable state based on a predetermined big win breakdown. In addition, the ratio of shifting after the big win state may be appropriately set, and the number of game states to which the game state can shift after the big win may be set to less than four. For example, after the jackpot state, the ratio of shifting to the probability variable state may be 50%, the ratio of shifting to the time saving state may be 50%, and the ratio of going to the normal state and non-time saving probability variable state may be 0%.

On the other hand, without adopting "time-saving loss", the number of times the special lottery results have been consecutively lost under normal conditions is counted, and the number of times the special lottery results have been consecutively lost is specified in advance. (for example, 500 times), after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the game state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state without opening and closing the big winning port 2005.例文帳に追加
In addition, even if the number of times that the special lottery result is lost during the time saving state, non-time saving variable state, and probability variable state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the transition to the time saving state is performed. do not have.

Either one of the transition from the normal state to the time saving state based on the loss with time saving and the transition from the normal state to the time saving state based on the execution of a specific number of special lotteries may be adopted, or both may be adopted. good too.

By adopting "loss with reduced working hours" as a result of the special lottery, the game state can be shifted from the normal state to the reduced working hours state without any balls being output. In addition, it is possible to receive the special lottery results in a time-saving state in which the number of game balls is less likely to decrease than in a normal state.

In addition, when the special lottery is executed a certain number of times, the game state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state, so if the normal state continues for a certain period of time, the time-saving state in which the game balls are less likely to decrease than in the normal state It is possible to receive a special lottery result at.

The details of the big win when the result of the first special lottery results in a big win and the details of the big win when the result of the second special lottery results in a big win may be the same.
Alternatively, the details of the big win when the result of the first special lottery results in a big win may be different from the details of the big win when the result of the second special lottery results in a big win. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result is a big hit is 50% for the normal state and 50% for the time-saving state, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a big hit. , The time-saving state jackpot may be 20%, and the probability variable state jackpot may be 80%.

In the low-probability non-time-saving state and high-probability non-time-saving state, the player shoots the game ball to the left side of the game area in order to win the game ball into the first start port 2002 . Such an act of shooting a game ball toward the left side of the game area is called "left hitting". In addition, the probability that the game ball that has flowed into the left side of the game area wins the first starting hole 2002 is approximately 1/10 to 1/15. In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the left side of the game area will not enter the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, during the jackpot game state, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 2005 . In addition, during the low-probability time-saving state and high-probability time-saving state, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area in order to win the game ball into the second start port 2004 . Such an act of shooting a game ball toward the right side of the game area is called "right hitting".
In addition, the probability that the game ball that has flowed into the right side of the game area wins the second starting hole 2004 varies depending on the game state. This is the probability that the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 will be in the open state and the duration of the open state is non-shortening state (low probability non-shortening state, high probability non-shortening state) and time-saving state (low probability short-time state, This is because it is different from the high probability time saving state). In the non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state), the probability that the game ball that has flowed into the right side of the game area wins the second start port 2004 is extremely low, for example, about 1/200 to 1/300 is. In the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), the probability that the game ball that has flowed into the right side of the game area wins the second start port 2004 is extremely high, for example, about 1/2 to 1/3.
In addition, although the game ball which flowed into the right side of the game area does not win the first starting hole 2002, the game area may be configured so that the first starting hole 2002 may win.

In the low-probability time-saving state, the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter on average than in the low-probability non-time-saving state.
In the high-probability time-saving state, the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter on average than the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the probability that the special pattern stop mode indicates the result of the big hit is the low-probability non-time-saving state. higher compared to
Therefore, in the case of hitting the right (during the low probability short working hours state or high probability short working hours state) compared to the left hitting (during the low probability non working hours state), the next big hit game state after the end of the jackpot game state The average time until the occurrence is short, and from the player's point of view, it feels as if the next big win has occurred immediately after the previous big win.

In a low-probability non-time-saving state, the first big-hit game state occurs, and after the end of this big-hit game state, it becomes a low-probability time-saving state or a high-probability time-saving state, and a state in which a big-hit game state occurs again is a continuous-chan state. It says. It should be noted that the number of consecutive chances at this time is "two times". After this big win game state, it becomes a low probability time saving state or a high probability time saving state again, and when a big win game state occurs again, the number of consecutive chances is "3 times". When a low-probability non-time-saving state occurs after the end of the big-hit game state, or when the low-probability time-saving state occurs after the end of the big-hit game state, the special lottery results are continuously lost a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Then, when it becomes a low probability non-time saving state, the continuous chan state ends. The player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area while the continuous chan state continues, and changes the area for shooting the game ball to the left side of the game area at the timing when the continuous chan state ends. .

With reference to FIGS. 142 and 143, it is shown that the state shifts to one of four predetermined game states (combination of high probability or low probability, time saving or non-time saving) after the end of the jackpot state. These game states may be referred to as follows in this specification.
Specifically, a jackpot that becomes a low-probability non-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot state may be referred to as a low-probability non-time-saving jackpot. In addition, a jackpot that becomes a low-probability time-saving state after the end of the jackpot state may be referred to as a low-probability time-saving jackpot. In addition, a jackpot that becomes a high probability non-time saving state after the end of the jackpot state may be referred to as a high probability non-working time saving jackpot. In addition, a big hit that becomes a high-probability time-saving state after the end of the big-hit state may be referred to as a high-probability time-saving big hit (this jackpot is generally referred to as a "probability variable big hit").
Incidentally, the jackpot state may be referred to as jackpot game state.

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, the decoration pattern with a predetermined number is stopped and displayed in the form of doubles to inform the player that the result of the special lottery is a big win. . At this time, if the type of the jackpot is a high-probability non-time-saving jackpot or a high-probability short-time jackpot, decorative patterns with odd-numbered numbers are stopped and displayed in the form of doubles, and the type of the jackpot is a low-probability non-time-saving jackpot. Or, in the case of a low-probability time-saving jackpot, decorative patterns with even-numbered numbers may be stopped and displayed in the form of double eyes. For example, when the number types attached to the decorative patterns are 1 to 7, if the combination of the numbers of the decorative patterns stopped and displayed is ``222'', ``444'' and ``666'', a big hit is achieved. The game state after the state becomes a low probability non-time saving state or a low probability time saving state. In addition, when the combination of numbers of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is "111", "333", "555", and "777", the game state after the jackpot state is a high probability non-time saving state or a high probability. It will be short-lived. In addition, decorative patterns with numbers "2", "4" and "6" are "normal patterns", and decorative patterns with numbers "1", "3", "5" and "7" is sometimes referred to as "probability variation pattern". In such an embodiment, the player can know the game state after the big win if the big win occurs at the timing when the ready-to-win state is formed, so that the amusement can be improved.

In addition, the decorative pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win state in this way may be referred to as a "ready-to-win pattern". In particular, whether the number attached to the decorative pattern that forms the reach state is an even number or an odd number, that is, whether the reach state is formed by the "normal pattern" or the reach state is formed by the "variable probability pattern" Used to indicate whether For example, "The reach symbol is '1'. ” indicates that the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative pattern to which the number 1 is attached.
In addition, the reach state formed by the "normal pattern" is sometimes referred to as the normal reach, and the reach state formed by the "probability variation pattern" is sometimes referred to as the "probability variation reach".

It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested by the type of symbols forming the ready-to-win state. For example, if the numbers attached to the decorative pattern are "1", "2", "4", and "5", the expected degree is less than 5%, 20% for "6", and 50 for "3". %, and "7" may be set to 90% (or 100%). As a result, in addition to simply determining whether the reach pattern is a normal pattern or a variable pattern (that is, whether it is an even number or an odd number), whether the number attached to the pattern is "1" to "7" It is also possible to increase the player's interest in whether or not there is.

In some cases, the number of rounds that occur in the jackpot state is added to these names to further classify and express the types of jackpots. For example, in the case of a 10-round jackpot in which a high-probability time-saving state occurs after the jackpot ends, it may be referred to as a 10R high-probability time-saving jackpot. Similarly, when the number of rounds is 3 rounds or 6 rounds, it may be referred to as a 3R high probability short time jackpot or a 6R high probability short time jackpot. In addition, when the probability state and the time saving state after the end of the big win state are not considered, they may be referred to as 3R big wins and 6R big wins.

In this specification, the degree of expectation of a big hit may simply be referred to as the degree of expectation.
In addition, although the embodiment shows how much the expectation level of the jackpot is by executing a predetermined effect etc., instead of the expectation level of the jackpot, the expectation level of the high probability short-time jackpot or other predetermined may be modified to indicate the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the event. The degree of expectation can be obtained by the formula "probability of appearing at the time of big win/(probability of appearing at the time of big win+probability of appearing at the time of losing)". Also, the player recognizes the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect is executed based on his/her gaming experience and articles in specialized magazines.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a ready-to-win effect executed using such an operating unit and conditions for changing the game state will be described together with display contents displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

Conventionally, by displaying an image of a character or the like on a display means, an effect has been performed that suggests a variable display result of decorative patterns (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2016-179063 and 2010-022544). For example, by displaying an image of a predetermined character before the stoppage of the variation of the decorative symbols, the player is informed that the probability that the variable display result of the decorative symbols will result in a big hit is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). The suggested rendition was being carried out.
However, some players do not necessarily like to see such suggestive effects. For example, although a certain suggestive effect was displayed multiple times, if the results of the most recent multiple variable displays in which the suggestive effect was displayed were all variable display results indicating failure, the suggestive effect Therefore, there are cases where the player feels distrust, such as "I'm going to fail again...", or feels that the suggestive performance is bad, and doesn't want to see the suggestive performance. Such a tendency is conspicuous in a suggestive effect in which a player is requested to operate a predetermined operation unit, and a display indicating a predetermined degree of expectation is displayed based on the reception of the operation. In such a case, the player may lose interest in the game by being forced to visually recognize a suggestive effect that he/she does not want to see even though he has purposely operated the operation means.

Also, there are players who prefer that the result of the variable display be clearly announced, rather than being suggested with half-hearted expectations. For such a player, there is a risk that showing a suggestive effect with a low expectation level (for example, 10%) may lead to a decrease in interest.

However, the presence of such a player has not been considered conventionally, and there is room for improvement in the mode of execution of the suggestive effect. In the following embodiments, taking into account the presence of such players, an embodiment configured to suppress a decline in interest will be described.

144 and the like, in a battle scene between a self-tank and an enemy tank, a shield bullet is displayed by firing shield bullets from the self-tank capable of firing newly developed shield bullets. Explain reach.

FIG. 144 is a time chart showing the progress of "shield bullet reach" in this embodiment. In this time chart, when it is determined in the main control board 1310 to execute the effect pattern of executing the variable display of the special symbol over 34 seconds corresponding to one start winning, the game is played by the control by the peripheral control board 1510. In the display area of the board side effect display device 1600, the progress of the effect mode in which the variable display of decorative symbols is executed for 34 seconds is shown. In addition, after the end of the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols, the stop display of the special symbols and the stop display of the decorative symbols are executed over one second. Also, in the display area, in addition to the variable display of decorative patterns, the image of the own tank, the image of the enemy tank, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, a simulated image imitating the defense button 3740, etc. are displayed. Details will be described later.
145 and 146 show the display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing of the time chart explained with reference to FIG. 144. FIG.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 144, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

Further, each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 149-196 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 144-148. Therefore, in the description of each embodiment shown in FIGS. 149 to 196, the configurations (for example, the display mode at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the display mode at the time of stop, etc.) that are not mentioned in particular are shown in FIGS. 144 to 148. The embodiments in the embodiments shown in are applicable.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 144, at timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. From the timing t0 to the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(b), left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed. At the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(c), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same pattern (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the self-tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. Also, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, acceptance of operation of defense button 3740 is enabled.

FIG. 145(a) shows a state in which the image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Reached decorative patterns ("3", "↓", "3") are displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of the tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, and the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. The image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, the image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and the dialog image of the character "Colonel Dinah" and the window image surrounding the dialog image are displayed at the bottom left of the display area. It shows a state in which a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", which is a character for presentation, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed. In addition, the player himself is set as a second lieutenant who controls his own tank, and moves on the battlefield with his own tank with "Colonel Dyna", which is higher than the second lieutenant, and "Sergeant Might", who is lower than the second lieutenant. A production that goes on is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of immersion in the virtual reality ready-to-win effect.

By pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time, as shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dina" in FIG. 145(a), an effect is performed in which a shield image is displayed in front of the own tank, which will be described later in detail.

At timing t9, a white enemy tank image starts to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area and moves leftward. FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving leftward toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, a white image of an enemy tank moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At this timing, the image of the enemy tank in white may be replaced with the image of the enemy tank in red. At the same time, the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might". The operation effective period of attack button 3710 continues for three seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.
There are two types of enemy tank images displayed on the road: a white enemy tank image and a red enemy tank image. The display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that when the image of the enemy tank in red is displayed, the special lottery result is more likely to be a big hit.
Two types of simulated images simulating the attack button 3710 are prepared: a white simulated image and a red simulated image. The display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a big hit when the player is selected.

A combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.
For example, if the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are both white, the expectation level is 10%. The appearance ratio may be set so that the expectation level is 20% when the color of is red, and the expectation level is 30% when both the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are red.
Note that the color of only one of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be changed from white to red to indicate the degree of expectation. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the expectation of the big win is 100%. You may prepare.

FIG. 145(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

On the other hand, FIG. 145(e) shows a state in which a red simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a red image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t11 to timing t12. .

When the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 (timing t11 to timing t14), an image of a shell flying out from the battery of the own tank is displayed, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. is transformed into a destroyed image. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. Also, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 144(b) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710. FIG. Also, FIG. 144(c) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 .

The display of the destruction image of the enemy tank and the display of the explosion image of the cannonball continue for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t13, the display of the destruction image of the enemy tank and the display of the explosion image of the cannonball are continued until timing t16.

There are two types of images of cannonball explosions: one with a moderate explosion and one with a large explosion. Display ratio is set. For example, when an image of a shell exploding to a moderate degree is displayed, the expectation level is +10 compared to the expectation level indicated by the image of the enemy tank and the image simulating the attack button 3710 that have been displayed up to that point. %, and when an image in which a cannonball explodes greatly is displayed, the degree of expectation may be set to increase by +20%.

FIG. 145(d) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a moderately exploded cannonball are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, FIG. 145(f) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a large explosion of a cannonball are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. It should be noted that even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. Either the image of the explosion or the image of a large explosion of the cannonball is displayed on the road. Thus, the color of the moving tank image and the color of the destroyed tank image are the same.

FIG. 144(c) is a time chart showing what is displayed in the display area when the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid period of operation. If the attack button 3710 is not operated within the effective period of operation, at timing t14, which is the timing at which the effective period of operation ends, an image effect in which shells fly out of the own tank is displayed, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. transforms into a destroyed image. In addition, either an image in which the cannonball explodes moderately or an image in which the cannonball explodes greatly is displayed. Moreover, the display of the destruction image continues for three seconds from timing t14 to timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In this way, the player sees the same display effect regardless of whether or not the attack button 3710 is operated, except for the display timing and the lateral position of the enemy tank. Then, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is recognized by the performance mode of the visually recognized display performance.

After this display effect is performed from timing t9 to timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, from timing t17 to timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), The same performance is performed again. In addition, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is similarly suggested in the effect performed again.

In addition, from timing t9 to timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, and from timing t17 to timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, the enemy tank moves and is destroyed. However, it is possible to execute a production pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the former timing, or the enemy tank is moved and destroyed only at the latter timing. An effect pattern in which an effect is executed may be executed. Also, at two timings, an effect pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed may be executed. In this case, the player does not operate the attack button 3710, and the “shield bullet reach” effect ends.

It is preferable to set the appearance ratio of the production pattern so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the production pattern in which the enemy tank is displayed than in the production pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed. Also, it is better to set the appearance rate of the production pattern so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the production pattern in which the enemy tank moves twice and is destroyed than in the production pattern in which the enemy tank moves only once and is destroyed. . With such a configuration, when this suggestive effect is executed, the enemy tank can be moved and destroyed 0 to 2 times. The player's expectations for the destruction mode will increase. Note that an effect pattern in which the enemy tank is moved and destroyed three times or more may be configured to be executable.

FIG. 144(d) is a time chart showing what is displayed when the defense button 3740 is not operated. As shown in FIG. 144(d), when the defense button 3740 is not operated, the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed. FIGS. 145(c) to 145(f) show display modes in the display area when the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed.

Next, the display mode in the display area when the defense button 3740 is operated will be described.

By pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time during the effective period of operation of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27), the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank are set to prevent attacks from the enemy tank. Shield image is displayed. The condition for determining that the long press has started may be that the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for 0.5 seconds. Also, as long as the long press of defense button 3740 continues, the display of the shield image continues.
Although the shape of the shield image is a horizontally long oval in the drawing, the shape of the shield image may be configured to change dynamically during display. Also, the shield image may be displayed intermittently. For example, when the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for a long time, the shield image gradually becomes smaller after the shield image starts to be displayed. A display effect may be repeatedly performed in which a shield bullet is fired at a target to explode and a new shield image is displayed. Continuing the display of the shield image includes such a display mode.

FIG. 144(e) is a time chart showing a display mode when the defense button 3740 is long-pressed during the effective period of operation of the defense button 3740. FIG. As shown in this time chart, the shield image is displayed from timing t7 when it is determined that the player has pressed the button for a long time to timing t24 when the player releases the defense button 3740 and the long pressing ends. is displayed. By displaying the shield image based on the player's operation of the defense button 3740 in this way, it is possible to hide the color of the image of the enemy tank, the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank. is.

For example, FIG. 146(a) shows the timing after the display shown in FIG. It shows a display state displayed when the long press of the defense button 3740 by is operated. As shown in the drawing, a shield image is displayed based on detection of a long press of defense button 3740 . In addition, the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" also corresponds to the display of the shield image.

FIG. 146(b) shows a state in which the shield image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t9 to timing t11) while the image of the enemy tank is displayed and the tank is moving toward the road. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 145(b), the display state shown in FIG. 146(b) is obtained.

FIGS. 146(c) and 146(e) show an image of an enemy tank displayed on the road and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 (for example, timing t11 to timing t14). The display mode in which the image is displayed is shown. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 145(c), the display state shown in FIG. 146(c) is obtained. Similarly, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 145(e), the display state shown in FIG. 146(e) is obtained.

At this time, although the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 suggest the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, these images are hidden by the shield image. , it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation for a big hit.

FIGS. 146(d) and 146(f) show a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, timing t12 to timing t15 when there is an operation, and timing t14 to timing t17 when no operation is performed), and the shield image is displayed. An example of the displayed state is shown. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 145(d), the display state shown in FIG. 146(d) is obtained. Similarly, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 145(f), the display state shown in FIG. 146(f) is obtained.

At this time, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is suggested by the explosion mode of the cannonball and the color of the destroyed image of the enemy tank. It is designed to be able to make the degree difficult to recognize.

In order to hide the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the explosion mode of the shell with the shield image, the display priority of the shield image is changed to the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the shell. should be higher than the display priority of the image. Also, it is preferable to set the display priority of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" higher than the display priority of the shield image.

It should be noted that the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is from timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect starts to timing t27 after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Also, even if the defense button 3740 has been pressed for a long time, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the operation effective period of the defense button 3740 expires.

According to such a configuration, the effect display suggesting the degree of expectation can be made difficult to be visually recognized according to the player's preference, so that the player who does not want to know the degree of expectation is free from stress. It is possible to provide a game environment.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when the image of the enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area as shown in FIG. It can be made difficult to visually recognize depending on the taste of the person or the mood of the day.

With reference to FIGS. 145(a) to 145(f) and FIGS. 146(a) to 146(f), an image of an enemy tank and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 are colored white or red. In addition to these, it is configured to execute a production pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank or a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 in gold with an expectation level of 100%. good too. In particular, it is preferable that the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are displayed first in a pattern in which they are displayed twice. In this case, the player cancels the long press of the defense button 3740 for the second display of the image of the enemy tank. You can enjoy the "Reach" performance.

It should be noted that the player may operate the defense button 3740 by mistake for the attack button 3710 . In this case, it is difficult to visually recognize simulated images imitating the attack button 3710, images of moving enemy tanks, images of destroyed enemy tanks, and images of exploding artillery shells. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed not only when the defense button 3740 is simply pressed, but also when the defense button 3740 is long pressed. With such a configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, the shield image is not displayed immediately, so the player who wants to see the suggestive effect feels stressed. can prevent the occurrence of

Although the display of the shield image ends when the long press of the defense button 3740 ends, the display of the shield image may continue for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the long press ends.

When the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 for a long time, the shield image concentrically increases step by step, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image concentrically decreases step by step. can be configured to For example, the shield image may concentrically increase in steps over 2 seconds, and the shield image may concentrically decrease in steps over 2 seconds. With such a configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, by quickly releasing the defense button 3740, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or an enemy tank image can be displayed. Since the visibility of is restored, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player who wants to see the suggestive effect feels stressed. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation can be changed from one display mode of not hidden at all, partially hidden, or completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed.

Although an example in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the player's operation has been shown, the display mode of the shield image being displayed can be changed independently of the player's operation. may be configured. For example, the size of the shield image can be automatically increased or decreased, the shape of the shield image can be changed periodically, or the transparency of the shield image can be changed. You may Moreover, you may combine these display modes. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation (simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the image of the enemy tank) is completely hidden or partially hidden by the shield image. The configuration may be such that the display mode can be changed from one of the display mode and the all-hidden mode to another display mode.

Instead of pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time, or in addition, when it is detected that the defense button 3740 has been repeatedly hit by the player, the shield image may be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds. FIG. 144(f) is a time chart showing such a transformed effect mode. In this time chart, the shield image was displayed in the period from timing t10 to timing t16 and in the period from timing t18 to timing t24, based on the detection of repeated hits of the defense button 3740 by the player. is shown. It should be noted that the condition for determining that the key has been hit four times or more in one second may be set as a condition for determining that the key has been repeatedly hit. Note that after the shield image is displayed, there is no need to continue hitting repeatedly, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds).
Instead of pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time or repeatedly hitting it, when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery may be held and the shield image may be displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Also, the shield image may be displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed at the same time. Alternatively, when the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 138 is employed, the shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while tilting the right lever 3730 forward.

In this way, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when a specific condition regarding the defense button 3740 is satisfied based on the operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the shield image is immediately displayed, and the visibility of the suggestive effect is not hindered.

Operation of the defense button 3740 when only the attack button 3710 is effective and the result of the variable display in which the tank ready-to-reach effect is executed shows a failure for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 or 5 times) in succession. It may be configured so that reception is enabled and "shield bullet reach" in which a shield image is displayed can be executed. In addition, on the condition that the result of the variable display in which the "shield bullet reach" is executed indicates a big hit, operation reception for the defense button 3740 is disabled, and operation of only the attack button 3710 is enabled. until the result of the variable display performed by is consecutively showing a failure for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or 5 times), the display of the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to invalidate the erroneous operation of the defense button 3740 and reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the special lottery results of losing consecutively occur.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 should be set longer than the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . For example, in the present embodiment, the movement time of the enemy tank before the operation valid period is 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is 3 seconds. It is preferable to set the display time of the shield image to 6 seconds. With such a configuration, once the display of the shield image is started, the hidden state of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is maintained until the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends. It is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

After the attack button 3710 is operated or when the effective period of the attack button 3710 expires, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed and an image of the shell exploding are displayed, but these images are also hidden by the shield image. A display time of the shield image may be determined. For example, in this embodiment, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 is set to 6 seconds. do it. With such a configuration, the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding can be hidden by the shield image.

In this embodiment, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds. A time longer than the total time (for example, 10 seconds) may be used. With such a configuration, by displaying the shield image while the enemy tank is moving, both the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding cannonball are shielded. Can be hidden by an image.

The display of the shield image that has been displayed for a predetermined time may be configured so that the player can stop the display. For example, by pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 while the shield image is being displayed, the display of the shield image may be ended. By adopting such a configuration, by visually recognizing a part of the effect suggesting the degree of expectation, the player who has noticed that the effect indicating the degree of expectation is actually being executed is notified of the effect. can quickly provide a visible situation. Alternatively, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when the suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation higher than a predetermined level is started. For example, when an image of a golden enemy tank with an expectation level of 100% or a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped.

On the other hand, if the display of the shield image is stopped by satisfying a simple condition such as pressing a button, the effect can be easily visually recognized by the player's erroneous operation of the button. state. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied based on the pressing of the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740, it is preferable to stop the display of the shield image. Specifically, the same conditions as those for starting the display of the shield image as described above may be adopted as the conditions for stopping the display of the shield image.

An operation method for stopping the display of the shield image may be displayed while the shield image is being displayed. For example, in the dialog window of "Colonel Dina", the line "This weakling! Press the mission button to release the shield!" !” should be displayed. With such a configuration, even if the player displays the shield image by mistake, the display of the shield image can be quickly terminated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 144(e), it is possible to display the shield image multiple times by allowing multiple operations of the defense button 3740 to be accepted during the valid period. . Also, as long as the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for a long time, the shield image is displayed for an extended period of time and is displayed continuously. As a result, the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding cannonball can all be made invisible.

It may be possible to execute a display effect in which the shield image cannot be displayed or the display of the shield image being displayed is terminated. For example, at the timing when an image suggesting high expectations (for example, a red or gold image) is displayed, the display of the shield image is terminated, and the image suggesting high expectations is displayed for a predetermined period, or The display of the shield image may be disabled by the player until the variable display of the decorative symbols suggesting the degree of expectation is completed. Alternatively, during the display of the shield image, the start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball Depending on the result of prefetching , At the timing when it is decided to perform a high-expectation production, the display of the shield image ends, and the “shield bullet reach” production continues until the variable display of the decorative pattern targeted for reading ends. In addition, the shield image may be configured so as not to be displayed by the player. Also, as a display effect in this case, an image of an enemy tank that is larger than the shield image may be displayed.
In this manner, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Also, by displaying a predetermined image that is larger than the shield image, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation that an advantageous state will occur.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at the timing t0, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 145(a).

In this embodiment, the period for accepting the operation of the defense button 3740 ends before the variable display of the decorative symbols stops. 3740 operation acceptance may be continued. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the stop mode of the decorative symbols indicating the special lottery result difficult to see by the shield image according to the intention of the player.

By combining these embodiments, the shield image may be displayed from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of the variation display (timing t35).

An embodiment has been described in which the shield image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (such as 6 seconds) under conditions such as repeated hits of the defense button 3740 and a 1/3 lottery performed when the defense button 3740 is operated. It may be configured so that it can be set by the user. For example, during the demonstration period when the variable display of decorative symbols is not being performed and the jackpot game is not being played, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, the display time of the shield image can be reduced, for example, from 5 seconds to 60 seconds. It may be configured so that it can be set between By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to display the shield image in a manner that suits the mood of the player.

The period during which the shield image can be displayed may be set by the player based on the number of variations of the decorative symbols. For example, when 20 times is set as the number of variations of the decorative pattern, the defense button 3740 is pressed in the tank ready-to-win effect that occurs during the period from when the player makes the setting until the number of times of variation of the decorative pattern reaches 20. By operating it, the shield image can be displayed. On the other hand, if the player does not make the setting, the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during the tank ready-to-win effect.

Even if the condition for displaying the shield image again is met during the display of the shield image, no new shield image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive performance from being executed. On the other hand, if the condition to display the shield image again is met while the shield image is being displayed, the display time of the shield image being displayed will be postponed starting from the timing when the condition to display the shield image is met. may be configured to be According to such a configuration, it is possible to continue to hide the suggestion effect with the shield image while suppressing excessive effect.

On the other hand, if the condition for displaying the shield image again is met during the display of the shield image, a new shield image may be displayed immediately. In this case, the display of the shield image being displayed may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or a new shield image may be displayed in addition to the shield image being displayed. With such a configuration, the time during which the shield image is not displayed can be shortened, and the time during which the shield image is displayed can be easily extended.

Further, it may be configured to output sound effects corresponding to the type of image of the enemy tank, the type of simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the type of the explosion image of the cannonball. In this case, the degree of expectation is indicated to the player by the output sound as well.
On the other hand, for a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation, output of such effect sound is not preferable. Therefore, when displaying the shield image, the output of the special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. Then, the output of the special sound is preferably continued until the display of the shield image ends.
Also, when outputting the special sound, the volume of the effect sound may be suppressed. It is preferable to continue suppressing the volume of the effect sound until the display of the shield image ends. Also, the volume of the special sound may be higher than the volume of the effect sound. Alternatively, both of these may be adopted.
With such a configuration, the effect sound becomes difficult to hear due to the volume reduction, and the effect sound becomes difficult to hear due to the special sound. can be obfuscated.
It should be noted that it may be configured to output a predetermined effect sound that does not indicate the level of expectation when an enemy tank appears. In this case, a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation can display a shield image and start outputting a special sound by operating the defense button 3740 promptly at the timing of hearing the predetermined effect sound. can.

Even in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state in which the variation time of decorative symbols is short, or a probability variation state in which the probability of winning a big prize in a special lottery increases, the suggestive performance may be executed. In this case, the shield image may not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. By adopting such a configuration, in a game state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than usual, if the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, or an enemy tank will appear. It is possible to prevent the destroyed image from becoming difficult to see, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the highly anticipated presentation.

On the other hand, when the suggestive effect can be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state or a variable probability state, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to hide the suggestive effect even in a game state in which a big win is more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a game state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image is reduced or the display time of the shield image is shortened compared to the normal state, so that the suggestive effect hidden by the shield image is displayed. You may make it improve visibility a little.

In addition, during the jackpot game state, the suggestive effect may be executable. In the suggestive effect in this case, the degree of expectation that the big win will occur again after the big win game state ends is reported by performing a pending look-ahead, or the time saving state and the probability change state that are more advantageous than the normal state after the big win end. It is preferable to notify the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to . For example, when the 10-round big win is being executed, such a suggestive effect may be performed from the 3rd round to the 5th round. With such a configuration, the defense button 3740 is erroneously operated at the timing when the game state that occurs after the big win can be known, and the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the enemy tank are destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image that has been processed from becoming difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the suggestive effect can be executed during the big hit, the shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 . With such a configuration, it is possible to hide the suggestion effect even during the big win. To make it difficult for a player who does not want to know the game state after the big win to recognize the degree of expectation of the game state after the big win.

An effect similar to the "shield bullet reaching" effect in which the own tank moves on the road may be executed over a plurality of times of variation of the decoration pattern as a prefetch effect based on the prefetch of the suspension in the normal state.
In this case, it is preferable that the display effect of moving the own tank on the road is continuously performed from the start to the stop of the variation of the decorative pattern a plurality of times. In addition, while the decorative pattern is changing, the degree of expectation of the big hit for the prefetched hold is suggested by the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the explosion of the cannonball, etc. Alternatively, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 to make it difficult to visually recognize these images. Then, it is preferable that the display of the shield image is displayed over a plurality of times of variable displays of the decorative symbols.
It should be noted that the pending image to be prefetched may be configured to be hidden by the shield image.
In this way, a sense of unity can be produced by performing a suggestive effect that the own tank moves on the road across the variations of a plurality of decorative patterns.

When a big hit occurs due to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which your tank moves on the road, if a big hit occurs, the display effect of your tank moving will continue until after or during the big hit. may In addition, after the occurrence of the big win game state, the degree of expectation that the big win will occur again after the big win game state ends is reported by performing a pending prefetch, or the time saving state and probability of being in a state more advantageous than the normal state after the big win end. It is preferable to notify the degree of expectation as to whether or not the vehicle will shift to the variable state by means of a suggestive effect that the own tank moves on the road. Furthermore, after a big hit, when the time saving state or the probability changing state is reached, the suggesting effect that the own tank moves on the road may be continued until the time saving state or the probability changing state ends. In this case as well, the shield image displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 should be configured so that the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the explosion image of the cannonball, etc., are difficult to see. .
In addition, the display of the shield image may be configured to be displayed across the variable display state of the decorative patterns, the stop display state of the decorative patterns, the big win game state, and the variable state of the decorative patterns after the big win game state.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the performance.

Although an example in which part of the image of the enemy tank is made invisible by the shield image has been shown, the entire image of the enemy tank may be made invisible by the shield image.
FIG. 147(a) shows a modification of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 146(e). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 147(a), all of the image of the enemy tank and part of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

An example has been shown in which a portion of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is rendered invisible by the shield image, but the shield image may be configured so that the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is entirely invisible. good too.
FIG. 147(b) shows a modification of the production shown with reference to FIG. 146(e). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 147(b), part of the image of the enemy tank and all of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

The shield image shows an example in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and part of the explosion pattern of the shell are invisible, but the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion pattern of the shell are all visible with the shield image. It may be configured to be disabled.
FIG. 147(c) shows a modification of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 146(d). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 147(c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of the cannonball are all hidden by the shield image.

An image of an enemy tank whose display priority is lower than that of the shield image because the shield image is opaque, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank, and an explosion mode of the cannonball are rendered invisible by the shield image. However, the shield image may be translucent, and these images with low display priority may be visible through the shield image.

In this way, the simulated image simulating the first operation unit and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation unit are displayed in a manner hidden by the image displayed based on the operation of the second operation unit. These images can mask the degree of expectation implied by the
Further, part of the simulated image simulating the first operation unit and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation unit can be displayed in a manner hidden by the image displayed based on the operation of the second operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the image while recognizing that the image indicating the degree of expectation is being displayed.
In addition, only a part of these images suggests the degree of expectation, and it is possible to hide part or all of the part that suggests the degree of expectation with the shield image. good too.

Although the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is used to indicate the degree of expectation, the shape and size of the simulated image itself may be different instead of or in addition to the color of the simulated image. Then, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the shape of the simulated image itself or the size of the image. Here, it is preferable to configure such that the area protruding from the shield image is larger when the degree of expectation is high. A similar configuration may also be adopted for the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the mode of explosion of the shell. With such a configuration, when the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to make it difficult for the image indicating the degree of expectation to be hidden by the shield image.

In the state where the shield image is displayed, a larger shield image is displayed by performing an operation with a higher degree of difficulty (for example, pressing the defense button 3740 for a longer period of time or pressing repeatedly). good too. Also, with this large shield image, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion mode of the cannonball are hidden more than the normal shield image. may
By adopting such a configuration, the player can be involved in the ratio of hiding the image suggesting the degree of expectation, so that the interest can be further improved.

FIGS. 148(a) to 148(d) show modifications of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 145(c). FIG. 148(a) shows an effect example in which a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. FIG. FIG. 148(b) shows an effect example in which a small-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 . FIG. 148(c) shows an effect example in which a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . FIG. 148(d) shows an effect example in which a large-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 .
The degree of expectation for a big win is higher when a large-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed than when a small-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. configured to be high.
With such a configuration, when a simulated image with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image is increased, so that the player is informed that the degree of expectation is high. can be recognized.
In addition to the simulated image, the image of the enemy tank or the image of the destroyed enemy tank may be configured to have different shapes and sizes to similarly indicate the degree of expectation.

Although the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding artillery shell are used to suggest the degree of expectation, the embodiment applied to a certain image will be described in other examples. It may also be applied to embodiments in images. Alternatively, embodiments applied to one plurality of images may be applied to embodiments applied to other plurality of images.

A simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an explosion of artillery shells have been shown to suggest the level of expectation. may be configured as suggested. In this case, it is preferable that at least this portion is hidden by the shield image. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the degree of expectation unrecognizable or difficult to recognize while making it possible to grasp the progress of the presentation.

As described above, according to the "shield bullet reach" in the present embodiment, the predetermined image indicating the degree of expectation related to the first operation unit is made difficult to be visually recognized by the image displayed by the operation of the second operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who does not want to know the degree of expectation with the option of hiding the degree of expectation, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a plurality of operation units has been known (for example, JP-A-2011-087638). In addition, the effective period during which the operation to the operation unit can be accepted is limited to a part of the period during which the decorative pattern changes. Therefore, even if the desire to operate the operation unit increases, some players feel frustrated that they cannot operate the operation unit. In addition, when an operation is performed during the effective period, a display effect corresponding to the operation is always performed, so the operation of the operation unit sometimes feels rutted. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, considering that there are players who think like this, an operation means that can be operated for a long period of time while the decorative symbols are changing is provided, and the operation to the operation unit is supported. Therefore, a change in display is not necessarily given, but a special change in display is provided on the condition that a specific condition is satisfied.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 144 and the like will be described below with reference to time charts shown in FIGS. 149 to 152 and display examples shown in FIGS. In the "special machine gun reach" production in this embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the "special machine gun reach" effect, the effect pattern is executed in which operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 instead of the defense button 3740 is valid. The decoration pattern of the mission button 3700 is in the ready-to-reach state, and operation reception becomes effective at the timing (timing t5) when the ready-to-reach effect in which the own tank moves is started. The acceptance of operation ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank is displayed twice.

The period during which operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid (timing t11 to timing t14). includes a period during which operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid. Also, as described above, the attack button 3710 is always given a display change in response to an operation accepted during the operation valid period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not necessarily performed. is granted. For example, each time the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery with a probability of 1/3 of winning is performed. An image of an explosion occurring upon hitting is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period (timing t5 to timing t27) in which the acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid, indicating that the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. be

The time chart in FIG. 149 shows an example of the effect when neither attack button 3710 nor mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 149, at timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. From the timing t0 to the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(b), left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed. At the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(c), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same pattern (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the self-tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. Also, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, acceptance of operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled.

FIG. 153(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Reached decorative patterns ("3", "↓", "3") are displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of the tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, and the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. The image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, the image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and the dialog image of the character "Colonel Dinah" and the window image surrounding the dialog image are displayed at the bottom left of the display area. A window image surrounding the speech image of "Sergeant Might", who is a character in the production, and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the window image displaying the speech image of "Colonel Dinah". is shown.

By operating the mission button 3700, as shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dina" in FIG. 153(a), an effect is performed in which a bullet is fired from the special machine gun of the own tank and displayed moving, which will be described later in detail. do.

At timing t9, a white enemy tank image starts to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area and moves leftward. FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, a white image of an enemy tank moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At the same time, the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might". The operation effective period of attack button 3710 continues for three seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.

FIG. 153(b) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t11. FIG. 153(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image of the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank reaches the left edge of the road. Also, the valid period of operation for the attack button 3710 expires. FIG. 153(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves off the screen and is not displayed.

The operation effective period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are continued until timing t27. At timing t27, the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 end.

Thereafter, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display mode is changed to that shown in FIG. 139(f), and at timing t34, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. If the special lottery result is a loss, the display state shown in FIG. 139(g) is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, FIG. becomes the display state shown in .

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 149, an example of the effect when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 150, an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is operated by the player will be described.

The time chart in FIG. 150 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t12. In this case, the movement of the cannonball is displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 153(e) shows a display example when the cannonball is moving. Also, at timing t12 when attack button 3710 is operated, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 153(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 151, an example of an effect when the player operates the mission button 3700 will be described.

The time chart in FIG. 151 shows an example of an effect when the mission button 3700 is operated at timing t12. FIG. 151(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from a special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. FIG. 151(b) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 151(a), a display is performed from timing t12 to timing t13 in which the bullet fired from the special machine gun moves. FIG. 154(a) shows a display example when the bullet is moving. At timing t14, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 151(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 154(b) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 151(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. For example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move leftward. Also, the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. FIG. 154(c) is a display example in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 152, an example of an effect when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 152 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are simultaneously operated at timing t12. FIG. 152(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated and an image of a bullet exploding is displayed. FIG. 152(b) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the mission button 3700 is operated but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 152(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving display of the bullet fired from the battery and a moving display of the bullet fired from the special machine gun are performed. FIG. 154(d) shows a display example in which the cannonball and the bullet are moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 152(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploded cannonball and an image of an exploded bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the exploding cannonball, and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 154(e) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding artillery shell are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 152(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is lost (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is a production example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 154(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 154(e), the size of the image of the exploded bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the image of the exploded shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. is also big. Also, the image of the exploded cannonball displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 has a higher display priority than the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Further, the image of the exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 has a higher display priority than the image of the exploding cannonball displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 .
With such a configuration, a display change that is not necessarily given based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be brought into a conspicuous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display change imparted in this way.

When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted, an image of an enemy tank destroyed in response to the operation accepted by the player is displayed. Therefore, the player operates the attack button 3710 during the effect of moving the tank to display an explosion image, and after displaying the image of the enemy tank in a destroyed display mode, operates the mission button 3700. , a further explosion image can be applied to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. On the other hand, the player can operate only the mission button 3700 without operating the attack button 3710 to change the image of the enemy tank to the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

Image of destroyed enemy tank, simulated image of mission button 3700, simulated image of attack button 3710, image of exploding cannonball, image of exploding bullet (color, size, shape, etc.) At least one of them may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt the same method (color, size, shape, etc. of each image) as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. It should be noted that these images do not have to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win.

According to such a configuration, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition (a 1/3 lottery is awarded) is satisfied, the image of the enemy tank is replaced with the image of the destroyed enemy tank. can be changed. Also, an image of an exploded bullet can be added to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. By giving such a display change, the player feels that the operation of the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and feels great pleasure in making the display change appear with great difficulty. Interest can be improved.

The explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 has a higher display priority than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 . With such a configuration, in addition to the operation of the mission button 3700, the visibility of the image that is displayed only when a specific condition (1/3 lottery wins) is achieved is ensured. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the image displayed by the operation of 3700 is obstructed and the player feels dissatisfied.

A plurality of modes with different appearance rates may be displayed as modes of display changes performed in the display area in accordance with the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 . For example, there are three destruction images of enemy tanks with different degrees of destruction. Destructive images to be displayed may be selected and displayed such that the probability of displaying a destructive image with a low degree of destruction is 30% and the probability of displaying a destructive image with a low degree of destruction is 60%. Also, a destruction image of an enemy tank with a very large degree of destruction, which is displayed at an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated, may be provided. According to this, when the display change effect is made to appear with difficulty, the player is presented with a rarer display change effect. Instead of or in addition to the destruction image, a similar display may be performed in the explosion image.

When the attack button 3710 is not operated by the player, at the end of the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 (timing t14), a cannonball is automatically fired from the turret, and even if the player does not operate it, the shell is automatically fired. It may be configured such that a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can concentrate on operating the mission button 3700 .

In this embodiment, when the enemy tank is not displayed, the mission button 3700 is operated to fire a bullet from the special machine gun possessed by the own tank, and a display is made in which the fired bullet hits the road and explodes. Is possible. For example, by operating the mission button 3700 at timing t5, a display is performed in which the bullets fired from timing t5 to timing t6 move. Further, when the 1/3 lottery is won, an image display is performed for three seconds from timing t6 to timing t9, in which the shot bullet hits the ground and explodes.
The operation timing at which the moving enemy tank is destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the movement period of the enemy tank. The operation effective period of the attack button 3710 may be from timing t11 to timing t14.

On the other hand, before the attack button 3710 is operated, the player operates the mission button 3700 and wins the 1/3 lottery. In this case, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710, the display of the image of the shell moving or the image of the shell exploding corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 is not displayed. It may be configured not to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect in which the player feels as if he or she defeated the enemy tank by himself. satisfaction can be enhanced. In addition, since the image of the exploding shell is not displayed, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 to ensure the visibility of the image of the exploding bullet, which is an effect that has been made to appear with great effort.
When the mission button 3700 is operated in a situation where the image of the exploded cannonball corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 and the image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed, the operation of the mission button 3700 is performed. add an image of the bullet exploding. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction as if the enemy tank had been destroyed.

Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 144 and the like, the color of the enemy tank and the state of destruction of the enemy tank may be used to indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the color of the enemy tank and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank be visually recognized by the image of the bullet exploding displayed by operating the mission button 3700 . With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the indicated degree of expectation.
Further, in the case of a suggestive effect with a low degree of expectation, the bullet explodes by operating the mission button 3700 during a predetermined period after the suggestive effect ends (for example, the period from timing t16 to timing t27). Since the displayed image can be displayed once or a plurality of times, it is possible to recover the interest in the game that has decreased due to the execution of an effect with a low degree of expectation.

Although an embodiment in which the mission button 3700 is operated has been shown, in addition to the mission button 3700, a right lever 3730 and a left lever 3720 can be operated, and the direction of the special machine gun can be changed in the left and right directions by the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720. may be made available. When the special machine gun is facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated is set to 1/2, which is easier than 1/3. If the player is not facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated may be set to 1/10, which is less than 1/3. Furthermore, if the operation modes of the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 are very appropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be 100%. Conversely, if the operation mode of the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is extremely inappropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 0%.
In this case, the player operates the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, aiming to display the enemy tanks in a destroyed state, thereby making the game more immersive. can be obtained. Also, when an image of destroying an enemy tank is displayed, a great sense of accomplishment is felt.

It should be noted that the amusement arcade may be configured so that when the mission button 3700 is operated, the probability of winning the lottery can be changed. Alternatively, the real-time clock function may be used so that the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated changes every week. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set the appearance ratio of the effects according to the tendency of the players who visit the store. For example, the probability of winning the lottery may be cyclically switched to 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, and so on every day.

Mission button 3700 may be configured to have a situation in which operation instructions are displayed and a situation in which operation instructions are not displayed during a period in which operation reception is valid. For example, an effect pattern in which a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed and an effect pattern in which a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed may be executable.

Such selection of effect patterns may be configured so that the store clerk can select which effect pattern is to be executed, or which effect pattern is to be executed using a real-time clock function. may be configured to change monthly. For example, for one month from the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, only a performance pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed can be executed, and after one month from the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, a performance pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed is allowed. It is preferable to configure so that both of the effect patterns for performing the operation instruction display can be executed. Alternatively, when executing "Special Machine Gun Reach", it is preferable to select either one of an effect pattern in which an operation instruction is not displayed and an effect pattern in which an operation instruction is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50/50).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the display contents in the display area in the case of the production pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player unfamiliar with the game is confused by a plurality of operation instructions. On the other hand, a player who is accustomed to the game operates the mission button 3700 even in a situation where the operation instruction display is not displayed, fires a bullet from the special machine gun of the own tank, and the fired bullet hits and explodes. It is possible to display the mode to be used.

An example has been shown in which a ⅓ lottery is performed according to the operation of the mission button 3700, but in this case, the player who expects to receive a display change hits the mission button 3700 repeatedly. On the other hand, if the operation of the mission button 3700 is simply repeated hits, there is also a problem that the player gets bored. Therefore, another operation mode, for example, may be configured such that the ⅓ lottery is performed by long-pressing the mission button 3700 . In this case, for example, the lottery may be drawn once every time the mission button 3700 is kept pressed for one second.

Also, at the timing when the operation of the mission button 3700 can be accepted, it is preferable to instruct the player which operation pattern is required. For example, in the case of an effect pattern requiring continuous pressing of the mission button 3700, the line "Colonel Dyna" is displayed as "Hit the mission button 3700 repeatedly!" In such a case, it is preferable to display "Press and hold the mission button 3700!" as the lines of "Colonel Dyna".

By adopting such a configuration, the player does not carelessly operate the mission button 3700, but feels a sense of tension as to which production pattern is executed and which operation instruction is presented. Also, since the number of times you can receive the lottery is smaller when you press and hold than when you press repeatedly (since you can generally press repeatedly several times per second), in the effect pattern that requires long press If the mode display in which the enemy tank explodes is realized, the player will have a greater sense of accomplishment. By providing a plurality of effect patterns with different degrees of image display difficulty in this way, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
The appearance ratio of the production pattern requiring repeated hits and the production pattern requiring long pressing may be configured to be selected by the store clerk, or may be set using the real-time clock function. may be configured.

Furthermore, when the player executes an operation mode different from the operation instruction mode for the mission button 3700, an effect pattern in which bullets are shot from a special machine gun may be executed.

For example, if the mission button 3700 is repeatedly hit according to the operation instruction in the effect pattern displayed as "Hit the mission button 3700 repeatedly!" When a long press is performed, which is a different operation, a lottery is performed with a probability of 1/2 each time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second. be configured to do so.

On the other hand, if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held according to the operation instruction in the effect pattern that displays "Press and hold the mission button 3700", the display for firing the special machine gun is not displayed, and the operation instruction and the operation instruction are not displayed. is a different operation, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 is performed each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if the lottery is won, a special machine gun is fired. should be configured so that

It may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding in different manners (preferably with different colors or shapes) when the button is pressed for a long time and when the button is hit repeatedly.

Furthermore, as the line of "Colonel Dyna", a production pattern is executed that does not indicate the operation mode of the mission button 3700 that displays the line "I wonder what I should do with the mission button to shoot the special machine gun." may be configured as possible. Internally, as the effect pattern, either the effect pattern requiring a long press of the mission button 3700 or the effect pattern requiring repeated hitting of the mission button 3700 may be executed. Furthermore, if the operation mode by the player is different from the required operation mode, the line of "Colonel Dyna", "I remembered! To shoot the special machine gun, hit the mission button repeatedly!" or "I remembered! To shoot the special machine gun, press and hold the mission button!" In this way, when the operation performed by the player by estimating the operation mode is an appropriate operation mode, or when the operation performed by the player by estimating the operation mode is not appropriate, the appropriate operation mode is performed. When the player performs an appropriate operation mode after the instructions are displayed, an image is displayed in which the bullet explodes in a special mode different from when the instruction display of the operation mode has been performed in advance. may Also, different special sound effects may be output corresponding to the exploding images.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the rebelliousness against the gaming machine in the player who feels as if he or she is constantly being commanded by the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to give surprise and satisfaction to the player who accidentally or intentionally performed an operation different from the instruction. In addition, since the game is played while guessing the mode of operation for the operation unit, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game. Furthermore, the second operation unit may be displayed in a manner in which the operation instructions are not necessarily clearly displayed.

An example has been shown in which a lottery is performed by long-pressing or repeatedly hitting the mission button 3700 to satisfy a specific condition, and a display to fire a special machine gun is performed, but the specific condition can be achieved by other methods. It may be configured as For example, in an effect pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, if the mission button 3700 is held down for 10 seconds, a display of bullets being fired from a special machine gun may be displayed. Alternatively, in an effect pattern that requires repeated hitting of the mission button 3700, if the mission button 3700 can be repeatedly hit 16 times or more in 1 second, a display that bullets are fired from the special machine gun is displayed. good too.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation mode in terms of pressing. Therefore, instead of using the mission button 3700, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by one rotation, whereby the lottery is performed and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun with a probability of 1/3. It may be configured so that the display to be performed is performed. Alternatively, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise a plurality of times (for example, three rotations) to display a bullet being fired from the special machine gun. .

It may be configured such that it is always possible to accept an operation to the mission button 3700 while the decorative pattern is changing. By adopting such a configuration, the mission button 3700 can be operated by the player who feels unreasonable anger because the variable display result is a failure even though the variable display result is a highly expected reach. By doing so, such resentment can be alleviated. For example, it is possible to get rid of the frustration by attacking the decorative design while the decorative design that has been stopped due to failure is being displayed.
Further, it is preferable to configure so that the given display change is not terminated even when the variable display subsequent to the failed variable display is started. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling further dissatisfaction due to forced interruption of the display of the image of the exploding bullet displayed for relief. In this way, when it is determined that the display of the image of the exploding bullet crosses over the variation of the decorative pattern, the "special machine gun reach" is executed again at the timing t0 when the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. It may be configured as By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unnatural state in terms of presentation.

It should be noted that whether or not a bullet is fired may also be determined by lottery by operating the mission button 3700 . For example, it may be configured such that the bullet is fired with a probability of 1/2 and the bullet is not fired with a probability of 1/2.

According to this embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition is satisfied, the display content of the display area is changed. A sense of satisfaction is felt that the display has been performed. In addition, even if the display result by operating the attack button 3710 is disappointing to the player and the player feels dissatisfied with the display result, the display is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700. This alleviates the dissatisfaction felt by the player. In particular, since the mission button 3700 is allowed to be operated a plurality of times, display corresponding to the operation is eventually performed, which is effective in relieving the player's dissatisfaction.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a plurality of operation units has been known (for example, JP-A-2011-087638). In addition, at the timing when the operation on the operation unit becomes valid, it outputs a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, or the operation is accepted at the timing when the operation is performed. There has been known a game machine that outputs a sound effect indicating However, there is still room for further improvement in production. Below, when operation reception for the operation unit is enabled, no sound effect is output even if an operation is performed on the operation unit, and furthermore, when a specific condition is met, an operation reception reception display is displayed. , shows an embodiment in which a special sound is output.

Hereinafter, an embodiment related to "silent machine gun reach", which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 155 and the like. Except for the output of sound effects such as voice, substantially the same display as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 and the like is performed in the display area. Various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 and the like can be applied to the present embodiment. The "silent machine gun" in this embodiment is an improvement of the "special machine gun" in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

The time chart in FIG. 155 shows a situation in which neither attack button 3710 nor mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 155, in this embodiment, it is possible to accept the operation of the attack button 3710 during a predetermined period (timing t9 to timing t11) immediately before the timing at which the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is validated. A sound effect "preparing to fire a cannon", which is an indication sound, is output. Also, at the timing t11 when the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, the output of the sound "OK", which is the effective sound indicating that the acceptance of the operation has become valid, starts. The voice "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. The operation effective period of attack button 3710 ends at timing t14. At timing t14, when the period for accepting the operation of the attack button 3710 ends, the end sound indicating that the period for accepting the operation of the attack button 3710 has ended is output from timing t14 to timing t16. will be
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, the effective operation period starts at timing t5 and ends at timing t27. Not done.

FIG. 159(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5.
As shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dina" in FIG. 159(a), by operating the mission button 3700, an effect is performed in which a bullet is fired from the silent machine gun of the own tank and displayed moving. will be described later.

FIGS. 159 and 160 show examples of display in the display area, and the type of sound output (or being output) in the display state is shown in the upper right portion of the figure. ing. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 159(c), the character string "\OK/" is written in the upper right corner. This indicates that the voice is (or is being output) output.

At timing t9, a white image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Also, from timing t9 to timing t11, a voice saying "cannon firing preparation" is output. FIG. 159(b) shows a state in which a white image of an enemy tank is displayed at the upper right of the display area at timing t9.

At timing t11, the image of the enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 is started. In addition, a sound "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 159(c) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

FIG. 159(c) shows the display state at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank reaches the left edge of the road. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 expires. Also, from timing t14 to timing t16, a voice saying "Stop preparing the cannon~" is output. FIG. 159(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

The time chart of FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an effect example in which the attack button 3710 is operated and the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 156, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this production example) during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710, the sound of firing a shell from the cannon A certain sound effect "boom" is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), and then a sound effect "boom", which is the sound of a shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing t12-timing t13). t13 to timing t15) is performed.

From timing t12 to timing t13, display of the movement of the cannonball is performed. FIG. 159(f) shows a display example when the cannonball is moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of an explosion of a cannonball, is output. FIG. 159(g) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

The time chart of FIG. 157 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is not operated and the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 157(a) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank is destroyed, and FIG. 157(b) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. As described above, the probability of destroying the enemy tank is 1/3, and the probability of not destroying the enemy tank is 2/3. When the enemy tank is destroyed, the destroyed image of the enemy tank is displayed, and at the same time, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding, is output. On the other hand, if the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect is output.
In the production example shown in FIG. 157, since the attack button 3710 is not operated, the same effect sound as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 155 is output.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 157(a), display is performed from timing t12 to timing t13 in which a bullet fired from a silent machine gun moves. FIG. 160(a) shows a display example when the bullet is moving. At timing t14, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 157(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 160(b) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 157(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. For example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank continues to move leftward without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. Also, sound output corresponding to bullet firing is not performed. FIG. 160(c) is a display example in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

The time chart in FIG. 158 shows a situation in which both attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, according to the operation of the attack button 3710, a sound effect similar to that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 156 is output. Also, according to the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect similar to that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 157 is output.

The time chart of FIG. 158 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are simultaneously operated at timing t12. FIG. 158(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated and an image of a bullet exploding is displayed. FIG. 158(b) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the mission button 3700 is operated but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 158(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving display of a bullet fired from a battery and a moving display of a bullet fired from a silent machine gun are performed. In addition, a sound effect "sound", which is the sound of firing a shell from a cannon, is output. FIG. 160(d) shows a display example in which the cannonball and the bullet are moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 158(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploded cannonball and an image of an exploded bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the exploding cannonball, and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. At the same time, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the shell hitting the enemy tank and the shell exploding, is output. FIG. 160(e) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 158(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is lost (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is a production example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound "bang", which is the sound of an enemy tank being hit by a cannonball and exploding, is output. FIG. 160(f) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

The volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 should be higher than the volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Note that in FIGS. 160(b) and 160(e), the fact that the volume of the sound effect "Boom" is high is indicated by increasing the font of the letters "\Boom/".
Also, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) during which the effect sound "BOOM" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound such as BGM may be suppressed. .
In addition, when the sound effect "boom" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the sound effect "boom" that is originally output when the attack button 3710 is operated is not output. Alternatively, if the output is already in progress, the output may be interrupted and the output of the effect sound “boom” based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be started.
Also, the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output should be longer than the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period for outputting the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is three times the period for outputting the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the attack button 3710. It may be a certain 6 seconds. In addition, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 (sound effect "boom") may be output multiple times. For example, a sound effect "Boom" may be output three times in six seconds. Alternatively, the image of the bullet exploding may be displayed a plurality of times. For example, it may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding three times in six seconds.
Also, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 and the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 may be different. For example, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect "bokhan" may be output.
In addition, the display displayed and the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 can be seen or heard by the player once for each player operation that satisfies the conditions. However, the display displayed and the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 are made so that the player can see and hear them two or more times for one player operation that satisfies the conditions. may

Thus, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, and a sound effect indicating that the operation has been accepted are output. .
On the other hand, the mission button 3700 does not output a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, or a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted. Furthermore, even when an operation is performed, a sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) after a predetermined time (one second) after the operation is performed.
As described above, the operation of the mission button 3700 does not necessarily output a sound effect, and thus the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, the sound effect output and the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be output or displayed multiple times, thereby further enhancing interest.
Furthermore, the explosion image displayed based on operation of mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed based on operation of attack button 3710 . Further, it is desirable that the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is easier to hear than the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710, as described above.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize sound effects and special displays associated with the operation of the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to appear.

In the present embodiment, the period for accepting operation of the mission button 3700 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at the timing t0, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 159(a).

In the present embodiment, the period for accepting the operation of the mission button 3700 ends before the variable display of the decorative symbols stops. 3700 operation acceptance may be continued.

By combining these embodiments, it is possible to continue acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of the variation display (timing t35). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to make sound effects and special displays associated with the operation of the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to make appear, appear.

When the display of the image of the exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect of the exploding bullet, which is the sound of the exploding bullet, are performed once based on the operation of the mission button 3700, after these displays and output of the sound are finished, It is preferable to configure so that images can be displayed and sound effects can be output.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 157(a), at timing t15, the output of the sound effect "Boom" is terminated, and at timing t16, the display of the image of the bullet exploding is terminated. In this case, the period from timing t16 to timing t17 is a period during which the image of the exploding bullet is not displayed and the sound effect of the exploding bullet is not output, and these images are displayed after timing t17. and output of sound effects.
Further, even if the operation of the mission button 3700 satisfies the output condition of the sound effect "boom" and the display condition of the image of the exploding bullet between timings t15 and t16, these sounds and displays are executed. During the period, no sound is output or displayed, and if an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after timing t16 when these sounds and displays end, output of sound effects and display of images are resumed. You may start.
By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize the display of images and the output of sound effects each time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be recognized by

In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 155 and the like, the valid period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated occurs only once from timing t11 to timing t14, but it can be configured to occur multiple times. You may For example, the same display may be performed from timing t19 to timing t22. Also, the number of occurrences may be determined based on the result of the special lottery, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the number of occurrences and the contents of each performance. In addition, it is preferable to generate the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 multiple times during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 .
The number of times the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period, that is, the number of times the image of the shell exploding is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 can be determined based on the special lottery result. On the other hand, the display of the image of the exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect of the exploding bullet, which is the sound of the exploding bullet, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, are not based on the result of the special lottery, and are performed multiple times during the operation valid period. can be run multiple times.
With such a configuration, it is possible to successfully display the image of the bullet exploding by performing the operation on the mission button 3700 a plurality of times, thereby enhancing the player's sense of accomplishment.

It should be noted that the own tank may be configured to be equipped with an additional machine gun. In this case, it is possible to employ an intermediate rendering mode between the bullets fired from the battery in this embodiment and the bullets fired from the silent machine gun. For example, a further machine gun basically takes the same operation reception mode and production mode as the silent machine gun in this embodiment, but when the operation is performed, it makes a reception sound indicating that the operation has been accepted (for example, a bullet flying) It may be configured to always output a sound). It should be noted that the defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit in this case. Also, the size of the bullet explosion image should be set to an intermediate size between the cannonball explosion image and the silent machine gun explosion image.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), etc., the fact that the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective is indicated by a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dyna". It is good also as composition which does not report that it is.
For example, in the first half of the operation effective period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 is not performed, and in the latter half of the operation effective period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 may be performed. good. It should be noted that the operation of the attack button 3710 may be enabled when the enemy tank moves from the right side of the display area in the first half and the second half of the effective period of the operation of the mission button 3700 . In this case, when the enemy tank is displayed for the first time, the user can concentrate on operating the attack button 3710. When the enemy tank is displayed for the second time, in addition to operating the attack button 3710, the mission button 3700 can be operated. It is possible to operate.
In this way, even when the display based on the acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid, the configuration may be such that the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed and not performed.
Note that the special sound and display content based on the reception of the operation of the mission button 3700 may differ depending on whether the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed or not. For example, when the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is not performed, compared with the case where the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed, a louder special sound is output or a larger explosion image is displayed. may be performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the amusement felt by the player.

It may be possible to switch between when the operation instruction display is performed and when it is not performed by the above-described real-time clock function or the operation by the player or the store clerk.

As described above, according to the "silent machine gun reach" according to the present embodiment, the special sound is output when the second operation unit is operated and a specific condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, even if the second operation unit is operated, the special sound may or may not be output, so the special sound can be output fortunately. The player will feel great pleasure.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which operation instructions for an operation unit are displayed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-046210). In such a game machine, the player simply follows instructions, and there is room for improvement in terms of enhancing the entertainment. For example, when the operation instruction is not followed, the same display as when the operation instruction is followed after a predetermined time has passed, or when the operation instruction is not performed, no display is performed. It is general and the intention of the player who does not want to follow the operation instructions is not respected. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which a special display is performed when an operation is performed on the operation unit in an operation mode contrary to the contents of the instruction.

The "bomb character reach" in which the own tank and the bomb character fight while accelerating or decelerating the own tank will be described below with reference to FIG. 161 and the like.

FIG. 161 is a table showing effect patterns to be selected in "bomb character reach". Also, FIGS. 162 to 164 are time charts showing examples of effects when one of the effect patterns is executed. 165 to 170 show display examples at predetermined timings in these time charts.

In the "bomb character reach", the decorative symbols are variably displayed for 34 seconds, and the decorative symbols are statically displayed for 1 second. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are in the reach state at timing t5. Further, a period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first period"), a period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second period"), during display In addition to the own tank, a production is performed in which the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed.

In the "bomb character reach", a bomb character appears on the road on which the tank is traveling, and an effect is executed asking whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 so as to advance the tank toward the bomb character. .

As the bomb characters, a bomb character A, which is a bomb character wearing sunglasses, and a bomb character B, whose sunglasses are upside down and opposite to the bomb character A, are displayed. When the bomb character A is displayed, the own tank will be partially destroyed if the own tank rams into it, and when the bomb character B is displayed, the own tank will not be destroyed even if the own tank rams into it, and it will move forward. can proceed.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the own tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might") indicate whether or not the own tank should be rammed into the bomb character. For example, as the line of "Colonel Dinah", a line such as "Determinedly fake! Forward!" is displayed to instruct the player to push the left lever 3720 forward (on the game machine side, the same shall apply hereinafter). Also, as the line of "Sergeant Might", a line such as "Enemy bomb found ahead! Please slow down!" is displayed, instructing the player to push the left lever 3720 backward (to the player side, the same shall apply hereinafter). In addition, instead of indirect expressions such as "forward" and "backward", more direct expressions such as "Push the left lever forward" or "Push the left lever backward" may be adopted. .

In addition, on the left side of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna", there is a vertically long rectangular simulated image imitating the left lever 3720, and an image instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720 ("tilt forward", " "rear tilt") is displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window displaying the words “Sergeant Might”, a vertically long rectangular simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 and an image instructing how to operate the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", if the line of "Colonel Dina" is to give an operation instruction, the instruction is basically a line that indicates an operation instruction that is 100% wrong. Further, the image for instructing the operation mode of left lever 3720 is also an image for instructing an incorrect operation mode. On the other hand, if the dialogue of "Sergeant Might" is to give an operation instruction, the probability that the dialogue that gives the wrong operation instruction will be displayed is 20%, and the probability that the dialogue that will give the correct operation instruction will be displayed is 80%. be. In addition, as the image for instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720, an image matching the contents of the instruction indicated by the dialogue is displayed.
For this reason, the player can operate the lever in the opposite direction to the instruction contents for the dialogue of "Colonel Dinah" and the instruction to operate the left lever 3720. For the dialogue of "Sgt. You just have to be a little careful when operating the lever.
It should be noted that once the player gets used to it, it is possible to distinguish the type of the bomb character from the shape of the sunglasses. can be manipulated.

When the bomb character A is displayed, the self-tank will be partially destroyed when the self-tank collides with it. When the self-tank does not crash into the bomb character A, it is possible to prevent the self-tank from being destroyed by the explosion of only the bomb character A before the self-tank collides. When the bomb character A collides with the self-tank, in the first collision, the gun battery of the self-tank is destroyed (state of the self-tank shown in FIG. 166(c)). In the second collision, the machine gun of the own tank is also destroyed (state of the own tank shown in FIG. 166(f)).
On the other hand, when the bomb character B is displayed, even if the bomb character B collides with the own tank, the own tank is not destroyed and the player can proceed. The bomb character B is actually a huge balloon disguised as a bomb, and even if the own tank crashes into it, the own tank will not be destroyed.
When the own tank advances, a giant bomb character appears, and an effect using the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be executed, the details of which will be described later.

161 shows whether or not the bomb character is displayed and whether or not the bomb character is displayed at timing t6 to timing t11 and timing t16 to timing t21 in the time charts shown in FIGS. 162 and 163. , it indicates whether the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A or the bomb character B. Also, at timing t26, the state that the image of the own tank can take is shown.

Effect pattern 01, effect pattern 03, effect pattern 07, and effect pattern 09 are effect patterns in which bomb character A does not appear. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is in a state where it cannot be destroyed.
Effect pattern 02, effect pattern 04, effect pattern 06, and effect pattern 08 are effect patterns in which bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at the timing t26, the self-tank is either not destroyed or the battery of the self-tank is destroyed.
The production pattern 05 is a production pattern in which the bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at timing t26, one of the states in which the own tank is not destroyed, the gun battery of the tank is destroyed, and the gun battery and machine gun of the tank are destroyed.

Peripheral control board 1510 determines which of the effect patterns 01 to 09 is to be executed. For example, it may be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 162, 165, and 166, the mode of presentation using the explosion character A will be described.
FIG. 162(a) is a time chart showing the state of variable display of decorative symbols executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 162(b) and 162(c).
FIG. 162(b) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the first period. The effect state when the effect pattern 04, which is the effect pattern for displaying the bomb character A, is executed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t15) will be described below.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 165(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character A is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, one of the lines of "Colonel Dinah" is displayed as "I'm sure it's fake! Go forward!" On the other hand, as a line of "Sergeant Might", one of "Enemy bomb found ahead! Please slow down!", "That guy is fake. Forward!" be. In addition, when the dialogue indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the lever with the words "tilt forward" is displayed together with the dialogue. In addition, when the dialogue indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt backward" is displayed together with the dialogue. Further, when the dialogue does not indicate the operation mode of left lever 3720, the simulated image of left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 165(b) to 165(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As described above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dina" and three types for "Sergeant Might", and a total of six combinations can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 165(b) to 165(g).

For example, FIG. 165(b) shows the display of the erroneous operation instruction "Colonel Dina" saying "It's definitely fake! Forward!" This is a display example showing a state in which the line "Bomb found! Slow down!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with the bomb character A by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 backward) opposite to the operation mode instructed by the line of "Colonel Dinah". Further, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 backward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the collision with the bomb character A can be avoided. In addition, the player can avoid collision with the bomb character A by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A and tilting the lever backward, regardless of the instruction content of the lines.

In addition, FIG. 165(e) shows the display of the line "Um, mumble" of "Colonel Dinah" and the line of "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operation instruction, "He's a fake, isn't he? Forward!" It is a display example showing a state in which is displayed.
In this case, the mode of operation is not indicated by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". In addition, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the robot collides with the bomb character A. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A regardless of the instruction content of the lines and then tilts the left lever 3720 backward, the bomb character A is displayed. avoid collisions with

As for the operation period for tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction, it is determined that an operation input has been performed by tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction for a predetermined period of time within a period from timing t6 to timing t11. For example, it is determined that the operation has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9.

When the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, an effect display in which the bomb character A collides with the own tank is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15.
Specifically, from timing t11 to timing t12, an image in which the own tank and the bomb character A collide is displayed. FIG. 166(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image is displayed in which the battery of the own tank is destroyed. FIG. 166(c) is a display example from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character A is displayed, the bomb character A explodes in front of the own tank from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 166(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, display as shown in FIG. 165(a) may be performed.

FIG. 162(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the second period. FIG. 162(c) shows, for example, an effect example when effect pattern 02, which is a effect pattern in which bomb character A is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of effect, the same effect display as the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 162(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

When either the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed in both the first period and the second period as in the production pattern 05, the production pattern 06, the production pattern 08, and the production pattern 09, FIG. 162(c) with the effect mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in (b) or the effect mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 163(b) which will be described later. 163(c) or a combination of the presentation modes related to the timings t16 to t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 163(c) is executed.

For example, when the production pattern 05 is selected, the production mode according to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. An effect mode in which such effect modes are combined is executed.
In this case, there is a possibility that the own tank will crash into the bomb character A during both the first period and the second period.
For example, when the self-tank crashes into the bomb character A in the first period, the self-tank has its turret destroyed. By thrusting in, the self-tank will be in a state where the machine gun has been destroyed.
FIG. 166(d) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the bomb character A is hit by the self-tank whose turret has been destroyed in the second period. In addition, from timing t22 to timing t25, the display example shown in FIG. 166(f) is displayed.
On the other hand, in the second period, if the own tank whose gun battery was destroyed did not run into the bomb character A, the display example shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 163, 167, and 168, a description will be given of the mode of presentation using the explosion character B. FIG.
FIG. 163(a) is a time chart showing the state of variable display of decorative symbols executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 163(b) and 163(c).
FIG. 163(b) is a time chart showing an execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the first period. The effect state when the effect pattern 07, which is the effect pattern for displaying the bomb character B, is executed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t11) will be described below.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 167(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character B is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, as the line of "Colonel Dinah", either "Enemy bomb ~ slow down ~~!" On the other hand, as a line of "Sergeant Might", either "He's a fake. Forward!", "Enemy bomb found ahead! Please slow down!" be. In addition, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt forward" is displayed together with the line. In addition, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "back tilt" is displayed together with the line. Further, when the dialogue does not indicate the operation mode of left lever 3720, the simulated image of left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 167(b) to 167(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As described above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dina" and three types for "Sergeant Might", and a total of six combinations can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 167(b) to 167(g).

For example, FIG. 167(b) shows the display of the incorrect operational instruction "Colonel Dyna" saying "Enemy bomb! Slow down!" and the correct operational instruction "Sgt. This is a display example showing a state in which the line "It's a fake. Forward!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can plunge into the bomb character B by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 forward) opposite to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dinah". Also, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the bomb character B can be thrust into. In addition, regardless of the instruction content of the dialogue, it is possible to plunge into the bomb character B by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B and tilting the left lever 3720 forward.

Fig. 167(e) shows the display of "Colonel Dina"'s line "Um, mumbling." ] is a display example showing a state in which the words "" are displayed.
In this case, the mode of operation is not indicated by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". Further, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the bomb character B cannot be thrust into. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B regardless of the instruction content of the lines, and then tilts the left lever 3720 forward, the bomb character B is displayed. can plunge into.

When the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, an effect display is performed in which the own tank crashes into the bomb character B from timing t11 to timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the own tank crashing into the bomb character B is displayed. FIG. 168(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, display as shown in FIG. 165(a) may be performed.

On the other hand, when the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character B is displayed, the bomb character B positioned in front of the own tank is displayed as it is from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 168(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, display as shown in FIG. 165(a) may be performed.

FIG. 163(c) is a time chart showing an execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period. FIG. 163(c) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern 03, which is the effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of effect, the same effect display as the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 163(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 164, description will be given of the effect modes at timings t26 to t35 when effect patterns 01 to 09 are executed.
As described above, based on the selected effect pattern and the operation mode of the left lever 3720 by the player, at timing t26, the own tank is in the intact state, the turret destroyed, and the turret and machine gun destroyed. It is displayed in one of two states.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), at timing t26, bomb character A or bomb character B starts to be displayed. Also, from timing t26 to timing t28, operation of either attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is enabled.
The attack button 3710 is active when your own tank is intact. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 becomes effective when the battery of the own tank is destroyed. It should be noted that neither the operation of the attack button 3710 nor the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid when the turret and the machine gun are destroyed. It should be noted that an effect mode when the operation of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not valid will be described later.

At timing t26, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area at the same time that the attack button 3710 is activated. Also, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might".
169(a) is from timing t26 until attack button 3710 is operated (until t28 in FIG. 164(a)), or until the operation effective period of attack button 3710 expires (t29 in FIG. 164(a)). ) is a display example during the period.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character A explodes 3 times from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 or the timing when the effective period of operation ends. seconds. FIG. 169(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation of the attack button 3710 or after the expiration of the effective period of operation when the special lottery result is a big win. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A becomes the own tank from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. The display of moving toward you is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 169(c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the operation of the attack button 3710 or after the expiration of the effective period of operation when the special lottery result is a loss. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
Based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the end of the effective period of operation, a display effect is executed in which a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, as in the example effect shown with reference to FIG. 153 .

At timing t26, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area at the same time that the mission button 3700 is activated. Also, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dina".
169(d) is from timing t26 until mission button 3700 is operated (until t28 in FIG. 164(a)), or until the operation valid period of mission button 3700 expires (t29 in FIG. 164(a)). ) is a display example during the period.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character A explodes 3 times from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. seconds. FIG. 169(e) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or after the effective period of the operation ends when the special lottery result is a big win. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A becomes the own tank from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. The display of moving toward you is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 169(f) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the operation of the mission button 3700 or after the effective period of the operation expires when the special lottery result is a loss. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
Based on the operation of the mission button 3700 or the end of the effective period of operation, a display effect in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank is executed, as in the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 154 .

Effect pattern 05 is executed, and in both the first period and the second period, when own tank crashes into bomb character A, at timing t26, the own tank with its turret and machine gun destroyed is displayed. The Rukoto.
FIG. 164(b) is a time chart showing the effect state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 170(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of the bomb character A moving toward the own tank is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 170(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A is moving toward its own tank. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character B starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 170(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of the bomb character B moving toward the own tank is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 170(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character B is moving toward its own tank. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
In either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 are enabled to accept operations.

In this way, the player is not confused by wrong operation instructions for the left lever 3720 and gives appropriate operation instructions. Special operation units (attack button 3710 and mission button 3700) can be operated, and special images (images of bomb character A exploding, images of sunglasses worn by bomb character A tilting, images of “Dyna It is possible to see the lines of "Colonel" and "Sergeant Might"). On the other hand, when the player obediently follows the operation instructions, as shown in FIGS. I can't.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 169(a) and (d), or FIGS. 169(b) and (e), the player can visually recognize a special effect display according to the state of destruction of the own tank. .

It should be noted that if the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the operation instruction indicated by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be automatically executed. Also, at this time, the image displayed when the player issues the operation instruction may be automatically displayed. If "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" does not give an operation instruction and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either the forward leaning operation or the backward leaning operation is automatically selected by lottery. may be displayed in For example, the forward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2, and the backward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2, and the display corresponding to the selected operation may be performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the player is required to perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction during at least one of the first period and the second period. In addition, by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, it is possible to generate an effect state in which an operation to a specific operation unit becomes effective immediately before the decorative symbols are stopped and a special image is displayed.
In this way, since the player is presented with an operation instruction in a mode different from or inconsistent with the operation instruction that should be performed, the player is asked what kind of operation is appropriate for the operation unit. The tilting operation of the left lever 3720 is performed by estimating whether it is. Then, when the player is able to perform an appropriate operation against the operation instruction, the player can operate a special operation section or view a special image or effect display. becomes possible.
In addition, a special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, successful operations contrary to the operation instruction are performed multiple times) is satisfied in addition to performing an operation contrary to the operation instruction. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the special display visible only to the player who has properly performed the operation, rather than being accidentally displayed by appropriately operating the operation unit. .

The player may operate the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction so that the forward-moving self-tank avoids the minefield provided on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield are displayed on the right or left side of the road, and the player operates the left lever 3720 in the horizontal direction to execute an effect of avoiding the minefield. do it. Then, if the own tank plunges into a real minefield, it is preferable to configure so that the battery and machine gun of the own tank are destroyed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might" are also configured to give wrong operation instructions regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720. FIG. It is preferable to configure such an effect to be executable in the first period and the second period.

In this way, even if the left lever 3720 is properly operated to move the own tank while avoiding the minefield to the left and right, and the operation contrary to the operation instruction is successfully performed, the explanation will be made with reference to FIGS. 161 to 170. As in the embodiment described above, it is possible to allow the player to operate a special operation unit, or to visually recognize a special image or effect display.

Although the effect table shown in FIG. 161 has the first period and the second period, it is configured to have only the first period, and the bomb character does not appear in the first period. It is also possible to adopt a table from which one of the production pattern, the production pattern in which the bomb character A appears, and the production pattern in which the bomb character B appears is selected.
In this case, if the self-tank crashes into the bomb character A, both the battery and the machine gun of the self-tank may be destroyed.

Although the effect table shown in FIG. 161 has the first period and the second period, the effect can be changed by using the effect table configured to provide three or more periods during which the bomb character can be displayed. may be executed.
In addition, a pending look-ahead is performed, and based on the look-ahead result, a plurality of periods in which the bomb character can be displayed are provided over a plurality of decorative pattern variations (a bomb character can be displayed in one decorative pattern variation). One period may be provided one by one, or a period may be provided in which any number of bomb characters can be displayed in one variation of the decorative pattern), Stopping the variable display corresponding to the prefetch target hold 164, 169, and 170 may be executed just before the game.

In addition, although three levels of display mode are provided for own tanks, two levels may be provided, or four or more levels may be provided. Also, as an example of changing the display mode, an example of the staged destruction of the own tank was shown, but the stage of destroying the own tank returns to the relatively undestroyed stage after repairing the own tank. may be configured to be executable.

An example has been shown in which the bomb character does not appear, the bomb character A appears, and the bomb character B appears in the first period or the second period. , either one of the bomb character A or the bomb character B may always be displayed. For example, the table shown in FIG. 161 may be modified so as to adopt a table consisting only of effect pattern 05, effect pattern 06, effect pattern 08, and effect pattern 09. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, one of the bomb characters is displayed in each period of the production pattern, so that the feeling of tension in operating the left lever 3720 can be increased.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 170, the example of the display when the bomb character is displayed is mainly illustrated. As shown in a), it is preferable to display the own tank character moving forward.

A special image may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, a special display may be performed only when an operation that does not follow an operation instruction is successfully performed multiple times. Also, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, a predetermined lottery may be conducted and a special display may be performed with a predetermined probability (eg, 1/5). With such a configuration, the special image is not displayed by chance just by operating the operation unit, and the difficulty of displaying the special image can be increased. It is possible to increase the surprise and joy felt by the player when is displayed.

When a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, at least during the period during which the special image is displayed, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound may be lowered.
Also, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (for example, a special explosion sound, etc.) is output at least during the period when the special image is displayed. may
Furthermore, suppression of the fluctuating effect sound and output of the special sound may be performed at the same time.
By suppressing the variable effect sound or outputting the special sound in response to the display of the special image, the display of the special image is prevented from being disturbed by the variable effect sound. Also, the display of the special image can be made more conspicuous by the output of the special sound.

It should be noted that the variable effect sound is a sound that is recognized as background music by the player, when a predetermined musical piece is reproduced in accordance with the variation of the decoration pattern. For example, a piece of music consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the variation of decorative patterns seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and a configuration may be adopted in which playback of a different song is started at the timing when playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with the change of the game state, the music that has been reproduced so far may be faded out in the middle of reproduction, and another music different from the music that has been reproduced so far may be reproduced.
A predetermined light-emitting member provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 may be caused to emit light in a light-emitting mode in accordance with the melody of the fluctuating effect sound. As a result, the production effect of the variable production sound can be enhanced.

A game state is generated in which a special image is displayed when the left lever 3720 is properly operated without being deceived by an operation instruction. The display period of the simulated image simulating the button 3710 is constructed so as to overlap, and the special image (such as an image of a bomb exploding) and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are displayed at the same time. Examples are shown below.

FIGS. 171(a) to 171(c) show other display examples that can be displayed at the timing when the diagram shown in FIG. 169(a) is displayed.
In each of FIGS. 171(a) to 171(c), the display priority of the obliquely tilted translucent sunglasses image is the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dina" and the lines of "Colonel Dina". The display priority is higher than that of the image, the image of own tank, the image of bomb character A, and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . 171(a), two semi-transparent sunglasses images are displayed as shown in FIG. 171(a), two images are displayed as shown in FIG. In some cases, three items are displayed as shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(a), when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed, the expectation for the big win is higher when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed than when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is not displayed. A decision is made whether to display the image. Also, the display mode of the semi-transparent sunglasses image is determined so that the greater the number of semi-transparent sunglasses images, the higher the expectation of the big win.

For example, when the display state shown in FIG. 169(a) is displayed, the degree of expectation is 10%, when the display state shown in FIG. 171(a) is displayed, the degree of expectation is 30%, and the display shown in FIG. It is preferable to display a translucent sunglasses image so that the degree of expectation in the state shown in FIG. 171C is 50% and the degree of expectation in the display state shown in FIG.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image starts at timing t26 and continues until the attack button 3710 is operated or until the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 ends. If the bomb character A can be exploded (that is, if the result of the special lottery is a big win), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may be continued until the display of the explosion image ends.

With such a configuration, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. In addition, since the translucent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed in front of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the special image that can be visually recognized is the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. can be prevented from being hidden by

FIG. 171(d) is a modification of the display example shown with reference to FIG. 171(c). As in this display example, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be configured to be displayed closer to the viewer than the translucent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in FIG. 171(c) and the display mode shown in FIG. 171(d) may be alternately displayed. For example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds from timing t26 to timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, both the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the translucent sunglasses image can be highlighted.
Note that the bomb character A before or after the explosion may also be displayed in the same manner as the simulated image of the attack button 3710 .

It should be noted that the image of translucent sunglasses does not have to indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, a difference may be provided in the appearance rate of the displayed images.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 164 and 169, one operation of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be accepted from timing t26 to timing t29. 172, an embodiment in which operations on the , mission button 3700 can be received multiple times will be described.

FIGS. 172(a) to 172(c) are display examples when the attack button 3710 is configured to be operable a plurality of times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, a plurality of (for example, five) simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed according to the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. Moreover, each time the attack button 3710 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed on the front side among the simulated images simulating the attack button 3710 ends. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, an image of the bomb character A being hit by a cannonball and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). It is recommended that you do so. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, if the fifth operation is performed, the image of the explosion may be displayed with a probability of 100%. If the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A is not hit by the cannonball and the image of the explosion is not displayed.
FIG. 172(a) shows a display example at timing t26.
Also, FIG. 172(b) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed when the attack button 3710 is operated for the third time, and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. state.
When the explosion image is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and in response to this operation, the explosion image is displayed. The aspect may be configured to be displayed in an even more explosive aspect.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not always necessary to operate the attack button 3710, so the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion. FIG. 172(b) shows a display example in which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion.

FIGS. 172(d) to 172(f) are display examples when the mission button 3700 is configured to be operable a plurality of times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, a plurality of (for example, five) simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. Moreover, each time the mission button 3700 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed on the front side among the simulated images simulating the mission button 3700 ends. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, an image of the bomb character A being hit by a cannonball and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). It is recommended that you do so. Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the explosion image is not displayed.
FIG. 172(d) shows a display example at timing t26.
Also, FIG. 172(d) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated for the third time and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. state.
When the explosion image is displayed, if the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and the explosion image is displayed in response to this operation. The aspect may be configured to be displayed in an even more explosive aspect.
Since it is not always necessary to operate the mission button 3700 when the explosion image is displayed, the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion. FIG. 172(e) shows a display example in which the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed with lower display priority than the image of the explosion.

It should be noted that in the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 172(d) to 172(f), the line of "Colonel Dinah" is "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" It is instructed. For this reason, the player needs to carefully observe the presentation situation and operate the mission button 3700 . And when the mission button 3700 can be operated, a special image of a bomb exploding can be visually recognized.

172(a) to 172(c) and FIGS. 172(d) to 172(f). 173 for explanation. In this embodiment, when timing t26 has come without destroying the battery of the own tank, acceptance of operations of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 becomes valid at the same time. At this time, each of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can receive operations a predetermined number of times (for example, five times each). Also, a predetermined number of simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 and simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed.

FIG. 173(a) shows a display example in which five simulated images representing attack buttons 3710 and five simulated images representing mission buttons 3700 are displayed. It should be noted that, as described above, the operation valid period should start from timing t26.
In this state, when the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated, the special lottery result is determined as a jackpot as described above, and a lottery with a predetermined probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, As for the mission button 3700, an image of an explosion is displayed depending on whether or not 1/3) has been hit.

FIG. 173(b) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed in response to the third operation of the attack button 3710. FIG. FIG. 173(d) shows a state in which an image of explosion is displayed in response to the third operation of the mission button 3700. FIG. The display examples shown in FIGS. 173(b) and 173(d) can be displayed when the special lottery result is a big hit. When the image of the explosion is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and the image that explodes according to the operation is accepted. , may be configured to be displayed in a more explosive manner.
For example, in the display state shown in FIG. 173(b), if a predetermined lottery (1/3) is won based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the explosion mode in the display state shown in FIG. You may change the display mode to Alternatively, in the display state shown in FIG. 173(d), if a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the display mode will be the explosion mode shown in FIG. 173(b). may be changed.
In addition, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, even if the mission button 3700 and the attack button 3710 are operated and the predetermined lottery continues to be lost, if the operation is performed a total of 10 times, 100%. It is preferable to display an exploded image in a manner corresponding to the last operated button with a probability of .
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not always necessary to operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700. Therefore, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are given priority over the image of the explosion. It should be displayed at a lower frequency. 173(b) and 173(d) show display examples in which a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed with lower display priority than the image of the explosion. ing.
If the special lottery result is a loss, the operation valid period will be held for 3 seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated 5 times and the mission button 3700 is operated 5 times during the valid operation period, or for 3 seconds from the timing when the valid operation period ends. The display state shown in (c) is obtained.
It should be noted that in the production example shown with reference to FIG. 173(a), the line of "Colonel Dina" is an erroneous operation instruction such as "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!". For this reason, the player needs to carefully observe the presentation situation and operate the mission button 3700 .

In the production example explained with reference to FIG. 169(d), the line of "Colonel Dina" instructs the operation of the mission button 3700, but "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the mission button! instead of the line "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" may be displayed.
169(a), the effect example described with reference to FIG. 171(a), the effect example described with reference to FIG. 172(a), and the effect example described with reference to FIG. In the production example described with reference, the line "Sergeant Might" instructs the operation of the attack button 3710. Instead, it may be configured to display an incorrect line saying "It's a large bomb~! Please attack with the defense button!".
By adopting such a configuration, the player needs to carefully observe the performance situation, so it is possible to further improve the game interest. Note that the player can recognize the operation unit to be operated by the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 or the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 .

In addition, the simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 show the operation units that should be operated, but these also show the lines of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" case), a simulated image may be displayed to indicate an operation unit different from the operation unit that should be operated. It should be noted that in this case, when an appropriate operation is performed, a display of firing a cannonball or a bullet may be displayed to suggest to the player that an appropriate display has been performed.

Although a display example of displaying simulated images of the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, and the mission button 3700 has been shown, these displays do not have to be performed. In this case, the player is required to operate the operation unit in a manner contrary to the operation instruction or in a manner different from the operation instruction based on the type of bomb character, the state of destruction of the own tank, etc. Therefore, the player must perform an appropriate operation. Since the degree of difficulty of performing the operation increases, it is possible to improve the interest felt when an appropriate operation is performed.

172 and 173, even after timing t26, if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, a special image (explosion image, tilted sunglasses image, etc.) is displayed. An example of a production that generates a production state that is set is shown. Even in such an embodiment, the same effects as those of the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 161 to 171 can be obtained.

It should be noted that the time during which the special image is displayed should be longer than the time during which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can enjoy a special image.

The special image displayed when an operation contrary to the operation instruction or different from the operation instruction is performed should preferably be displayed as an image larger than the operation instruction. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 171, an image (large translucent sunglasses shown in FIG. image) can be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the display of a more special image.

In this embodiment, the operation instruction display such as "tilt forward" and "tilt backward" is performed as the operation instruction for the left lever 3720, but when the operation instruction is not performed (Fig. 165(g), Fig. 167(g) 2), the content of the operation can be estimated from the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only when the player can properly operate the left lever 3720 in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. It is preferable to configure such that an image (special image) in which the sunglasses are tilted is displayed with a predetermined probability (1/10) when it is performed.

Note that when the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above are operated, an operation acceptance sound that directly corresponds to the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above is not output. It may be configured such that a special sound corresponding to the operation is output only when the special condition as described above is satisfied and a special image is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can feel that the special image is displayed in a special way. It should be noted that a similar configuration may be employed in the display of special images in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 171-173.

As the operation contrary to the operation instruction, the example of the effect of tilting the left lever 3720 in a different direction and the example of the effect of operating a button different from the instructed button are given, but other modes are also possible. For example, when the player is instructed to press and hold the attack button 3710, repeatedly hitting the attack button 3710 may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction. Alternatively, operating the defense button 3740 when the operation of the attack button 3710 is instructed may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction.

It should be noted that, when an operation is performed that does not follow the operation instruction display, a special display change is given, but the degree of expectation for a big hit is indicated by the provision of such a special display change. It may be configured as Alternatively, it may be constructed so as not to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. Alternatively, among the special display changes described above, some display changes indicate the degree of expectation of a big win, and other display changes do not indicate the degree of expectation of a big win. good too.

In this embodiment, the operation reception period of the left lever 3720 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at the timing t0, the mode shown in FIG. 165(b) may be displayed to start the "bomb character reach".

Also, based on the pending look-ahead, the effect similar to the "bomb character reach" shown with reference to FIGS. In this case, it is preferable to display the bomb character A and the bomb character B once in the variable display of the decorative symbols executed before the variable display of the decorative symbols to be read ahead. Over the entire period during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, an effect is performed to accept the operation of the left lever 3720 corresponding to the displayed bomb character. It is preferable to perform corresponding display effects. 162 and 163. For example, the example of the effect executed from the timing t6 to the timing t11 in FIG. 162 and FIG. you should do it. Then, during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to be read ahead to the end of the stop display, it is preferable to execute the effect performed from the timing t26 to the timing t35 in FIG.

It should be noted that the destroyed gun battery may be revived by the player performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display when the gun battery of the own tank has been destroyed.
Also, in a state in which the machine gun of the own tank is destroyed, the player may perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display so that the destroyed machine gun is revived.
In addition, in a state in which the gun battery of the own tank is not destroyed, the player may perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display, so that the own tank is upgraded. For example, the number of turrets may increase one by one, the color of the turret may change, or the turret may change to an oversized turret.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 161, the timing at which the bomb character can appear is not limited to only two times, but is set to a greater number of times, such as five times, to further improve the interest of the presentation. can be done. In addition, the player can be made to visually recognize a special effect display such as the resurrection of the destroyed machine gun or the upgrade of the self-tank.

The degree of expectation for a big win may be indicated by giving a change in display, or the change in display may be given as a mere effect and not to show the degree of expectation.
For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the present game state or the game state to be generated may be suggested or notified according to the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets.

The bomb character A or the bomb character B may always be displayed in the first period, the second period, and the variable display in the look-ahead effect. By adopting such a configuration, the operation instructions are always shown to the player, and the player can be made to feel tense, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement.

Although an example in which a special display change is given by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation content has been shown, an operation contrary to the instructed operation content or an operation different from the instructed operation content has been shown. may be configured to give a special display change.

An example is shown in which both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" may give operation instructions, but in a series of "bomb character reach", only one character may give operation instructions. . In this case, for the other character, it is preferable to display a line such as "Hmm, mumble".

In this way, in "Bomb Chara Reach", a special display change is given when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is intentionally performed, and it is possible to give the player a special sense of satisfaction. Become.

Conventionally, in order to suggest the result of a special lottery, there have been cases where a predetermined image is displayed based on an operation by a player to suggest the result of the special lottery (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-046210). By the way, the number of times such operations are accepted and the number of times of display performed in response to the acceptance of operations are predetermined. Also, the period during which the player can operate is limited to a predetermined period, and the display mode cannot be freely changed by the player's free operation. In addition, the display time of the effect displayed in this way is constant, and there is room for improvement in this respect as well. In the embodiments described below, it is possible to accept operations multiple times during the operation valid period, and the display time of the image displayed based on the operation is set to be long or short, and depending on the length of time displayed, special An embodiment that makes it possible to suggest the result of the lottery will be described.

The “suddenly tank effect” that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern will be described below with reference to FIG. 174 and the like. It should be noted that whether or not to perform the “suddenly tank effect” is determined based on pre-reading of the pending contents in the peripheral control board 1510 .
FIG. 174 shows the types of production patterns that can be selected, the conditions for selecting the production patterns, and the period during which the look-ahead production is executed (specifically, how many times the decorative symbols are displayed in variable display in the “suddenly tank production”). is executed).

The look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the pending number is 1 to 4 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 01 is a effect pattern in which a “suddenly tank effect” is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display. Since the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is executed only in one variable display period, it is not strictly a look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the pending number is 1 to 3 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display and the variable display related to the first suspension.

The look-ahead performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the pending number is 1 to 2 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 03 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first suspension, and the variable display related to the second suspension.

The look-ahead performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. In the look-ahead effect pattern 04, a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first suspension, the variable display related to the second suspension, and the variable display related to the third suspension. It is a production pattern that

In addition, in the effect patterns such as the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, in which the variable display is performed a plurality of times, the result of the special lottery for the last variable display in which the "sudden tank effect" is executed is a big hit or a loss. Any of them is fine, but if all the special lottery results for the intermediate variable display other than the final variable display in which the ``suddenly tank performance'' is executed are lost, the prefetching performance is based on the prefetching performance pattern 02 to the prefetching performance pattern 04. should be executed.

FIG. 175 is a table showing three display effect patterns displayed in the "suddenly tank effect". Also, FIG. 176 is a time chart showing an effect mode when the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), in the "suddenly tank effect", the time during which the variable display of decorative symbols is performed is 14 seconds from timing t0 to timing t14. Moreover, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is one second. At timing t0, operation acceptance of attack button 3710 becomes valid, and operation acceptance of attack button 3710 becomes invalid at timing t14 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. A simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area during a period (timing t0 to timing t14) in which the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid. Below, with reference to FIG. 177, a description will be given of the effects displayed in the display area based on the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player.

177 is a diagram showing a display mode in the display area at a predetermined timing in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG.

FIG. 177(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t0. Reached decorative patterns (“3”, “↓”, “3”) are displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and an image of the tank facing forward is displayed in the lower center of the display area. The image of the enemy tank facing the direction, the image of the road along which the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction, the image of the horizon and the sky in the upper part of the display area, and the character in the production in the lower right of the display area. A dialogue image of a certain "Colonel Dina" and a window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed in the lower left of the display area. A simulated image representing an attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the enclosing window image.
Thus, in the "suddenly tank effect", at timing t0, the image of the player's own tank and the image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed, and operation reception for the attack button 3710 is enabled.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), if the attack button 3710 is not operated during the valid operation period, the image of the enemy tank continues to be displayed until timing t14. Also, at timing t14, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, after the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed. FIG. 175 is a table showing production patterns executed based on the operation of attack button 3710. FIG.
Also, FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d) are time charts showing a state in which an effect pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation of attack button 3710 at timing t3.
Also, FIGS. 176(e) to 176(g) show a state in which an effect pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 at timings t3 and t8. is a chart.

FIG. 175 shows an effect pattern selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
When the smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When the smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for two seconds on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When the smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.

Appearance ratios are determined in advance by the smoke display effect pattern 01 to the smoke display effect pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. The degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is 30%, the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed is 50%, and the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed is 100%. is.

FIG. 176(b) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 176(c) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 176(d) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.

FIG. 177(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d). FIG. 177(b) shows a state in which an image of a shell being fired at an enemy tank and an image of the shell exploding and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 177(b) ends in less than one second (for example, 0.1 second), and the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is reached. In this display state, the battery of the enemy tank is destroyed, and a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 176(b), the smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, and the smoke image shown in FIG. 177(d) is displayed one second after the display state shown in FIG. 177(c). becomes a display state in which is not displayed. In addition, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 176(c), the smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, so that the display state in which the smoke image is not displayed two seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is entered. (illustration omitted). As the line of "Colonel Dyna" displayed two seconds later, a display of "Is the power of the new gun so good..." is displayed. Here, the line of "Colonel Dinah" indicates moderate expectations.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 176(d), the smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, so that the smoke image shown in FIG. 177(e) is displayed three seconds after the display state shown in FIG. becomes a display state in which is not displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is high.

Thus, it is suggested that the longer the smoke image is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big win.
Therefore, the player views the display area expecting that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the display of the smoke image ends are displayed corresponding to each smoke display effect pattern. Therefore, the line of "Colonel Dinah" also suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. The lines of "Colonel Dyna" correspond to the display time of the smoke image. It is possible to make even a player who has a low degree of concentration on a game, who does not play the game, feel interest in the game.

One second after the smoke image is no longer displayed, a new enemy tank image is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 176(b), at timing t5, an image of a new enemy tank is displayed. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 176(c), at timing t6, an image of a new enemy tank is displayed. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 176(d), at timing t7, the image of the new enemy tank is displayed. FIG. 177(f) is a rendering example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated thereafter, and the variable display of decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 178(a) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a mode of notifying that the game is a big hit.
FIG. 178(b) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner to notify that they are lost.

176(b) to 176(d) show examples of effects when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3. It is possible to receive an operation from and execute any smoke display effect pattern.

In this way, the smoke display effect pattern can be executed a plurality of times by accepting the operation from the player not only once but also a plurality of times from the timing t0 to the timing t14.

FIGS. 176(e) to 176(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at two timings of timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 176(e) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at time t8.
FIG. 176(f) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at time t8.
FIG. 176(g) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at time t8.
Even if the smoke display effect pattern is executed a plurality of times, a display similar to the effect example described with reference to FIGS. done.

If it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated by the player during the execution of a certain smoke display effect pattern, after the smoke display effect pattern being executed ends, FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 177(b) is continued for one second, one of the smoke display effect patterns is automatically executed, and the display state shown in FIG. 177(b) onwards. For example, when the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, the smoke display effect pattern is automatically executed three times. will be

An example of executing the "suddenly tank effect" in one time variable display when the prefetch effect pattern 01 is selected is shown below. A description will be given of the manner in which the "tank performance" is executed.
In addition, in the "suddenly tank effect", the effect is executed for a maximum of 4 times of variable display, and the variable time required for each variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

179 and 180, an effect example when the look-ahead effect pattern 02 is executed will be described below. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose degree of expectation is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second time is a loss. This point is the same for the look-ahead effect pattern 03 and the look-ahead effect pattern 04 as well.
Also in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, when the display of the smoke image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decoration pattern, refer to FIGS. 176 and 177. A display similar to the example of effect described above is performed.

The display mode of the smoke image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative symbols are still displayed will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 179(a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 180(a) occurs from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(b), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the effect of the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at the time t14, and the effect by the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at the time t14. From time t15 to timing t15, the display state shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 179(c), when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank appear at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 180(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(d), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank appear at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 180(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(e), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 180(d) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(f), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 180(e) from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the decorative pattern is also started in a display mode forming a ready-to-win state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 179, the display mode of the smoke image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the object of the look-ahead effect stops has been described. , and FIG. 181, the display mode of the smoke image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension targeted for the look-ahead effect is stopped will be described.

FIGS. 181(b) to 181(f) show examples of effects in which the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern overlaps with the stop display period (timing t29 to timing t30) of the decorative symbols. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 181(b) to 181(f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern, the smoke display effect pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29 and decorated. It shows an example of effect for performing stop display of symbols. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in FIG. 178(a) or FIG. 178(b) is displayed based on the result of the special lottery.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the big win game state is started from timing t30, the opening state of the big win game is set from timing t30 to timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 is started from timing t35. FIGS. 182(b) to 182(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the next variable display is started at timing t30, the tank presentation may be continued abruptly in the next variable display, and the "suddenly tank presentation" may be terminated in the middle of the variable display. good.
FIGS. 182(b) to 182(f) show an example of a presentation in which an image of smoke or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of the decoration pattern is stopped or when the next variation display is started. .

Thus, in the "suddenly tank effect" according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept the operation of the attack button 3710 (operation unit) at the same time when the decorative pattern starts to change, and the display effect based on the operation of the operation unit can be performed. The number of times of execution is not predetermined, and the display effect can be executed any number of times based on the player's intention, so that the player is strongly interested in the operation of the operation unit. can be done. In addition to simply operating the operation part, pay attention to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) displayed in response to the operation (the longer the display time, the higher the expectation of the big win. Because it is necessary), it can be more interesting. Furthermore, since the variation time of the decorative pattern is set to be short, it is possible to create a sense of tension regarding the operation of the operation unit and the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation. In addition, as a look-ahead effect, by configuring the display effect to be executable over variations of a plurality of decorative patterns, the degree of expectation indicated by the display time of the smoke image is the degree of expectation for the variation of any decorative pattern. It can increase the player's interest in whether there is.

Although three smoke display effect patterns are shown in FIG. 175, the "suddenly tank effect" may be executed using a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 01 and the smoke display effect pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, the "suddenly tank effect" is executed using a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 01 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 02 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed. good too.

Furthermore, as the smoke display effect pattern 04, the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 4 seconds, and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. Either one or both of the production patterns with 100% jackpot expectation may be employed in a production mode in which the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 5 seconds and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. In this way, by adopting an effect pattern with a long effect execution period, the player can almost certainly notice that the degree of expectation is 100%, and the interest can be improved.

174 to 182, an embodiment has been described in which the longer the display time of the smoke image (specific display), the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit. An embodiment modified so that the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank in the embodiment, the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win, will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 190. . It should be noted that the description of the same processing, display, etc. as before deformation may be omitted.

FIG. 183 shows an effect pattern selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
When the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.
When the white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.
When the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.

The white flag display effect pattern 01 to white flag display effect pattern 03 determine the appearance rate in advance so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit. The expectation level is 30% when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed, the expectation level is 50% when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is executed, and the expectation level is 100% when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is executed. is.

FIG. 184(b) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 184(c) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 184(d) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.

FIG. 185(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d). FIG. 185(b) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank being fired and an image of the bomb exploding and an image of the destroyed enemy tank being displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 185(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 second), and becomes the display state shown in FIG. 185(c). In this display state, the battery of the enemy tank is destroyed and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Note that the white flag image is not yet displayed at this stage.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 184(b), since the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, the white flag image shown in FIG. 185(d) is displayed three seconds after the display state shown in FIG. is displayed. In addition, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 184(c), the white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, so that the white flag image is displayed two seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 185(c). (illustration omitted). As the line of "Colonel Dinah" displayed two seconds later, "Is the morale of the enemy army so good..." is displayed. Here, the line of "Colonel Dinah" indicates moderate expectations.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 184(d), the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, so that the white flag image shown in FIG. 185(e) is displayed one second after the display state shown in FIG. is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is high.

In this way, the longer the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed without the white flag image (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big hit. be done.
Therefore, the player views the display area expecting that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the display of the white flag image is started are displayed corresponding to each white flag display effect pattern. Therefore, the line of "Colonel Dinah" also suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. The dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" corresponds to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, so the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Even if you don't know exactly when will be displayed, you can know your expectations and don't bother to check the time when the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed. It is possible to make even a player who has a low degree of concentration on a simple game feel the interest in the game.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, a new enemy tank image is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(b), the image of the new enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(c), the image of the new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(d), at timing t5, the image of the new enemy tank is displayed. FIG. 185(f) is a rendering example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated thereafter, and the variable display of decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 186(a) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a mode of notifying that the game is a big hit.
FIG. 186(b) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner to notify that they are lost.

184(b) to 184(d) show examples of effects when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3. It is possible to receive an operation from and execute any white flag display effect pattern.

Further, by accepting the operation from the player not only once but a plurality of times from the timing t0 to the timing t14, it is possible to execute the white flag display effect pattern a plurality of times.

FIGS. 184(e) to 184(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at timings t3 and t8.
FIG. 184(e) shows an effect example in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at time t8.
FIG. 184(f) shows an effect example in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and the white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at time t8.
FIG. 184(g) shows an effect example in which white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at time t8.
Even if the white flag display effect pattern is executed a plurality of times, a display similar to the effect example described with reference to FIGS. done.

If it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated by the player during execution of a certain white flag display effect pattern, after the white flag display effect pattern being executed ends, FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 185(b) is continued for one second, one of the white flag display effect patterns is automatically executed, and the display state after FIG. 185(b) may be obtained. For example, when the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, the white flag display effect pattern is automatically executed three times. will be

An example of executing the "suddenly tank effect" in one time variable display when the prefetch effect pattern 01 is selected is shown below. A description will be given of the manner in which the "tank performance" is executed.
In addition, in the "suddenly tank effect", the effect is executed for up to four times of variable display, and the variable time required for one variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

187 and 188, an effect example when the look-ahead effect pattern 02 is executed will be described below. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose degree of expectation is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second time is a loss. This point is the same for the look-ahead effect pattern 03 and the look-ahead effect pattern 04 as well.
Also in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, when the display of the white flag image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decoration pattern, refer to FIGS. 184 and 185. A display similar to the example of effect described above is performed.

The display mode of the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative symbols are still displayed will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 187(a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 188(a) occurs from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 187(b), when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the effect by the white flag display effect pattern 03 ends at time t14, and the effect by the white flag display effect pattern 03 ends at time t14. From time t15 to timing t15, the display state shown in FIG. 188(b) is reached.
As shown in FIG. 187(c), when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 188(c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 187(d), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 188(c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 187(e), when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 188(d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 187(f), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 188(e) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the decorative pattern is also started in a display mode forming a ready-to-win state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 187, the display mode of the white flag image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the object of the look-ahead effect stops has been described. , and FIG. 189, description will be given of the display mode of the white flag image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension targeted for the look-ahead effect is stopped.

FIGS. 189(b) to 189(f) show examples of effects in which the execution period of the selected white flag display effect pattern overlaps with the stop display period (timing t29 to timing t30) of the decorative symbols. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 189(b) to 189(f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display production pattern, the white flag display production pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29, and decoration is performed. It shows an example of effect for performing stop display of symbols. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in FIG. 186(a) or FIG. 186(b) is displayed based on the result of the special lottery.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the white flag display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the big win game state is started from timing t30, the opening state of the big win game is set from timing t30 to timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 is started from timing t35. FIGS. 190(b) to 190(f) show examples of effects in which a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the white flag display performance pattern being executed is configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the white flag display during execution. The effect pattern may be configured to be interrupted without being executed for a predetermined execution period. This prevents the player from feeling dissatisfaction that the result of the special lottery was a loss even though the highly anticipated performance was executed if the display of the destroyed image of the enemy tank was interrupted. It is for
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a loss and there are one or more pending, the next variable display will start at timing t30, but the "suddenly tank effect" will continue even in the next variable display, It is preferable to configure so that the "suddenly tank presentation" is ended in the middle of the variable display. With such a configuration, the "suddenly tank presentation" can be ended in a natural manner without making the player feel uncomfortable.
FIGS. 190(b) to 190(f) show examples of effects in which an image of smoke or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of the decoration pattern is stopped or when the next variation display is started. .

The embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 183-190 can also achieve the same effect as the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 175-182. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 183 to 190, the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Expecting that the display time of the tank will be short, you will have to watch the display effect.

174 to 190, an embodiment of "suddenly a tank effect" has been shown, but the embodiment may be modified as follows. An embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of smoke are displayed will be described as an example. good too.

As shown in FIGS. 175 and 183, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is either 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A predetermined sound effect may be output while the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, sound effects of 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds are prepared in advance, and at the same time when the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts to be displayed, the output of the sound effect of the same seconds may be started. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effect may be started at the same timing and finished at the same timing.

On the other hand, it may be modified so that the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output time of the sound effect are different. For example, only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds is prepared, and this sound effect is output regardless of whether the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2, 3, or 4 seconds. It should be configured as follows. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes impossible to know the degree of expectation unless the player is watching the display mode of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and it is possible to add a sense of tension to the game. It is also possible to employ only sound effects with an output time of 3 seconds or only sound effects with an output time of 2 seconds.

A predetermined sound effect may be looped to output the sound. For example, a sound effect with a length of one second may be reproduced multiple times (2 times, 3 times, 4 times) in accordance with the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, a sound effect having a length of 1 second may be reproduced four times in succession to output the sound effect for 4 seconds. In this case, as above, the display time is different, but the sound effect is output a certain number of times (for a certain period of time), so that the expectation level cannot be understood unless the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed carefully. , and the game can be made to have a sense of tension.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 175, the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 183, the degree of expectation when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

175 and 183, based on the player's operation, the effect pattern for displaying an image of an enemy tank being destroyed can be executed multiple times. However, a limit may be set on the number of executions of highly anticipated effect patterns. For example, the number of times the smoke display effect pattern 03 or the white flag display effect pattern 03, which has a 100% chance of winning a big hit, is executed during one "suddenly tank effect" may be limited to once. Also, the number of times the performance pattern with the expectation level of 0% as described above is executed may be similarly limited to one time. With such a configuration, the player carefully observes whether or not the high-expectation (or low-expectation) effect pattern is executed, so that the game can be made tense.

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 185, in this embodiment, decorative patterns (during variable display and during stop display), a simulated image imitating an attack button 3710, an image of an undestroyed enemy tank, and an image of a destroyed enemy The tank images are displayed relatively small in the display area, but at least one of them may be displayed larger. For example, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed in sizes shown in FIGS. 139(b) and 139(c). In this case, a display mode in which these images overlap may be adopted. In this case, the display priority is given to the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed and the image of the enemy tank that has been destroyed. ), should be in that order. In addition, it is preferable to lower the display priority of the image of the own tank, the serif image, and the background image such as the road.

With such a configuration, the decorative pattern (during variable display and during stop display), the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the undestroyed enemy tank, or the image of the destroyed enemy tank are superimposed on each other. Even if displayed, the visibility of the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed or the enemy tank that has been destroyed is not hindered by the decorative pattern or the simulated image of the attack button 3710 . Therefore, the timing of starting and ending the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is clarified, preventing the player from misunderstanding the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, that is, the degree of expectation. can.

An embodiment in which the image of the enemy tank is always destroyed and displayed by operating the attack button 3710 has been described, but the difficulty level is increased to display the image of the enemy tank in a destroyed state. may In this case, the display conditions for the operation of the operation unit in the above-described embodiment may be adopted. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated, a lottery is held, and if the player wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2), the image of the enemy tank is destroyed and displayed. good too. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when a specific condition is met, the difficulty of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank can be increased. Even if the player is operating , the player can have a sense of tension that they do not know when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the expectation of a big hit is 100%, that is, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the image of the tank being destroyed is displayed at a different time than usual in the "suddenly tank effect" (smoke An example of the effect when the display effect pattern 03 or the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected has been shown, but it not only suggests that it is a big win, but also suggests other game values that are profitable for the player. may be performed. For example, as described above, by winning the symbol to which the time saving is given, or by executing a predetermined number of losing fluctuations from the time of turning on the power or from the previous hit, the time saving is given from the normal game state The “suddenly tank effect” may be executed in the loss variation that triggers the switch to the game state. In this case as well, since it is common that a time-saving game state is given instead of winning as an advantage advantageous to the player, the various effects described in the above-described embodiments can be produced in the same manner.

In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is indicated by the "suddenly tank effect", but the "suddenly tank effect" may be configured to indicate the type of profit given to the player. For example, as a benefit given to the player, which of the time saving state or the probability variable state is given after the variable decorative pattern becomes a big hit, or whether it is likely to be given (for example, the expectation that it will be a probability variable state percentage) may be indicated. Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can shift to the time saving state or the probability changing state after the variation of the decorative pattern without going through the jackpot state, which of the time saving state or the probability changing state is given after the variation of the decorative pattern, or is given. It may indicate whether it is easy (for example, what percentage is expected to be in a probability variable state).

Thus, according to the “suddenly tank effect”, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game machine.

Conventionally, there has been an effect in which a player is requested to operate an operation unit (for example, JP-A-2010-046210). In such an effect, the predetermined effect display is displayed regardless of whether the player operates the operation unit or not, so that the operation of the operation unit gives a sense of tension. It was blurry. In particular, even if a complicated operation mode is requested, it is only a pretense after all, and the predetermined effect is performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player on the operation unit. However, by executing such an effect, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the effect display may be lowered. As described above, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in terms of effectively using the operation to the operation unit to improve the amusement of the game. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, it is possible to make the player feel nervous about the operation mode of the operation unit by the player, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. will be explained.

In the embodiments described below, the operation of the left lever 3720 is requested to the player, and depending on whether the player can tilt the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction and angle and maintain that state, Therefore, it is configured so that there are cases where viewing the special effect display is not hindered and when viewing is hindered (when it is impossible to see or when it is difficult to see). there is

With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 191, display examples shown in FIGS. ” will be described. FIG. 192 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is performed as shown in FIG. 191(a). Also, FIG. 193 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is not performed as shown in FIG. 191(b).

At timing t5, a ready-to-win effect state occurs. In "Full Breakthrough Reach", a speed display window showing the speed of your own tank is displayed above the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna". The display in the speed display window changes depending on how the player operates the left lever 3720 . Decorative patterns, roads, and self-tank images are displayed in the same manner as in other embodiments. FIG. 192(a) and FIG. 193(a) show display examples at timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect state occurs.

At timing t5, an operation effective period of left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 140, by operating the left lever 3720, it is possible to change the lateral position and speed of the own tank. The operation effective period of the left lever 3720 continues until the timing t34, which is the variation stop timing of the decorative symbols.

At a timing t7, a production state is entered in which a cannonball flies from the rear of the own tank. This effect state continues for four seconds until timing t11. Also during this period, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed to the left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dinah". In addition, the simulated image is labeled with the character “tilted forward” indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 .
FIGS. 192(b) and 193(b) show display examples at timing t7.

191(a), a display example shown in FIG. 192, etc., will be described below. Further, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 191(b), the display example shown in FIG. 193, and the like.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period. Specifically, the left lever 3720 should be maintained between 10 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 2 seconds. By performing such an operation, a display in which the self-tank is accelerating and moving is displayed in the display area. FIG. 192(c) shows a display example when the own tank is sufficiently accelerated at timing t9.

The time chart shown in FIG. 191(a) shows a state in which the player can tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At timing t11, the operation instruction display for left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 192(d) shows a display example from timing t11 to timing t15 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient or the angle to operate it is insufficient, the shell fired from the enemy tank hits the own tank. , the display that the shell explodes is performed.

The time chart of FIG. 191(b) shows an effect example in which the operation of the left lever 3720 is performed for only one second from timing t8 to timing t9 during the effective period of operation of the left lever 3720. FIG. In this case, your tank is not fast enough. Therefore, at timing t11, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, the display of the smoke image generated by the explosion of the shell around the image of the own tank starts.

The display state shown in FIG. 193(c) shows a display example when the speed of the own tank is not sufficient at timing t9. FIG. 193(d) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15 because the vehicle's speed was not sufficient.

Note that FIGS. 192(c) and 192(d) show a state in which characters "30 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. Also, FIGS. 193(c) and 193(d) show a state in which characters "20 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. In this manner, when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720 while the operation instruction is being displayed, the display in the speed display window is set to 30 km/h or more, and an appropriate operation is being performed while the operation instruction is being displayed. If not, or if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instruction is being displayed, the display in the speed display window is less than 30 km/h. Specifically, the time after the left lever 3720 reaches an appropriate angle is measured, and the speed display of the own tank is increased by 1 km/h every 0.1 seconds. According to such a configuration, by looking at the display of the speed display window, the player can check whether the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is properly performed and whether the operation of the left lever 3720 is properly performed. recognizable.

From timing t15 to timing t24, a display effect is performed in which the own tank advances forward. Even if the smoke image was displayed due to the explosion of the shell from the enemy unit, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t15. FIGS. 192(e) and 193(e) show examples of display effects in which the own tank moves forward from timing t15 to timing t24. Note that the speed in the speed display window that has been changed according to the operation of the left lever 3720 changes from the timing (timing t15) when the display of the smoke image ends to the timing (timing t15) when the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed again. The speed may be set to "10 km/h" at a predetermined timing up to timing t24).

In this embodiment, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank according to the operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from timing t5 to timing t34. Therefore, by operating the left lever 3720 during the period when the operation instruction display is not performed, it is possible to practice changing the speed of the own tank. In this case, it is preferable to display "10 km/h" in the speed display window at the timing when the speed indication display is started.

At timing t24, images of a plurality of enemy tanks are displayed in the upper part of the display area. Images of a plurality of enemy tanks are moved leftward in the upper part of the display area and displayed until timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and an operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is started. The operation instruction display for left lever 3720 is performed until timing t32.

From timing t24 to timing t32, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period. Specifically, the left lever 3720 should be maintained between 30 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 4 seconds. By performing such an operation, a display in which the own tank is accelerated to a maximum speed of 50 km/h is displayed in the display area.

The time chart shown in FIG. 191(a) shows a state in which the player can tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At timing t32, the operation instruction display for left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 192(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 192(h) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not properly operated, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient, the tilting angle is insufficient, or the tilting direction is wrong, the own tank and the enemy tank are separated. A display that the self-tank exploded due to the collision is performed.

The time chart of FIG. 191(b) shows a state in which the left lever 3720 is appropriately tilted for only two seconds from timing t25 to timing t27 during the effective period of operation of the left lever 3720. FIG. In this case, your tank is not fast enough. Therefore, from timing t32, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, the display of the smoke image generated by the collision with the enemy tank around the image of the own tank starts.

FIG. 193(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the own tank is not sufficiently accelerated. Further, FIG. 193(h) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35 when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Although the display examples shown in FIGS. 192 and 193 show the display examples when the special lottery result is a big hit, the same display is performed when the special lottery result is a loss. In this case, it is preferable to stop display the decorative pattern with the number "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, when the player is unable to operate the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size is reduced. Obstructed by smoke images. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to confirm the stationary display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size, and the player will be conscious of performing appropriate operations from the next time onwards. On the other hand, when the player operates the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the player can visually recognize the stop display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size without impeding visibility. You will feel a sense of satisfaction that you have completed the tense operation.

In this embodiment, the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed twice, from timing t7 to timing t11 and from timing t24 to timing t32. done.
At this time, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is such that the time required for the operation is longer and the operation angle is narrower at the later timing than at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more tense operation mode.

FIG. 191(c) is an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 191(a) and 191(b). In this embodiment, the display time of the smoke image is lengthened when the smoke image is displayed due to the shell of the enemy tank, and the smoke image is displayed until the timing when the enemy tank group is displayed. there is
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed until timing t27. In such a configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) partially overlaps the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) during which the second operation instruction is displayed. Become.
At this time, it is preferable that the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 is partially or entirely hidden by the smoke image. Similarly, a part or all of the speech of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and the speed display window may be hidden.
With such a configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) in which the first operation instruction display is performed, the display period in which the second operation instruction display is performed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the operation mode during (timing t24 to timing t31), the feeling of tension in the operation of left lever 3720 can be increased.

Alternatively, the length of the smoke image to be displayed when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated may be determined by lottery. For example, the display time may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image is displayed for 4 seconds from timing t11 to timing t15 at the shortest and for 24 seconds from timing t11 to timing t35 at the longest. Especially when the longest display period is selected, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area becomes difficult or invisible due to the smoke image regardless of the operation mode of the left lever 3720 for the second time. .

Note that the technical idea related to the "suddenly tank effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 174 to 190 may be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the "full breakthrough reach". For example, it may be configured such that the display time of the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach" is different depending on whether or not the big hit state or the time saving state occurs.

Although an example of displaying a smoke image is shown when the player is unable to perform an appropriate operation while the operation instruction is being displayed, it is possible to perform an appropriate operation instead of always displaying these images. If not, these images may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2).
When the special lottery result is a loss, the smoke image is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 3/4), and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the smoke image is not displayed. It may be configured as
Further, a plurality of modes may be provided for the color and shape of the smoke image, and the degree of expectation for the special lottery result may be suggested by the display mode of the displayed smoke image.

Another embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 191 etc. will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 and 195. FIG. FIG. 194 is a time chart in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 195 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, instead of displaying a group of tanks, a minefield is displayed on the road along which the own tank travels from timing t24 to timing t29. FIG. 195(a) shows a display example at timing t29, which is the timing when the display of the minefield is started. From timing t24 to timing t29, a display is made in which the own tank approaches the minefield.

At timing t26, acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid. The operation valid period of the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, the process continues until timing t29. In addition, during the operation valid period of the mission button 3700, a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the dialog window of "Colonel Dinah". FIG. 195(b) shows a display example at timing t26 when the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 194(c), when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period (timing t28), the own tank jumps and jumps over the advancing minefield. is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 195(c) shows a display example at the timing (for example, timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period and the effect of jumping the own tank ends. This display continues until timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 195(d) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped.

FIG. 194(d) shows an effect example when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation valid period. In this case, from timing t29, which is the timing at which the valid operation period ends, to timing t35, a smoke image with a higher display priority than the own tank is displayed, and the own tank enters the minefield and is enveloped in smoke. A performance display is performed. FIG. 195(e) shows a display example from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 195(f) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area is hidden by the smoke image.

In this way, when the mission button 3700 is properly operated, the visibility of the stationary decorative pattern is not hindered. The visibility of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed by the image is obstructed. Therefore, the player will be more nervous about operating the mission button 3700 .

Note that the modification shown with reference to FIG. 191(c) may also be applied to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. In this case, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700, and the display mode of the tank jumping are difficult to see due to the smoke generated by the shells of the enemy tank group. or become invisible. As a result, the feeling of tension with respect to the operation of left lever 3720 is increased.

Thus, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within a predetermined operation range, the decorative pattern stop display mode (or The visibility of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700, and the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be hindered by the smoke image. The player will feel nervous about the operation of the left lever 3720, and will be motivated to operate the left lever 3720 positively, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

An example of displaying a smoke image with a predetermined probability (probability of 1/2) when the operation of the left lever 3720 is inappropriate has been described. , the probability of displaying a smoke image may be different. For example, when the tilting direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operation time is shorter than a predetermined time, the shorter the operation time, the more easily the smoke image is displayed. In addition, the smoke image may be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100% when no operation is performed or when an operation in the direction opposite to the direction indicated by the operation is performed.

It should be noted that the visibility mode of the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, and the like may be completely invisible by the smoke image, or may be partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a semi-transparent image may be used as the smoke image so that the operation instruction image, the decorative pattern, and the like may be vaguely visible through the semi-transparent smoke image. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the operation instruction image and the decorative pattern is ensured to a certain degree.

A display effect (such as displaying a predetermined character image) with an expectation level of 100% and a very low appearance probability can be executed, and the timing at which this display effect is executed is set to the timing at which a smoke image can be displayed. good too. In addition, it may be configured such that part or all of this display effect is invisible or difficult to see due to the smoke image. In this case, this display effect may be hidden by the smoke image, which is a very unfortunate game situation for the player. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to keep the player more nervous when operating the operating means.

Although the visibility of the reach mode of the decorative pattern is hindered by the smoke image, the display time of the smoke image may be set so that the display of the smoke image ends before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. good. For example, the display of the smoke image may end at timing t34, and the smoke image may not be displayed during the period from timing t34 to timing t35. With such a configuration, the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern is not hindered by the smoke image, so that the result of the special lottery is a loss even though the statically displayed decorative pattern indicates a big win. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands, or the player misunderstands that the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed indicates a loss, but that it is a big hit.

Alternatively, even when the smoke image is displayed, it may be configured such that the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern may or may not be hindered. For example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 may be executed so that the statically displayed decorative pattern may or may not be hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, if the time the left lever 3720 was tilted was less than half of the required operating time, then the stationary decorative symbols remain hidden by the smoke image and the time the left lever 3720 was tilted. is more than half of the required operation time, the statically displayed decorative pattern may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t34). With such a configuration, the player can operate the left lever 3720 with more tension.

The variable display of the decorative pattern may be made invisible or difficult to be visually recognized over a plurality of times of variable display by the smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be set to 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns. Alternatively, the display time of the smoke image may be modified from the lottery mode described above and the display time of the smoke image may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds. is ignored twice (timing t7 to timing t11, timing t24 to timing t32) and the left lever 3720 is not tilted, such a smoke image is displayed with a high probability (probability of 99/100). It should be configured as follows.
In this case, during the period (timing t32-timing t34) in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed and the period (timing t34-timing t35) in which the decorative pattern is statically displayed, the decorative pattern is hidden by the smoke image to improve visibility. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the stationary display of the decorative symbols starting after the timing t35 are each performed multiple times, and the visibility may be obstructed by the smoke image.
In this case, for the purpose of consistency as an effect, it is preferable to continue the "full-strength breakthrough reach" even after timing t35. In this case, the player is requested to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Further, when the display of the smoke image straddles the variable display of the decorative pattern in this way, the operation of the left lever 3720 is disabled even during the stoppage of the variable display of the decorative pattern or immediately after the start of the variable display (between the timing t0 and the timing t5). First, the effective operation period is set to 7, which continues over a plurality of variable displays, so that an effect display (such as a change in the speed display in the speed display window) based on the reception of the operation of the left lever 3720 can be performed at any time. may be configured.

In the drawing, the speed of the own tank is displayed in the display area, but the tilted direction or tilted angle of the left lever 3720 may be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the elapsed time after the left lever 3720 is tilted at the required angle under the condition that the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is being performed. With such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is operated within an appropriate range and how many seconds the left lever 3720 is operated within an appropriate range.

A simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and an operation instruction is displayed by the words "Colonel Dyna". An effect pattern requiring tilting operation of the left lever 3720 may be executed without displaying a clear operation instruction display by image display. For example, the fact that an enemy tank is approaching from behind can be indicated by displaying a state in which a shell is fired from behind, and the player can voluntarily tilt the left lever 3720 without displaying an operation instruction. may be configured to allow By constructing the game so that a game situation with a higher degree of difficulty can occur in this way, it is possible to further heighten the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720 .

The player may not be able to properly recognize whether the left lever 3720 is properly maintained within a predetermined operating range. Therefore, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built in the left lever 3720 . For example, the vibration source may be vibrated for 0.5 seconds when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is moved within the appropriate operation range by the player's operation. Alternatively, left lever vibration source 3722 starts vibrating when the operation range of left lever 3720 moves into the appropriate operation range, and during the period in which the operation range of left lever 3720 is within the appropriate operation range, Vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued, and vibration of the vibration source may be terminated when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is out of the appropriate range.

Also, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is being performed appropriately) is indicated by the display contents in the speed display window. It may be configured so that there is For example, the smoke image may be configured to obscure the speed of the own tank within the speed display window. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player operates the left lever 3720 with more tension.

An example of tilting the left lever 3720 forward has been shown, but in order to make the operation more difficult, the range in which the lever should be operated is limited to around 30 degrees forward (for example, the range from 25 degrees to 35 degrees), If it is completely tilted forward 45 degrees, smoke will come out of the tank's engine with a predetermined probability (probability of 1/2), and the smoke image shown in FIG. 193(d) or 193(g) will appear. It may be configured such that the image of the own tank and the operation instruction display are hidden by this smoke image. In this case, the player is required to perform operations with a higher degree of difficulty, making it possible to heighten the sense of tension. In addition, when such an embodiment is adopted, it is possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to an appropriate range at any time during the period in which the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 194 and 195, if the left lever 3720 cannot be operated properly, a smoke image is displayed, impeding the visibility of the operation instruction of the mission button 3700. It is configured as follows. Further, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the smoke image obstructs the visibility of the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (the display mode in which the own tank jumps). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of tension with respect to the operation of left lever 3720 .

Further, the type of display mode of a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, the display mode and type of the dialogue itself of “Colonel Dina” that instructs the operation mode of the mission button 3700, and the type of dialogue itself when the mission button 3700 is operated. Depending on the type of display mode in which the tank jumps, an operation corresponding image may be displayed that indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within an appropriate operating range, the visibility of the display indicating the degree of expectation may or may not be hindered by the smoke image. It will happen. Therefore, the player who wants to know the degree of expectation naturally operates the left lever 3720 with a sense of urgency, thereby realizing an improvement in interest.
144 to 148, the technical idea suggesting the degree of expectation in the "shield bullet reach" is modeled after the image of the shell fired from the enemy unit and the left lever 3720 in the "full breakthrough reach". It may be applied to a display mode of a simulated image, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, an image of an enemy tank group, an image of a minefield, and the like. For example, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state or the time saving state may be indicated by the display mode of these images in the "full power breakthrough reach". Also, the technical idea related to the shield image in the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to the smoke image in the "full breakthrough reach".

Although the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested after the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is completed, the operation of the mission button 3700 may be requested while the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is being requested. With such a configuration, the operation difficulty of the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700 is increased, and the tension of the player can be increased. It should be noted that when both operation instruction displays are performed at the same time, it is preferable to display the operation instruction displays in such a manner that they do not overlap each other. For example, the display form shown in FIG. 192(b) and the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 in the display form shown in FIG. If the area available for display in the display area is insufficient, one of the simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 may be placed on the front side and one of the simulated images may be placed on the back side. are superimposed and displayed so that part of the simulated image displayed behind is visible.

By the way, if the degree of difficulty is increased too much, there is a risk that players who are not good at complicated operations will shy away from playing the game. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player, an auto reception mode is adopted in which the same effect display as when there is an appropriate operation by the player is performed, and the operation of the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700 are not performed. Even in such a case, the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation may be executed. In this case, the player only has to concentrate on operating the operation unit that has not been set to the automatic reception mode.
It should be noted that it is preferable that only the operation of the left lever 3720 can be set to the auto reception mode, only the operation of the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto reception mode, or both the operations of the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto reception mode.
In particular, when only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only has to concentrate on operating the left lever 3720 well, which may confuse the player who is not accustomed to the "all-out reach". can prevent the occurrence of Also, when both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 are set to the auto reception mode, the player can concentrate on visually recognizing the effect without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700. .

In addition to left lever 3720, right lever 3730 may be configured to be operable. For example, in the operation of the right lever 3730, it is preferable to make it a condition for executing the effect mode that the right lever 3730 is tilted within a predetermined tilting range for a predetermined period of time, similarly to the left lever 3720. For example, it is preferable to perform an effect display in which dust appears from caterpillars that represent the manner in which the own tank is accelerating. In this case, it is preferable that an image (simulated image or the like) for instructing the operation of right lever 3730 is not displayed.
In this manner, the right lever 3730 may be set to a presentation mode in which the presentation display based on the operation of the left lever 3720 looks gorgeous. Therefore, the operation instruction is not displayed, and the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730 does not suggest the degree of expectation.
It is preferable that the operation effective period of the right lever 3730 is matched with the operation effective period of the left lever 3720 .
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a higher sense of tension for the player who is tired of operating the left lever.

Furthermore, it is difficult to operate the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 with one hand at the same time. It should be installed in a position where it is not possible to That is, since one operation part is operated with one hand, the tension of the game can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the three operating sections, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and mission button 3700, can be operated simultaneously. It can make you feel nervous.
In the operating section shown in FIG. 137, since the attack button 3710 is provided between the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720 and the distance is large, it is extremely difficult to operate both operating sections with one hand. Impossible. On the other hand, left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions where the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 are provided may be exchanged. In this case, since the defense button 3740 is positioned between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operating sections with one hand.

Although an embodiment in which the left lever 3720 is used for a predetermined effect has been shown, a right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720 . Both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be configured to be capable of receiving operations, and the above-described display effects and the like may be executed when the operation of either lever satisfies the above-described conditions.

In this way, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the tension of operating the operation unit.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, an effect of pressing one operation unit in a game machine has been known. In this case, by providing a plurality of operation units and using the operation units for presentation, the game interest can be improved (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-087638). Furthermore, when the operation to a plurality of operation units is enabled at the same time, the amusement of the game can be further improved. On the other hand, a player who wants a simple game may feel troublesome or stressed by the requirement of such a complicated operation mode, and may rather lose interest in the game. A gaming machine that satisfies each of the players having different tastes in this way and prevents the interest from being lowered in any case will be described below.

In the "AI tank reach" of this embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may be enabled at the same time at a predetermined timing during the display effect. The player can set whether or not to display the simulated image and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 indicating the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 .
The player sets in advance a first setting (first effect situation) for displaying both a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, and displays only the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. a second setting (second rendering situation) to display only a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 (third rendering situation); a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700; The player can select and set any one of the four settings (production situations) of the fourth setting (fourth production situation) in which both of the simulated images are not displayed. .
Selection by the player is configured to be performed using the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, etc. during the demonstration during which the decorative symbols are not changing. Also, when the power is turned on when no selection is made by the player, the first setting is selected by default.

When the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 occurs during the variable display of the decoration pattern, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulation simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed in a mode corresponding to the setting selected by the player. An image is displayed. For example, when the player selects the third setting, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

196 to 201 for "AI tank reach", depending on whether or not the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is operated when the first to fourth settings are made. A display example will be described.

FIG. 196(a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which a first setting (first rendering situation) is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed.
FIG. 198 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 196(a) and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed. It is a diagram.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 196(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 198(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might" that instruct the operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11). FIG. 198(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the valid period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. At the timing when the operation effective period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 also ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 198(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 198(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image is displayed in which a cannonball hits an enemy tank and explodes. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 198(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. FIG. 198(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 196(b) shows an embodiment in which the second setting (second rendering situation) is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. is a chart.
FIG. 199 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 196(b), in which the second setting is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a figure which shows a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 196(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 199(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the words "Sergeant Might" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 are displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. can't break FIG. 199(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the valid period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 199(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 199(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 199(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 199(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 197(a) shows an embodiment in which a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. is a chart.
FIG. 200 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 197(a), in which the third setting is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a figure which shows a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 197(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 200(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the line "Colonel Dina" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700 is displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. will be FIG. 200(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the valid period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 200(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. FIG. 200(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image is displayed in which a cannonball hits an enemy tank and explodes. The display of movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 200(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 200(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation valid period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 197(b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth rendering situation) is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
FIG. 201 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 197(b), and shows a display state in which the fourth setting is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. is.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 197(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 201(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), display of a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and display of a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are not performed. FIG. 201(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the valid period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 201(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 201(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image is displayed in which a cannonball hits an enemy tank and explodes. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 201(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. FIG. 201(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

The operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 are the same. At this time, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the setting selected by the player. In addition, corresponding to the display of these simulated images, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" also change to indicate the mode of operation instruction. When the operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the operation valid period ends. Therefore, when the operation of one of attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 is accepted, the effect display corresponding to the operation of the other operation unit is not performed.

An image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, an image of an exploding cannonball, or the like may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. In this case, it is preferable to apply various types of expectations suggesting modes in the “shield bullet reach” shown with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148 to the display effect in the present embodiment.
It should be noted that the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the image of the exploding bullet may be displayed in the same manner as the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the image of the exploding shell.

As described above, according to the "AI tank reach" of the present embodiment, the effect situation in which a simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed and the simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed based on the intention of the player. Since an effect situation in which the game is not performed is realized, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

An example in which the player can select the first to fourth settings has been shown. The setting may be changed while the door of the door frame 3 is open. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the settings according to the customer base of the amusement arcade, the location situation, the number of days that have passed since the introduction, and the like, thereby providing the player with the optimum gaming environment. It should be noted that the settings made by the game arcade may be effective only when power is turned on to the game machine, and the settings may be changed by the player thereafter.

A first setting in which display of a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not restricted by the operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the defense button 3740) operable by the player; Any one of the second to fourth settings, in which the display of the simulated image imitating the button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is restricted, is alternately switched. good too. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, by operating the defense button 3740 once, the setting is switched to the first setting, and the player can operate the defense button 3740 again. , to the second setting again. Note that when the player has selected the first setting, even if the defense button 3740 is operated, the state in which the first setting is selected continues. For example, when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t14) during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the setting may be switched. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the setting cannot be switched during the operation valid period (the period during which the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly switch to a setting in which both simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed.

If the setting can be switched by the player with a simple operation, the player may be dissatisfied, for example, if the setting is switched just by pressing a button by mistake. Therefore, a configuration may be employed in which switching of settings is not easily executed. For example, it may be configured such that the setting is switched when a specific condition regarding operation such as holding down the defense button 3740 for 3 seconds is satisfied.

When the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), if the setting is the second setting to the fourth setting, the setting is automatically changed to the first setting, which is the default setting. You may make it By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who has started playing a game from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in settings.

An example has been shown in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated at the same time, and when one of the buttons is operated, the operation valid period of the other button ends. may be configured so that the operation effective period of the other button is not terminated even when is operated. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, after the effect display corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 (shooting, moving, and exploding shells) is started, , the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (bullet shooting/movement/explosion display) may be started.

It may be configured such that only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid and the case of only the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display the simulated image of the button whose operation is valid based on the setting. Alternatively, without being limited to the setting, it may be configured to display a simulated image of the operation means whose operation is valid. If there is only one operating unit for which the operation is valid, it is assumed that the player will not find it difficult to operate the buttons, so it is useful to adopt such a method.

Instead of activating the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 at the same time, for example, in a situation where one operation unit is valid, the other operation unit may be valid. In this case as well, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image simulating the operation unit based on the settings.

The attack button 3710 may be enabled after the mission button 3700 is enabled. Here, when the attack button 3710 is activated while the image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (the image in which the bullet is moving) is displayed, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed. It may be configured not to display. By adopting such a configuration, information can be prevented from being excessive, and the stress felt by the player can be reduced.

Before or at the same time as the valid operation period occurs, a sound effect indicating that the valid operation period has started or is in the valid operation period may be output. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output at timings (from timing t7 to timing t8 and from timing t22 to timing t23) before the operation valid period starts. Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the operation valid period occurs (timing t8 to timing t9, timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, even if the effective period of operation occurs, if the simulated image of the operation part is set not to be displayed, the effect sound indicating that the effective period of operation has occurred for the operation part may not be output. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling confused. On the other hand, when an operation is performed, it is preferable to configure so that a predetermined sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being lowered.

Depending on the selected settings, a rendering situation in which one simulated button-like image is displayed, and an rendered situation in which two button-like simulated images are displayed can occur. At this time, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than when two simulated images are displayed.
With such a configuration, the display area can be effectively used. In addition, a player who does not select to display a plurality of simulated images may not notice that the simulated images are displayed due to their age. It is possible to notice the fact that it has not happened, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the third operation unit (defense button 3740) is used, and both the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and the second operation unit (mission button 3700) can accept operations, and the first operation unit can be simulated. In a first effect situation in which both an image (display related to operation of the first operation section) and a simulated image of the second operation section (display related to operation of the second operation section) are displayed, the player operates the third operation section. is operated, a special display may appear that makes it difficult to visually recognize both the displayed simulated image of the first operating section and the simulated image of the second operating section.
This special display notifies the player who operates the third operation part in a situation where the first operation part or the second operation part should be operated, that the operation is erroneous. It is possible to suggest In addition, it is considered that the player who operates the third operation part intentionally performs such an action in a situation where the simulated image of the first operation part and the simulated image of the second operation part are clearly displayed. Therefore, in order for a special display to be displayed to such an intentional player, the condition for the appearance of the display is not limited to the fact that the third operation section is simply operated. It is desirable that the above special display is performed when the third operation unit is operated and the operation time of the third operation unit satisfies a special condition of a predetermined number of seconds or longer.

As described above, according to the “AI tank reach” of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the effect related to the display mode of the simulated image.

Conventionally, at the timing before the operation to the operation part becomes effective, after performing a special premonition effect suggesting that the operation will be effective, the operation part is effective during the period when the operation to the operation part is effective. A simulation image of the operating part showing that the operation part is simulated is displayed, the player is urged to operate the operating part, and based on the operation of the operating part, the special lottery result is expected to be a big win. A game machine that suggests degrees has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-125549).

By performing the special premonition effect in this way, it is shown to the player that the operation to the operation unit can be effective.
However, some players may be distracted by the precursor effect by performing such a precursor effect, and may not be able to display a simulated operation part image indicating that the operation of the operation part is effective, There is a possibility that attention to the operation itself becomes distracted, and it becomes impossible to face the display of the simulated operation part image and the operation of the operation part with sufficient time.
For example, among skilled players, there are some players who want to concentrate on operating the operation unit rather than visually recognizing the precursor effect and enjoying it as a effect. This is because the player only visually recognizes the premonition effect, but the player concentrates on operating the operation unit with the hope that the player will make a big win. . However, there is a risk that such a concentration of consciousness will be disturbed by the premonition effect that is performed before the expiration of the effective period.
On the other hand, players with little game experience may not understand the implications of various effects including the precursor effects, and may not be aware that the simulated operation part image indicating that the operation to the operation part is valid has been displayed. There is a risk that the operation unit cannot be operated immediately, and the opportunity to intervene in the performance is lost.

In this way, the premonition effect, which is relatively unimportant for the player, prevents the player from concentrating on the act of operating the operation unit, which is relatively important for the player, or indicates that the operation of the operation unit is effective. There is a risk that the user may not be able to notice the display of the operation unit simulation image shown.
In the embodiments described below, the visibility of the precursor effect can be lowered according to the player's own intention, and a simulated operation part image indicating that the operation of the operation part is valid is displayed. 4 shows an example in which the user can concentrate on the operation of the operation unit.

202, 203, 204, etc., modified embodiments of the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIG. 144 and the like will be described below.
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing a time chart in this embodiment. 202 and 204 are diagrams showing display examples in the display area.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set the display mode of the precursor effect during the demonstration. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes) has passed without the decorative symbols shown in FIG. Control is performed to shift to the indicated display state. FIG. 202(a) shows a display example during the demonstration. When the attack button 3710 is pressed from the display state shown in FIG. 139 or the display state shown in FIG. 202(a), the display state changes to that shown in FIG. 202(b). As shown in FIGS. 202(a) to 202(c), the decoration pattern in this case is displayed in the upper left of the display area in the state of being displayed in a stationary state, in a smaller size than during the variable display.

FIG. 202(b) shows a display state in which the display mode of the precursor effect can be set. In this state, by operating the left lever 3720 in the horizontal direction, it is possible to select one of the settings of "normal display", "small display", and "no display". The frame corresponding to the selected setting is displayed thick. Also, the dialogue displayed in the dialogue window of "Sgt. Might" shows the player how to select the settings. It should be noted that "normal display" is automatically selected when the game machine is powered on.

FIG. 202(c) shows a display state in which the left lever 3720 is tilted rightward to change from the state in which "normal display" is selected to the state in which "small display" is selected. By operating the attack button 3710 again in this state, the display state shown in FIG. 202(a) is restored. At the same time, the setting content selected by the player (in this case, the setting content of displaying the precursor effect in a small size) is stored in the peripheral control board 1510 . In this way, the player can select one of the display settings with different visibility of the precursor effect.
Note that when the player selects "do not display", similar display and storage processing of the selected setting contents are performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, a description will be given of the display mode when the portent effect is executed. FIG. 203(a) shows the changing state of the decorative pattern and the state of accepting the operation of the attack button 3710 (whether the acceptance of the operation is valid or invalid). FIGS. 203(b) and 203(c) show the display state of the cheering dialogue image, the simulated attack button image, the enemy tank image, etc. when "normal display" is selected. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display of the cheering speech image functions as an omen effect. 204(a) to 204(d) are display examples of the display area when "normal display" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 203, the cheering speech image is displayed for six seconds from timing t13 to timing t19. As the images of cheering words, four images of cheering words of "<get lost~", "<do your best~", "get lost~>", and "do your best~>" are displayed. The two cheering dialogue images, "<Hazero~" and "<Ganbare~", appear from the left end of the display area, move horizontally to the right within the display area, and exit the display area at the right end of the display area. and move. On the other hand, the two cheering lines images, "Let's get away~>" and "Ganbare~>", appear from the right end of the display area, move horizontally to the left within the display area, and reach the left end of the display area. move outside. Also, from timing t13, the image of the enemy tank is displayed moving from the right end to the left end of the display area.

FIG. 204(a) shows a display example at timing t14, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image has just started. FIG. 204(b) shows a display example at timing t16, which is the timing when the cheering speech image is displayed in the middle stage. FIG. 204(c) shows a display example at timing t18, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image has reached its final stage. As shown in the display example, the cheering speech image moves horizontally to the right or left.

Simultaneously with the end of the display of the cheering dialogue image at timing t19, an operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 204(d) shows a state (for example, a display state at timing t20) in which an operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. After the end of the display of the cheering dialogue image, as in the embodiment shown for "shield bullet reach", display of the simulated operation part image simulating the attack button 3710, the start of the operation valid period, the operation of the attack button 3710 and the operation valid A destruction image is displayed based on the end of the period, and the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested. FIG. 203(b) shows a display state when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t21. Also, FIG. 203(c) shows a display state when the valid operation period ends at timing t22.

Next, a display example when "small display" is selected will be described. FIG. 203(d) is a time chart when "small display" is selected. FIGS. 204(e) to 204(g) are display examples when "small display" is selected.
FIG. 204(e) shows the display state at timing t14. FIG. 204(f) shows the display state at timing t16. FIG. 204(g) shows the display state at timing t18.
As shown in FIGS. 204(e) to 204(g), when "small display" is selected, the cheering dialogue image is displayed smaller than when "normal display" is selected, and is visually recognized. considered a difficult situation.

Next, a display example when "do not display" is selected will be described. FIG. 203(e) is a time chart when "do not display" is selected. When "not display" is selected, only the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the display area, and the cheering dialogue image is not displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19.
When "do not display" is selected in this manner, the cheering dialogue image is not displayed unlike when "normal display" or "small display" is selected.

In this way, the setting by the player during the demonstration can take three states: a state in which the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) is displayed, a state in which it is displayed in a small size, and a state in which it is not displayed. , it is possible to execute an effect mode that suits the taste of the player. For example, a player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display can make the special precursor display difficult or invisible to display and operate the simulated operation unit image simulating the first operation unit (attack button 3710). You can concentrate on the operation of the part.

By the way, in the above-described embodiment, it was limited to during the demonstration that the visual recognition mode of the omen effect could be changed. Therefore, when trying to change the visual recognition mode of the omen effect, it is necessary to temporarily set the number of reservations to 0 so that the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner. There was a possibility that the tempo of the game would be spoiled by feeling troublesome or setting the number of reservations to 0.

Therefore, an embodiment modified so as to change the visual recognition mode of the omen effect during the variable display of the decorative symbols will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 205 and the like.

FIGS. 205(a) to 205(c) are time charts showing effects similar to those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 203(a) to 203(c). In other words, the variable display of decorative patterns, simulated image of the operation part of the attack button 3710, image of destroying the enemy tank, and effective period of operation are performed in the same manner.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205(d), the defense button 3740 is pressed from the timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect is started to the timing t27 after the destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. operation is valid. Then, when a specific condition regarding the operation of the defense button 3740 is satisfied (details of which will be described later, when a long press or repeated hits are detected), the normal display of the cheering dialogue image is changed to a small display state. Alternatively, it is possible to change to a non-display state.

FIG. 205(e) is a time chart when "small display" is selected in the setting during the demonstration. At timing t13, after the cheering dialogue image is displayed, the player long presses the defense button 3740, and the cheering dialogue image is displayed in a small size on condition that the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering words image is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 204(a) to the display state shown in FIG. 204(e) while the cheering words image is being displayed.

FIG. 205(f) is a time chart when "do not display" is selected in the setting during demonstration. At timing t13, after the cheering words image is displayed, the player long presses the defense button 3740, and the cheering words image is not displayed on condition that the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering speech image is changed from the normal display state shown in FIG. 204(a) to a state in which the cheering speech image is not displayed while the speech image is displayed.

The display state in which the cheering dialogue image is displayed in a small size and the display state in which the cheering dialogue image is not displayed are configured to continue while the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected.
Alternatively, once the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, even if the player releases the defense button 3740, the cheering dialogue image is displayed in a small size until timing t19, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image ends. The state where the cheering dialogue image is displayed or the state where the cheering dialogue image is not displayed may be continued.

In addition, by pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time in advance during the period from timing t5 at which the effective period of operation of the defense button 3740 is started to timing t13 at which the display of the cheering dialogue image is started, the cheering dialogue can be displayed. From timing t13, which is the timing at which the display of the image is started, it is possible to display the cheering dialogue image in a small size or not to display the cheering dialogue image in the first place.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the special sign display (supporting dialogue image) is set in advance during the demonstration, and the ready-to-win effect is generated during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the first operation unit ( The second operation unit (defense button 3740) is operated at any timing when there is a possibility that a special warning display (supporting dialogue image) will be displayed to suggest that the attack button 3710) will be operable. Then, the player can select the display mode of the special omen display during the variable display of the decorative symbols. For example, when the player does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display, the visibility of the special precursor display is reduced to make it difficult to see or to make it invisible. You can concentrate your attention on the display and operation of the operation unit.

The display mode of the cheering dialogue image may be changed when the defense button 3740 is repeatedly hit, instead of when the defense button 3740 is pressed for a long time.

Instead of providing a function for setting the display mode of the cheering dialogue image during the demonstration as shown in FIG. good too. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the cheering words image is not displayed.

144 and the like, an embodiment in which a shield image is displayed by operating the defense button 3740 is shown. An embodiment modified to be hidden is shown below.

With reference to FIGS. 205(a) to 205(d), FIGS. 205(g) to 205(h), and FIG. An embodiment modified to display will be described. In this embodiment, based on the operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), an image (first shield image ) is displayed to hide the cheering words image, thereby lowering the visibility of the cheering words image and making it difficult or invisible.

FIG. 205(g) is a time chart showing the display state of the first shield image when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this production example). The display period of the first shield image is predetermined to be 6 seconds. In this production example, it is displayed for 6 seconds from timing t14 to timing t20. In addition, it is not necessary to continuously press the defense button 3740 for a long time. After the long press is detected and the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image will not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is released. Continued.

FIG. 206(a) shows a display example at timing t14, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image has just started. FIG. 206(b) shows a display example at timing t16, which is the timing when the cheering speech image is displayed in the middle stage. FIG. 206(c) shows a display example at timing t18, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image has reached its final stage. FIG. 206(d) shows a display example from timing t19 when the attack button 3710 is activated to timing t20.

FIG. 206(e) shows a display example when the first shield image is displayed at timing t14. FIG. 206(f) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t16. FIG. 206(g) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t18. FIG. 206(h) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIGS. 206(e) to 206(h), the size and display position of the first shield image do not change. Therefore, the precursor effect can be hidden without making the first shield image itself conspicuous, and the player can carefully wait for the timing when the simulated operation part image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. The color of the first shield image should be an inconspicuous color such as gray. Also, it is preferable that the display mode of the first shield image does not suggest the degree of expectation for the special lottery result. It should be noted that, similarly to the embodiment relating to the "shield bullet reach", it is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation is indicated by the simulated image of the operation unit or the destruction image of the enemy tank. At this time, a plurality of different expectations may be displayed depending on the color of the simulated image of the operating unit and the destroyed image of the enemy tank. Also, the display priority of the destruction image may be higher or lower than the display priority of the first shield image. When the display priority of the destructive image is set higher than the display priority of the first shield image, even if part or all of the destructive image overlaps the first shield image, it is displayed on the front side. . When the display priority of the destructive image is set lower than that of the first shield image, part or all of the destructive image may be displayed without being hidden by the first shield image.
These points about the first shield image may be adopted in the second shield image described later.

As shown in FIG. 206(h), between the first shield image and the simulated operation unit image imitating the attack button 3710, the simulated operation unit image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the first shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the simulated operation part image is not hindered, and rather the visibility of the simulated operation part image is improved.

In this way, by displaying an image (first shield image) that hides the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) at the player's will, and by configuring to hide part or all of the special precursor display, A player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display lowers the visibility of the special precursor display to make it difficult to see or to make it invisible. You can concentrate on the display of and the operation of the first operation unit.
In addition, since the simulated operation part image imitating the first operation part (attack button 3710) does not become difficult or invisible, the progress of the game using the first operation part is not hindered.

An embodiment in which the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 has been shown with reference to FIG. 205(g). It may be configured as FIG. 205(h) shows an effect example in which repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected at timing t14 and the first shield image is displayed until timing t20. In this case as well, the display examples shown in FIGS.

The size of the first shield image may be different. Figures 207(a) to 207(d) refer to Figures 205(a) to 205(d), Figure 205(g), Figure 205(h), Figure 206(e) to Figure 206(h) 10 is a display example in an embodiment in which the size of the first shield image is modified in the embodiment shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the size of the first shield image is reduced. Also, the display position is slightly higher. FIGS. 207(a) to 207(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. In the present embodiment, the cheering words images "<get lost~" and "get lost~>" are rendered invisible or invisible by the first shield image. On the other hand, the cheering words images "<Do your best~" and "Do your best~>" are not rendered invisible or invisible by the first shield image.

In this way, part of the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) is reduced in visibility by the first shield image and made invisible or invisible, and the visibility of the other part of the special precursor display is reduced. It may be configured so that it is not made visible or invisible.

A plurality of shield images may be configured to be displayable. 205(i), 207(e) to 207(h) are shown in FIGS. 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g), 205(h), and 207(a) to 207(d) is a time chart and a display example showing an embodiment modified so as to display a plurality of shield images in the embodiment shown with reference to 207(d). In this embodiment, after the first shield image is displayed when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, the second shield image is displayed when the long press of the defense button is detected again. It is configured as follows. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.
In the drawing, the first shield image is indicated by diagonal lines slanting to the right, and the second shield image is indicated by slanting lines ascending to the right.

FIG. 205(i) is a time chart showing a display state in which a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15, and shows a state in which the second shield image is displayed for six seconds until timing t21. FIGS. 207(e) to 207(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In FIG. 207(e), although the images of the cheering words "<Let's go~" and "Let's go~" are made invisible by the first shield image, "<Let's do our best~" and "Let's do our best~>" The cheering dialogue image is shown in a state in which it is easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In FIG. 207(f), in addition to the first shield image, the display of the second shield image is started, and the images of cheering words "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~>" are invisible due to the second shield image. is shown.
In FIG. 207(g), the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the cheering words "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~>" are rendered invisible by the second shield image. It is shown.
FIG. 207(h) shows a state in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. ing. As shown in FIG. 207(h), between the second shield image and the simulated operation unit image imitating the attack button 3710, the simulated operation unit image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the simulated operation unit image is not hindered.

The width of the second shield image is slightly longer than that of the first shield image. Also, the second shield image does not move like the first shield image. Also, the color of the second shield image should be gray like the first shield image. Furthermore, the colors of the first shield image and the second shield image may be gray with the same brightness, or may be gray with different brightness.

After the first shield image is displayed by long-pressing the defense button 3740, the second shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for a predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to display both the first shield image and the second shield image simply by continuing to press the defense button 3740 .
On the other hand, after the defense button 3740 is long-pressed to display the first shield image, the player temporarily releases the defense button 3740 so that it is not pressed, and then the defense button 3740 is pressed again for a predetermined period. A second shield image may be displayed if the shielding continues. With such a configuration, the degree of difficulty in displaying the second shield image increases. It becomes easy for the player to intentionally create any of

In this way, a plurality of images (first shield image, second shield image) for concealing the special sign display (supporting speech image) are prepared, and these are stepped by the operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740) as a trigger. By displaying it, the special precursor display is not suddenly hidden, so even if the player mistakenly operates the second operation unit, part of the special precursor display can be maintained in an easy-to-recognize state. . In addition, it is possible to realize a display mode that matches the preferences of the player.

Although the embodiment in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed by one operation unit (defense button 3740) has been described, a plurality of shields corresponding to a plurality of operation units (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700) are shown. A modified embodiment in which images (a first shield image and a second shield image) are displayed is described below. 205(j), 205(k), 207(e) to 207(h) are shown in FIGS. 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g), 205(h), 207(a) to 207(d) are a time chart and a display example showing an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.
In the present embodiment, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, in addition to the defense button 3740, operation reception of the mission button 3700 is enabled. Also, when a pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is detected, a second shield image is displayed. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.

FIG. 205(j) is a time chart showing the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 and the display state when the operation of pressing the mission button 3700 is not detected.
FIG. 205(k) shows a state in which the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed for six seconds until timing t21. FIGS. 207(e) to 207(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In FIG. 207(e), although the images of the cheering words "<Let's go~" and "Let's go~" are made invisible by the first shield image, "<Let's do our best~" and "Let's do our best~>" The cheering dialogue image is shown in a state in which it is easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In FIG. 207(f), in addition to the first shield image, the display of the second shield image is started, and the images of cheering words "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~>" are invisible due to the second shield image. is shown.
In FIG. 207(g), the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the cheering words "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~>" are rendered invisible by the second shield image. It is shown.
FIG. 207(h) shows a state in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. ing. As shown in FIG. 207(h), between the second shield image and the simulated operation unit image imitating the attack button 3710, the simulated operation unit image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the simulated operation unit image is not hindered.

Triggered by the operation of the plurality of operation units, that is, the second operation button and the third operation button (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700), a plurality of images that hide different positions in the special sign display (supporting dialogue image) are displayed. (the first shield image and the second shield image) are configured to be displayable, so that the degree to which the special precursor display is to be hidden and the position of the special precursor display to be hidden can be selected according to the preferences of the player. can.
In addition, by displaying the simulated operation unit image that simulates the first operation unit (attack button 3710) in front of the second shield image, the simulated operation unit image does not become difficult or invisible. It does not hinder the progress of the game using.

With reference to FIGS. 205 to 207 and the like, an embodiment has been described in which the special omen display (supporting speech image) can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image. An embodiment in which these images and the like are transformed will be described below with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209. FIG. The behavior of the gaming machine other than the image display is the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 205 to 207 and the like.

FIGS. 208(a) to 208(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, the first shield image has a horizontally long rectangular shape and has a hole in the center through which an image displayed behind can be visually recognized. Also, the second shield image has a laterally long donut shape.
FIG. 208(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the drawing, the cheering dialogue image becomes invisible or invisible due to the first shield image. The display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the first shield image.
208(b) and 208(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the first shield image.
FIG. 208(d) is a display example showing a state in which the valid operation period has occurred while the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the drawing, an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area.

The second shield image may have an elliptical shape instead of a donut shape, and may be deformed so that the area behind the hole in the center of the first shield image is invisible. FIGS. 208(e) and 208(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in FIG. 208(f), an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the second shield image.

209(a) to 209(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, each of the first shield image and the second shield image has a vertically long rectangular shape. Two of each of the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed.
FIG. 209(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the drawing, the cheering dialogue image becomes invisible or invisible due to the first shield image. The display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the shield image.
209(b) and 209(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the shield image.
FIG. 209(d) is a display example showing a state in which the valid operation period has occurred while the shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in a region sandwiched between two second shield images.

Although a gap is provided between the two second shield images, it may be modified so that the gap is not provided. FIGS. 209(e) and 209(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in FIG. 209(f), an operation unit simulated image that simulates an attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the two second shield images.

As described above, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the simulated operation unit image imitating the attack button 3710. It is configured so that the second shield image can be displayed at a near position.
The player can display only the first shield image, display only the second shield image, or display both the first shield image and the second shield image according to his/her preference.

An embodiment has been described in which a cheering dialogue image is displayed as an image to be displayed as a special omen display. A modified embodiment is shown below.

FIG. 210 is a time chart in this embodiment, and more specifically, it is a time chart modified from FIG. As the precursor effect, instead of displaying the cheering speech image, a simulated image in the shape of the attack button 3710 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “simulated precursor image”) is deformed to be displayed in a predetermined manner. However, the operation timing and the like are the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 205 and the like.

FIGS. 211 to 213 are display examples of the precursor effect in this embodiment, and more specifically, are display examples modified from FIGS.
FIGS. 211(a) to 211(d), FIGS. 212(a) to 212(d), and FIGS. 213(a) to 213(d) are shown in FIGS. 206(a) to 206(d), respectively. It is a display example corresponding to the display example at each of the shown timings (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20).
Similarly, FIGS. 211(e) to 211(h), FIGS. 212(e) to 212(h), and FIGS. 213(e) to 213(h) correspond to FIGS. It is a display example corresponding to the display example at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in h).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 211, an omen simulated image imitating an attack button 3710 is first displayed in 5 rows and 5 columns (FIG. 211(a)). The omen simulated image is opaque, and the image located behind (image of the road, etc.) is invisible. Some simulated precursor images are hidden in serif windows and tank images. Next, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the precursor simulated images are displayed in a matrix of 3 rows and 3 columns. Then, as shown in FIG. 211(c), only one precursor simulated image is displayed. Simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period of the attack button 3710, as shown in FIG. A simulated image of the operation unit is displayed.

FIGS. 210(e) and 211(e) to 211(h) show, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. A time chart and a display example when it is detected are shown. In this case, the simulated precursor image is translucently displayed from timing t14 to timing t19. At timing t19, the simulated precursor image becomes opaque at the timing when the valid operation period starts, and the characters "attack" are added, and the simulated operation unit image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed. be done.

It should be noted that, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 210(f), the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 may be configured not to be displayed.

FIGS. 210(g) and 212 show, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 211, that the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 is translucently displayed instead of displaying the simulated precursor image as the first shield image. It is a time chart and a display example showing an embodiment modified to hide with .

FIGS. 212(a), 212(b), 212(c), and 212(d) show timing t14 when the defense button 3740 is not operated and the first shield image is not displayed. , timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 210(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this production example), a simulated omen image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the front side. 1 shield image is displayed, and part of the precursor simulated image becomes invisible or invisible. FIG. 212(e) shows a display example when the display of the first shield image is started at timing t14. FIGS. 212(f), 212(g), and 212(h) show display examples at timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

Instead of long pressing of defense button 3740, deformation may be made such that the first shield image is displayed when repeated hits of defense button 3740 are detected.
FIG. 210(h) shows an example of an effect when repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected instead of the long press of the defense button 3740 .

FIG. 213 is a display example showing an embodiment in which the simulated precursor image shown in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 210(g), 210(h), and 212 is transformed into another simulated precursor image.

As shown in FIGS. 213(a) to 213(c), nine simulated precursor images imitating the attack button 3710 gradually gather slightly left of the center of the display area, and finally, as shown in FIG. 213(d). , and the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 becomes valid. FIG. 213(a) is a display example at timing t14. At this time, each precursor simulated image is displayed at a distant position. FIG. 213(b) is a display example at timing t16, in which each precursor simulated image gradually approaches. FIG. 213(c) is a display example at timing t18. At this time, each of the precursor simulated images is superimposed and displayed on the right side of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might". Each precursor simulated image is displayed with three protrusions like afterimages indicating the direction of movement. At timing t19, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective, the display of each protrusion ends, and the character "attack" is attached to the precursor simulated image, which is displayed as the operation unit simulated image. FIG. 213(d) shows a display example from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 210(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this production example), a simulated omen image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the front side. 1 shield image is displayed, and part of the precursor simulated image becomes invisible or invisible. FIG. 213(e) shows a display example when the display of the first shield image is started at timing t14. FIGS. 213(f), 213(g), and 213(h) show display examples at timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In this manner, even when the simulated precursor image imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is displayed as the special precursor display instead of the cheering dialogue image, the visibility of the special precursor display is reduced. Therefore, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained by making it difficult to see or to make it invisible.

205(i) and 207 for the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 210(a) to 210(h) and FIGS. 210( i ) and a display example shown in FIG. 214 .
In this embodiment, the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the precursor effect can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.

FIGS. 214(a) to 214(d) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 212(a) to 212(h) modified so as to be able to display the second shield image. showing.
FIG. 210(i) is a time chart when a long press of defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
FIGS. 214(a), 214(b), 214(c), and 214(d) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of display in the state where the

FIGS. 214(e) to 214(h) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 213(a) to 213(h) modified so as to be able to display the second shield image. showing.
FIG. 210(i) is a time chart when a long press of defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
FIGS. 214(e), 214(f), 214(g), and 214(h) are display examples in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

205(j) and 205(k) for the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. ), and an embodiment to which the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 214 and the display example shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the precursor effect can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.
Also, the second shield image is configured to be displayed when the mission button 3700 is detected to be pressed.

FIGS. 214(a) to 214(d) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 212(a) to 212(h) modified so as to be able to display the second shield image. showing.
As shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700. FIG.
FIGS. 214(a), 214(b), 214(c), and 214(d) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

FIGS. 214(e) to 214(h) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 213(a) to 213(h) modified so as to be able to display the second shield image. showing.
As shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700. FIG.
FIGS. 214(e), 214(f), 214(g), and 214(h) are display examples in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

211, 213, etc., in which the simulated omen image is displayed as the omen effect, the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. may be adopted.

The embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 210(i) to 210(k) and FIG. 214 can also provide the same effect as the embodiment described above.

205 and 210, an embodiment in which the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed by operating the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700 has been described. The operation effective period of is from timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect state occurs to timing t27 which is the final stage of the ready-to-win effect state.
Triggered by the operation of the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 by the player, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed at any timing during this period. Also, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds). It is possible to display the first shield image and the second shield image.

For example, although the ready-to-win effect state has occurred at timing t5, a player who does not want to visually recognize the precursor effect may press the defense button 3740 or By operating the mission button 3700, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed, and the premonition effect can be displayed in advance in a state in which it is difficult to see or cannot be seen.

Further, for example, from timing t16 to timing t22, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and at the same time as the operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 indicating that the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid. can be displayed.
In addition, the display of the first shield image and the second shield image can be continued even after the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 is completed or the effective period of the operation is completed. When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted or when the effective period of operation ends, the degree of expectation for the result of the special lottery is indicated by the mode of the enemy tank destruction image. may be set high so that part or all of the destruction image is hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image.
In this case, the player needs to pay attention to the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image and the timing of starting the display. For example, if the player randomly operates the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 regardless of the progress of the presentation, a display state in which the visibility of the destruction image is impeded as a penalty may occur. The player seriously operates the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700, and the decrease in interest is suppressed.

Multiple types of simulated images of the operation part are prepared according to the degree of expectation, and the display is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) instead of being hidden when an operation is received or when the operation valid period ends. good too.
For the player who has made at least a part of the precursor display invisible or invisible by means of the first shield image and the second shield image in order to concentrate on the operation of the operation unit, the display status of the simulated operation unit image is that important. By leaving this effect situation after the operation, it is possible to give the player a reverberation of interest in the operation effect.

Note that the time for displaying the first shield image and the second shield image, and the time for displaying the cheering dialogue image that functions as a special precursor display and the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 were set to 6 seconds each. The time for displaying the first shield image or the second shield image may be longer. For example, the first shield image and the second shield image may be displayed for 10 seconds. Alternatively, once the display of the first shield image or the second shield image is started, until the operation valid period starts or until the display of the destruction image starts (that is, until the attack button 3710 by the player is activated). The first shield image and the second shield image may continue to be displayed until the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation valid period ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the special precursor display and keep it in a visually difficult or invisible state with a small number of operations.

On the other hand, the time during which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed may be shorter than the time during which the special precursor display is displayed (for example, 3 seconds). In this case, a player who does not want to view the special precursor display is required to perform multiple operations, but a player who mistakenly displays the first shield image or the second shield image will see the special precursor display. During at least a part of the period during which the first shield image and the second shield image hinder the visibility, the special precursor display can be visually recognized, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

If the conditions for displaying the first shield image are met when the defense button 3740 is operated while the first shield image is being displayed, the display of the first shield image is continued again from the timing when the condition is met. You may let For example, when the first shield image is displayed for 4 seconds and the conditions for displaying the first shield image are satisfied, the first shield image is displayed for another 6 seconds, and the first shield image is displayed for a total of 10 seconds. An image may be displayed.
Similarly, with regard to the second shield image, if the conditions for displaying the second shield image are met by the operation of the mission button 3700, the display of the second shield image is continued again from the timing when the condition is met. You may let For example, when the second shield image is displayed for 4 seconds and the conditions for displaying the second shield image are satisfied, the second shield image is displayed for another 6 seconds, and the second shield image is displayed for a total of 10 seconds. An image may be displayed.

During the valid period of the defense button 3740, the first shield image is displayed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses. When the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image can be displayed again. The same applies to the second shield image.

According to such a configuration, it is possible for a player who hesitates whether or not to see the special precursor display and does not want to see it to extend the display time of the first shield image and the second shield image. . On the other hand, a player who wants to see the special precursor display mistakenly operates the second operation unit (defense button 3740) or the third operation unit (mission button 3700), resulting in poor visibility of the special precursor display. It is possible that the visibility of the special sign display is lowered and becomes difficult to see or invisible, but when the player does not operate the second operation unit any more, the visibility of the special sign display is lowered and becomes difficult to see or invisible. will end promptly. In addition, since the display of the first shield image and the second shield image can be performed at any desired timing (for example, before the start of the special precursor display or after the expiration of the operation valid period), the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed. It is possible to practice displaying the

FIGS. 215(a) to 215(d) show modified display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 214(a) to 214(d). 4 shows a display example in the form.
As shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700. FIG.
FIGS. 215(a), 215(b), 215(c), and 215(d) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

215(e) to 215(h) show modified display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 214(e) to 214(h). 4 shows a display example in the form.
As shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700. FIG.
FIGS. 215(e), 215(f), 215(g), and 215(h) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 215(a) to 215(d) and the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 215(e) to 215(h), the display priority of the first shield image is is set higher than the display priority of the second shield image, and the first shield image is displayed in front of the second shield image. Also, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to the position where the operation unit simulated image is displayed, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively far away. Also, the size of the first shield image (specifically, the area it occupies in the display area) is larger than the size of the second shield image.
In addition, as described above, a special operation (a long press operation or repeated hitting operation) is required for defense button 3740 to display the first shield image, but mission button 3700 is required to display the second shield image. It is only necessary to perform the pressing operation of . That is, the second shield image is displayed at the operation start timing of the mission button 3700 (operation start acceptance timing), while the first shield image is not displayed at the operation start timing of the defense button 3740 (operation start acceptance timing).

According to such a configuration, the display of the first shield image is performed by the player operating the second operation section (defense button 3740) in a complicated operation mode with a clear intention.
On the other hand, the second shield image is displayed when the player operates the third operation section (mission button 3700) in a simple operation mode. Therefore, the second shield image is displayed not only when the player intentionally operates the third operation unit but also when the player unintentionally operates it or operates it by mistake.
As described above, in the present embodiment, instead of making the difficulty level of the operation mode required for displaying the first shield image relatively higher than the difficulty level required for displaying the second shield image, The first shield image can hinder the visibility of the special precursor display more than the image.

In this way, by displaying the first shield image, which is not displayed unless it is operated with a clear intention, the player can use the simulation image of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) or the simulated operation unit image. It is possible to concentrate on the operation of the first operation unit.
Also, even when the second shield image, which can be displayed by a simple operation, is displayed, the player can concentrate on the simulated operation part image and the operation of the operation part. On the other hand, when the second shield image is displayed compared to when the first shield image is displayed, the visibility of the special precursor display is relatively high, so that even if the player makes a mistake, Even if the second shield image is displayed due to the second shield image, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest felt by the player who wants to see the special precursor display.

Also, the first shield image may be displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed after a special operation (a long press operation or a repeated press operation) on the defense button 3740 is detected. Also, the display time of the first shield image is preferably longer than the display time of the second shield image.
Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is adopted.

The first shield image displayed when the defense button 3740 is operated and the second shield image displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated may differ in image size and display time. For example, in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 207 and 214, the size of the second shield image is made larger than that of the first shield image, and the large area of the special precursor display is made invisible.
Alternatively, the display times of the first shield image and the second shield image may be different. For example, the first shield image may be displayed for 6 seconds, and the second shield image may be displayed for 9 seconds. Conversely, the first shield image may be displayed for 9 seconds, and the second shield image may be displayed for 6 seconds.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the special precursor display a visual mode that suits the player's taste.

The first shield image and the second shield image may be dynamically displayed instead of simply appearing at predetermined positions. When displaying as dynamic display, for example, it is displayed so as to dynamically appear in a so-called cut-in mode from either the top, bottom, left, or right of the display area, or dynamic display such as wipe-in, wipe-out, fade-in, or fade-out is performed. You may adopt it.
The movement of the first shield image and the second shield image appearing while moving in this manner may be continued and stopped at the center of the display area. Alternatively, the movement of the first shield image and the second shield image appearing while moving at one end of the display area is continued in this manner, and the images are displayed so as to disappear outside the display area after being moved at the other end of the display area. good too.
As a result, the first shield image and the second shield image not only hide the special sign display, but also the appearance and disappearance of the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed in a dramatic manner, which reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Triggered by the operation of the defense button 3740, a cheering dialogue image and a simulated precursor image of the attack button 3710 are translucently displayed, and triggered by the operation of the mission button 3700, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed to display the cheering dialogue. The image or the precursor simulation image of the attack button 3710 may be made invisible or invisible.
In this way, by making it possible to make the special precursor display invisible or difficult to see in different modes depending on the type of the operation unit, it is possible to make the viewing mode suitable for the player's taste.

Further, there are a plurality of display modes of the simulated portent image imitating the attack button 3710, and the degree of expectation for the special lottery result may be indicated by the type of the simulated portent image displayed. For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color or shape of the simulated precursor image. Also in this case, it is preferable that the special sign display can be made invisible or invisible by the first shield image or the second shield image.
By adopting such a configuration, the player is not misled by the degree of expectation indicated by the precursor simulated image, and the display of the simulated operation portion image imitating the first operation portion (attack button 3710) and the display of the first operation portion are prevented. The player can concentrate on the operation of .

Even if the special omen display (display of a cheering dialogue image or simulated omen image) ends while the first shield image or the second shield image is being displayed, the first shield image or the second shield image will not be displayed for the predetermined time. You should continue. This is because if the display of the first shield image and the second shield image ends at the same time as the operation valid period starts, the background image (such as the road) located in the background of the first shield image and the second shield image will be displayed. This is because the player who wants to concentrate on the display of the simulated image of the operation unit simulating the attack button 3710 feels uncomfortable. It is preferable to continue displaying the concealment image (the first shield image and the second shield image) even if the operation effective period has occurred in this way.

Also, the display priority of the operation section simulation image should be higher than the display priority of the first shield image. For example, as shown in FIG. 206(h), it is preferable to display the operation unit simulation image on the front side of the first shield image. With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed simulated image. If the first shield image were to be erased, the background image hidden by the first shield image would become visible, which would hinder concentration on the simulated operation unit image.
A similar configuration can be adopted not only for the first shield image, but also for the second shield image.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 207(h) and 214(h), a part of the simulated operation part image and a part of the second shield image may be displayed so as to overlap each other. At this time, it is preferable to set the display priority of the operation unit simulated image higher than the display priority of the second shield image. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 212(h) and FIG. 213(h), the simulated image of the operation unit is positioned near the first shield image and the second shield image and does not overlap the first shield image and the second shield image. You may make it display in a position.
With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed operating section simulated image.

An embodiment has been described in which the display priority of the operation portion simulated image is higher than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image. The display priority may be lower than that of the 2 shield image. In this case, it is preferable that a part of the simulated operation section image is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player without overlapping the first shield image or the second shield image.

In addition to the display of the simulated precursor image and the simulated image of the operation unit, the name and operation mode of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) are displayed during the display of the special precursor display (during the display of the simulated precursor image) and during the valid operation period (during the operation period). may be configured to be displayed in the display area during display of the simulated image). In this case, a player who is unfamiliar with the game will have a deeper understanding of the name and operation method of the first operation section, and will be able to operate the first operation section reliably.
On the other hand, a player skilled in the game may not need such a display. Therefore, the name and operation mode of the attack button 3710 may be made invisible or invisible by displaying the first shield image and the second shield image. On the other hand, it is preferable that the simulated operation section image is configured so as not to be visually difficult or invisible by the first shield image and the second shield image.
The operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 may be displayed only before the operation effective period occurs, or only during the operation effective period, or may be displayed from before the operation effective period to during the operation effective period. may
The embodiment shown with reference to Figures 208 and 209 is an example of such an embodiment. In FIGS. 208(d), 208(f), 209(d), and 209(f), in the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", the words "Second Lieutenant! Aim at the enemy tank with the attack button!" Although the columns are displayed, the operation modes and names of the attack buttons 3710 are not visible because the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed.
With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed operation section simulated image.

If the first shield image can be easily displayed, the player may accidentally operate the defense button 3740 and unintentionally display the first shield image during execution of the precursor effect. There is a risk that the visibility of the omen effect will be hindered, and that the interest that the omen effect will bring will be lost.
Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied with the operation of the defense button 3740 as a trigger, the display of the first shield image is performed. Examples of the specific conditions include repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 (detection of pressing operations for a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period of time) and long pressing (detection of continuous pressing operations for a predetermined period of time or longer). However, other conditions that are satisfied when the defense button 3740 is operated may be employed.

An embodiment has been described in which the second shield image is displayed under the condition that the defense button 3740 is long pressed or the mission button 3700 is pressed. can be configured to For example, the second shield image may be displayed on condition that the mission button 3700 is pressed after the defense button 3740 is pressed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the second shield image is displayed under the condition that the mission button 3700 is long pressed or hit repeatedly.

Although the embodiment in which the second shield image is displayed regardless of whether or not the first shield image is displayed has been described, the second shield image is displayed on condition that the first shield image is being displayed. It may be configured as

The display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the display area. As a result, the decorative design is not hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image, so the visibility of the decorative design is ensured.

Although the operation effective period of the defense button 3740 is set to the timing t5 to the timing t27, the entire period during which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or the variation is stopped may be set as the operational effective period and the period in which the first shield image is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to practice displaying the first shield image by operating the defense button 3740 at any timing.
It should be noted that since it is not necessary to adopt such a configuration for the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 that triggers the display of the second shield image, during the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from timing t5 to timing t27 ) is set as the operation valid period, or the second shield image can be displayed. Alternatively, it is preferable that the second shield image is not displayed at least while the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern from being degraded.

Although the embodiment has been configured in which a plurality of images are displayed and the special precursor display is performed, the special precursor display may be performed using only one image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 204 and the like, four cheering speech images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. Also, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 213 and the like, nine precursor simulated images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

A case may be provided in which the operation of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is not effective after the special precursor display is displayed. In this case, after the special precursor display is displayed, the simulated operation portion image simulating the first operation portion is not displayed, and the valid operation period does not occur.
For a player who hides the simulated precursor image in the special precursor display with the first shield image or the second shield image, the simulated precursor image is not displayed even though the simulated precursor image is made invisible or invisible. Although the result is disappointing, by intentionally performing such a presentation display, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she wants to operate the operation section next time.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which, in a game effect for instructing a player to operate an operation means, the same effect display as when the operation means is operated is performed even when the player does not operate the operation means. (for example, JP-A-2007-136096).
However, since the same effect display is performed even when no operation is performed as when the operation is performed, the burden of operation on the player is reduced, but there is a possibility that the player will lose the desire to operate the operation means. . In particular, in a game effect requiring complicated operation instructions to the operation means, if the same effect display as when the operation is performed is performed even when the operation is not performed, the player's desire to operate is reduced. may be greatly lost.
An embodiment of a gaming machine that solves such problems and makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the player's willingness to operate the operating means will be described below.

Modified embodiments of the “shield bullet reach” will be described below with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218. FIG.
FIG. 216 shows a time chart in this embodiment. 217 and 218 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 216(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, at timing t15, an image of an enemy tank is displayed. Next, from timing t18 to timing t22, an operation effective period of attack button 3710 occurs. If repeated hits or long presses of the attack button 3710 are detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends. Subsequently, after a display corresponding to the operation status of the attack button 3710 is performed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at timing t34.
FIGS. 216(b) to 216(d) show examples of effects that can occur depending on the operation status of the attack button 3710 during the operation effective period.

FIG. 216(b) shows an example of an effect when a repeated hit operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, at timing t15, a display is started in which an enemy tank appears from the right side of the display area and moves leftward. Next, at timing t18, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 starts. The effective period of operation ends at the timing when a repeated hit operation or a long press operation is detected. Also, when a long-pressing operation or a repeated hitting operation is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation mode is performed. If the long-pressing operation or repeated hitting operation is not detected, the valid operation period ends at timing t22 when four seconds have passed since the valid operation period started.
FIG. 217(a) shows a display example at timing t19. As shown in the figure, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, in the dialog window of "Sergeant Might", a character string "Lieutenant! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" In addition, in the upper right corner of the dialogue window of “Sergeant Might,” an operation unit simulated image (circular image) imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. In addition, the character "attack" is displayed in the simulated image of the operation unit.
It should be noted that the same display as that shown in FIG. ) is performed.

When the continuous hit operation is detected at timing t21, after a display is made in which the own tank fires a shell at the enemy tank, a smoke image representing smoke generated by the explosion of the shell is displayed on the enemy tank. is displayed instead of the image of FIG. 217(b) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
At timing t23, two seconds after the start of the display of the smoke image, the bomb character image appears behind the smoke image and moves to the left for display. The bomb character images to be displayed include a bomb character image A and a bomb character image B, and the types of bomb character images to be displayed indicate the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit.
FIG. 217(c) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, a bomb character image A is displayed to the left of the smoke image. FIG. 217(d) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, a bomb character image B is displayed to the left of the smoke image. The display of the bomb character image and the smoke image continues until timing t27 (six seconds after the continuous hitting operation is detected).
In this way, the degree of expectation of the special lottery result is shown to the player by the player performing appropriate operations on the operation unit.

FIG. 216(c) shows an effect example when a long press operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, the display state is switched from the display example shown in FIG. 218(a) to the display examples shown in FIGS. 218(b) and 218(c).
In this production example, when the long-pressing operation is detected at timing t21, instead of the image of the enemy tank, a display in which a shell is fired from the own tank is displayed, and then the smoke generated by the explosion of the shell is displayed. A smoke image, which is an image, is displayed. FIG. 218(b) is a display example at timing t22. In this display example, a smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
In this production example, the bomb character image is not displayed, and only the smoke image is displayed. FIG. 218(c) is a display example at timing t25. The display of the smoke image continues until timing t27 (six seconds after the long press is detected).
In this way, when the operation performed by the player on the operation means is not an appropriate operation, although the display corresponding to the operation is performed, the degree of expectation for the special result (the special lottery result is a big hit, etc.) expectations) are not shown to the player.

FIG. 216(d) shows an effect when repeated hits or long presses on the attack button 3710 are not detected during the operation valid period from timing t18 to timing t22 (for example, pressing only once or no operation). shows an example.
In this production example, the display example shown in FIG. 218(d) is switched to the display examples shown in FIGS. 218(e) and 218(f).
In this production example, when the valid operation period ends at timing t22, the image of the enemy tank turns right at the upper center of the display area and starts to move upward in the display area. FIG. 218(e) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the center of the display area.
FIG. 218(f) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank moves upward and is displayed smaller than in the case shown in FIG. 218(e).
As described above, when the player does not perform an appropriate operation on the operation means, the display corresponding to the operation is not displayed. Also, the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, etc.) is not shown to the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation for the special lottery result is suggested by the type of bomb character image. Specifically, when the bomb character image A is displayed, it is suggested that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is higher than when the bomb character image B is displayed. It should be noted that different expectations may be suggested by different colors (red and green) of the bomb character images. Further, it may be configured such that the bomb character may not be displayed even when an appropriate operation (repeated hits) is performed.

In this embodiment, a player who has performed an appropriate operation on the operation means (attack button 3710) can visually recognize a special game-related display (smoke image) and a specific effect (bomb character image display). can be done. Moreover, the degree of expectation of the special lottery result can be known by the type of specific presentation. On the other hand, a player who has not performed an appropriate operation on the operation unit can visually recognize the special game-related display but cannot visually recognize the specific effect, or can visually recognize both the special game-related display and the specific effect. Can not do it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the operation unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 216 and the like, it is possible to execute an effect pattern that requires repeated hits and a effect pattern that requires a long press as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710, and one of the effect patterns is executed. may be modified to be In this case, in the dialog window of "Sergeant Might", the line "Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" or "Lieutenant! Press and hold the attack button to attack the enemy tank!" It is good to configure so that the line "" is displayed. In addition, when the player performs a long press while an instruction to repeatedly press is given, or when the player presses repeatedly while an instruction to press a long time is given, the process is shown in FIG. 218(c). It is preferable to perform control so that the bomb character image cannot be visually recognized.
With such a configuration, the player is required to carefully view the contents of the operation instruction display (the character string displayed in the dialogue window). It is possible to improve the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the .

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the same smoke image is displayed at the same position when the attack button 3710 is repeatedly pressed and when the attack button 3710 is pressed long (for example, FIG. 217 ( b) and FIG. 218(b)). With this configuration, even if another player sees the display contents of the display area, it is difficult to determine whether the operation contents are appropriate or not. It is possible to prevent embarrassment due to being noticed.
It should be noted that smoke images may be displayed that are partly different and partly common depending on whether the operation is appropriate or not. Alternatively, an image showing the same or similar concept as the smoke image may be displayed.
In this way, instead of displaying a completely identical image as the smoke image, a similar image is displayed, or a similar image that can be recognized as a similar motif (smoke in this embodiment) is displayed. Even in this case, it can be difficult for other players to determine whether or not the content of the operation was appropriate.
Note that the same configuration may be adopted for an embodiment that displays a smoke image and an explosion image, which will be described later. For example, an image that the player recognizes as having a similar motif may be displayed. In addition, depending on whether the operation content is appropriate or not, similar smoke images are displayed, similar messages regarding the operation of the operation means are displayed, and smoke images and explosion images similar to smoke images are displayed. It is good to display it. Moreover, it is preferable to display these similar images at a position overlapping the display position of the reserved image or near the center of the display area. A similar effect can be obtained even when a slightly different image is displayed in this manner.

A predetermined suggestive effect display indicating the degree of expectation of a special lottery result can be executed over a predetermined period (for example, timing t10 to timing t30) spanning an operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22), and during execution of the suggestive effect display. If the attack button 3710 is not properly operated during the valid period of operation, the suggestion effect display being executed may be terminated. For example, during the period from timing t10 to timing t30, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect display different from the effect of displaying the bomb character, and when the attack button 3710 is appropriately operated, this suggestive effect display is continued. , when the attack button 3710 is not properly operated, the suggestion effect display may be terminated.

Further, during a predetermined period after the effective period of operation (for example, from timing t22 to timing t34 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends), a predetermined suggestive effect display indicating the degree of expectation of the special lottery result can be executed, and the operation is performed. If attack button 3710 is not properly operated during the validity period (timing t18 to timing t22), execution of the suggestive effect display may be restricted for a predetermined period after the operation validity period. For example, in the period from timing t22 to timing t34, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect display different from the effect of displaying a bomb character. It may be configured such that it is executed with probability, and if the attack button 3710 is not properly operated, this suggestive effect display is not executed.

In this way, if the operation is not properly performed, the suggestive effect display in progress is terminated or the suggestive effect display is not executed until the variable display of the decorative pattern stops, thereby reducing the tension of the operation. The feeling increases, and the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the operation means can be improved.

If the attack button 3710 is not properly operated in a certain variable display, execution of the suggestion effect may be restricted in a predetermined number of variable displays after that variable display. For example, it is preferable to limit the execution of the suggestion effect until the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed 10 times.
With such a configuration, depending on the operation mode of the operation means, a game situation may occur in which execution of a specific effect (suggestive effect) is restricted over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols. The sense of tension is increased, and the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the operation means can be further improved.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 216 and the like, when the operation of the attack button 3710 is not properly performed, the degree of expectation is not suggested for the change display result being executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 219 and the like, a modified embodiment will be described in which the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted when the attack button 3710 is not properly operated.

FIG. 219 shows a time chart in this embodiment. 220 to 222 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 219(a), the reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, at timing t16, an image of the minefield is displayed. Next, from timing t18 to timing t22, an operation effective period of attack button 3710 occurs. It should be noted that, at the timing of occurrence of the operation effective period, three pending operations have occurred. Next, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, from timing t35 to timing t44, a new variable display of the decorative design is performed, and from timing t44 to timing t45, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.
FIGS. 219(b) to 219(d) respectively show a plurality of production examples corresponding to the operation modes for the attack button 3710 during the operation effective period.

FIG. 219(b) shows an example of an effect when a continuous hitting operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, at timing t16, a display in which a minefield consisting of a bomb character appears from the upper side of the display area and moves downward is started. Next, at timing t18, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 220(a) shows a display example at timing t19. An image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant", a character string "Second Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack them!" At the upper right of the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant", an operation unit simulated image (circular image) imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with the character "attack" attached. Furthermore, a pending image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Specifically, pending images corresponding to the pending, the first pending, the second pending, and the third pending are displayed from the left. Of these, the suspension, the first suspension, and the third suspension are displayed as white suspension images, which are normal suspension images. On the other hand, the second hold is displayed with a red hold image indicating that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher than the normal hold. It is to be noted that it is possible to display a total of 5 pending images, ie, 1 pending image and 4, which is the upper limit of the number of pending items. Further, in each of the holdings from the holding to the fourth holding, it is possible to display in a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher than the normal holding image. In addition, the pending image is basically continued to be displayed regardless of whether the decorative symbols are being variably displayed or variably stopped.
It should be noted that the same display as that described above is performed in the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 219(c) and the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 219(d).

When a repeated hit operation is detected at timing t21, a display is made in which a shell is fired from the own tank against the minefield, and then a smoke image, which is an image representing smoke generated by the explosion of the shell, is displayed in the minefield. is displayed instead of the image of FIG. 220(b) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, a smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 220(c) shows a display example after timing t23. Note that the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of repeated hit detection. For example, if repeated hits are detected early, the smoke image is displayed relatively in the upper part of the display area, and if repeated hits are detected later, the smoke image is displayed relatively in the lower part of the display area. be. Also, the position of the displayed smoke image does not change and continues to be displayed at the same position.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. FIG. 220(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the hold is cleared. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. At this time, the hold that has been the first hold until then moves to the left and becomes larger and becomes the relevant hold. Also, the hold that was the second hold moves to the left and becomes the first hold. Similarly, the hold that was the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold. In addition, in this production example, at the timing when the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold, the normal hold (white hold image) to the higher expected hold (green hold image) Change. FIG. 220(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 220(f) shows a display example during the period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends.

In this way, the player appropriately operates the operating means, thereby maintaining the state in which the player is shown the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, etc.). be.

FIG. 219(c) shows an effect example when a long press operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
Also in this production example, at timing t16, a display of a minefield consisting of a bomb character appearing from the upper side of the display area and moving downward is started. Next, at timing t18, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 221(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display contents at this time are the same as the display contents in the display example shown with reference to FIG.

Even if the long-pressing operation is detected at timing t21, the display that the self-tank is firing a shell against the minefield is not displayed. Then, the display of the minefield approaching the own tank is continued. FIG. 221(b) shows a display example from timing t22 to timing t23 when the valid operation period ends. Next, at timing t23, the minefield and the own tank come into contact with each other, causing the minefield to explode, and instead of the minefield image, a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area. At the same time, the second hold, previously shown in red, changes to a white hold image. FIG. 221(c) shows a display example at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. FIG. 221(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the hold is cleared. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. At the same time, the hold that has been the first hold until then moves to the left and becomes larger and becomes the relevant hold. Also, the hold that was the second hold moves to the left and becomes the first hold. Similarly, the hold that was the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold. FIG. 221(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 221(f) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In this embodiment, the smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image. In addition, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal pending image can be displayed, and the pending image (red pending image) that was displayed until then indicating high expectations is replaced by the normal pending image (white pending image). image). Also, while the smoke image is being displayed, no effect display is performed to change the normal pending image to another pending image (for example, green pending image) indicating that the degree of expectation is high.
The display of the smoke image is continued until the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension that existed at the start of the display of the smoke image ends. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal hold image is displayed.
In addition, in this production example, an example in which the pending image (red pending image) indicating that the degree of expectation is high for the second pending is replaced with a normal pending image (white pending image) is shown, but the second pending If there is a hold indicating that the degree of expectation is high among the other holds, it is replaced with a normal hold image in the same manner as the second hold.

As described above, when the player does not perform an appropriate operation, a state occurs in which the player is not shown the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, etc.). The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 219(d) shows an example of an effect when a continuous hitting operation or a long pressing operation on the attack button 3710 is not detected during the operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22).
Also in this production example, at timing t16, a display of a minefield consisting of a bomb character appearing from the upper side of the display area and moving downward is started. Next, at timing t18, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 222(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display contents at this time are the same as the display contents in the display example shown with reference to FIG.

In this production example as well, similar to the other production examples, a display of a minefield approaching the own tank is displayed. FIG. 222(b) shows a display example from timing t22 to timing t23 when the valid operation period ends. Next, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the own tank, causing the minefield to explode, and an explosion image is displayed at the bottom of the display area instead of the image of the minefield. The display priority of the explosion image is set higher than that of the self-tank image and the reserved image. FIG. 222(c) shows a display example at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. FIG. 222(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. The display priority of the explosion image is set higher than that of the decorative pattern, and the explosion image makes it difficult to visually recognize the stationary display mode of the decorative pattern. In addition, the held image also remains invisible. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. FIG. 222(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 222(f) shows a display example during the period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In this embodiment, the explosion image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the pending image and the decorative pattern. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and the decoration pattern, and the reserved image and the decoration pattern are hidden by the explosion image and displayed. Therefore, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern also becomes difficult to see.
The display of the explosion image is continued until the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension existing at the start of the display of the explosion image ends. Further, as described above, while the explosion image is being displayed, the suspended image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern becomes invisible.

In this way, when the player does not perform an appropriate operation, the player is not presented with the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit, etc.) and the number of pending items. is generated and this state is maintained for a predetermined period.

As described above, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 219 and the like, the smoke image and the explosion image are displayed even after the variable display in which the smoke image and the explosion image are displayed ends and the next variable display is started. , and the visual recognition mode of the reserved image and the decoration pattern is changed according to the operation mode of the player.

Thus, when a specific condition is satisfied (when the operation to the operation means (attack button 3710) is appropriate), a special game-related display (smoke image) is displayed across a plurality of fluctuation displays. is displayed, and a specific effect (changed pending image) is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, etc.), and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In the case (when the operation to the operation means is not appropriate), a special game-related display is displayed across multiple fluctuation displays, and a specific effect is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for the special result. By not performing the operation, the player's desire to operate the operation means can be increased. In addition, by giving a penalty step by step according to the operation mode of the operation means, it is possible to increase the willingness to perform more appropriate operations.

During the operation valid period, if repeated hits are detected after a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected, the effect similar to that shown in FIG. A performance is held. In order to perform such processing, the timing at which the display corresponding to the long press is executed is not when the long press is detected but when the valid operation period ends.
With such a configuration, even if the operation means is operated incorrectly, if the operation is performed quickly and correctly, it is possible to avoid a state in which the display indicating the degree of expectation cannot be visually recognized, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest.

Shows an example of a production that restricts the change in the display mode of the pending image or makes the pending image invisible until the variable display corresponding to the pending that existed at the timing when the smoke image or the explosion image started to be displayed ends. However, the change in the display mode of the pending image is limited until the variable display is performed the number of times corresponding to the maximum number of pending items (4, which is the maximum pending number of the first start port 2002 in this embodiment). Alternatively, the reserved image may be rendered invisible.
In this way, the number of variable displays that limit pending changes and the number of variable displays that make the pending image invisible are predetermined, thereby simplifying the display control of smoke images and explosion images on the peripheral control board 1510. can do.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 219 and the like, there are cases in which an effect pattern requiring repeated hits is executed as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710, and a effect pattern requiring a long press is executed. It may be configured as In this case, as the line of "Sergeant Might", in the production pattern that requires repeated hits, the line of "Sergeant Might" is displayed as the line "Lieutenant! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack them!" In production patterns that require a long press, it is preferable to display the line "Lieutenant! Press and hold the attack button to attack them!"
When an appropriate operation is performed, it is preferable to display the same display as the display examples shown in FIGS. 220(b) to 220(f).
On the other hand, when the player performs a long press while an instruction for repeated hits has been given, or when the player performs repeated hits after an instruction for a long press has been given, the 221(f).
Further, when neither repeated hits nor long presses are performed, the same display as the display examples shown in FIGS. 222B to 222F may be performed.
By adopting such a configuration, it is necessary to carefully confirm the contents of the operation instruction, and the sense of tension for the operation increases, and the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the operation means can be improved.

With reference to FIG. 221 , an effect example of displaying the pending image in front of the smoke image has been shown, but an embodiment may be modified so that the smoke image is displayed in front of the pending image. FIG. 219(e) is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. FIG. 223 shows a display example in this embodiment.

Also in this production example, at timing t23, the minefield and the own tank come into contact with each other, causing the minefield to explode, and instead of the image of the minefield, a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area. It has a higher display priority than reserved images and decorative patterns. FIG. 223(a) is a display example at timing t24. As shown in the figure, the smoke image obscures the pending image, making the pending image invisible.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. FIG. 223(b) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. FIG. 223(c) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 223(d) shows a display example during the period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In the present embodiment, since the smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image, the reserved image is invisible. Also, part of the changing decorative pattern becomes invisible. On the other hand, the visually recognizable mode of the statically displayed decorative pattern is not hindered.

220, 221, 222, and 223, the variable display of the smoke image and the explosion image corresponding to all the suspensions that existed when the smoke image and the explosion image started to be displayed ends. However, these displays may be ended at a predetermined timing before the end of the variable displays corresponding to all the holds. For example, at the timing (timing t35) when the fluctuating display in which the smoke image or the explosion image is displayed ends and a new fluctuating display is started (timing t35), the display of the smoke image or the explosion image is finished, and the pending image is visible. may be It should be noted that the reserved images displayed at this time should be limited to normal reserved images only, and reserved images with a high degree of expectation (for example, red reserved images) should not be displayed. In addition, the period for displaying only the normal pending image is not limited to the remaining number of fluctuations, and may be a condition that a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the display of the smoke image or the explosion image ends. .
In this way, while the special game-related display (display of smoke image or explosion image) is terminated in a short period of time, a specific effect (prefetch effect) is prohibited for a predetermined period of time, and only a normal pending image is displayed for a predetermined period of time. By doing so, the player can only see the normal hold image for the hold, and can not see the highly expected hold image, but can know the number of holds. . In addition, it is possible to prevent other players from feeling embarrassed when the smoke image or the explosion image is displayed for a long time and the operation means cannot be operated well.

Further, it is possible to end the special game-related display earlier than the end period of the special game-related display by operating when the special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image is displayed. You may make it provide a new operation means in a game machine. As for this operation means, it may be possible to end the display early with a simple operation, but it is better to end the display by requiring a special operation such as multiple operations. Since the display ends early as a result of the operation with a clear intention, it is preferable in terms of countermeasures against erroneous operations. Further, even if the special game-related display such as the smoke image or the explosion image is terminated by the operation of the operating means, the execution of the look-ahead effect is continued for a predetermined period in the game progressed after the special operation of the operating means is performed. should be configured to prohibit Moreover, it is preferable to configure so that only the normal pending image is displayed during the predetermined period.

219(d) and FIG. 222 (the explosion image is displayed, the suspended image is invisible, and the decorative pattern is difficult to be seen) is performed. 219(c) and 221 (a smoke image is displayed and the hold image is normally held) even when an operation that does not constitute a long press is performed or when no operation is performed. good.
In this case, for the player who dares to perform an operation different from the operation instruction, the explosion image is displayed, the suspended image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see, and the operation is performed. You will be penalized more severely than if you didn't.
On the other hand, when an operation other than repeated hits or a long press is performed, or when no operation is performed, a smoke image is displayed and only a normal pending image is displayed, but the number of pending items can be recognized. becomes. This is because if the player is in a situation where the player cannot perform an operation (for example, purchasing a drink from a game store clerk), it would be cruel to give a large penalty for that.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 219, the display content is restricted based on the operation mode during one operation effective period (timing t18 to timing t22). The effect as shown is executed multiple times, and during the operation valid period, if the player performs an operation that does not result in repeated hits or long presses, or if there is no operation, multiple times (2 times or more and predetermined) (predetermined number of times), the display content may be restricted.
In this case, in the presentation until the predetermined number of times, the smoke image and the explosion image are not displayed regardless of the operation content, thereby enabling the display of a specific pending image indicating that the degree of expectation is high. In the rendered effect, a smoke image may be displayed and only a normal pending image may be displayed as a pending image, or an explosion image may be displayed to make the pending image invisible.

Alternatively, if the player performs an operation that does not result in repeated hits or long presses, or if the player does not perform an operation a plurality of times (a predetermined number of times that is two or more times), the decoration for the next and subsequent times is performed. A special effect may be executed in the variation of the design so that only the normal reserved image is displayed as the reserved image, or the reserved image may be made invisible.
Examples of special effects include the example effects shown with reference to FIGS. 221(a) to 221(f), the example effects shown with reference to FIGS. a) to FIG. 223(d) are modified, and the player intervenes without generating an operation effective period (without displaying the simulated image of the operation part) in these examples of effects. It may be configured such that a smoke image or an explosion image is automatically displayed by executing an effect that prevents the smoke image or the explosion image.
Note that the special effect may be executed in the variable display next to the variable display in which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed, or may be performed randomly from the variable display in which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed. It may be executed in the variable display after a predetermined number of times (for example, after 2-10 rotations). Alternatively, it may be started after a randomly selected period (for example, after 10 seconds to 120 seconds have passed) from the timing at which the appropriate operation was not performed for the predetermined number of times.

With such a configuration, since a penalty is given on the condition that an inappropriate operation is performed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the player from being suddenly given a penalty.
In addition, since the same effect as the effect that was operable is automatically executed in a state in which the operation is disabled, it is possible to limit the display suggesting the degree of expectation in a natural way as the effect.
If the player keeps ignoring the operation instructions, the pending display indicating the high degree of expectation will not be displayed, so the player can concentrate only on the changing display of the currently changing decorative symbols. In other words, it can be said that the player can change the mode of presentation to suit his or her taste.

In the present embodiment, for the hold that exists at the timing when the operation was not performed appropriately, the execution of a specific effect (display of the hold image with high expectation based on the look-ahead of the hold) is restricted, and the operation is performed Regarding the suspension that occurred after the timing when it was not performed appropriately, the execution of a specific effect is not restricted. For example, the execution of a specific effect may be limited by a predetermined number of fluctuations (holding number). In addition, it becomes possible for the player playing the game machine to start the game in a state in which the execution of the performance is restricted. Therefore, by not restricting the execution of a specific effect (prefetching effect) for the hold that occurred after the timing when the operation was not properly performed, it is possible to prevent other players from being disturbed. can be made

A state in which the smoke image is displayed and a state in which the smoke image is not displayed may be repeated instead of continuously displaying the smoke image. For example, a state in which the smoke image is displayed and a state in which the smoke image is not displayed may be switched every 0.5 seconds.
With such a configuration, it is possible to highlight a specific effect (a bomb character image, a pending image, etc.) that may be displayed together with the special game-related display (smoke image).

As for the explosion image and the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 223, the state in which the explosion image and the smoke image are displayed and the state in which they are not displayed may be repeated. For example, a state in which the explosion image is displayed and a state in which it is not displayed may be switched every 0.5 seconds. When the explosion image or the smoke image shown in FIG. 223 is hidden, the pending image hidden in the explosion image or smoke image becomes visible. should only be normal pending images (white pending images).
By adopting such a configuration, it becomes impossible to recognize the degree of expectation regarding the hold, and it becomes difficult to recognize the number of holds, and it becomes possible to give a moderate penalty to the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display position of the smoke image varies depending on the timing of detection of repeated hits. For example, if repeated hits are detected early, the smoke image is displayed relatively in the upper part of the display area, and if repeated hits are detected later, the smoke image is displayed relatively in the lower part of the display area. be. That is, the later the detection of repeated hits, the closer the smoke image is displayed to the display position of the smoke image displayed when the long press is detected. Further, the smoke image displayed by the continuous tapping operation and the smoke image displayed by the long pressing operation are the same image. Therefore, if the player hits repeatedly just before the expiration of the valid period of operation, it is difficult to distinguish on the display from the case that the player erroneously presses the button for a long time. As a result, even if another player visually recognizes the smoke image being displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the player has properly performed the operation or performed the wrong operation. Even if a player makes a mistake in the operation mode, it is possible to prevent other players from noticing and feeling embarrassed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 221, all of the hold to the fourth hold are shown to be displayed in the normal hold, but the first hold to the fourth hold are displayed only in the normal hold image However, for the suspension, the display of the suspension image showing that the expectation of the big win is higher than that of the normal suspension may be continued. For example, when the suspension indicates that the degree of expectation is high, even if the display of the smoke image is started, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the suspension. Further, while the smoke image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the suspension from a normal suspension image to a suspension image (for example, a red suspension image) indicating a higher degree of expectation.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223, the first to fourth holds may be hidden by the smoke image or the explosion image, and the hold may not be hidden. In addition, when the hold is a hold image indicating that the degree of expectation is high, even if the display of the smoke image or the explosion image is started, the display mode of the hold is changed to a normal hold image. It is better to prevent this from happening. Also, during display of the smoke image or the explosion image, it may be possible to change the hold from a normal hold image to a hold image (for example, a red hold image) indicating a higher degree of expectation.

With such a configuration, although the degree of expectation for the first to fourth reservations is not shown to the player, the degree of expectation for the variation result of the decoration pattern currently fluctuating can be displayed according to the display mode of the reservation. , it is possible to prevent the penalty given to the player from becoming excessive.

In the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 220 to 223, instead of the smoke image and the explosion image, a dialogue window of "Colonel Dinah" may be displayed at the display position of the smoke image and the explosion image. As for the pending image at this time, it is preferable to display only the normal pending image as described above, or to limit the visibility of the pending image by a serif window displayed instead of the smoke image or the explosion image. . Also, a character string saying "Check the details of the operation and perform the operation properly!" may be displayed in the dialogue window. Alternatively, it may be possible to display "You did a good job!" when the repeated hits were performed properly, or to display "You should have done the repeated hits" when the repeated hits were not properly performed. Alternatively, a character string "Don't confuse continuous pressing with long pressing!" may be displayed to indicate that there are multiple operation modes.
In this way, by displaying a message regarding the operation of the operation means, a player who is not familiar with the operation method of the operation means can know the operation method of the operation means after the end of the effective period of operation. After that, you will be able to operate the operation means well.

An example is shown in which a hold image indicating that the degree of expectation is high is displayed instead of the normal hold image by prefetching. may be used to suggest that the

Although the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is indicated by the display mode of the pending image, the degree of expectation that other events will occur may be indicated by the display mode of the pending image. For example, the degree of expectation for a variable probability big hit or the degree of expectation for a time-saving loss may be indicated.

With reference to FIGS. 137 to 223, an embodiment has been described in which the performance using the operation unit is further improved. Embodiments applicable to these embodiments are described below.

Although an example in which the operating portion is provided at the lower portion of the door frame has been shown, another operating portion may be employed. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor is provided on the game board, and the glass plate is divided into a plurality of areas, for example, four areas, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, in a cross shape. The operation acceptance may be performed when the is brought close to the . By adopting such a configuration, the player can move his or her hand upwards greatly, so that the player can feel more participating in the game. In this respect, a sensor is provided at the movable part of the movable body provided on the frame (part resembling a rabbit's ear, etc.) so that the movement by the player can be detected, and the function of receiving the operation input by the player is added to these functions. You can have it on a moving part. In this case, the feeling of participating in the game is further enhanced.

In various operation instructions in each embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. A special display may be performed by operating a part, etc.). For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that is normally displayed when an operation is performed in accordance with an operation instruction is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed that does not follow an operation instruction. .

On the other hand, some players, such as players who are tired or aged, may show a tendency to dislike such operation inputs that require large physical movements. Therefore, one or more sensors are provided in a predetermined area in the game area, and the above-described various operation units are operated based on the detection by the sensor of a game ball shot into the game area by the player. It can be used as a substitute for In this case, the player can replace the operation of the operation part by operating the operation part only with the right hand. Input can be made. It should be noted that it is possible to receive both an operation to the operation unit and an input from a sensor provided in a predetermined area, and at the time when an operation input is made to either one, an effect display corresponding to the operation input may be performed. good. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the player or the store clerk of the game parlor can select which of the operation input to the operation unit and the sensor provided in the predetermined area receives the operation input. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the operation input is performed only by the shot game ball. As the predetermined area, a dedicated performance sensor capable of detecting the passage or approach of a game ball may be provided on the board surface, or an existing winning opening (for example, general winning opening, first start opening, gate , a large winning opening, etc.), the operation input may be received based on the winning of the game ball (detection by a sensor). Note that the sensor function may be added to an existing predetermined member instead of the predetermined region. For example, when a backflow prevention member at the top of the rail or a sensor at the upper right corner of the game board is provided with a sensor to detect that a game ball has passed or collided based on the player's operation. It may be configured so that the operation input is accepted at the same time. In order to correspond to the directional input of the lever, two or more sensors provided at different positions may be used to simulate the directional input. Further, the operation time may be calculated in a pseudo manner according to the number of detections per unit time. In this way, the operation input may be accepted by the player adjusting the shooting intensity of the game ball so that a predetermined sensor or the like detects the game ball. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the effects by reducing the number of operation units and enabling the execution of further effect display based on the reception of operations on the operation units.

144 to 148, an embodiment capable of displaying a predetermined image hidden by a shield image has been shown, but in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. A configuration may be adopted in which simulated images simulating parts are respectively displayed and can be hidden by the shield image. Further, it may be configured such that operation instruction displays are displayed corresponding to a plurality of operation units and can be hidden by the shield image. In addition, it is also possible to display operation correspondence displays corresponding to operations on a plurality of operation units, and to hide them with shield images. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is less interested in operating the operation units to visually recognize the displays related to the plurality of operation units.
The embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 149 to 223 may also be configured to be able to perform display related to a plurality of operation units and display of shield images.
It should be noted that the shield image may be displayed by operating a predetermined operation unit (defense button 3740, etc.).

137 to 223, "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", "AI tank reach" , etc., it is possible to employ a given technical idea in one presentation as a technical idea in another presentation. Also, it is possible to employ a plurality of technical ideas in a plurality of presentations as technical ideas in one presentation.

For example, the display of the shield image related to "shield bullet reach" is changed to "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach". may be applied to each production of At this time, predetermined images (images of enemy tanks, images of bomb characters, simulated images imitating predetermined buttons, images of exploding cannonballs, images of exploding bullets, images of smoke, images of white flags, etc.) are displayed in each effect. Images used in each production) should suggest the degree of expectation in a way related to "shield bullet reach". Also, the degree of expectation shown in this way may be hidden by a shield image.
In addition, the look-ahead mode related to the "suddenly tank effect", the execution mode related to the look-ahead effect, and their technical ideas are described as "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", and "full power". "Breakthrough Reach", "AI Tank Reach", "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Chara Reach", "Full Breakthrough" over multiple display changes Reach" and "AI Tank Reach" may be executed.
For example, in contrast to the production mode using the shield image related to "shield bullet reach" and the smoke image related to "full breakthrough reach", the production mode and technology using the image of the destroyed enemy tank of "suddenly tank effect" Ideas can be applied.
Also, the shield image and the smoke image may be configured to be displayed multiple times by the player, or the shield image and the smoke image may be displayed across the variable display. In this case, the image that suggests the degree of expectation (the image of the destroyed enemy tank in the "suddenly tank effect") corresponding to the variable display that is the target of prefetching is hidden by the shield image or the smoke image. It should be configured as follows.
In addition, for example, in "special machine gun reach" and "silent machine gun reach", images of shells fired from a battery, bullets fired from a machine gun, and images of shells and bullets exploding may be displayed across the variable display. .
In addition, for example, in the case of "bomb character reach", a collision scene between the bomb character and the self-tank can occur not only during the variation of the decorative pattern but also immediately before the stop of the variation of the decorative pattern. The self-tank may explode (part of the self-tank is destroyed) across the , and the self-tank may straddle the stop display of the decorative pattern without exploding. It should be noted that, just before the variable display to be read ahead stops changing, it is preferable to perform the effect of displaying a large bomb character shown with reference to FIGS.
In addition, in the "full-strength breakthrough reach", it may be configured so that there are cases where the player is attacked by the shells of the enemy unit a plurality of times during the variable display of one decorative pattern. Also, the smoke image may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, after effecting display based on the look-ahead a plurality of times, it is preferable to display a group of enemy tanks appearing at the last timing of the variable display, which is the subject of the look-ahead.
Also, in the "AI tank reach", display over a plurality of variable displays may be performed based on the look-ahead. In this case, each variable display may be configured so that one or more encounters with enemy tanks occur. At least, immediately before the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, an encounter with an enemy tank may occur, and an image of destroying the cannonball or bullet may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, when the left lever 3720, which is normally not instructed to operate, is operated, as a production, the tank falls on the cliff on the left side of the road and a smoke image is displayed on the screen. good too. In this case, the display of the smoke image is preferably performed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols until the variable display of the decorative symbols targeted for the look-ahead effect display is stopped.
In addition, in each production of "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach", the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, defense button 3740, etc. are shown to be operable. In the middle, or when the look-ahead effect is performed, it may be configured to be executable over the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols. Further, it is preferable that the effective number of operations can be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of one decorative pattern. Also, the display corresponding to the reception of the operation of the operation unit may be configured to be displayed a plurality of times. Further, it is preferable that the display corresponding to such operation acceptance is displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbols.
By adopting such a configuration, since some kind of display reaction occurs in response to the player's operation on the operation unit, it is possible to satisfy the player. Furthermore, the effect display based on the operation is executed across the variable display without being interrupted by the stop display of the variable display, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the executed effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine capable of executing a display effect of switching effect images according to a game situation (for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2003-340037).
However, if the display effect of switching the effect image is something that the player feels uncomfortable with, there is a risk that the interest will decrease, and a more appropriate display method is required for the display effect of switching the effect image. It was true. It is also possible to improve interest by realizing a more appropriate display method.
Therefore, in the following embodiments, a gaming machine will be described in which the player is less likely to feel a sense of incongruity with respect to the display effect of switching the effect image, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed and the interest can be improved.

Embodiments modified from the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, FIGS. 137 to 148 and the like will be described below with reference to FIGS. 224 to 236 and the like. 224 to 228 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or modification). FIG. 229 shows the display priority of these images. 230 and 233 show time charts in this embodiment. 231, 232, and 234 to 236 show display examples in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, a special reach background image is displayed in place of the normal background image in the special reach performances of "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

224 to 226 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, background images (normal background image A, normal background image B, special reach background image A, special reach background image B, normal background image C displayed during right-handed hitting), images of various decorative patterns, automatic Images of tanks, enemy tanks, etc., belt-like prefetch effect images, the relevant pending images, first to fourth pending images, character images for resurrection effects, fourth symbols, pending number display images, and error notification images are shown.
Data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modifications are stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.
As shown in FIGS. 225 and 226, images other than the background image are also illustrated as horizontally long rectangles in the drawings, and the horizontally long rectangles in this case indicate the display area. This makes it possible to clearly indicate the size and position of an image other than the background image when it is displayed in the display area. Note that images displayed in the display area may be described in figures other than FIGS. 225 and 226, and the same applies to this case.

224(a) shows a normal background image A. FIG. Background image A is usually an image representing a state in which a plurality of tanks are gathered near a destroyed building.
224(b) shows a normal background image B. FIG. The normal background image B is an image representing a state in which a tank is stopped in a hangar.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images displayed when the game state is the normal state.

FIG. 224(c) shows a special ready-to-reach background image A that is displayed when the special ready-to-reach effect "giant tank ready-to-win" effect is executed. The special reach background image A is an image representing sky, desert, and unpaved road.
FIG. 224(d) shows a special ready-to-win background image B that is displayed when the special ready-to-win effect “enemy tank destruction ready-to-win” effect is executed. The special reach background image B is an image representing the sky, grasslands, and roads.

FIG. 224(e) shows a normal background image C displayed in a variable probability state or a time-saving state advantageous to the player, which may shift after the end of the jackpot game state. The normal background image C is an image indicating that the player will hit to the right.

Note that the size (the number of pixels) of the background image is the same as the size of the display area. Also, the background image is opaque. Therefore, some image is displayed behind the background image and is not visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 225 shows examples of decorative symbols that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Each decorative design consists of a left decorative design, a middle decorative design, and a right decorative design. These are appropriately switched and displayed according to the progress of the effect and the game situation.

FIG. 225(a) shows a normal decorative pattern. This figure shows an example of normal decoration patterns that are stopped and displayed. Each normal decoration pattern is displayed by scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, downward direction), or is temporarily stopped at a predetermined position. is also possible.
The display mode of the normal decorative pattern is determined according to the result of the special lottery. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the pattern is stopped and displayed in the form of a square pattern (for example, "222"), and when the result of the special lottery is not a big hit. It is stopped and displayed in a form (for example, "352") that is not square. FIG. 225(a) shows, as an example, a state in which the normal decoration pattern is stopped at "352".
A normal decorative pattern consists of a vertically long rectangular background area, and numbers and characters arranged on the front side of the background area. There is a one-to-one correspondence between numbers and characters.

FIG. 225(b) shows a special ready-to-win decoration pattern displayed when the special ready-to-win effects of "huge tank reach" effect and "enemy tank destruction reach" effect are executed.
The special ready-to-win decorative pattern is displayed in a location near the center of the display area smaller than the normal decorative pattern. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the effect suggesting the result of the special lottery that is executed during the execution of the ``gigantic tank reach'' effect and the ``enemy tank destruction reach'' effect.
FIG. 225(c) is a modification of the special reach decoration pattern. In this way, a special ready-to-win decoration pattern in which the numbers are displayed more emphasized may be adopted.
In addition, FIG.225(b) and FIG.225(c) have shown the state in which the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
In addition, during the ready-to-win production, only the left decorative design and the right decorative design may be displayed, and the middle decorative design may not be displayed.

FIG. 225(d) shows decorative symbols displayed during right-hand hitting. The right-handed decorative pattern is a decorative pattern displayed in a game state such as a probability variable state or a time-saving state in which the player is required to hit to the right. FIG. 225(d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol "352" is stopped during right-handed strokes.

As shown with reference to FIG. 225, the normal decorative pattern, the special reach decorative pattern, and the right-hand hitting decorative pattern can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters, the size of numbers, and the like. is. By visually recognizing the decorative symbols, it is easy to understand the effect situation and the game state.

Fig. 226(a) shows an image of own tank, an image of enemy tank, an image of "Sergeant Might", an image of "Colonel Dyna", and a mission button 3700 displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" effect is executed. A simulated image simulating the A special lottery result is suggested by the display mode of these images.
FIG. 226(b) shows an image of the own tank, an image of the enemy tank, an image of "Sergeant Might", an image of "Colonel Dyna", and an attack button displayed when the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is executed. A simulated image simulating 3710 is shown. A special lottery result is suggested by the display mode of these images.
A specific aspect of suggesting the special lottery result will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like.

FIG. 226(d) shows a reserved image. In the lower part of the display area, from the left, the suspension display area, the first suspension display area, the second suspension display area, the third suspension display area, and the fourth suspension display area are set. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and basically white in color. Also, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.
In the drawing, an example is shown in which the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area, and the reserved images are displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas.
When the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 2002 occurs, the reserved image or the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area, the first to fourth reserved display areas. For example, in the state where the pending image is displayed in the pending display area and the pending image is displayed in the first pending display area and the second pending display area (that is, the state where there are two pending), for the first start port 2002 When a game ball wins, a pending image is displayed in the third pending display area.

In addition, as shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, based on the prefetching of the hold, the specific hold image having a different display mode (color and shape) from the normal hold image and hold image (white and circular) or a specific hold image may be displayed to indicate that the special lottery result corresponding to the hold is highly expected to be a big hit.

For example, by displaying a reserved image of a predetermined color (for example, red) instead of a white reserved image that is a normal reserved image, it is possible to indicate that the special lottery result is expected to be a big hit. good.
More specifically, for example, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow may be arranged in order of increasing expectations for a big win. Also, it may be configured such that the probability of being displayed in this order decreases. That is, the probability of appearance of a color with a lower degree of expectation is higher, and the probability of appearance of a color with a higher degree of expectation is lower. Note that the degree of expectation for rainbow colors may be set at 100%. As for the degree of expectation, generally, the higher the degree of expectation, the lower the probability of appearance.

Strictly speaking, a single color such as gold does not exist, but by combining pixels emitting light in yellow, ocher, and white in a predetermined display area in a predetermined manner as display processing, the player can enjoy a metallic luster. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the color is recognized as gold, which is the color of gold.

Strictly speaking, a single rainbow color does not exist. , green, . In this predetermined display area, each area in which light is emitted in stripes may be moved in a certain direction (for example, a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the stripes are formed).

When displaying the rainbow colors, it is desirable that the areas displaying the six colors forming the rainbow colors are visible at the same time within a predetermined display area. Depending on the size of the predetermined display area, some of the six colors that make up the rainbow may not be displayed. A rainbow color is displayed to the player by displaying colors (that is, four or more colors) and moving the part painted with each color in a certain direction so that each color is displayed sequentially. can be recognized.
As for the relationship between the degree of expectation and the display probability (ratio to the number of variable display times), for example, the pending image or the pending image displayed at the time of the start winning has the highest probability of being the white pending image or the pending image, and the rainbow color It is preferable to configure such that the probability of being the reserved image or the reserved image of the image is the lowest.
Further, it is preferable that the last displayed reserved image at the end timing of the variation of the decorative pattern has the highest probability of being the white reserved image and the lowest probability of being the rainbow colored reserved image.

In addition, the green, red, and gold pending images and pending images may be displayed at the time of starting winning, and the pending images and pending images in white at the time of starting winning are displayed until the decorative pattern is stopped. may be changed to green, red, and gold reserved images or reserved images at a predetermined timing.

It should be noted that changing at a predetermined timing from an effect mode indicating a predetermined degree of expectation to a mode indicating a higher degree of expectation in this way may be referred to as "promoting".
Conversely, changing a mode of presentation indicating a predetermined level of expectation to a mode indicating a lower level of expectation at a predetermined timing may be referred to as "demotion".

In addition, the rate of execution of "promotion" and "demotion" should be set to a low probability (for example, the probability of "promotion" and "demotion" being executed when the denominator is the case where the expectation level is suggested by a predetermined color is summed 5 to 10%) is desirable. This makes it possible to increase or decrease the displayed expectation level while maintaining a rough correspondence relationship between the expectation level and the color. Promotion is a favorable event for the player, but demotion is an unfavorable event for the player. Therefore, in order to suppress the decline in interest, the promotion is made executable but the demotion is not executed. good too.

It should be noted that there may be cases where a player is promoted by execution of a predetermined effect and cases where the player is not promoted, and the effect that is not promoted may be referred to as a "gase". In addition, even though an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, it may be referred to as “fake” when the variable display results in a failure.

Although the terms "promotion" and "relegation" have been used to refer to changes in jackpot expectations, the term "promotion" and "relegation" have been used to indicate that the gaming benefit is in favor of the player when implying the gaming benefit granted to the player. A change to something or an increase in the amount of profit given to a player is sometimes referred to as "promotion". Conversely, when suggesting a gaming benefit to be awarded to a player, a change in the gaming benefit to one that is disadvantageous to the player or a decrease in the amount of profit to be granted to the player is referred to as "promotion." ” may be called. For example, when the ready-to-win state formed by "normal symbols" changes to the ready-to-win state formed by "probability variation patterns", it may be called "promotion". In addition, as an effect at the start of the big win game, as an effect to notify the number of rounds (the number of balls to be released per round is constant), 4 rounds are announced at the start of the big win game, and the 4th round is indicated. In a predetermined round before the start, an effect may be executed to notify that the jackpot game will continue up to 8 rounds. In this case, the number of rounds would be said to be "promoted".

Although the reserved image and the reserved image are given as examples, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the color of the image in the same manner as the reserved image and the reserved image for images used for other effects.

In addition, we showed that the expectation of a big win is higher in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow in the colors of the reserved image, but in the other production images, all colors of these colors Some of these colors may be used instead of using . Even then, basically, it is preferable that the order of the degree of expectation and the order of the probability of appearance do not change. For example, when three colors of white, red, and gold are adopted as the colors of the predetermined effect image, the expectation of the red effect image is higher than that of the white effect image, but the appearance probability is lower. It is preferable that the golden effect image has a higher degree of expectation than the effect image but has a lower appearance probability.
Further, when the three colors of blue, green, and red are adopted as the colors of the other effect images, the expectation of the green effect image is higher than that of the blue effect image, but the appearance probability is lower than that of the blue effect image. It is preferable that the red effect image has a higher expectation than the effect image but has a lower appearance probability.
In this way, even if the expectation level is suggested using a predetermined color in different presentations, the relationship between the order of the colors, the expectation level, and the appearance probability does not change. can be recognized.

Although an image (such as the reserved image) is taken as an example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the luminescent color of the luminous member in the case of the decorative member including the luminous member as in the case of the reserved image. For example, a plurality of light-emitting members such as LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light may be mounted on decorative members visible to the player, and each light-emitting member may emit light in a predetermined color. As for gold, it is preferable to cause a plurality of light-emitting members to emit light in yellow, white, and ocher. Similarly, for rainbow colors, it is preferable to cause a plurality of light emitting members to emit light in stripes in the order of blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, green, and so on. Moreover, the light emission mode of the light emitting member may be changed cyclically so that each color can be visually recognized as if it is moving.

It should be noted that an effect with a 100% expectation of a big hit and a low appearance rate (for example, executed with a probability of 5% in the variable display of a big hit) may be referred to as a premium effect (abbreviated simply premium, (sometimes referred to as premier). Since the expectation level of the premium effect is 100%, it is not executed when the variable display result is a failure. As a premium effect, a special image (for example, a special character image, a special relevant reserved image, a special fourth reserved image, a special icon image, or a special background image) is displayed. is performed, a special sound or special BGM is output, a special simulated operation part image is displayed at the timing when the button operation is effective, a special ready-to-reach effect is performed, and a light emitting decoration means in a special mode It is possible to adopt an effect such as light emission control for lighting or blinking.
It should be noted that, without being limited to these, a predetermined presentation mode described in this specification may be employed as the premium presentation. It should be noted that these images and videos may be displayed in rainbow colors, or rainbow colors may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the light emitting decoration means. Further, among these effects, a plurality (two or more) effects may be executed in one variation display.
Further, when representing various images and the like displayed in these premium presentations, the characters "premium" (or "premium") may be added before the names of the images and the like to represent those images and the like. For example, premium images, premium characters (images), premium reserves (images), premium icons, premium backgrounds (images), and premium reach (effects) are used. Similarly, the sound may also be called premium sound. When these images are displayed, a ready-to-win effect is executed, or a sound is output, a big hit will always occur.

When the premium effect is executed at 5% of the variable display for the big win, if the probability of the big win is 1/300, the probability of the premium effect being executed is 1/6000. On the other hand, the other effects are effects with relatively low expectations and high execution probabilities compared to the premium effects. For example, the probability that the blue pending image with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed is higher than the execution probability of the premium effect (for example, 1/15). Similarly, the probability of occurrence of normal reach with a relatively low degree of expectation is higher than the probability of execution of premium effect (for example, 1/10).

When a premium performance is executed, a player accustomed to the game immediately recognizes that a big win will occur, and is greatly excited by the confirmation of the occurrence of the big win and the execution of the premium performance with a low probability of execution. will be remembered. In addition, in the case of a player who is unfamiliar with the game, the player recognizes that an unfamiliar special effect is being executed and experiences the flow of finally winning a big win, so that the player can get a big win as the game experience is accumulated. Gradually you become aware of what is happening.

Although it has been described above that the execution of the premium effect indicates that a big win will occur, the execution of the premium effect may indicate that a specific big win will occur. For example, the premium effect may be executed only when the jackpot with the highest value occurs among a plurality of types of jackpots with different values. For example, when there are three types of jackpots, 3R jackpot, 6R jackpot, and 10R jackpot (the maximum number of balls to be released per 1R is the same for each jackpot), the 10R jackpot, which has the largest number of rounds, occurs. The premium presentation may be executed only in the case. Alternatively, if there are two types of low-probability short-time jackpots and high-probability short-time jackpots (the number of rounds and the maximum amount of balls per 1R are the same for both jackpots), a premium only when a high-probability short-time jackpot occurs A production may be executed.

In addition, the holding display area, the first holding display area to the fourth holding display area, the holding image and the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 are displayed, for example, the right During hitting, etc., in response to the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004, in the reservation display area, the first reservation display area to the fourth reservation display area, the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 You may make it display the said pending|holding image corresponding to , and a pending|holding image in a similar manner.

Alternatively, the holding image or the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is the same position as the holding image or the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 but different. You may make it display by a display mode. For example, the pending image or the pending image may be represented by using a hexagonal shape instead of a circular shape, or by superimposing the characters "electric chew" on each circular image.

In addition, the holding image and the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are displayed in the same manner as the holding image and the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. It may be displayed at a different position (for example, the lower left corner of the display area).
Further, by combining these, the pending image and the pending image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 may be displayed in different display modes at different positions.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can understand which starting port the hold corresponds to.

FIG. 226(e) shows a resurrection effect character and its lines that may be displayed when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a state of reach loss. Details of the effect using the resurrection effect character will be described later.

FIG. 226(f) shows the fourth pattern. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405. It is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 225(d). The fourth symbol is variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol, and is stop-displayed according to the stop-display of the special symbol. Similarly to the decorative pattern, the fourth pattern is also displayed in a grid mode when the special lottery result is a big hit, and is displayed in a mode other than the grid mode when the special lottery result is a loss. FIG. 226(f) shows a state in which the numeral "352" is stopped and displayed as the fourth symbol.

Although an embodiment in which the fourth pattern consists of three numbers has been shown, there are only two types of patterns displayed as the fourth pattern, the symbol "O" indicating a big hit and the symbol "X" indicating a loss. may indicate the results of the special lottery. It should be noted that during the variable display of the special symbols, it is preferable to alternately display "O" and "X" for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds).
According to such a configuration, during the variable display of the decorative patterns, ``○'' and ``X'' are alternately displayed as the fourth pattern, and when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative patterns are displayed in a square pattern. Stop-display is performed, ``○'' is stop-displayed for the fourth pattern, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in a mode other than the grid pattern, and ``X'' is stop-displayed for the fourth pattern.
In this case, the combination of decorative symbols stop display can be displayed in a different manner for each variable display, but the symbols to be stop-displayed as the fourth symbol are only two kinds of "o" and "x".

In this embodiment, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 1403 and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol display device 1405 are not performed at the same time, the fourth symbol is the first special symbol display device 1403 and the The second special symbol display device 1405 also shows the fluctuation situation, but the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display device 1403 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display device 1405 may be provided separately. For example, the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display 1403 is displayed on the upper side of the reserved number display image, and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display 1405 is displayed on the lower side of the reserved number display image. may

FIG. 226(g) shows a pending number display image. The pending number display image consists of an image displaying the pending number corresponding to the first starting port 2002 on the upper side and an image displaying the pending number corresponding to the second starting port 2004 on the lower side. FIG. 224(h) shows a display example when the number of reservations corresponding to the first start port 2002 is 3 and the number of reservations corresponding to the second start port 2004 is 0. Thus, the pending number can be confirmed by the pending number display image shown in FIG. 226(g) as well as by the pending image and the pending image shown in FIG. 226(d).

FIG. 226(h) shows an error notification image displayed when some kind of abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The figure shows an example of the message "Error occurred. Please call a clerk." The error notification image may indicate specific contents of an abnormality that occurred in the gaming machine or a fraudulent act performed by the player. In this case, the error notification image is displayed at a position that does not overlap the fourth symbol or the pending number display image.

Note that a hitting method instruction image for instructing operation of the handle 302 may be displayed by the same display method as the error notification image. For example, as the hitting instruction image, a message such as "Please hit to the right" and "Please return to hitting to the left" may be displayed. It is preferable that the display priority of the hitting instruction image is higher than the display priority of the fourth pattern and the pending number display image, and lower than the display priority of the error notification image.

By arranging an object in a virtual space, creating a moving image by moving a virtual camera in a predetermined manner, and displaying the moving image as a normal background image, the normal background image can be visually recognized dynamically. You may do so.
FIGS. 227(a) to 227(c) show display examples of a normal background video image A generated by following a virtual camera, showing a group of tanks entering an enemy position in a virtual space at a predetermined timing. is shown. By generating and repeatedly reproducing such a normal background moving image A, it is possible to repeatedly display a dynamic background image in a loop.
Specifically, Figure 227(a) shows an example of the display when a group of tanks has departed, Figure 227(b) shows an example of the display of a group of tanks entering enemy territory, and Figure 227(c) shows an example of the display when a group of tanks Furthermore, display examples when entering an enemy position are shown respectively.

With reference to FIGS. 227(a) to 227(c), an example of displaying a moving image of a group of tanks entering an enemy position has been shown, but other moving images may be displayed.
An example of a normal background moving image B created by moving the virtual camera from the initial position to the right and then to the left in the virtual space is shown below. In this normal background moving image B, each tank is stopped in the hangar. Also, the virtual camera returns to the position where the movement started when the movement ends. The direction of the virtual camera is adjusted so that it faces the direction of the tank. FIG. 227(d) shows a display example when the virtual camera is at the initial position. FIG. 227(e) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves to the right and moves to the front of the hangar. FIG. 227(f) shows a display example when the virtual camera has moved all the way to the right. The virtual camera then moves to the left and finally returns to its initial position. 227(d), 227(e), 227(f), 227(e), and 227(d). Become.
227(d), 227(e), 227(f), and 227(e), and then again in FIG. 227 ( From d), the normal background moving image B is displayed.

The length (playback time) of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is preferably set to approximately 30 to 120 seconds. In this case, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B can be looped and displayed at intervals of about 30 to 120 seconds.
A plurality of normal background moving images such as normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B are generated in advance, and displayed in a predetermined order including normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B. may
Note that the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B can also be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the same manner as the normal background image A and the normal background image B. FIG.

It should be noted that, as in an embodiment to be described later, when the execution of a special reach effect such as a "giant tank reach" effect or an "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is started while the normal background moving image A is being displayed, The background image is changed to a special reach-only background image or background moving image.
After that, in accordance with the end of the special ready-to-reach production, the normal background moving image A that was displayed before the special ready-to-reach production was displayed instead of the special ready-to-win background image or background moving image. good. At this time, the normal background moving image A may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (the display state shown in FIG. 227(a)), or the normal background image A may be reproduced even during the special ready-to-win effect. is progressed, and the normal background image A that has been progressed may be displayed in accordance with the end of the special ready-to-win effect.
Although the normal background moving image A is taken as an example, the normal background moving image B may also be displayed in the same manner.

An example of displaying the dynamically displayed normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B instead of the statically displayed normal background image A and the normal background image B has been shown. , the special reach background image B, the reserved image, and the reserved image may be displayed as still images or dynamically displayed using moving images. In the case of dynamic display, images may be displayed in a loop at predetermined intervals. For example, the special reach background image may be displayed in a loop with a period of about 10 to 60 seconds. Further, the pending image and the pending image may be displayed in a loop with a period of about 1 to 2 seconds.

FIGS. 228(a) to 228(c) show examples of background concealed images.
The background cover-up image is an image that is displayed when switching between the normal background image A or normal background image B and the special reach background image that is displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects are executed. . The background concealing images shown in FIGS. 228(a) to 228(c) consist of black images. The background-concealing image can reduce the visibility of an image having a lower display priority than the background-concealing image.
A plurality (specifically, three) of background concealing images having different degrees of lowering visibility are prepared for the background concealing image. Each background concealed image in this embodiment is black, but has a different degree of transparency. Specifically, the background hiding image A (FIG. 228(a)) with high transparency and low visibility reduction, and the background hiding image B (FIG. 228A) with medium transparency and moderate visibility reduction (see FIG. 228 (b)), and a background concealing image C (FIG. 228(c)) with low transparency and a high degree of lowering visibility (FIG. 228(c)) are prepared, and these are switched in a predetermined order and sequentially displayed. Although the details will be described later, by sequentially displaying the background concealing images, the switching of the background images can be visually recognized by the player in a natural manner. Although three background-concealed images with different degrees of transparency are shown, two or four or more background-concealed images may be used, or a moving image consisting of more images may be used. In this case, the switching of the background is further visually recognized by the player in a natural manner.
Also, instead of preparing a plurality of background concealing images with different degrees of transparency, the visibility of the background image is changed by gradually changing the transparency of one black background concealing image using the function of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. You may do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly change the visibility of the background image while reducing the capacity used to store the background concealing image.
FIGS. 228(d) to 228(f) show other examples of background concealed images. This is an example in which an image of a bomb character (specifically, bomb character A shown in the above embodiment) is used as a background concealment image. In addition, although the details will be described later, a white background concealing image may be used instead of black.

Each image shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 228 has its own display priority. FIG. 229 is a table showing display priorities, layer names in which images are arranged, and types of images that can be arranged in each layer. For example, the background image is placed on layer L90, the own tank image, enemy tank image, operation instruction image, etc. are placed on layers L75 to L80, and decorative patterns are placed on layer L70. are superimposed and displayed based on
As shown in the table of FIG. 229, background images (normal background image, special reach background image), various images displayed during special reach (own tank image, enemy tank image, "Sergeant Might" dialogue image, " Colonel Dyna' dialogue image, operation instruction image imitating attack button 3710 and mission button 3700, etc.), decorative patterns (normal decorative pattern, special reach decorative pattern, etc.), pseudo-running number display image, belt-like prefetch effect image, first Suspended image to fourth suspended image, the suspended image, a speech announcement image and background concealment image described later with reference to FIG. 269 and the like, a game result image described later with reference to FIG. The display priority increases in the order of the dialogue), the fourth pattern, the pending number display image, and the error notification image.
Specifically, the display priority of various images, decorative patterns, and the pending image displayed during special reach is higher than the display priority of the background image, and the various images, decorative patterns, and the like displayed during special reach. A pending image or the like is displayed in front of the background image.
On the other hand, the display priority of the background concealed image is higher than the display priority of the background image, various images displayed during special reach, decorative patterns, the hold image, etc., and the background concealed image is placed in front of these images. By being displayed, these images are hidden and visibility is reduced.

Although an example of arranging the reserved image on the layer L40 and the reserved image on the layer L45 has been shown, the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L26 and the reserved image on the layer L27. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background hiding image arranged on the layer L30.
Alternatively, the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L21 and the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L22. In this case, the pending image and the pending image are not hidden by the background hiding image placed on the layer L30 or the game result image placed on the layer L25.

Also, a decorative pattern may be arranged on the layer L26. In this case, the decorative pattern is not hidden by the background hiding image arranged on the layer L30.

Various production modes in this embodiment and various modifications are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of the special lottery determined by the main control board 1310, the game state, etc. executed in time.
For example, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the peripheral control board 1510 stops and displays the decorative symbols in a non-reach loss state (for example, "352") in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, or After reaching the reach state (for example, "2↓2"), the stop display is finally performed in the reach-loss state (for example, "232"). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative pattern is put in a ready-to-win state ("2↓2"), and then the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed in a grid (for example, "222"). conduct.
It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 also determines whether special ready-to-reach effects (“huge tank reach”, “enemy tank destroying reach”) and other effects to be described later are to be executed.

First, an example of rendering when the decorative symbols do not enter the ready state and the background image is not switched will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 230(a) shows a time chart in this production example, and FIG. 231 shows a display example at a predetermined timing in this production example.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 231(a) shows a state in which the variable display of decorative symbols is stopped. The number of reservations at this time is 3. As the decorative pattern, a decorative pattern is usually displayed. A background image A is usually displayed behind the decorative pattern as a background image.
When the timing t0 comes from this state, a new variable display of the decoration pattern is started. FIG. 231(b) shows the display state immediately after the variable display is started.
Thereafter, left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a downward scrolling manner. FIG. 231(c) shows the display state at that time.
After that, after the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs and the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, the left decorative drawing is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t5. FIG. 231(d) shows the display state at that time.

Next, at timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 231(e) shows the display state at that time. Next, at timing t15, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t16, left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display of the reserved image ends. FIG. 231(f) shows the display state during the period from timing t16 to timing t17. In this state, it is shown that the special lottery results are lost. After timing t17, the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the next hold is performed.

Next, an example of effect when the background image is not switched while the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 230(b) and the display example shown in FIG. During the period from timing t0 to timing t10, a display similar to the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 230(a) is performed.
In this example of effect, at timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same number "2" as the left decorative symbol, and the ready-to-win state occurs. FIG. 232(a) shows the display state at that time. After that, at timing t20, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t21, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the player is shown whether the special lottery result is a loss or a big hit.
FIG. 232(b) shows a display example during the period from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a loss. In the drawing, a state in which the decoration pattern is stopped at "232" is shown.
FIG. 232(c) shows a display example during the period from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a big win. In the drawing, each decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state with squares "222".
After timing t22, when the special lottery result is a loss, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next hold is executed, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the background image is replaced with the normal background image. From A, the background image is switched to the background image during the big win exclusively for the middle of the big win, and the big win game state is executed.

As compared with the example of effect in which the ready-to-win state is not shown with reference to FIG. 230(a), the variable display time of decorative symbols is longer in the example of effect in which the ready-to-win state is shown with reference to FIG. 230(b). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel for a long time the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit.

In the examples of effects shown with reference to FIGS. 230(a) and 231 and the examples of effects shown with reference to FIGS. , and the special reach background image A and the special reach background image B are not displayed. Also, the background hidden image is not displayed.

In the time chart of FIG. 230(a), while the decorative design is changing (timing t0 to timing t16), while the decorative design is stopped (timing t16 to timing t17), and during the next and subsequent decorative design fluctuations (timing t17). , the normal background image A is continuously displayed, but the normal background image A is displayed even in a state where the pending number is 0 and the decorative pattern does not change. FIG. 232(d) shows a display example after "253" indicating that the pending number is 0 and that the result of the special lottery is lost in the most recent decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed. This display state is maintained unless the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) occurs.
As with the normal background image, the display state of the normal background moving image is maintained in a state in which the decorative pattern does not change. Specifically, even after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the reproduction of the normal background moving image displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols is continued. Also, after the background moving image is reproduced to the end, it is preferable that the moving image is reproduced again from the beginning so that the moving image is reproduced in a loop.
Thus, the normal background image or the normal background moving image is an image or moving image displayed as a background image when the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the game is not in the jackpot game state.

When the state of zero pending numbers continues for a predetermined period of time (when the variable display is not performed for a predetermined period of time), the decorative pattern may not be displayed.
Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative design is not performed and the number of reservations is 0, the stationary display of the decorative design shown in FIG. Seconds), after the stop display of the decorative pattern is further continued, the display of the decorative pattern may not be performed. FIG. 232(e) shows a display example in which the decorative symbols are not stopped.
Such a display state may be continued until a game ball wins for the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004).

In this way, when the fixed stop period of the decorative symbols ends in a state where there is no suspension, the period from the timing when the fixed stopped period ends to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols is called the demo period. sometimes referred to as
Alternatively, if a predetermined period of time elapses after the completion of the fixed stop period of the decorative design without suspension, the period from the timing when the predetermined time elapses to the start of the variable display of the decorative design is defined as the demo period. good too.
Alternatively, a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses in a state in which no contact with the handle 302 is detected by the handle touch sensor 310 in a state in which the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern is terminated without suspension. A period from the timing to the start of a new variable display of decorative symbols may be set as the demonstration period.

At the timing when the demonstration period starts or at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed from the start of the demonstration period, a specific effect display that is executed only during the demonstration period may be started.
For example, the display of the decorative pattern may be interrupted at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the start of the demonstration period. In this case, as the background image, the background image being displayed (for example, normal background image A) may be kept displayed as it is. Alternatively, the background image being displayed may be hidden, and a moving image introducing the game machine or the game machine maker may be reproduced. It should be noted that the original decorative pattern and the background image may be displayed again after the moving image is reproduced (for example, for several minutes) for a predetermined period of time. Also, the display of the original decorative pattern and the background image, and the reproduction display of the moving image may be repeatedly displayed.

Also, a character appearing during the ready-to-win effect may be displayed during the demonstration period. In this case, by setting the action mode of the character to be different from that during the ready-to-win effect, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the ready-to-win effect has occurred.
Also, during the demonstration period, it may be assumed that the player is not seated (no player is playing a game), and characters such as "sit down" may be displayed in the display area. As a result, it is possible to appeal to players who are looking for a game machine to play, and contribute to increasing the operation of the game arcade.
Alternatively, the display area may be shifted to a demonstration image display state in which a demonstration image for introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. In the demonstration image display state, the demonstration image may be displayed in front of the stopped decorative pattern, or the demonstration image may be displayed in a state in which no decorative pattern is displayed.
Note that these displays may be realized by reproducing pre-created still image data or moving image data.

In this way, the normal background image A is continuously displayed even from the state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed to the state in which the decorative symbols are not variably displayed (demonstration period).
Also, from the state in which the decorative pattern is not variably displayed, from the state where the number of reservations corresponding to the first start port 2002 (or the second start port 2004) is 0, the first start port 2002 (or the second start port 2004 ), the normal background image A is continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started.

It should be noted that in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols is not performed and the number of reserved symbols is 0, and after the stationary display of the decorative symbols has been performed for one second, the touch of the handle 302 by the player is detected by the handle touch sensor 310. If the undetected state continues for a predetermined period of time, the decorative design may not be displayed.
Also, when the player's contact with the handle 302 is newly detected by the handle touch sensor 310, or when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) occurs, decorative symbols may be resumed. Also, the demonstration period may be ended at the same time, and the display of various images displayed during the demonstration period may be ended. Also in this case, it is preferable that the normal background image A is continuously displayed regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed.

Although the normal background image A is taken as an example, the normal background image B and the normal background image C are also used in the same manner as the normal background image A, and can be displayed as background images while the decorative pattern is changing or not changing.

In addition, the normal background image satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, if a predetermined lottery is won, the special reach effect, which is a high-expectation reach effect, will result in a loss. , etc.), one of the normal background image A and the normal background image B may be switched to the other.
In addition, in the variable display of the most recent decorative pattern that is started after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the variable display executed next to the variable display in which the special reach effect was performed as a result of losing) , it is preferable to execute an effect of switching the normal background image.
Although the normal background image A and the normal background image B have been described as normal background images that can be displayed in a game state (normal state) that is not a game state of hitting right, the number of types is not limited to two, and may be three or more. . In that case, the normal background image may be switched based on a predetermined rule, such as displaying in a predetermined order. Alternatively, normal background images may be switched irregularly, such as by being displayed in random order.
In addition, when the game state (probability variable state or time-saving state) of hitting to the right is reached with the jackpot game state as a trigger, the normal background image C is displayed as the background image during hitting to the right. In this way, the displayed normal background image may be changed with the change in the game state as a trigger. Note that there may be a plurality of background images other than the normal background image C as the background image during right-handed hitting. Also in this case, the background image may be switched in the same manner as the normal background image display method in the normal state.

230(a), 230(b), 231, and 232, the background image is not switched during the variable display of decorative patterns, and the normal background image is continuously displayed. FIG. 230(c) and FIG. 233(a) show the effect of "enemy tank destruction reach", in which the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image during the variable display of decorative patterns. Description will be made with reference to the time charts and display examples shown in FIGS. In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 230(c), an example of the effect from timing t0 to timing t10 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 233(a). Rendering examples at timing t10 to timing t45 in the rendering are respectively shown.
It should be noted that during the period from timing t0 to timing t13, the variable display is performed in the same manner as the production example shown with reference to FIG. 230(b). FIG. 234(a) is a display example at a predetermined timing during a predetermined period (timing t10 to timing t13) before the background concealing image is displayed.

In this rendering example, from timing t13 to timing t19, background concealing image A, background concealing image B, and background concealing image C are displayed in a predetermined order. Also, at timing t16 when the background concealing image C is displayed, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B. FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 233(a), the background concealing image A is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t13 to timing t14. FIG. 234(b) shows a display example during this period.
Also, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t14 to timing t15. FIG. 234(c) shows a display example during this period.
Also, the background concealed image C is displayed during the period (two seconds) from timing t15 to timing t17. FIG. 234(d) shows a display example during this period.
Also, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t17 to timing t18. FIG. 234(e) shows a display example during this period.
Also, the background concealing image A is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t18 to timing t19. FIG. 234(f) shows a display example during this period.

At timing t16 when the background concealing image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B, and the decorative pattern is changed to the normal background image shown with reference to FIG. However, since the background concealing image C is displayed in front of the background image and the decorative pattern, it can be recognized that these images have been switched. is after timing t17 when the background concealed image B is displayed.
In addition, the special ready-to-win decoration pattern is displayed during the period (timing t16 to timing t39) in which the special ready-to-win background image is displayed. Further, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state without being scrolled downward.

From timing t30 to timing t33, an operation valid period occurs during which acceptance of an operation on attack button 3710 is valid. FIG. 234(g) shows a display example during this period. Simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a line instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 is also displayed.
If an appropriate operation mode for the attack button 3710 is performed during the operation valid period, or if the operation valid period ends, a mode suggesting a special lottery result (whether or not an enemy tank is destroyed is displayed) or) is displayed.

FIG. 235 shows a display example when the special lottery result is a big win. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a big win, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In addition, the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is displayed in a state temporarily stopped in a square pattern ("222") at timing t34 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 has ended. FIG. 235(a) shows this state.

On the other hand, FIG. 236 shows a display example when the special lottery result is a loss. If the result of the special lottery is a loss, an image of the enemy tank passing through without being destroyed is displayed. In addition, the special ready-to-win decoration pattern is displayed in a state temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win state (“232”) at timing t34 when a predetermined time has passed since the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 has ended. FIG. 236(a) shows this state.

Next, the background concealing image is displayed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
Specifically, the background concealing image A is displayed during a period (one second) from timing t36 to timing t37. 235(b) and 236(b) show display examples during this period.
Also, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t37 to timing t38. FIGS. 235(c) and 236(c) show display examples during this period.
Also, the background concealed image C is displayed during the period (two seconds) from timing t38 to timing t40. FIGS. 235(d) and 236(d) show display examples during this period.
Also, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t40 to timing t41. FIGS. 235(e) and 236(e) show display examples during this period.
Also, the background concealing image A is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t41 to timing t42. FIGS. 235(f) and 236(f) show display examples during this period.

At timing t39 when the background concealing image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the special ready-to-win background image B to the normal background image A, and the decorative design is changed from the special ready-to-reach decorative design B to the normal decorative design A. However, since the background concealing image C is displayed in front of the background image and the decorative pattern, it is possible to recognize that these images have been switched at timing t40 when the background concealing image B is displayed. After that.

During the period from timing t34 to timing t44, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are maintained in a temporarily stopped state. During the period from timing t42 to timing t44, the background concealing image A is not displayed, and the visibility of the normal decoration pattern A during the temporary stop is not hindered by the background concealing image. FIGS. 235(g) and 236(g) show the display state at this time.

At timing t44, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result is shown to the player. FIGS. 235(h) and 236(h) show the display state during the period from timing t44 to timing t45.

230(b) and 232 where the background image is not switched, and the special reach where the background image is switched shown with reference to FIGS. 230(c) and 233 to 236. Reach ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") is more likely to be a big hit in the latter. For example, while the expectation level is 3% in the former case, the expectation level may be 10% in the latter case.

Further, it may be possible to make it possible to execute a plurality of special reach with different expectations of a big hit, and to execute any one of the special reach. In this case, the background image of the special reach, the image of the own tank, the image of the enemy tank, and the operation section required to be operated may be changed according to the type of the special reach. Thus, by visually recognizing the displayed special ready-to-win background image, the image of own tank and enemy tank, and the operation instruction image of the operation unit, the player can know whether the expectation of a big win is high or low.
It should be noted that an aspect suggesting the degree of expectation in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145 and the like and its modification may be employed.

At timing t16, an example of the effect of switching the background image was shown, but since it is after timing t17 that the change to the special reach background image B or the small special reach decoration pattern becomes recognizable, special You may make it change to the reach background image B or a small special reach decoration pattern.
At timing t39, an example of the effect of switching the background image is shown, but since it is after timing t40 that the change to the normal background image A or the small normal decorative pattern becomes recognizable, the normal background image is displayed at timing t38 or t40. A or a change to a normal decoration pattern may be performed.

Thus, in this example of effect, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B at timing t16. Similarly, the background image is switched from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A at timing t39.
At timing t16 and timing t39, the background concealing image C is displayed, so the player does not recognize that the background image has been switched.

In the switching effect of the background images in this embodiment, the background concealing image A and the background concealing image B are displayed in order, and the visibility of the background images decreases, and the background image before switching becomes gradually difficult to recognize. and a period during which the background concealing image C is displayed and the background images before and after switching are not visible (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "second period"). Then, the background concealing image B and the background concealing image A are displayed in order, the visibility of the background image increases, and the background image after switching gradually becomes more visible (hereinafter referred to as the “third period”). (sometimes).
After the end of the third period, during the period until the decorative pattern stops changing (period from timing t42 to timing t44), the normal background image is maintained in a state where it can be easily viewed (hereinafter referred to as this period may be referred to as the “fourth period”).

According to such a configuration, the switching of the background image is perceived by the player in a natural manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.
Also, at the start of the special reach, the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image while the background masking image is displayed, so the player perceives the start of the special reach in a natural way, which reduces the interest. can be suppressed.
Similarly, at the end of the special reach, the background image of the special reach is switched to the normal background image while the background concealing image is displayed. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In such a background image switching effect, the background image is switched during the period (second period) when the background is most difficult to see (the background image switching is performed at the same time as the third period starts). may be done). As a result, the background can be switched smoothly, and the player is less likely to feel discomfort in the presentation.
In addition, since the black background concealing image is displayed in the entire display area, the luminosity of the display area is reduced, and the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced, thereby reducing the movement of the image within the display area. . Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is less aware of the display contents of the display area by operating a smartphone recognize that an opportunity has come to pay attention to the display area.
Further, when the special reach is finished, a black background concealing image is displayed and the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image, so that the display content in the display area is simple for a predetermined period. As a result, even if the player is shown that the result of the special lottery is a loss by the display result of the special reach, the player's feeling of anticipation for the big win is calmed down, and the subsequent variable display is performed. Since the game is continued without losing the interest in the game, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the game machine.

An example of display when the special lottery result is a big win is shown with reference to FIG. 235(a) may be continued until timing t44 without displaying the background concealing image, and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern may be left as is and the pattern may be stopped and displayed. Further, although the background concealing image is displayed, at timing t39, the special reach background image B may not be switched to the normal background image A, but may be switched to the background image during the big win.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the feeling of being overwhelmed by the occurrence of the big win until the big win game is started.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, the result of the special lottery was indicated by the display mode of the enemy tank and the temporary stop display mode of the special reach decorative pattern. As the decorative pattern, a large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 225(c) may be employed.
For example, the end timing (timing t33) of the valid operation period, or the timing (timing t34) at which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped after a predetermined time (1 second) has passed after the end of the valid operation period (timing t34). Then, the decorative design may be changed from the small special ready-to-win decorative design shown with reference to FIG. 225(b) to the large special ready-to-win decorative design shown with reference to FIG. 225(c).
The display of the large special ready-to-win decorative pattern should be continued until timing t39 during the second period, and the normal decorative pattern should be displayed after timing t39.
If the special lottery result is a big win and the background concealing image is not displayed, the display of the large special ready-to-win decoration pattern may be continued until timing t45.

The background hiding image may be configured so that the reserved image or the reserved image is not hidden. For example, when the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. Each display example shown in (h) is displayed like each display example shown in FIGS. 237(a) to 237(h). Such a display can be realized by setting the display priority of the reserved image and the reserved image higher than the display priority of the background masking image. Note that the background hiding image may be configured so that the pending image and the pending image are not hidden not only at the end of the special reach but also at the start of the special reach.

According to such a configuration, since the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is not lowered, the player can check the number of reservations, and operate the handle 302 to move the game ball to the first start port 2002. You can make a decision whether to win or not.
Specifically, the background masking image is displayed at the start of special reach, which has a relatively long fluctuation display time compared to reach, where only the background image is displayed, or when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped during reach. immediately after In addition, from the state in which the ready-to-win decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the holding is reduced by one and the next variable display is started, or a big win game state is generated, and opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is started.
Therefore, if it is possible to confirm the number of reservations at the start of special reach, it is possible to determine whether to increase the number of reservations during special reach, where the expectation of a big hit is high and the need to increase the number of reservations is not necessarily high. It becomes possible.
Also, if it is possible to confirm the number of reservations at the end of the special reach, the player who has stopped shooting the game ball during the special reach can accurately determine whether or not to shoot the game ball. .

With reference to FIGS. 124 and 125, an embodiment has been shown in which the look-ahead effect display is performed over a plurality of times of variable display based on the look-ahead results. The embodiment shown with reference to 236 or the like may be modified so as to perform a look-ahead effect display.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236 and the like, if the configuration is such that a read-ahead effect display is performed, the display examples shown in FIGS. A) to FIG. 238(h) are displayed as display examples.
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 238, as the prefetch effect display in the special reach, band-shaped prefetch effect images with a character string "Enemy tank approaching!" In addition, by displaying the background concealing image A and the background concealing image B, the first period in which the strip-like prefetch effect image is difficult to recognize becomes visible, and by displaying the background concealing image C, the strip-shaped prefetch effect image becomes invisible. It will be the second period. After that, the background concealing image B and the background concealing image A are displayed, so that the third period in which the strip-like prefetch effect image becomes gradually easier to see, and the strip-like prefetch effect image changes from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see. . Such a display mode can be realized by setting the display priority of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image lower than the display priority of the background hiding image.

The display of the band-like prefetch effect image ends at timing t45 when the stop display of the decorative symbols ends. Alternatively, the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image may be terminated during the period from timing t36 to timing t42 (see FIG. 233) during which the background concealing image is displayed. In this case, the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image may be ended in any one of the first period to the third period. Alternatively, the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image may be ended in the fourth period until the visibility of the background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image may be terminated at timing t44 when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In this way, the band-like prefetch effect image can also be displayed in a visually difficult or invisible manner using the background concealing image using the same display method as other images such as the reserved image.

Also in the first period and the third period during which the background concealing image is being displayed, by displaying the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image, it is possible to know under what level of expectation the variable display of the decorative pattern was performed. A player can recognize it.
On the other hand, by ending the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image in the first period to the third period (especially the second period), the display of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image can be naturally ended.
In addition, by ending the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image before the stationary display of the decorative symbols, the visibility of the stationary displayed decorative symbols is not hindered.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238, the reserved image, the reserved image, and the prefetch effect image are rendered invisible/invisible by the background concealing image.
On the other hand, the look-ahead effect image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. can be In this case, since the reserved image, the reserved image, and the prefetch effect image are displayed in front of the background concealed image, these images are easily visible.
On the other hand, the reserved image and the reserved image are displayed in front of the background concealed image to make it easy to see, and the prefetch effect image is displayed behind the background concealed image so that it is difficult to see/invisible. may be displayed.
Alternatively, the reserved image and the reserved image are displayed behind the background concealed image to make it difficult or invisible, and the prefetch effect image is displayed in front of the background concealed image so that it is easily visible. You may
It should be noted that the superimposition of these images may be performed by appropriately setting the display priority for each image and using the layer function.

When the reserved image or both the reserved image and the look-ahead effect image are invisible, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the scene has been switched.
When the pending image or both the pending image and the pre-reading effect image are visible, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the scene has been switched, but the player recognizes the degree of expectation indicated by these images. can.
When only one of the reserved image or the reserved image and the look-ahead effect image is visible, the player can roughly recognize the degree of expectation, although the scene switching feeling is somewhat inferior.

In addition, when the reserved image is displayed in a special manner (for example, the reserved image in green or red) indicating that the expectation of the big win is high, it indicates that the expectation of the big win is high. recognizable.
For example, if the pending image can be visually recognized at the start of the special reach, it is possible to recognize under what degree of expectation the special reach is being performed.
Also, if the pending image is visible at the end of the special reach, under what level of expectation did the decorative pattern at the time of reach stop with a grid indicating a big hit, or non-matching indicating a loss? It is possible to confirm whether it has stopped in the manner of the eyes. For example, if the result is a loss under high expectations, or a big hit under low expectations, the results may be presented in a way that betrays the player's expectations. can make you feel. Then, in subsequent games, if the same pending image is displayed, even if a low expectation is shown, the expectation that the result of the special reach will result in a big win is lost. In addition, even if a high degree of expectation is indicated, it is possible to enjoy the performance in the special reach with a sense of tension considering that the result of the special reach will be a failure.
Further, by displaying the pending image or the pending image, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player misunderstands that the gaming machine is broken.

A white background concealing image may be employed as the background concealing image. For example, when the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236 are modified to display a white background concealing image, the display examples shown in FIGS. 236(a) to 236(h) are It will be displayed like the display examples shown in FIGS. 239(a) to 239(h).
Similarly to the black background-concealing image, white background-concealing images A to C having different degrees of transparency are prepared. 239(b) and 239(c)). Next, a white background concealing image C is displayed to make the image behind the white background concealing image invisible (FIG. 239(d)). Next, the white background-concealing images B and A are displayed, and the transparency is gradually increased to gradually improve the visibility of the image positioned behind the white background-concealing image (FIG. 239(e), FIG. 239(f)). After that, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily and then stopped (FIGS. 239(g) and 239(h)).

A predetermined character or the like may be displayed as the background masking image. For example, when the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236 is modified to display a plurality of bomb characters, the display examples shown in FIGS. 240(a) to 240(h) are displayed as display examples.
Note that in the first period in this modified embodiment, display of the image of the bomb character and the triangular background area as the background concealing image A starts from the upper left and lower right of the display area (Fig. 240 (b )), and then the background concealed image B is displayed (FIG. 240(c)).
In the second period, a bomb character and two trapezoidal background area images are displayed as the background concealing image C (FIG. 240(d)).
Also, in the third period, the background concealing image B is displayed (FIG. 240(e)), and then the background concealing image A is displayed (FIG. 240(f)). After that, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily and then stopped (Fig. 240(g), Fig. 240(h)).
Thus, in this embodiment, the background concealing image is composed of the image of the bomb character and the background area (triangular or trapezoidal portion).
In addition, it is preferable to use a single color (white or black) for the background area. Also, the bomb character itself may be a still image, or may be displayed dynamically such as by moving the hands and feet of the bomb character. In place of or in addition to the bomb character, at least one of characters other than the bomb character, a predetermined pattern, the model name of the pachinko machine 1, the name of the special reach being executed or being executed, etc. It may be displayed as part of the background concealed image on the near side of the area.
According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be switched to the variable display of the decorative symbols to be performed next.

234 to 236 and the like, examples of switching the background image by displaying a black background concealing image at both timings of the start and end of the special reach have been shown.
As the background concealing image, instead of the black background concealing image, a white background concealing image is displayed with reference to FIG. However, instead of displaying the same background concealing image at the start and end of the special reach, different background concealing images may be displayed at the start and end of the special reach.
For example, as the background concealment image at the start of the special reach, any one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. is displayed, and a black background concealment image is displayed at the end of the special reach. Any one of a background concealing image, a white background concealing image, and a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like may be displayed.
Specifically, a white background concealment image is displayed as the background concealment image at the start of the special reach, and a black background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed as the background concealment image at the end of the special reach. You may make it

In the embodiment referring to FIG. 233(a), the first period is a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see, the second period is a period in which the background image is invisible, and the background image is gradually easy to see. An example is shown in which the length of the third period (specifically, two seconds) is the same. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to simplify the display processing of the background concealed image and reduce the number of man-hours required for developing the image effect.

On the other hand, the length of each period may be different rather than the same. Figure 233 (b), Figure 233 (c) shows a modification (modification 01 to modification 12) in which the length of the first period to the third period at the start of special reach and the end of special reach are different. showing. For example, in modification 08, the length of the first period is 3 seconds, which is the longest, the length of the second period is 1 second, which is the shortest, and the length of the third period is 2 seconds, which is intermediate. there is
Note that, in each modification, the length of the fourth period may also be different from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch and display the background images within a limited time without unnecessarily lengthening the time required to display the background concealing image.

Below, the basic effects at the start of the special reach of Modification 01 to Modification 12 are shown.

According to Modification 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "third period>first period=second period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By increasing the time until it is recognized), you can enjoy which one of the multiple reach effects is displayed.

According to Modification 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of special reach is set to "first period = second period > third period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By shortening the time until it is recognized, it is possible to recognize the special reach effect to be executed at an early stage.

According to Modification 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period>first period=third period" (that is, the background concealing image C is displayed By extending the period in which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed), it is possible to secure a long time to enjoy which reach effect out of the plurality of reach effects will be executed. .

According to Modification 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "first period = third period > second period" (that is, the background concealing image C is displayed By shortening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed, the special reach effect can be enjoyed for a long time.

According to Modification 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (that is, the normal background image is completely By extending the time until it becomes unrecognizable), it is possible to provide the joy of developing into a special reach effect for a long time.

According to Modification 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period = third period> first period" (that is, the normal background image is completely By shortening the time until recognition becomes impossible, the background concealing image C is displayed early, so that the user can quickly prepare for the special ready-to-win effect.

According to Modification 07, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period > second period > third period", so that the normal background image is completely The time until the recognition becomes unrecognizable becomes longer, and the pleasure of developing into the special ready-to-win performance can be provided for a long time, and the special ready-to-reach performance to be executed can be recognized at an early stage.

According to the modified example 08, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "first period> third period> second period", so that the normal background image is completely The time until it becomes unrecognizable is long, and the joy of developing into a special reach performance can be provided for a long time, and the background hiding image C is displayed, and the special reach background image and the normal background image are displayed. By shortening the period when it is not performed, it is possible to enjoy the special reach effect for a long time.

According to the modification 09, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period> first period> third period". It is possible to secure a long time for enjoying which ready-to-win performance will be executed, and to quickly recognize the special ready-to-reach performance to be executed.

According to Modification 10, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "second period>third period>first period", so that the background concealing image C is displayed early. , it is possible to prepare for the special ready-to-win performance at an early stage, and to secure a long time for enjoying which ready-to-win performance among a plurality of ready-to-win performances will be executed.

According to Modified Example 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "third period > first period > second period", so that the special reach effect is extended for a long time. The player can be entertained, and can enjoy which ready-to-win effect is displayed among a plurality of ready-to-win effects.

According to Modified Example 12, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "third period>second period>first period", so that the background concealing image C appears early. Since it is displayed in , it is possible to prepare early for the special reach effect and enjoy which reach effect is displayed among a plurality of reach effects.

Below, the basic effects at the end of the special reach of Modification 01 to Modification 12 are shown.

According to Modification 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period > first period = second period" (that is, the normal background image is completely By prolonging the time to recognize it, you can take time to change your feelings for the next change.

According to Modification 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period = second period> third period" (that is, the normal background image is completely By shortening the time until the change is recognized), it is possible to end the expectation for the change early and to have the expectation for the next change (quick change of mind).

According to Modification 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is "second period>first period=third period" (that is, the background concealing image C is displayed By lengthening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed, the time during which the background concealing image C is displayed can be made to feel longer, and the normal background image may not be displayed. It can make you feel hopeful.

According to Modification 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is "first period = third period > second period" (that is, the background concealing image C is displayed By shortening the period when the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed), the normal background image, although visibility is low, can be recognized at an early stage and the expectation for the change can be generated early. You can end it and have expectations for the next change (you can quickly switch your feelings).

According to Modification 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period>second period=third period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By extending the time until it becomes unrecognizable, it is possible to enjoy the afterglow that the fluctuation is off.

According to Modification 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period = third period > first period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By shortening the time until it becomes unrecognizable, it is possible to end the sense of expectation for the change early and have expectations for the next change (switching feelings quickly). .

According to modification 07, the relationship between the lengths of the first to third periods at the end of the special reach is set to "first period > second period > third period", so that the fluctuation is off. In addition, the anticipation for the change can be terminated early, and the expectation for the next change can be made (the feeling can be changed quickly).

According to the modified example 08, the relationship between the lengths of the first to third periods at the end of the special reach is set to "first period > third period > second period", so that the fluctuation is off. In addition, the normal background image, which has low visibility, can be recognized at an early stage to end the expectation for the change early, and to have the expectation for the next change (switching of feelings can be done quickly).

According to Modified Example 09, the background concealing image C is displayed by setting the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach as "second period>first period>third period". It is possible to make the user feel that the time for which the background image is displayed is long, and it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the normal background image will not be displayed. It is possible to have expectations for fluctuations in (can quickly switch feelings).

According to Modification 10, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is "second period > third period > first period", so that the special reach background image is completely The time until the change becomes unrecognizable is shortened, and the background concealed image C is displayed for a long time even though the expectation for the change was thought to have ended early, creating a new expectation. be able to.

According to Modification 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period> first period> second period", so that visibility is low but normal By recognizing the background image early and ending the expectation for the change early, and by extending the time until the normal background image is completely recognized, the change in feelings toward the next change You can take your time.

According to modification 12, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period> second period> first period", so that By ending the anticipation early and lengthening the time until the background image is completely recognized, it is possible to take time to change the mood for the next change.

In addition, the display mode of the background concealed image at the start of the special reach of the embodiment shown in FIG. 233(a) and the modifications shown in FIGS. The embodiment shown in FIG. 233(b) and the display mode of the background concealed image at the end of the special reach in each modification shown in FIG. 233(b) and FIG. 233(c) may be appropriately combined. For example, at the start of special reach, each background concealing image may be displayed in the form of modification 01, and at the end of special reach, each background concealing image may be displayed in the form of modification 02.
With such a configuration, the background image can be switched in a more appropriate manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a), the number of seconds in each of the first to third periods was 2 seconds, and the total number of seconds was 6 seconds. Also, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233(b) and 233(c), the number of seconds in each period of the first to third periods is 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds is 5. seconds to 7 seconds, but these are only examples.
For example, each of the first period to the third period may be appropriately set within a range of about 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds may also be appropriately set within a range of about 3 to 9 seconds. It should be noted that the number of seconds of each period may be shortened or lengthened as long as the effect is recognized.

As shown in modifications 04, 05, 08, and 11 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the first period.
Further, as shown in Modification 01, Modification 04, Modification 08, Modification 11, and Modification 12 in FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the third period.
Also, as shown in modifications 04, 08, and 11 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the first period and the third period.

During the first period and the third period, the transparency of the background concealing image changes and is dynamically visible, and although the decorative pattern and the background image are less visible, they are not invisible. On the other hand, during the second period, the decorative patterns and the background image became invisible and the display seemed to stop, and depending on the player, the gaming machine broke down (or the special lottery result was a big win, and the expectation was high). However, the second period is relatively shorter than the first and third periods to suppress the occurrence of such a situation. can be done.

Further, when displaying a black background concealing image, the light from the light emitting means provided in the game machine located behind the player's own face or the game machine is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. , there is a risk that it will be visually recognized by the player and the sense of immersion in the game will be reduced. Such a tendency is conspicuous when a glossy (glare) type display device is adopted as the liquid crystal display device constituting the game board side effect display device 1600 . However, by making the second period shorter than the first period and the third period, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

Note that the third period may be executed after the first period is executed without providing the second period. In this case, the switching of the background image is preferably performed at the switching timing from the first period to the third period. Similar effects can be obtained with such a configuration.
Note that in the embodiment and modification shown in FIG. 233, if the second period is not provided, the third period is executed after the end of the first period without changing the start timing of the first period. You may do so. Alternatively, the end timing of the first period may be modified to match the start timing of the third period without changing the end timing of the third period.

As shown in Modifications 03, 06, 09, 10, and 12 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the first period.
Also, as shown in modifications 02, 03, 07, 09, and 10 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the third period.
Also, as shown in Modification 03, Modification 09, and Modification 10 in FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the first and third periods.

According to such a configuration, since the background image and the decorative pattern are hidden by the background hiding image and the invisible state can be extended, the display contents in the display area can be simplified, and the player's feelings can be reflected in the background. It is possible to switch to the effect after switching the image or to the game situation.
For example, at the start of the special reach, the player's feelings can be concentrated on the content of the effect performed at the time of the special reach. In this case, a plurality of special reach effects with different expectations may be executed as the special reach effects, and one of the special reach effects may be executed (the "giant tank reach" effect described later is an example. is). In this case, it is possible to tantalize the player as to which special reach will develop, and to improve interest.
On the other hand, at the end of the special reach, the player's mind can be switched to the next pattern variation or big hit game.

Further, when a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like is displayed as the background concealing image, the player can take time to carefully observe the displayed background concealing image in the second period. Feelings will be changed more. It should be noted that the background concealed image may be dynamically displayed such that the character moves around within the screen. In this case, the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol variation or the big win game.
On the other hand, a black or white background concealed image changes only in transparency, and the image itself does not move. Therefore, unnecessary information is not given to the player, and the delimitation of the performance can be made clearer, so that the player's feelings can be switched.

As shown in modifications 02, 05, 07, 08, and 09 in FIG. 233, the first period may be longer than the third period.

According to such a configuration, the player can sufficiently perceive that the switching of the background image has started, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot understand how the content of the effect has changed. If the first period is shorter than the third period, there is a risk that the player will not be able to understand how the contents of the presentation have changed.

As shown in modifications 01, 06, 10, 11, and 12 of FIG. 233, the third period may be longer than the first period.

According to such a configuration, since the special reach background image is gradually displayed at the start of the special reach, the player feels teased, and the expectation for the special reach increases. . In this case, a plurality of special reach effects with different expectations may be executed as the special reach effects, and one of the special reach effects may be executed (the "giant tank reach" effect described later is an example. is). In this case, the player is interested in which special ready-to-win effect will be executed, but by lengthening the third period, it is possible to make the player feel a stronger interest.
In addition, the visibility of the special reach background image can be quickly lowered at the end of the special reach, and the player's feelings can be switched to the next pattern variation or the big win game. Especially when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the effect is great.

The embodiment shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c) may be modified so as not to provide the first period. In this case, the background concealing image is not displayed during the first period, and the second period starts at the timing shown in the figure.
Even if the configuration is such that the first period is not provided, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

The embodiment shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c) may be modified so that the third period is not provided. In this case, the background concealing image is not displayed during the third period, and the second period ends at the timing shown in the figure.
Even if the third period is not provided in this manner, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested depending on the type of background masking image displayed at the start of the special reach. For example, when a black background concealing image is displayed and when a white background concealing image is displayed, the white background concealing image is displayed to increase the expectation of a big win. You may

The degree of expectation for a big win may not be indicated depending on the rendering mode of the background masking image to be displayed. For example, the same background concealing image may be displayed even when a special reach with a different degree of expectation for a big hit is executed.
According to such a configuration, the player waits for the end of the display of the background concealing image while having a sense of anticipation as to what kind of special reach will occur. In addition, when the special reach is finished, the player can face the variable display of decorative symbols and the jackpot game from the next time onwards with a calm mind.

In the middle of the special ready-to-win effect, the content of the effect may be switched to a special ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation. Also at this time, the background concealed image may be displayed using any of the above-described modes. Further, at this time, as the special ready-to-win effect after switching, any one of a plurality of special ready-to-win background images having different degrees of expectation for big wins may be displayed.

Although the embodiment in which the background image is rendered invisible by the background concealing image has been described, the background image may be made invisible instead of invisible.
For example, even in the second period in which the visibility of the background image is most reduced due to the background concealing image, the background image does not become invisible, but the background image can be seen through the background concealing image. It may be configured as For example, when a black background concealing image is used, the background image is visible in the second period in an intermediate display state between the display state shown in FIG. 234(c) and the display state shown in FIG. 234(d). It may be configured as
Alternatively, the size of the background hiding image is not set to a size that can hide the entire background image, but a size that can hide most of the background image (at least 70% or more, preferably 90% or more). However, this background concealed image may be displayed in the second period.
Moreover, you may combine these aspects.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the switching of the background image.

As the background concealing image, the black background concealing image, the white background concealing image, the background concealing image composed of the bomb character, etc. are displayed, but these background concealing images may be displayed at the same time.
For example, the display area may be divided and a different background concealed image may be displayed for each divided area. For example, a black background concealing image may be displayed in the right half of the display area, and a white background concealing image may be displayed in the left half of the display area.
Further, a display priority may be given to the background concealed image so that the background concealed image is displayed in an overlapping manner.
For example, it is possible to display a background concealing image composed of a bomb character or the like and a black background concealing image, and the display priority of the background concealing image composed of the bomb character or the like is set higher than the display priority of the black background concealing image. good too. In this case, the area in which the background image is visually recognized narrows from the left and right due to the background concealing image made up of the bomb character or the like, and the visibility of the background image is reduced even within the area in which the background image is visually recognized. It will be visually recognized by the player in the mode of doing so. A white background concealing image may be displayed instead of the black background concealing image.
As for the display time (the length of the first period to the third period) of the plurality of background concealed images displayed in this manner, any one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 233 and its modification may be adopted. . Alternatively, a different display time (a different one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 233 and its modifications) may be employed for each background-concealed image.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the switching of the background image.

The background image itself is darkened at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a failing manner, and a background concealment image brighter than the background image (for example, a white background concealment image or a background concealment image made up of a bomb character, etc.) is displayed. ) to switch the background image.
As a result, the player can clearly see that the background concealing image is displayed, the player can recognize that the performance contents have been switched, and the player's feelings can be switched to the next pattern variation.

On the other hand, the background image itself may be darkened at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a failing manner, and the background image may be switched using a black background concealing image. In this case, since the visual difference between the background image and the background-concealed image is small, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the background image has been switched.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 240, display effects are executed using the display area, but in addition to these display effects, decorative members provided near the display area are used. These embodiments may be modified such that the renditions may be performed simultaneously.
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 241 and the like, a tank accessory 3770 that excites the special reach by emitting light or moving during the special reach will be described.

The tank accessory 3770 is a three-dimensional accessory imitating the shape of a tank when viewed from behind, and is provided on the game board 5 . The tank character 3770 is provided on the front side and lower part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. FIG. 241 shows the positional relationship between the display area and the tank character 3770 when viewed from the front.

The tank character 3770 has a tank character light-emitting part (not shown). The tank character light emitting part has a full-color LED, and can take a non-light emitting state and a light emitting state of a predetermined color. As a specific light emission mode, for example, it is possible to light or blink the tank object light emitting portion in white, green, red, and yellow.
In addition, the tank function 3770 has a function of moving vertically between a lower standby position and an upper movement position by driving a tank function driving mechanism (not shown). Moreover, it is possible to stop at any position between the standby position and the moving position.

FIG. 241(a) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is not emitting light and is positioned at the standby position.
FIG. 241(b) shows a state in which the tank character 3770 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is positioned at the standby position.
FIG. 241(c) shows a state in which the tank character 3770 is not emitting light and is positioned at the moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank character 3770 overlap and are visually recognized by the player.
FIG. 241(d) shows a state in which the tank character 3770 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is positioned at the movement position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank character 3770 overlap and are visually recognized by the player.

241(b) and 241(d), in the reserved image display area, the reserved image is displayed in red, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reserved image, not in white, which is the normal reserved image. It shows an example of In addition, it shows a state in which the tank character 3770 is positioned at the standby position or the moving position, and the tank character 3770 is illuminated in the same red color as the reserved image.
Although red is given as an example of the color of the reserved image, the color is not limited to red and may be green or gold.

The tank function 3770 may be configured to move from the standby position to the movement position when the special reach starts.

The light emission and movement of the tank accessory 3770 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of the special lottery.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 233(a) will be described below with reference to FIG. 242(a). In addition, aspects other than the tank character 3770 and the reserved image are basically the same presentation aspects as those of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.

FIG. 242(a) is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the tank character 3770 does not move from the standby position, but emits light in red, which is the same color as the reserved image, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. The timing of turning the pending image red may be the timing at which the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs and the pending image is displayed, or the timing at which the variable display is started (timing t0). , a predetermined timing during the variable display (for example, a predetermined timing in the period from timing t1 to timing t33).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a), the red pending image is displayed as the pending image until timing t45 at which the variable display ends and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for one second. Note that the reserved image is difficult or invisible during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42 when the background concealing image is displayed.
On the other hand, the tank character 3770 does not move and is positioned at the standby position during the period from timing t0 when the variable display is started to timing t45.
The tank function 3770 will emit light in red at the timing when the pending image is displayed in red (the timing of the starting prize as described above, the start timing of the variable display, the predetermined timing during the variable display, etc.). , red light emission continues until timing t45.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(b).
FIG. 242(b) is a time chart showing modification 01. FIG. In Modification 01, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t36 when the background concealing image A starts to be displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(c).
FIG. 242(c) is a time chart showing modification 02. FIG. In Modification 02, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t38, which is the timing at which the background hiding image C starts to be displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(d).
FIG. 242(d) is a time chart showing modification 03. FIG. In Modified Example 03, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t40, which is the timing at which the background concealing image C is finished being displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(e).
FIG. 242(e) is a time chart showing modification 04. FIG. In Modification 04, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t42, which is the timing at which the background concealing image A is finished being displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(f).
FIG. 242(f) is a time chart showing modification 05. FIG. In Modified Example 05, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t36, which is the timing at which the background concealing image A starts to be displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the red light emission state to the light off state.

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(g).
FIG. 242(g) is a time chart showing modification 06. FIG. In Modification 06, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t38, which is the timing at which the background hiding image C starts to be displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the red light emission state to the light off state.

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(h).
FIG. 242(h) is a time chart showing modification 07. FIG. In Modified Example 07, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing at which the display of the background hiding image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the red light emission state to the light off state.

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 242(a) is shown with reference to Figure 242(i).
FIG. 242(i) is a time chart showing modification 08. FIG. In Modified Example 08, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of the background concealing image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the red light emission state to the light off state.

Next, another modified example will be shown with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 243(a) is the same view as FIG. 242(a).

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(b).
FIG. 243(b) is a time chart showing Modification 09. FIG. In modification 09, the display mode of the pending image remains red until timing t45. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in luminance from timing t40 to timing t42, and returns to normal from timing t42 to timing t45. red light with a brightness of .

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(c).
FIG. 243(c) is a time chart showing the tenth modification. In modification 10, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t39, increases in luminance from timing t39 to timing t42, and emits red light from timing t42 to timing t45.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(d).
FIG. 243(d) is a time chart showing the eleventh modification. In Modified Example 11, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank function 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, and increases in luminance with white emission color from timing t40 to timing t42. White light is emitted from t42 to timing t45.

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(e).
FIG. 243(e) is a time chart showing modification 12. FIG. In modification 12, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, in the luminous mode of the tank character 3770, the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t39, the luminous color changes from red to white at timing t39, and the luminous color is white from timing t39 to timing t42. It rises and emits white light from timing t42 to timing t45.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(f).
FIG. 243(f) is a time chart showing the thirteenth modification. In modification 13, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the tank character 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t38, and is extinguished from timing t38 to timing t45.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(g).
FIG. 243(g) is a time chart showing the fourteenth modification. In Modified Example 14, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t39. On the other hand, the luminescence mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t39, and is extinguished from timing t39 to timing t45.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(h).
FIG. 243(h) is a time chart showing the fifteenth modification. In modification 15, the display mode of the pending image remains red until timing t45. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t38, and is extinguished from timing t39 to timing t45.

In these embodiments, the degree of expectation can be shown to the player by causing the light-emitting decorative member (the tank character 3770) to emit light in the same color as the reserved image.
In addition to the display of the background concealing image, it is possible to switch the display mode of the pending image or end the display of the pending image when switching the background image.
At this time, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting decorative member is gradually reduced as the visibility of the background image is lowered, or the light is emitted from the light-emitting decorative member as the visibility of the background image is increased. By gradually increasing the brightness of the light emitted from the luminous decorative member, it is possible to make the appearance of the luminous decorative member natural.

Although the display of the pending image is performed until timing t45, the display of the pending image may be terminated at timing t44, which is the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At the same time when the display of the reserved image ends, the luminescent color of the tank character 3770 may be changed from the luminescent color of the reserved image to white, which is the normal luminescent color.

In the fifteenth modification of FIG. 243, while the red pending image is displayed, the tank character 3770 is turned off at timing t38, but instead of being turned off, white light may be emitted.
In modifications 11 to 13 of FIG. 243, at timing t39, the red reserved image is changed to the white reserved image, or the reserved image is hidden. may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44 when the stop display of the decorative symbols is started, or timing t45 when the stop display of the decorative symbols is finished).

An embodiment in which the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 is made white or extinguished has been shown, but at the timing when the light emission form of the tank character 3770 is made white or extinguished, the light emission form of the tank character 3770 is changed to It may be modified so as to finish adjusting to the light emission mode of the pending display and start the state of emitting light as decoration. In this case, the degree of expectation may not be indicated by the lighting mode, or the lighting mode may be adapted to match the type of the normal background image being displayed.

An effect of changing the reserved image or the reserved image to the reserved image or the reserved image indicating that the degree of expectation is higher may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.
For example, at timing t25 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a), the pending image in red may be changed to the pending image in gold. This allows the player to know that the degree of expectation is higher.
In the first period to the third period in which the background concealing image is displayed, it is preferable not to change the reserved image or the reserved image to another display mode indicating a different degree of expectation.
According to such a configuration, the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is ensured at the timing when the degree of expectation changes, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the change in the display mode of the reserved image and the reserved image. .

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 242(a) will be described below with reference to FIG. 244(a). It should be noted that aspects other than the movement aspect of the tank accessory 3770 are basically the same presentation aspects as those of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment, the tank accessory 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position when the special reach is executed, and then moves from the moving position to the standby position.
As described above, FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b) show the state where the tank accessory 3770 is at the standby position. Also, FIGS. 241(c) and 241(d) show the state where the tank accessory 3770 is at the moving position.

The tank accessory 3770 in this embodiment is positioned at the standby position from timing t0 to timing t21. Thereafter, from timing t21 to timing t24, it moves upward from the standby position to the movement position. It is located at the movement position from timing t24 to timing t36. From timing t36 to timing t42, it moves downward from the movement position to the standby position. It is positioned at the standby position from timing t42 to timing t45. These movements of the tank component 3770 should be performed at a constant speed.

In addition, the tank character 3770 emits light in red at the timing when the pending image is displayed in red (the timing of the start winning as described above, the start timing of the variable display, etc.), and the red light until timing t45. continues to emit light.
Thus, in this embodiment, the downward movement of the tank object 3770 is started at the same time as the background concealing image is displayed, and the tank object 3770 is moved downward at the same time as the background concealing image is displayed. End downward movement.

It should be noted that, depending on whether the tank accessory 3770 moves upward or not, it is preferable to configure the game so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the tank accessory 3770 moves.

According to such a configuration, the movement of moving the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) from the moving position to the standby position can be made inconspicuous. Therefore, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the joy of the player who is happy with the occurrence of the big win. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who lost the game to feel regret that the result was a loss despite having high expectations.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 244(a), the tank component 3770 was moved downward during the period from timing t36 to timing t42. A modified embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 244(b).

Modification 01 is an example in which the tank component 3770 is moved from the movement position to the standby position from timing t34 to timing t36.
Similarly, in Modifications 02 to 14, the tank character 3770 moves from the moving position to the standby position at the respective timings shown in FIG. 244(b).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 244(a) and 244(b), the period before the visibility of the background image decreases, the period during which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period). , the period in which the background image is invisible (second period), the period in which the background image gradually becomes visible (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period). Although the movement of the tank character 3770 is started and ended at the same time as the movement of the tank character 3770, the movement of the tank character 3770 may be started or terminated in the middle of a certain period of time. The downward movement of the tank accessory 3770 may be terminated in the middle of the period.
For example, the downward movement may be started at timing t37 in the middle of the first period, and the downward movement may end at timing t39 in the middle of the second period. Further, for example, the downward movement may be started and the downward movement may be ended within the second period.

In this way, by moving the movable decorative member (tank role object 3770) from the moving position to the standby position near the timing when the background concealing image is displayed and the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered, the movable decorative member is displayed. The action of returning to the standby position can be made inconspicuous.

244(a) and 244(b), and FIGS. 242(a)-242(i) and 243(a)-FIG. 243(h) may be combined with each embodiment of the display mode of the reserved image and the light emission mode of the tank character 3770. FIG.
For example, each embodiment described in FIG. 244 is combined with each embodiment described in FIG. 242 or FIG. A pending image may be displayed.
Alternatively, at the timing when the period when the tank character 3770 shown in FIG. may start.
242 and 243. Alternatively, the change of the light emission mode and the pending image shown in FIGS. 242 and 243 may be started at the timing just in the middle of the period in which the tank character 3770 shown in FIG. 244 moves downward.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the luminescence mode of the tank accessory 3770 more conspicuous or less conspicuous.
Even if the background concealing image is displayed in the display area and the visibility of the display area is reduced, the light emission of the movable decorative member (tank role object 3770) can prevent a big hit or a loss at any level of expectation. The player can know what the result was.
Alternatively, the movement of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) is turned off to make the movement of the movable decorative member inconspicuous by turning off the light of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) as the background concealing image is displayed in the display region and the visibility of the display region is lowered. can be done.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236, the embodiment in which the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern is lowered at the same time was shown. , with reference to FIG.

It should be noted that FIG. 245(a) shows basically the same production mode as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. Therefore, description of these will be omitted.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 245(a), during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42, the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually decreases, and the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually decreases. The decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually increases.

FIG. 245(b) shows an embodiment in which the embodiment shown in FIG. 245(a) is modified so that the visibility of the background image and the visibility of the decorative pattern may not match.

In the modified example 01, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t14 to timing t15, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t15 to timing t17, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t17 to timing t18.
In addition, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t37 to timing t38, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t38 to timing t40, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t40 to timing t41.

Similarly, in the modified examples 02 to 08, the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered, the decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the decorative pattern is increased at the respective timings shown in FIG. 245(b).

FIG. 246 shows a display example corresponding to modification 03 of FIG. 245(b). Also, FIGS. 246(a) to 246(h) show display states corresponding to the respective display states shown with reference to FIGS. 236(a) to 236(h).
FIG. 246(b) shows a display example from timing t37 to timing t38 in modification 03 of FIG. 245(b). This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is lowered, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is not lowered. In order not to lower the visibility of the decorative pattern, the display priority of the decorative pattern should be temporarily higher than the display priority of the background masking image.
FIG. 246(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t43. This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is not lowered, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered. In order to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern when the background concealing image is not displayed, it is preferable to display a semi-transparent black image in front of the decorative pattern.
For FIGS. 246(a), 246(c) to 246(f) and 246(h), see FIGS. 236(a), 236(c) to 236(f) and 236(h). Since it is the same as the embodiment shown with reference, the description is omitted.

In addition, the embodiment shown in FIG. 245 (a), the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the special reach of each modification shown in FIG. 245 (b), the embodiment shown in FIG. It may be appropriately combined with the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern at the end of the special reach in each modification shown in (b). For example, at the start of the special reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed in the form of the modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed in the form of the modified example 02.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch the background image according to the content of the presentation.

An embodiment in which a black background concealing image is displayed has been shown with reference to FIG. may

According to the embodiments of Modification 01, Modification 02, Modification 03, Modification 04, and Modification 06, when the background image is switched, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized for a longer period of time, and the game content can be changed by the player. You can prevent misunderstandings.
According to the embodiments of Modification 03, Modification 05, Modification 06, Modification 07, and Modification 08, when the background image is switched, the time during which the decorative pattern is difficult to see can be lengthened. As a result, at the start of the special ready-to-win, the player's attention can be directed to the display contents other than the decorative symbols, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, when the special reach ends, the decoration pattern is displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss or a big hit, but in the case of a reach loss, the player can be relieved of his disappointment. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to increase interest by teasing the player.

During the special reach, a special decorative pattern with a design different from that of normal decorative patterns is displayed. Specifically, the normal decoration pattern with a large size character shown in FIG. 225(a) is displayed during normal reach, and the small size character shown in FIG. A special reach decoration pattern that has not been displayed is displayed. Although the designs of the decorative patterns are different, the numbers indicated by the decorative patterns are the same before and after the background concealing image is displayed.
At the end of the special reach, the special reach decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the first period, the special reach decoration pattern is changed to the normal decoration pattern in the second period, and the normal decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the third period. displayed in the state of
At the time of temporary stop display, the displayed decorative pattern is not changed to another decorative pattern with a different number, and the decorative pattern is displayed in such a manner that it oscillates periodically, but it fluctuates between the first period and the third period. The aspects may be the same or different. For example, the mode of temporary stop display of the decorative symbols in the first period and the third period is one of the modes of swinging in the vertical direction, the mode of swinging in the horizontal direction, and the mode of swinging by rotating about the vertical direction. may be adopted.
Further, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period and the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period may be the same. For example, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period and the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period may be longer than the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period. For example, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period may be set to 2 seconds, and the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period may be shorter than the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period. For example, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period may be set to 1 second, and the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to 2 seconds.

In this way, by differentiating the display mode at the time of temporary stop between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern, the player can easily recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern.

The swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. Similarly, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when each of the first period and the third period is two seconds, the swing period of the decorative symbols in the first period and the swing period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to one second.
Alternatively, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when each of the first period and the third period is 2 seconds, the swing period of the decorative design in the first period may be set to 3 seconds, and the swing period of the decorative design in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing cycle of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when each of the first period and the third period is 2 seconds, the swing period of the decorative design in the first period may be set to 1 second, and the swing period of the decorative design in the third period may be set to 3 seconds.
Alternatively, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. Similarly, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when each of the first period and the third period is two seconds, the swing period of the decorative symbols in the first period and the swing period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to three seconds.

In this way, by differentiating the display mode at the time of temporary stop between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern, the player can easily recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a), the length of the third period, which is a period in which the background image gradually becomes more visible, is set to 2 seconds, and Although the length of the fourth period, which is a period, is set to 2 seconds, the variation of the decorative design may be stopped at the end timing of the third period without providing the fourth period. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 233(a), the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at timing t42 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modification 01 shown in FIG. 233(b), the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at the timing t43 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modification 02 to the modification 12, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the third period ends.
Note that the fourth period may be shorter than the third period. For example, if the third period is two seconds, the fourth period may be less than two seconds.

According to such a configuration, after the end of the third period, it is possible to promptly perform a definitive display of the decorative pattern.

With reference to FIG. 233(a), in the embodiment, at timing t44 when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the display of the pending image ends, but the dynamic display of erasing the pending image is stopped for a short period of time from timing t44. You can go in between.
At this time, instead of simply ending the display of the reserved image, after displaying a concealing image that hides at least a part of the reserved image in front of the reserved image at the same time as the stationary display of the decorative pattern, 0.3 ~ The display of the pending image and the concealed image may be ended after 0.5 seconds have elapsed.
Alternatively, the reserved image itself may be similarly dynamically erased and displayed. For example, the size of the reserved image may be gradually reduced, and after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds have passed, the size of the reserved image may be set to 0, and the display of the reserved image may be terminated.

According to such a configuration, the player can accept the result of the special lottery without adhering to the degree of expectation shown during the variable display.
Also, the display of the pending image can be terminated in a natural manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t34 indicate whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a big hit. 247 to 251 for an embodiment in which the form is changed so that after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the failure, the decorative symbols may change to the display mode indicating the big win. It is explained below. In addition, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the decorative symbols do not change to the display mode indicating the loss.

In this embodiment, at the timing t34 during the special reach, after the special reach decorative symbols on the left, middle and right are temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, "232") indicating a loss, the resurrection effect after the temporary stop loss is executed. After the execution of the resurrection effect after the temporary stop loss, the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the loss, and the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit. There are cases.

247 to 249 are time charts showing examples of effects in this embodiment. 250 and 251 are diagrams showing display examples in this embodiment.
Note that the effect modes other than the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure are basically the same as those in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.

Figures 247(b), 248(b), and 249(b) show the variable display time of decorative symbols when the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure and the decoration when the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure is successful. It shows the fluctuation display time of the pattern.
FIGS. 247(c) to 247(g), FIGS. 248(c) to 248(f), and FIGS. 249(c) to 249(h) are display areas when the resurrection effect after a temporary stop failure is unsuccessful. and an example of the effect in the display area when the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is successful.
FIG. 250 shows a display example in the display area when the revival effect after temporary stop failure is unsuccessful, and FIG. 251 shows a display example in the display area when the revival effect after temporary stop failure is successful.

Of these production examples, the recovery production after temporary stop failure will be described with reference to the time chart (modification 06) shown in FIG. 248(d) and the display examples shown in FIGS.

In the modification 06, at the timing t34, the decoration pattern at the time of reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure. Fig. 250(a) and Fig. 251(a) show a state in which a temporary stop display is performed in a state in which decorative symbols at reach are lost.
Next, from timing t36 to timing t37, a bomb character and a line image saying "There is still a chance!" are displayed in the upper right of the display area. 250(b) and 251(b) show the display state during the period from timing t36 to timing t37. 250(c) and 251(c) show the display state during the period from timing t37 to timing t38.
Next, from timing t38 to timing t39, the bomb character and the dialogue image move from the upper right of the display area to the lower center of the display area.
From timing t39 to timing t40, along with the bomb character, there is an image of the words "I can't help it..." indicating that the resurrection effect after the failure of the temporary stop failed, or the image of the success of the resurrection effect after the failure of the temporary stop. One of the dialogue images "Premonition of Victory!" is displayed. FIG. 250(d) shows a display example when the recovery effect after temporary stop failure is unsuccessful, and FIG. 251(d) shows a display example when the recovery effect after temporary stop loss is successful.

When the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure fails, the bomb character and dialogue image are not displayed at timing t40, and the same display as when the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure is not performed is performed from timing t40 to timing t45. will be
FIG. 250(e) shows a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, FIG. 250(f) shows a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, and FIG. 250(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t44. 250(h) show display examples from timing t44 to timing t45, respectively.

When the resurrection effect after the temporary stop loss is successful, at timing t40, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a grid stop mode indicating a big win, and at timing t49, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped, and timing is reached. The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed from t49 to timing t50. Also, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image continues from timing t40 to timing t50. In other words, the variable display time of the decorative symbols when the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is successful is longer than the variable display time of the decorative symbols when the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is unsuccessful.

FIG. 251(e) shows a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, FIG. 251(f) shows a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, and FIG. 251(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t49. 251(h) show display examples from timing t49 to timing t50, respectively. As is clear from the figure, when the resurrection effect after a temporary stop failure is successful (when the special lottery result is a big hit), the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image continues until the decorative pattern is stopped.

Modification 06 has been described as a representative example, but in other modifications, the timing at which the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is started, the number of seconds the bomb character is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and the movement of the bomb character are determined. Although the timing at which failure or success is displayed and the time during which the resurrection effect is successful and the bomb character is displayed at the bottom center of the display area are different, in other aspects, the same display as in modification 06 is performed. .
For example, in the embodiment and modified examples 01 to 04 shown in FIGS. The timing at which the display of the dialog image indicating the result is started is timing t37 in modification 01, timing t39 in modification 02, timing t41 in modification 03, and timing t43 in modification 04.
Similarly, FIG. 248 shows a modified example in which display of the bomb character is started at timing t36, and FIG. 249 shows a modified example in which display of the bomb character is started at timings t38, t40, and t42. .

In addition, when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is successful, at the timing when the dialogue image "Premonition of victory!" It is preferable to change the display mode to that shown. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to indicate a big win at a timing after a predetermined number of seconds (for example, one second) have elapsed from the timing at which the line image "Premonition of Victory!" was displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251, the period until the visibility of the background image starts to decrease after the temporary stop in the mode indicating the failure of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the background image is gradually difficult to see (first period), the background image is invisible (second period), the background image is gradually easy to see (third period), and the background image visibility is At the same time as the period after returning to the original state (fourth period), the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image is started, the display of the dialogue image is started during these periods, and the dialogue is started at the end of these periods. In the past, an image was used to notify whether or not the game was a big hit (when the resurrection effect failed). At the same time as the end of the period, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started, or in the middle of a certain period, the dialogue image may be used to notify whether or not the player has won a big hit.
For example, at timing t37, which is in the middle of the first period, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started, and at timing t38, which is the start timing of the second period, the dialogue image may be used to notify whether or not there is a big hit. . Further, for example, the start of display of the bomb character, the movement of the bomb character, and the display of a dialogue image to inform whether or not the game is a big hit may be performed within the second period.

The display priority of the bomb character and the dialogue image is higher than the display priority of the background concealing image. On the other hand, the display priority of the bomb character and the dialogue image is lower than the display priority of the fourth pattern and the pending number display image.

When the result of the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure is failure, the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure may be executed again. For example, if the execution mode shown in FIG. 247(c) fails, any of the modes shown in FIGS. 248(c) to 248(f) and FIGS. The resurrection effect may be executed again. Similarly, even if the mode shown in FIG. 248(c) fails, the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure may be executed again in the modes shown in FIGS. 249(c) to 249(h).
In this way, after the result of failure is once displayed in the resurrection performance after temporary stop failure, the resurrection performance after temporary stop failure is finally successful, and the player is shown that the result of the special lottery is a win. As in some cases, the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure may be configured to be executable a plurality of times.

In this way, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure, after that, when the background image is switched, the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is executed, resulting in a big win. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for a big hit until the final stage.
In particular, since the background masking image is displayed, the display contents in the display area are simple, so in this state, the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is executed, or the result of the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is successful. By being notified of the occurrence of a big hit, the player can be made to feel great surprise and joy.

In the period (first period) in which the visibility of the special ready-to-reach background image gradually decreases, if the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is performed, it is regrettable that the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating the failure. It is possible to inflame the expectation of a big hit without sustaining the feeling.
In the period when the special reach background image is invisible (second period), if the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is performed, the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is performed because the visibility of the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is high. The player can easily notice that the game has been done, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the fact that the resurrection presentation is being executed after a temporary stop failure.
In the period (third period) when the normal background image is gradually easier to see and the period (fourth period) when the normal background image is easier to see, when the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is performed, the normal background image is visible. The result of the special lottery may make the player think that the result is a loss, and the player may get a big win, which can excite the player.
These effects can be made more effective by lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods as shown in FIG. 233(b).
By lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods, the resurrection effect after a temporary stop failure may be executed a plurality of times in a certain period.

247 to 251, the embodiment of the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure has been shown, but it may be combined with other embodiments described above.

224 to 251, an embodiment and a modification of the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect have been shown, but other embodiments described in this specification (for example, a "giant tank reach" to be described later) Effect) may be applied to the embodiment of the ``enemy tank destruction reach'' effect or its modification.

Embodiments modified from the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 236 and the like will be described below. In the special ready-to-reach effect of the present embodiment, the special ready-to-reach background image A is displayed instead of the special ready-to-reach background image B. Also, instead of the attack button 3710, operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled. Further, the display of the pending image is not performed during the period in which the special reach background image is displayed.
FIG. 252(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect from timing t10 to timing t45 in this embodiment. In addition, except for the display mode of the pending image and the pending image and the effect mode during special reach (background image, enemy tank mode, etc.), basically the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 233 (a) etc. Since the presentation modes are the same, a description of these will be omitted.

FIG. 253 shows a display example at the start of the “giant tank reach” effect. The display examples shown in FIGS. 253(a) to 253(g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 234(a) to 234(g), respectively. This is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 234(g).
FIG. 254 shows an example of display at the end of the “Giant Tank Reach” (at the time of the big win). The display examples shown in FIGS. 254(a) to 254(g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 235(a) to 235(g), respectively. This is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 235(g).
FIG. 255 shows a display example at the end of the “Giant Tank Reach” (at the time of losing). The display examples shown in FIGS. 255(a) to 255(g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 236(a) to 236(g), respectively. This is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 236(g).

As shown in FIGS. 252 to 255, in the "giant tank reach" in this embodiment, the displayed image of the enemy tank is different from that in the "enemy tank destruction reach". Also, a special reach background image A is displayed as a background image. Also, the operation of the mission button 3700 instead of the attack button 3710 is valid. In addition, the pending image and the pending image are not displayed during "Giant Tank Reach".

"Giant Tank Reach" in this embodiment has a higher expectation of a big hit when the Reach effect is executed than "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to FIGS. For example, the expectation level for "enemy tank destruction reach" is 10%, and the expectation level for "giant tank reach" is 50%.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, the pending image and the pending image are not displayed during the “giant tank reach”, but the pending image is displayed and the pending image is not displayed. can be
With such a configuration, the player can recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the pending image even during the "giant tank reach". Also, during the execution of "Giant Tank Reach", which has a very high expectation, the player basically does not consider increasing the number of holds or the expectation of the change display that will be performed after the current change display ( For example, even if a green pending image is displayed in the third pending display area, the player cares more about the result of "Giant Tank Reach"). Therefore, by not displaying the pending image, the display contents of the display area can be simplified, and the player can concentrate on the "giant tank reach".

With reference to FIGS. 233 and 252, an example is shown in which the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach" are performed at the same timing, but when the "giant tank reach" occurs, The time during which the background image is normally displayed may be lengthened compared to the case where "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" occurs. For example, the time during which the normal background image is displayed is extended by 5 seconds, and at timing t15, the reach state occurs, and at timing t21, the normal background image A is switched to the special reach background image A, and the "giant tank reach" is displayed. may be started.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233 and 252, the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach" have the same reach effect execution length, but the reach effect is executed. Different lengths may be used. For example, "Giant Tank Reach" may take longer than "Enemy Tank Destroy Reach", and "Giant Tank Reach" may take less time than "Enemy Tank Destroy Reach". may terminate.

If the pending image (for example, the red pending image or the gold pending image) is displayed that indicates that the level of expectation is higher than the predetermined level, even if the "giant tank reach" always occurs. good. On the other hand, if the pending image (for example, the pending image in white or the pending image in green) indicating that the degree of expectation is less than the predetermined level is displayed, a “giant tank reach” occurs, and the “enemy It is preferable to set the effect mode to either that "Tank Destruction Reach" is generated or that none of Reach is generated.

In "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", it was indicated that black background concealment images, white background concealment images, or background concealment images consisting of bomb characters, etc., could be used. , a black background concealing image, a white background concealing image, or a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like.
For example, a background masking image made up of a bomb character or the like may be used in the "huge tank reach", and a black background masking image may be used in the "enemy tank destroying reach", so that the background masking images are different. Alternatively, the same background concealment image (for example, both black background concealment images) may be used in the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach".

FIGS. 252(b) and 252(c) show a first period during which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see, a second period during which the background image becomes unrecognizable, and a background image which gradually becomes less visible. The embodiment shown in FIG. 252(a) is modified so that the length of the third period (specifically, 2 seconds), which is the period in which it becomes easier, is not the same but different. A plurality of embodiments (Variation 01 to Variation 12) are shown. Note that these embodiments may also have the same effect as the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 233(b) and 233(c).

Thus, in the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank ready-to-win”), the pending image is not displayed while the special ready-to-reach background image is being displayed. On the other hand, in the second ready-to-reach production (“enemy tank destroying ready-to-reach”), a suspended image is displayed while the special ready-to-reach background image is being displayed. In this way, by providing a case where the pending image is not displayed and a case where it is displayed according to the type of reach, display contents can be diversified.
For example, by not displaying the pending image, the player's attention can be focused on the effect using the tank. On the other hand, by displaying the pending image, the player can decide whether to operate the handle 302 or not. In addition, when the pending image is displayed, the player can know the degree of expectation of the big win.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 252(a) and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 252(b) and 252(c) may be adopted as the viewing mode of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach". . The contents shown in the time chart are the same as those shown with reference to FIG. 233 except for some.
In addition, as the viewing mode of the background image in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", the embodiment shown in Fig. 233(a), and the modified embodiments shown in Figs. good too.
In addition, the "Giant Tank Reach" employing any of the embodiments and modifications shown in FIG. 252 and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" adopting any of the embodiments and modifications shown in FIG. 233 are executed. It may be configured to
For example, the modification 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) may be adopted in the "giant tank reach", and the modification 02 shown in FIG. 233(b) may be adopted in the "enemy tank destruction reach".

The embodiment and modification shown with reference to FIG. 252 can also achieve the same effect as the embodiment and modification shown with reference to FIG.

As in Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modified Example 02 shown in FIG. The third period (3 seconds) is longer than the third period (1 second) during which a black background concealing image is used in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which is different from "Giant Tank Reach". You may
According to such a configuration, the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is more likely to be displayed at the end of the ready-to-reach effect than the second ready-to-reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). The held image that was not displayed slowly appears.

As in Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. The third period (3 seconds) is the same length as the third period (3 seconds) during which the display adopting a black background concealing image different from that of "Giant Tank Reach" is performed in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". May be.
According to such a configuration, display processing can be simplified.

As in Modified Example 02 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. The third period (1 second) is shorter than the third period (3 seconds) during which a black background concealing image is used in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which is different from "Giant Tank Reach". You may
According to such a configuration, the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is more likely to be displayed at the end of the ready-to-reach effect than the second ready-to-reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). A retained image that was not present rapidly becomes visible in a short period of time.

When switching the background image at the end of the 1st Reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), the background image changes more gradually than when switching the background image at the end of the 2nd Reach effect ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach"). By lengthening the third period, which is a period in which the images are easily visually recognized, the player's eyes are drawn to the reserved image displayed for the first time in a long time, and the player's awareness of the reserved number can be heightened. This allows the player to determine whether or not to shoot the game ball.
In particular, in the first ready-to-win effect, the time elapsed after the start of the variable display is longer and the expectation of a big hit is higher, so the player tends to lose awareness of the number of reservations. By adopting such a display method, it is possible to regain awareness of the number of holds, and to raise awareness of the shooting of the game balls that were suspended during the ready-to-win production.

As in Modified Example 02 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (three seconds) after the end of the third period, the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' is displayed with a black background hidden image that is different from the ``Giant Tank Reach''. may be longer than the fourth period (1 second) after the period of .
According to such a configuration, the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is more likely to be invisible or visible at the end of the reach effect than the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). Since the hard-to-see pending image is displayed in a clear state for a relatively long period of time, the player can remember to shoot the game ball. In addition, there is a possibility that the result of the special lottery will be lost and some players will be shocked, but it is necessary to secure the time for the players to change their minds to the variable display of the decorative patterns from the next time onwards. can be done.

As in Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the 3rd period, the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' will be displayed with a black background hidden image that is different from the ``Giant Tank Reach''. may be the same length as the fourth period (1 second) after the period of .
According to such a configuration, display processing can be simplified.

As in Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modified Example 02 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the 3rd period, the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' will be displayed with a black background hidden image that is different from the ``Giant Tank Reach''. may be shorter than the fourth period (3 seconds) after the period of .
According to such a configuration, the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is more effective than the second ready-to-reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”) when the ready-to-reach effect ends. can be shortened.

As a method for making the length of the fourth period different or the same between the "huge tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiments shown in FIGS. Alternatively, in the modification, the timing at which the decorative symbols stop changing can be changed from timing t44 to timing t43 or timing t45.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. For example, in the period from timing t10 to timing t44, it is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative pattern higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.
With such a configuration, a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period), a period in which the background image becomes invisible (second period), and a period in which the background image gradually becomes easy to see ( 3rd period), the decorative pattern is always visible.
It should be noted that it is preferable to switch between the ready-to-win decoration pattern and the normal decoration pattern at an appropriate timing such as the start of the next variable display.
In this way, in the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), the decorative pattern is made invisible in the second period, and in the second reach effect ("Enemy tank destruction reach"), the decorative pattern is visible in the second period. It may be possible.

In the first Reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), which has relatively high expectations, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a failed manner, the decorative pattern will not be visible in the second period. It is possible to soften the shock felt by the player as a result of losing.
On the other hand, in the second ready-to-reach production (“Enemy Tank Destruction Reach”), which has a relatively low degree of expectation, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a failed manner, and the decorative pattern is visible during the second period. However, the player does not feel such a shock. Rather, since the decorative patterns are continuously visible, the player can smoothly switch to the next decorative pattern, and the player can change the decorative pattern smoothly. Do not disturb the tempo of fluctuation.

During the third period during which the "Giant Tank Reach" is displayed with a hidden background image consisting of, for example, a bomb character, the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" has a black background hidden image different from the "Giant Tank Reach". In the third period in which the display adopting the Other modes may be employed as the stop display mode.
For example, within the third period, the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed at the same position may be slightly changed. Alternatively, during the third period, the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed by changing the position may be the same size. Alternatively, during the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed and the size of the normal decorative pattern may be changed smaller.
Strictly speaking, the "same position" may mean the average position of the normal decorative patterns that are displayed while fluctuating at a predetermined cycle.

After the reach effect for both "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends (the end of the special Reach background image for each reach), the same normal decoration pattern will be displayed as a decoration pattern from the third period. . In addition, the temporary stop position of the normal decorative pattern is also the same. In addition, during the third period of "Gigantic Tank Reach", a background masking image consisting of bomb characters etc. is displayed, and the third period of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is a black color different from "Giant Tank Reach". is displayed using a background masking image.
With such a configuration, after the end of the first reach and the second reach, which differ in the content of the effect display and the degree of expectation, since the normal decorative pattern is visually recognized by the player in the same effect mode, the player's intention can be directed to subsequent changes.

With reference to FIG. 238, an example of displaying the band-shaped prefetch effect image when "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is executed has been shown. An image may be displayed.
Also, the display mode of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image when the background concealing image is displayed in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238 can be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image in "Giant Tank Reach". . For example, the display priority is set higher than that of the background concealed image so that the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is not affected even in the first period to the third period, or the display priority is set lower than that of the background concealed image. The visibility of the strip-like prefetch effect image may be lowered in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and improved in the third period. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is stopped during the display of the background concealing image (the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is reduced in the first period, the visibility is made invisible in the second period, and the third and fourth be invisible even for a period of time).

As a display mode of the strip-like prefetch effect image, the display priority is higher than that of the background concealing image so that the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image is not affected even in the first period to the third period, and the background concealing image. A mode in which the display priority is lowered to lower the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image in the first period, make it invisible in the second period, and improve the visibility in the third period. , The display of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image is stopped during the display of the background concealing image (The visibility of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image decreases in the first period, becomes invisible in the second period, and becomes invisible in the third and fourth periods However, as the display mode of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image in "Giant Tank Reach", any one of these display modes is adopted, Any one of these display modes may be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

By adopting the same display mode as the display mode of the look-ahead effect image even for different types of ready-to-win games, the effect processing can be shared, and the display process and development man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, by adopting different display modes as the display mode of the prefetch effect image depending on the type of reach, the effect mode can be diversified.

241 to 244, in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", an embodiment and a modification thereof are shown in which a tank role object 3770 emits light in a predetermined emission color or moves between a standby position and a moving position. However, in the "Giant Tank Reach", the embodiment and its modifications of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" are adopted to make the tank function 3770 emit light in a predetermined luminous color, or to distinguish between the standby position and the moving position. You may make it move between.
That is, any one of the light emission modes shown in FIGS. 242 and 243 may be employed as the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 in the “Giant Tank Reach”. Similarly, any one of the operation modes shown in FIG. 244 may be adopted as the operation mode of the tank component 3770 .

Even with different types of reach in this way, by adopting the same mode as the light emission mode and movement mode of the movable decorative member (tank role 3770), the production process can be shared, and the display process and development can be performed. Man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, it is possible to diversify the production mode by adopting different modes as the light emission mode and the movement mode of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) depending on the type of reach.

Although the tank accessory 3770 is shown as an example of the movable decorative member, one or more other movable decorative members having similar functions may be provided on the game board 5 . For example, a total of three movable decorative members may be provided, with standby positions above, right, and left of the display area, and movement positions near the center of the display area. When a plurality of movable decorative members are provided, they may emit light or move at the same timing as the tank character 3770 , or may emit light or move at a different timing from the tank character 3770 . In other words, other movable decorative members can employ any of the light emission modes and operation modes shown in FIGS. 242-244.
In addition, the luminous mode and the movement mode of the other movable decorative members may be different between the ``gigantic tank reach'' and the ``enemy tank destruction reach''. 242 to 244 can be adopted.

Although the tank accessory 3770 is shown as an example of a decorative member capable of emitting light, the door frame 3 or the game board 5 may be provided with a decorative member capable of emitting light. The decoration means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc.) and the decoration members provided on the game board 5 may emit light at the same timing as the tank accessory 3770. However, the light may be emitted at a timing different from that of the tank character 3770 . 242 to 244, any of the light emitting modes shown in FIGS. 242 to 244 can be adopted for the light emitting decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the light emitting decorative members provided on the game board 5. FIG.
In addition, the luminous mode of the decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative member provided on the game board 5 may be different between the ``reach the giant tank'' and the ``reach to destroy the enemy tank''. Any one of the lighting modes shown in FIGS. 242 to 244 can be adopted for "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

With reference to FIGS. 242 and 243, in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", an embodiment and a modified example of the display mode of the pending image are shown. , or any one of the display modes of the reserved image in the embodiment or the modification thereof may be adopted to display the reserved image.

For example, the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 242(b) may be adopted in the “giant tank reach”, and the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a) may be adopted in the “enemy tank destruction reach”.
In such a relatively high expectation "Giant Tank Reach", when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been lost, the pending image is quickly returned to the normal mode, and the high expectation It is possible to soften the shock of the player who has lost as a result even though it was supposed to be.
On the other hand, in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which has relatively low expectations, even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been lost, the pending image is displayed in red, so that what kind of expectation It is possible to impress the player whether or not the variable display was performed under the above, and it can be used as a reference when the same effect situation occurs in the variable display after the next time.

Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a) may be adopted in the "giant tank reach", and the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 242(b) may be adopted in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
In such a relatively high expectation "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is lost, the pending image will be displayed in red, It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the fact that the result of the special lottery resulted in a loss in spite of high expectations, and to stimulate the player's feelings toward the next and subsequent variable displays.
On the other hand, in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which has a relatively low level of expectation, when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been lost, the pending image is quickly returned to the normal mode. It is possible to smoothly switch the player's feelings from the ready-to-win performance, in which the degree of expectation is low and the result of the big hit is difficult to be achieved, to the next variable display.

Regarding the display mode of the pending image, the priority of such effects should be taken into consideration when deciding which embodiment or variation to adopt, the embodiment of "Giant Tank Reach" or the embodiment of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". It is recommended to use them in combination as appropriate.

The degree of expectation for a big hit of "Giant Tank Reach" in this embodiment may be lower than that of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236 and the like.

Not limited to the example described above, a modified example applied to the embodiment of the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. It may be applied to such an embodiment to form a new embodiment.

Thus, in the third period of the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank ready-to-reach”), a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special display A”) is performed.
Also, during the third period of the second ready-to-reach effect (“enemy tank destroying ready-to-reach”), a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special display B”) is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, when a big hit occurs in the normal state, the subsequent game state is a time-saving state, a non-time-saving variable state, and a time-saving state that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. It may become a probability variable state (probability variable time reduction state). The advantageous state shown below refers to the time-saving state and the variable time-saving state among the states.
In addition, as shown with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143, when "loss with time saving" occurs as a special lottery result, or when the special lottery result of losing occurs a predetermined number of times continuously, the time saving state It is good also as a structure which generates.
In an advantageous state, the player rotates the handle 302 greatly to hit the game ball toward the right side of the game area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right hit"), and hits the game ball on the right side of the game area. A game ball is made to enter the provided starting port (for example, the second starting port 2004).
In addition, when a big win occurs in an advantageous state and the advantageous state continues after that, the number of balls produced by the big win or the small win during that time is added and stored in the peripheral control board 1510.例文帳に追加
Further, in an advantageous state, a normal background image C is displayed instead of the normal background images A and B, which indicates that the player is in an advantageous state.
Such favorable conditions end when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, after the start of an advantageous state, the result of losing a predetermined number of times is continuously displayed without the decorative pattern becoming a big hit (the special lottery result is a result of losing a predetermined number of times in a row). ) is the condition. For example, in the probability variable time saving state, the probability variable time saving state ends when the loss continues 100 times. It should be noted that the time saving state may also end when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of failures continue. In addition, in the so-called falling type that draws a lottery whether to end the variable probability time saving state at the start of the fluctuation of each game, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the lottery to end is won.
In this way, the advantageous state ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (during the 100th change, during the change in which the falling lottery is won in the falling type), the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A or the normal background image B, and during the big hit or advantageous state, The total number of game balls paid out is displayed.

FIG. 256 shows an image displayed at the end of hitting to the right. FIG. 256(a) shows the background concealed image A at the end of right-hand hitting, FIG. 256(b) shows the background concealed image B at the end of right-hand hitting, and FIG. 256(c) shows the background concealed image C at the end of right-hand hitting. . These images are based on the sunglasses worn by the bomb character.
FIG. 256(d) shows a game result image indicating that the "Dynamite Time", which is a right-handed state, has ended, the number of consecutive wins (13 times), and the number of game balls paid out to the player (14125 balls). ing.

The effect mode at the end of hitting to the right will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG.
In FIG. 257(a), from timing t0 to timing t7, the 99th variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the probability variable time-saving state, which is an advantageous state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed during the probability variable time saving state is a decorative pattern during right hitting.
After that, from timing t8 to timing t24, the 100th variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the probability variable time saving state. Note that this time chart shows an effect example in which the result of the 100th variable display of decorative symbols is a loss.
FIG. 259(a) shows a display example during the period from timing t14 to timing t16. The normal background image C shows a display state in which the right-handed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped on the near side.

From timing t16 to timing t17, the background concealing image A at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 259(b) shows a state in which the background concealed image A is displayed at the end of hitting to the right.
From timing t17 to timing t18, the background concealing image B at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 259(c) shows a state in which the background concealed image B at the end of hitting to the right is displayed.
From timing t18 to timing t20, the background concealing image C at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 259(d) shows a state in which the background concealed image C at the end of hitting to the right is displayed.

From timing t18 to timing t20, a game result image showing the game results during right-handed hitting, such as "Dynamite Time Ended", "13 Defeated", and "14125 Acquired", is displayed. In addition, it is shown that the probability variable time saving state is ended by the display of "dynamite time end". In addition, the display of "destroy 13 bodies" indicates that the number of times of consecutive chances was 13 times. In addition, the display of "14125 acquired" informs the player that the number of game balls paid out by winning the game balls in the big winning opening 2005 during right-handed hitting is 14125 balls.
Further, the background image is switched from the normal background image C to the normal background image A at the timing t19 during the second period in which the background concealing image C at the end of the right stroke is displayed and the background image is invisible. Note that the switching may be performed at timing t18 or timing t20.

From timing t20 to timing t21, the background concealing image B at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 259(e) shows a state in which the background concealed image B is displayed at the end of hitting to the right. At this time, the background image is changed to the normal background image A. FIG. Also, the decorative pattern is changed to a normal decorative pattern.
From timing t21 to timing t22, the background concealing image A at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 259(f) shows a state in which the background concealed image A is displayed at the end of hitting to the right.
From timing t22 to timing t24, the normal decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 259(g) shows a state in which the background concealed image A is no longer displayed at the end of hitting to the right.
After that, from timing t24 to timing t25, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 259(h) shows a state in which the normal decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

At timing t25, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the background image is changed to the normal background image A, and the decorative pattern is changed to the normal decorative pattern. In addition, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is also changed from 1/30 to 1/300 by changing the game state from the probability variable time saving state to the normal state (see FIGS. 142 and 143).

In this way, when the background concealing image is displayed at the end of the right-hand shot, the background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period), the background image becomes invisible (second period), and the background image gradually becomes visible. A period (third period) during which the visibility of the background image is easily restored and a period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored are provided.

When the result of the 100th variable display in the variable probability state is a big hit, the background concealing image is not displayed at the end of hitting to the right, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the big win.
At this time, a "huge tank reach" effect or an "enemy tank destruction reach" effect may be executed.

FIGS. 257(b), 257(c), and 257(d) show variations in the timing of displaying the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 257(a). 10 and 11 respectively show different embodiments.
For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 257(c), at timing t24, the end of the display of the background concealing image A at the end of the right stroke and the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols are performed at the same time.

FIGS. 258(b) and 258(c) are examples in which the display time and display timing of the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed hitting, the background concealed image B at the end of right-handed throw, and the background concealed image C at the end of right-handed throw ( Modifications 01 to 12) are shown.

By performing such a display, the player can know the number of consecutive wins (the number of consecutive big hits) and the number of winning game balls at the end of the right-handed state.
In addition, while the normal background image A to normal background image C are not displayed, it is possible to take a picture of the display area where the number of consecutive wins and the number of acquired game balls are displayed using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a digital camera. can.
In addition, behind the display, the background image and the decorative pattern can be smoothly switched from those in the probability variable time-saving state or time-saving state to those in the normal state.

The period during which the background image is invisible at the end of the right-hand shot (second period) is shorter than the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS.

Even if the period during which the background image is invisible at the end of the right-hand shot (second period) and the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period) are the same length. good.
For example, the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIGS.

Even if the background image invisible period (second period) at the end of the right shot is longer than the background image invisible period (second period) in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" good. In addition, the period (second period) in which the background image is not visible at the end of right-handed hitting is performed over half or more of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation (that is, the final fluctuation at which the advantageous state ends). good too. More than half of this variation time may be longer than the shortest time of all variation patterns.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS.

The period when the background image at the end of the right-hand shot gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period). may be shorter than
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIGS.

The period during which the background image at the end of the right hand shot gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the period during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period). and may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 and the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233 are the same.

The period when the background image at the end of the right-hand shot gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period). may be longer than
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIGS.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of the right-hand shot (4th period), after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal. It may be shorter than the period (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in modification 02 shown in FIGS.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of the right-hand shot (4th period), and the period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" period (fourth period) may have the same length.
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 and the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233 are the same.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of the right-hand shot (4th period), after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal. It may be shorter than the period (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS.

The background image displayed at the end of the right hand shot and the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends with a failure are both the normal background image A. , the background image displayed at the end of the right-hand shot may be different from the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends with a failure.
For example, the normal background image B may be displayed at the end of the right hand shot, and the normal background image A may be displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends with a failure. Alternatively, the normal background image A may be displayed at the end of the right hand shot, and the normal background image B may be displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends with a failure.

An example has been shown in which the normal background image A is displayed instead of the normal background image C at the end of hitting to the right. They may be displayed randomly.
In addition, in addition to the normal background image C, the background image during the right-hand shot also includes a background image in a form other than the normal background image C (for example, a background image in a form of a bomb character or a different form of dialogue). It may be randomly displayed as a background image during right-handed hitting.

Also, in place of the normal background image C, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed at the end of hitting to the right. At this time, it is preferable to display the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B from the beginning of the moving image (the display states shown in FIGS. 227(a) and 227(d)).
It should be noted that a background moving image exclusively for right-handed hitting may be displayed during right-handed hitting.

With reference to FIG. 256, an example of the background concealing image at the end of hitting to the right has been shown, but a background concealing image of another display mode may be employed as the background concealing image at the end of hitting to the right. For example, one of a black background concealing image, a white background concealing image, and a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like may be used as the background concealing image exclusively for the end of the right hand shot.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 259, an example of displaying the game result image in the second period (timing t18 to timing t20) was shown, but the game result image is displayed in the first period and the third period. may be displayed. In this case, by moving the game result image from the left and right of the display area in accordance with the movement of the background hiding image at the end of right-handed hitting, the game result image appears in the display area, or the game result image disappears from the display area. You can do

In the variable display of the decorative pattern at the end of the right-handed stroke, whether the ready-to-win state occurs or not to occur, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the background concealing image is displayed. . On the other hand, in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", a background concealment image is displayed as the reach state occurs.

With reference to FIG. 242 and the like, the display mode of the pending image is maintained (for example, the red pending image is displayed in red) before and after the background concealing image is displayed during the execution of "Enemy Tank Destroy Reach". or change the display mode (for example, change the red pending image to a normal pending image (white pending image) and display it). Reach” may also be displayed in the same way).
On the other hand, when the right-handed state ends and the normal state is entered by executing the variable display of the decorative symbols a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. As for the pending image displayed after the end of the background concealing image at the end of hitting to the right, a normal pending image (white pending image) may be displayed.
In addition, with respect to the pending image that will be displayed after the end of right-handed hitting, it is displayed as a normal pending image (white pending image), and is held in a manner that indicates that the degree of expectation is higher than the normal pending image It is a good idea not to display images (red pending images or gold pending images).

During the period (third period) in which the background concealing image at the end of the right-handed state is displayed and the normal background image A and the normal background image B are gradually more visible, the reserved image is replaced with another reserved image. It is best not to change it.
Similarly, during the period (third period) when the background concealing image is displayed when executing "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destroying Reach" and the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see, the suspended image is changed to another mode. It is preferable not to change to the held image of
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that the state of the reserved image has changed and the degree of expectation shown has changed.

With reference to FIG. 238 and the like, before and after the background concealing image is displayed at the time of execution of "Enemy Tank Destroy Reach", the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is maintained, or the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is maintained. (In addition, the same display may be performed in "Giant Tank Reach").
On the other hand, when the right-handed state ends and the normal state is entered by executing the variable display of the decorative symbols a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. It is preferable that the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is not displayed after the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting is completed. Alternatively, the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may not be displayed in the variable display when the right-handed state ends.
Whether or not the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is executed is determined by the look-ahead processing at the time of starting winning. should not be displayed. For example, it is preferable not to start the display of the band-like prefetch effect image for the suspension that occurs during the 96th to 100th variable display.

When the decorative pattern changes at the end of the right-handed state (100th time), if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the period during which the background concealing image made up of sunglasses etc. is displayed (1st period to 1st period) 3 period) or a period after the display of the background masking image (fourth period), a jackpot notification image for notifying that a jackpot will occur may be displayed.

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 257 is modified so as to display a jackpot notification image for notifying that a jackpot will occur will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 260(a) shows an embodiment in which a big hit notification image is displayed during a period from timing t14, which is the timing at which the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, to timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period. ing.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 260(a), modified examples (modified example 01 to modified example 14) in which the period for displaying the jackpot notification image is modified will be described below with reference to FIG. 260(b). do.

In the modification 01, the big hit notification image is displayed during the period from the timing t14 when the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped to the timing t18 when the first period ends.
In the modification 02, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In the modification 03, a big hit notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the modification 04, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modified example 05, a big hit notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, to timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period.
In modification 06, a big hit notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In modification 07, a big hit notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In modification 08, a big hit notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modification 09, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In the tenth modification, a big hit notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the eleventh modification, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the twelfth modification, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the thirteenth modification, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modification 14, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

Timing t14 when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, timing t16 when the first period starts, and timing t18 when the second period starts are displayed as the timing for starting the display of the big hit notification image. , timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, and timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, are shown.
For example, the timing t15, the timing t17, the timing t19, the timing t21, and the timing t23 may be the timings for starting the display of the big hit notification image.

In addition, as the timing for ending the display of the big hit notification image, the timing t16 that is the start timing of the first period, the timing t18 that is the end timing of the first period, the timing t20 that is the end timing of the second period, and the timing t20 that is the end timing of the third period. Although the timing t22, which is the end timing, and the timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period, are shown, a predetermined timing within these periods may be the timing for ending the display of the big win notification image.
For example, the timing t15, the timing t17, the timing t19, the timing t21, and the timing t23 may be the timings for ending the display of the big hit notification image.

In this way, the timing for starting the display of the big win notification image can be any timing from timing t14 to timing t23, and the timing for ending the display of the big win notification image can be any timing from timing t15 to timing t24. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 260, the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A at timing t19. The display of the normal background image C may be continued after the timing t19, and the normal background image C may be changed to the background image during the big win at the timing t25.

The display priority of the jackpot notification image should be higher than the display priority of the background masking image and the game result image. Also, the big win notification image is preferably displayed at a position overlapping the game result image. The big win announcement image may be a moving image, and the big win announcement may be performed by displaying the moving image.

The period from the start of the variable display to the display of the background concealment image at the end of the right-handed shot will be the special reach in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" from the start of the variable display. It is preferable that the period is shorter than the period until the background concealed image is displayed.
For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 257(a), the display of the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting is started at timing t16 eight seconds after timing t8 when the variable display is started.
On the other hand, in the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 252(a) and the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. At t36, display of the special reach background concealing image is started.
Also, at the end of the right-hand shot (if the result of the 100th variation display is a loss), "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" will not be executed, and the special reach background concealment image will not be displayed. It should be configured as follows.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize a suitable presentation mode.

In this way, during the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display C") is performed.

When executing the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), by displaying a background masking image such as a bomb character, even if the result of the first reach effect is a failure, a special effect in which the character appears will be created. It can be seen, and the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated.
Also, comparing the special display A in the first ready-to-win effect and the special display C at the end of hitting to the right, the background concealing image used in the special display A and the background concealing image used in the special display C are different. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the game state.

When the second ready-to-reach effect ("enemy tank destroying ready-to-reach") is executed, a black background concealing image is displayed to calm the player's disappointment even when the second ready-to-reach effect results in a failure. be able to.
Also, when comparing the special display B in the second ready-to-win effect and the special display C at the end of right-handed hitting, the background concealing image used in the special display B and the background concealing image used in the special display C are different. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261 and the like, there will be described an embodiment of a pseudo-continuous effect in which the decorative symbols are once visually recognized as if they have stopped, and then they are changed and displayed again.
Specifically, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 261 and 262, after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at decorative symbols with different numbers, special symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbols. By performing the stop effect, each temporarily stopped decorative pattern is again scrolled downward and variably displayed. Further, when the downward scroll movement is started again after each decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, an image of "x2" is displayed in the display area. Hereinafter, such a presentation will be referred to as a pseudo-continuous presentation.

In the state where the image "×2" is displayed, the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped at decorative symbols with different numbers, and a special design is displayed in the middle design, so that the temporarily stopped decorative design is lowered again. It may fluctuate by scrolling in the direction. In this case, instead of the image "x2", the image "x3" is displayed. Hereinafter, these "x2" and "x3" images will be referred to as pseudo consecutive number display images. FIGS. 261(b) and 262(b) are time charts showing an effect example in which the image "x2" is displayed and then the image "x3" is displayed.

An effect example will be specifically shown below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 261(b) and the display example shown in FIG. At timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started.
At timing t4, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At timing t6, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. FIG. 263(a) shows the display state at this time. At timing t8, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. In the middle decorative pattern, a special decorative pattern with a Chinese character "continued" is displayed. FIG. 263(b) shows the display state at this time. At timing t10, the left to right decorative symbols are again scrolled downward and variably displayed. In addition, “×2” of the pseudo-run count display image is displayed on the upper left of the display area. FIG. 263(c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t14, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At timing t16, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. FIG. 263(d) shows the display state at this time. Incidentally, as shown in this figure, the display priority of the pseudo run number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. At timing t18, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. In the middle decorative pattern, a special decorative pattern with a Chinese character "continued" is displayed. FIG. 263(e) shows the display state at this time. At timing t20, the left to right decorative symbols are again scrolled downward and variably displayed. In addition, “×3” of the pseudo-run count display image is displayed on the upper left of the display area. FIG. 263(f) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t25, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At timing t30, the right decorative design temporarily stops at the same number (number "2") as the left decorative design, and a ready-to-win state occurs. FIG. 263(g) shows the display state at this time. During the period from timing t37 to timing t39, "x3" in the pseudo-run count display image gradually becomes translucent and difficult to see. FIG. 263(h) shows the display state at this time. At timing t40, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. It is indicated whether the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a loss depending on the display mode of the decorative pattern at the time of temporary stop. At timing t41, the left to right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and this state is maintained until timing t42. After the timing t42, the variation display from the next time onwards is executed, or the jackpot game state is executed.

Although FIG. 261(b) is used as a representative to describe the effect mode of the pseudo-continuous effect, the same display is performed in other time charts as well.

In the production example shown in the time chart of Fig. 261(a), after "x2" is finally displayed as the display image of the number of pseudo-runs, it does not develop into "huge tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach". Then, at timing t31, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a reach-losing or a big hit. The pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
Since the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number display image is higher than that of the normal background image, part of the normal background image is made invisible or invisible by the pseudo consecutive number display image. The gradual disappearance of the pseudo continuation display image of the time chart is synonymous with the gradual recognition of the normal background image.

In the production example shown in the time chart of Fig. 262(a), after "x2" is finally displayed as the pseudo-run count display image, it develops into a "huge tank reach" production or "enemy tank destruction reach" production. do. After the occurrence of the ready-to-win state at timing t20, the ready-to-win effect is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 252(a) and FIG. 233(a).

In the production example shown in the time chart of FIG. 262(b), after "x3" is finally displayed as the display image of the number of pseudo-runs, it develops into a "giant tank reach" production and a "enemy tank destruction reach" production. do. After the occurrence of the ready-to-win state at timing t30, the ready-to-win effect is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 252(a) and FIG. 233(a).

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 262(a) and 262(b), the pseudo-run count display image is visually recognized by the background concealed image displayed at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" production or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" production. It becomes difficult or invisible, and the display ends when in this state. For example, the display may end at a predetermined timing during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 shown in FIGS. 252(a) and 233(a).

As described above, the display priority of the pseudo-run count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols, and is displayed closer to the viewer than the decorative symbols. FIG. 263 shows that a pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed on the front side of the decorative design.
Further, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive count display image is lower than the display priority of the background concealed image, and the pseudo consecutive count display image is displayed behind the background concealed image.

As shown in FIG. 261(a), from timing t27 to timing t29, the pseudo consecutive number display image ("x2") is gradually erased.
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 261(b), from timing t37 to timing t39, the pseudo consecutive number display image ("x3") is gradually erased.
During these periods, the pseudo repeat number display image is gradually changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state over a period of 2 seconds, and the display is terminated at the timing when it finally becomes transparent, so that the background image and the decorative pattern are visually recognized. It is good to improve the quality. FIG. 263(h) shows a state in which the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in a translucent state.
Instead of gradually making the entire pseudo-running number display image transparent, the pseudo-running number display image is made transparent from the surroundings, and finally the central part is made transparent to display the pseudo-running number display image. may be terminated.
Any other display mode may be adopted as long as the display image of the number of pseudo-runs is displayed in such a manner that the visibility gradually decreases.

The display priority of the pseudo-run count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols, and is displayed in front of the decorative symbols. The priority may be temporarily lower than the priority of the decorative symbol so that at least a portion of the pseudo consecutive number display image is hidden by the temporary stop-displayed decorative symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 262(a) and 262(b), when the background concealing image is displayed in order to switch the background image to the special reach background image, a predetermined period of time during which the background concealing image is displayed At the timing of , the display of the pseudo-run count display image should be ended. For example, the display may be terminated while the background concealing image A and the background concealing image B are being displayed, or the display may be terminated while the background concealing image C is being displayed.

When the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous number display image (“x2”, “x3”) is displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern should be prevented from becoming a non-reach loss.
That is, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern stop at the decorative patterns with the same number to enter the ready-to-win state, and after that, in FIG. 261(a) and FIG. 262(a) and 262(b), the middle decoration pattern stops without developing into the special reach and shows the result of the special lottery, or the middle decoration after developing into the special reach as shown in FIGS. It is preferable that the symbols stop to indicate the result of the special lottery.
Alternatively, when "x3" is displayed as the pseudo-run count display image, the stop display mode of the decorative symbols may be set so as not to result in a non-reach loss. In addition, although "x2" is displayed as the pseudo-run count display image, if "x3" is not displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern may be non-reachable. .

The expectation of a big hit is higher in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed and in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the pseudo-continuous number display image "x2" is displayed.
In addition, after the pseudo-continuation display image "x2" is displayed, the pseudo-continuation number display image "x3" is not displayed, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. In the case where the pseudo-running number display image of "x2" is displayed and then the pseudo-running number display image of "x3" is displayed, the latter has a higher expectation of a big hit.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols in the pseudo continuous effect is not limited to the display example shown in FIG. 263, and other temporary stop modes may be used.
For example, only one of the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, and special symbols such as "NEXT", "run", "pseudo run", and "next" may be stopped in the middle decorative symbols.
Alternatively, such a special design may stop on one of the left and right decorative designs, not limited to the middle decorative design.
Also, the left, middle, and right decoration patterns may be temporarily stopped in a special combination (numbers "1, 3, 5", numbers "6, 7, 7", etc.).
In this way, in the pseudo-continuous effect, a part or all of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are visually recognized as if they were stopped and displayed, and then these patterns are again moved and displayed to play the game. It should be visible to people.
Although the decorative pattern itself does not temporarily stop, a performance image in which the recollection story of a predetermined character progresses step by step is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern to hide part or all of the decorative pattern, thereby changing the decorative pattern. It may be visually recognized by the player as a division of the display. In this case, the first effect image and the second effect image show different stories.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 261(a) and 261(b), the player can more easily understand the degree of expectation by displaying the pseudo-run count display image in front of the decorative symbols. In addition, the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends at the timing (timing t29 or timing t39) before the timing (timing t30 or timing t40) at which a part of the decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing so, the visibility of the decorative pattern is ensured, and the player can easily recognize the result of the special lottery.
In the production examples shown in FIGS. 262(a) and 262(b), the display of the pseudo-run count display image is terminated while the background concealed image is being displayed. Since the number display image is not displayed, the player can concentrate on the result of the battle between the tanks during the execution of the special reach.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 261(a), the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased from timing t27 to timing t29, but it may be erased at another timing. FIG. 264(b) shows an embodiment in which the mode of erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image is modified in the effect example shown in FIG. 261(a).
As in Modifications 01 to 11 shown in FIG. 264(b), the timing of starting to erase the pseudo-run count display image, the period required to erase the pseudo-run count display image, and the end of erasing the pseudo-run count display image. It is also possible to determine the timing of the display, and the period from the end of erasing the pseudo-running number display image to the stop display of the decorative symbol. Note that FIG. 264(a) is the same view as FIG. 261(a). It should be noted that, in the modified example 01 and the like, for the convenience of drawing, parts that should be described as "gradually deleted" are described as "gradually".

In order to facilitate comparison with other inventions, the period from the start of display of the pseudo-run count display image to the start of erasure (timing t10 to timing t27 in FIG. 264(a)) is It may be referred to as a "second period". Similarly, the period (timing t27 to timing t29 in FIG. 264(a)) required for erasing the pseudo-run count display image may be referred to as a "third period" for convenience. Similarly, the period from the end of erasing the pseudo-run count display image to the stop display of the decorative symbols may be referred to as the "fourth period" (timing t29 to timing t30 in FIG. 264(a)) for convenience. It should be noted that a first period (timing t10 to timing t12 in FIG. 264(a)) may be provided in which the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state gradually becoming opaque.

Modification 01 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t27.
Modification 02 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t28.
Modification 03 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t29.
Modification 04 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t28.
FIG. 261(a) has already shown an effect example in which the pseudo-run count display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
Modification 05 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t30.
Modification 06 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t29.
Modification 07 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t30.
Modification 08 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t31.
Modification 09 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t30.
Modification 10 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t31.
Modification 11 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t30 to timing t31.
In these examples, any one of 1 second to 3 seconds is set as the time for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image. In addition, the time from the completion of erasing the pseudo-running number display image until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is set to any one of 0 to 4 seconds.

With reference to FIG. 264(b), an embodiment and a modified example of erasing the pseudo-run count display image "x2" are shown. The method described in FIG. 264(b) can also be applied when erasing the image “×3”.

Decorative patterns displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect, and decorative patterns displayed during the reach effect shown in FIGS. 261(a) and 261(b). are different in design and size. Specifically, the decorative patterns displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect consist only of numbers and square frames, and are small in size, but are shown in Fig. 261(a). The decoration pattern displayed during execution of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 261(b) consists of numbers, rectangular frames, and bomb characters, and is large in size.

The period required for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes more visible.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo-run count display image in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 264 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS.

The period required for erasing the pseudo number display image may be the same length as the period (third period) during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 264 and the length of the third period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233 are the same.

The period required for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes more visible.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo-run count display image in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 264 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS.

The period from the end of display of the display image of the number of pseudo-runs to the end of the change display of the decorative pattern is the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period).
For example, the length of the period from the end of display of the pseudo-run count display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols in modification 05 shown in FIG. 264 is the length of the fourth period in modification 02 shown in FIGS. shorter than the length.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo-running display image to the end of the display of the variable decoration pattern, and the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period) may be of the same length.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-run count display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols in Modification 05 shown in FIG. 264, and the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. are the same.

The period from the end of display of the display image of the number of pseudo-runs to the end of the change display of the decorative pattern is the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period).
For example, the length of the period from the end of display of the pseudo-run count display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols in modification 01 shown in FIG. 264 is the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. It's longer than it should be.
In the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", the size of the decorative pattern is small. is large, and is displayed overlapping the pseudo-repeated number display image. Therefore, by lengthening the period from when the pseudo-run number display image is erased to when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state of the decorative symbols.

In the reach effects shown with reference to FIGS. 261(a) and 261(b), the "giant tank reach" effect and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the change. However, the normal background image A may be displayed again after the background concealing image and the pseudo repeat count display image are finished. Alternatively, the normal background image A may be replaced with the normal background image B at the timing when the background concealing image C is displayed or at the end timing of the display of the pseudo-run count display image. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
Also, only at the end of the display of the pseudo run number display image shown in FIGS. It may be possible to switch to another normal background image.

In this way, the normal background image displayed during the display of the pseudo-run count display image or before the special ready-to-win effect can be switched to another normal background image after the display of the pseudo-run count display image ends or after the special reach effect. By adopting a configuration in which it is possible, the special lottery results in a loss, and it is possible to change the feelings of the player who is feeling regret.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends. Alternatively, when the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed, the pseudo-repeated count display image is displayed, and the degree of recognition of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is lowered, and the pseudo-repeated count is displayed. When the degree of recognition of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is increased during the period of erasing the display image, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image are not displayed even when the period of erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image comes. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are continuously displayed without displaying the image B from the beginning, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed even after the period for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image ends. Instead of displaying the normal background moving image B from the beginning, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed.

262(a) and 262(b), it will shift to "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". As for the display mode of the pending image and the pending image in "Destructive Reach", the display mode in the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 230(b), 261(a), and 261(b), after the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at the same decorative pattern and reach the reach state, the decorative patterns and the background image are displayed. Without switching, for example, the middle decorative pattern is scrolled at a low speed or frame-advanced, and after a predetermined period of time, the middle decorative pattern is the same decorative pattern (in the case of a big hit) or different from the left and right decorative patterns. A variation mode that stops at a decorative symbol (in the case of loss) is called normal reach.
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 230(c), 262(a), and 262(b), after the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped with the same decorative pattern to reach the reach state, the decorative pattern is a special decorative pattern. (It is often a decorative pattern that is smaller than before the temporary stop), the background image is switched to a special background image, and a production display such as a battle between characters to determine victory or defeat is performed. The effect in which the result of the special lottery is substantially indicated by the result of display is called SP reach (abbreviation of special reach or super reach). In addition, according to the result of this production display, the middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit (a pattern with the same number as the left and right decorative patterns) or in a mode indicating a loss (a pattern with a different number from the left and right decorative patterns). be done.

In this specification, SP reach is referred to as "special reach" or "special reach effect", and "huge tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" correspond to SP reach. In addition, in the SP reach, there is a production display such as characters fighting each other, so it may be called a battle reach (production).

In addition, between normal reach and SP reach, expectations are higher for SP reach. Therefore, after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with the same decorative symbols to enter the ready-to-win state, the player will pay attention to whether or not the game shifts to the SP ready-to-win state, and watch the variable display.
It should be noted that a plurality of types of SP reach (for example, "huge tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach") may be made executable, and the degree of expectation may vary depending on the type of SP reach. At this time, SP reach with relatively high expectations (or expectations are higher than a predetermined probability), strong SP (reach), SP with relatively low expectations (or expectations are lower than a predetermined probability) A reach may be called weak SP (reach).

It should be noted that whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit may be expressed as winning or losing or winning or losing result. For example, when it is said that the result of a battle between characters indicates the result of winning or losing, it means that whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big win is indicated by the result of the battle between the characters.

On the other hand, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the pending image or the pending image to another display mode indicating the degree of expectation while the pseudo consecutive number display image is being erased.
For example, at timing t27 in FIG. 261(a), if the pending image is the green pending image, the green pending image is displayed during the period from timing t27 when the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased to timing t29. An image should be displayed.

Based on the pending look-ahead, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the state where the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is displayed, after timing t20 in the effect example shown in FIG. ), after timing t30 in the production example shown in FIG. You may do so.

In this way, while the pseudo-run count display image is being erased, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display D") is performed.

At the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, the normal background image may be switched to another normal background image. An embodiment of a normal background image switching effect for displaying a special background masking image and switching the normal background image to another normal background image will be described below.

First, the background masking image displayed in the normal background image switching effect in this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 265(a) shows a giant bomb character viewed obliquely from the front left. Also, the portions other than the bomb character are translucent blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image A hereinafter.
FIG. 265(b) shows a state in which the bomb character is seen obliquely from the front left and slightly from the front. Also, the portions other than the bomb character are translucent blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image B hereinafter.
FIG. 265(c) shows a front view of the bomb character. In addition, portions other than the bomb character are opaque blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image C hereinafter.
FIG. 265(d) shows a state in which the bomb character is seen obliquely to the right and slightly from the front. Also, the portions other than the bomb character are translucent blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image D hereinafter.
FIG. 265(e) shows the bomb character as seen obliquely from the front right. Also, the portions other than the bomb character are translucent blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image E hereinafter.
Note that the outline of the image of the giant bomb character is opaque black, and the other portion (the area enclosed by the outline) is opaque white.
In this embodiment, the normal background image is switched during the display of the background concealing image made up of such a huge bomb character or the like.

In the background concealment image made up of a giant bomb character or the like, the blue translucent portions of the background concealment images A and E have a higher degree of transparency than the blue semitransparent portions of the background concealment images B and D, and thus are more transparent than the background concealment images B and D. High visibility. Since the blue portion of the background masking image C is opaque, the image positioned behind is not visible. In addition, the bomb character may be displayed in a large size so that only the bomb character can be visually recognized in the background concealing image C. FIG.

266(a) and a display example shown in FIG. 267, an example of the normal background image switching effect for switching the normal background image being displayed to another normal background image will be described below.
First, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t0. FIG. 267(a) shows a display example of the period from timing t0 to timing t1. Note that the normal background image A has already been displayed at the timing t0. The normal background image A is displayed, for example, over a plurality of variable displays.
Next, the background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t1 to timing t2. FIG. 267(b) shows a display example of the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Next, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 267(c) shows a display example of the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Next, the background concealed image C is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t5. Also, at timing t4, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the normal background image B. FIG. FIG. 267(d) shows a display example of the period from timing t3 to timing t5.
Next, during the period from timing t5 to timing t6, the background concealed image D is displayed. FIG. 267(e) shows a display example of the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Next, the background concealed image E is displayed during the period from timing t6 to timing t7. FIG. 267(f) shows a display example of the period from timing t6 to timing t7. In this way, the normal background image switching effect is executed from timing t1 to timing t7.
After the timing t7, the decorative symbols are variably displayed while the background concealing image is not displayed. FIG. 267(g) shows a display example after timing t7.
Thus, in this embodiment, the normal background image A is displayed from timing t0 to timing t4, and the normal background image B is displayed from timing t4 to timing t32. It should be noted that the background image B is normally displayed in the variable display from the next time onward.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a period in which the normal background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period), a period in which the normal background image becomes invisible (second period), and a period in which the normal background image gradually becomes difficult to see. There is a period (third period) during which the visibility of the normal background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped (fourth period). Note that the normal background image in the first period is different from the normal background images in the third and fourth periods. As a result, the normal background image can be switched without a sense of discomfort.
In addition, the background concealing image is displayed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the display for switching the normal background image is performed, so that the player's mood can be switched.

The background concealment image in this embodiment is the background concealment image used when starting the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and the background used when ending the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". The obscuring image is different from the background obscuring image used to exit the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that a ready-to-win effect advantageous to the player has occurred.
In this way, after switching the normal background image, depending on the result of the special lottery, it is possible to execute the pseudo-continuous effect described above, such as "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". It should be possible to do so.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 266, the display of the background concealing image is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the background image is normally changed. At the end of the game, the normal background image may be changed.
It should be noted that the normal background image may be changed only once during one variation of the decorative pattern.
Also, the change of the normal background image should be executed in a state where none of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266(a), the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t20, which is timing after timing t7 when the display of the background concealing image ends.

Before the display of the background masking image ends (before timing t7 in FIG. 266(a)), the left to right decorative symbols may be changed at high speed. Specifically, before the display of the background concealing image ends, it is preferable to change the scroll speed of the decorative symbols downward to the fastest state (the scroll speed immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, The scroll speed just before the temporary stop is slower than this scroll speed).
Alternatively, even after the display of the background concealing image is finished, at least one of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the previous variable display may be visible. For example, it is preferable that the predetermined decorative pattern, whose variable display is started at timing t0 in FIG. 266(a), does not move or moves slowly so that it can be visually recognized after timing t7.

The background may be hidden as shown in Modifications 01 to 12 in FIG. In these modified examples, the lengths of the first period to the fourth period are 1 second to 3 seconds. It is an example.
For example, as in Modification 01, although the lengths of the first and second periods are the same, the third period is longer than the first and second periods. By doing so, there is an effect that enjoyment is generated as to which normal background image is displayed as the new normal background image. In Modified Example 02, the lengths of the first period and the second period are the same, but the third period is shorter than the first period and the second period. By doing so, there is an effect that a new normal background image can be displayed at an early stage, and it is possible to spend time on a so-called notice effect such as a comment notice (for example, a notice effect by a speech notice image described later). In Modified Example 03, the first and third periods have the same length, but the second period is longer than the first and third periods. By doing so, the player can be entertained by the display of the background concealed image itself. It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.
In addition, there are a plurality of types of normal background images, such as switching the normal background image in the mode of Modification 01 in the first normal background image switching effect, and switching the normal background image in the mode of Modification 02 in the second normal background image switching effect. Various modifications may be applied to each of the background image switching effects.

The period during which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) is shorter than the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 266 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS.

The period during which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) and the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period) are the same length. may be
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 and the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233 are the same.

The period during which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) is longer than the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS.

The period during which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period) is the period during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period). ).
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 266 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIGS.

The period during which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the period during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period) ) may have the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 and the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233 are the same.

The period during which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period) is the period during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period). ).
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIGS.

During the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (4th period), the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" will be used. It may be shorter than the period after returning (the fourth period).

Based on the period after the normal background image switching effect and the visibility of the background image returned to normal (4th period), and the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" The period after returning (the fourth period) may be the same length.

During the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (4th period), based on the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" It may be longer than the period after returning (the fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS.

As described above, when the special reach ends, the high-expectation pending image displayed in the pending image display area may be displayed as it is, or may be returned to a white pending image and displayed.

On the other hand, with respect to the held image in the present embodiment, the held image is moved while the background concealed images A to E are being displayed (at least one of the first period, the second period, and the third period; the same applies hereinafter). may Also, during the display of the background concealing images A to E, it may be possible to change the reserved image or the mode of the reserved image to a higher expected reserved image. When the mode of the pending image or the pending image is changed to a pending image with a higher degree of expectation while the background concealing images A to E are being displayed, it is possible to recognize the mode of the pending image or the pending image after the change. , If the change starts in the 1st period, any of the 1st to 4th periods, and if the change starts in the 2nd period, any of the 2nd to 4th periods, and the 3rd period If the change is to start in any of the 3rd to 4th periods, and if the change is to start in the 4th period, the change will be made in the 4th period. should be For example, when the change is started in the first period and the state of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change is made recognizable in the first period, the state of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change can be recognized at an early stage. Therefore, if the effect is to be able to provide a sense of anticipation early, or if it is possible to recognize the state of the pending image or the pending image after the change starts in the first period and changes in the fourth period, which mode will be used? It can provide a sense of anticipation of change. If the change starts in the 4th period, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation that even the 1st to 3rd periods, which do not change, may change, and each pattern has its own effect. Needless to say. Alternatively, during the display of the background masking images A to E, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 266 and the like, an effect example is shown in which the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is reduced by the background masking image, but similar to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. The reserved image and the visibility of the reserved image may be configured so as not to deteriorate. For example, the display priority of the pending image or the pending image may be set higher than the display priority of the background masking image.

At the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a display is performed in which the reserved images that have been displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are moved to the third to third reserved display areas. FIG. 268(a) shows that the movement of the pending image started and ended during the period from timing t0 when the variable display was started to timing t1. Note that the movement of the reserved image may be started and ended within this period. This point also applies to Modifications 01 to 07 shown in FIG. 268(b).
FIG. 267(a) shows a state in which the movement of the reserved image from the first reserved display area to the reserved display area is completed before the background concealed image A starts to be displayed.

FIG. 268(b) shows a modification of the period during which the pending image is moved.
Modification 01 indicates that the movement of the pending image starts and ends during the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Modification 02 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Modification 03 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
Modification 04 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t4 to timing t5.
Modification 05 indicates that the movement of the pending image starts and ends during the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Modification 06 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t6 to timing t7.
Modification 07 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t7 to timing t8.

Modification 01 to Modification 07 indicate that the movement of the pending image is started and ended over one second within the period from timing t1 to timing t8. The movement of the reserved image may be started at a predetermined timing, and the movement of the reserved image may be finished at a predetermined timing. Also, the time required to move the pending image is not limited to 1 second, and may be shorter or longer than 1 second.
For example, the movement of the reserved image may be started at timing t1 and the movement of the reserved image may be finished at timing t7. Alternatively, the movement of the reserved image may be started at timing t6 and the movement of the reserved image may be finished at timing t8.

Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to move the pending image during execution of the normal background image switching effect. On the other hand, during the execution of the "huge tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" effects, the pending image is not moved, and the position of the pending image does not change before and after the reach effect.

An embodiment in which the strip-like prefetch effect image shown with reference to FIG. 238 is displayed may be adopted in this embodiment.
For example, after executing the normal background image switching effect, the display of the band-like prefetch effect image may be started based on the prefetch result. Alternatively, the normal background image may be changed by executing the normal background image switching effect while the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is displayed.
On the other hand, when the band-shaped look-ahead effect image has already been displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has high expectations for a big win from displaying an excessive performance by displaying the belt-like prefetch effect image.
In addition, in the reserved display area, the first to fourth reserved display areas, a reserved image (for example, a green or red reserved image) with a higher degree of expectation than a white reserved image that is a normal reserved image is displayed. Similarly, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed when the background image is displayed, and the same effect can be obtained in this case as well.

The time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the start of the change of the normal background image (for example, the time until the start of the display of the background concealing image) is the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is better to make it shorter than the time until the special reach ("giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach") starts.
In addition, the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the change of the normal background image (for example, the time until the end of the display of the background concealing image) is the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is better to make it shorter than the time until the special reach ("giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach") starts.
Also, after the normal background image is switched and the hidden background image is displayed, the hidden background image will be displayed at the start of the special reach ("Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") after a certain amount of time has passed. can be started.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the switching of the normal background image with the switching of the background image during special reach.

In the normal background image switching effect, an embodiment has been described in which a background masking image made up of a giant bomb character or the like is displayed. may be executed. For example, instead of a giant bomb character, a giant tank may be displayed so that the normal background image can be switched.
Further, the degree of expectation for the special lottery result may not be indicated by executing the normal background image switching effect. That is, the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the special lottery result during the variable display. Specifically, the normal background image switching effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/3) in the next variable display in which the special reach is lost. It should be noted that, in the variable display after no reach loss (a) in FIG. 230 and the change display after the reach loss (no background switching) shown in FIG. good too. In this case, a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/30) that is lower than the probability (for example, a probability of 1/3) of executing the normal background image switching effect in the next variable display in which the special reach results in a loss. , the normal background image switching effect may be executed.
On the other hand, the execution of the normal background image switching effect may indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the changing decorative symbols. For example, when another normal background image is displayed instead of normal background image A or normal background image B, expectations are higher than when normal background image A or normal background image B is displayed. It is better to be In this case, the degree of expectation indicated by the switching of the normal background image should be lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the occurrence of the special reach.

A plurality of production patterns for normal background image switching production may be provided. For example, a plurality of types and colors of characters to be displayed may be provided. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit that differs for each production pattern may be indicated. Further, any one of the modified examples shown in FIG. 266 may be appropriately adopted for each effect pattern, and the first to third periods may be different.
For example, the length of the third period in the normal background image switching effect may vary depending on the type and color of the characters to be displayed. At this time, different expectations may be indicated depending on the type or color of the displayed character.

252 and 233, in the production examples of the "Giant Tank Reach" production and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" production, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and the normal The background image A is displayed again, but at the timing when the background masking image C is displayed, instead of the normal background image A, the normal background image B may be displayed. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the effect example of the background image switching effect shown with reference to FIGS. A different normal background image (normal background image B in this embodiment) is displayed. Note that the normal background image A may continue to be displayed after the background concealing image is finished. In this case, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the background image switching effect.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the background concealed image C ends. Alternatively, in a situation where the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed, the background hidden image is displayed, and the degree of recognition of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is lowered, and the background hidden image is deleted. When the visibility of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is increased during the period, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed from the beginning even if the period for erasing the background concealing image comes. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are continuously displayed without being deleted, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed from the beginning even after the period for erasing the background concealing image is over. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed.

As described above, in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special display E”) is performed in the third period.

The embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 256 etc. and the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 265 etc. will be compared below. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 256 and the like, the background concealing image at the end of right-hand hitting is displayed and the background image is switched at the end of right-hand hitting. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 265 and the like, the background image is switched when the decorative pattern starts to change.

The period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of the right-hand shot may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. .
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG.

Even if the period during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of the right-hand shot (third period) and the period during which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (third period) are set to the same length. good.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 and the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 are the same.

The period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of the right-hand shot may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. .
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored at the end of the right-hand shot is changed to the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored after the normal background image switching effect is completed. period).

The period after the visibility of the background image is restored at the end of the right-hand shot (fourth period), and the period after the visibility of the background image is restored after the normal background image switching effect is finished (fourth period) period) may be of the same length.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored at the end of the right-hand shot is changed to the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored after the normal background image switching effect is completed. period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

In the example of the effect at the end of right-handed hitting shown with reference to FIG. 257, etc., the normal background image C is displayed during right-handed hitting, and the normal background image A is displayed after the display of the background concealing image is finished. However, there may be cases where the normal background image C is displayed. For example, the normal background image A may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and the normal background image C may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of fluctuation, and the normal background image A normal background image different from A (normal background image B in this embodiment) is displayed. Note that the normal background image A may be displayed even after the background concealing image is finished. In this case, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the background image switching effect.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
Further, instead of the normal background image C, a normal background moving image C that is displayed like a moving image like the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the background hiding image C in the normal background image switching effect ends or when the right hand stroke ends. Alternatively, the background concealed image is displayed in a situation where the normal background moving images A to C are displayed, and the degree of recognition of the normal background moving images A to C is lowered, and the background concealed image is erased. When the degree of recognition of the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C is increased during the period, the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C are displayed from the beginning even if the period for erasing the background concealing image comes. The normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C are continuously displayed without removing the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C, and the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C are displayed from the beginning even if the period for erasing the background concealing image ends. The normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be continuously displayed without being displayed.

When the right-handed state ends and the normal state is reached, the background concealed image at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed, but at this time, the pending image displayed after the background concealed image at the end of right-handed hitting A pending image (a white pending image) may be displayed.
In addition, during the period (third period) when the normal background image A and the normal background image B are gradually becoming more visible by displaying the background concealing image at the end of the right-handed state at the end of the right-handed state, the held image is put on another hold. It is better not to change it to an image.

On the other hand, as for the suspended image in the normal background image switching effect, the suspended image may be moved during the display of the background masking images A to E (first period to third period). Also, during the display of the background concealing images A to E, it may be possible to change the reserved image or the mode of the reserved image to a higher expected reserved image. Alternatively, during the display of the background masking images A to E, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image.

In this way, during the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display (“special display C”) in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed. Further, in the third period in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display (“special display E”) in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols, an effect may be executed to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. An embodiment capable of executing a dialog preview effect for displaying a dialog preview image will be described below.

First, the dialog preview image displayed in the dialog preview effect in the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 269 shows dialog preview images A to E displayed in the dialog preview effect of this embodiment.
The display priority of the dialogue preview image A to dialogue preview image E is higher than that of the decoration pattern and the reserved image, and the dialogue preview image A to the dialogue preview image E are displayed in front of these images.
The dialogue preview image is composed of a bomb character (white image) positioned in the center, dialogue (white image) consisting of four Chinese characters "bomb boy", and other areas (green background image). It should be noted that the background image referred to here is simply referred to as a background image for the sake of convenience in comparison with images of bomb characters and dialogue images.
The green background areas of dialog preview images A and E have high transparency, the green background areas of dialog preview images B and D have low transparency, and the green areas of dialog preview image C have the highest transparency. Low and the background image is not visible.
The kanji "Baku" is attached to the dialogue preview image A, the kanji "bomb" is attached to the dialogue preview image B, and the kanji "bomb boy" is attached to the dialogue preview images C to E. .

FIG. 270 shows a time chart showing an example of an effect of the dialogue announcement effect. Also, FIG. 271 shows a display example in which a dialog preview image is displayed at a predetermined timing.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 270(a), the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t0. FIG. 271(a) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image.
Next, during the period from timing t10 to timing t11, the dialog preview image A is displayed. FIG. 271(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t11 to timing t12, the dialog preview image B is displayed. FIG. 271(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t12 to timing t14, the dialog preview image C is displayed. FIG. 271(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t14 to timing t15, the dialog preview image D is displayed. FIG. 271(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t15 to timing t16, the dialog preview image E is displayed. FIG. 271(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t16, the series of display of the dialog preview images ends. FIG. 271(g) shows a display state at a predetermined timing during the period from timing t16 to timing t20 (the period until the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped).
The left decorative design is temporarily stopped at timing t20, the right decorative design is displayed at timing t25, and the middle decorative design is displayed at timing t30.
At timing t31, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big win.

In this manner, even in the dialog preview effect, the display of the dialog preview image causes the background image to gradually become difficult to see (first period), the background image becomes invisible (second period), and the background image gradually disappears. It has a period (third period) during which the background image becomes easily visible and a period (fourth period) until the visibility of the background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped. That is, the dialogue preview image also functions like the background concealing image.

Thus, when the dialogue forewarning effect of displaying a series of dialogue forewarning images is executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the dialogue forewarning performance is not executed. Whether or not to execute the speech announcement effect is determined based on the result of the special lottery.
In some situations during the execution of the dialog preview effect, the normal background image becomes invisible, but before and after the dialog preview effect is executed, the normal background image will not be changed to another normal background image. , the same normal background image is displayed.

A plurality of dialogue forewarning effects with different display modes may be made executable, and any one of the dialogue forewarning effects may be executed. For example, it is preferable to use dialogue preview images with different contents of dialogue, types of characters, colors of background areas, and the like. Also, depending on the type of speech announcement effect, the same level of expectation may be suggested, or a different level of expectation may be suggested.
For example, when the color of the background region is red, the degree of expectation may be higher than when the background region is green.

An example of displaying dialogue and a character has been given, but these are only examples, and it may be configured to be executable as an advance notice effect without displaying either dialogue or characters. Alternatively, in place of the words and characters, other images may be displayed as a preview effect.

Although the display of the dialog preview image A to the dialog preview image E indicates that the dialog preview effect is performed, the dialog preview effect may be performed by displaying a moving image. For example, a character or dialogue may be moved, or the transparency may be smoothly changed.

Comparing the normal background image switching effect in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. good.
For example, compared to the modification 02 of the normal background image switching effect, the modification 01 of the dialog preview effect has a longer execution time of the effect.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the speech announcement effect. On the other hand, the execution of the normal background image switching effect basically does not indicate the degree of expectation for the big win. Therefore, even if the time for executing the effect is relatively shortened, the influence of the player overlooking the degree of expectation can be reduced.

The period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the dialog preview effect may be shorter than the period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG.

A period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the speech advance notice effect may be the same length as a period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is the same as the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the speech advance notice effect may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 270 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) in which the background image in the dialog preview effect gradually becomes easier to see may be shorter than the period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG.

A period (third period) in which the background image in the speech advance notice effect is gradually easier to see may be the same length as a period (third period) in which the background image is gradually easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. .
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 and the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 are the same.

A period (third period) in which the background image in the speech advance notice effect gradually becomes easier to see may be longer than a period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the dialog preview effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal, and the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the background image visibility returns ( fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period after the dialog preview effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal (fourth period), and the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal ( 4th period) may have the same length.

The period (fourth period) after the dialog preview effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal, and the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal ( fourth period).

Both the speech announcement effect shown in FIG. 270 and the normal background image switching effect shown in FIG. 266 may be executed during one variation of the decorative pattern.
For example, the normal background image switching effect may be executed during the period from timing t1 to timing t7, and the dialogue announcement effect may be executed during the period from timing t10 to timing t16. Further, modifications of both embodiments may be appropriately combined and executed.
It should be noted that the speech announcement effect is not executed prior to the normal background image switching effect, and conversely, it is preferable that the dialogue announcement effect is executed after the normal background image switching effect. In addition, the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the dialog forewarning effect.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 270 and the like, an effect example in which the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is lowered during the dialogue announcement effect is shown, but the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 237 In addition, it may be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image does not deteriorate. For example, the display priority of the pending image or the pending image may be set higher than the display priority of the dialog preview image.

270 and the like, and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. can be
Alternatively, in both the dialogue announcement effect shown with reference to FIG. 270 and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. Instead of becoming invisible, the state of being easily visible may be maintained as before execution of the effect.

Alternatively, in the dialog forewarning effect shown with reference to FIG. In the effect, even during the execution of the effect, the reserved image or the reserved image does not become difficult to see or cannot be seen, and the easily visible state may be maintained as before the effect is executed.
Conversely, in the speech announcement effect shown with reference to FIG. is maintained, and in the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG.

Even when the strip-like prefetch effect image shown with reference to FIG. 238 is being displayed, it is preferable to configure the dialog preview effect to be executable.
On the other hand, when the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is being displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's expectations are confused due to the execution of the normal background image switching effect, which does not necessarily indicate the expectations.

When only the dialogue foretelling effect is executed and when only the normal background image switching effect is executed, it is preferable to increase the degree of expectation when only the dialogue foretelling effect is executed.
Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be the same when both the dialogue foretelling effect and the normal background image switching effect are executed, and when only the dialogue foretelling effect is executed.

Since the background image is not normally changed before and after execution of the speech announcement performance, even if the first period or the third period of the speech announcement performance is shortened or the second period is lengthened, the player hardly feels a sense of incongruity.
In addition, since the background image is usually not changed, even if the time until the decorative pattern finishes changing is short, the player is unlikely to feel a sense of discomfort.

The dialogue announcement effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect based on the pending look-ahead. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 271 (a), the pending number is 2, the pending image is displayed in the second pending display area, corresponding to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area Prefetching of the suspension may be performed, and the dialog preview image may be displayed at each time of a total of three variable displays until the suspension image displayed in the second suspension display area becomes the suspension image. In this way, the dialogue announcement effect may be displayed over a plurality of times of variable display. Further, it is preferable that a predetermined degree of expectation is indicated by the display mode of the dialog preview image.

On the other hand, the normal background image switching effect is not executed based on the look-ahead effect. Also, as described above, it may be executed in the next variable display that results in a loss.
In addition, at the timing when the variable display resulting in the failure is stopped and displayed, if there is a hold, the normal background image switching effect is executed with a predetermined probability, and if there is no hold, a starting prize is generated. Even if the next variable display is started, the normal background image switching effect may not be performed.
Alternatively, a specific reach effect (such as the aforementioned "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach", a reach effect in which a special reach background image is displayed instead of the normal background image) is executed. On the condition that a result is obtained, it is internally determined with a predetermined probability (including 100% execution of the normal background image switching effect) that the normal background image switching effect is executed in the next variable display. may be stored, and the normal background image switching effect may be executed based on the content of the determination when the variable display is executed next time. A specific implementation mode can be realized by turning on or off a normal background image switching effect execution flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 . According to such a configuration, even if the pending number is 0, by turning on the normal background image switching effect execution flag, when the start winning occurs and the next variable display is performed In addition, a normal background image switching effect can be executed. It should be noted that the normal background image switching effect execution flag is preferably kept on until the next variable display is started.
Even if it is decided to execute the normal background image switching effect, the normal background image switching effect is not executed in the next variable display on the condition that the starting prize does not occur for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). (the normal background image switching effect execution flag is turned off). It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 may be introduced in the display area at the same time as the predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display area may shift to a demonstration image display state. The normal background image switching effect execution flag is turned on even after the transition to the demo image display state, and the normal background image switching effect is executed when the start winning occurs and the variable display is performed in the demo image display state. , the normal background image switching effect execution flag may be turned off.

In this way, while the dialog preview image is being erased, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display F") is performed.

A plurality of embodiments and modifications of these embodiments have been described with reference to FIGS. may be Alternatively, one pachinko machine 1 may be able to execute some of the multiple embodiments and modifications described.

In addition, before the start of the game, the player or the store clerk of the amusement parlor can determine which one of the plurality of aspects in the embodiment and modifications shown with reference to FIGS. You may enable it to be selected in advance. For example, the player himself/herself may be allowed to set the length of the first to fourth periods in each of the effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 271 on the customization screen or the like.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can set the game effect to be executed in a manner that suits his or her taste. In addition, the store clerk of the amusement parlor can set such that a game presentation suitable for the customer base of the amusement parlor is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In each effect in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 271, the display of an image that hides the background image is started, so that the visibility of the background image is lowered, and the visibility of the background image is reduced. has the second period in which the is the lowest and the third period in which the visibility of the background image is high. It also has a fourth period, which is a period from the end of each effect, the end of displaying the image that hides the background image, the return of the visibility of the background image to the original state, and the stop of the decorative pattern.

An example has been shown in which all of the background image becomes invisible in the second period due to the display of the background concealing image. You may make it difficult to visually recognize.
In this case, the transparency of the background concealed image should be minimized in the second period.
Alternatively, the size of the background-concealed image is not the same size as the display area, but is made smaller than the display area so that part of the background image is visible even when the background-concealed image is displayed. good too. In this case, it is desirable that the ratio of the background masking image to the display area is 50% or more, or 2/3 or more.
Note that the dialog preview image can also be transformed in the same manner.
On the other hand, the pseudo-run count display image and the resurrection effect image (resurrection effect character and its lines) are originally smaller than the display area. It is desirable that these images occupy less than 50% of the display area.

The background image switching effect at the start of special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of right hitting, the pseudo-continuous effect, the normal background image switching effect, and the dialogue notice effect that is part of the notice effect Although it is shown that there are 1st to 4th periods, the length of at least one of the periods (1st to 4th periods) in each effect is longer than the length of each state described below. You can do it, or you can make it shorter.

The special reach decoration pattern swings in the vertical direction at a predetermined cycle during the special reach, but each effect (background image switching effect at the start of the special reach, background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, background image at the end of the right hit Each period (first period to fourth period) in the switching effect, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. may Alternatively, even if it is lengthened, it should be less than two cycles.
For example, the length of the first period in the background image switching effect at the start of special reach is longer than the predetermined cycle of the special reach decoration pattern displayed at a predetermined cycle during special reach, so that special reach decoration during special reach The predetermined cycle of the pattern is relatively long (because if it is shortened, it will look rushed and you will not be able to concentrate on the ready-to-win effect). There is an effect of being able to provide pleasure developed into reach for a long time.
Also, for example, the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the predetermined cycle of the special reach decoration pattern displayed at a predetermined cycle during the special reach, so that There is an effect that it is possible to quickly end the sense of anticipation of the next change and to have expectations for the next change (to quickly switch the mood).
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

The pending image or the pending image may be a moving image and may be repeatedly displayed at a predetermined cycle. At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. Alternatively, even if it is lengthened, it should be less than two cycles.
For example, the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of special reach of special reach that does not display the hold image or hold image during special reach is the predetermined period of the hold image or hold image displayed as a moving image By making it longer than , the pending image and the pending image are displayed for one cycle or more in the third period, so that the presence of the pending image can be impressed on the player, and the player is encouraged to operate the handle 302. It has a reminder effect.
For example, the length of the second period in the normal background image switching effect and the dialog preview effect is set to be shorter than the predetermined cycle of the pending image and the pending image displayed as a moving image, so that the pending image and the pending image can be animated. There is an effect that the visibility of the dramatic effect display is ensured to a certain extent.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

With reference to FIG. 142 and FIG. 143, it was shown that there are four game states (normal state, time saving state, non-time saving definite variable state, definite variable state) other than the jackpot state. In these four game states, special symbols can be variably displayed. In addition, it is possible to variably display the decorative design at the same time as the special design.
In the normal state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of production patterns with different variable display times (the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop display), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them. , Each period ( Each of the first to fourth periods) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the time saving state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of production patterns with different variable display times (the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop display), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them. , Each period ( Each of the first to fourth periods) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the non-time-saving probability variable state, variable display is performed with multiple production patterns with different variable display times (time from when the decorative pattern starts variable display to when it stops displaying), but compared with the shortest variable display time among them. Then, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the probability variable state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of production patterns with different variable display times (the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop display), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them , Each period ( Each of the first to fourth periods) may be longer or shorter than this length.

The shortest time of the variable display time may be set differently according to the number of reserved symbols at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols. For example, it is preferable to shorten the shortest variable display time as the number of holds is larger, and lengthen the shortest variable display time as the number of holds is smaller.
At this time, compared with the shortest variable display time of the variable display time of the production pattern that can occur corresponding to each number of holds, each production (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching at the end of special reach Effect, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hitting, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect), each period (1st period to 4th period) is longer than this length It can be longer or shorter.

The effect pattern of the decorative symbols and the variable display time of the decorative symbols are also determined according to the game state and the number of reservations. Background image switching effect at the start of reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) (1st period to 1st period) 4 periods) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit (the fourth period is the period immediately after the display of a different type of decorative pattern is started) By setting the length shorter than the shortest variable display time among the production patterns, there is an effect that the player does not misunderstand that a new variable display has started and stopped.
For example, the length of the fourth period of the normal background image switching effect and the dialog preview effect is set to be longer than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns, so that the effect is performed after the normal background image switching effect and the dialog preview effect are executed. There is an effect that it is possible to take sufficient time to develop (for example, to develop into special reach, pseudo-continuous performance, etc.).
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

261 to 264, an embodiment of the pseudo-continuous effect has been shown, but a display for making the player aware that the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred (such as "Continued" as shown in FIG. 263(b)) Compared to the time to perform the special pattern display), each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous effect, normal Each of the periods (first to fourth periods) in the background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit is made shorter than the display that makes the player recognize that the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred. Since the transition to the second period is swift, the distinction between the pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred, and the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred (the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are all temporarily stopped, so the player can (There is a possibility that it may be difficult to recognize whether the effect has occurred).
For example, the length of the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit is longer than the display that makes the player recognize that the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred. It is displayed as it is with the combination of decorative patterns that are displayed temporarily (in the case of pseudo-continuous production, re-variation display is always performed after temporary stop, but the background image switching effect at the end of special reach and the background at the end of right hitting In the fourth period of the image switching effect, except for the case where the resurrection effect is executed and the result is a success, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as it is). There is an effect that it is possible to make the user give up on the variable display.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

Compared to the shortest shooting interval of the game ball fired into the game area, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous Each period (first period to fourth period) in the effect, normal background image switching effect, and dialog announcement effect) may be longer or shorter than the shortest firing interval. For example, when 100 game balls can be shot in 60 seconds, the shortest shooting interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the shortest shooting interval of the game ball, thereby obtaining the following effects.
There are also experienced players who stop shooting game balls when a special reach with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") is started. When the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started, the player with a lot of game experience guesses that the result of the special lottery is a loss, and operates the handle 302 to operate the game ball. to resume firing. In this case, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the shortest shooting interval of the game ball, so that the shooting of the game ball is restarted and the second game ball is shot. At that time, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is completely unrecognizable. From the second game ball onwards, it becomes possible to concentrate attention on the whereabouts of the game ball (whether or not the game ball starts winning a prize). In other words, the number of game balls on which the player cannot concentrate can be minimized while smoothly changing the background.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the shortest shooting interval of the game ball, thereby obtaining the following effects.
As described above, when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started, the player with a lot of gaming experience guesses that the result of the special lottery is a loss and operates the handle 302. Resume launching game balls. At this time, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is displayed in the display area and is recognizable by the player. will be In particular, even an experienced player may feel uncomfortable when viewing a special reach background image that has been viewed for a long time in the expectation of a big hit in a situation where the result of losing is expected. will be Due to these circumstances, it is expected that even experienced players will find it difficult to accurately shoot game balls because they will be distracted by the display contents of the display area and become upset. be. Therefore, the probability that the game ball shot in the first period will start winning is lower than when the player correctly shoots the game ball. In this way, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest shooting interval of the game ball, it is possible to make the player's state in which the probability of starting winning is lowered longer. You can contribute to the sales of the game store.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

After the variable display of decorative patterns is completed without suspension and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, a demonstration image display state is entered in which an image introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in the display area. You may make it shift with. At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous effect, normal background image switching effect) , dialogue preview effect), each period (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demonstration image display state, thereby obtaining the following effects.
Even players who do not necessarily have a lot of game experience stop launching game balls during special reach. However, a player who is not necessarily rich in gaming experience may think, "Seriously?"~" and so on, and I'm in a situation where I can't recover for a while, and I often can't restart shooting the game ball (as mentioned above, the more experienced and advanced you become, the more quickly you can calm down. be able to switch). In this way, if the screen change (transition to the demo effect state) is executed when the player is in a situation where he or she cannot recover for a while, the effect (the fact that he/she has lost the game) will be a last resort for the player who is not necessarily rich in gaming experience. There is a risk that it may seem like an exaggerated production) (such a tendency is noticeable in pachinko machines that employ resurrection production). Therefore, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demonstration image display state, it is possible for players who are not necessarily rich in gaming experience to do so. You can take care of your heart.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the predetermined waiting time, thereby obtaining the following effects.
If the result of the special lottery is a loss, players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may be in a situation where they can not recover for a while after receiving a big shock "Are you serious?" many. In such a shocking situation, by making a quick transition to the demo image display state and causing a change in the screen, it is possible to make people feel, "Oh, maybe a resurrection effect has occurred!?" Such a tendency is conspicuous in pachinko machines that employ a resurrection effect (note that experienced players remain calm under such circumstances). In this way, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined waiting time for shifting to the demonstration image display state, the This can provide a sense of exhilaration and motivate the player to resume shooting game balls.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

It should be noted that, by driving the payout motor 834, for example, when the game ball wins successively to the winning opening such as the start opening or the big winning opening that pays out when winning, the payout corresponding to the first winning is performed. After that, the payout corresponding to the second winning is performed, but after the payout corresponding to the first winning is performed, it takes a predetermined time (for example, , 1 second), but compared to this predetermined time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hand hitting, Each period (first period to fourth period) in the pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue announcement effect) may be longer or shorter than this time. .
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set shorter than the predetermined time until a new payout is performed, thereby obtaining the following effects.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, there is a possibility that the resurrection effect will be executed, so if the game balls are paid out multiple times during the third period, the phenomenon that will occur due to the payout. (Collision sound generated by game balls colliding with the upper tray 321, management of the number of game balls existing in the upper tray 321, etc.), and a resurrection effect is executed saying "Revive!" However, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made. By shortening it, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation in which concentration is interrupted. The reason why the payout is made once is that the player will not believe that the payout is not made immediately when the player wins the predetermined winning opening (the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, etc.) in the third period. This is because I think
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is performed, thereby obtaining the following effects.
The above-mentioned experienced player guesses that the result of the special lottery will be a loss when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started, so naturally in the third period, the game ball is launched. Is going. Therefore, it is conceivable that a plurality of game balls will win in predetermined winning openings (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, etc.) in the third period following the first period. Experienced players understand that when a game ball wins a prize in a predetermined winning hole (starting hole, general winning hole, etc.), the game ball will be paid out immediately. If not, there is a risk of causing a sense of distrust (such a tendency is to suppress the output of the fluctuating effect sound in the background image switching effect, simplify the display of the display area, etc.) This is noticeable when it is possible to turn a certain amount of attention to the payout), but the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to the predetermined time until the new payout is performed. By making it longer than , it is possible to prevent such a feeling of distrust.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

When the result of the ordinary lottery is a winning result, the movable piece 2004a is driven and moved to open the second start port 2004, and the game ball rolling in the game area 5a can enter. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the movable piece 2004a is returned to its original position to close the second starting port 2004, making it impossible to enter the game ball rolling in the game area 5a. A plurality of different times are set as the time (opening time) from when the second starting port 2004 is opened by the movement of the movable piece 2004a to when it is closed, and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 at one of the opening times. can be entered, or the second start port 2004 can enter a game ball multiple times for winning one ordinary lottery (movable It is realized by driving and moving the piece 2004a a plurality of times). At this time, compared with the shortest time (if there is only one pattern of the opening time of the second starting port 2004, the opening time in that pattern) among the times during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered. , Each period ( 1st period to 4th period) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set shorter than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, thereby obtaining the following effects.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach. During the period, the background image is usually visible, and it often causes a big shock in the mind, such as "Are you serious?", and you can not recover for a while. In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach When the start of the third period and the timing at which the second starting port 2004 becomes enterable are the same, the special reach ends before the second starting port 2004 becomes incapable of entering. It is possible to end the third period of the background image switching effect. When the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered, a lottery for special symbols is performed when the game ball can be won in the second starting port 2004, so the game experience is not necessarily rich. The person operates the handle 302 to let the game ball enter the second starting port 2004, and the interest improves again, and when the open state of the second starting port 2004 ends, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is displayed. Since the 3rd period has already ended, it is possible to make the player forget that the special reach has occurred and that the result was a failure, and switch his or her mind to the change of the new decorative pattern.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the shortest open time of the second starting port 2004, thereby obtaining the following effects.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach. During the period, the background image is usually visible, and it often causes a big shock in the mind, such as "Are you serious?", and you can not recover for a while. In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach When the start of the third period and the timing at which the second starting port 2004 becomes ready for ball entry are the same, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach ends before the third period ends. The second starting port 2004 can be put into a state in which the ball cannot be entered. When the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered, a lottery for special symbols is performed when the game ball can be won in the second starting port 2004, so the game experience is not necessarily rich. Even if the person operates the handle 302 to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004, the interest is improved again, and the game ball cannot be entered into the second start port 2004, the special reach ends. Since the third period of the time background image switching performance continues, the execution of the resurrection performance can be anticipated, so that the shock received by the player can be alleviated as a whole.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233 and 252, the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is 3 seconds (there is only one type of operation effective period). As the production pattern, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 may be configured to be longer or shorter than 3 seconds.
For example, effect pattern A in which the operation effective period of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is, for example, 2 seconds and effect pattern B in which the operation effective period of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is, for example, 4 seconds may be adopted. A plurality of operation effective periods may be provided in this way.
At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer than the operation effective period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. FIG. In addition, each period in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each period of the (first period to fourth period) may be longer than the operation effective period of the effect pattern A and shorter than the operation effective period of the effect pattern B. In addition, each period in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each period of the (first period to fourth period) may be shorter than the operation effective period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. FIG.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, an effect (effect pattern A or effect pattern B) in which the operation unit can be operated may be executed. can be expected. In addition, when the operation unit can be operated in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the operation effective period does not span the fourth period or after the stop of the variable display (that is, the second The valid period of operation ends within three periods) or the fourth period may be deleted, in which case the effects described below can be expected.

For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special ready-to-win is set to be longer than the shortest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times when there are a plurality of operation effective times. In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can expect that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) will be displayed as the resurrection effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the longest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times when there are a plurality of operation effective times. In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can expect that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) will be displayed as the resurrection effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the shortest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times when there are a plurality of operation effective times. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, it is possible to recognize that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as the resurrection effect will not be displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to quickly switch one's mind to the expectation of the display.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is longer than one effective time of the plurality of effective operation times, but not the other. By making it shorter than the operation effective period of 1, it is possible to display an operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" There is an effect that it can make people expect.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be longer than the valid operation time of 1 (there is only 1 valid operation time) as the valid operation time. In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can expect that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) will be displayed as the resurrection effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the valid operation time of 1 (there is only 1 valid operation time) as the valid operation time. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, it is possible to recognize that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as the resurrection effect will not be displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to quickly switch one's mind to the expectation of the display.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

By displaying the special display A to the special display F, the degree of expectation for the big win may differ. In addition, in the relationship between any one of the special displays A to F and any one of the special displays A to F, the degree of expectation for one or both may have the same degree of expectation, or one may have a lower degree of expectation.
Similarly, in the relationship of three or more special indications, even if the degree of expectation for a particular indication is high, the expectation for multiple special indications is the same, or the expectation for a special indication is low, good.

For example, when special display A is displayed and when special display E is displayed, the degree of expectation may be higher than when special display B or special display D is displayed. In addition, when the special display A is displayed and when the special display E is displayed, the degree of expectation when the special display A is displayed may be higher, and when the special display B is displayed, the degree of expectation may be higher. You can raise your expectations.
Also, the degree of expectation when the special display C is displayed may be lower than the special display A and the special display E and higher than the special display B and the special display D. Alternatively, it may be lower than special display A, special display B, special display D, and special display E.

Light-emitting decoration means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door-frame left-side unit 530, the door-frame right-side unit 550, etc.) may be caused to emit light when the special display is executed.
For example, the door-frame left-side unit 530 and the door-frame right-side unit 550 may emit light in the light emission patterns A to F corresponding to the special displays A to F, respectively. In the relationship between any one of Special Indications A to F and any one of Special Indications A to F, the light emission pattern may be different or the same. good too.
For example, for a display with a high degree of expectation such as special display A and a display indicating that the game state is to be changed such as special display C, a unique light emission pattern is adopted for each of the special displays B and C. , the special display E may adopt the same light emission pattern.
In this way, by making the light emitting pattern different for each special display, even if the player is looking away without looking at the display area, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. comes into view, it is possible to recognize which special display has been executed.
As a method of making the light emission pattern different for each special display, a method of lighting or blinking, making the light emission color or light emission time different, or the like may be adopted.

A light emission pattern corresponding to the color of the image used for the special display may be employed. For example, when a black background concealing image is displayed, the brightness of the door-frame left side unit 530 and the door-frame right side unit 550 may be reduced or turned off. When a white background concealing image is displayed, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may emit white light. When another background concealing image is displayed, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may be caused to emit light in the color of the displayed character, or the background area of the displayed background concealing image may be displayed. may emit light in the color of

The light emission pattern corresponding to each special display may end earlier than the special display, may end simultaneously with the special display, or may end later than the special display.
After the light emission pattern corresponding to each special display ends, the light may be turned off, or light may be emitted in a light emission mode that matches the BGM.

252, etc., an embodiment of the "Giant Tank Reach" has been shown, but it may be possible to implement multiple types of "Giant Tank Reach" with different display modes of enemy tanks and operation sections to be operated. . Also, the degree of expectation for the "giant tank reach" may vary depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit to be operated. Even in this case, it is preferable that the expectation level of the "huge tank reach" is higher than the expectation level of the "enemy tank destruction reach". In addition, it is preferable that the switching display of the background image is performed in the same manner even in the "giant tank reach" of such a different aspect. For example, in a plurality of "Giant Tank Reach", a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like may be displayed, and the background image may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

233, etc., an embodiment of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" has been shown, but a plurality of types of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" with different display modes of enemy tanks and operation units to be operated can be executed. good too. Also, the degree of expectation of the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be changed depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit to be operated. Even in this case, the degree of expectation should be lower than that of the "giant tank reach". In addition, it is preferable to switch and display the background image in the same manner in the "reach to destroy the enemy tank" in such a different manner. For example, in a plurality of "giant tank reach", a black background concealing image may be displayed and the background image may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233, a simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed during the effective operation period to suggest the result of the special lottery. During execution, the operation valid period was not set, and a simulated image simulating the operation unit was not displayed.
Similarly, in the other effects (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hand hitting, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect), the first period to the third period , it is preferable not to set it as an operation effective period and not to display a simulated image simulating an operation unit (that is, a simulated image simulating an operation unit is not always displayed).
In this way, the first period to the third period in all the ready-to-win productions are not set as the operation valid period, and it is preferable not to display a simulated image simulating the operation unit (that is, the operation unit is simulated). simulated images are not always displayed).
It should be noted that the operation effective period is not set, and the first period to the third period are periods during which the simulated image simulating the operation unit is not displayed (that is, the simulated image simulating the operation unit is not always displayed). The period is merely an example, and the fourth period may be included, or any one of the first to fourth periods or any plurality of periods among these periods may be used.
By adopting such a configuration, the display contents of the display area are simplified, and the situation where the player cannot operate the operation unit without noticing that the operation acceptance of the operation unit is enabled can be prevented. can be prevented.

While the variable effect sound is output during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the output of the variable effect sound may be suppressed in the special displays A to F.
An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 252 and the like will be described below with reference to FIG. 272(a). Similarly, an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 270 will be described with reference to FIG. 272(b).
In the effect example shown in FIG. 272(a), the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t13 when the background concealing image is displayed to timing t19. Also, the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
In the effect example shown in FIG. 272(b), even during the period from timing t10 to timing t16 when the background concealing image is displayed, the fluctuating effect sound is not suppressed, and the output in the normal state is maintained.
Thus, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 272(a), the first period is a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see, the second period is a period in which the background image is not visible, The output state of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed during the third period during which the background image gradually becomes more visible.
On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 272(b), the output state of the fluctuating sound effects of the fluctuating sound effects is maintained in the normal state without being suppressed even during the first period to the third period. Was.
When the background image is switched in this manner, the output state of the fluctuating sound effect may be set to the suppressed state, and when the background image is not switched, the normal state may be maintained as the output state of the fluctuating sound effect.

Although an example in which the first period to the third period are in the suppression state has been shown, the first period to the third period are the period until the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. In at least one period of , the fluctuating effect sound may be suppressed. After the fourth period, the suppression state may be maintained even during the period in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the normal state may be set at the timing when the next variable display is started.

Note that the suppression state may be a state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is reduced compared to the normal state and output. Alternatively, it may be in a state in which no fluctuating effect sound is output. In this case, although the variable effect sound is internally reproduced, the output volume may be internally set to 0 (muted) so that the variable effect sound is not output from the speaker. Alternatively, the variable effect sound may not be output from the speaker by ending or interrupting the reproduction of the variable effect sound.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 272(a), it is in the normal state from timing t19 to timing t36. good. In this case, it is preferable to start outputting the special fluctuating effect sound at timing t16 during the suppression state or timing t19 at the end of the suppression state. In addition, it is preferable to end the output of the special fluctuating effect sound at timing t36 when the suppression state is started or at timing t39 during the suppression state.

Not limited to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. In the pseudo continuous effect shown with reference to FIG. 261 and the like, and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG.

273 to 281, etc., a special effect "hold change chance effect" in the embodiment modified from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 123 to 272 and the like will be described. 273 to 275 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or modification). FIG. 280 shows a time chart in this embodiment. FIG. 281 shows a display example in the display area.

273 to 275 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 273 shows a background image, FIG. 274 shows a decorative pattern, and FIG. 275 shows a background masking image.
Data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modifications are stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.

273(a) shows a normal background image A. FIG. The normal background image A is an image representing a scene in a recording studio, a stand microphone, and a female singer character.
273(b) shows a normal background image B. FIG. The normal background image B is an image representing the scenery in the room of the female singer character and the installed furniture.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images displayed when the game state is the normal state.

FIG. 273(c) shows a special ready-to-win background image A displayed when the special ready-to-win effect “year-end song battle ready-to-win effect” is executed. The special reach background image A is an image representing the stage, the audience seats, and the name of the reach.
FIG. 273(d) shows a special ready-to-win background image B that is displayed when the special ready-to-win effect “the countdown ready-to-reach effect” is executed. The special reach background image B is an image showing the degree of expectation that the stage, the audience seats, the name of the reach, and the fluctuation result will result in a big hit.
The level of expectation when the “year-end song battle reach performance” is performed is set higher than the level of expectation when “the countdown reach performance” is performed. For example, the degree of expectation when the “year-end song battle ready-to-reach effect” is performed may be set to 50%, and the degree of expectation to be performed when “the countdown ready-to-reach effect” is performed may be set to 15%.
It should be noted that the "year-end song battle reach effect" and "the countdown reach effect" are the same effects as the "huge tank reach effect" and "enemy tank destruction reach effect" shown with reference to Figures 224 to 272. , Various embodiments of "Gigantic Tank Reach Production" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach Production" (production when switching background images, pseudo-continuous production, dialogue announcement production, production of operating various operation parts, etc.) It may be adopted in "battle reach production" and "the countdown reach production".

FIG. 273(e) shows a normal background image C displayed in a high probability time saving state or a low probability time saving state advantageous to the player. The normal background image C is an image showing to the player the number of consecutive big hits (the number of consecutive wins), the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive win state, and the right hitting. The numerical portion of the image "LIVE×15" indicates the number of consecutive big wins (number of consecutive wins), and the number of consecutive wins in this example is 15 times. In addition, the number portion of the image "Number of spectators: Over 12,000 people" indicates the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive game, and in this example, 12,000 or more game balls were paid out. is shown. In addition, the normal background image C is specifically displayed during the variable display or stop display of the decorative pattern in the high probability time saving state or the low probability time saving state, or during the big hit that occurred in the high probability time saving state or the low probability time saving state. be done.

FIG. 274 shows examples of decorative symbols that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Each decorative design consists of a left decorative design, a middle decorative design, and a right decorative design. These decorative symbols are appropriately switched and displayed according to the progress of the production and the game situation.

FIG. 274(a) shows a normal decorative pattern. This figure shows an example of the normal decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed. Display is also possible.
The display mode of the normal decorative pattern is determined according to the result of the special lottery. When the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a square pattern (for example, "222"), and when the result of the special lottery is not a big win. It is stopped and displayed in a form (for example, "352") that is not square. FIG. 274(a) shows, as an example, a state in which the normal decoration pattern is stopped at "538".
A normal decorative pattern consists of a vertically long rectangular background area, and numbers and characters (or letters) arranged in front of the background area. Numbers and characters (or letters) have a one-to-one correspondence.

FIG. 274(b) shows a special ready-to-win decoration pattern that is displayed when the special ready-to-win effects “year-end song battle ready-to-win effect” and “the countdown ready-to-win effect” are executed.
The special ready-to-win decorative pattern is displayed at a predetermined position (near the center in the drawing) in the display area and smaller than the normal decorative pattern. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the effect suggesting the result of the special lottery executed during the execution of the "year-end song battle reach effect" and "the countdown reach effect".
FIG. 274(c) is a modification of the special reach decoration pattern. In this way, a special ready-to-win decorative pattern in which numbers are displayed with more emphasis may be adopted. It is displayed during the execution of a special reach effect (especially at the end).
In addition, FIG.274(b) and FIG.274(c) have shown the state in which the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
It should be noted that during execution of a special ready-to-win effect (particularly in the middle stage), only the left and right decorative patterns may be displayed in a temporary stop mode, and the middle decorative pattern may not be displayed.

FIG. 274(d) shows decorative symbols displayed during right hitting. The decorative pattern during hitting to the right is a decorative pattern displayed in a game state in which the player is required to hit to the right, such as a low probability time saving state or a high probability time saving state. FIG. 274(d) shows a state in which the decoration symbol "538" is stopped during right-handed strokes.

The special reach decorative pattern and the right-handed middle decorative pattern do not have characters or letters, unlike the normal decorative pattern, and have only numbers. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the visual recognition mode of the pattern.

The decorative patterns are displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the start of the variable display, and for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) before the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed when a ready-to-win state occurs, or when the variable display ends. Since the scrolling is slow for the preceding predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the player can clearly see the decoration pattern. Note that such a fluctuation state may be referred to as low-speed fluctuation.
On the other hand, outside of these periods, the decorative patterns are displayed semi-transparently and the scrolling speed becomes high. becomes impossible or difficult to recognize. Note that such a fluctuation state may be referred to as high-speed fluctuation.
It should be noted that, when starting the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display may be suddenly started with the high-speed variation without performing the display with the low-speed variation.
FIG. 274(e) is a diagram schematically showing a decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation with an arrow pointing downward. ing.

In the case of slowly scrolling the patterns, for example, the patterns may be scrolled and displayed by two patterns per second. It should be noted that the speed is not limited to 2 patterns per second, and any speed within the range of 1 to 3 patterns can be selected. By slowly scrolling the patterns in this way, it becomes easy to identify the type of the pattern.
In addition, a plurality of (two or more) variation modes having different variation speeds may be provided as the low-speed variation mode. For example, a low speed variation of scrolling one symbol per second, a low speed variation of scrolling two symbols per second, and a low speed variation of scrolling three symbols per second may be provided. In addition, at the time of variable display, low-speed variation may be performed in any one of these modes.
The variable display in which the symbols scroll by one symbol per second may be referred to as super low speed variation, and the variable display in which the symbols scroll by three symbols per second may simply be referred to as low speed variation.

Further, when the patterns are scrolled at high speed, for example, the patterns may be scrolled and displayed by 10 patterns per second. Note that the speed is not limited to 10 patterns per second, and any speed within the range of 8 to 12 patterns can be selected. By adopting a mode in which the symbols are scrolled at high speed in this way, it becomes difficult or impossible to identify the type of the symbols.
In addition, a plurality (two or more) of fluctuation modes having different fluctuation speeds may be provided as the mode of high-speed fluctuation. For example, a high-speed variation in which 8 symbols are scrolled per second, a high-speed variation in which 10 symbols are scrolled per second, and a high-speed variation in which 12 symbols are scrolled per second may be provided. In addition, at the time of variable display, high-speed variation may be performed in any one of these modes.
It should be noted that the variable display in which the symbols are scrolled by 12 symbols per second may be referred to as super high speed variation, and the variable display in which the symbols are scrolled by 10 symbols per second may be referred to simply as high speed variation.

As shown in FIG. 274, the normal decorative pattern, the special reach decorative pattern, and the right-hand hitting decorative pattern are distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters and letters, the size of numbers, and the like. is possible. The numerals forming the decorative pattern are not limited to Arabic numerals, and may be written in Chinese numerals or Roman numerals.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can recognize the production situation and the game state according to the type of the decoration pattern, the number, and the like.

FIGS. 275(a) to 275(c) show examples of background concealed images. The background concealing image in this embodiment has the same functions as those shown with reference to FIGS. 228, 229, and the like.
The background concealing image in this embodiment is used when switching between the normal background image A and the normal background image B and the special reach background image displayed when the "year-end song battle reach effect" or "the countdown reach effect" is executed. Is displayed. The background masking images shown in FIGS. 275(a) to 275(c) consist of white images imitating a notebook, and are displayed so as to move from the top to the bottom of the display area. It is displayed so as to move from the bottom of the area, and the background image and decoration pattern are changed during this period.
FIGS. 275(d) to 275(f) show other examples of background concealed images. This background concealing image does not include the bomb character in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. be.

The outline of the “year-end song battle reach performance” will be described below with reference to FIG. Also, with reference to FIG. 277, the outline of "the countdown reach effect" will be described.

First, the left and right normal decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbols, and the ready-to-win state is established. 276(a) and 277(a) show the display state at this time.
Next, background concealed images A, background concealed image B, background concealed image C, background concealed image B, and background concealed image A are displayed in this order. Note that the background concealed image is displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 272 and the like.

Next, a special ready-to-reach background image A is displayed in the case of the "year-end song battle ready-to-reach production", and a special ready-to-reach background image B is displayed in the case of "the countdown ready-to-reach production". In addition, the titles of these reach effects are also displayed. 276(b) and 277(b) show the display state at this time. The displayed title ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed.
The color of the text that indicates the title of the reach effect is displayed in either white, red, or gold. Gold letters are set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher.

An image of a female singer character and a microphone is then displayed. In addition, in the case of the "year-end singing battle ready-to-reach production", an image of the evil princess character is displayed, and in the case of "the countdown reach production", an image of the Zagohime character is displayed. FIGS. 276(c) and 277(c) show the display state at this time.

Next, a performance display is performed in which the female singer character and the evil princess character or the small fish princess character compete for the microphone over a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the result of the special lottery is suggested by the result of the performance display. Specifically, if the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone, the special ready-to-win decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in double-three mode, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. FIGS. 276(d) and 277(d) show the display state at this time. After that, the background concealing image is displayed again, and the normal decoration pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of double eyes and the normal background image are displayed. FIGS. 276(e) and 277(e) show the display state at this time.
On the other hand, when the microphone is taken away by the evil princess character or the small fish princess character, the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a ready-to-win failure mode to indicate that the result of the special lottery is to lose. FIGS. 276(f) and 277(f) show the display state at this time. After that, the background concealing image is displayed again, and the normal decoration pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach-losing mode and the normal background image are displayed. FIGS. 276(g) and 277(g) show the display state at this time.
After a state in which the normal decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the normal decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, and after that, the state is shifted to a big winning game state or the next variable display is started. .
In addition, it is preferable to output a predetermined song from the speaker during the special ready-to-win effect. In addition, different songs may be output for the “year-end song battle ready-to-reach production” and “the countdown ready-to-reach production”.

The evil princess character or the miscellaneous princess character may appear twice during one special ready-to-win effect. In this case, for example, if the female singer character can hold the microphone twice in succession during the special ready-to-win production, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, and the female singer character holds the microphone once. If you cannot continue, or if you were able to hold the microphone the first time but could not hold the microphone the second time, the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a lost mode. good.
In this case, after the display shown in FIGS. 276(d) and 277(d) is performed, the evil princess character or the small fish princess character is displayed as shown in FIGS. 276(c) and 277(c). It is preferable to make the character appear again to indicate whether or not the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone.
In this way, the special ready-to-win effect is divided into the first half and the second half, and a predetermined display (in this case, holding the microphone) is performed, so that the player is informed that the result of the special lottery is a big win. may be as shown.
It should be noted that the evil princess character or the miscellaneous princess character may appear three times or more, not limited to the first half and the latter half.

After the display states shown in FIGS. 276(d), 276(f), 277(d), and 277(f), the special reach background image and the character (female singer character) are displayed without displaying the background concealing image. , evil princess character, small fish princess character), the temporarily stopped special ready-to-win decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed. At this time, the small special ready-to-win decorative pattern may be changed to a large special ready-to-win decorative pattern shown in FIG. 274(c) and displayed stopped.

Predetermined characters may be displayed during the execution of the special ready-to-win effect, and the degree of expectation for the big win may be indicated by the color of the characters. For example, the line "Don't let go of the microphone!" may be displayed as the line of the female singer character. FIG. 278(a) shows a state in which the evil princess character appears during the "year-end song battle reach performance" and the words "Don't let go of the microphone!" are displayed as the lines of the female singer character. The dialogue image is displayed while the evil princess character and the miscellaneous princess character appear and are competing for the microphone. No display is made.
The serif color is displayed in one of the following colors: white, red, or gold. It is good to set so that the expectation of a big hit may become high.

Similarly, a cut-in image may be displayed during execution of the special ready-to-win effect to indicate the degree of expectation. FIG. 278(b) shows an example in which a window image, a line image of "I will sing until the end!!", and an image of a female singer character are displayed as cut-in images. The cut-in image is displayed while the evil princess character and the small fish princess character appear and are competing for the microphone. A message is displayed as to whether or not it is possible.
The color of the image displayed as the cut-in image (at least one of the entire window image, part of the window image (for example, the frame portion), dialogue image, and female singer character image) is green, red, or gold. It is displayed in one of the colors, and if you set it so that the red image has a higher expectation of a big hit than the green image, and the golden image has a higher expectation of a big hit than the red image. good.

In addition, during the special ready-to-win effect, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation of a button (for example, the operation button 401 or the attack button 3710) may be generated to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit. .
For example, a cheering message image showing cheering from the audience may be displayed in response to button operation, and the degree of expectation may be indicated according to the amount of cheering indicated by the cheering message image.
FIG. 279(a) shows a display state when an evil princess character is displayed. In this state, button operation reception is valid for a predetermined time, an image simulating the shape of the button is displayed, and the button operation is instructed. FIG. 279(b) shows the display state at this time. A gauge indicating the effective period of operation is displayed below the image for instructing the button operation.
At the timing when the player presses the button or at the timing when the effective period of the button operation expires, a cheering message image for cheering the female singer character is displayed. The number of displayed cheering message images indicates the degree of expectation for a big win. As the number of support message images increases, the degree of expectation should be set higher.
FIG. 279(c) shows a state in which two cheering message images are displayed. Also, FIG. 279(d) shows a state in which four cheering message images are displayed. In this case, the latter display state in which four support message images are displayed has a higher expectation of a big win.
In addition, when an effect of instructing a button operation is performed, the degree of expectation should be set higher than when an effect of instructing a button operation is not performed (that is, when the cheering message image is not displayed).
It should be noted that the display of the cheering message image ends after a predetermined period of time, after which a display indicating whether or not the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone (either display shown in FIG. 276(d) or FIG. 276(f) ) is performed.
Although the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710 are given as examples of button operations, button operations for the mission button 3700 and defense button 3740 may be requested.

By adopting such a configuration, the image instructing the button operation is displayed, giving the player a sense of expectation that the image instructing the button operation will be displayed during the special ready-to-win effect. In this case, the player expects that more cheering message images will be displayed.

It should be noted that the display may be performed based on the operation of the lever (the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 137, etc.) instead of the button operation. In that case, a predetermined number (for example, 4 to 8) of penlight images are displayed in place of the cheering message image, and the greater the number of displayed penlight images, the higher the expectation. good too.
FIG. 279(e) shows a display state in which an image instructing lever operation is displayed. FIG. 279(f) shows a display state in which six penlight images are displayed after the lever operation (or after the effective period of the lever operation has expired).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 276 and 277, the reserved image and all the reserved images in the first to fourth reserved display areas are displayed during the special ready-to-win effect. During the ready-to-win effect, only the pending image may be displayed. Alternatively, during the special ready-to-win effect, all pending images including the pending image may not be displayed.
Also, an embodiment has been described in which the background concealing image is displayed at the end of the special ready-to-win effect, and the special ready-to-win background image is switched to the normal background image. The image and the reserved images in the first to fourth reserved display areas become gradually visible. Although the reserved images are displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas, the reserved images may not be displayed.

The “hold change chance presentation” will be described below with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281. FIG. FIG. 280 shows a time chart showing an embodiment of "hold change chance presentation". Also, FIG. 281 shows a display example in the display area when the "holding change chance effect" is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 280(a), description will be given of the effect mode when the "holding change chance effect" is not performed. The decorative patterns displayed in the drawings shown in FIGS. 281 to 284 are normal decorative patterns.
At timing t0, the variable display is started, and after one second has passed, the display state is such that the decorative pattern is varied at high speed. FIG. 281(a) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. The number of suspensions is two, the normal suspension image is displayed in the suspension display area, and the normal suspension image is displayed in the first suspension display area and the second suspension display area. The details of the reserved display area, the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area are as described above with reference to FIG.
In this production example, the viewing mode of the reserved image does not change until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at timing t31.
From timing t31 to timing t32, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The display of the pending image ends at timing t31. After the timing t32, the variable display and the jackpot game are started from the next time onwards. At the timing (timing t32) when the next variable display is started, the display of the new pending image is started.

Next, a description will be given of an effect mode when the "hold change chance effect" is executed with respect to effect example 01 to effect example 04 shown in FIG. 280(b). In the "suspended change chance effect", a suspended concealing image indicating whether or not the currently displayed suspended image changes to another suspended image is displayed in front of the suspended image. The reserved concealment images are a first reserved concealment image in which the Chinese character "song" is arranged in an octagonal area, a second reserved concealment image in which the Chinese character "hime" is arranged in an octagonal area, and an octagonal area. The third reserved concealment image in which the Chinese character ``den'' is arranged in the area, the fourth reserved concealed image in which the Chinese character ``setsu'' is arranged in the octagonal area, and the circumference has a radial shape. It consists of a substantially circular pending concealment effect image (for simplicity, it is written as “circular” in the drawing).

Rendering example 01 shows an rendering example in which the first pending concealment image is displayed in front of the normal pending image (white pending image) from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3.

In effect example 02, from timing t2 to timing t3, the first reserved concealing image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image, and from timing t3 to timing t4, the second reserved concealing image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image. is shown.
FIG. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4.

In effect example 03, from timing t2 to timing t3, the first reserved concealing image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image, and from timing t3 to timing t4, the second reserved concealing image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image. is displayed, and the third reserved concealment image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t4 to timing t5.
FIG. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4. FIG. 281(d) is a display example from timing t4 to timing t5.

In effect example 04, from timing t2 to timing t3, the first reserved concealing image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image, and from timing t3 to timing t4, the second reserved concealing image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image. is displayed, the third reserved concealment image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t4 to timing t5, and the fourth reserved concealment image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t5 to timing t6. , and a rendering example in which the suspended concealment effect image is displayed in front of the normal suspended image from timing t6 to timing t7. In this production example, the pending image after the change is displayed after timing t7.
FIG. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4. FIG. 281(d) is a display example from timing t4 to timing t5. FIG. 281(e) is a display example from timing t5 to timing t6. FIG. 281(f) is a display example from timing t6 to timing t7. FIG. 281(g) is a display example after timing t7.
At the timing when the fourth reserved concealment image is displayed at timing t5, it is confirmed that the reserved image changes to another reserved image, but in the present embodiment, the reserved concealment effect image is displayed. By delaying the timing of displaying the pending image after the change, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long time.

In rendering example 01 to rendering example 03, the display of the pending concealment image ends at timing t2 to timing t4, respectively, and the pending image that was displayed before the pending concealment image was displayed is displayed. FIG. 281(h) shows the display mode at this time.
When the display of the pending concealment image is terminated, the display of the pending concealment image may be terminated instantaneously, or may be terminated gradually. In the case of gradual termination, the pending image becomes gradually visible.
On the other hand, in production example 04, after the fourth pending concealment image and the pending concealment effect image are displayed, the display of the pending concealment effect image ends at timing t7, and the normal The reserved image is displayed in a color (blue in this case) indicating that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the reserved image in . FIG. 281(g) shows the display mode at this time.
In this way, the display of the characters ``song'', ``hime'', ``den'', and ``setsu'' (or the display of the characters ``setsu''), the display of the pending concealment effect image, the display of the relevant pending image, and the display effect in stages progresses, and finally the display mode of the pending image suggests the degree of expectation of the big win, so that the expectation of the player can be increased compared to the case where the display mode of the pending image suddenly changes. .

In addition, an example of a production in which the blue pending image is displayed at the end of the display of the pending concealment effect image is shown, but not only the blue pending image, but also green, red, and gold indicating that the expectation of the big hit is higher. , etc., may be displayed. With such a configuration, when the fourth reserved concealing image is displayed, the player waits with anticipation as to which reserved image will be displayed.
It should be noted that, in each effect example, the reserved image is not visible during the period in which the reserved concealment image is continuously displayed, but a part of the reserved concealment image may be made visible. In this case, it is possible to recognize what color the pending image is displayed as the pending.

The “holding change chance effect” may be executed when the holding image other than the normal holding image is displayed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 280(c), an example of an effect when the "holding change chance effect" is executed when the blue pending image is displayed will be described.
Rendering example 05 shows an rendering example in which only the first suspended concealment image is displayed when the blue suspended image is displayed. In this effect example, the blue pending image is displayed even after the timing t2 when the display of the first pending concealment image ends. Note that even when only the second reserved concealing image and the third reserved concealing image are displayed, the blue reserved image is displayed after the display of these reserved concealing images is completed.

Rendering example 06 shows an rendering example in which even the suspended concealment effect image is displayed while the blue suspended image is being displayed. In this production example, at timing t7 when the display of the pending concealment effect image ends, the display of the pending image in green, red, gold, etc., which has higher expectations than the pending image in blue, is started.

280(a) and 280(b), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed sequentially after timing t10, and all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t21. The timing of the stop display of is delayed, and in the period until then, other productions described in this specification such as pseudo-ren production, “year-end song battle reach production”, and “the countdown reach production” are executed You may make it

In this way, in the "holding change chance effect", the pending concealment images are displayed step by step in a predetermined order, and when the final stage of the pending concealing image is displayed (the fourth pending concealing image is displayed) case), the pending image is changed to the pending image indicating that the degree of expectation is higher and displayed. On the other hand, when the display of the reserved concealment image does not reach the final stage (when only the first to third reserved concealed images are displayed), the reserved image does not change and the reserved image is displayed. The pending image displayed before the display of the concealed image is started is displayed as it is.
According to such a configuration, the player will have a great interest in whether or not the display of the pending concealment image will progress to the last "theory", and it is possible to provide the player with a new interest. Become.

FIG. 280(b) shows an example in which a maximum of four reserved concealment images (first to fourth reserved concealment images) are displayed. Good or less. For example, in the rendering example shown with reference to FIG. 280(f), the seventh pending concealment image may be displayed, the details of which will be described later.

An example of a presentation is shown in which the pending concealment image is instantly switched at predetermined timings (timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, timing t6, etc.). You may display so that it may switch to an image gradually. For example, in an octagonal area, the kanji character for "song" is moved to the left, while the kanji character for "princess" appears from the right side, thereby dynamically switching the pending concealment images. may FIG. 282(a) shows the display mode of the pending concealment image during switching. Note that it is desirable to execute such switching display in a period of about 0.1 to 0.3 seconds.

Rendering example 01 to rendering example 03 show an example in which the pending concealment image is displayed only partway through. Instead of making it visible, the pending concealment image may be gradually erased over a predetermined period of time (eg, 1 second). For example, the transparency may be gradually increased so that the reserved image becomes visible.
FIG. 282(b) shows a state in which the first reserved concealment image is displayed semi-transparently. In this state, it is possible to recognize the Chinese characters attached to the reserved concealed image and the shape and color of the reserved image.

Although an example of effect is shown in which the reserved concealment image is suddenly displayed at a position overlapping with the reserved image, the reserved concealment image is displayed at a position not overlapping with the reserved image, moved toward the reserved image, and the reserved image is displayed. may be overlapped with
282(c) to 282(e) show a large first pending concealment image in the upper left corner of the display area, and then gradually reduce the size of the first pending concealment image toward the pending image. 10 shows a display example in which the first reserved concealing image is displayed in such a manner that it is moved and finally superimposed on the front side of the reserved image.

A pending concealment image may be displayed within the pending image. FIGS. 283(a) to 283(d) show display examples in which the first to fourth reserved concealment images are superimposed on the front side of the reserved image. Note that the suspended concealment effect image may also be displayed superimposed on the front side of the suspended image. Note that the first to fourth reserved concealment images may be composed of characters only.

Note that the first to fourth pending concealment images and the pending concealment effect image displayed in the "holding change chance effect" are images that are displayed temporarily, and must continue to be displayed in front of the pending image. no. That is, the display of the first to fourth reserved concealment images and the reserved concealment effect image ends at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative design, and at least immediately before the decorative design stops varying, a predetermined mode is set. An effect is executed so that the reserved image (white, blue, etc.) can be visually recognized. For example, in rendering examples 01 to 04, the display of the first to fourth pending concealment images and the pending concealment effect image ends by timing t7 at the latest.

Other display modes may be adopted as the display modes of the first to fourth reserved concealment images. FIG. 283(e) is an example of a square (tilted at 45 degrees). FIG. 283(f) is an example in which the size of Chinese characters displayed within an octagonal area is increased. FIG. 283(g) is an example in which the color inside the octagonal area is green. Also, the color of characters is not limited to the color within the area, and green may be used. Alternatively, a retained concealment image that is a combination of these modes may be employed.
Further, depending on these display modes, the degree of expectation that characters will be executed to the end or the degree of expectation of a big hit in the "holding change chance effect" may be indicated.
Specifically, compared to the case of displaying the pending concealment image in the modes shown in FIGS. However, the degree of expectation that characters will be executed to the end or the degree of expectation of a big hit may be increased.
It should be noted that there is a case where the pending concealment image with 100% expectation that the character will be executed to the end or the expectation degree of the jackpot will be displayed in any one of the first to fourth pending concealment images. may
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player regarding whether or not the pending concealment image will be displayed to the end and the degree of expectation of the big hit when the pending concealment image is displayed to the end.

With reference to FIGS. 281(f) and 281(g), at the timing (timing t7) when the display of the pending concealment effect image ends, an example is shown in which the pending image is changed and displayed. At the timing when the display of the image ends, an effect image that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a predetermined event may be displayed in front of the pending image.
Fig. 284(a) and Fig. 284(b) are effect images including the characters "chance" and "extremely hot". Each display example shows an effect image indicating the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit. It should be noted that the latter production image has a higher degree of expectation.
FIG. 284(c) shows a display example in which an effect image including characters "waiting" indicating that some effect will be executed before the end of the variable display is displayed. Note that when the effect is executed, the display of this effect image ends, and the pending image becomes visible.
FIG. 284(d) shows a display example in which an effect image including the characters "Live Reach", which foretells the occurrence of "Year-end Song Battle Reach effect" or "The Countdown Reach effect", is displayed. . It should be noted that the type of ready-to-win effect to occur may be indicated by more clearly displaying an effect image including the characters "Year-end Song Battle" and "The Countdown". At the timing when the ready-to-win effect is started, the display of the effect image ends, and the pending image becomes visible.
It should be noted that the effect image including the characters "Utahime Densetsu" shown in FIG. 284(e) is also a effect image showing that the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The effect images shown in FIGS. 284(c) and 284(d) show that the display ends in the middle of the variation of the decorative design and the pending image becomes visible. The effect images shown in FIGS. 284(b) and 284(e) may be terminated while the decorative design is changing, and the reserved image may become visible, or the decorative design may be stopped. The display may be continued until the effect image is displayed so that the pending image is not visible after the effect image is displayed. In this case, the effect image will have substantially the same function as the reserved image.
Although an example of suggesting or forewarning the occurrence of a given event with characters has been shown, the occurrence of a given event is suggested or foretold by means of display modes other than letters (color, shape, icon, etc., or combinations thereof). You may do so.

An example of starting the ``suspension change chance effect'' immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern changes at high speed has been shown, but the ``suspension change chance effect'' may be started at other timings.
For example, at the start of the pseudo-continuous production (for the pseudo-continuous production, see the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263, etc.), during the pseudo-continuous production, a special ready-to-reach production “Year-end song battle ready-to-reach production ” or “The countdown reach effect” (timing when the special reach background image becomes visible), when the title of the special reach effect is displayed (timing shown in FIG. 276 (b) and FIG. 277 (b)) , During a special ready-to-win effect (timings shown in FIGS. 276(c) and 277(c)), the “hold change chance effect” may be started.
It should be noted that the end timing of the "suspended change chance effect" in these cases ends during the pseudo-continuous effect or special ready-to-win effect.

Note that the "hold change chance effect" may be executed one or more times, and the execution timing may be any one of these timings. For example, it may be executed twice or more during the high-speed fluctuation before the decorative pattern reaches the ready-to-win state. Alternatively, the first "suspended change chance effect" may be executed during the pseudo continuous effect, and the second "suspended change chance effect" may be executed during the special ready-to-win effect.

Next, another presentation example will be described.
Rendering examples 07 to 09 in FIG. A modification is shown in which a hidden image is displayed. In this modification, depending on the type of the fourth reserved concealing image, a case where the reserved image changes with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) and a case where the reserved image always changes are provided.

First, with reference to rendering example 07 and rendering example 08, a description will be given of the rendering mode in the case where the fourth pending concealment image of the type in which the pending image changes at a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) is displayed.
In production example 07 and production example 08, ``hold'', ``hold'', ``up'', and ``hi'' are displayed in order from timing t2 to timing t6. is not performed. On the other hand, in the production example 08, a display that promotes the maintenance image is performed at timing t7. In this way, when "-" is displayed as the fourth reserved concealment image, display is performed to promote the reserved image with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

Next, with reference to rendering example 09, a description will be given of the rendering mode in the case where the fourth suspended concealment image of the type in which the suspended image is always changed is displayed.
In the production example 09, "hold", "hold", "up", and "rise" are displayed in order from timing t2 to timing t6. After that, at timing t8, a display for promoting the pending image is performed. In this way, when "rise" is displayed as the fourth reserved concealment image, the display for promoting the reserved image is performed with a probability of 100%.

Although the four characters "Uta", "Princess", "Ten", and "Theory" are displayed as an example, three characters or five or more characters may be displayed.
In addition, Kanji characters ("Uta", "Princess", "Ten", "Setsu", "Hold", "Tome", "Upper", and "Noboru") are shown as examples of characters included in the pending concealment image. Hiragana (e.g. "U""ta""Hi""Me"), katakana (e.g. "U""ta""hi""me"), alphabetical English (e.g. "D""I","V", and "A") may be adopted.
In addition, an example in which the characters included in the hold concealment image are the same until the middle and are different from the middle ”), but the reserved Some of the English spellings of the characters included in the concealment image may be the same and some may be different (“C” and “G”). If the displayed character string is "CHANCE", the on-hold image is promoted with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) in the same manner as "on hold", and the displayed character string is "CHANGE". In this case, the pending image may be promoted with a probability of 100% in the same manner as "pending increase".

After the reserved concealment effect image is displayed, instead of changing the reserved image immediately, the reserved image may be displayed to be promoted after waiting for a predetermined period of time. It should be noted that during standby, it is preferable to display an effect image "waiting" shown in FIG. 284(c).
Rendering example 10 is an rendering example in which a rendering image "waiting" is displayed from timing t7 to timing t22, and the pending image is promoted at timing t22. In production example 10, the pending image is promoted while the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
Effect example 11 is an effect example in which an effect image "waiting" is displayed from timing t7 to timing t27, and the pending image is promoted at timing t27. In production example 11, the pending image is promoted while the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Although the example of displaying the effect image "waiting" while waiting for the pending image to be promoted has been shown, other effect images may be displayed. For example, effect images such as "waiting for change on hold" and "change on hold" may be displayed.
Alternatively, an effect image including all of the characters displayed as the first to fourth reserved concealment images, such as "pending excellent" and "pending rising", may be displayed.

Promotion of the pending image may be executed at other timings.
For example, at the start of the pseudo-continuous production (for the pseudo-continuous production, see the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263, etc.), during the pseudo-continuous production, a special ready-to-reach production “year-end song battle ready-to-reach production ” or “The countdown reach effect” (timing when the special reach background image becomes visible), when the title of the special reach effect is displayed (timing shown in FIG. 276 (b) and FIG. 277 (b)) , during a special ready-to-win effect (timings shown in FIGS. 276(c) and 277(c)), the pending image may be promoted.

Under the condition that the "suspension change chance effect" progresses to a predetermined stage (display of the fourth pending concealment image), a effect image is displayed that suggests that the pending image will be promoted or a special effect will be performed. However, there may be a case in which an effect mode in which a pending concealment image is further displayed after progressing to a predetermined stage may be implemented.
In production example 12 shown in FIG. 280(f), as the first to fourth reserved concealing images, the reserved concealing images with the characters "hold", "hold", "change", and "change" are displayed. pattern. Rendering example 13 shows patterns in which "H", "Hold", "Change", "Change", "Extreme", "A", and "T" are displayed as the first to seventh reservation concealment images.
In the case where the "hold change chance effect" of the example 12 of the effect is executed and the case of the "hold change chance effect" of the example 13 of the effect is executed, the latter is more likely to be promoted to the high expected pending image. You may do so.
Further, when the "holding change chance effect" of production example 12 is executed, it is promoted to any of the blue to red pending images, but not to the gold pending image, and the production example 13 " When the "suspended change chance effect" is executed, the image may not be promoted to the blue pending image, but may be promoted to any one of green to gold pending images.
Rendering example 14 shows patterns in which ``hold'', ``hold'', ``change'', ``change'', ``wait'', ``machine'', and ``middle'' are displayed as the first to seventh reserved concealment images. In this case, after the pending concealment effect image is displayed, the effect image of "waiting" is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time, the pending image is promoted. Rendering example 14 may also be configured to be promoted to the pending image with higher expectations than rendering example 12 in the same manner as rendering example 13 is executed.

An example of executing the "suspended change chance effect" for the pending image has been shown, but for any of the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas, the "suspended change chance effect" may be executed. In this case, whether or not to execute the "suspended change chance effect" is determined based on the prefetch of the pending. Further, the pending concealment image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the pending image corresponding to the pending object to be prefetched. In addition, the "suspended change chance effect" may be executed within a single variable display of decorative patterns, or may be executed over a plurality of variable displays of decorative patterns. good. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed multiple times, the reserved image moves leftward, but if the reserved concealment image is also moved leftward together with the reserved image good.
For example, the execution of the "suspension change chance effect" may be performed within a period in which a suspension image corresponding to a certain suspension is displayed in the second suspension display area. Alternatively, the execution of the "suspended change chance effect" is started during the period displayed in the second pending display area, and the execution of the "suspended change chance effect" is completed during the period displayed in the first pending display area. good too. Alternatively, even if the execution of the "suspended change chance effect" is started during the period displayed in the second pending display area, and the execution of the "suspended change chance effect" ends during the period displayed in the pending display area. good.

123 to 125, etc., when alphabetical letters "Z", "O", "N", and "E" are displayed as the first to fourth reserved concealment images (green ) may be displayed.
In addition, when the alphabets "Z", "O", "N", "E", "G", "O", "L", and "D" are displayed as the first to eighth reserved concealment images, FIGS. The look-ahead effect image (gold) shown with reference to FIG. 125 and the like may be displayed.
It should be noted that there may be a case where the eighth reserved concealment image is not displayed, and only one of the fifth to seventh reserved concealment images is displayed, in which case the prefetch effect image (green) is displayed. be done.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation when the gold prefetch effect image is displayed should be higher than the degree of expectation when the green prefetch effect image is displayed.
According to such an embodiment, the green look-ahead effect image is displayed to the player at the stage where 'Z', 'O', 'N', and 'E' are displayed as the first to fourth reserved concealment images. can recognize that Furthermore, the effect mode is visually recognized while expecting whether or not 'G', 'O', 'L', and 'D' are displayed as the fifth reserved concealment image to the eighth reserved concealment image and the golden prefetch effect image is displayed. It will be done.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, the look-ahead effect image is displayed over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols, but is displayed only in one variable display corresponding to the suspension. may be made.

In addition, "hold", "hold", "change", "change", "extreme", "hold", "hold", "change", "change", "extreme", "a", or "hold", "hold", "change", "change" , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , It is preferable to promote the pending image in the same manner as when "change" and "change" are displayed. The same effect mode may be adopted for "Z", "O", "N", "E", "G", "O", "L", and "D".

"Theory", "Ten", "Princess", and "Song" are displayed in order, and when the last "song" is displayed, special reach effects such as "Year-end song battle reach effect" and "The countdown reach effect" are displayed. ” may be executed. In this example, it is suggested that the character displayed at the end will perform a reach effect with a song as a motif. Become.

In the rendering example shown with reference to FIG. Seconds may be used.
Also, the display time may be different between the reserved concealment images. In example 01 of effect shown in FIG. 285(b), the display times of the first to fourth reserved concealing images are the same. Some of the pending concealment images have different display times.
Regarding the display time, in consideration of the effect to be produced, the display time is the same for any two of the first to fourth reserved concealment images, and the display time for one of them is the same. It is possible to have a relationship that one display time is longer and one display time is shorter.

For example, by setting the display time of the first to fourth reserved concealing images to be the same as in example 01 of the effect, the man-hours involved in creating the effect can be reduced.
Further, as in example 02 of effect, by lengthening the display time of the first pending concealment image, the player becomes more likely to notice that the "suspended change chance effect" has occurred, and the player can easily follow the progress of the subsequent effect. It becomes hard to overlook.
Further, as in example 03 and example 04 of presentation, by lengthening the display time of the second reserved concealing image and the third reserved concealing image, the display stage of the fourth reserved concealing image is approached when the fourth reserved concealing image is displayed. It is possible to make the player feel the anticipation of whether or not the image will be displayed for a long period of time.
In addition, by extending the display time of the fourth pending concealment image as in example 05 of the rendering, the "holding change chance rendering" reaches the final stage, and the satisfaction of confirming that the pending image is promoted. It is possible to make the player feel the feeling for a long period of time.
It is needless to say that the effect examples 06 to 09 and other modifications also have similar effects.

With reference to FIGS. 280 to 285 and the like, an embodiment has been shown in which the pending concealment image is displayed step by step, and when the pending concealment image is displayed up to the final stage, the display is performed to promote the pending image. 286 to 288, another embodiment of the "hold change chance presentation" will be described.

FIG. 286(a) shows a state in which the left decorative design and the right decorative design are the decorative designs of the same number and are temporarily stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state, and the middle decorative design fluctuates at high speed. As a background image, a normal background image A representing the scenery in the recording studio is displayed. In addition, there are four pending numbers corresponding to the first starting port 2002 .

Next, the variation speed of the middle decorative design slows down, and the middle decorative design becomes easily visible. FIG. 286(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, an image simulating a lightning bolt is displayed while moving toward the middle decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. FIG. 286(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the display of the image simulating lightning is terminated, and a window image with the characters "Diva Legend Suspended Change Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 286(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, a circular image is gradually displayed in two partitioned areas set on the left and right sides of the display area. FIGS. 286(e), 286(f), and 287(a) show a state in which a circular image indicating the partitioned area is gradually displayed.
Next, a pseudo pending image for effect having the same size as the pending image is displayed at the position of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area. The effect pseudo-holding image gradually increases in size and moves toward the left partitioned area.
Similarly, at the position of the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area, a pseudo reserved image for effect having the same size as the reserved image is displayed. The effect pseudo-holding image gradually increases in size and moves toward the partitioned area on the right side.
The color of the effect pseudo pending image is the same color as the pending image displayed at the movement source, and is white in this effect example. FIG. 287(b) shows a state in which two effect pseudo-holding images are moving.
It should be noted that the arrows in the drawing are drawn to show the movement mode of the pseudo-holding image for effect, and are not actually displayed. Such notation may also be used in other drawings (FIGS. 288 to 292, etc.).
Next, the movement of the effect pseudo-reserved image, which started to move from the first reserved display area, to the left partitioned area is completed. At the same time, the movement of the effect pseudo-reserved image, which started to move from the third reserved display area, to the partitioned area on the right side is completed. FIG. 287(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the pseudo-holding image for presentation is displayed with the kanji character "song" added to it in the left and right partitioned areas. FIG. 287(d) shows the display state at this time. In the left and right partitioned areas, in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. executed. The characters of the pseudo-pending image for presentation in the left partitioned area are large, and the characters of the pseudo-pending image for presentation in the left-side partitioned area are small. In this embodiment, the larger the character, the higher the probability that the last character will be displayed, and the player expects the large character to be displayed. It should be noted that the degree of probability of displaying up to the last character may be indicated by the color of the kanji instead of the size of the kanji.

In the partitioned area on the left side, the display is finally performed up to "Theory". On the other hand, in the partitioned area on the right side, only the song up to the first stage is displayed, and the pseudo-holding image for effect is displayed semi-transparently. FIGS. 287(e) and 287(f) show the display state at this time.

Next, for the left sectioned area, after the "theory" is displayed, a green effect pseudo pending image is displayed. Also, the message "Change?!" is displayed. FIG. 287(g) shows the display state at this time. In addition, you may display the character "Change?!"

Next, the green effect pseudo pending image displayed in the left divided area starts to move toward the pending image display area. At the same time, the display of the semi-transparent rendering pseudo pending image displayed in the right partitioned area ends. FIG. 288(a) shows the display state at this time.

When the pseudo-holding image for production is displayed up to the last "theory" and is displayed in a predetermined color, a production that collides with the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern and is repelled is performed, and the decorative pattern reaches and loses. , and an effect that collides with the middle decorative pattern and moves the middle decorative pattern to change the color of the reserved image to the color of the pseudo reserved image for production. Any of the effects to be executed is executed.
FIGS. 288(b) to 288(d) show display modes in the former case. Specifically, a display is performed in which the pseudo-holding image for effect collides with the middle decorative pattern, but is repelled, moves toward the left side of the display area, and finally moves out of the screen. After that, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of "3", "7", and "3", and then stopped.
FIGS. 288(e) to 288(g) show display modes in the latter case. Specifically, the pseudo-pending image for effect collides with the middle decorative pattern, knocks off the middle decorative pattern, and is displayed as the holding image in the holding display area. In addition, after the middle decorative pattern changes at high speed, a special ready-to-win effect ("the countdown ready-to-win effect" is exemplified in the figure) is executed.

In this way, if the pseudo pending image for effect is displayed to the end and the decorative pattern can be flipped, the pending image changes to a mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high, and a special ready-to-win effect is executed. and a big hit state with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, if the pseudo-holding image for effect is displayed to the end and the decorative pattern cannot be flipped off, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating failure.

With reference to FIGS. 286 to 288, an example in which the display of the pseudo-pending image for effect is started from the position where the normal holding image (white holding image) is displayed is shown, but the holding image different from the normal With reference to FIG. 289, an embodiment will be described in which the display of the pseudo-pending image for effect is started from the position where the (pending image of blue, green, etc.) is displayed.

Normal reserved images are displayed in the first reserved display area, the second reserved display area, and the fourth reserved display area, but a blue reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area. FIG. 289(a) shows the display state at this time.

Next, display and movement of the pseudo-holding image for effect is started. A blue pending image is displayed in the third pending display area, and the effect pseudo pending image is also a blue pending image. FIG. 289(b) shows a display state in which the effect pseudo hold image is moving. Also, FIG. 289(c) shows the display state when the movement of the effect pseudo-holding image is completed.

Next, character display of the effect pseudo-holding image is started. In the left-side partitioned area, "Uta" is displayed in small characters in a white rendering pseudo-holding image, and in the right-side partitioned area, "Uta" is displayed in large characters in a blue rendering pseudo-holding image. FIG. 289(d) shows the display state at this time.

In this embodiment, the probability that even the last character is displayed is higher when the effect pseudo-holding image is blue, green, or the like than when it is white. Also, when the last character is displayed, the color of the pseudo-pending image for presentation may change to a pseudo-pending image for presentation of a color with a higher degree of expectation.
For example, when the color of the pseudo reserved image for effect is blue, the reserved image may be changed to blue or green, which is a color with a higher degree of expectation than blue. Further, when the color of the pseudo-pending image for effect is red, the holding image may be changed to red or gold, which is a color with a higher degree of expectation than red.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to arouse great interest in the player as to which pending image will be moved to become the effect pseudo pending image.

With reference to FIGS. 286 to 288, an embodiment in which the character display of the pseudo-holding image for effect is performed in parallel is shown, but the character display of the pseudo-holding image for effect is performed in order one by one. An embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

Also in the present embodiment, the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed in the first reserved display area and the third reserved display area, and moves to the left and right divided areas. FIGS. 290(a) to 290(c) show the display state from the display of the partitioned area to the completion of movement of the effect pseudo-holding image.

A large "song" is then displayed in the left pane and a small "song" in the right pane. The character size indicates the degree of expectation that the last character will be displayed. In the present embodiment, display is performed in order from the left partitioned area. A radial image is displayed as a mark in the divided area where the display is being performed. FIGS. 290(d) to 290(f) show the display state at this time. As shown in the figure, the pseudo pending image for effect on the left side is displayed up to "Theory", but the pseudo pending image for effect on the right side is in a standby state with "Song" displayed.

The pseudo pending image for production on the left changes to green after being displayed up to "Theory". In addition, a message "Change?!" is displayed. FIG. 290(g) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the display mode of the pseudo-holding image for effect on the right side changes in order from "song". FIGS. 291(a) to 291(c) show the display state when "song" to "theory" are displayed. At this time, the pseudo-holding image for effect on the left side is in a standby state while being changed to green.

The pseudo pending image for production on the right side changes to blue after being displayed up to "Theory". In addition, a message "Change?!" is displayed. FIG. 291(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the characters "Change?!" and the radial image displayed on the right side are erased. FIG. 291(e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by sequentially changing the display mode of the pseudo-holding image for effect in a plurality of divided areas (the left divided area and the right divided area), the visibility of the change mode is improved.

Next, the pseudo reserved image for effect on the left side moves toward the reserved image, but is rebounded by the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern and moves toward the lower left. FIG. 291(f) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the pseudo reserved image for effect on the right side moves toward the reserved image, tilts the temporarily stopped middle decorative symbol, and moves so as to overlap the display position of the reserved image. FIG. 291(g) shows the display state at this time.

Finally, the dummy reserved image for effect on the right side is erased at the timing when it overlaps with the reserved image. At the same time, the reserved image is changed from the normal reserved image to blue, which is the color of the pseudo reserved image for effect on the right side, and displayed. At the same time, the high-speed variation of the middle decorative pattern is resumed. FIG. 291(h) shows the display state at this time. After that, special reach productions such as “year-end song battle reach production” and “the countdown reach production” are executed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 286-291, the sizes of the partitioned areas are the same size, but the partitioned areas of different sizes may be displayed. For example, it is also possible to display partitioned areas of three sizes, large, medium and small.
In FIGS. 292(a) to 292(d), a large divided area is displayed as the left divided area, and a medium-sized divided area is displayed as the right divided area, and the reserved image moves toward the left and right divided areas, A display example in which a pseudo-holding image for presentation is displayed is shown. It should be noted that the size of the pseudo-holding image for effect is displayed in the same size as the size of the displayed partitioned area.
Also, it is preferable that the larger the size of the divided area, the higher the probability that the last character will be displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 286 to 291, an example is shown in which two divided areas are displayed. may FIG. 292(e) is a display example when one partitioned area is displayed. FIG. 292(f) is a display example when three divided areas are displayed. FIG. 292(g) is a display example when four divided areas are displayed.
In the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the reserved images in the first reserved display area and the third reserved display area are displayed so as to move. There is a possibility that the pseudo reserved image for effect will be displayed in any one of the fourth reserved display regions.
It should be noted that it is preferable not to display a number of partitioned areas that is larger than the number of reservations. For example, if the number of reserved areas is 3, a lottery may be conducted so that the number of divided areas to be displayed is 1 to 3. Further, when the number of reservations is 0, it is preferable not to perform the "reservation change chance presentation". By adopting such a configuration, since the player is conscious of keeping the number of reservations large, it is possible to increase the operation of the gaming machine.

When multiple partitioned areas (2 to 4) are displayed, a production pattern in which the last character is displayed in all partitioned areas, in some partitioned areas the characters are displayed only halfway and in other partitions One of the production patterns that display up to the last character in the area (multiple successes and only one failure, only one success and multiple failures, etc.), or the production pattern that does not display up to the last character in all the partitioned areas. It is preferable to make the performance patterns executable, and determine the performance pattern to be executed based on the result of a special lottery.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 286 to 291, an example was shown in which the "holding change chance effect" automatically progresses, but the player's operation is used as a trigger for the "holding change chance effect" effect. may proceed.
For example, although the display of moving the dummy holding image for effect toward the partitioned area is automatically performed, the character display is performed by the player repeatedly pressing buttons (for example, the operation button 401, the attack button 3710, etc.) or pressing the button for a long time. If the button is not pressed, the effect display may not progress. For example, in a state in which a pseudo-holding image for effect is displayed (Fig. 293(a)), character display is started under the condition that the player continues to repeatedly press or hold down the button (Fig. 293(b) ), the display may be performed up to a predetermined character. It should be noted that if the player stops the repeated hits or long presses in the middle, the display will stop or end with, for example, "Princess" or "Den". When the player resumes repeated hits or long presses, the display of new characters is also resumed. It should be noted that an image of "push" may be displayed at the lower left of the display area to suggest the player to press the button. Alternatively, instead of "push", "continuous hit" and "long press" may be displayed to indicate the operation mode.
In FIG. 293(c), the first from the left and the fourth from the left are displayed up to the last "setsu", and the second from the left and the third from the left display the last It shows a display example when the "theory" of is not displayed.

In addition, in the state in which the pseudo-holding image for effect is displayed to move to the partitioned area (the state shown in FIG. 293(a)), the character display can be started by the player pressing the button. good. In addition, it is preferable that the characters are automatically displayed after that until a predetermined mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 293(c)) is performed.

In the display examples shown in FIGS. 293(a) to 293(c), a circular simulated image of the operation unit simulating the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710 is displayed. If requested, a simulated image of the operation section simulating the shape of the button may be displayed.
FIG. 293(d) shows an example of a simulated operation section image of the mission button 3700 displayed when the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested. Note that the simulated operation unit image may be displayed at a position other than the lower left corner of the display area, and the figure shows an example of displaying it in the upper center of the display area.
In addition to the simulated image of the operation unit, a gauge indicating the effective period of operation of the operation unit may be displayed. FIG. 293(d) shows an example in which a gauge image indicating the effective period of operation is displayed below the simulated image of the operation section. The black portion in the figure gradually shortens as the effective period of operation elapses, and the boundary part moves to the right. there is

It should be noted that, if such a button operation is not performed, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, display of a pseudo-holding image for effect in a predetermined manner (the same manner as when the button is operated) is displayed. A display effect for changing the reserved image may be performed.
Alternatively, if such a button operation is not performed, after a predetermined time has elapsed without progressing the character display, the display of the pseudo-holding image for effect is terminated, and in a manner according to the special lottery result It is preferable to stop and display the middle decorative pattern.

Characters are cyclically displayed in the order of ``Uta→Hime→Legend→Legend→Uta→Hime→Legend→Legend→…”, and one of the characters is displayed according to the player's button operation. good too. FIG. 293(e) shows a state in which each character is cyclically displayed. In this case as well, if "Uta", "Princess", and "Ten" are displayed, it is regarded as a failure, and if "Theory" is displayed, it is regarded as a success, and the color of the pseudo pending image for presentation may be changed. It should be noted that each character should be displayed at a speed at which each character can be recognized (for example, the display time of one character may be about 0.1 to 0.4 seconds).
In addition, when a plurality of defined areas are displayed, display of the plurality of defined areas may be determined at the same time by one operation of a button by the player.
Alternatively, the display of each divided area may be determined one by one in response to one button operation by the player. For example, as shown in FIG. 293(f), a simulated operation section image may be displayed for each simulated hold image for effect. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the pseudo-holding images for effect stop one by one from the left in response to one button operation.
Although an example in which the simulated operating part image is displayed overlapping each of the pseudo pending images for effect has been shown, the display position of the simulated operating part image is set slightly lower, and the pseudo pending image for effect and the simulated operating part are displayed. You may make it display so that it may not overlap with an image.

An operation instruction image for instructing an operation of the operation unit may overlap part or all of the pseudo-holding image for effect. FIG. 293(g) shows a display state in which the operation instructing image and the effect pseudo hold image are partially overlapped. Also, FIG. 293(h) shows a display state in which all of the operation instruction image and the effect pseudo hold image are superimposed.
Also, FIG. 294(a) shows a display state in which all of the simulated image of the operation section and the simulated hold image for effect overlap. In the example of this figure, the pseudo-holding images for effect are arranged in an arc shape. Specifically, the pseudo pending images for effect corresponding to the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas are displayed clockwise from a predetermined position on the left side of the simulated operation section image. .
It should be noted that the operation mode in the above-described embodiment can be adopted as the operation mode for stopping the pseudo-holding image for effect.

Either or both of the degree of expectation for a big win and the degree of expectation for the display of the "explanation" may be indicated depending on the display mode of the simulated operation section image and the operation instruction image. For example, if the simulated image of the operation section and the operation instruction image are displayed in white, red, gold, etc., and the expectation is higher when they are displayed in red than white and in gold rather than red. good.
In addition, the timing of displaying the simulated operation part image and the operation instruction image is the timing when at least all of the characters that can be finally displayed, such as "Uta→Princess→Den→Setsu", are displayed in the simulated hold image for production. It is desirable to do so later.

An effect pattern is shown in which each character is displayed cyclically, such as "Uta→Hime→Ten→Tsun→Uta→Hime→Ten→Tsun→...", and then one of the characters is stopped. In this production pattern, the color of each character of ``Uta'', ``Hime'', ``Den'', and ``Setsu'' is usually white, but any of the characters Having one or all colors other than white may indicate the degree of expectation that the theory will eventually be displayed. For example, by making the characters for "song" blue, it may be suggested that the expectation that "setsu" will be displayed is higher than when the characters for "song" are white. It should be noted that, when the "theory" is displayed, the pending image changes to the pending image in a manner indicating that the degree of expectation is higher (for example, the normal pending image changes to the blue pending image ), when the color of the characters is a color other than white, the expectation of a big win is substantially higher than when the characters are white.
Although white and blue are used as the colors of characters, other colors than blue may be used as colors other than white. For example, it may be displayed in one of the three colors of blue, green, and red. At this time, the probability of displaying "theory" may be increased in the order of blue, green, and red. Also in this case, the expectation of a big win is substantially higher in the order of blue, green, and red. In this way, each character is cyclically displayed as follows: "Uta → Princess → Legend → Legend → Song → Princess → Legend → Legend →..." The effect mode itself can also make the player interested.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation that the "theory" will be displayed may be suggested not only by the color but also by other display modes. For example, a star-shaped mark may be affixed to a character so that the greater the number of such marks, the higher the degree of expectation that the "theory" will be displayed.
In addition, before starting the display of characters (for example, the period between timing t1 and timing t2), the pending concealment effect image is displayed in a predetermined color (white, blue, green, red), and depending on the display mode, the "theory" is displayed. The character display may be started after indicating the degree of expectation to be displayed (higher in the order of white, blue, green, and red).

A production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first production pattern") in which each character is cyclically displayed as "Uta → Hime → Legend → Legend → Song → Hime → Legend → Legend → ..." is shown. However, this production pattern is modified to create a production pattern in which the characters "?→?→?→?→..." and "?" , may be referred to as a “second effect pattern”).
FIG. 294(b) shows a display example when the second effect pattern is employed in the display of the effect pseudo hold image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 292(g).
Also, FIG. 294(c) shows a display example when the second effect pattern is employed in the display of the effect pseudo hold image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 293(g).
Also, FIG. 294(d) shows a display example when the second effect pattern is employed in the display of the effect pseudo hold image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 293(a).

In the second effect pattern as well, it is preferable to use the same trigger as in the first effect pattern for displaying characters to stop. Any of the characters "den" and "theory" are stopped and displayed, and when "theory" is displayed, a display is performed to promote the pending image with a predetermined probability.
In addition to the four characters "Uta", "Princess", "Ten", and "Setsu", other characters may be displayed as the characters to be stopped and displayed. For example, characters such as ``red'' and ``gold'' may be statically displayed to display red or gold rendering pseudo-hold images. Alternatively, the word "promo" may be displayed to indicate that the hold is being promoted. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo-pending image for effect in a predetermined color, and to perform a display that promotes the suspension to the holding of the color of the pseudo-pending image for effect.
Alternatively, the character "hit" may be stopped and displayed to indicate that a big win will occur. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo pending image for effect in a special mode (for example, a mode including the character "hit") to promote the pending image to the pending image in a special mode.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 280 and 285, an example was shown in which the "suspended change chance effect" is performed only once during one time variation display of decorative symbols, but it may be performed multiple times. You can let it be. In that case, it is preferable that the execution of the next "suspension change chance effect" is started after a certain "suspension change chance effect" is completed.
For example, the first effect pattern may be executed two or more times during one time of variable display of the decorative symbols. Similarly, the second effect pattern may be executed two or more times.
Alternatively, after executing the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern may be executed, or after executing the second effect pattern, the first effect pattern may be executed.
Alternatively, the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the first effect pattern may be executed in this order, or the second effect pattern, the first effect pattern, and the second effect pattern may be executed in this order.
With such a configuration, there is a possibility that the display for promoting the pending image will be performed twice or more during one change, and in the first "holding change chance effect", it is assumed that the promotion has failed. Also, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of the second "holding change chance presentation". In addition, when the promotion is successful in the first "holding change chance presentation", the second "holding change chance presentation" is generated to give the player a sense of expectation for further promotion. can.

The button operation effective period may be the same length for the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern.
Alternatively, the length of the operation valid period in the first effect pattern and the length of the operation valid period in the second effect pattern may be different. For example, the length of the valid operation period in the first effect pattern may be longer than the length of the valid operation period in the second effect pattern. Alternatively, the length of the valid operation period in the second effect pattern may be longer than the length of the valid operation period in the first effect pattern.

In this way, the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed, the display mode of the reserved image is changed, and the variation result of the decorative pattern during variation indicates that the variation result indicates a big win, and the degree of expectation is high. It can make people feel interested. In addition, since the dummy holding image for effect is stopped and displayed by operating the operation unit, the player's desire to operate can be enhanced.

273 to 275, 295 to 297, etc., for the special effect "read-ahead effect when reach is lost" in the modified embodiment shown below with reference to FIGS. 123 to 272, etc. to explain. Note that FIG. 295 shows a time chart in this embodiment. 296(a) to 297(g) show display contents in the display area.

An outline of the mode of presentation shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 295(a) will be described. In this production mode, it is indicated by the display mode of the character or the like that the special reach production ("the countdown reach production") results in a loss, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are provisional in a mode indicating a loss. During stop display, effect display is performed based on the pending look-ahead result.
Specifically, as the effect display, after displaying a microphone icon image at the position where the middle decorative pattern is displayed, a small microphone icon image is displayed at the lower left of the display area. After that, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the prefetched hold is being variably displayed, the microphone icon image is displayed again at the position where the middle decorative design is variably displayed, and a special reach effect is performed. Suggests that it will occur (in response to the microphone icon being stocked, the production related to the microphone, "Year-end Song Battle Reach Production" and "The Countdown Reach Production" will occur). In this production example, a “year-end singing contest ready-to-reach production” is executed.

Specific aspects of production examples will be described in detail below.
Before timing t4 in FIG. 295(a), the microphone is stolen by the Zagohime character in "The Countdown Reach Production", suggesting to the player that the special lottery results are lost. Note that the number of reservations at this time is four. FIG. 296(a) shows the display state at this time.
At the timing t4, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure. FIG. 296(b) shows the display state at this time.
From timing t6 to timing t12, the background concealing image is displayed and the background image is switched from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A. FIG. 296(c) shows a display state in which the background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t6 to timing t7. FIG. 296(d) shows a display state in which the background concealed image C is displayed during the period from timing t8 to timing t10. FIG. 296(e) shows a display state in which the background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t11 to timing t12. The details of the display mode of the background concealed image are as described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 236 and the like.

The display of the background concealed image A ends at timing t12. FIG. 296(f) shows the display state from timing t12 to timing t13. From timing t12 to timing t17, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed.

At timing t13, a microphone icon image is displayed on the near side of the middle decorative design. After that, the microphone icon image is displayed in a large size, and the characters "Obtained!" are displayed until timing t15. FIG. 296(g) shows the display state from timing t13 to timing t14. FIG. 296(h) shows the display state from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the microphone icon image is displayed while moving to the lower left of the display area while becoming smaller. FIG. 297(a) shows the display state after movement. At timing t17, left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 297(b) shows the display state at this time.

During the period from timing t18 to timing t28, the next variable display is performed, and from timing t28 to timing t29, the stop display is performed. The result of this variable display is a failure.

At timing t29, the next variable display is started. FIG. 297(c) shows a state in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the variable display, and the decorative design is changing at high speed.
At timing t34, the microphone icon image displayed in the lower left corner of the display area is enlarged and moved to the vicinity of the center of the display area. In addition, the text "Microphone activated!" is also displayed. It should be noted that the microphone icon image and the characters "Activate the microphone!" are displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern. FIG. 297(d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t36, the display of the microphone icon image and the characters "Activate the microphone!" ends.
At the timing t37, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern to enter the ready-to-win state. FIG. 297(e) shows the display state at this time.
From timing t38 to timing t45, the background concealing image is displayed, the background image is changed from the normal background image A to the special ready-to-reach background image A, and a special ready-to-reach effect (in this case, "year-end song battle ready-to-reach effect"). is started.
FIG. 297(f) shows a display state in which the background concealed image C is displayed from timing t41 to timing t43.
FIG. 297(g) shows a display state during execution of the "year-end song battle ready-to-reach performance" at a predetermined timing after timing t45.
In FIG. 295(a), as for the performance mode after timing t51, the same performance display as described above for the "year-end song battle ready-to-reach performance" is performed, and the decorative pattern is stopped in a mode showing the result of a big hit or a loss. Is displayed.

Note that, as shown in this embodiment, the microphone icon image displayed at a predetermined position (for example, near the center) of the display area is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area (in the embodiment, it is displayed small on the left side). is sometimes referred to as acquisition in this specification.
Also, a state in which the microphone icon image is displayed at a predetermined location in the display area may be expressed as standby.
In addition, as shown in this embodiment, displaying a microphone icon image that was displayed small as shown in a large size and executing an effect suggested by the microphone icon image may be expressed as activation in this specification. be.
Although the microphone icon image is used as an example, the embodiment described later shows an embodiment in which images other than the microphone icon image are acquired, waited, and activated. Therefore, these may be collectively referred to as suggestive images.

Acquisition and activation of various suggestive images such as the microphone icon image are effects executed based on prefetching. Therefore, if there is no hold at the timing (timing t13 in FIG. 295(a)) when the special reach is lost, the display for acquiring various suggestive images such as the microphone icon image is not performed.
In addition, although the activation timing is determined inside the gaming machine, it is unknown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game while looking forward to which of the suspensions that existed at the timing when the suggestive image was acquired will trigger the suggestive image.

In this way, at the timing when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the ready-to-win performance is lost although the special ready-to-win performance is executed, the pre-reading performance display related to the variable display from the next time onwards is performed, so that the special ready-to-win performance is performed. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the increased expectation due to the execution, to direct the player's feelings to the variable display from the next time onward, and to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the gaming machine.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295(a), in a state in which the decoration pattern is changing at high speed, the microphone icon image is displayed to notify that a special ready-to-win effect will occur. , the display for activating the microphone icon image may be performed at other timings.

For example, in the first half of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Production", where the female singer character and the evil princess character are competing for the microphone, after the microphone icon image is enlarged and displayed, the microphone icon image collides with the evil princess character, An effect may be performed in which the evil princess character runs away to the left of the display area, and the "year-end song battle reach effect" progresses to the second half.
Alternatively, in the first half of the "Year-end song battle reach production", after the microphone is taken away by the evil princess character, the microphone icon image is enlarged and displayed, the microphone is handed over to the female singer character, and the "Year-end song An effect that confirms that the "battle reach effect" progresses to the second half may be performed.

Similarly, in the second half of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Production", where the female singer character and the evil princess character are competing for the microphone, the microphone icon image is enlarged and displayed, and then the microphone icon image collides with the evil princess character. , the evil princess character runs away to the left of the display area, and in the "year-end singing battle ready-to-reach performance", a performance may be performed to suggest that the occurrence of a big win is confirmed.
Similarly, in the second half of the "year-end song battle reach production", after the microphone is taken away by the evil princess character, the microphone icon image is enlarged and displayed, and the microphone is handed over to the female singer character. In the "singing battle ready-to-win production", a production may be performed to suggest that the occurrence of a big hit has been confirmed.

It should be noted that the player does not know when the displayed microphone icon image will be activated. Therefore, even though the "Year-end song battle reach effect" occurs while the microphone icon image is displayed, if the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the microphone icon image is lost without activating the microphone icon image. , the player continues the game in anticipation that the microphone icon image will be activated in the variable display from the next time onward.

In addition, in order to easily show which suspension the effect is to be performed, the microphone icon image may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the suspension image, and may be moved in the horizontal direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the microphone icon image will be activated for the pending image that overlaps the microphone icon image. FIG. 298(a) shows that the microphone icon image may be activated in any of the first to third holds. Also, FIG. 298(b) shows a display example after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed twice. In this example, the microphone icon image is moved so as to overlap the suspension and the first suspension.
Instead of displaying the microphone icon image superimposed on the pending image, the microphone icon image displayed at a predetermined position may be displayed together with a message such as "activated within 0 variation".
By performing such a display, the player can understand that the possibility of activation is pending, and even if the number of pending prizes increases due to the start winning after acquisition of the microphone icon image, there is a possibility that the microphone icon image will be activated. It is possible to distinguish between holds that are and those that are not.

Although the embodiment in which the number of microphone icon images that can be acquired is one has been shown, a plurality of microphone icon images may be acquired in some cases.
In this case, a plurality of microphone icon images may be activated during one variable display, or microphone icon images may be activated separately in different variable displays.
FIG. 298(c) shows a display state in which two microphone icon images are obtained (display state at timing t15 to timing t17).
Also, as shown in FIG. 298(d), the number of acquisitions of microphone icon images may be displayed by adding characters "x2". Note that "x3", "x4", or the like may be displayed according to the number of acquired microphone icon images.

For example, the "year-end song battle ready-to-win production" may be started, the first microphone icon image may be activated in the first half of the ready-to-win production, and the second microphone icon image may be activated in the latter half of the ready-to-win production.
Alternatively, in each of the variable display corresponding to the first hold and the variable display corresponding to the third hold when the microphone icon image is acquired, the microphone icon image is activated and the "year-end song battle reach performance" starts. may be made.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295(a), the microphone icon image can be acquired only during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a reach-losing state. A microphone icon image may be added during the period.
For example, in a state in which one microphone icon image has been acquired, one or more additional microphone icon images may be additionally acquired. For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 295(a), during the period from timing t26 to timing t28, an effect of additionally obtaining a microphone icon image may be executed. In this case, at least at the timing t26, it is preferable to suggest that the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be the result of a loss. For example, at timing t25, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed as decorative patterns with different numbers, and the middle decorative pattern changes from a state in which it fluctuates at high speed to a state in which it is scrolled at a reduced speed. may According to such an effect mode, it is possible to effectively utilize the period during which the player feels disappointed when the result of losing is about to be shown.
As the display mode when the microphone icon image is added, the display mode shown with reference to FIGS. 298(c) and 298(d) can be adopted.

A plurality of types of microphone icon images to be displayed may be provided.
FIG. 298(e) shows an example in which a microphone icon image of a different color (red) from the normal (white) microphone icon image has been acquired.
Compared to the normal microphone icon image, the microphone icon image with a different color is set so that the expectation that the effect (for example, special reach effect) that is executed when the microphone icon is activated will be a big hit is higher. You may For example, if the normal microphone icon image is activated and the "Year-end song battle reach effect" is activated, and if the microphone icon image of a different color is activated and the "Year-end song battle reach effect" is activated, the latter You may set so that the expectation of a big hit may become high.
Alternatively, it may be set so that the probability of performing an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is high when the microphone icon image is activated. For example, when the normal microphone icon image was activated, 70% of the countdown reach effects occurred, and 30% of the year-end song battle reach effects occurred, and microphone icon images of different colors were activated. In this case, it may be set so that "the countdown reach effect" occurs with a probability of 30% and "year-end song battle reach effect" occurs with a probability of 70%.
Although red is given as an example of an unusual color for the microphone icon image, it is sufficient if the color can be distinguished. For example, in addition to white, blue, green, and red microphone icon images may be displayed good. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win may be increased in the order of white, blue, green, and red, or the probability of execution of an advantageous effect for the player may be increased.

In addition, although a plurality of types of microphone icon images are provided by using different colors, the microphone icon images may differ in mode other than color. For example, a plurality of sizes of microphone icon images may be provided, and the larger the size of the microphone icon image, the higher the expectation of a big win or the higher the probability of execution of an effect advantageous to the player.
In this manner, depending on the display mode (color, size, etc.) of the microphone icon image, the degree of expectation for a big win may be increased, or the probability of execution of an advantageous effect for the player may be increased.
It should be noted that the microphone icon image may be visually recognized differently in any other display mode, not limited to the color and size.

Although an example of a microphone icon image that is always activated has been shown, a microphone icon image that may not be activated may be provided. For example, a microphone icon image that is activated with a probability of 30% and not activated with a probability of 70% may be adopted. FIG. 298(f) shows a display example of such a microphone icon image that may not be activated. As shown in the figure, a "?" is added to the microphone icon image to indicate that it may not be activated.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the acquisition rate and the number of acquisitions of the microphone icon image while suppressing the probability of the microphone icon being activated.

By displaying a microphone icon image, an example suggesting that an effect related to a microphone or a song is executed (Fig. 295(a), a special effect related to a song such as shown with reference to Figs. Although an example of a production in which a special ready-to-reach production can be generated and a confrontation during a special ready-to-reach production can be won), the embodiment may be modified so that other suggestive images can be obtained instead of the microphone icon image. In the following, an embodiment in which the display mode of the suggestive image is modified in terms of function etc. will be described, but the display mode of the undeformed portion will be described with reference to FIGS. 295(a), 296 and 297 is displayed in the same way as

FIG. 299(a) shows a state in which a promotion suggesting image indicating that the production mode will be promoted is displayed.
In production example 01 in FIG. 295(b), the promotion suggesting image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the promotion suggesting image can be obtained. FIG. 299(a) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
At timing t42, the special ready-to-reach background image B is displayed, and the execution of "the countdown ready-to-reach effect" is started. Instead of "The Countdown Reach Production" in the middle, a more highly anticipated "Year-end Song Battle Reach Production" will be executed.
When the promotion suggesting image is activated in this way, a display is performed in which the predetermined effect mode is changed to a more expected effect mode.
Shown below are examples of effects in which effects modes other than the special ready-to-win effect are promoted.

For example, by activating the promotion suggesting image, the display mode of the look-ahead effect image shown with reference to FIGS. 124, 125, etc. may be promoted to a display mode with a higher expectation of a big win. The timing for promoting the look-ahead effect image may be before the variable display targeted for the look-ahead effect is started or during execution of the variable display targeted for the look-ahead effect.
Further, the promotion suggestive image may be acquired at a predetermined timing after the display of the prefetch effect image is started, or the display of the prefetch effect image may be acquired at a predetermined timing after the promotion suggestive image is acquired. may be started.

With reference to FIG. 278(a), an example was shown in which dialogue was displayed during a special reach production to indicate the degree of expectation. You may make it display words.

Also, referring to FIG. 278(b), an example was shown in which a cut-in image was displayed during a special reach effect to indicate the degree of expectation. The cut-in image may be displayed in a color indicating the degree of expectation.

FIG. 299(b) shows a state in which a hold change suggestion image indicating that the hold is promoted is displayed.
In production example 02 in FIG. 295(b), the pending change suggesting image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the pending change suggesting image can be obtained. FIG. 299(b) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
A pending change suggestion image is activated from timing t26 to timing t27, and at timing t27, the normal pending image displayed in the first pending display area changes to a more expected blue or green pending image. From timing t29, variable display corresponding to the reserved image in blue or green is performed.
In this way, at the end of the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the hold targeted for prefetching (in this example, the previous variable display), the pending change suggesting image is activated and displayed in the first pending display area. FIG. 10 shows an example of an effect in which the held image changed from a normal held image to a more expected blue or green held image.

In production example 03 in FIG. 295(b), the pending change suggestion image is activated from timing t30 to timing t32, and the normal pending image displayed in the pending display area at timing t32 is more expected. Change to high blue or green hold image.
In this way, immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the pending change suggestion image is activated, and the pending image displayed in the pending display area is changed from the normal pending image to the more expected blue or green color. By changing to the reserved image, it is possible to raise expectations for the result of the variable display immediately after the start of the variable display.

FIGS. 299(c) and 299(d) show a state in which a button operation suggesting image indicating that the button operation is valid is displayed. Note that the button operation suggestion image shown in FIG. 299(d) has a shape that imitates the shape of a button.
In production example 04 in FIG. 295(b), during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, the button operation suggesting image is displayed and the button operation suggesting image can be obtained. FIG. 299(c) and FIG. 299(d) show display states from timing t15 to timing t17. During the period from timing t30 to timing t32, the button operation suggestion image is activated, and during the period from timing t32 to timing t35, an effect requesting a button operation is executed, and acceptance of the button operation becomes valid. As for the effect requiring button operation, a configuration similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.
Note that the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, and the defense button 3740 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 137 can be adopted as the buttons that enable the operation. Also, the operation of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be enabled instead of the buttons.

Regarding button operation, in addition to the operation of pressing only once, operations such as long pressing (holding down for about 2 to 3 seconds) and repeated pressing (requiring multiple pressing operations during the operation valid period) are required. However, which operation is requested may be displayed attached to the button operation suggestion image.
FIG. 299(e) shows a state in which a button operation suggesting image is displayed, which suggests that a long press operation of the square mission button 3700 in plan view is required.
As for the operation of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, an operation of pulling the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, pulling it long, or pushing it long may be required.

When the operation effective period occurs, an operation instruction image for instructing button operation is displayed, but the operation instruction image may be provided with a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation. For example, a white operation instruction image and a red operation instruction image may be provided, and setting may be made so that expectations are higher when the red operation instruction image is displayed. It should be noted that the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145 and the like may be adopted for the aspect of the operation instruction image.
In addition, a white button operation suggesting image and a red button operation suggesting image were provided, and when the white button operation suggesting image was activated, a white operation instructing image was displayed and the red button operation suggesting image was activated. In this case, it is preferable to display a red operation instruction image.

The button operation suggestion image may be activated during the button operation valid period, and display may be performed in which the mode of the displayed operation instruction image is changed to one with a higher degree of expectation. For example, when a red button operation suggestion image is activated at the timing when a white operation instruction image is displayed, the operation instruction image may change to red. Moreover, it is good to make it so that expectations are raised by this. Before the operation effective period starts, the operation instruction image may be gradually displayed. At this timing, the red button operation suggestion image is activated so that the operation instruction image turns red at the start of the operation effective period. It may be changed.

If a button operation suggestion image is activated during the button operation valid period and the displayed operation instruction image is changed to one with a higher degree of expectation, the effect result of the low degree of expectation is not displayed. You may do so. For example, as the effect display corresponding to the button operation, a effect image of one of white, red, and gold is displayed. When it is assumed that the degree of expectation is higher, the effect image of white with a lower degree of expectation may not be displayed, and the effect image of red or gold may be displayed.
The button operation suggestion image may be activated at the timing when the button operation is performed. Also in this case, it is preferable not to display the low-expectation effect image.

FIG. 299(f) shows a state in which a pseudo-ream suggesting image suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-ream is displayed.
In production example 05 in FIG. 295(b), a pseudo-repeat suggesting image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the pseudo-repeat suggesting image can be acquired. FIG. 299(f) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
From timing t30 to timing t32, a pseudo-continuous suggestive image is activated, and in a period from timing t32 to timing t35, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode, and then the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are displayed again at high speed in a pseudo-continuous performance. is done.
It should be noted that, for the pseudo-continuous effect, a configuration similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.

With reference to FIGS. 298(a) and 298(b), an example of displaying the microphone icon image in front of the first hold to the third hold when acquiring the microphone icon image is shown. Suggestive images (promotion suggestive image, pending change suggestive image, button operation suggestive image) may be modified so as to be displayed in the same way.
FIG. 300(a) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15. This is a display example showing that some kind of promotion effect is performed in any of the above.
FIG. 300(b) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15. It is an example display showing that a pending change is made in any of the pending.
It should be noted that the positions and horizontal lengths of these windows are shortened while moving to the left in response to the digestion of the hold.

Although an embodiment capable of acquiring only one type of image has been shown with reference to FIG. 299, it may be modified so that a plurality of suggestive images can be acquired simultaneously.
FIG. 300(c) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, showing an example of acquisition of a microphone icon image, promotion suggesting image, pending change suggesting image, and button operation suggesting image. In this case, an effect corresponding to each suggested image obtained is executed in any one of the first to fourth suspensions.

FIG. 300(d) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, showing an example of acquisition of a microphone icon image, promotion suggesting image, pending change suggesting image, and button operation suggesting image. In this example, similar to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. Then, an effect corresponding to the acquired suggestive image is not necessarily executed. That is, in any one of the first to fourth reservations, an effect corresponding to each acquired image is executed with a predetermined probability (eg, 30%).

298(c) and 298(d), an embodiment in which a plurality of microphone icon images can be acquired has been described, but a plurality of other suggestive images may also be acquired.
FIGS. 300(e) and 300(f) are display examples from timing t13 to timing t15, showing a state in which two holding change suggesting images and two button operation suggesting images are obtained.
Further, when a plurality of promotion suggesting images can be acquired, an effect is executed in which a plurality of promotion suggesting images are activated. The same applies to pending change suggesting images and button operation suggesting images. It should be noted that the activation timing may be activated a plurality of times within one variable display, or may be activated separately within different variable displays.

With reference to FIG. 298(e), an example of a production that can acquire a microphone icon image of a different color (red) from a normal (white) microphone icon image is shown. For each suggestive image of the image, a suggestive image of a different color may also be displayed. Further, the color of the suggestive image may indicate the degree of expectation for a big win, or the probability that a display with a high degree of expectation will be performed in an effect executed corresponding to the suggestive image.
Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be varied depending on the type of suggestive image (microphone icon image, promotion suggestive image, pending change suggestive image, button operation suggestive image). For example, the degree of expectation may be higher when the microphone icon image is acquired than when the hold change suggesting image is acquired. That is, among the four suggestive images, the degree of expectation is set to be higher when a certain suggestive image is acquired than when the other suggestive image is acquired. good too.

An embodiment may be a combination of the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 298-300.

Having described embodiments in which multiple microphone icon images can be obtained with reference to FIGS. 298(c) and 298(d), a more detailed embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG.
First, a large microphone icon image and the words "Obtained x?" are displayed. Note that the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped. FIG. 301(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a horizontally elongated window is displayed in the display area, a normal microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of this window, and numbers (eg, "1" to "3") are displayed on the right side of the window, which are displayed fluctuating at high speed. Is displayed. FIG. 301(b) shows the display state at this time. It should be noted that the variable display time should be about 1 to 2 seconds.
Then, the rapidly fluctuating numbers on the right side of the window stop and "2" is displayed. FIG. 301(c) shows the display state at this time. In addition, "1" and "3" may be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, the number of microphone icon images (any one from 1 to 3) corresponding to the displayed number is displayed. FIG. 301(d) shows the display state at this time.
After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 301(e) shows the display state at this time.
By displaying how many microphone icon images can be obtained in this manner, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened.

Having described an embodiment in which multiple microphone icon images can be obtained with reference to FIG. 301, another embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment, the same display as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 301 is performed until halfway. FIGS. 302(a) to 302(c) show the same display states as FIGS. 301(a) to 301(c), respectively.
Next, a red microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of the horizontally long window, and numbers (eg, "1" to "3") are displayed on the right side of the window, which fluctuate at high speed. FIG. 302(d) shows the display state at this time. Also, the acquired normal microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of the display area. It should be noted that the variable display time should be about 1 to 2 seconds.
Then, the rapidly fluctuating numbers on the right side of the window stop and "1" is displayed. FIG. 302(e) shows the display state at this time. In addition, "1" and "3" may be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, the number of red microphone icon images corresponding to the displayed number (any one from 1 to 3) is displayed. FIG. 302(f) shows the display state at this time.
After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 302(g) shows the display state at this time.
By displaying how many microphone icon images can be obtained in this manner, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened.

As shown with reference to FIG. 302, when a plurality of suggestive images are acquired, it is preferable to display them from bottom to top in the order in which they were acquired.
Further, when the acquired suggestive image is activated, suggestive images displayed above the activated suggestive image may be moved downward and displayed.

Having described an embodiment in which multiple microphone icon images can be obtained with reference to FIG. 301, another embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG.
First, the characters "Acquisition x?" are displayed. Note that the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped. FIG. 303(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a horizontally elongated window is displayed in the display area, and a microphone icon image (for example, a normal microphone icon image and a red microphone icon image) that is displayed fluctuating at high speed is displayed on the left side of this window, and a microphone icon image is displayed on the right side of the window. , a number (for example, "1" to "3") that is displayed fluctuating at high speed is displayed. FIG. 303(b) shows the display state at this time. It is preferable that the microphone icon image is variably displayed for about 1 to 2 seconds, and the number is variably displayed for about 1 to 2 seconds longer.
A normal microphone icon image is then displayed. FIG. 303(c) shows the display state at this time. Note that a red microphone icon image may be displayed.
Then, the rapidly fluctuating numbers on the right side of the window stop and "2" is displayed. FIG. 303(d) shows the display state at this time. In addition, "1" and "3" may be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, the number of microphone icon images (any one from 1 to 3) corresponding to the displayed number is displayed. FIG. 303(e) shows a display state in which two white microphone icon images are displayed on the left side of the display area. Either white or red is displayed as the microphone icon image.
After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 303(f) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many of which microphone icon images can be acquired, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 301 to 303, an example was shown in which at least one microphone icon image can be obtained, but "0" is added to the number displayed in a variable manner, and "0" is displayed. In some cases, the microphone icon image may not be acquired.

As an example of the microphone icon image, a white microphone icon image and a red microphone icon image are given as an example, but three or more may be used. A tall golden microphone icon image may be employed.

An example was shown in which one or more suggestive images can be obtained when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed temporarily in a reach-losing manner, but it is possible to acquire additional suggestive images at other timings. can be

Simultaneously with the activation of a given suggestive image, the same kind of suggestive image or a different kind of suggestive image may be acquired.
For example, a pending change suggestion image may be obtained when the microphone icon image is activated. In this case, it is preferable that the display of "acquisition of pending change" is displayed along with the display of "activate the microphone!".
In this way, by enabling the acquisition of suggestive images at the timing when the display in which the suggestive images decrease is performed, it is possible to reduce the regrettable feeling that the number of executions of the predetermined effect has decreased. can.

Alternatively, there may be a case where a suggestive image of the same type or a different type is additionally acquired while a predetermined suggestive image is acquired and waiting. Also in this case, it is preferable to perform the same display as the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 296(g) and 296(h).

Alternatively, there may be a case where a new suggestive image can be acquired during the performance being executed based on the activation of the suggestive image. For example, when a special ready-to-win effect is executed based on activation of the microphone icon image, the microphone icon image and other suggested images may be obtained again during the execution of the special ready-to-win effect. In addition, by activating the microphone icon image during the execution of a special reach effect, it is possible to display that the female singer character can win the competition for the microphone with the diva and the small fish princess and continue to hold the microphone, or lose the competition for the microphone. In the first half or the second half of the special reach performance, the microphone may be finally held by displaying that the microphone is delivered to the female singer character even if the female singer character is caught.
In this case, the player can have a sense of anticipation that the suggestive image will be added until the last stage of the variable display.

With reference to FIGS. 296(h) to 297(c), in the embodiment, when the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a reach-losing mode, the suggestive image moves to the left side of the display area. Although an example of displaying the suggestive image is shown, the timing of moving the suggestive image may be another timing.
For example, the suggestive image may be moved during the stationary display of the decorative symbol or at the timing when the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

When a special ready-to-win effect in which a microphone icon image is activated is executed, the microphone icon image may be further acquired before the special effect is started. Incidentally, there are cases where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed 0 times, once, or twice, and the mode of effect will be described separately according to the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect.

First, when the pseudo continuous effect is not performed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are in the ready state during the period from the start of the variable display until the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are in the ready state. The microphone icon image may additionally be acquired during one or more periods from the time to the start of the special ready-to-win effect.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed once, the period from the start of the variable display to the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols in the mode showing the pseudo-continuous effect, and after that, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed. , the period until the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern reach the ready state, the period from the time when the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the ready state until the special ready-to-win effect is started, or Additional microphone icon images may be acquired in a plurality of periods.

For example, the period from the start of the variable display to the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols in the form of the pseudo-continuous effect, after which the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed and the decorative symbols in the form of the pseudo-continuous effect again. is displayed temporarily, after that, the period from when the variable display of the decorative design is resumed until the left decorative design and the right decorative design become the ready state, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are in the ready state. The microphone icon image may additionally be acquired during one or a plurality of periods from the time of becoming to the start of the special ready-to-win effect.

In this way, as the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed increases, more microphone icon images can be obtained, so the player expects the pseudo-continuous effect to be executed.

In addition, when the microphone icon image is activated and a special ready-to-win effect is started, the color indicating the title of the ready-to-win effect (for details, see FIG. morphology) may be displayed in the same color as the activated microphone icon image. For example, if the color of the activated microphone icon image is red, the title of the reach effect will be displayed in red, and if the color of the activated microphone icon image is gold, the title of the reach effect will be displayed in gold. You may

A more specific execution mode of the special ready-to-win effect and the like will be described below. First, the premise will be explained. The probability that the special lottery result is a big hit is 1/300, and the probability that the special lottery result is a loss is 299/300. In the case of a big hit, the probability of reaching the reach state is 1/1. On the other hand, in the case of losing, the probability of reaching the reach state is 30/299. The loss reach occurrence rate is 299/300×30/299, which is 1/10.

FIG. 304(a) shows the distribution of ready-to-win effects.
In the case of a big hit, the occurrence ratio of "year-end singing contest reach effect", "the countdown reach effect", and "other reach (effect)" is 70:20:10.
On the other hand, in the case of losing, the occurrence ratio of "year-end singing contest reach effect", "the countdown reach effect", and "other reach effect" is 2:4:94.
In this case, the expectation level for “Year-end Song Battle reach performance” is about 54%, the expectation level for “The countdown reach performance” is about 14%, and the expectation level for “Other reach (performance)” is about 0.4%. becomes.
Note that the occurrence rate in the figure indicates the ratio of the decorative symbols to the total variation display. In about 0.4% of the variable display, the “year-end song battle reach effect” occurs, in about 0.5% of the variable display, “the countdown reach effect” occurs, and in about 9.4% of the variable display In , other reach occurs (after the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss, or after being in the ready-to-win state, another ready-to-win effect is executed to achieve a big hit. You may stop and display the decorative pattern in the form of loss or loss). In the remaining 89.7% of variable display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a non-reach-losing manner.

FIG. 304(b) shows a table for selecting how many microphone icon images are to be acquired when the "year-end song battle reach performance" is executed. The denominator is 100 both in the case of a big hit and in the case of a loss, and the number of acquired microphone icon images is set at a predetermined ratio.
As shown in the table, the ratio of the number of acquisitions is set such that the greater the number of microphone icon acquisition images, the higher the expectation of a big win.
Note that the occurrence rate in the figure indicates the ratio of the decorative symbols to the total variation display. As described above, the “year-end song battle reach effect” occurs in about 0.4% of all the variable display of decorative patterns, but the “year-end song battle reach effect” with 0 acquired microphone icon images is about 0.230%, "Year-end song battle reach performance" with 1 microphone icon image acquisition is about 0.078%, "Year-end song battle reach performance" with 2 microphone icon images is about 0.051%, "Year-end song battle reach performance" with 3 microphone icon images is about 0.039%, "Year-end song battle reach performance" with 4 microphone icon images is about It occurs with a probability of 0.035% (the total value of these is about 0.4%, which is the probability of occurrence of the "year-end song battle reach effect").

FIG. 304(c) shows an effect pattern selection table in the case of the acquisition number "0". The denominator is 100 both in the case of a big hit and in the case of a loss, and the selection probability of the effect pattern is set at a predetermined ratio.
Similarly, FIG. 304(d) shows the effect pattern selection table for the acquisition number "1", FIG. 304(e) the effect pattern selection table for the acquisition number "2", and FIG. 304(f). 304(g) shows the effect pattern selection table for the acquisition number "3", and the effect pattern selection table for the acquisition number "4".

FIG. 305 is a table showing acquisition ratios of microphone icon images (acquisition ratios of golden microphones and normal microphones) in each effect pattern.
FIG. 305(a) is a selection table when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "1".
FIG. 305(b) is a selection table when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "2".
FIG. 305(c) is a selection table when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "3".
FIG. 305(d) is a selection table when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "4".

In this embodiment, in the "Year-end Uta Gassen Reach Production", there are 4 fights for the microphone with the evil princess (sometimes referred to as "battle" in the examples. The same applies to the fight for the microphone with the small fish princess). (sometimes referred to as a "battle"), the results of the jackpot are shown. On the other hand, if the player loses in the first to third battles, the result of losing is displayed. In addition, as will be described later, after the display is made to make it look as if the player has lost the battle, the microphone icon image may be activated to display that the player has won the battle.

FIG. 306 is a table showing the results of the first to fourth battles in each production pattern. "○" is the mode in which the battle is won, "×" is the mode in which the battle is lost, "× → 〇" is the appearance of losing the battle, and then the microphone icon image is activated to display that the player has won the battle.
FIG. 306(a) shows an effect mode when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "0".
FIG. 306(b) shows an effect mode when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "1".
FIG. 306(c) shows an effect mode when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "2".
FIG. 306(d) shows an effect mode when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "3".
FIG. 306(e) shows an effect mode when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "4".

As shown in FIG. 306(a), when the acquired number is "0", the microphone icon image is not activated.
On the other hand, when the acquired number is "1" as shown in FIG. 306(b), the microphone icon image (either the golden microphone icon image or the normal microphone icon image) is activated once at most.
In production pattern “PTN06” to production pattern “PTN11”, the microphone icon image is activated in any of the first to third battles, but the subsequent battles are the result of losing.
The production pattern “PTN12” is a production pattern in which the player wins four battles without activating the microphone icon image.
The production pattern "PTN13" is a production pattern in which the microphone icon image is not activated and the battle is fought for the fourth time, and although the player loses in the fourth battle, the microphone icon image is activated and the fourth battle is won.
In production pattern "PTN14" to production pattern "PTN16", the microphone icon image is activated in one of the first to third battles, and the subsequent battles are won.

As shown in FIG. 306(c), when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "2", the microphone icon image (either or both of the golden microphone icon image and the normal microphone icon image) is activated at most twice. do.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in FIG. 305(b).
When two golden microphone icon images are obtained or when two normal microphone icon images are obtained, the microphone icon images are activated at the timing shown in each effect pattern in FIG. 306(c).

When one golden microphone icon image and one normal microphone icon image are obtained, the order of activation is determined with a predetermined probability.
In the case of the effect pattern “PTN17”, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the second battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In addition, in the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.
In the case of the effect pattern “PTN18”, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.
In the case of the production pattern “PTN19”, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.
In the case of the effect pattern “PTN20”, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In addition, in the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.

In the case of the production pattern "PTN21", the microphone icon image is not activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN22", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the fourth battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN23", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the third battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN24", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the second battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN25", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN26", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50% in the third battle. In addition, in the fourth battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN27", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the second battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the fourth battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.
In the case of the production pattern “PTN28”, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the fourth battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN29", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the second battle is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN30", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN31", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated is activated.

As shown in FIG. 306(d), when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "3", the microphone icon image (either or both of the golden microphone icon image and the normal microphone icon image) is activated up to three times. do.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in FIG. 305(c).
When three golden microphone icon images are obtained or when three normal microphone icon images are obtained, the microphone icon images are activated at the timing shown in each effect pattern in FIG. 306(d).

If 2 gold microphone icon images and 1 normal microphone icon image can be obtained, if 1 gold microphone icon image and 2 normal microphone icon images are obtained, it will be activated in the following manner. Order is determined.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN32", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the second battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. . In the third battle, the remaining microphone icon images are activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN33", the microphone icon image is not activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN34", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50% in the fourth battle.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN35", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the third battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN36", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the second battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN37", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN38", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50% in the third battle. In addition, in the fourth battle, if there is a golden waiting microphone icon image, the golden microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no waiting golden microphone icon image, the normal microphone icon will be activated. image is activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN39", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the second battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the fourth battle, if there is a golden waiting microphone icon image, the golden microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no waiting golden microphone icon image, the normal microphone icon will be activated. image is activated.
In the case of the effect pattern “PTN40”, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the fourth battle, if there is a golden waiting microphone icon image, the golden microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no waiting golden microphone icon image, the normal microphone icon will be activated. image is activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN41", the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated in the second battle is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the third battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. .
In the case of the production pattern "PTN42", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the third battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. .
In the case of the production pattern "PTN43", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. .
In the case of the production pattern "PTN44", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, if there is a normal standby microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. . In the third battle, the remaining microphone icon images are activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN45", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, if there is a normal standby microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. . In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon images are activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN46", the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated in the first battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, if there is a normal standby microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. . In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon images are activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN47", the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated in the second battle is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, if there is a normal standby microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. . In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon images are activated.

As shown in FIG. 306(e), when the acquired number of microphone icon images is "4", the microphone icon image (either one or both of the golden microphone icon image and the normal microphone icon image) is activated up to four times. do.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in FIG. 305(d).
When four golden microphone icon images are obtained or when four normal microphone icon images are obtained, the microphone icon images are activated at the timing shown in each effect pattern in FIG. 306(e).

If you can get 3 golden microphone icon images and 1 normal microphone icon image, if you can get 2 golden microphone icon images and 2 normal microphone icon images, you can get 1 golden microphone icon image and When three normal microphone icon images are obtained, the order of activation is determined in the following manner.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN48", an effect is performed in which the microphone icon image is activated and revived after losing all four battles. That is, the acquired four microphone icon images are activated in all four battles. As for the activation order, after all the normal microphone icon images (1 to 3) are activated, the gold microphone icon images (3 to 1) are activated.

In addition, in the battle after the golden microphone icon image is activated, the activation probability of the gold microphone icon image is set so that it is easier to win the battle than the battle after the normal microphone icon image is activated. .
It is preferable that the female singer character holds the microphone icon image displayed in a large size upon activation until the battle is lost. As a result, the player can recognize what color the most recently activated microphone icon image is.

It should be noted that if the player loses the battle with the evil princess or the small fish princess without the waiting microphone icon image, the variable display of the decoration pattern will end in a manner indicating the result of the failure. After displaying as if the character had lost the battle, the female singer character would take out the microphone hidden in her costume, and display the state in which she had reversed the battle and won, so that the next and subsequent battles would be held. may In the case of the fourth battle, when such a display is performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.
According to such a mode, even if the player loses the battle with the evil princess or the small fish princess in a state where there is no waiting microphone icon image, the player can expect a big win. .

In this way, if you win four battles, you will win a big hit. The more microphone icon images you have acquired (or the number of waiting) at the start of the special ready-to-win effect, the higher the chance of a big win. , the player can enjoy the effect display while expecting to obtain as many microphone icon images as possible.

The timing of activating the suggestive images on standby may be in the order in which the suggestive images are acquired. Alternatively, it may be activated in the order of the degree of expectation indicated by the suggestive image, or may be activated in the order of the degree of expectation indicated by the suggestive image.

As the microphone icon image, the effect pattern in which the normal microphone icon image and the golden microphone icon image are displayed is shown, but other forms of microphone icon images may be displayed.
For example, one to four suggestive images written as "special move" can be acquired, and when this suggestive image is activated, the battle with the evil princess or the small fish princess can be won without fail. Note that the number of times you can win a battle should be one. If four suggestive images can be acquired, the player can definitely win the four battles, and thus a big hit will always occur.

It should be noted that suggestive images including characters such as "big hit", "V", and "nationwide tour" may be obtained. Then, when the suggestion image of "big win" and "V" is displayed, the big win may always occur without losing the battle. In addition, when the suggestive image of "National Tour" is displayed, a big win may occur without losing the battle, and after the big win, the state may be shifted to a high-probability time-saving state.

The timing at which the acquired suggestive image is activated may be different.
For example, when one microphone icon image is acquired, the microphone icon image is activated in the first battle and cannot be activated in the second to fourth battles. There may be a case where the microphone icon image is activated in the fourth battle, and a battle in which the microphone icon image is activated in the fourth battle.
In this case, if the microphone icon image is displayed up to the fourth battle, the player expects that the microphone icon image will be activated in the final battle, resulting in a big win.

Also, when one promotion suggestion image is acquired, the promotion suggestion image is activated when the reach title is displayed and the reach title is promoted (white becomes red or gold), and the state where the reach title is displayed Instead of activating in , when the cut-in image is displayed, the promotion suggesting image is activated to promote the cut-in image (green becomes red or gold).
In this case, the effect may be such that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the game is activated later.

It may be possible to make it appear that the suggestive image is activated, and to execute an effect that does not activate the suggestive image. For example, a display may be performed in which the display area slightly moves from the left side to the center and then returns to the left side again.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation as to when the suggestive image will be activated.
If the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the function is activated later, the player expects the activation to be delayed as much as possible.

The player may be able to recognize the timing at which the suggestive image is activated.
For example, it may be indicated that it is activated at the start timing of variation of the decorative pattern, the start timing of the special ready-to-win effect, the end timing of the battle, the end timing of the final battle (fourth battle), and the like.
Specifically, it is preferable to indicate the timing by displaying characters such as "activated at the start of fluctuation" and "activated at the start of reach effect!" on the right side of the suggestive image.

Alternatively, it may indicate to the player that it will be activated before a certain timing, or that it will be activated after a certain timing.
For example, it may indicate that it is activated before the start timing of variation of the decorative pattern, the start timing of the special ready-to-win effect, the end timing of the battle, and the end timing of the final battle (fourth battle).
Alternatively, it may be indicated that it is activated after the start timing of variation of the decorative pattern, the start timing of the special ready-to-win production, the end timing of the battle, and the end timing of the final battle (fourth battle).
Specifically, on the right side of the suggestion image, "activate before the start of fluctuation", "activate after the start of fluctuation", "activate before the start of the reach production!", "activate after the start of the reach production!" Good.

An example in which a plurality of suggestive images of the same type or different types can be acquired has been shown with reference to FIGS. Alternatively, the suggestive images may be activated in an order based on a predetermined priority. Alternatively, it may be activated in the order in which each suggestive image is acquired.
For example, between the pending change suggesting image and the button operation suggesting image, the pending change suggesting image may always be activated before the button operation suggesting image. Alternatively, the button operation suggestive image may always be activated before the pending change suggestive image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 300(d), only the character "?" may be displayed so that it is possible to know which suggestive image it is after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. For example, a timer is displayed next to the character "?" to count down (for example, display from "20" to "0" over 20 seconds), and at the timing when "0" is displayed, one of the suggestive images may be displayed.
Alternatively, the text "Pending Change? Button?" may be displayed. In this case, a pending change suggesting image or a button operation suggesting image is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed.
In this way, by not knowing which suggestive image will be displayed until a predetermined timing, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

A timer may be displayed next to the character "?" to count down, and at the timing when "0" is displayed, a normal microphone icon image may be displayed.
Also, after the normal microphone icon image is displayed, the timer is displayed again, and at the timing when "0" is displayed, the normal microphone icon image is changed to the golden microphone icon image. good. The probability that the normal microphone icon image changes to the gold microphone icon image may be 100%, or may be a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) less than 100%.

It is also possible to display the decorative pattern in the form of reach-lose, and after returning to the normal background image, display the decorative pattern in the form of big win. According to such a display mode, the player is once discouraged, and then a display indicating that a big win will occur is performed, so that the player can feel great excitement.
Then, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the suggestive image is not acquired, and the suggestive image can be acquired only when the result of the special lottery is a loss.

In a state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of reach-losing, after performing the predetermined swaying effect display, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit without acquiring the suggestive image, or the suggestive image is displayed. Although it can be obtained, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a lost mode. In this case, the player recognizes that either the big win or the acquisition of the suggestive image occurs at the timing when the predetermined fanning effect is displayed.

In this way, by performing the effect display based on the look-ahead at the timing when the result of the highly anticipated variable display is displayed in a manner indicating a failure, the discouraged player quickly switches to the variable display for the next and subsequent times. can be made

273 to 275, 307 to 315, etc., for the special effect "history display step-up effect" in the modified embodiment shown below with reference to FIGS. 123 to 272, etc. and explain. 307 to 312 are tables showing effect patterns of the "history display step-up effect" in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 313 is a time chart showing the effect mode of the “history display step-up effect”. FIG. 314 is a diagram showing display contents in the display area.

Effect patterns “PTN-1-001” to “PTN-1-004” shown in FIG. 307 indicate effect patterns in which only the step-up image of the first stage is displayed.
As shown in the drawing, the step-up image A to step-up image D are displayed in the effect patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004", respectively.

Effect patterns “PTN-2-001” to “PTN-2-016” shown in FIG. 307 are effect patterns in which the step-up image of the first stage is displayed and then the step-up image of the second stage is displayed. is shown.
For example, effect pattern “PTN-2-002” is a effect pattern in which step-up image B is displayed after step-up image A is displayed.

In production patterns "PTN-3-001" to "PTN-3-064" shown in FIG. After the eye step-up image is displayed, the effect pattern in which the third step-up image is displayed is shown.
For example, the production pattern "PTN-3-007" is a production in which after the step-up image A is displayed, the step-up image B is displayed, and after the step-up image B is displayed, the step-up image C is displayed. It's a pattern.

In the production pattern "PTN-4-001" to the production pattern "PTN-4-256" shown in FIGS. After the second step-up image is displayed, the third step-up image is displayed, and after the third step-up image is displayed, the fourth step-up image is displayed. It shows a production pattern that
For example, in the effect pattern “PTN-4-028”, step-up image A is displayed, step-up image B is displayed, step-up image B is displayed, step-up image C is displayed, step-up image C is displayed, and step-up image B is displayed. This is an effect pattern in which the step-up image D is displayed after the up image C is displayed.

According to the effect patterns shown with reference to FIGS. 307 to 312, step-up images are displayed from the first stage up to the fourth stage. Also, at each stage, one of the step-up images A to D is displayed.
Whether or not to execute the “history display step-up effect” and which effect pattern to execute are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of the special lottery or the like. Also, the “history display step-up effect” is executed based on the control by the peripheral control board 1510 .

Note that the production patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004" may be collectively referred to as the production pattern "PTN-1".
Similarly, production patterns "PTN-2-001" to "PTN-2-016" may be collectively referred to as production pattern "PTN-2".
Similarly, production patterns "PTN-3-001" to "PTN-3-064" may be collectively referred to as production pattern "PTN-3".
Similarly, production patterns "PTN-4-001" to "PTN-4-256" may be collectively referred to as production pattern "PTN-4".

FIG. 313 is a time chart showing an effect mode of "history display step-up effect". FIG. 313(a) shows, for comparison, an effect mode when the "history display step-up effect" is not performed.
FIGS. 313(b) to 313(g) show the effects when the "history display step-up effect" is performed.
First, an example of an effect when the effect pattern "PTN-4-028" is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 313(b), 314 and 315. FIG.

First, the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t0, and at timing t1 after one second, left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are changed at high speed. FIG. 314(a) shows the display state at this time.

Next, at timing t1, the "history display step-up effect" is started, and the step-up effect display window is displayed. During the period up to this timing t2, the step-up image is not yet displayed, and only the step-up effect display window is displayed. FIG. 314(b) shows a display state during execution of the "history display step-up effect". A step-up image is displayed in the rectangular step-up effect display window shown in the center (in the drawing, a specific display mode within the window is omitted). In this embodiment, the size of the step-up effect display window and the step-up image are the same.
The diagrams shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 315(f) show display modes of the step-up effect display window. Below, with reference to FIGS. 314(d) to 315(f), display modes in the step-up effect display window will be described.

FIG. 314(d) shows the state before the step-up image is displayed. At the bottom of the step-up effect display window, there is provided a history display area that allows the user to know in what order the step-up images were displayed.
The history display area consists of four horizontal display areas, and an image obtained by reducing the step-up image of the first stage is displayed in a reduced size in the leftmost display area. Similarly, the step-up images of the 2nd to 4th stages are also reduced and displayed in order from the left.

Next, the step-up image of the first stage is displayed from timing t2 to timing t4.
FIG. 314(e) shows a state in which the step-up image A is displayed as the first step-up image. FIG. 314(f) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image A is reduced and displayed in the leftmost display area.

As shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 314(f), "?" is displayed in the history display area before the step-up image is displayed. Further, after the step-up image is displayed, an image obtained by reducing the step-up image is displayed in the history display area.
The display priority of the step-up effect display window is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols, and the step-up effect display window is displayed in front of the decorative symbols.
Further, the display priority of the step-up image is higher than the display priority of the step-up effect display window, and the step-up image is displayed on the near side of the step-up effect display window.
Also, the display priority of the image displayed in the history display area (reduced step-up image) is higher than the display priority of the step-up image, and the image displayed in the history display area is placed in front of the step-up image. is displayed.
Note that the size of the step-up image may be made smaller than the step-up effect display window by one round.

Next, the second stage step-up image is displayed from timing t4 to timing t6. FIG. 315(a) shows a state in which a step-up image B is displayed in the step-up effect display window as a second step-up image. FIG. 315(b) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image B is reduced and displayed in the second display area from the left.

Next, the step-up image of the third stage is displayed from timing t6 to timing t8. FIG. 315(c) shows a state in which a step-up image C is displayed in the step-up effect display window as a step-up image of the third step. Also, FIG. 315(d) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image C is reduced and displayed in the third display area from the left.

Next, the fourth step-up image is displayed from timing t8 to timing t10. FIG. 315(e) shows a state in which a step-up image D is displayed in the step-up effect display window as a step-up image of the fourth stage. FIG. 315(f) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image D is reduced and displayed in the fourth display area from the left.

At timing t10, the display of the step-up image ends. FIG. 314(c) shows the display state after the history display step-up effect is completed.

As shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 315(f), a star-shaped mark is added to the upper right of the letter A in the step-up image A. FIG. In addition, the character "H" is added to the upper right of the character "B" in the step-up image B. As shown in FIG. In addition, the character "manipulation" is attached to the upper right of the character "C" in the step-up image C. Note that no mark or letter is attached to the upper right of the letter D in the step-up image D.
Note that when each step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area, these marks and characters are also reduced and displayed, but these marks and characters should not be displayed. may

As shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 315(f), the background portions of step-up image A to step-up image D are different. Step-up image A has a background portion containing two horizontal lines. The step-up image B has a background portion including two left-sloping diagonal lines. The step-up image C has a background portion including two downward-sloping diagonal lines. Step-up image D has a background portion including four diagonal lines. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the type of step-up image.
When the step-up image is displayed in a reduced size in the history display area, the lines in the background portion are also displayed in a reduced size. good too. For example, only one of the characters "A" to "D" may be displayed in the history display area.
Note that the background portion of each step-up image may be configured with colors, patterns, or the like instead of lines. Also in this case, when displaying in the history display area, the colors and patterns may be reduced and displayed as they are, or the colors and patterns may be omitted or displayed in a simplified manner. good too.

The same step as in production pattern "PTN-3-022"("B""B""B") and production pattern "PTN-4-001"("A""A""A""A") If the up images are displayed continuously, the player may not be able to recognize that a new step up image has been displayed. Since there is provided a period during which the large step-up image is not displayed (display states shown in FIGS. 314(f), 315(b), 315(d), and 315(f)), a new step-up To prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot recognize that an image has been displayed.
The length of the period during which the large step-up image is not displayed in the step-up effect display window may be shorter than the period during which the large step-up image is displayed. good.

Since the size of the history display area is smaller than that of the step-up effect display window, if the step-up image is simply reduced and displayed in the history display area, the player will not be able to see what was displayed as the step-up image. However, when the step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area in this way, part of the step-up image is omitted or simplified, and the original image is displayed. By displaying a step-up image, the player can easily recognize which step-up image has been displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the production pattern "PTN-3" or the production pattern "PTN-4" is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped at the decorative patterns with the same number and reach. state.
When the effect pattern "PTN-1" or the effect pattern "PTN-2" is executed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss without entering the ready-to-win state.
Alternatively, the effect pattern "PTN-1" and the effect pattern "PTN-2" are executed, although the probability is low compared to the case where the effect pattern "PTN-3" and the effect pattern "PTN-4" are executed. It may be possible to be in a reach state even when the
For example, the probability that the production pattern "PTN-1", the production pattern "PTN-2", the production pattern "PTN-3", and the production pattern "PTN-4" will be in the reach state in that order (that is, the probability that the final hit will be a big hit) should be high.
By adopting such a configuration, the player is greatly interested in how many stages the step-up image is displayed.

In this embodiment, each effect pattern shown with reference to FIGS. 307 to 312 is configured to suggest or notify that some event related to the game will occur.

When a plurality of step-up images A (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, the greater the number of displayed step-up images A, the higher the degree of expectation.
Specifically, the degree of expectation is higher when three step-up images A are displayed than when two step-up images A are displayed, and is higher than when three step-up images A are displayed. Also, the degree of expectation is higher when four step-up images A are displayed.
For example, the expectation level may be 10% when two step-up images A are displayed, 20% when three are displayed, and 60% when four are displayed.
FIG. 313(c) shows an effect example when the effect pattern “PTN-2-001” is executed and two step-up images A are displayed.

In addition, when a plurality of step-up images B (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, after the "history display step-up effect" ends, the pending image change effect changes at a predetermined timing. is executed. It should be noted that the larger the number of displayed step-up images B, the higher the expected degree of change to the pending image.
Specifically, when two step-up images B are displayed, the pending image changes to green at a predetermined timing. FIG. 313(d) shows an effect example when the effect pattern “PTN-3-006” is executed and two step-up images B are displayed.
Further, when three step-up images B are displayed, the pending image changes to red at a predetermined timing. FIG. 313(e) shows an effect example when the effect pattern "PTN-3-022" is executed and two step-up images B are displayed. Also, when four step-up images B are displayed (effect pattern “PTN-4-086”), the pending image changes to a gold color at a predetermined timing.
It should be noted that the expectation level of the reserved image is high in the order of white, green, red, and gold.

When two step-up images B are displayed, the image may be changed to one of green, red, and gold pending images. Further, when three step-up images B are displayed, the image may be changed to either red or gold on hold image. By doing so, even when the number of displayed step-up images B is small, the player can have a sense of expectation that the high-expectation pending image change effect will be executed.

Further, when a plurality of step-up images C (range of 2 to 4) are displayed, a button operation effect is executed at a predetermined timing after the "history display step-up effect" is completed. It should be noted that the greater the number of step-up images C that are displayed, the more expected the operation effect is executed.
Specifically, when two step-up images C are displayed, the button operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing, the light source provided in the button emits white light, and the button emits white light. An operation presentation is executed in which it is visually recognized as if the player is there. FIG. 313(f) shows an effect example when the effect pattern “PTN-3-041” is executed and two step-up images C are displayed.
Further, when three step-up images C are displayed, the button operation becomes valid at a predetermined timing, and the light source provided in the button emits red light so that the button emits red light. The visually recognizable operation effect is executed.
Further, when four step-up images C are displayed (when the effect pattern "PTN-4-171" is executed), an operation effect is executed in which the lever operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation is higher when the operation effect is performed than when the operation effect is not performed. In addition, the degree of expectation for operation presentation is highest in the order of button operation (white light emission), button operation (red light emission), and lever operation.

When two step-up images C are displayed, any one of button operation (white light emission), button operation (red light emission), and lever operation may be executed. Also, when three step-up images C are displayed, an operation presentation of either button operation (red light emission) or lever operation may be executed. By doing so, even when the number of displayed step-up images C is small, the player can have a sense of anticipation that the highly anticipated operation performance will be executed.
It should be noted that, in the button operation in the operation presentation, acceptance of operations on the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, etc. is enabled. In addition, in the lever operation, operation acceptance for the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, etc. is enabled. It should be noted that various aspects in other embodiments can be adopted as various aspects related to operation acceptance.

Regardless of the number of displayed step-up images D, the step-up images D do not have a function of suggesting or notifying some event.

It should be noted that, when the production pattern "PTN-2" is executed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss without entering the ready-to-win state, but the step-up image is "A". A” (effect pattern “PTN-2-001”), “B” “B” (effect pattern “PTN-2-006”), “C” “C” (effect pattern “PTN-2-011”) and When it is displayed, it should be at least a ready-to-win state, and depending on the situation, may result in a big win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from inevitably resulting in a loss despite the execution of the performance, and to leave the player with a sense of expectation for a big win.

Although an example has been shown in which the degree of expectation is indicated by a predetermined effect mode based on the number of step-up images, it is assumed that the predetermined effect mode is executed based on the step-up images being displayed in a predetermined order. can be
Specifically, the step-up images are displayed in a special order such as the effect pattern “PTN-4-028” and the effect pattern “PTN-4-217” (“A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, etc.). 'D', 'C', 'B', and 'A' in order), after the 'history display step-up effect' ends, the 'Year-end song battle reach effect', which is a special reach effect at a predetermined timing ' or 'The countdown reach effect' is executed.

As described above, when the performance pattern "PTN-3" or the performance pattern "PTN-4" is executed, the decorative symbols are always in the ready state.
Here, by checking the step-up images displayed in the history display area, if the step-up images are displayed as 'A', 'B', 'C', and 'D', it can be confirmed that a special reach will occur. Players can recognize. Similarly, the number of step-up images A can be used to recognize the degree of expectation that a big win will occur. Similarly, depending on the number of step-up images B, it is possible to recognize what kind of holding change effect is generated. Similarly, depending on the number of step-up images C, it is possible to recognize what kind of operation effect will occur.

On the other hand, even when the “history display step-up effect” is executed, the history of the displayed step-up images is, for example, “D”, “B”, “D”, “C” (effect pattern “PTN-4-223”). As in, when the above-described conditions are not satisfied, it is not suggested that the expectation degree, the pending change effect, or the operation effect is executed.

It should be noted that when the step-up image is displayed as ``B'', ``B'', ``C'', ``C'' (production pattern ``PTN-4-091''), the player is informed that the decorative pattern is in a ready-to-win state. At the same time, it is shown to the player that both the pending change effect and the operation effect will occur. FIG. 313(g) shows an effect example when the effect pattern "PTN-4-091" is executed and two step-up images B and two step-up images C are displayed.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to knowing to what stage the history display step-up effect is displayed, by referring to the history of the displayed step-up images, the degree of expectation and what kind of The player can recognize whether the effect is generated.
The player pays attention to both the stage to which the history display step-up effect continues and the circumstances under which the history display step-up effect continues to visually recognize the effect, and feels a new interest. It will happen.

After the “history display step-up effect” ends, the pending change effect or operation effect may be executed immediately (for example, after one second).
Also, a special ready-to-win effect may be started immediately after the "history display step-up effect" ends (for example, after 1 second).

The occurrence of the pending change effect, the operation effect, and the special ready-to-win effect may be indicated in the display area until those effects are executed. For example, the display method in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295 or the like may be adopted.
For example, the suspension change effect may be displayed in characters as "suspension (green)", "suspension (red)", and "suspension (gold)". Alternatively, a circular green (or red or gold) image may be displayed as an icon to indicate what color the hold changes to.
Further, the operation effects may be displayed in characters such as "button (white)", "button (red)", and "lever". Alternatively, a white (or red) image imitating the shape of a button or an image imitating the shape of a lever may be displayed as icons to indicate what kind of operation effects are to be performed.
In addition, as for the special ready-to-win effect, the name of the ready-to-reach effect may be displayed in characters such as "Year-end Song Battle" and "The Countdown".
Also, regarding the degree of expectation, the level of the degree of expectation may be displayed using a numerical value or the like.

Notification with a degree of expectation of 100% may be performed. For example, when the effect pattern "PTN-4-086"("B""B""B""B") is executed, some kind of jackpot may always occur.
In addition, when the production pattern “PTN-4-001” (“A” “A” “A” “A”) is executed, a high probability time saving jackpot (after the jackpot game state ends, a high probability time saving state A jackpot) may always occur.
In this way, some kind of big win or high-probability time-saving big win may occur based on the combination of the step-up images displayed up to the fourth stage.

Note that some of the performance patterns displayed only up to the second stage or up to the third stage may be provided with a performance pattern in which some kind of big win or a high-probability reduction-time-time big win occurs.
For example, when the performance pattern "PTN-3-020"("B""A""D") is executed, some kind of jackpot may always occur.
In addition, when the performance pattern "PTN-2-014"("D","B") is executed, a high-probability time-saving jackpot (a high-probability time-saving state jackpot after the end of the jackpot game state) always occurs. You may do so.

Four types of step-up images, step-up image A to step-up image D, are shown, but step-up images of other modes may be displayed.
In addition, when the history of the displayed step-up image becomes a specific combination, the degree of expectation is shown, or a predetermined effect (the pending change effect or operation effect) is performed. It may be indicated that a predetermined degree of expectation or a predetermined effect is executed in response to the step-up image being displayed once.
For example, a step-up image of "Hold" may be displayed at any one of the first to fourth stages to indicate that the suspension change effect is to be executed.
Also, a step-up image of "manipulation" may be displayed at any one of the first to fourth stages to indicate that the operation effect is to be executed.
Also, a step-up image such as "V" or "hit" may be displayed at any one of the first to fourth stages to indicate that some kind of big win will occur.
Further, by displaying a step-up image of "definite" in any one of the first to fourth stages, it may be indicated that a high-probability short-time jackpot will occur.

With reference to FIG. 314, an example of "history display step-up effect" is shown. It may not be possible in some cases. For example, first, only a semi-transparent step-up effect display window is displayed, and then the step-up effect display window is displayed in an opaque state, resulting in the display state shown in FIG. ” starts, or only the semi-transparent step-up effect display window is displayed, and then the display of the semi-transparent step-up effect display window ends and the “history display step-up effect” does not start. You can let it be. Such display may be performed from timing t1 to timing t2.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the “history display step-up effect” will start.

In the “history display step-up effect”, an embodiment in which the step-up image is displayed in the range of 1 to 4 times has been shown, but the range of 1 to 3 times or 1 to 5 times or more is predetermined. The step-up image may be displayed within a predetermined number of times.

In the "history display step-up effect", if the player does not notice that the step-up images are displayed in a predetermined combination, there is a risk that the player will lose interest. Therefore, an effect display may be performed to notify that a predetermined combination has been displayed.
FIGS. 316(a) to 316(d) show display examples in the step-up effect display window from the first stage to the fourth stage when the effect pattern "PTN-4-091" is executed. . In FIG. 316(b), the two step-up images B displayed in reduced size are surrounded by a frame. Similarly, in FIG. 316(d), the two step-up images C displayed in reduced size are surrounded by a frame.
By performing such a display, it is possible for the player to easily notice that a predetermined combination has been established.

In addition, as in the case where the performance pattern "PTN-4-103" is executed, a plurality of step-up images such as "B", "C", "B", and "C" may be displayed but not displayed continuously. Therefore, in such a case, instead of surrounding the step-up image displayed in a reduced size with a frame, the step-up image displayed in a reduced size may be moved in a predetermined manner. For example, the step-up image B is displayed by vibrating vertically when two images are displayed, and the step-up image C is displayed by vibrating horizontally when two images are displayed. good too. FIG. 316(e) shows an example of such a display when the production pattern "PTN-4-103" is executed up to the fourth stage. It should be noted that the arrows in the drawing schematically represent the manner of movement by vibration (direction of movement), and do not indicate that the image of the arrow is actually displayed.

Note that the frame may be displayed in a different manner according to the number of step-up images that are complete. For example, when three step-up images B are displayed as in the case where the production pattern "PTN-4-087"("B""B""B""C") is executed, the frame Thickness can be thicker. FIG. 316(f) shows an example of such a display when the production pattern "PTN-4-087" is executed up to the fourth stage. In addition, when four step-up images B are displayed, the thickness of the frame may be further increased. By adopting such an embodiment, as the number of displayed step-up images B increases, the thickness of the frame gradually increases. can be more appealing.
It should be noted that although an example in which the display mode of the frame is made different has been given, the step-up image displayed in a reduced size may be vibrated in a different mode. For example, as the number of displayed step-up images increases, the amplitude of the step-up images that are being vibrated and displayed should be increased or the period should be decreased. It should be noted that when these amplitudes and cycles are made different, it is desirable to make them so different that the player can recognize the difference.

By adopting such an embodiment, the player can recognize that the step-up images are displayed in a predetermined combination. In addition, it is possible to make it easier to notice when a combination with a high degree of expectation occurs.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 313 and 314, etc., the player only looks at the effect displayed in the display area during execution of the "history display step-up effect", and actively could not be involved in directing.
An embodiment modified so that the player can participate in the "history display step-up effect" by button operation will be described below. It should be noted that the operation of the attack button 3710 is required as a button.

The player's operation on the button is set as a condition for the ``history display step-up effect'' to proceed to the next stage, and when the player does not operate the button, the ``history display step-up effect'' is performed. may be prevented from proceeding to the next step.
For example, first, a step-up effect display window and an image instructing a button operation may be displayed, and the “history display step-up effect” may be started on condition that the operation is performed. FIG. 317(a) shows a state in which a step-up effect display window and an image instructing button operation are displayed. Specifically, it shows a state in which a simulated image imitating an attack button 3710 is displayed with a character "push" indicating an operation mode in the center thereof. Note that "?" is displayed in each history display area.
On the other hand, if the button has not been operated for a predetermined time, the step-up effect display window and the image instructing the operation of the button are terminated without displaying the step-up image. It shifts to the display mode shown in c).
It should be noted that the configuration of the buttons operated by the player (types of buttons, display mode, etc.) may adopt configurations in other embodiments as appropriate.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 313(b) and the like, the step-up image at each stage was displayed for 2 seconds, but the period during which the button operation is valid is added for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). The display time of the step-up image of the stage may be set to 4 seconds in total. For example, when a button operation is performed at the timing when the operation valid period has passed one second, the step-up image may be displayed for the remaining three seconds.

Also, the display of the step-up image of the first stage is automatically performed, but when the button is operated at that timing, the step-up image of the second stage and after is automatically displayed. can be FIG. 317(b) shows a state in which an image instructing a button operation is displayed after the step-up image B is displayed as the first step-up image.
On the other hand, if the button is not operated for a predetermined time, the display of the step-up effect display window and the image instructing the operation of the button is ended without displaying the step-up image of the second and subsequent stages. 314(c).
According to such an embodiment, the player can select whether or not to display the next step-up image while recognizing the first displayed step-up image. The player himself/herself can decide whether or not to proceed with the performance.

Further, the display of the step-up images up to the second step is automatically performed, but when the step-up image of the second step is displayed, an image instructing the operation of the button is displayed. Step-up images of the third and subsequent stages may be displayed on condition that an operation is performed. FIG. 317(c) shows a display mode in which an image instructing button operation at this time is displayed.
Similarly, the display of the step-up images up to the third stage is automatically performed, but when the step-up image of the third stage is displayed, an image instructing the operation of the button is displayed. A step-up image of the fourth stage may be displayed on the condition that the operation is performed on . FIG. 317(d) shows a display mode in which an image instructing button operation at this time is displayed.
It should be noted that if the button is not operated for a predetermined time, the step-up effect display window and the image instructing the operation of the button are terminated without displaying the step-up image. It shifts to the display mode shown in c).
According to such an embodiment, the stage progresses and a plurality of step-up images are displayed, and in a state where the expectation that a predetermined combination will be established is heightened, the step-up image of the next stage is displayed. The display can be performed by the player's own operation, which improves interest.

Button operations may be requested at all of the above timings. Alternatively, button operations may be requested at a plurality of timings in each timing described above, and button operations may not be requested at some timings.
According to such an embodiment, since the number of button operations increases, it is possible to satisfy a player who is highly motivated to play.

If the operation is not performed although the operation is requested, it is preferable to display a step-up image in the same manner as when the operation is performed. By displaying the step-up image even when no operation is performed in this way, the player may lose the motivation to operate the button by chance or operate the smartphone, etc. Even if it is in a state where it cannot be performed, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the performance.
On the other hand, if no operation has been performed, the step-up image at that stage is not displayed, the history display area is displayed as it is, and the next step-up image (or button display for instructing an operation) may be performed. Instead of displaying "?" as it is, the characters "No operation!" may be displayed in the history display area. By preventing the step-up image from being displayed when the operation is not performed in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the button operation.

As the mode of operation of the button, the player may be requested to perform another operation mode instead of simply pressing the button once.
For example, the step-up image of the next stage may be evaluated under the condition that the button is pressed repeatedly (for example, the button is pressed 10 times or more in 2 seconds). Alternatively, the step-up image of the next stage may be evaluated under the condition that the button is kept pressed for a predetermined time (for example, one second) or longer.
In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 317(a) to 317(d), the character "push" indicating the operation mode was added to the center of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, but " Instead of "push", characters such as "continuous hit" and "long press" may be displayed to indicate the operation mode to the player. FIG. 317(e) and FIG. 317(f) show display states in which "continuous hit" and "long press" are displayed, respectively.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 317(a) etc., it is shown that the operation of the attack button 3710 is required, but the operation is required not only to the attack button 3710 but also to other operation means. You may do so. As other operating means, a mission button 3700, a defense button 3740, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, etc. can be employed.

As an example of operation means that require operation, an embodiment in which only operation of one type of operation means (attack button 3710) is required has been shown, but one of a plurality of operation means is selected with a predetermined probability. and an operation for the operation means may be requested.
For example, in one "history display step-up effect", operation of the attack button 3710 is requested at each stage, and in another "history display step-up effect", operation of the mission button 3700 is requested at each stage. can be
Alternatively, operation of the attack button 3710 may be requested at one stage in a certain "history display step-up effect", and operation of the mission button 3700 may be requested at another stage.
In this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming tedious by requiring the operation of a different button instead of requiring the operation of a predetermined button each time.

Although an example in which the subsequent step-up image is not displayed when the player does not operate the button has been shown, a predetermined time (provided as a step-up effect) is shown if the player does not operate the button. The step-up image may be displayed according to a predetermined effect pattern when the effective time of each button operation has elapsed.
According to such an embodiment, a player who wants to operate a button can operate it, and a player who does not want to operate a button does not have to operate it.

When a lottery determines whether or not to display a step-up image when a button operation is performed, the step-up image is always not displayed when the player does not perform an operation. good too.

It should be noted that the player may be allowed to select which of these presentation modes to select. For example, during the demo display, it is possible to customize whether or not a button operation is requested in the "history display step-up effect", and if so, in which mode the button operation is requested. good.
As the contents of customization, only one mode selected by the player from among these modes may be executed in the "history display step-up effect", or a plurality of modes selected by the player from among these modes may be executed. The "history display step-up effect" may be executed with a predetermined probability.

An embodiment has been described in which the "history display step-up effect" is started or the step-up image of the next stage is displayed in response to the button operation, but instead of the button operation, a predetermined winning prize provided in the game area is displayed. On the condition that the game ball wins or passes through the opening (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate part 2003, second starting opening 2004, etc.), "history display step-up effect" is started or the next stage step-up image may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which step-up images are displayed on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed (two seconds), button operation, or the game ball has won or passed through a predetermined winning hole. A “history display step-up effect” combining conditions may be executed. For example, these conditions are set for each of the display of the first stage step-up image, the display of the second stage step-up image, the display of the third stage step-up image, and the display of the fourth stage step-up image. The "history display step-up effect" may be executed by applying a predetermined condition among them.

For example, the display of the step-up image of the first stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the second stage on the condition of button operation, and the step-up of the second stage is performed on the condition that the game ball wins or passes through a predetermined winning hole. Even if the display of the image is switched to the display of the step-up image of the third stage, and the display of the step-up image of the third stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the fourth stage on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed. good.

Alternatively, the display of the step-up image of the first stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the second stage on the condition that the game ball wins or passes through a predetermined winning hole, and the display of the step-up image of the second stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the second stage on the condition that a predetermined time has passed. The display of the step-up image is switched to the display of the step-up image of the third stage, and the display of the step-up image of the third stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the fourth stage on condition that a predetermined time elapses. may

Two examples have been given, but the conditions for displaying step-up images in each stage are not limited to these examples. "History display step-up effect" may be executed. It should be noted that, as described above, the player may be allowed to customize the conditions in each stage.

According to such an embodiment, when button operation is not required, when button operation is required, and when game balls are required to be constantly shot, it is possible to occur. . By providing a case where no button operation is required and a case where button operation is required, the game can be slowed down. In addition, by requesting the game ball to be shot, the operating rate of the game machine can be increased, and the sales of the game parlor can be improved.

Although the step-up image of the next stage is displayed after the predetermined time (2 seconds) has passed, the predetermined time may be different depending on the display stage of the step-up image.
For example, after displaying the step-up image of the first stage for one second, the step-up image of the second stage is displayed, and after displaying the step-up image of the second stage for two seconds, the step-up image of the third stage is displayed, After the 3rd level step-up image is displayed for 3 seconds, the 4th level step-up image is displayed, and the 4th step-up image is displayed for 4 seconds, even if the "history display step-up effect" ends. good.
After displaying the step-up image of the first stage for 2 seconds, the step-up image of the second stage is displayed, after displaying the step-up image of the second stage for 2 seconds, the step-up image of the third stage is displayed, After the 3rd level step-up image is displayed for 3 seconds, the 4th level step-up image is displayed, and the 4th level step-up image is displayed for 3 seconds. good.
In this way, in the second half of the "history display step-up effect", the display time of each step-up image is lengthened, and the time until the next step-up image is displayed is lengthened. It is possible to secure sufficient time to expect whether or not a predetermined combination is displayed.

Further, after displaying the step-up image of the first stage for 4 seconds, the step-up image of the second stage is displayed, after displaying the step-up image of the second stage for 3 seconds, the step-up image of the third stage is displayed, After the 3rd level step-up image is displayed for 2 seconds, the 4th level step-up image is displayed, and the 4th level step-up image is displayed for 1 second. good.
After displaying the step-up image of the first stage for 3 seconds, the step-up image of the second stage is displayed, after displaying the step-up image of the second stage for 3 seconds, the step-up image of the third stage is displayed, After the 3rd level step-up image is displayed for 2 seconds, the 4th level step-up image is displayed, and the 4th level step-up image is displayed for 2 seconds. good.
In this way, in the second half of the "history display step-up effect", the display time of each step-up image is shortened, and the time until the next step-up image is displayed is shortened. is suddenly displayed as if it were determined, and the player can feel great interest.

FIG. 314(d) shows an example in which one star-shaped mark is attached to the step-up image A, but the step-up image A may be displayed with a plurality of star-shaped marks. You may do so. Also, a predetermined event may be suggested or notified by the number of displayed star-shaped marks.
FIG. 318(a) shows a state in which a step-up image A marked with a single star is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(b) shows a state in which the step-up image A with two star marks is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(c) shows a state in which the step-up image A with three star marks is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(d) shows a state in which the step-up image A with four star marks is displayed as the first step-up image.

The greater the number of star-shaped marks attached, the higher the expectation of a big win. By adopting such a mode, when the combination of the step-up images is displayed in a mode in which the expectation for the big win cannot be expected, or the step-up image is displayed only up to the stage where the expectation for the big win cannot be expected, such as the 1st and 2nd stages. Even so, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for a big win by the number of star-shaped marks.

Note that the star-shaped mark may be displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the display of the step-up image is started. By adopting such a display mode, even if the degree of expectation indicated by the display of the step-up image is low, depending on the number of displayed star-shaped marks, the expectation of a big win can be maintained. can.

The predetermined lottery process for determining the number of star-shaped marks to be displayed is independent of the predetermined lottery process for determining the effect patterns (“PTN-1-001” to “PTN-4-0256”) to be executed. You can also use
For example, in the case of a big hit, a lottery is performed with a probability of 1 star being 10%, 2 stars being 20%, 3 stars being 30%, and 4 stars being 40%. It is preferable to conduct a lottery with a probability of 40% for 1 star, 30% for 2 stars, 20% for 3 stars, and 10% for 4 stars.
By adopting such a mode, it is possible to prevent the number of production patterns from becoming enormous.

Although the step-up image A is shown as an example, the step-up image B and the step-up image C may adopt the same aspect.
For example, a step-up image B with one to four Chinese characters "Hou" added thereto may be displayed. FIG. 318(e) shows a state in which a step-up image B with four Chinese characters "Hou" is displayed as the first step-up image.
Also, a step-up image C with one to four Chinese characters "艾" attached may be displayed. FIG. 318(f) shows a state in which a step-up image C to which four Chinese characters "Kanji" are attached is displayed as the first step-up image.
In these, it is better to set the degree of expectation higher as the number of "ho" and "manipulation" increases.

The degree of expectation for the effect to be executed may be indicated by the displayed mark or the total number of displayed kanji characters.
For example, when production pattern PTN-2-001 is executed and ``A'' and ``A'' are displayed, the total number of star-shaped marks to be displayed is between 2 and 8. The higher the number, the higher the expectation may be.
When two step-up images A are displayed and eight star-shaped marks are displayed, the degree of expectation is that three step-up images A are displayed and three star-shaped marks are displayed. It should be lower than expected.

Similarly, when "B", "B" or "C", "C" are displayed, the total number of displayed "K" and "K" will be between 2 and 8, but this In the case of "A", the same mode as in the case of "A" may be adopted. For example, the greater the total display number of "keep" and "manipulate", the higher the expectation.

Although an example in which alphabetic characters "A" to "D" are included as the step-up images A to D, respectively, images of other forms may be adopted as long as the images can be distinguished. For example, instead of these four alphabets, four character images of female singer characters in different costumes and poses may be displayed.
Although an embodiment has been shown in which the degree of expectation is indicated by a star-shaped mark or the total number of displayed characters, instead of these, characters such as "GOOD" and "EXCELLENT!" A similar effect can be obtained.

Further, in each step-up image, predetermined straight lines are combined to form a background portion, but a form other than straight lines may be adopted. For example, any one of a daytime scenery image representing a daytime scenery, an evening scenery image representing an evening scenery, and a nighttime scenery image representing a nighttime scenery may be displayed. Further, the degree of expectation may be higher when the evening scenery image is displayed than when the daytime scenery image is displayed. Further, the degree of expectation may be higher when the night scenery image is displayed than when the evening scenery image is displayed.
In addition, you may combine these display modes.

An embodiment in which the displayed step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area has been shown with reference to FIGS.

In this embodiment, an image obtained by reducing the step-up image is displayed in advance in the history display area. Then, based on whether or not the step-up image displayed at each stage matches the step-up image displayed in a reduced size in the history display area, the player is notified of the degree of expectation. there is

This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320. FIG. 319 and 320 are diagrams showing display modes in the step-up effect display window. Also, the effect mode will be described by taking as an example the case where the effect pattern “PTN-4-030” (“A” “B” “D” “B”) is executed.

First, when the step-up effect display window starts to be displayed, an image obtained by reducing the step-up image in advance is displayed in the history display area. A reduced image of the step-up image A is displayed in the first history display area, a reduced image of the step-up image C is displayed in the second history display area, and a step-up image D is displayed in the third history display area. A reduced image is displayed, and an image obtained by reducing the step-up image B is displayed in the fourth history display area. Each history display area is displayed with a gray background. FIG. 319(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a step-up image A is displayed as a step-up image of the first stage. FIG. 319(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the first history display area is displayed in white, and the characters "EXCELLENT!" are displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 319(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the characters "EXCELLENT!" have been displayed (FIG. 319(d)), a step-up image B is displayed as a second step-up image. FIG. 319(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, an image in the shape of an "x" is displayed in the entire second history display area, and the characters "not good enough..." are displayed in the vicinity of the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 319(f) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the display of the characters "not good enough..." is finished (Fig. 320(a)), a step-up image D is displayed as a third step-up image. FIG. 320(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the third history display area is displayed in white, and the characters "EXCELLENT!" are displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 320(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the characters "EXCELLENT!" have been displayed (FIG. 320(d)), a step-up image B is displayed as a fourth step-up image. FIG. 320(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the fourth history display area is displayed in white, and the characters "EXCELLENT!" are displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 320(f) shows the display state at this time.

Thus, when the same step-up image as the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area is displayed (first stage, third stage, fourth stage), the background becomes white. .
On the other hand, when a step-up image different from the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area is displayed (second stage), the background remains gray, and the previously displayed step-up image is displayed in the history display area. An image in the shape of an "x" is displayed in front of the step-up image that was displayed.
The degree of expectation is set to be higher as the number of times (three times in this example) that the same step-up image as the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area is displayed increases. The player can recognize the degree of expectation by the number of areas displayed with a white background in the history display area.

Note that if the matching step-up image satisfies various conditions shown with reference to FIGS. 307 to 314 and the like, an effect corresponding to each condition may be executed. For example, if the matching step-up image includes two "C"s, an operation effect may be executed. Similarly, for "A" and "B", the degree of expectation may be indicated in a manner corresponding to the number of matches, or the suspension change effect may be executed.

In the example shown, the background color is different depending on whether the step-up image matches or does not match. The color of the frame portion of is changed from black to red, and if they do not match, it may remain black.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320, the step-up images in the second stage did not match. may be performed. For example, the history display area may be surrounded by a frame, or the characters "PERFECT!" may be displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 321(a) shows a display mode when such display is performed.
Also, the number of matches may be indicated. FIG. 321(b) shows a display mode when the characters "Match 3!" are displayed.
In addition, whether or not there is a match may be indicated by "o" or "x" corresponding to each history display area. FIG. 321(c) shows a display mode when such display is performed.
These displays are examples of effects performed within the step-up effect display window. A display such as "PERFECT!" or "Match 3!" may be performed.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 319(c), 319(f), 320(c), and 320(f), characters ("EXCELLENT!"・") was displayed, the display of the history display area was continued as it was, but during the period when these characters were displayed, the display of the history display area was erased or displayed. may also be displayed in a smaller size.
With such a configuration, the player can more clearly recognize whether or not there is a match.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320, the player's operation is not requested, but a step-up image is displayed according to the player's button operation. You may It should be noted that the above-described modes can be appropriately adopted for implementation modes and display modes of various effects related to button operations by the player.
It should be noted that it is preferable to display the next operation instruction at the timing when the display indicating whether or not they match is erased. For example, in the display states shown in FIGS. 319(a), 319(d), 320(a), and 320(d), the operation instructions may be displayed.
In addition, "?" may be displayed as a history display at the stage when no operation has been performed. FIG. 321(d) shows a display example when no operation is performed in the display of the third stage.

With reference to FIGS. 319 and 320, an embodiment has been shown in which "Not good..." is displayed when there is no match, and "EXCELLENT!" is displayed when there is a match. may be adopted.
For example, if there is no match, either "Not good...", "EXCELLENT!", or "WONDERFUL" is displayed, and if there is a match, either "EXCELLENT!" You may make it display.
Specifically, if there is no match, "not good..." is displayed with a probability of 95%, "EXCELLENT!" is displayed with a probability of 3%, and "WONDERFUL" is displayed with a probability of 2%. If so, "EXCELLENT!" may be displayed with a probability of 70% and "WONDERFUL" with a probability of 30%.
Also, if you lose, there is an 80% chance that you will not match, and if you win, there will be a 10% chance that you will not match, and a 90% chance that you will match. can be

An embodiment has been described in which character display (“EXCELLENT!”, “Not good enough...”) indicating whether or not the step-up images match is performed, but the time for character display depending on whether the step-up images match or not can be different.
For example, by lengthening the display time of characters ("EXCELLENT!") when they match, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.
On the other hand, by lengthening the display time of the characters ("not good enough...") when they do not match, it is possible to stimulate the player and motivate him or her to operate the button after the next time.

Alternatively, the character display time may be different depending on whether a predetermined button operation is performed or not. For example, the display time when a button operation is performed is longer, and the character displayed by the player's own action is visually recognized for a long time, so that the operation can be compensated. can.

Character display ("EXCELLENT!", "Not good enough...") indicating whether or not there is a match both when a predetermined button operation is performed and when a predetermined button operation is not performed. As described above, when a predetermined button operation is performed, the time for character display is changed to the display time for a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the end of character display ( button operation valid period).
On the other hand, if the predetermined button operation is not performed, the character display time is changed to the display time of a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the character display is completed (button operation valid period). should be shorter than

When a predetermined button operation is performed, the character display time may be shorter than the display time of a new operation instruction image instructing the button operation performed after the character display is completed.
On the other hand, when the predetermined button operation is not performed, the time for character display may be set longer than the display time for a new operation instruction image instructing the button operation to be performed after the end of the character display.

As mentioned above, the display of the history display area may be erased when displaying the characters (“EXCELLENT!” The time from the restart until the display of the history display area is erased again may be shortened under the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied.

For example, when restarting the display of the history display area, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shorten. Alternatively, it may be shortened when a button is operated. Alternatively, it may be shortened when a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined winning hole within a predetermined time.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 314 to 320 and the like, the variable display of decorative symbols is started, and immediately after the state of high-speed variation, the "history display step-up effect" is executed. At other timings, the “history display step-up effect” may be executed.
For example, the "history display step-up effect" may be executed during the execution of the "year-end song battle reach effect" or "the countdown reach effect".

In addition, the execution of the "history display step-up effect" is not completed during one variable display of decorative patterns, but the "history display step-up effect" is executed over multiple variable display of decorative patterns. may
For example, a "history display step-up effect" may be executed as a look-ahead effect. Specifically, when there are four holds, the step-up image is displayed one step at a time in each of the four variable displays, and the fourth step-up image is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the fourth hold. It may be displayed to indicate the degree of expectation or the like corresponding to the fourth hold.

If there are less than four pending, the step-up image is displayed step by step until the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the prefetch target hold, corresponding to the prefetch target hold. In the variable display of decorative patterns, step-up images may be displayed in a plurality of stages.
For example, when there are three holds, the step-up image of the first stage is displayed in the first variable display corresponding to the first hold, and the second step-up image is displayed in the second variable display corresponding to the second hold. , the step-up image of the second stage is displayed, and the step-up images of the third stage and the fourth stage are displayed in the third variation display corresponding to the third suspension, and the third suspension is performed. The degree of expectation or the like corresponding to the may be indicated.

Another embodiment of displaying in the history display area will be described.
First, the premise of this embodiment will be described.
When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, a special lottery is performed, and a variable display of decorative patterns is performed. The probability that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit is 1/300.
When the result of the special lottery results in a big win, a big win game is executed in which the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times. Also, after the end of this big hit game, it becomes a time-saving state in which the game ball to the second start port 2004 is easy to enter. Up to this point, the game progresses in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS.
In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the winning of the first starting port 2002 and the jackpot based on the winning of the second starting port 2004 are only the 10R low-probability short-time jackpot.
The number of times of shortening of working hours provided after the big hit based on the winning prize for the first starting port 2002 is one time. On the other hand, the number of times of shortening of working hours provided after the big hit based on the winning to the second starting port 2004 is ten times.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, a small win occurs with a high probability (1/7) as a special lottery result, and when a small win occurs, a decorative pattern corresponding to the small win. is displayed, and the second big prize opening (not shown) is opened. It should be noted that the second big winning hole is provided on the right side of the game area. A specific area is provided in the second large winning opening, and when the game ball entering the second large winning opening passes through the specific area, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times to start a jackpot game. ing. In addition, since the position of the game ball that has entered the second big prize hole or the position of the game ball that has entered the second big prize hole always (or with a high probability) passes through the specific area, Except for exceptional situations such as no balls being shot, it is virtually certain that the next big winning game will be started when the small winning occurs. The probability that the result of the special lottery for the second starting hole 2004 will result in a big hit is the same probability (1/300) as the special lottery performed when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002. Since the winning occurs with a high probability (1/7), most of the big winning games for the second starting port 2004 occur via small winnings. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002, the probability of occurrence of a small hit is 0%.

The number of times of time saving given after the big hit game generated based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 2002 is 1 time, but after the big hit game generated based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 2004. The number of time reductions given is 10 times. Also, the maximum number of reservations for the first start port 2002 and the maximum number of reservations for the second start port 2004 are both four.
Therefore, after the jackpot game generated based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, the player can receive a special lottery for the second starting port 2004 up to five times, and the player can If a small win (occurs with a probability of 1/7) occurs during a total of 5 special lotteries including the upper limit of the number of pending at the second start port 2004, the next big win state will substantially occur. Determine.
On the other hand, after the jackpot game generated based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 2002, the player can receive a lottery up to 14 times, and the player can receive the number of reserved numbers of the second start port 2004. If a small win (occurs with a probability of 1/7) occurs during a total of 14 special lotteries including the upper limit, it is substantially determined that the next big win state will occur.

According to such a game specification, the player first hits to the left and enters the game ball into the first start hole 2002, aiming to generate a big hit as a result of the special lottery. .
Next, when the jackpot game is started, the player hits to the right, continues to hit to the right even after the jackpot ends, and the movable piece 2004a is driven to open the second start port 2004 with five pieces. , the game balls will be entered, and the results of the special lottery will be obtained up to 5 times. It should be noted that the time for which the movable piece 2004a is in the open state is set to a sufficient time (for example, 1 minute) for the number of suspensions corresponding to the second starting port 2004 to reach the maximum number.

A small hit occurs with a probability of 1/7 in response to the ball entering the second starting port 2004 . The player expects the occurrence of a small win (occurrence of a substantial big win as described above) during the five times of variation display.
If a small hit does not occur during the 5 times of fluctuation display, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 2004 (the remaining time of the movable piece 2004a set to open for 1 minute remains. Even if it is controlled to the normal state, it will be closed), so the variable display cannot be performed more than 5 times, so the player hits left again and aims to generate a big win. It will happen.

On the other hand, when a small hit occurs during the five times of variable display, the second big winning hole is opened, and the big winning hole is opened on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area in the second big winning hole. 2005 opens and closes a big hit state.
When this jackpot state is completed, the number of times of time saving is given 10 times, so that the game ball is entered into the second start port 2004 opened by driving the movable piece 2004a, and the special lottery is performed 14 times at maximum. result is obtained. Also in this case, if the player continues hitting to the right without taking any action such as interrupting the shooting of the game ball, the result of the special lottery will be obtained up to 14 times, and 14 times of fluctuation display will be obtained. If a small win occurs with a probability of 1/7 in the medium, the second big prize winning port opens and closes again, and a big win state occurs on the condition that the specific area is passed. In this way, if a small win occurs during the 14 times of variation display, the game state is substantially shifted to a big win game state, so that this game state loops repeatedly, and from the player's point of view, it is a continuous win state. will occur. Even if a small hit occurs during time saving, 10 times of time saving will not be newly provided unless the specific area is passed.

In this way, the player has three states with different degrees of advantage: the state of hitting left, the first state of hitting right (the state in which the number of times of time reduction is given once), the second state of hitting right (time saving The game is played while being conscious of which of the three states (the state where the number of times is given 10 times) is being played.

In this embodiment as well, in the state of hitting left, it is common that the above-mentioned "year-end song battle reach effect" and "the countdown reach effect" are performed, and it is displayed in the year-end song battle reach effect etc. The story is that a female singer character as the main character aims to perform a world live.

In this embodiment, there are three states: a left-handed state, a first right-handed state (a state in which the number of time reductions is given once), and a second right-handed state (a state in which the number of time reductions is given 10 times). For example, "Aim for local live", "Aim for national live", and "Aim for world live" are displayed in order from the left in the upper part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so that the player can recognize how far the state has been exceeded. displayed (not shown). Although this display is always displayed, it may be hidden in a special state (for example, during the opening of the big win, during the ending of the big win, or during a special error).

In the state of hitting left, all of "Aim for Local Live", "Aim for National Live", and "Aim for World Live" are normally displayed, and the first right-handed state (a state in which the number of time reductions is given once) If so, a special display is displayed that only "Aim for Local Live" has been completed, and if it is the second right-handed state (a state in which the number of times of time reduction is given 10 times), "Aim for Local Live" A special display is displayed that shows that "Aim for Local Live" and "Aim for National Live" of "Aim for National Live" and "Aim for World Live" are completed, and the second right-handed state (10 times of time reduction is given) A special display is made to show that all live performances have been completed when a small win is won and a specific area is won (or when a big win is won) in which a substantive big win is generated in a state where the live performance is completed. In addition, in the second right-handed state (state where the number of times of time reduction is given 10 times), it is a special It is conceivable that the reason why such a display is made is that although a small win was won in the first right-handed state, a small win was not won in the second right-handed state (so-called one-shot through). Therefore, the final goal of "Aim for the World Live" is to be completed when avoiding one-shot through. This is because, when there is a possibility of a one-shot through which the player feels uncomfortable, displaying that all are completed may make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, the special display that shows that "Aim for Local Live" etc. is completed, for example, the display of "Aim for Local Live" is slightly darkened, or an effect is displayed around the display of "Aim for Local Live". Alternatively, a message display such as "CLEAR!"

In addition, in the first right-handed state and the second right-handed state in the present embodiment, in the state of left-handed hitting, the symbols of the same numbers as the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that a big win will occur. Only then, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that a big win or a small win has occurred.

Specifically, for example, when there are 8 types of decoration symbols "1 to 8" in the left-handed state, if a big win is made with "333" in the left-handed state, the first right-handed state, It is characterized in that when a big win or a small win occurs in the second right-handed state, the decoration pattern of "333" is stopped and displayed without fail. As for the decorative symbols displayed in the first right-handed state and the second right-handed state, 8 kinds of "1 to 8" are prepared in the same manner as the decorative symbols in the left-handed state. However, the design is different for left-handed, first right-handed, and second right-handed. For example, if the decorative pattern in the left-handed state is a basic design (for example, a number pattern with characters), in the first right-handed state, the design in which the backlight points to the number pattern with characters, and the second right hand. In the beat state, the number pattern with characters is pointed by a halo, and the numbers are drawn in gold. In this way, the higher the degree of advantage, the more luxurious the design is, so that the player's sense of exhilaration can be enhanced.

By doing so, most gaming machines, in which the advantageous state ends when the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times, mainly entertain whether or not the ready-to-win state occurs, but this embodiment. In the gaming machine, when the left decorative pattern does not stop at a specific pattern (for example, when a big hit is made with "333" while hitting left, the specific pattern becomes "3"). Therefore, it is possible to enhance interest in stopping the left decorative pattern, and even if the left decorative pattern does not stop at a specific pattern, when the right decorative pattern stops, for example, the left By changing the decorative pattern again from the temporarily stopped state, it is possible to have more timings to increase interest, such as stopping the left decorative pattern at a specific pattern.

In addition, there is a conventional technique of increasing the expectation for winning, for example, the reach of "7" so as to increase interest in the stoppage of the left decorative pattern, but basically, "7" As a result, it was not possible to increase interest in the stoppage of the left decorative pattern, but in this embodiment, since it can only hit with a specific pattern, It is possible to stop the specific pattern on the left decorative pattern higher than the probability of winning the small prize, and to create a reach state by the specific patterns in the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern higher than the probability of winning the small prize. .

In addition, the above-mentioned special display showing that the game has been completed may be performed by displaying a decorative symbol that hits a big hit in the state of hitting to the left. By doing so, for example, when a big hit is made with ``333'' in the state of hitting left, ``333'' is displayed superimposed on the display position of ``Aim for the local live'', and the first right-handed hitting is performed. When the state is shifted to the second right-handed state (that is, a small hit is won in the first right-handed state and "333" is displayed), and when it is controlled to the second right-handed state, "Aim for local live "333" is displayed overlaid on the display position of "", and "333" is displayed overlaid on the display position of "Aim for National Live". When winning and passing through the specific area (that is, "333" is displayed by winning a small win in the second right-handed state), "333" is superimposed on the display position of "Aim for local live" and "Aim for nationwide live". In addition to being displayed, "333" is displayed superimposed on the display position of "Aim for the World Live", so that an impactful display is performed.

"Aim for Local Live", "Aim for National Live", and "Aim for World Live", which are displayed in order from the left in the upper part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, do not make you expect a win, but only indicate the state. Therefore, it is preferable to display in a size less than 1/2 of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example. This is because the main effect performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is easier for the player to recognize if the effect is based on the lottery result of winning or losing.

In this case, "Aim for Local Live", "Aim for National Live", and "Aim for World Live" displayed in order from the left in the upper part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are advance notices based on the result of the special lottery. Since the display is smaller than the production and reach production, a special display that indicates completion is slightly darkened, an effect is displayed around the display of "Aim for Local Live", and a message such as "CLEAR!" However, when three decorative symbols (for example, "333") are displayed as a special display, it is difficult for the player to recognize which symbol is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is preferable to display one decorative pattern instead of three decorative patterns. By displaying one decorative pattern, when all live performances are completed, ``3'', ``3'', and ``3'' are displayed in the upper part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. , it is possible to give the player the illusion that he has won even though he has not won the prize.

In addition, specific live performances (for example, "Aim for Local Lives" and "Aim for National Lives") are displayed with three decorative patterns, and live performances other than specific live performances (For example, "Aim for World Lives") are displayed with 1 You may make it display that it was completed with one decoration pattern. In this case, the biggest difficulty in the specifications of this embodiment is to win a big hit or a small hit in the first right-handed state. Indicating that you won a big or small win in the right-handed state) is displayed with three decorative patterns, and the remaining "Aim for local live" and "Aim for world live" are displayed with one decorative pattern. Alternatively, only the complete display of "Aim for National Live" (display indicating that a big hit or a small hit has been won in the first right-handed state) is displayed with one decorative pattern, and the remaining "Aim for Local Live" is displayed. and "Aim for the world live" may be displayed with three decorative patterns.

Also, when "CLEAR" is displayed, it is displayed in different ways, such as red characters for "Aim for local live", gold characters for "Aim for nationwide live", and rainbow-colored characters for "Aim for world live". You may do so. As mentioned above, the biggest difficulty in the specification of this embodiment is to win the jackpot or the small hit in the first right-handed state, so the rainbow-colored letters are complete. It may be displayed when (when a big win or a small win is won in the first right-handed state).
Strictly speaking, a single color called rainbow does not exist, but colors such as blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, . . . In this specification, a rainbow color is used to refer to a display mode in which a player visually recognizes a rainbow by causing the pixels constituting the display means to emit light in a stripe pattern.

When the decorative symbols are displayed above the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 itself is small. It is also possible to reduce the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display to be displayed, or prepare data of small-sized decorative patterns in advance and display the data. As for "CLEAR", "CLEAR" to be displayed in a ready-to-win effect or the like may be displayed in a reduced size, or small-sized "CLEAR" data may be prepared in advance and displayed.

It should be noted that all of "Aim for Local Live", "Aim for National Live", and "Aim for World Live" are displayed in the upper part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Only "Live" is displayed, in the first right-handed state, only "Aim for nationwide live" is displayed, and in the second right-handed state, only "Aim for world live" is displayed.

Also, "Aim for local live", "Aim for nationwide live", and "Aim for world live" are explained to be displayed at all times except for special situations (for example, during the opening of the jackpot, during the ending of the jackpot, and during a special error). It may be erased after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Specifically, when all of "Aim for local live", "Aim for nationwide live", and "Aim for world live" are displayed, it shifts to the first right-handed state (a state in which the number of time reductions is given once) When the "Aim for local live" is completed and "Aim for nationwide live" and "Aim for world live" are not completed, a predetermined time has passed since the start of the display (for example, 1 of about 10 seconds). It is a time close to the average variation time of the inning, a time shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, or a time that is shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state. Although it is a long time, it is shorter than the longest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, or is longer than the longest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, etc.). (Including those that are displayed but cannot be recognized).

Similarly, when all of "Aim for local live", "Aim for nationwide live", and "Aim for world live" are displayed, when the second right-handed state (state in which the number of times of time reduction is given 10 times) , "Aim for local live" and "Aim for nationwide live" are displayed as completed and "Aim for world live" is not completed. A time close to the average variation time, a time shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, or a time longer than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state. However, it is hidden (display (including those that are marked but cannot be recognized).

Similarly, when all of "Aim for local live", "Aim for nationwide live", and "Aim for world live" are displayed, the second right-handed state (state in which the number of times of time reduction is given 10 times) is shifted. In this state, when a small win is won and a specific area is passed (or when a big win is won), a complete display of ``Aim for local live'', ``Aim for nationwide live'', and ``Aim for world live'' is displayed, and the display is started. After a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, a time close to the average variation time of about 10 seconds, a time shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, or the first Although it is longer than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the right-handed state, it is shorter than the longest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, or is selected in the first right-handed state. longer than the longest possible fluctuation time, etc.) and hide it (including cases where it is displayed but cannot be recognized).

Time to hide the display that only "Aim for Local Live" is completed (1st hour), Time to hide the display that only "Aim for Local Live" and "Aim for National Live" are completed (2nd hour) , "Aim for Local Lives", "Aim for National Lives", and "Aim for World Lives" are hidden (3rd hour). Hour to Hour 3 may all be the same time, Hour 1 and Hour 2 are the same but Hour 3 is longer or shorter than Hour 1 and Hour 2, Hour 1 to Hour 3 are all different times However, all combination patterns of the first to third times have their own purposes and effects, such as making the second time longer than the first time and the third time longer than the second time. should be set accordingly.

Here, the effects of typical combination patterns will be described. As a typical example, if the pattern is the same for the first time to the third time, it will be hidden at a uniform time regardless of which state it is controlled, so reach effects and notices There is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the performance based on the result of the winning lottery such as the performance.

In addition, if the second time is longer than the first time and the third time is longer than the second time, the state (situation) is shifted to a state (situation) with a high degree of advantage. Since the display time becomes longer as the display time increases, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, and it is possible to expect an effect of improving operation by appealing to players who are not playing.

In addition, the biggest difficulty in the specification of this embodiment is to win the big hit or the small hit in the first right-handed state as described above. The first hour (the first and third hours may be reversed or may be the same). By displaying for a long time that the greatest difficulty has been overcome, it is possible to give satisfaction to the players, and it is possible to expect an effect of improving operation by appealing to players who are not playing.

In addition, since there are players who feel more joy in avoiding the one-shot through in the second right-handed state than in overcoming the biggest difficulty in the specification of this embodiment, the third time is set as the longest time. , then the second hour, the first hour (the first and second hours may be reversed or may be the same). Also, if the third time is set to be the longest time, the customers who are not playing the game will send an enthusiastic gaze asking, "How many will come out of that table?" may be shortened. The complete display is displayed when the second right-handed state (state in which the number of times of time reduction is given 10 times) is entered and the small hit is won in that state and the specific area is passed (or the big hit is won) Therefore, for example, when the number of game balls passing through the specific area is one, the time is shortened, and when two or more, the time is not shortened. By doing so, it is possible to meet the expectations of both players who feel pressure and those who do not. Also, in the case of a big hit, the specific area may not be passed through, and when the specific area is passed, the time may be shortened.

In addition, when the second right-handed state (a state in which the number of times of time reduction is given 10 times) is displayed, the display that "Aim for local live" and "Aim for nationwide live" are completed and "Aim for world live" is not completed. However, when moving to the first right-handed state (state in which the number of times of time saving is given once) and winning a small hit in that state and passing through a specific area (or when a big hit is won) may be displayed. In this case, the second time may be shortened or not depending on the number of game balls that have passed through the specific area so as to meet both expectations.

Up to this point, in the present embodiment, the story was described in which the aim is to perform a world live show, but instead, for example, each state (state of hitting left, first hitting right state, second right-handed state), it may be displayed in which ready-to-win effect was achieved. In this case, for example, instead of the display of "Aim for the local live", "the reach effect displayed when winning (not the dynamic image of all the reach effects, but the display that shows that you won with the reach effect )”.

It should be noted that it is also possible to perform prefetching for the hold corresponding to the second starting port 2004, and suggest or notify that a small hit or a big hit will be achieved by a prefetch effect.

Modified embodiments of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 and the like are shown below with reference to FIGS. 322 to 324 and the like.
In the "hourglass pending change effect", which is a special effect in the embodiment shown below, a predetermined mode (predetermined color ), an hourglass image resembling an hourglass is displayed at a position that overlaps with the hold image displayed in ), and by moving sand of a specific color within the hourglass, a display of the sand of a specific color falling within the hourglass is displayed. At the same time that the reserved image of a predetermined color is gradually hidden by the sand, an effect is performed in which the reserved image of a specific color different from the predetermined color is gradually displayed by the fallen sand image.
If all the sand does not fall and the effect ends in the middle, the change of the reserved image will not be displayed, and the reserved image of the predetermined color before the execution of the hourglass pending change effect will continue to be displayed. be done.
On the other hand, if all the sand falls and the reserved image is hidden by the fallen sand, the reserved image changes to the reserved image of the specific color. For example, when the reserved image is a blue reserved image, the green reserved image is gradually displayed as green sand falls, and finally only the green reserved image is displayed. state. In this way, when the "hourglass suspension change effect" is executed to the end, the suspension image with a higher degree of expectation is displayed.

322 to 324, etc., the detailed effects of the "hourglass hold change effect" will be described below. FIG. 322 shows a time chart in the "hourglass holding change effect". 323 and 324 show display modes in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.
In the display area, a predetermined background image can be displayed as shown in other embodiments, but illustration is omitted in this embodiment.

The "hourglass pending change effect" is executed immediately after the start of the variable display and in a state in which each decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. As the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, the stop display result of the previous variable display may be displayed as it is, or another combination of decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and displayed.
FIG. 323(a) shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state and immediately before the variable display is started. In this example, the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed in blue due to the look-ahead effect.
The production pattern 01 shown in FIG. 322(a) is a production pattern in which the "hourglass holding change production" is not executed, but is shown for comparison with other production patterns in which the "hourglass holding change production" is executed. be. The variable display starts at timing t0, and is temporarily stopped during the period from timing t0 to timing t1. FIG. 323(b) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. Then, from timing t1, the state of high-speed fluctuation is entered, and at timing t30, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and at timing t31, all the symbols are stopped and displayed. After being displayed in a stopped state until timing t32, according to the result of the special lottery indicated by the stop mode of the decorative pattern, the next variable display is started in the case of a loss, and the big win game is started in the case of a big win. .

The reserved image is erased at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but during the period when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, it is gradually made translucent or reduced in size, or overlaid with a predetermined effect display. By doing so, the visibility of the reserved image is gradually reduced or reduced at once (hidden), and at a predetermined timing until the decorative pattern stop display period ends or at the end timing of the decorative pattern stop display period It is preferable to terminate the pending image display.
For example, if the decorative pattern stop display period is 1 second, the display of the pending image may end when 0.5 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern was stopped and displayed. In addition, when the special ready-to-win effect is executed, the display of the pending image may be ended at the timing when the special ready-to-win effect is started.

The production pattern 02 shown in FIG. 322(b) is a production pattern in which only a part of the hourglass image is displayed, but not all of it is displayed, and the falling sand is not displayed. In this case, from the timing t0 to the timing t3, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as the symbols at the start of the variable display. Also, from the timing t2 to the timing t3, the hourglass image is gradually displayed from the bottom so as to overlap the reserved image in the reserved display area, but the display ends without being completely displayed. FIG. 323(c) shows a state in which the lower half of the hourglass image is displayed at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. In production pattern 02, the display of the hourglass image halfway displayed at timing t3 is completed, and the high-speed variation of the decorative pattern is started. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Also, FIG. 324(b) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed thereafter. Note that, from timing t2 to timing t3, the time chart describes that the appearance of the hourglass is the appearance of the pending image, but as shown in FIG. The reserved image is made visible.

In production patterns 03 to 05 shown in FIGS. 322(c) to 322(e), all hourglass images are displayed at timing t3. FIG. 323(d) shows the display state at this timing. Also, immediately after this, a sand image of a predetermined color (green in this example) is displayed above the hourglass image. FIG. 323(e) shows the display state at this timing. After that, a display is performed in which the sand image falls downward.

Effect pattern 03 shown in FIG. 322(c) is a effect pattern in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed halfway. In this case, from the timing t0 to the timing t5, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as the symbols at the start of the variable display. In addition, from timing t3 to timing t5, a display of sand falling from top to bottom is performed. FIG. 323(f) shows the display state at timing t5. In the performance pattern 03, the display of the hourglass image ends at this timing, and the decoration pattern that has been in the temporarily stopped state changes at high speed. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Also, FIG. 324(b) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed thereafter.

Effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 322(d) is a effect pattern in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed halfway. In the case of production pattern 04, sand falls for an additional 2 seconds compared to production pattern 03, but not all the sand falls. FIG. 323(g) shows the display state at timing t7. In the performance pattern 04, the display of the hourglass image ends at this timing, and the decoration pattern that was in the temporarily stopped state changes at high speed. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Also, FIG. 324(b) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed thereafter.

Effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. 322(e) is a effect pattern in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed to the end. The sand falls for 2 seconds longer than production pattern 04, and all the sand falls. At timing t9, the entire display area occupied by the blue reserved image is hidden by sand. FIG. 323(h) shows the display state at timing t9.
Immediately after that, the display of the hourglass image ends. FIG. 324(c) shows a state in which the display of the hourglass image is finished. As shown in the drawing, the color of the pending image is displayed in a state of changing the color of sand (in this case, green) of the falling hourglass image. Moreover, immediately after that, the high-speed variation of the decorative pattern is started. FIG. 324(d) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed.
In this embodiment, the probability that all the sand will fall and the reserved image will be promoted is set to 30%, and the probability that the relevant reserved image will not be promoted because all the sand will not fall is set to 70%. may be set as appropriate, for example, the probability of promotion may be set to about 30% to 70%.
In this effect pattern, all the sand images fall over a total of 6 seconds, but the time required for all the sand images to fall may be set appropriately, for example, about 3 to 10 seconds. may be

In the production pattern 02, the sand image does not hide the display area occupied by the relevant reserved image, and the "hourglass pending change production" ends. In addition, in production pattern 03 and production pattern 04, since the "hourglass pending change effect" ends in a state in which only part of the display area occupied by the pending image is hidden by the sand image, the pending image is changed. The holding image is displayed in its original form without being displayed. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends in production patterns 02 to 04. FIG. As shown in the figure, the color of the pending image is displayed in the same color as the pending image before the “hourglass pending change effect” is executed.

In addition, when a production pattern that fails (a production pattern in which the reserved image does not change) is selected, 2/3 of the sand falls compared to the production pattern 03, which is a production pattern that ends when the sand falls 1/3. It is preferable that the effect pattern 04, which is a effect pattern ending in stages, is more likely to be selected. By adopting such a mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation until the second half of the presentation.
Conversely, the performance pattern 04, which ends when the sand drops by 2/3, is less likely to be selected than the performance pattern 03, which ends when the sand drops by 1/3. good too. By adopting such a mode, it is possible to make the player have a great sense of anticipation when the effect progresses to the second half. Also, some players feel disgusted by the prolonged presentation, but the presentation can be made to make such players less likely to feel disgust.
Also, although a plurality of failure timings (three timings t3, t5, and t7 in this example) are provided, only one failure timing may be provided. For example, effect pattern 02 and effect pattern 03 may be disabled, and it may be determined whether or not the display mode of the pending image changes depending on whether or not the falling sand ends at timing t7. By adopting such a mode, since it is only necessary to pay attention to a certain timing during the performance, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which excessive concentration is required for the performance.

As shown in production pattern 05, the color of the sand image in the hourglass image indicates the color that the holding image changes when sand falls to the end of the "hourglass holding change production".
The effect patterns shown in the effect pattern 01 to the effect pattern 05 are whether or not the blue reserved image changes to the green reserved image. Other colors may be employed as (that is, the color of the retained image after change).
For example, white, blue, green, red, and gold can be displayed as the colors of the pending image at the start of the effect.
In addition, as the color of the sand image, it is possible to display each color of blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow, but the expectation is higher than the color of the hold image when the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed. Only colored sand images are displayed.
For example, when the reserved image is red, a sand image of either gold or rainbow color is displayed, but a blue or green sand image is not displayed. This is because the player does not like an effect that lowers the degree of expectation.

The reserved image has a colorless transparent or milky white crystal ball as a motif, and is set such that the color of the crystal ball appears to change due to the sand that falls inside the hourglass.
By overlapping the new reserved image on the front side of the original reserved image, part of the original reserved image becomes unrecognizable, but at this time, the new reserved image is more than the original reserved image. The display priority is increased, and although the lower part of the original pending image is displayed as a display process, it is hidden by the new pending image with a higher display priority, making it unrecognizable. may
Alternatively, the shape of the original reserved image and the shape of the new reserved image are changed as the production progresses (for example, the lower side and the new relevant The image may be displayed without being superimposed on each other as the display processing, with the upper side forming part of the outer shape of the reserved image being adjacent to each other.
In the display example in FIG. 323, an example of displaying a two-dimensional image is shown, but the display in the "hourglass hold change effect" may be realized by image processing using a three-dimensional model. For example, the reserved image is composed of a spherical, colorless, transparent, or milky-white 3D object resembling a crystal ball, and a minute 3D object of a specific color falls from the top of the hourglass toward the circumference of the crystal ball. Alternatively, image processing may be employed in which a spherical 3D object is gradually hidden by minute objects of a specific color from the bottom and visually changed to a specific color.
At the same time when the hourglass image is displayed, instead of changing the decorative pattern at high speed, the decorative pattern may be slowly scrolled for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the time when the hourglass image is displayed, and then the high-speed fluctuation state may be set. good.

In production pattern 02 to production pattern 04, the display of the hourglass image ends when the sand in the hourglass image does not fall, or even if it does fall, a portion of the sand remains. At this time, an effect of the hourglass being blown away by the wind is performed to display the hourglass moving out of the screen, or the sand is scattered because the hourglass is broken, so that the sand cannot be superimposed on the reserved image. After that, display processing for making the destroyed hourglass and scattered sand translucent may be performed to hide the destroyed hourglass and scattered sand.
By adopting such a mode, it is possible to return the reserved image to the original color of the reserved image in a natural manner.

In this way, in the "hourglass suspension change effect", an hourglass image is displayed at a position overlapping the suspension image, and an image of sand in a specific color different from the original suspension image color is displayed according to the passage of time. is dropped, the original reserved image is gradually eroded by the new reserved image, and the original reserved image is gradually hidden, and the original reserved image is replaced by the image of sand. An indication is made as to whether or not the color of the pending image changes depending on whether or not it is completely eroded and hidden.
For this reason, the player has a sense of anticipation as to which of the different display modes (colors) of the reserved images displayed simultaneously in the area where the reserved images are displayed, and which one will be displayed in the end. We will be watching the progress of "Hourglass Suspension Change Production".

By adopting such an effect mode, when the display mode of the reserved image is changed, the color of the original reserved image displayed in the area where the reserved image is displayed is changed to that of the reserved image. Since it is visually recognized as gradually changing to the color of the new reserved image in the area where the reserved image is displayed, the player sees only the area where the reserved image is displayed to see which color may change. As long as it is in the reserved image, it is easy to recognize, and it is expected that the color of the reserved image will change.
In addition, both the color of the pending image before the change (the color before the hourglass pending change effect is performed) and the color that may change due to the hourglass pending change effect are simultaneously displayed in the area where the pending image is displayed. Since it is recognizable, it is easy for the player to understand how expectations change from one to another.
In addition, since the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed using the display area where the pending image is displayed, the display area used for the "hourglass pending change effect" can be reduced, and the other It is possible to secure a display area for executing the effect of.
In addition, since the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped when the "hourglass holding changing effect" is executed, the player's attention can be focused on the "hourglass holding changing effect".

In addition, in this pending change effect, during the execution of the effect, the pending image before the change with a low degree of expectation gradually becomes unrecognizable, and is gradually switched to a new pending image with a color with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, compared to the case where the pending image before change is changed to the pending image after change at the final timing of the pending change effect, the player has a sense of expectation for the change of the pending image. can be gradually increased from an early stage of production.
In addition, since the reserved image with a low expectation is more likely to be displayed than the reserved image with a high expectation, the player can, in a sense, view the reserved image with a low expectation. By making the reserved image, which is tired but has a low degree of expectation, disappear in the middle of the performance, the player's feelings are refreshed and the reserved image with a high degree of expectation is displayed. You can direct people's feelings.
In addition, a false production pattern (for example, a production pattern in which the pending image does not change and the suggested degree of expectation does not change, such as the production patterns shown in production patterns 02 to 04 in FIG. 322). Thus, by allowing the player to visually recognize only a part of the high-expectation reserved image, it is possible to enhance the sense of exhilaration.

In addition, since the execution of the effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display, it is possible to make the user forget about the result of the previous variable display and rapidly increase the expectation for the current variable display.

In the display examples shown with reference to FIGS. 323(a) to 323(h) and FIGS. 324(a) to 324(d), the original pending image is eroded by the sand image to create a new pending image. In the area where the image is displayed, the display of the circular outline of the reserved image remains. The color of the original reserved image may be adopted as the outline color. Alternatively, a common color (for example, black) may be originally adopted regardless of the color of the reserved image. As the common color, it is preferable to adopt a color different from the color adopted as the color of the reserved image or the color adopted as the color of the falling sand.

It is also possible not to display such contours. In this case, the outline of the original retained image is also eroded by the sand image, and only the upper portion (the uneroded region) of the original retained image is visible, while the lower portion (the eroded region) is the original retained image. Retained images become invisible. Also, the new pending image is displayed not as a circle but as a polygon (square or hexagon). It shows a state in which all the sand has fallen at timing t 9. After erasing the hourglass image, the shape of the reserve may remain hexagonal, or may be circular as shown in Fig. 324(c). .

The size of the reserved image and the size of the lower portion of the hourglass image may be matched.
FIG. 324(g) and FIG. 324(h) show display examples in the case of the "hourglass suspension change effect" in which the size and shape of the suspension image and the size and shape of the lower part of the hourglass image are matched. .
FIG. 324(g) shows the hourglass image and the sand image displayed at timing t3, and shows the state before the sand falls. Also, FIG. 324(h) shows a state in which half of the sand has fallen at timing t6 when three seconds have passed since the sand fell. At the timing when all the sand has fallen, the original reserved image is completely switched to the new reserved image.
According to such a display mode, the falling sand itself affects only the area where the new reserved image is displayed, so that the player can clearly see that the reserved image itself has changed. Since this can be communicated, expectations for the change in the color of the reserved image are heightened.

An embodiment has been shown in which the "hourglass holding change effect" is executed in a state in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed in the state of scrolling at the possible speed).
It should be noted that it is preferable not to change the variable display state of the decorative symbols during execution of the "hourglass holding change effect". For example, when the execution of the "hourglass holding change performance" is started during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the temporary stop state of the decorative pattern should be maintained until the execution of the "hourglass holding change performance" is completed. Similarly, in the case of high-speed fluctuation and low-speed scrolling, when the execution of the "hourglass holding change effect" is started, the high-speed fluctuation and low-speed scrolling states should be maintained until the execution of the "hourglass holding change effect" is completed.
By adopting such a mode, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the "hourglass hold change effect".

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323, the amount of falling sand per unit time in the hourglass should be constant (that is, the amount of falling sand may be displayed in a manner similar to that of a real hourglass). be done).
Below, with reference to FIG. 325, another embodiment of the amount of sand falling per unit time within the hourglass will be described. FIGS. 325(a) to 325(c) respectively show the display modes of the hourglass image and the reserved image (white in color) at predetermined timings (timings t3 to t9). Also, the color of the sand is green. Also, the dotted line shown at the bottom of the hourglass indicates the upper side of the sand at predetermined timings (timings t4 to t8).
FIG. 325(a) shows an example in which the shape of the reserved image is circular and the height of the sand increases uniformly per unit time. In other words, in this case, the falling sand is displayed in a way different from that of a real hourglass. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 325(a), in six divisions (six levels) having the same height, for example, a display in which 1/6 of the sand is buried each time one second elapses is performed. . When displaying that 1/6 of the sand is buried in 1 second, even if the amount of falling sand is changed and 1/6 of the area is gradually buried in 1 second, the sand will not be filled. It is also possible to display that the area is not filled with sand even though it is displayed as falling down, and that ⅙ of the area is filled with sand at a stretch after one second has passed. You may feel a little uncomfortable because the sand is displayed differently from the real hourglass, but the height of the sand will increase evenly (for example, 1/6 height will be filled in 6 times). etc., the area does not increase evenly), making it easier for the player to understand until the sand completely falls and the tempo is easier for the player to pick up. If it is filled with 6 times, at the timing of 5/6) (timing of t8 in FIG. 325(a)), the feeling of exhilaration can be heightened at once with respect to the pending change effect. As is clear from FIG. 325(a), when the reserved image (white) is gradually eroded by the hourglass sand (green sand in this case), the area to be eroded is gradually It becomes larger, and is displayed so that the eroded area gradually becomes smaller from the middle of the erosion.

On the other hand, FIG. 325(b) shows an example in which the holding shape is circular and the amount of sand falling per unit time is uniform (that is, the falling sand looks like a real hourglass). is displayed). In the example shown in FIG. 325(b), the time during which the height of the sand rises is short at the beginning and the end of the presentation, and the time during which the height of the sand rises becomes longer toward the middle stage of the presentation (that is, slowly). and the height of the sand increases), the player can be sufficiently entertained by the effect of whether or not the color of the reserved image changes. The time during which the sand rises near the middle stage of the hourglass is longer than the time during which the sand rises at the beginning and end of the hourglass. ' or 'pause', it is possible to improve interest in the pending change effect.

FIG. 325(c) is an example in which the shape of the pending image is a square. In this case, if the amount of sand falling per unit time is made uniform, the sand will be evenly buried from below as the presentation progresses. Note that the shape of the reserved image is not limited to a square, and may be a vertically long or horizontally long rectangular shape.

FIGS. 325(d) and 325(e) show other examples of the hourglass image and the pending image (white). Note that the sand image is not shown in the figure.
FIG. 325(d) shows an example of the reserved image and the hourglass image when the reserved image in the shape of a square tilted by 45 degrees is adopted. In this case as well, similarly to the example shown in FIG. The closer to the stage, the longer the sand rises.
FIG. 325(e) shows an example of the pending image and the hourglass image when the triangular pending image is adopted. In this case, if the amount of falling sand per unit time is made uniform, the height of the sand gradually increases at the beginning of the presentation, so the player should be made aware of what color sand is falling. can be done. In addition, since the height of the sand becomes shorter in the second half of the performance, the height of the sand suddenly rises at the end of the performance, which is visually recognized by the player, making the performance dynamic. be able to.
In these examples, the height of the sand may increase uniformly per unit time.

Note that in FIGS. 325(a) to 325(c) (including FIGS. 325(d) and 325(e)), an example of starting at timing t3 and ending at timing t9 was explained, but after starting Needless to say, the time until the end is not limited to this time.
Also, for example, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, a plurality of production stages (a first production stage in which the first background image and the first character are displayed, a second background image different from the first background image, and a second background image different from the first character A second production stage where the second character is displayed, etc. A certain production stage continues over multiple times (for example, 10 to 30 times) of variable display, and a special reach production results in a failure. The stage is changed to another stage based on a predetermined opportunity.
In addition, the “hourglass hold change effect” may be executed in all or a plurality of effect stages excluding some of these effect stages. In this case, the appearance (display mode) of the pending image may be the same or different for each production stage. If different, for example, the shape of the pending image may be made to correspond to the motif of the performance stage. Note that even if the production stages are different, the degree of expectation suggested by the color of the reserved image and the order of the color and the degree of expectation should be the same.
In all production stages, the effect of falling sand may be started, for example, at timing t3 and ended at timing t9, and in the first effect stage, the effect of falling sand may be started from timing t3 and ended at timing t9. However, in the second production stage, the production of falling sand may start at timing t3 and end at timing t7. , only the same start timing, only the same end timing, or both the start timing and the end timing may be different).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 322, one of the effect pattern 02 to the effect pattern 04 is executed, but only the effect pattern 04 may be executed. In this case, when the hourglass image starts to be displayed, it is confirmed that the color of the reserved image will be upgraded to a color with a high degree of expectation. will have a feeling Also, after the sand image is displayed, the user can view the color of the sand image while satisfying the manner in which the reserved image changes to the color of the sand image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 322, the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed immediately after the start of the variable display. good.
For example, after the start of the variable display, a pseudo-continuous effect (a so-called general pseudo-continuous variable effect in which a predetermined pattern or a predetermined pattern combination is displayed and then the decorative pattern is changed at high speed again) is started. The "hourglass holding change effect" may be executed in situations such as before starting, during the pseudo-continuous effect, during the formation of the ready-to-win state, during the special ready-to-win effect. Alternatively, the execution of the main effect may be started during one of these periods, and the execution of the main effect may be ended during the other one period.
Alternatively, the "hourglass suspension changing effect" may be executed in a state in which a special ready-to-win effect is shown in a mode suggesting a loss and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a loss. In this case, depending on whether or not the pending change effect is successful, the decorative pattern stop mode (result of the special lottery) may be indicated. That is, when the sand falls to the end and the reserved image changes, the decoration pattern changes to a mode indicating a big win and then is stopped, and when the sand does not fall to the end and the reserved image does not change. In this case, it is preferable that the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed while being temporarily stopped in a manner indicating the failure.

Effect patterns 03 to 05 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 322 have been shown to show the effect mode in which the sand image continues to fall. 326 will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect pattern 01 shown in FIG. 326, the falling of sand is interrupted during the period from timing t5 to timing t7, and the display of falling sand again is performed during the period from timing t7 to timing t9. The display state at timing t9 is a state in which 2/3 of the sand has fallen as shown in FIG. 323(g).
After that, the display of the hourglass image is terminated, and the pending image in its original form is displayed. FIG. 324(a) shows the display mode at this time.
On the other hand, in the effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 326, the falling of sand is interrupted during the period from timing t5 to timing t7, and the display of falling sand again is performed during the period from timing t7 to timing t11. Note that the display state at timing t11 is a state in which all the sand has fallen as shown in FIG. 323(h). After that, the display of the hourglass image ends, and the pending image is displayed in the color of the falling sand. FIG. 324(c) shows the display mode at this time.
In this way, the falling of the sand may be interrupted (the erosion of the sand in the hourglass is temporarily stopped), so that the player can check whether the suspended image changes when the sand falls to the end. Since the player stands by and visually recognizes the sand, the player feels a sense of temptation and expects the sand to fall again, thereby increasing interest.

A plurality of interruption times may be provided and the interruption times may be different. Effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 326(b) shows a effect pattern in which the sand falls to the end after the falling of sand is interrupted for two seconds from timing t5 to timing t7. In addition, production pattern 03 shown in FIG. 326(c) is a production pattern in which sand does not fall to the end after the falling of sand is interrupted for four seconds from timing t5 to timing t9 (falling of sand ends at timing t11). is shown. 326(d) shows an effect pattern 04 in which the sand is stopped falling for 4 seconds from timing t5 to timing t9, and then the sand falls to the end (all the sand falls at timing t13). showing a pattern. By providing multiple pause times in this manner, the player can be teased as to when the falling sand will resume.
Note that the length of the interruption time is not limited to 4 seconds, and the interruption time may be 1 second or 3 seconds.

The number of interruptions is not limited to one, and may be two or more times. The effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. 326(e) is a effect in which the sand falls to the end after the sand is interrupted twice for 2 seconds from timing t5 to timing t7 and for 2 seconds from timing t9 to timing t11. showing a pattern. In production pattern 05, the first interruption time and the second interruption time are the same two seconds, but each interruption time may be different. For example, the first interruption time may be set to 1 second, and the second interruption time may be set to 3 seconds. By providing a plurality of interruption times in this way, it is possible to further tease the player by interrupting the falling of sand again after the falling of sand is resumed.

Either or both of the length of the interruption time and the number of interruptions may indicate the degree of expectation that the sand will fall to the end (ie, the degree of expectation that the hold will be promoted). For example, the longer the interruption time or the greater the number of interruptions, the higher the expectation that the sand will fall to the end. In this case, the player watches the performance expecting that the interruption time and the number of interruptions will increase.
On the other hand, the longer the interruption time or the greater the number of interruptions, the lower the expectation that the sand will fall to the end. In this case, the player watches the performance in anticipation that the falling of sand will resume as soon as possible or that the falling of sand will not be interrupted.

The falling of sand may be interrupted by the player's operation. For example, the dropping of sand may be interrupted by operating the button once, and the dropping of sand may be resumed by operating the button again. According to such a configuration, since the effect can be interrupted by the intention of the player, it is possible to shoot the effect with a smartphone or to operate the ball lending button 328 with plenty of time. In addition, it is possible to enjoy the performance with time to spare after completing these tasks.
In this case, a model image simulating a button may be displayed so as to prompt button operation, or a model image simulating a button may not be displayed by using a hidden button effect (the button operation itself is not displayed). is enabled). Also, when displaying a model image imitating a button, it may be at any timing before the hourglass hold change effect is started, before the sand is displayed and the sand starts falling, or while the sand is falling. .

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 323, a display that promotes the holding image is performed at the timing when all the sand has fallen. At timing t9 in pattern 05, timing t11 in production pattern 02 shown in FIG. , the pending image may be further promoted. For example, after all the green sand falls and the blue reserved image changes to the green reserved image, the “hourglass pending change effect” is executed again, and the red sand image falls within the hourglass image. may be executed.
When changing from blue to green, the sand image may be dropped in the mode shown in FIG. 325(a). On the other hand, when changing from green to red, the sand image may be dropped in the mode shown in FIG. 325(b). Further, between the mode shown in FIG. 325(a) and the mode shown in FIG. 325(b), the latter should preferably have a longer time required for all the sand to fall. According to such a mode, it is possible to lengthen the presentation of the latter mode, in which the sense of anticipation is more visually recognized.

An example is given in which the ``Hourglass hold change effect'' may be executed again immediately after the ``Hourglass hold change effect'' ends, but the ``Hourglass hold change effect'' should be executed more than once in succession. may
In addition, at the end of the "hourglass hold change effect", the hourglass image is not finished being displayed, but the hourglass is reversed 180 degrees and a sand image with a more expected color is displayed. ” may be started.
Also, the "hourglass holding change effect" may be executed twice or more without being consecutive. For example, after the start of the variable display, before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, during the pseudo-continuous effect, during the formation of the ready-to-win state, during the special ready-to-win effect, etc., a total of two times or more ' may be executed. Also, between the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" and the "hourglass pending change effect", another effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed. Alternatively, during one of these periods (after the start of the variable display and before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, during the pseudo-continuous effect, during the formation of the ready-to-win state, during the special ready-to-win effect, etc.) The execution may be started and the execution of the main effect may be ended in another one period.
Alternatively, the "hourglass holding changing effect" may be executed in a state in which the special ready-to-win effect ends in a mode suggesting loss and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating loss. In this case, as described above, when all the sand falls, the decorative pattern should change to indicate a big win.
In this way, by allowing the "hourglass pending change effect" to be executed multiple times, the second and subsequent effects can be started even if all the sand does not fall and the result of the effect ends in failure. It can give you a sense of expectation.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323, when the effect ends without the sand falling to the end (for example, effect pattern 02 to effect pattern 04 in FIG. 322), the original The reserved image in color (the reserved image in blue in the case of production pattern 02 to production pattern 04 in FIG. 322) was displayed so as not to lower the level of expectation, but the sand remained until the end. If the presentation ends without falling, the expectation level may be lowered (demoted) with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). For example, at timing t3 of effect pattern 02, timing t5 of effect pattern 03, and timing t7 of effect pattern 04, the blue pending image may change to the normal white pending image with a predetermined probability.
In addition, in order to clearly inform the player that the sand has not fallen to the end, for example, after a predetermined time elapses at timing t3 of production pattern 02, timing t5 of production pattern 03, and timing t7 of production pattern 04 (for example, 1 second later), the blue pending image may change to the normal white pending image with a predetermined probability. It should be noted that during this one second period, the hourglass should be displayed as it is without ending the display. The timing of ending the display of the hourglass may be the timing at which the display for demoting the pending image is performed, or may be one second after the timing at which the display for demoting the pending image is performed.
Note that the reserved image may be changed to any reserved image as long as it suggests that the degree of expectation is lower than that of the reserved image before the start of the effect. For example, if the pending image before the start of the effect is a green pending image, it may be changed to a blue or normal white pending image.
Alternatively, regardless of the pending image before the start of the effect, it may be changed to a normal pending image that suggests the lowest degree of expectation. For example, if the pending image before the start of the effect is the green pending image or the red pending image, it may be changed to the normal white pending image. That is, in this case, the reserved image in green and red is displayed in the area where the reserved image is displayed, and the reserved image in white is displayed in the area where the reserved image is displayed after that.
Note that the predetermined probability is not limited to 50%, and may be 10% or 100%. If it is about 10%, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel uneasy. In addition, when it is set to 100%, the player is given a great sense of tension, and the joy given to the player when all the sand falls and the reserved image is promoted can be enhanced.
Such an effect can make the player feel tense. In addition, the number of executions of the "hourglass hold change effect" can be increased.

In addition, if the ``Hourglass hold change effect'' ends before the ``Hourglass hold change effect'' has progressed to the predetermined stage, the display that lowers the expectation level will not be displayed, and the ``Hourglass hold change effect'' will reach the predetermined stage. Only when the game has progressed to this point, a display that lowers the expectation level may be displayed. The predetermined stage is, for example, stage t7 (stage 4/6) in the case of FIG. Since the sense of tension is heightened in such a manner, the predetermined level may be set arbitrarily, but it is more desirable that the display that lowers the level of expectation is not performed if half of the levels are not met.
According to such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from having an unreasonable feeling or an unpleasant feeling due to the sudden display of the pending image that lowers the expectation level.

A sand image having a color with a lower expectation than the color of the reserved image may be displayed, and when all the sand images fall, the reserved image may be changed to the reserved image with a lower expected color. For example, while the green pending image is displayed, an "hourglass pending change effect" is executed in which blue sand falls, and when all the sand falls, the image is demoted to the blue pending image. good too. By doing so, it is possible to improve the appearance rate of the reserved image with a high degree of expectation.

As a result of the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect", it is shown that the relevant hold image may be demoted, but under this situation, it is not possible to execute another hold change effect or execute the hourglass hold change effect again. Then, an effect for promoting the reserved image may be executed again. Also, after being promoted again, the “hourglass pending change effect” may be executed. In this case, when the pending image is promoted by another pending change effect, or when the pending image is promoted by the second "hourglass pending change effect", the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern indicates a big win. may be stopped and displayed to generate a jackpot game state.
For example, in the suspended image displayed in blue, even though the green sand, which is more expected than blue, is displayed by the “hourglass suspended change effect”, all the sand does not fall. After the normal pending image in white is displayed and demoted (the area where the pending image is displayed changes from being displayed in blue and green to being displayed in white), other After executing the hold change effect and the sandglass hold change effect again, it becomes the blue hold image again. When the falling display is performed again (blue and green display is performed again in the area where the reserved image is displayed), the blue reserved image is always changed to the green reserved image, and the jackpot game is played. A condition may always occur. Moreover, although the jackpot game state always occurs when the game is played once more, it may be set to the case where the game is played three times or more. In the case of three times, the display corresponding to the demotion (white display after blue/green) is performed twice (multiple times) with one change. In addition, although it has been explained that the big win game state always occurs, it is possible to prevent the big win game state from always occurring. is preferably about 50%. Also, after being demoted, the image becomes blue again, and when the "Hourglass Suspension Change Effect" occurs again in that state, the "Hourglass Suspension Change Effect" will occur in a color different from the color that failed once. good too. Specifically, for example, the color of the sand in the second “hourglass hold change effect” may be red, gold, or the like, with a degree of expectation higher than green.

In this way, even if the player is once demoted, depending on how the performance progresses, an advantageous result can occur for the player, so that the player can be kept motivated for the game. In addition, when another player sees only the second half of such a series of effects, for example, only the effect promoted to the green reserved image, a jackpot game state occurs under the condition that the green reserved image is displayed. Since the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the As a result, it becomes possible to increase the operating rate of gaming machines.

An embodiment in which the display mode of the pending image changes due to the "hourglass pending change effect" has been shown, but in the first to fourth pending display areas (see FIGS. 123 to 125 for the pending display areas) The displayed pending image may also be modified so that the “hourglass pending change effect” is executed. In this case, it is preferable that the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed based on the pre-reading process.

For the suspended images displayed in the first to fourth suspended display areas, when executing the "hourglass suspended change effect", the effect is completed during the execution of one variable display. do it. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to move the pending image during execution of the "hourglass pending change effect", so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about the effect contents and to simplify the display process. .
At the timing when the suspended image moves to the adjacent suspended display area at the start of the variable display, the “hourglass suspended change effect” may be executed. For example, in the blue suspended image that has moved from the third suspended display area to the second suspended display area at the start of the variable display, the "hourglass suspended change effect" may be executed immediately after the movement is completed.

An example of executing the "hourglass holding change effect" within one time of variable display has been shown, but it may be executed over two or more multiple times of variable display. For example, the execution of the effect is started at the timing when a certain reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, and the execution of the effect is finished at the timing when the reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. good too. Alternatively, the execution of the effect is started at the timing when a certain reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved display area, and the execution of the effect is finished at the timing when the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. good.

Based on the look-ahead processing, execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" may be notified in advance before the start of the variable display. For example, when a starting prize occurs during the execution of the preceding variable display, prefetch processing is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is started, and the “holding image” is executed. When it is determined to perform, an hourglass icon image in the shape of an hourglass may be displayed at a predetermined location in the display area to notify that the "hourglass suspension change effect" will be executed. Note that the icon image may be displayed at a predetermined position on the left side of the display area in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 295 to 297 and the like. Also, when the hourglass icon image is acquired, the same display as the microphone icon image may be performed.
The hourglass icon image acquired in this way may be enlarged and moved to the position of the reserved image (or a predetermined reserved image) at the start of the variable display so as to function as an hourglass icon. Also, in this case, a sand image of a predetermined color (for example, green or red) may be displayed in advance within the hourglass icon image. In this case, since the player waits for the start of the variable display while expecting which color will change from the time of the initial winning, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation for a big win over a long period of time. It should be noted that in the case of suggesting that the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed for the pending image before the variable display corresponding to the pending image is executed, the 322(d), it may always be changed without executing so-called fakes.

An example in which the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed in the pending image or the pending image displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas is shown, but the "hourglass pending change effect" in the pending image Simultaneously with execution, the suspended images displayed in the first to fourth suspended display areas may be modified so that the "hourglass suspended change effect" can be executed.
For example, in the reserved image, the effect is executed in the mode of the effect pattern 03 shown in FIG. You may perform production in the aspect of. In this case, although the color of the reserved image does not change, the color of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area changes.
According to such a configuration, even if the color does not change in one effect, the color may change in the other effect. can be reduced. It should be noted that when the holding image and the "hourglass holding change effect" in the holding image are executed at the same time, a pattern may be provided in which all are changed, some are changed, and all are not changed. It is possible to provide the player with a feeling of supreme pleasure when all changes, a sense of relief when a part changes, and a sense of tension by providing a case where all changes do not occur.
In addition, although the example of executing the "hourglass pending change effect" is shown in the pending image and one pending image, in the pending images shown in the first to fourth pending display areas, not only one but a plurality The “hourglass pending change effect” may be executed for each (maximum of four) pending images. In this case, a maximum of five "hourglass pending change effects" are executed in parallel. However, when the hold display is displayed in the 4th hold display area, it is when the 3rd hold is stored, and when the 4th hold is stored (when the start gate is won), the remaining time fluctuating may be long or short, excluding the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area, a maximum of four (the reserved image ~ the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area) Suspended change effect" may be executed in parallel.

The "hourglass pending change effect" of the pending image and the "hourglass pending change effect" of the pending image may be executed in a predetermined order.
For example, after the "hourglass pending change effect" of the pending image is executed, the "hourglass pending change effect" is simultaneously executed for the pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the pending image shown in the fourth pending display area. may be made.
Alternatively, the reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area, and the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed in the order of the pending images.
Alternatively, the reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the first reserved display area The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed in the order of the pending images.

Alternatively, after the "hourglass pending change effect" is simultaneously executed in the pending image displayed in the first pending display area to the pending image shown in the fourth pending display area, the "hourglass pending change effect" of the pending image is executed. may be made.
Alternatively, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area, the The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed in the order of the pending images.
Alternatively, the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, the reserved image shown in the first reserved display area, the The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed in the order of the pending images.

In addition, although the case where the number of reservations is the maximum number was illustrated, when the number of reservations is not the maximum number, it is good to perform an effect|presentation in each reservation image corresponding to the existing reservations. For example, if the number of pending is 2, in the pending image, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area, "Hourglass pending change effect" in a predetermined order you should do it.

It should be noted that, in these examples, the following "hourglass pending change effect" is started during the execution of the previously started "hourglass pending change effect", and a plurality of "hourglass pending change effects" are executed at the same time. can be
Alternatively, the subsequent ``hourglass suspension changing performance'' may be started immediately after the execution of the previously started ``hourglass suspension changing performance'' is completed or after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses.

In this way, when the "hourglass suspension change effect" is executed at the same time, there is a possibility that one of the suspension images will be promoted, so the player's regret can be reduced. In addition, when the "hourglass holding change effect" is executed in order, it is possible to prevent the effect result from being overlooked.

The "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect", which is another hold change effect having a different effect mode, will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the "explosion pending change effect" is also a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 327 shows a time chart for the "explosion pending change effect". Also, FIG. 328 shows a display example when the "explosion pending change effect" is executed.

FIG. 328(a) shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state immediately before the variable display is started. In this example, the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is blue.
The production pattern 01 shown in FIG. 327(a) is a production pattern in which the "explosion suspension change production" is not executed, but is shown for comparison with the production pattern in which the "explosion suspension change production" is executed. The variable display starts at timing t0, and is temporarily stopped during the period from timing t0 to timing t1. FIG. 328(b) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. Then, from timing t1, the state of high-speed fluctuation is entered, and at timing t30, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and at timing t31, all the symbols are stopped and displayed. After being displayed in a stopped state until timing t32, according to the result of the special lottery indicated by the stop mode of the decorative pattern, the next variable display is started in the case of a loss, and the big win game is started in the case of a big win. .

Effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 327(b) is a effect pattern in which a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area, moves toward the right side where the pending image is displayed, but turns back halfway. In this case, from the timing t0 to the timing t3, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as the symbols at the start of the variable display. Also, from timing t2 to timing t3, the bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area, moves toward the right side where the pending image is displayed, but turns back halfway through. FIG. 328(c) shows a state in which the bomb character image is displayed at the bottom of the display area at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. In the effect pattern 02, at timing t3, the bomb character image moves from the lower left side of the display area to the outside of the screen and becomes invisible, and the decoration pattern starts to change at high speed. FIG. 328(f) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the bomb character image ends.

In production pattern 03 shown in FIG. 327(c) and production pattern 04 shown in FIG. This is an effect pattern in which an explosion display is performed while being superimposed on the pending image. In this case, from the timing t0 to the timing t4, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as the symbols at the start of the variable display. Also, from timing t2 to timing t3, a display is performed in which the bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area and moves toward the right side where the pending image is displayed. FIG. 328(c) shows a state in which the bomb character image is displayed at the bottom of the display area at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. FIG. 328(d) shows a state in which the bomb character image is superimposed on the front side of the pending image at timing t3. In the performance pattern 03 and the performance pattern 04, immediately after the bomb character image is superimposed on the front side of the holding image at timing t3, the bomb character image explodes and the explosion image is displayed, and this state is continued until timing t4. FIG. 328(e) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed. The display of the explosion image ends at timing t4.
As shown in FIGS. 328(d) and 328(e), the pending image becomes invisible from timing t3 to timing t4.
The color of the explosion image is composed of colors such as gray and black, which are not displayed as the colors of the pending image before and after the change.

In the case of effect pattern 03 shown in FIG. 327(c), after the display of the explosion image ends, the blue pending image, which is the color before execution of the "explosion pending change effect", becomes visible. FIG. 328(f) shows the display state at this time.

In the case of effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 327(d), after the display of the explosion image ends, the green pending image, which is different from the color before execution of the "explosion pending change effect", becomes visible. FIG. 328(g) shows the display state at this time.

The reserved image is not limited to a green one, and may be changed to a more highly anticipated reserved image (red, gold, rainbow). In addition, in the "hourglass hold change effect", an embodiment is shown in which it may be changed to the hold image with low expectation, but in the "explosion hold change effect", the change to the hold image with low expectation never do.

In the "explosion suspension change effect", the time required from the appearance of the bomb character to the display of the suspension image after the explosion is set to 2 seconds (timing t2 to timing t4), but it is not limited to 2 seconds, and can be set to 1 second to 3 seconds. It can be set to a time on the order of seconds.

Thus, in the "explosion pending change effect", the predetermined pending image changes to a pending image with a higher degree of expectation, but does not change to a pending image with a lower degree of expectation. By making it possible to implement both the "hourglass pending change effect" and the "explosion pending change effect", it is possible to increase the variations of the effects for changing the pending image.
In addition, the "explosion hold change effect" changes the hold image in a short time (2 seconds) compared to the "hourglass hold change effect" in which the hold image changes when sand falls over 6 seconds. If the pending image is suddenly displayed in a demoted state, the player may feel unreasonable and lose interest in the game, so demotion is avoided.
On the other hand, in the "hourglass pending change effect", the effect time is longer than the "explosion pending change effect", and if all the sand falls during the effect, the pending image will be promoted. It is possible to make the player feel nervous about whether or not the player will be promoted for a long time, thereby improving the interest. It should be noted that in some modifications, the player may be demoted.

Various embodiments and modifications of the "hourglass pending change effect" can be appropriately applied to the "explosion hold change effect". For example, if the “explosion pending change effect” is applied to the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas, it is possible to change the pending image to a more expected pending image. becomes.

The rate at which the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed is preferably higher than the rate at which the "explosion pending change effect" is executed. For example, the "hourglass pending change effect" and the "explosion pending change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 4:1. According to such a configuration, the ratio of execution of the "hourglass hold change effect", which has a relatively long effect execution time, is high, so that it is possible to make the player feel more interesting.

On the other hand, the "hourglass pending change effect" and the "explosion pending change effect" may be executed at the same rate. For example, the "hourglass pending change effect" and the "explosion pending change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 1:1.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed may be lower than the rate at which the "explosion pending change effect" is executed. For example, the "hourglass pending change effect" and the "explosion pending change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 1:4.

It is preferable that the probability that the pending image is promoted in the "hourglass pending change effect" is higher than the probability that the pending image is promoted in the "explosion pending change effect". As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player for a long time.

On the other hand, the pending image may be promoted at the same rate when the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed and when the "explosion pending change effect" is executed.
Alternatively, the probability of the pending image being promoted in the "hourglass pending change effect" may be lower than the probability of the pending image being promoted in the "explosion pending change effect".

In the "hourglass pending change effect", it takes at least 6 seconds for all the sand to fall and the pending image to change after the sand starts falling (for example, from timing t3 in effect pattern 05 in FIG. 322(e)). period of timing t9) was required. On the other hand, in the "explosion pending change effect", the time required from the start of display of the bomb character to the change of the pending image is two seconds. As a result, the interest of the "hourglass hold change effect" can be further improved.

The time from when the sand starts to fall in the "hourglass pending change effect" until all the sand falls and the pending image changes, and in the "explosion pending change effect", the time from the start of the display of the bomb character to the pending image The time until changes may be the same (for example, 4 seconds).
Alternatively, the time (for example, 3 seconds) from when the sand starts to fall in the "hourglass pending change effect" to when all the sand falls and the pending image changes is the time (for example, 3 seconds) of the bomb character It may be shorter than the time (for example, 6 seconds) from the start of display to the change of the pending image. In this way, for example, when the "hourglass hold change effect" is performed for the hold image, the hold display after the change is a display that gradually erodes the area of the hold image, whereas the "explosion hold In the "change effect", display is performed in which the area of the pending image is eroded at once, so that the display mode at the time of the pending change can be varied and the interest is improved.

When executing "hourglass hold change effect" or "explosion hold change effect", a specific sound that matches the effect (the specific sound here is a sound that is output according to the progress of the hold change effect, (not a sound indicating that the hold has changed) may be output. At this time, the sound to be output may be the same sound or different sounds. Alternatively, the specific sound may be output only for one effect, and the specific sound may not be output for the other effect.
If the same sound is output as the specific sound for the "Hourglass Hold Change Effect" and "Explosion Hold Change Effect", there is an effect that you will not miss both effects, so different sounds will be output. If you do, there is an effect that you can recognize which hold change effect is being performed only by sound without looking at the display area, and if only one effect is performed, you may miss the effect. , there is an effect that the liquid crystal can be watched.
The timing for outputting the specific sound may be at the start of the performance, or at a predetermined timing during the performance. In addition, a special sound different from the specific sound (the special sound here is not a sound output in accordance with the progress of the hold change effect, but a sound indicating that the hold has changed) is called an "hourglass hold change effect". and "explosion pending change effect" may be output. However, as for the "explosion hold change effect", the hold display after the change is displayed suddenly (Fig. 328 (e), Fig. 328 (f)), so the sound indicating that the hold has changed or the change to which hold It is better to make sure that the sound indicating is always output, but regarding the "hourglass hold change effect", when the hold change occurs, the player will not know which hold display to change to in the process of the hourglass hold change effect. Since it is recognized, the special sound need not be output.

Both the “hourglass pending change effect” and the “explosion pending change effect” may be executed in one time of the variable display. For example, the "explosion pending change effect" may be executed after the "hourglass pending change effect", or the "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed after the "explosion pending change effect" is executed.
According to such a configuration, when the result of the first hold change effect is unfavorable for the player (the hold does not change or the player is demoted, etc.), a hold change effect different from the hold change effect is produced. is executed, the performance can be visually recognized in a state in which the player's feelings are switched, compared with the case where the initially performed holding change performance is executed again.
It should be noted that, if the same pending change effect is executed again, the player will revisit the effect that resulted in the player's unfavorable result in the most recent effect, and remember the unfavorable result. Although there is a possibility that the user will feel bad, the above configuration can prevent the user from feeling unpleasant.

The "hourglass holding change effect" and another effect that can suggest the degree of expectation may be executed at the same time.
For example, the execution of other effects may be started during the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect". Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" and another effect may be started at the same time. Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" may be started during execution of another effect.
Also, the execution of the "hourglass holding change effect" may be terminated during the execution of another effect. Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" and other effects may be terminated at the same time. Alternatively, the execution of other effects may be terminated while the "hourglass pending change effect" is being executed.

Other effects include a pseudo-continuous effect shown with reference to FIG. 261 and the like, a special ready-to-win effect shown with reference to FIGS. A title image showing the title of the game, a preview image (words image or cut-in image) display effect shown with reference to FIG. 278 and the like, a step-up effect shown with reference to FIG.
It should be noted that the hourglass image in the "hourglass hold change effect" and a predetermined image displayed in another effect may be superimposed and displayed. At this time, it is preferable to display the hourglass image in front of the predetermined image.
Alternatively, a predetermined image that is displayed in other effects may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the hourglass image in the "hourglass hold change effect".

According to such a configuration, even when a sand image of a color with a low degree of expectation is displayed in the "hourglass holding change effect", the expectation for the big win can be maintained by other effects.

From the point of view of wanting the player to pay attention to the "hourglass holding changing effect", it is preferable not to execute any one or all of the other effects at the same time as the "hourglass holding changing effect". In this case, the hourglass image and the image used for executing another predetermined effect are not displayed at the same time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the "hourglass hold change effect".
In addition, it is also possible not to execute other predetermined effects with the degree of expectation set to 100% at the same time as the "hourglass pending change effect". In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to another predetermined effect that is more preferable to the player.

Predetermined images displayed in other presentations may be displayed in a plurality of modes with different colors, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the colors of the images.
As the colors used at this time, white, red, and gold, which are part of the colors used as the colors of the pending image of the “hourglass pending change effect”, may be adopted. Also, it is better to set the degree of expectation higher in this order of color (in order of white, red, and gold). Specifically, when another effect is the step-up effect shown with reference to FIG. The colors are white, red and gold.
In this way, the color used to suggest the degree of expectation in the "hourglass holding change effect" is used in other effects by allowing it to be used to suggest the degree of expectation in other effects. There is a case where the color of the falling sand is the same as the color of the falling sand in the "Hourglass Hold Change Effect". Thus, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security regarding the change of the reserved image to the reserved image of another color in the "hourglass hold change effect".

On the other hand, as the color of the image in other effects, colors that are not used in the "hourglass hold change effect" may be adopted. For example, brown, orange, and purple may be used as image colors. Also, the degree of expectation may be increased in this order (brown, orange, purple order). In addition, among the other productions, in some productions, the color used in the "Hourglass hold change production" suggests the degree of expectation, and in the remaining productions of the other productions, in the "Hourglass hold change production" It is preferable to suggest the degree of expectation by colors that are not used.
In this way, by suggesting the degree of expectation with colors that are not used in the "hourglass hold change effect", it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the effect will be a special color.
In addition, in a predetermined effect among the other effects, a plurality of display modes with different expectations are provided by the color used in the 'hourglass hold change effect' and the color not used in the 'hourglass hold change effect'. You may do so. Specifically, for example, when the predetermined effect is a step-up effect, if the degree of expectation of the step-up effect varies depending on the color of the frame, the color of the frame is white, purple, red, and gold, in this order. Suppose you have high expectations. In this case, the color that is not used in the ``hourglass hold change effect'' is purple, and when the purple frame is displayed, it may make you think that the expectations are higher or lower than red, or perhaps it is a premium effect. It can give you an uplifting feeling.

After the “hourglass pending change effect” ends and the effect is completed by completely replacing the relevant pending image with the relevant pending image of another color, execution of another effect may be started. Conversely, the "hourglass pending change effect" may be started after execution of other effects is completed.
By adopting such a mode, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on each performance.

In the "hourglass holding change effect", it is shown that the time from when the sand starts to fall to when it ends is 6 seconds (effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. 322(e)), but in other effects, The time during which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed should be shorter than this time.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively execute the "hourglass pending change effect" of whether or not the suggested degree of expectation changes.

In addition, for all effects among other effects, from the start to the end of the sand falling in the "hourglass suspension change effect" (after the erosion of the area where the suspension image is displayed starts and the erosion ends) The time during which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed may be shorter than the time until (until).
Alternatively, for some of the other effects, from the start of the sand falling in the "hourglass suspension change effect" to the end (after the start of erosion of the area where the suspension image is displayed, erosion (until the end of the hour), shorten the time that the image that suggests the degree of expectation is displayed, and for other productions (productions excluding some productions), "Hourglass pending An image that suggests the degree of expectation is displayed rather than the time from the start to the end of the sand falling in "change effect" (from the start of erosion to the end of erosion in the area where the pending image is displayed) may be longer.
Alternatively, for all effects among other effects, from the start of the sand falling of the "hourglass suspension change effect" to the end (after the erosion of the area where the suspension image is displayed starts, the erosion ends The time period during which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed may be longer than the time period until the

The output of a specific BGM (the specific BGM here is a sound different from the above-described specific sound) may be started from the start timing of the "hourglass hold change effect" or the start timing of the falling sand. When the change of the hold image is successful, it is preferable to continue outputting the specific BGM even after the end of the "hourglass hold change effect". On the other hand, if the change of the reserved image fails, the output of the specific BGM should be terminated at the timing of failure (the timing at which the display of the sand image is terminated).
In this way, the fact that the pending image has been promoted can be recognized for a predetermined period of time by the specific BGM even after the pending image has been promoted, so it is possible to increase the satisfaction of being promoted. Also, other players can be notified of the promotion.
It should be noted that the timing to start outputting the specific BGM may be a predetermined timing before the start of the “hourglass hold change effect”. In this case, the output of the specific BGM also functions as a notice of the start of the "hourglass hold change effect". Also, even if the output timing of the specific BGM is set as the start timing of the "hourglass hold change effect", for example, when the special condition is satisfied, the specific BGM output timing is changed to the start timing of the "hourglass hold change effect". Alternatively, the output timing may be the same, but the audible timing may be delayed. If it is made audible after a delay from the normal timing, the degree of anticipation will be increased to improve interest. The special condition here means whether or not to delay based on the winning result, is determined by the customization setting by the player's operation, or "hourglass suspension change effect" as the suspension image is performed. When the fluctuation before the fluctuation satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation pattern in which a specific SP reach is performed) corresponds.

The timing of ending the output of the specific BGM may be a predetermined timing before the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, or may be the timing of the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols.
For example, when a ready-to-win state (a state in which left and right decorative patterns are displayed temporarily stopped with the same pattern and the middle decorative pattern is scrolled or fluctuated at high speed), the output of a specific BGM may be terminated. good. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the reach state may be output.
In addition, when the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in the non-reach state without occurrence of the ready-to-win state, the output of specific BGM is continued until the decorative pattern is stopped-displayed, and the timing at which the decorative pattern is stopped-displayed is continued. to end the output of a specific BGM.

Alternatively, when a special ready-to-win effect occurs, BGM corresponding to the special ready-to-win effect is output and the output of the specific BGM is terminated, and when no special ready-to-win effect occurs, The output of specific BGM may be continued until the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

As the BGM, music such as a song by a specific singer or a melody of a specific song can be used. Also, instead of BGM, a sound composed of specific lines may be adopted.

In the "hourglass hold change effect", a light-emitting decorative member having a plurality of light-emitting members (eg, full-color LEDs) may emit light in the same or similar color to the hold image or sand image. 47 to 55 and the like, the door frame right side unit 550, and the movable right selvage frame shown in FIGS. The body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the panel board rear substrate 2420 shown with reference to FIGS. In addition, in the "hourglass holding change effect", some of these light-emitting decorative members may be lighted, or all of them may be lighted.
Specifically, at the same time as the start of the "hourglass pending change effect" or at the same time as the start of the display of the sand image, the entirety of one or more light emitting decorative members is displayed before the "hourglass hold change effect" is started. It is preferable that the light is emitted in the same color as the reserved image that has been held, and the lower part of the light-emitting decorative member is changed to the same color as the dropped sand image in accordance with the dropping of the sand image.
For example, in the case of effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. 322(e), at timing t2 or timing t3, the entire luminous decorative member emits light in blue, which is the same color as the reserved image. Next, as the sand falls, the light-emitting decorative member is gradually changed from the state of emitting blue light from below to the state of emitting green light. Timing t6 is the timing when half of the sand has fallen. At this time, the luminous state of the luminous decorative member is blue in the upper half and green in the lower half. When the sand falls to the end at timing t9, the light-emitting decorative member as a whole emits green light. In addition, after the timing t9, it is preferable to make the whole emit green light. Further, from timing t9 to timing t10, in order to make it clearer that the color has changed, blinking display may be performed by repeating the changed color and turning off.
When the door-frame left-side unit 530 and the door-frame right-side unit 550 are caused to emit light in such a manner, it is possible to indicate that the "hourglass suspension change effect" is being executed and the color of the suspension image is changed in the entire gaming machine. You can appeal to those around you for a long time that you have changed.

It should be noted that if the falling of the sand ends in the middle, the luminous color of the luminous decorative member should be restored to the original color. For example, in the case of production pattern 04 in FIG. 322(d), the display of the sand image ends at timing t7, and only the blue reserved image is displayed. should be returned to a state in which it emits blue light.

The panel board rear substrate 2420 provided on the game board 5 can also emit light in the same manner. The shape of the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be the same circular shape as that of the reserved image. The panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided near the first starting port 2002, but may be provided at other positions. For example, it may be provided in the vicinity of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 or in the vicinity of the movable decorative member provided on the game board 5 .

The timing of ending the light emission in green, which is the same or similar color as after the change of the holding image changed by the "hourglass holding change effect", may be a predetermined timing before the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern. , It may be the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends.
For example, when a ready-to-win state (a state in which the left and right decorative patterns are the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative pattern is scrolling or fluctuating at high speed), green light emission may be terminated. . Also, at this time, light emission in a color corresponding to the reach state may be started.
In addition, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the non-reach state without the reach state occurring, the green light continues to emit light until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Light emission in green should be terminated.

Alternatively, when a special ready-to-win effect occurs, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the special ready-to-win effect and the green light emission is terminated, and when the special ready-to-win effect does not occur, decoration Light emission in green may be continued until the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Simultaneously with the start of the "hourglass pending change effect" or the start of the display of the sand image, the entire light-emitting decorative member may emit light in the same color as the sand image. , all or part of the light-emitting decorative member is caused to emit light in the same color as the new sand color before the area where the reserved image is displayed starts to be eroded with the new sand color). Also, in that case, all the sand images of that color may fall. According to such a mode, the player can be made aware in advance that the display mode of the pending image will change. The pending image is displayed in blue, and the pending image is changed to green by the “hourglass pending change effect”, but other patterns (for example, the pending image is displayed in green and the “hourglass pending” Such as changing the pending image to red by "change effect") can also be applied based on the same technical idea. It should be noted that in the case of a pattern that is recognized by the player in advance, the blinking display described above may not be performed (because it is notified in advance).

The falling speed of the sand may be changed according to the operation of a predetermined button by the player. For example, it may be possible to speed up or slow down the falling speed of the sand according to a predetermined button operation during execution of the "hourglass hold change effect". As the predetermined button operation, it is possible to appropriately adopt any one of the operation of pressing the button once, pressing the button repeatedly, and pressing the button for a long time.
The operation effective period of the button operation should be set from the start time to the end time of the "hourglass hold change effect". Alternatively, it may be performed from the time when the sand image is displayed until the end of the “hourglass pending change effect”.

Various buttons described in this specification can be adopted as the buttons. Further, it is possible to respond to the operation of other operation units such as levers instead of the buttons.
Further, in the present specification, such an embodiment can be appropriately adopted in the case of receiving an operation input from a player, such as a button (operation unit) or operation of a button (operation of an operation unit).
In some cases, a simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed in the display area during the effective period of operation of the operating unit. In this case as well, the meaning is the same, and it means an image simulating the operation unit.

For example, when the player presses the button once, the speed of the sand falling speeds up, and all the sand may fall in 3 seconds at the shortest. Alternatively, the player may press a button to slow down the falling speed of the sand so that all the sand falls in up to 9 seconds.
Further, when the player hits the button repeatedly, the speed of the sand falling speeds up, and all the sand may fall in 3 seconds at the shortest. Alternatively, if the player presses the button for a long time, the speed of the sand falling may be slowed down, and all the sand may fall in up to nine seconds.
If the player starts or ends the button operation during the "hourglass holding change effect", the falling speed of the sand becomes longer than 3 seconds or shorter than 9 seconds.

The effective operation period may be started at the same time as the "hourglass pending change effect" or at the same time as the display of the sand image is started, and a simulated image simulating the shape of the button may be displayed during the effective operation period. At the same time, the operation mode (single press, repeated press, long press, etc.) and the effect obtained by the operation ("Sand falls faster", "Sand falls slower", etc.) are displayed. good too. Also, in order to make the player recognize it in advance, the model image may be displayed before the operation valid period is reached, or to provide a sense of surprise, after the sand image starts falling. A model image may be displayed (while falling and eroding).

In this way, by changing the timing of obtaining the display result by changing the falling speed of the sand according to the operation mode, it is possible to make the presentation progress quickly or slowly. For example, if green sand with a relatively low expectation is displayed, the presentation should proceed quickly, and if gold sand with a relatively high expectation is displayed, the presentation should proceed slowly. , and it is possible to create a performance mode that suits the taste of the player.

At the timing when all the sand has fallen (at this time, the display state shown in FIG. 323(h)) in the "Hourglass Hold Change Effect", the button operation is enabled for a predetermined period without erasing the hourglass image ( For example, the operation effective period is set to 2 seconds), or the operation effective period is continued as it is, and a simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed at the timing when all the sand has fallen or at a timing after the timing when all the sand has fallen. However, the hourglass image may be deleted at the timing when the operation is performed or the operation valid period ends without the operation being performed, or a new hourglass image may be displayed at the same time when the hourglass image is deleted. . In the former case, the "hourglass pending change effect" ends as it is. In the latter case, a display of newly falling sand is performed based on the newly displayed hourglass image and sand image. It should be noted that the sand image to be newly displayed should be a sand image of a color with a higher degree of expectation.
For example, after the blue pending image is changed to the green pending image, a new hourglass image and a red sand image are displayed according to the operation of the operation unit, and red sand is displayed to fall. It should be done.
By adopting such a mode, even immediately after all the sand has fallen, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the reserved image will change further.

When the hourglass image is erased at the timing when an operation is performed or when the effective period of operation expires without the operation being performed, a plurality of display modes for erasing the hourglass image are provided. may be suggested.
For example, a display in which the hourglass image is deleted as it is, a display in which the hourglass image is split and scattered around the reserved image and then deleted, and an hourglass image is split and displayed scattered over the entire display area and then deleted. You may employ|adopt display modes, such as a display. Also, the degree of expectation may increase in this order. Also, an effect unrelated to the "hourglass hold change effect" may be selected. For example, 1/3 selects an hourglass image deletion pattern, and 2/3 selects an effect unrelated to the "hourglass pending change effect" (for example, a comment notice that does not affect the pending change effect). You may do so.

On the other hand, during the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect", the operation effective period of the button operation may not be set so that the simulated image simulating the shape of the button is not displayed. According to such a mode, the player can concentrate on watching the performance.

Immediately before all the sand images fall (for example, timing t8 in FIG. 325(a)), display of a simulated image imitating the shape of a button is started, and after all the sand images have finished falling, the operation is enabled. May start a period. Even in such a mode, the player can concentrate on watching the performance. In addition, immediately before all the sand images fall (for example, timing t8 in FIG. 325(a), etc.), an effect display to be displayed before the simulated image imitating the shape of the button is displayed is started, After all the sand images have finished falling, a simulated image imitating the shape of the button may be displayed.

As movable members for presentation having a decorative function, the frame movable bodies (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, etc.) shown in FIGS. Although the movable bodies for presentation (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc.) shown with reference to are shown, these decorative members for presentation are related to the execution of the "hourglass hold change presentation". It may be operated in a predetermined manner. For example, during the execution of the "Hourglass pending change effect" (when the "Hourglass pending change effect" starts, when the suspended image is being eroded by the falling sand image, the hourglass image At any timing until the display is erased, the decorative member for effect may be moved from the standby position to the moving position.
It should be noted that an appropriate shape can be adopted for the shape of the presentation decorative member.
Further, the motion mode of the decorative member for presentation is not limited to a simple motion mode such as moving from the standby position to the moving position, but also a motion mode of reciprocating and continuing to move within a predetermined section, a motion mode of vibrating, a motion mode of a predetermined axis, and the like. It is possible to adopt an operation mode such as a rotating motion or a rotating motion centering on the .

The degree of expectation may be suggested by the type and operation mode of the decorative member for presentation. For example, a different degree of expectation may be set for each decorative member for presentation, and the degree of expectation may be suggested when the decorative member for presentation operates.
Alternatively, the decorative member for presentation can take different operation modes, and when the decorative member for presentation operates, different expectations may be suggested depending on the operation mode.

During the execution of the "Hourglass pending change effect" (At the start of the "Hourglass pending change effect", if the suspended image is being eroded by the falling sand image, the image of the hourglass will not be displayed after all the sand images have finished falling. Only one of the above decorative members for effect may be operated at any timing until it is erased. Alternatively, during the execution of the "Hourglass pending change effect" (when the "Hourglass pending change effect" starts, when the suspended image is being eroded by the falling sand image, the hourglass image is displayed after all the sand images have finished falling. A plurality of the decorative members for effect may be operated at any timing until the display is erased. Also, a plurality of presentation decorative members may be operated simultaneously or in a predetermined order. Further, when a plurality of decorative members for presentation are operated in a predetermined order, for example, when the reserved image is being eroded by falling sand images, the first decorative member for presentation is operated, and after the erosion is completed, the first decorative member for presentation is operated. Alternatively, a plurality of decorative members for presentation may be operated when the reserved image is being eroded by the falling sand image, or when the erosion occurs. A plurality of decorative members for presentation may be operated after the end.
Further, the action of the decorative member for effect may be started before execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" so that the action may be performed even during the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect". This suggests to the player that the "hourglass hold change effect" will start.

During the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" (at least while the sand image is falling and encroaching on the area of the pending image), if the decorative member for effect is being operated, the "hourglass pending change effect , the operation of the decorative member for presentation may be ended after the execution of . Conversely, when the "hourglass suspension change effect" is being executed (at least while the sand image is falling and eroding the area of the suspension image), the effect decorative member is in the operating state (normal position It is preferable to assume that As a result, even when the reserved image does not change due to the "hourglass pending change effect", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the operation of the decorative member for effect.

In this embodiment, the hold image is displayed in a predetermined area near the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the "hourglass hold change effect" is also performed in an area including this area. Alternatively, a decorative member for presentation may be provided that can move to the front side of the predetermined area where the reserved image is displayed.
However, during the execution of the "hourglass suspension change effect", it is preferable not to move the presentation decorative member to the front side of the predetermined area where the suspension image is displayed, but the sand image falls and the suspension image is eroded. Although the decorative member for presentation is not operated when the erosion is finished, the decorative member for presentation may be operated when the erosion is finished and the hourglass is broken.

On the other hand, during the execution of the "Hourglass hold change effect" (while the sand image is falling and encroaching on the area of the hold image), the hourglass image and the hold image are displayed in front of the area. You may make it so that a decorative member for may move. For example, even if the production decorative member is moved in the left-right direction in front of the area where the hourglass image and the pending image are displayed, the hourglass image and the pending image are hidden and not hidden. good.
Alternatively, the effect decorative member may be moved to the near side of the region where the hourglass image or the pending image is displayed and temporarily (for example, about 1 second) or stopped for the entire duration of the effect. In this case, instead of making the hourglass image and the reserved image completely invisible, the hourglass image and the reserved image may be partly invisible and partly visible. In addition, when viewed from the front, the entire hourglass image or the reserved image cannot be visually recognized, but if the position of the viewpoint is changed so as to look in from the left or right direction, a part of the hourglass image or the reserved image, or It is good to configure so that everything can be visually recognized.
By adopting such a mode, it becomes difficult to immediately recognize how much sand has fallen, and the flickering hourglass image and the reserved image can be seen, which stimulates the imagination of the unseen part (imagining is not possible). swell), which increases interest.

It should be noted that none of the effect decorative members may be operated during execution of the "hourglass hold change effect". All the decorative members for presentation may be positioned at the standby position, or the decorative members for presentation positioned at the movement position before the start of the presentation may not be moved to the standby position.
By adopting such a mode, the player can be made to concentrate on the "hourglass hold change effect".

The rate at which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed may be, for example, once every 10 times of all the variable displays.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed may vary according to the game situation. For example, according to the number of holds, the ratio of executing the "hourglass hold change effect" may be different.

Below, when the number of reservations of the second start port 2004 is 0 and the variable display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 is performed, according to the number of reservations of the first start port 2002, " A description will be given of an embodiment in which the ratio of executing the "hourglass hold change effect" is set to a different ratio.
When the number of reservations at the first start port 2002 is 1 to 4, it is executed at a rate of 1 time in 5 times, and when the number of reservations at the first start port 2002 is 0, at a rate of 1 time in 8 times It should be executed (setting balance 1).
It should be noted that the probability of occurrence of the reach state is assumed to be formed at a rate of 1 out of 10 times. As for the reach probability, if the reach state does not occur, the big win will not occur and the reach effect will not occur. For example 1/2), even if the reach state occurs, the expectation of a big hit is extremely low, and if the probability of the reach state occurrence is extremely low (for example 1/200), the reach state does not occur at all. Therefore, the occurrence probability of the ready-to-win state is set to 1/10 in the present embodiment because a set balance is required so that a big win can be expected when the ready-to-win state occurs and the ready-to-win state is generated appropriately.
In the case of such a setting balance 1, regardless of the state of the number of holds, the "hourglass hold change effect" is performed at a rate higher than the probability of occurrence of the reach state, so the reach state does not occur, and non-reach loss It is possible to make the ``Hourglass hold change effect'' function as a production to improve the interest in a situation where is continuous, and wait for the occurrence of the reach state while suppressing the decline in interest during the period until the reach state occurs. be able to. In addition, if the number of holds is 1 to 4, the "Hourglass hold change effect" will be performed at a rate of 1 time in 8 times, and if the number of holds is 0, it will be performed at a rate of 1 time in 5 times. The same effect can be obtained even if

Alternatively, if the number of reservations in the first start port 2002 is 1 to 4, it is executed once in 5 times, and if the number of reservations in the first start port 2002 is 0, once in 20 It may be executed in proportion (setting balance 2).
Also in this case, the probability of occurrence of the reach state is 1/10.
In the case of setting balance 2, if there is a number of holds, similarly to setting balance 1, the reach state does not occur, and the effect to improve the interest under the situation where non-reach loss continues is "Hourglass hold change It is possible to make the performance" function, and it is possible to wait for the occurrence of the ready-to-win state while suppressing the decrease in interest during the period until the ready-to-win state occurs. On the other hand, if there is no hold, when the current variable display ends, the variable display will be interrupted as long as there is no new start winning. In such a situation, if the ``hourglass hold change effect'' is used as a effect to improve the interest in a situation where the reach state does not occur and the non-reach loss continues, there is a risk of adversely affecting the player's feelings. Therefore, in such a situation where the variable display is interrupted (situation where there is no hold), there is no reach state, and the "Hourglass hold change effect" is a production that improves the interest under the situation where non-reach loss continues. instead of functioning, it is preferable to set a probability (a probability lower than the probability of occurrence of the reach state) that makes you think that it is hot if the "hourglass hold change effect" is displayed.

Alternatively, if the number of reservations of the first start port 2002 is 1 to 4, it is executed once in 20 times, and if the number of reservations of the first start port 2002 is 0, once in 5 It may be executed in proportion (setting balance 3).
Also in this case, the probability of occurrence of the reach state is 1/10.
In the case of such a setting balance 3, when the number of holds is 0, the ``hourglass hold change effect'' is used as a effect to improve the interest in a situation where the reach state does not occur and the non-reach loss continues. When the "Hourglass hold change effect" is functioned and the number of holds is 1 to 4, the "Hourglass hold change effect" is unlikely to appear. Although the "changing effect" does not often appear, when the player tries to quit the game, the "hourglass holding changing effect" is likely to appear, so that the player who tries to quit the game can be stopped.

In these examples, the execution ratio is different between when the number of pending first start ports 2002 is 1 to 4 and when it is 0, but this is not the only option. If the number is 2 or more and 1 or less, 3 or more and 2 or less, or 4 or 3 or less, the same effect can be obtained. The embodiments described above may be modified in such a way that the

In addition, you may make it perform not only the number of reservations of the 1st starting port 2002 but a predetermined ratio.
Also in this case, the probability of occurrence of the reach state is 1/10.
In this way, regardless of the number of holds, if the "hourglass hold change effect" appears at a rate higher than the probability of occurrence of the reach state, for example, once every five times, the same as setting balance 1 If the effect is expected and the "hourglass hold change effect" appears at a rate lower than the probability of occurrence of the reach state regardless of the number of holds, for example, once in 20 times, the "hourglass hold change effect" It can provide an uplifting feeling because it heats up just by being displayed.

An effect suggesting that the "hourglass pending change effect" is to be executed may be executed. For example, an hourglass image is displayed in the upper center in the horizontal direction of the display area (this hourglass image is the suggestive image), and after the hourglass image is displayed in the upper center in the horizontal direction, it is slowly scrolled downward, and the hold It may be stopped and displayed at a position overlapping the image, and the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" may be started. In addition, the time required for scrolling (the time from when the hourglass image (suggestive image) starts to move until it stops at a position overlapping the suspended image) is the execution time of the "hourglass suspension change effect" (Fig. 322 (e) 7 seconds in the production pattern 05), may be longer (for example, 20 seconds), or may be shorter (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, the time from when the hourglass image (suggestive image) starts to move until it first reaches the position where the area where the pending image is displayed overlaps, which is part of the time required for scrolling (this time is A ) is the time from when the hourglass image (suggestive image) first reaches the overlapping position of the displayed area until it reaches the position where the reserved image completely overlaps with the displayed area (this time is B ) is preferable. This is because the player can grasp in advance that the "hourglass holding change effect" will be performed. Even if the time B is set longer than the time A, the time A is required when the effect display is performed so that the player can grasp in advance that the "hourglass holding change effect" will be performed. There is no problem even if the time of B is longer than that.
It should be noted that not only the scrolling of the hourglass image, but also the display of a dialog image (such as "Holding change?") may suggest that the "hourglass holding change effect" will be executed.
By adopting such a mode, mental preparation can be made in advance for the execution of the “hourglass suspension change effect”. It should be noted that it is preferable that this suggesting effect can be executed not only for the suspension, but also for the first suspension to the fourth suspension.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323, the color of the sand in the reserved image and the color of the sand in the hourglass image are different colors. 329 to 331, an embodiment of an "hourglass pending change effect" modified to display (for example, both are green) will be described.

Effect pattern 01 to effect pattern 05 in FIG. 329 are effect patterns corresponding to effect pattern 01 to effect pattern 05 in FIG. The color and the color of the sand in the hourglass image are the same color.
The display examples shown in FIGS. 330(a) to 330(h) are display examples corresponding to the display examples shown in FIGS. 323(a) to 323(h), respectively.
As shown in each figure, the display mode is different in that the color of the reserved image and the color of the sand image are different or the same. Since there is basically no difference in the embodiment, specific description will be omitted.

329, 330, and 331, the effect mode after all the sand has fallen will be described below.
At timing t9 as shown in production pattern 05 in FIG. 329, the falling of green sand is completed. FIG. 330(h) shows a display example at this time.
Next, a fighter character with a hammer appears from the left side of the display area, and a display of hitting the hourglass image is performed. Then, the sandglass image is rotated 180 degrees by being hit by the hammer, and the pending image and the sandglass image are positioned above the sandglass. These displays are performed from timing t9 to timing t10. Note that the fighter character remains displayed on the left side of the display area thereafter. 331(a) and 331(b) show the display state at this time.
Next, sand falls downward from timing t10 to timing t16. In this case as well, the display of sand falling from the upper side to the lower side of the hourglass is performed for a total of 6 seconds. Specifically, 1/3 of the sand falls at timing t12 (Fig. 331(c)), 2/3 of the sand falls at timing t14 (Fig. 331(d)), and at timing t16 All the sand has fallen (Fig. 331(e)).
Here, the suspended image that is newly visible due to the falling sand is not the suspended image in green that was displayed at the start of the effect, but the suspended image in red, for example, with a higher degree of expectation.

Next, a display is made in which the fighter character moves to the right, approaches the hourglass, and destroys the hourglass. After that, the display of the destroyed hourglass image ends, and the red suspended image moves downward. Also, the fighter character moves leftward and out of the screen from the end of the display area. These displays are performed from timing t16 to timing t17. FIGS. 331(f) and 331(g) show the display state at this time.
At timing t17, the movement of the reserved image is completed. FIG. 331(h) shows the display state at this time.

Thus, in the embodiment illustrated with reference to FIGS. 329-331, the pending image of a predetermined color (eg, green) is obscured by a sand image of a predetermined color that is the same as the predetermined color of the pending image. When hidden, a display is performed such that the pending image of a color with a higher degree of expectation (for example, red) gradually appears from among the sand images of a predetermined color.
Note that the color before change and the color after change of the reserved image can be appropriately selected from the colors described above. For example, a pattern in which the blue reserved image changes to a red reserved image, a pattern in which the red reserved image changes to a rainbow colored reserved image, or the like may be executed.

It should be noted that the fact that the sand falls and gradually becomes visible has been described with respect to the reserved images (FIGS. 331(c) to 331(f)), but the images different from the reserved images are Images suggesting anticipation may gradually become visible. Examples of images different from the reserved image are as follows. When an image different from the pending image is displayed, it is displayed instead of the red pending image displayed above the hourglass in FIGS. 331(c) to 331(f).
For example, when a character image "Pending Change!"
For example, when a text image "Pending change?" .
For example, when a character image "pseudo-continue!"
For example, when a character image "Pseudo-Ten?"
For example, if a text image of "Geki-netsu!"
For example, if a text image of "chance!" is displayed instead of the pending image, it suggests that the expectation of winning the variation is high.
For example, if a text image of "00 Reach!"
For example, if a text image "Congratulations!" is displayed instead of the pending image, it suggests that the variation will result in a big win.
It should be noted that it is not necessary to be limited to the above images. you can
When the above image is displayed in place of the pending image, the image displayed instead of the pending image is displayed at the position where the red pending image in FIG. 331(f) is displayed. When the sand image below the hourglass in 331(f) and the hourglass are erased, the pending image may be displayed in the display mode of the pending image before the effect is performed.
Needless to say, both the "hourglass effect change effect" and the "hourglass effect other than the hourglass change effect effect" may be executed as the "hourglass effect".

In addition, multiple sand falling speeds (time until all the sand falls) are set, and the slower the sand falling speed (the longer the time it takes for all the sand to fall), the higher the expected A pending image may be displayed. Alternatively, a display effect with a higher degree of expectation may be performed.

Certain embodiments and variations shown with reference to FIGS. 322-328 may be applied to the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 329-331.

Both the “hourglass hold change effect” shown with reference to FIGS. 322 to 328 and the “hourglass hold change effect” shown with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331 may be implemented. In this case, in the states shown in FIGS. 323 and 330, when the reserved image of a predetermined color is displayed, a sand image of a color different from that of the reserved image falls, or a sand image of the same color is displayed. is displayed to fall. In the case of sand images of different colors, the player can be entertained with the effect while expecting which color the reserved image will change to, and in the case of sand images of the same color, all the sand falls first. It is possible to entertain the player in two steps, that is, the player is entertained whether or not to play, and then the color of the reserved image appears from the sand image.

322 to 328, the "hourglass pending change effect" shown in FIGS. 329 to 331 may be executed. good.
Alternatively, after executing the "hourglass pending change effect" shown in FIGS. 329 to 331, the "hourglass pending change effect" shown in FIGS. 322 to 328 may be executed. may

According to such an "hourglass holding change effect", it is possible to provide the player with a new interest.

Modified embodiments of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 and the like are shown below with reference to FIGS. 332 to 334 and the like. In this embodiment, a "double roulette effect" can be executed as a special effect. "Double roulette effect" consists of two effects, "expectation degree roulette effect" and "suspension change roulette effect".

Hereinafter, the detailed presentation modes of the "double roulette presentation" will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 332 shows a time chart in the "double roulette effect". 333 and 334 show display examples in the "double roulette effect".
FIG. 332(a) shows the first half of one variable display, and FIG. 332(b) shows the second half of one variable display. Specifically, FIG. 332(a) shows the effect mode from timing t0 when the variable display is started to timing t40 when the special ready-to-win effect is started, and FIG. 332(b) shows the special ready-to-win effect. is started to timing t80 when the stop display of the decorative pattern is finished.
A predetermined background image can be displayed in the display area as shown in other embodiments, but illustration is omitted in this embodiment.

At timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. Simultaneously with the start of the variable display, a fan-shaped expectation degree roulette image is displayed at the lower left of the display area, and a fan-shaped pending change roulette image is displayed at the lower right of the display area. The kanji "period" is displayed in the expectation roulette image. In addition, a Chinese character "ho" is displayed in the pending change roulette image. In addition, in the variable display in which the expectation degree roulette image and the pending change roulette image are displayed, the pending display area to the fourth pending display area are slightly different from the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. changed to the left. A normal (white) pending image is displayed as the pending image.
FIG. 333(a) shows a display state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed before the variable display is started. FIG. 333(b) shows a display state immediately after the variable display is started, in which the expectation level roulette image is displayed in the lower left corner of the display area and the pending change roulette image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area. ing. Note that the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are in the state of being temporarily stopped and displayed.
At timing t1, the left decorative design to the right decorative design start to fluctuate at high speed. FIG. 333(c) shows the display state when the left decorative design to the right decorative design change at high speed.

At timing t5, a convex rotation suggestive image is displayed outside the expectation roulette image. The rotation suggestion image is displayed until the rotation of the expectation roulette image ends. FIG. 333(d) shows a display state in which a rotation suggestive image is displayed.
Next, at timing t6, the expectation roulette image starts rotating clockwise. FIG. 333(e) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image rotates clockwise. Note that the arrows in the drawing indicate the direction of rotation, and do not indicate that the arrows are actually displayed as an image (the same applies to FIG. 334(c), which will be described later).

The expectation roulette image rotates at a high speed for two seconds from timing t6 to timing t8, and then is stopped and displayed at timing t8. Here, the number "30" is displayed as the expectation image. FIG. 333(f) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image is stopped and the number "30" is displayed as the expectation image.
Five types of expectation images, namely, "10", "30", "50", "70", and "99" are prepared as the expectation image to be stopped, and after the expectation roulette image is stopped, one of the expectation images is displayed. is displayed. The number displayed as the expectation level image suggests the level of expectation for the variation in which the variable display is performed. For example, if the number is "30", the level of expectation is approximately 30%. suggests that
In this way, the expectation roulette image rotates and one of the plurality of expectation images is stopped and displayed, so that the player can recognize the degree of expectation. It is possible.

Next, at timing t40, a special ready-to-win effect is generated. In the special ready-to-win effect in the present embodiment, a fighter character and a bomb character are displayed in the display area, and a dynamic display of fighting between the fighter character and the bomb character is performed. is stop-displayed to indicate a big hit, and if the bomb character wins, it is stopped-displayed to indicate a loss.
At the start of the special ready-to-win effect, a ready-to-win title image such as "martial artist vs. bomb" may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, two seconds from timing t40 to timing t42). Also, at a predetermined timing after the end of the display of the ready-to-win title image, it is preferable to start the "suspension changing roulette effect". Alternatively, as shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 272, etc., a special image may be displayed (such as a display that hides the background) at the start of a special ready-to-win effect. Also, the ``expectation roulette performance'' can be executed before these images are displayed, and the ``holding change roulette performance'' can be executed after these images are displayed. In this way, by switching the type of executable performance with the start time of the special ready-to-win performance as a boundary, the execution timings of both performances become different, and the player's attention is focused on the performance being executed. be able to.
FIG. 334(a) shows a display state when a special ready-to-win effect occurs. During the special ready-to-win performance, decorative symbols with a predetermined number (in this case, the number "5") are displayed in a temporarily stopped ready-to-win state.

Next, at timing t50, a convex rotation suggestion image is displayed outside the pending change roulette image. The rotation suggestion image is displayed until the rotation of the pending change roulette image ends. FIG. 334(b) shows a display state in which a rotation suggestive image is displayed.
Next, at timing t51, the pending change roulette image starts rotating counterclockwise. FIG. 334(c) shows a display state in which the pending change roulette image is rotating counterclockwise.

The pending change roulette image rotates at high speed for two seconds from timing t51 to timing t53, and then is stopped at timing t52, where the character "red" is displayed. FIG. 334(d) shows a display state in which the pending change roulette image is stopped and the characters "red" are displayed.
During the rotation of the pending change roulette image, five types of letters of "blue", "green", "red", "gold" and "rainbow" are cyclically displayed in this order. In addition, after the hold change roulette image starts rotating and the character "Hold" moves from the bottom of the display area to the outside of the screen, the character "Hold" is not displayed, and "Blue", "Green", " The characters "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are displayed in a rotating manner.
After the pending change roulette image is rotated, one of the five types of characters "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" as the expectation degree image is stopped and displayed. be. The displayed characters indicate how the pending image changes. When "blue" is displayed, the pending image changes to a blue pending image, and when "red" is displayed, , the pending image changes to a red pending image.
At timing t54 one second after the pending change roulette image stops, the pending image changes to a red pending image. FIG. 334(e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by rotating the pending change roulette image and stopping and displaying the predetermined characters, it is possible for the player to recognize which color the pending image will change to.

FIG. 334(f) shows a state in which the fighter character wins over the bomb character at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t70) during the special ready-to-win effect. When this display is performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit. Incidentally, when a display is made in which the martial artist character is defeated by the bomb character, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
After that, at timing t76, the special ready-to-win effect ends, and at timing t78, the left to right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 334(g) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t77, left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The display of the pending image, the expectation degree roulette image, and the pending change roulette image ends at this timing. FIG. 334(h) shows the display state at this time.

Thus, the "expectation degree roulette effect" is an effect that can be executed before the execution of the special ready-to-win effect is started. On the other hand, the "suspended changing roulette effect" is an effect that can be executed during execution of a special ready-to-win effect. In addition, as special reach productions, there are "Gigantic Tank Reach" (Figs. 224 to 236, etc.), "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (Figs. 252 to 255, etc.), "Year-end Song Battle Reach Production" (Fig. "The countdown reach effect" (Fig. 277, etc.) or the like can be adopted.
Thus, in the present embodiment, an effect using the expectation level roulette image is performed before starting the special ready-to-win effect, and an effect using the pending change roulette image is performed during the special ready-to-win effect. In this way, the effects using the roulette image are executed at different timings and are not executed at the same time, so that the player can concentrate on the effects.

An example is shown in which the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image are displayed from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (until the stop display timing of the decorative pattern). and the display of the pending change roulette image may be started or ended.
For example, timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display (for example, timing when all the decorative patterns are fluctuating at high speed, some decorative patterns are fluctuating at high speed and different decorative patterns are You may start displaying the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image at a time when there is no high-speed fluctuation (such as low-speed fluctuation or shaking fluctuation), or after suggesting that a pseudo-run will be performed. When a pseudo-variation effect is being performed (for example, when a display indicating the number of pseudo-runs such as × 2 or × 3 is being performed, or when a pseudo-run is being performed on the liquid crystal screen When an effect or the like is being displayed, the display of the expectation degree roulette image and the pending change roulette image may be started.
Also, even if it is decided to execute the double roulette effect, the expectation roulette effect is performed before the special ready-to-win effect is performed, and the pending change roulette effect is performed when the special ready-to-win effect is performed. Since the expectation level roulette effect and the pending change roulette effect are not performed at the same time, when the effect related to the expectation level roulette effect is being performed, the effect related to the pending change roulette effect is hidden, and the pending change roulette effect is not displayed. When an effect related to the changing roulette effect is being performed, the effect related to the expectation level roulette effect may be hidden. This is because the player can concentrate on the displayed roulette effect.

In this way, even if the effect related to the pending change roulette effect is not displayed when the effect related to the expectation roulette effect is being performed, the start timing of the expectation roulette effect is the same as the variable display. Not only at the start, for example, the timing when all the decorative patterns are changing at high speed, some decorative patterns are changing at high speed and different decorative patterns are not changing at high speed (for example, low speed fluctuation , shaking fluctuation, etc.) Timing, when a pseudo-variation effect is being performed after suggesting that a pseudo-continuation will be performed (for example, a display indicating the number of times pseudo-continuation such as × 2 or × 3 is performed or when an effect or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal screen to suggest that a pseudo-play is being performed).

In addition, the timing at which the pending change roulette effect is started is an effect that can be executed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the special ready-to-win effect. It may be immediately after the hit, or in a special reach production, the branch timing of the win-lose production (a production that finally suggests whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a loss, such as characters fighting) (the result of the win-lose production is It may be just before the timing shown), or it may be when a display prompting the operation of the operation means that can be displayed when a special ready-to-win effect is being performed is performed.
It should be noted that whether or not to execute the double roulette effect is determined based on the result of the win/loss determination performed at the start of the fluctuation, but based on the look-ahead process, it is decided whether to execute the "double roulette effect". You may In this case, if it is decided to perform the "double roulette effect" by performing a preliminary judgment of the win or loss at the time of the start winning, the hold image corresponding to the start win will be displayed normally until the "hold change roulette effect" is started. , the suspended image (the suspended image at the time of execution of the effect) may continue to be displayed.
Alternatively, instead of or in addition to whether or not to execute the double roulette effect, it may be determined whether to execute the single roulette effect. This single roulette effect is a effect in which only one of the “expectation roulette effect” or the “suspended change roulette effect” is performed. When it is decided to perform, the "expectation degree roulette effect" is performed, but the "suspension changing roulette effect" is not performed during the execution of the special ready-to-win effect. Conversely, when it is determined that only the "suspension change roulette effect" is performed, the "expectation level roulette effect" is not performed. Here, since the "hold change roulette effect" is a effect that is performed during the execution of the special reach effect, if it is not decided to execute the special reach effect as the variable effect, the "expectation degree roulette effect" If it is decided to execute a special reach effect as a variable effect, either the double roulette effect, the "expectation roulette effect" only, or the "suspended change roulette effect" only can also be selected.
In addition, if it is decided to perform a double roulette effect or a single roulette effect and the "expectation roulette effect" is performed, if the number displayed as the expectation image is displayed, it will be displayed or "suspended" until the fluctuation ends Although it has been explained that the display may be hidden when the effect related to the "changing roulette effect" is started, for example, the display of the numbers displayed as the expectation level image will not be displayed after a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds) has elapsed. It may be hidden, or a predetermined operation means has been operated (unlike the expectation roulette effect, a notice effect for operating the operation means is displayed, and the operation of the operation means for the notice effect is accepted. It may be hidden based on what has been done). Further, the “suspension change roulette effect” may be hidden at the timing when the suspension image changes to the red suspension image or after a predetermined time has passed from the timing. This is because it is possible to clearly determine which reserved color the reserved image is.
In addition, the variable display in which the double roulette effect or single roulette effect was decided to be performed was the result of a failure, and the double roulette effect or single roulette effect was determined or was determined in the next variable display. In this case, return the expectation roulette image and pending change roulette image to the initial state ("period" and "hold" are displayed), and execute the "double roulette effect" again in the next fluctuation display. may In addition, the initial state of the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image ("period" and "hold" are displayed even during the period until the next variable display starts (fixed stop period) due to the result of losing. It is even better to display an image of the

The colors of the expectation roulette image, the pending change roulette image, and the rotation suggestion image may be represented by colors (for example, gray or brown) that are not used as colors of the pending image or the pending image. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the expectation level is indicated by the colors of the expectation level roulette image and the pending change roulette image, and the display mode after the rotation can arouse interest in the player.

Although the numbers and letters displayed in the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image indicate the degree of expectation, the color may be used to indicate the degree of expectation in addition to these displays.
For example, the numbers "10", "30", "50", "70", and "99" are displayed as the result of rotation of the expectation roulette image. The color of the degree roulette image may be the color corresponding to the number. For example, if the stopped number is "10", it is blue, if it is "30" it is green, if it is "50" it is red, if it is "70" it is gold, and if it is "99" should be rainbow colored to display an expectation roulette image. The colors of the numbers themselves may be the corresponding colors, the colors of the numbers may be a common color such as black regardless of the numbers, and the background colors other than the numbers may be the corresponding colors. may be used as corresponding colors.
Similarly, the characters "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are displayed as the rotation result of the pending change roulette image. The color of the pending change roulette image may be the color corresponding to the characters. For example, if the stopped character is "blue", it is blue, if it is "green", it is green, if it is "red", it is red, if it is "gold", it is gold, if it is "rainbow", should be rainbow colored and display a pending change roulette image. The color of the character itself may be the corresponding color, or the color of the character may be a common color such as black regardless of the character, and the background color other than the character may be the corresponding color. may be used as corresponding colors.

In addition, instead of changing the color of the expectation roulette image to the color corresponding to the number when the rotation of the expectation roulette image stops, the color of the expectation roulette image is displayed in the color corresponding to the number from the start of rotation. It may be modified to When the expectation roulette image is rotated, the numbers are displayed in the order of "10", "30", "50", "70", "99", "10", "30"... In the case of such deformation, the player sees the expectation roulette image in the order of blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, blue, green, and so on.

It should be noted that when the expectation roulette image is stopped and displayed, a display may be made to emphasize to the player which number (or color) has stopped. For example, you can repeat the reduction and expansion of the displayed number while it is still displayed, or make the displayed number gradually larger than the rotating number over a period of 1 second from the stop timing. good.
Alternatively, if the expectation roulette image is displayed in a color corresponding to the number, by increasing or decreasing the brightness of that color, the player will see it as brighter or darker. You may do so.

An example is shown in which the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image are rotated at high speed for 2 seconds and then stopped. The degree of expectation after making it slower or gradually slowing it down so that the rotating numbers and letters can be seen. The image may be statically displayed.
While the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image are rotating at high speed, the numbers and characters may be invisible, or may be invisible at high speed.
In addition, when the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image are rotated at a low speed, two (multiple) adjacent numbers or characters are displayed at the same time in a visible state, and only one character or number is displayed and visible. Possible states occur alternately, and finally stop with only one being displayed. Alternatively, three (or more) adjacent numbers or letters may be displayed so as to be visible at the same time.

The numbers displayed in the expectation roulette image may be displayed in the order of "10", "30", "50", "70" and "99", or "99" and "70". , “50”, “30”, and “10” may be displayed in order, or may be displayed in random order.
The characters displayed in the pending change roulette image may also be displayed in the order of “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold” and “rainbow”, or “rainbow” and “gold”. , 'red', 'green', and 'blue', or may be displayed in random order.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 332 to 334, the “expectation roulette effect” is performed only once, but it may be performed a plurality of times (twice or more). An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 332(a) is shown below with reference to FIG. Therefore, the display mode of the reserved image is omitted in the time chart.
When the "expectation degree roulette effect" is executed multiple times, it is preferable to display a number indicating that the degree of expectation is higher than the number displayed last time. Effect pattern 01 shown in FIG. 335(a) is a effect pattern in which the second “expectation degree roulette effect” is executed from timing t14 to timing t16, and “50” is displayed.
Alternatively, in addition to the number indicating that the degree of expectation is higher than the number displayed last time, the same number as before execution of the effect may be displayed.

When the "expectation degree roulette effect" is executed a plurality of times, a number with a relatively low degree of expectation compared to the number displayed immediately before may be displayed in the next effect. In the effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 335(b), the first "expectation degree roulette effect" is executed from timing t6 to timing t8, "50" is displayed, and the second "expectation degree roulette effect" is displayed from timing t14 to timing t16. This is an effect pattern in which "roulette effect" is executed and "30" is displayed.

In addition, the "expectation roulette effect" can be executed three or more times, and after a number with a relatively low level of expectation is displayed for the second time compared to the number displayed first, A number with a high degree of expectation may be displayed.
In the effect pattern 03 shown in FIG. 335(c), the first "expectation level roulette effect" is executed from timing t6 to timing t8 and "50" is displayed, and the second "expectation level roulette effect" is displayed from timing t14 to timing t16. This is a performance pattern in which "roulette performance" is executed and "30" is displayed, and the third "expectation degree roulette performance" is executed from timing t22 to timing t24 and "70" is displayed.
In this way, compared to the numbers displayed for the first time, such as “50” → “30” → “70”, after the numbers with relatively low expectations are displayed for the second time, A number with a relatively higher degree of expectation than the number may be displayed for the third time.

In addition, it seems that a number ("30") with lower expectations than the number "50" displayed the first time, such as "50" → "10" → "30", may be displayed the third time. Alternatively, a number ("50") having the same degree of expectation as the first displayed number such as "50"→"10"→"50" may be displayed.

Even if the highest expected number "99" is displayed, it may change to a number with a lower expected level depending on the effect after the next time, or it may change to a number with a lower expected level and then expect again. There may be cases where "99", which is the number with the highest degree, is displayed. For example, numbers may be displayed in the order of "99"→"10"→"99".

In addition, after the display of numbers with high expectations changes to numbers with low expectations, it may return to the display of numbers with high expectations after displaying numbers with relatively low expectations several times. may For example, "99" → "10" → "30" → "99" or "99" → "50" → "30" → "99" or "99" → "10" → "50" → "99" , "99"→"50"→"99"→"30"→"99".
By adopting such a mode, it is possible to make the player's emotions fluctuate and improve the amusement.

It should be noted that, when the number "99" with the highest degree of expectation is displayed, "99" will be displayed again in the next and subsequent productions, or even if a number with a low degree of expectation is displayed once, the next time "99" may be finally displayed in subsequent effects. In other words, if the most expected number "99" appears even once, even if the number with the lowest expected degree is displayed once, "99" is finally displayed. good. For example, "99" → "99" or "99" → "99" → "99" or "99" → "50" → "99", "99" → "50" → "99" → "70" → A number such as "99" may be displayed.
By adopting such a mode, the number with the lowest degree of expectation may be displayed, making the player nervous, but finally the number with the highest degree of expectation is displayed, It is possible to maintain the player's confidence in the performance.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 332 to 335 and the like, the number that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing is one of a plurality of numbers (when the roulette is spinning, a plurality of numbers are displayed). may be displayed). Therefore, even if a number with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the execution of the effect may change the state to display a number with a low degree of expectation instead of the number with a high degree of expectation. can make you feel nervous.

When the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times, after the end of the effect, the next "expectation roulette effect" will be performed after a predetermined number of seconds has elapsed as the interval time (that is, the time during which the rotation result is displayed). (For example, in the case of effect pattern 01 shown in FIG. 335(a), five seconds from timing t8 to timing t13).
The interval time is desirably set to a length (for example, 1 second or longer) that allows the player to visually recognize the displayed numbers. As a result, it is possible to guarantee the time for raising expectations for the occurrence of a big hit.
When the "expectation degree roulette effect" is executed a plurality of times, the time (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the effect to the start of the next effect should be the same. For example, in the case of production pattern 03 shown in FIG. 335(c), after waiting for five seconds from timing t8 to timing t13 and five seconds from timing t16 to timing t21, execution of the next production is started.
Alternatively, the interval times may be gradually shortened or lengthened without being the same, or each interval time may be randomly determined. For example, in effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 335(d), the interval time is gradually shortened to 5 seconds, 4 seconds, and 3 seconds.

In this way, after the "expectation level roulette effect" is performed multiple times, the special ready-to-win effect is started. It is possible to realize game characteristics such as having a high sense of anticipation or not having a great sense of anticipation as to what the result will be.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 332 to 334, an example was shown in which the “holding change roulette effect” is performed only once. In this way, by performing the "holding changing roulette effect" only once, the player's awareness of the battle between characters (for example, the fighter character and the bomb character) that is executed during the special ready-to-win effect is enhanced. can be concentrated.

On the other hand, the “suspended changing roulette effect” may be executed multiple times. 336, an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 332(b) will be described below.
Effect pattern 01 shown in FIG. 336(a) shows an effect example in which the “holding change roulette effect” is performed twice. Also, the effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 336(b) shows an effect example in which the "holding change roulette effect" is performed three times.
In the case of effect pattern 01, the reserved image changes from the normal (white) reserved image to the blue reserved image, and then changes from the blue reserved image to the red reserved image.
Further, in the case of effect pattern 01, the reserved image changes from the normal (white) reserved image to the blue reserved image, then changes from the blue reserved image to the red reserved image, and further changes to the red reserved image. The pending image changes to the gold pending image.
In this way, by making it possible to execute the "suspended change roulette effect" multiple times, even if a result with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed, the "suspended change roulette effect" is executed again. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a result with a higher degree of expectation will be displayed.

When "rainbow", which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, is displayed as a result of the execution of the "suspended change roulette effect", it is preferable that the "suspended change roulette effect" is not executed thereafter. For example, when "rainbow" is displayed as a result of the execution of the first "suspension change roulette effect", the second and subsequent "suspension change roulette effects" are not performed.
By adopting such a mode, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the content of the special ready-to-win effect itself (fight between characters).

As a result of the execution of the "holding change roulette effect", if the character "rainbow", which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, is displayed and the holding image changes to rainbow color, after the holding image changes to rainbow color You may make it display a special privilege display to . As a special privilege display, for example, the image displayed with a special reach effect is changed and displayed (for example, the hammer held by the martial artist character is changed to a rainbow hammer and displayed), or a special Displayed in addition to the image displayed in the ready-to-win effect (for example, by displaying the rainbow hammer in a manner overlapping in front of the pending change roulette image, the martial arts character's hammer attack is powerful (easy to hit) ), or display that is not displayed with special reach effects (displays that are completely unrelated to special reach effects, such as displaying bromide photos of celebrities, etc.) Other than special reach effects may be displayed). Since the character "Rainbow", which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, is displayed, the expectation of the player is at its peak, and a display that is not displayed with a special reach effect (special reach effect and is a completely unrelated display, for example, a display that may be displayed other than a special reach effect, such as displaying a bromide photo of a celebrity), breaking through the limits of expectations at the climax It is possible to provide the player with an exciting state of excitement.
In addition, the special privilege display is not displayed every time the character “rainbow”, which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, is displayed, but when the character “rainbow”, which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, is displayed. (for example, once every 20 times). Also, the special privilege display may be displayed even when characters other than "rainbow", which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, are displayed. However, in that case, it is preferable that the rate at which the special privilege display is displayed decreases as the degree of expectation is lower for the character. That is, in the case of characters with a low degree of expectation, it becomes difficult to display a special privilege display. By doing so, a premium feeling is created in the display of special benefits, and if a character other than "rainbow", which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, is displayed and the result of the lottery is lost, the display of special benefits will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of being a failure to some extent. Also, when a character other than "rainbow", which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, is displayed and a special privilege display is displayed, the win may be determined. By doing so, the special privilege display can suggest the result of the special lottery.
In addition, there is a possibility that it will not be displayed in special reach effects (displays that are completely unrelated to special reach effects, such as displaying celebrities' bromide photos, etc.). ) is displayed after the most expected character "rainbow" is displayed and the pending image changes to rainbow color, the display that is not displayed with this special reach effect is It may be displayed so as to overlap the position where the pending change roulette image was displayed, or may be displayed so as to overlap all areas where the pending change roulette image was displayed.
In addition, a display that is not displayed with a special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect, such as displaying a bromide photo of a celebrity, etc.). A certain display) may be displayed even if the pending change roulette effect is not performed, or may be displayed after the display of the special ready-to-win effect is finished.
In addition, a display that is not displayed with a special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect, such as displaying a bromide photo of a celebrity, etc.). When a certain display) is being performed, a simulated image such as a production button is displayed, an instruction display is performed to prompt a predetermined operation, and even if the operation is performed according to the instruction display or the operation is not performed, for example The display of the bromide photo may be switched (changed), or the type of bromide photo (for example, male idol, female idol, etc.) may be selected by the player.

With reference to FIG. 332, in the "double roulette effect", an embodiment is shown in which the "expectation level roulette effect" and the "hold change roulette effect" are executed once each. Further, with reference to FIG. 335, an embodiment is shown in which the "expectation level roulette effect" is executed multiple times in the "double roulette effect". Further, with reference to FIG. 336, an embodiment is shown in which the "holding changing roulette effect" is executed multiple times in the "double roulette effect". Also, in the "double roulette effect", there are cases where the "expectation roulette effect" and the "suspension change roulette effect" are not executed.
These embodiments may be combined. For example, in the "double roulette effect", the number of executions of the "expectation degree roulette effect" is set to 0, 1, and multiple times (two or more times), and the number of times of execution of the "suspended change roulette effect" is set to 0, 1. Even if the "expectation level roulette effect" and the "suspension change roulette effect" are each executed a predetermined number of times (or not executed even once) in a manner in which these are appropriately combined, good.
For example, it may be possible to execute a production pattern in which the “expectation degree roulette effect” is executed twice and the “suspension change roulette effect” is not executed, or the “expectation degree roulette effect” is executed once and the “suspension change roulette effect” is executed. ” three times, but the most effective combination of the number of executions of the “expectation roulette effect” and the “suspended change roulette effect” is It is a pattern that can be executed twice (twice or more), but only once for the “suspended change roulette effect”. Since the ``expectation roulette effect'' is an effect that is performed before the special ready-to-win effect occurs, the player's expectation is not so high, and the expectation level is low in the ``expectation roulette effect''. If the image of the number is displayed, if you prevent the number from changing after that, the expectation for the variable display where the "expectation roulette effect" was performed will continue until the end of the variable display (symbol confirmation stop) It is desirable that the "expectation degree roulette effect" can be executed a plurality of times (twice or more). On the other hand, as for the "holding changing roulette effect", since it is an effect performed after the occurrence of a special ready-to-win effect, the player's expectations are quite high. Under such circumstances, if you perform the “hold change roulette effect” multiple times, you will not be able to concentrate on the special reach effect, and the expectation level suggestion effect (for example, the color of the letters This is because there is a risk of overlooking the production that suggests the degree of expectation due to multiple characters or multiple character cut-ins.

Of the "double roulette effect", the "expectation roulette effect" is executed only before the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, and the "suspended change roulette effect" is executed after the decorative pattern becomes the reach state. may be executed only in the state of
Also, of the "double roulette effect", the "expectation roulette effect" is executed only before the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, and the "suspended change roulette effect" is a special effect when the decorative pattern is in the reach state. You may make it perform only in the state after generation of the ready-to-win production. In this case, each display should be made when each roulette effect is executed. For example, when the "expectation degree roulette effect" starts to be executed but the "suspended changing roulette effect" does not start to be executed, only the display relating to the "expectation degree roulette effect" is performed.

The size of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" of the "double roulette effect" is the size of the decorative symbol in the state before the decorative symbol enters the reach state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 333(e)). It is made smaller than the size, and is made larger than the size of the decorative pattern in the state where a special ready-to-win effect has occurred (for example, the state shown in FIG. 334(a)). Thus, it is desirable that the size of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette presentation" is made larger or smaller than the size of the decoration pattern according to the timing at which the expectation roulette image is displayed. On the other hand, the size of the roulette image in the "holding changing roulette effect" of the "double roulette effect" is always larger than the size of the decorative pattern. This is because the timing of occurrence of the "hold change roulette effect" is when a special ready-to-win effect is being performed, so the player knows that it is in a ready-to-win state, and the role (meaning) of the decorative pattern is Because there aren't many.
In the display examples shown with reference to FIGS. 333 and 334, the size of the decorative pattern is changed. You can change the size of

Although the display position of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" has been described as the lower left of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not limited to the lower left of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Approximately at the center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, or at the lower part of the approximately center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, or at an appropriate timing to start executing the "expectation degree roulette effect" The display position may be changed, or the expected suggestion may be made depending on the display position. For example, the expectation for winning is higher when the expectation roulette image is displayed at the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device rather than at the bottom left of the display area.
In addition, when the entire expectation roulette image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the number displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the position directly above) when the rotation is stopped is It is preferable to adopt it as a stop result indicating the degree.

Note that the "holding change roulette effect" is executed during a special ready-to-win effect, but in the special ready-to-win effect, the decoration pattern is displayed in a small size, so the player should pay attention to the "hold change roulette effect". can be made

It should be noted that, during execution of the "suspended changing roulette effect", the decorative symbols displayed in small size may be displayed in smaller size or may be erased. Further, the display of the small decorative symbols may be resumed at the timing when the execution of the "holding changing roulette effect" is completed.
It should be noted that, when executing the "suspended change roulette effect" before the start or after the end of the special reach effect, or when executing in the variable display where the special reach effect is not executed, in the same way as in the case of the expectation roulette image, At the start of the performance, it is preferable to reduce the size of the decorative pattern or increase the size of the pending change roulette image. Also, when the effect is finished, the size of the decorative pattern may be returned to the original size, or the size of the pending change roulette image may be returned to the original size.

The "double roulette effect" may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. At this time, the “expectation roulette effect” may be executed before the variable display is started based on the look-ahead processing. For example, in response to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area, "expectation degree roulette effect" is executed, a predetermined number is displayed, and until the variable display corresponding to this pending image ends, The number may be displayed. In this case, since the player does not know which hold the degree of expectation is indicated, the player can maintain the sense of expectation until the display of the numbers is finished.
On the other hand, for the "suspended change roulette effect", it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute the effect at the start of the variable display, and to execute the effect at a predetermined timing during the variation of the decorative pattern (that is, " The "holding changing roulette effect" is not executed before the start of the variable display for the "holding changing roulette effect"). As a result, even if the normal (white) pending image is displayed as the pending image at the start of the special ready-to-win effect, the “holding change roulette effect” is executed, suggesting that the expectation is higher. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation.

A predetermined display effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed during execution of the "expectation degree roulette effect". Similarly, a predetermined display effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed during the execution of the "holding changing roulette effect".
As a predetermined display effect, for example, a predetermined comment may be displayed together with the display of the character image, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the content of the comment and the color of the comment. Alternatively, a timer image that counts down a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) is displayed, a predetermined image is displayed when the timer reaches 0 seconds, and a predetermined degree of expectation is set according to the type of displayed image. may suggest. In addition to this, a predetermined degree of expectation may be suggested by the color and shape of the timer image, the time of the timer displayed first (that is, the elapsed time until 0 seconds), and the like.
The predetermined display effect executed during the execution of the "expectation degree roulette effect" and the predetermined display effect executed during the execution of the "suspension change roulette effect" may be the same display effect, or may be different. It may be a display effect.
A predetermined display effect may be started during the execution of the "expectation roulette effect" or the "suspended change roulette effect", or during the execution of the predetermined display effect, the "expectation roulette effect" or A “holding change roulette effect” may be started.
Also, during the execution of the "expectation degree roulette effect" or the "suspended change roulette effect", the predetermined display effect may end, or during the execution of the predetermined display effect, the "expectation degree roulette effect" or " The "suspended changing roulette performance" may end.
According to such an aspect, it is possible to provide the player with a plurality of pleasures.

Although the “expectation level roulette effect” and the “holding change roulette effect” have been described, both the expectation level and the hold change may be suggested by the effect using one roulette image. For example, when only one roulette image is displayed and the roulette rotates and stops, the display results are "10", "30", "50", "70", "99", "blue", "green". , 'red', 'gold', and 'rainbow'.
It should be noted that the effect using the same roulette image may be executed not only for the degree of expectation and the pending change, but also for other display effects.
For example, characters such as "change", "pseudo-continuation", and "rising" may be displayed. In addition, if it is "change", it suggests that a pending change will be performed, if it is "pseudo-ren", it suggests that a pseudo-ren will be performed, and if it is "rise", for example, the displayed comment The color varies depending on the degree of expectation, and if "rising" is displayed when the color with the low degree of expectation is displayed, it suggests that the color changes to the color with the high degree of expectation.

Alternatively, "changing roulette effect", "pseudo-run roulette effect", "rising roulette effect", and "advanced reach roulette" are provided, and the change mode, pseudo-run mode, rising mode, and special reach effect are selected from multiple options. You may do so. In addition, it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation suggested by the options.
As for the "changing roulette effect" and "rising roulette effect", as mentioned above, if it is a "pseudo-run roulette effect", it may suggest the number of pseudo-runs to be executed specifically, or the "development reach" In the case of "roulette effect", even the ready-to-win effect to be specifically executed may be suggested. In addition, in each roulette effect, the image when the roulette is spinning is common, and when the roulette is stopped and displayed, a predetermined display (for example, pseudo-running!, rising!, etc.) is performed. Alternatively, the displayed type may be determined from the image when the roulette wheel is spinning.

An embodiment has been shown in which the "expectation roulette effect" and the "suspension change roulette effect" are executed in two places in the display area. good too. Also, the “suspended changing roulette effect” may be executed at two places in the display area. In this way, the same roulette effect may be performed at two places.
In this case, the execution of the roulette effect may be started at the same time, the display result as the roulette effect may be performed at the same time, and the highly expected display may be applied, or the execution of one of the roulette effects may be started. After that, the execution of the other roulette effect may be started before the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the display result as the roulette effect may be performed, and the highly expected display may be applied, After the execution of one roulette performance is started, the other roulette performance is started to be executed before the one roulette performance is stopped and displayed, and after the one roulette performance is stopped and displayed, the other roulette performance is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, one of the roulette effects is started to be executed, and after the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, the result of the stop display is hidden, and then the other roulette effect is started to be executed. good too.
Even in this case, the predetermined roulette effect that starts to be executed when the special ready-to-win effect is executed is executed only once, and the performance before the special ready-to-win effect is executed. It is desirable that the roulette effect can be executed multiple times.
Specifically, for example, in the "double roulette effect", if it is decided to execute both the "expectation roulette effect", before the special ready-to-win effect is performed, one of the expectation roulette effects , can be executed multiple times (for example, as the expectation image, display "10" → "30" → "50", display "99" → "10" → "99", display "99"→"99"→"99", etc.), and when a special ready-to-win effect is being performed, the other expectation roulette effect is performed once. In this case, before the other expectation roulette effect is performed (for example, the timing at which a special ready-to-win effect is performed, the timing at which the other expectation roulette effect is performed, or the display result in one expectation roulette effect It is preferable to hide the display result of one of the expectations roulette effects after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since it was performed. This is because displaying a plurality of expectation level images may confuse the player.
In addition, at that time, the result displayed in one expectation roulette effect is hidden when the display result of the other expectation roulette effect is performed. Since it is possible that the displayed result has been forgotten, there is no need to display results that are greater than the result displayed in one expectation roulette effect, and the display with the lowest expectation in the other expectation roulette effect ( "10" as an expectation degree image) may be performed. Also, a result display that is equal to or greater than the result displayed in one expectation roulette effect may be displayed in the other expectation roulette effect.

Also, in the "double roulette effect", if it is decided to execute both "suspended change roulette effects", the pending display will be displayed even when the special reach effect is displayed. , the so-called downfall does not occur. Under such circumstances, if multiple pending changes are performed before a special ready-to-win effect is performed, in a manner that suggests that multiple pending changes are performed (for example, "hold change! × 2" etc.) It may be displayed or may not suggest multiple pending changes. Also, if the result display as the hold change roulette effect is "hold change! (display result that does not show a specific color)", immediately after the display of "hold change!" Alternatively, instead of displaying the pending display after the change immediately, the pending display after the change may be performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
The type of roulette effect to be used is determined based on the result of winning or losing, but with regard to the "pseudo-run roulette effect", the pseudo-run itself does not occur after the special ready-to-win effect is executed. Therefore, it is not decided to execute the "pseudo-run roulette effect" after the special ready-to-win effect is executed.
Also, the roulette effect may be executed in three or more display areas instead of two. Or it is good also as only one place.
Further, as described above, roulette effects other than the "expectation degree roulette effect" and "suspended changing roulette effect"("changing roulette effect", "pseudo continuous roulette effect", and "rising roulette effect") may be executable, Further, each roulette effect may be appropriately combined and made executable.

Note that "x", "?", or the like may be displayed as the display result of each roulette effect. For example, when the roulette displayed as "period" is started and the display result is displayed as "?" and no pending changes are made.

According to such a "double roulette effect", it is possible to provide the player with a new interest.

Modified embodiments of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 and the like are shown below with reference to FIGS. 337 to 344 and the like.
In the "silhouette announcement effect", which is a special effect in the embodiment shown below, after a plurality of characters are displayed in silhouette form in the effect window displayed in the display area, one of the characters is displayed. It is done and the degree of expectation is shown. In addition, this "silhouette notice effect" is a special reach effect (all SP reach effects excluding normal reach or part of SP reach effects excluding normal reach (such as the battle reach effect described above)) is a rendition that can be executed after is started.

First, each character displayed in the "silhouette announcement effect" will be described with reference to FIGS. There are four types of characters to be displayed in this production: a fighter character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character.

FIG. 337(a) shows a fighter character image painted with a plurality of colors.
FIG. 337(b) shows a state in which the martial arts character is displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the effect window.
FIG. 337(c) shows a state in which the martial artist character is displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the effect window, and a backlight image that is arranged behind the martial artist character and visually recognized like a backlight is displayed. ing.
FIG. 337(d) shows a state in which a fighter character painted in a plurality of colors is displayed in the production window.
FIG. 337(e) shows a state in which a character image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed together with a martial artist character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window. In this example, a character image of "Gekiatsu" is displayed on the tip of the hammer. Note that other character images may be displayed, but the details will be described later.
FIG. 337(f) shows a state in which a speech image is displayed together with a fighter character painted in a plurality of colors in the presentation window.
FIG. 337(g) shows a state in which a martial artist character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window trembles and trembles, and a dialogue image is displayed.

FIG. 338(a) shows a warrior character image painted with a plurality of colors.
FIG. 338(b) shows a state in which a warrior character is silhouette-displayed in a single color within the presentation window.
FIG. 338(c) shows a state in which the warrior character is displayed in a single color as a silhouette in the production window, and a backlight image that is arranged behind the warrior character and visually recognized like a backlight is displayed. .
FIG. 338(d) shows a state in which warrior characters painted in a plurality of colors are displayed in the rendering window.
FIG. 338(e) shows a state in which a character image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed together with a warrior character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window. In this example, a character image "Gekiatsu" is displayed near the hand of the sword. Note that other character images may be displayed, but the details will be described later.
FIG. 338(f) shows a state in which a speech image is displayed together with a warrior character painted in a plurality of colors in the rendering window.
FIG. 338(g) shows a state in which a warrior character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window wears a tiara or armor, raises a sword, and displays a dialogue image.

FIG. 339(a) shows a samurai character image painted with a plurality of colors.
FIG. 339(b) shows a state in which a samurai character is silhouette-displayed in a single color within the presentation window.
FIG. 339(c) shows a state in which the samurai character is displayed in silhouette in a single color in the production window, and a backlight image that is arranged behind the samurai character and visually recognized like a backlight is displayed. .
FIG. 339(d) shows a state in which samurai characters are displayed in a plurality of colors in the presentation window.
FIG. 339(e) shows a state in which a samurai character painted in a plurality of colors and a character image suggesting the degree of expectation are displayed in the rendering window. In this example, the character image "Gekiatsu" is displayed on the headband attached to the forehead. Note that other character images may be displayed, but the details will be described later.
FIG. 339(f) shows a state in which a speech image is displayed together with a samurai character painted in a plurality of colors in the presentation window.
FIG. 339(g) shows a state in which a samurai character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window holds a sword crosswise and a dialogue image is displayed.

FIG. 340(a) shows a witch character image painted with a plurality of colors.
FIG. 340(b) shows a state in which a witch character is displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the presentation window.
FIG. 340(c) shows a state in which the witch character is displayed in a single color as a silhouette in the production window, and a backlight image that is arranged behind the witch character and visually recognized like a halo is displayed. .
FIG. 340(d) shows a state in which a witch character painted in a plurality of colors is displayed in the rendering window.
FIG. 340(e) shows a state in which a witch character painted in a plurality of colors and a character image suggesting the degree of expectation are displayed in the rendering window. In this example, a character image "Gekiatsu" is displayed at the tip of the cane. Note that other character images may be displayed, but the details will be described later.
FIG. 340(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed together with a witch character painted in a plurality of colors in the presentation window.
FIG. 340(g) shows a state in which a witch character painted in a plurality of colors in the rendering window raises her left hand and raises her staff, and a dialogue image is displayed.

Figures 337(a), 338(a), 339(a), and 340(a) show respective character images, and each character has its own hairstyle, facial expression, body shape, costume, weapon, etc. different. Also, these parts are painted with different colors. As a result, facial expressions, hairstyles, and details of clothing can be visually recognized within the outline of the character. Such a display mode may be referred to as non-silhouette display or non-silhouette display in the present embodiment. In addition, in this display, each character has a different color of hair and clothes. For example, the warrior character may have brown hair and blue clothes, and the wizard character may have pink hair and clothes. By adopting such a non-silhouette display mode, the player can easily recognize which character is being displayed.

On the other hand, in the main rendering, only the contours of these characters are recognizable, and the inside of the contours may be displayed in a manner filled with only a predetermined color (for example, black or gray). Figures 337(b), 337(c), 338(b), 338(c), 339(b), 339(c), 340(b) and 340(c) are It shows a state in which the inside of the outline of the character is displayed in a manner filled with a predetermined color. Such a display mode may be referred to as silhouette display in the present embodiment. According to such a display mode, the characters are displayed like shadow pictures or silhouettes, and only the outlines are visible, so that the above-described character images suggesting the degree of expectation for each character are "extremely hot". Although it is not possible to visually confirm whether or not the characters are displayed, it is possible to easily recognize which of the characters is displayed.
Note that the inside of the outline of each character may be filled with a predetermined pattern (eg, gradation, checkered pattern, etc.) instead of being filled with only one color, and such a display mode is also included in the silhouette display. may be

FIGS. 337(c), 338(c), 339(c), and 340(c) show a state in which a backlight image is displayed behind the character displayed in silhouette. It should be noted that the display of the backlight image suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than the case in which the backlight image is not displayed, but the details will be described later.

FIGS. 337(e), 338(e), 339(e), and 340(e) show a state in which a character image ("Gekiatsu") is displayed on a character's weapon or part of its body. there is The types of displayed character images include "chance", "extremely hot", and "hit", which suggests that the degree of expectation is high in this order, but the details will be described later.

In FIGS. 337(f), 338(f), 339(f), and 340(f), a dialog image is displayed to the left of the non-silhouetted character. It should be noted that each character is statically displayed without displaying an action as will be described later.

In FIGS. 337(g), 338(g), 339(g), and 340(g), dialogue images are displayed to the left of characters displayed in silhouette, and each character moves. is performed, and the state in which the display mode has changed is shown (hereinafter, the dynamic display of the display mode such as each character's movement may be referred to as "specific display". be). It should be noted that the change in the display mode suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than the case where the display mode does not change, but the details will be described later.

Next, with reference to the effect pattern table of FIG. 341, the effect pattern of the "silhouette announcement effect" will be described. In this embodiment, production pattern 01 to production pattern 13 are provided. Moreover, in each production pattern, there are cases where a plurality of execution modes are provided for a predetermined production. For example, in "presence or absence of backlight when displaying a silhouette", "character display mode when a character is confirmed", "character display when a character is displayed", and "character movement", there are a plurality of display modes. One of the display modes is selected and an effect is executed.
In the "silhouette announcement effect", first, silhouette characters are displayed four times, and then one of the characters is displayed.
As shown in the "1st silhouette display" column in FIG. 341, a silhouetted fighter character is displayed for the first time.
Next, as shown in the "Second Silhouette Display" column in FIG. 341, a silhouette warrior character is displayed for the second time.
Next, as shown in the "third silhouette display" column in FIG. 341, a silhouetted samurai character is displayed for the third time. The display mode up to the third silhouette display is common to each production pattern.
Next, as shown in the column of "fourth silhouette display" in FIG. 341, at the fourth time, one of the four characters is displayed in silhouette. Specifically, one of a fighter character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character is displayed.

As shown in the "presence/absence of backlight during silhouette display" column in FIG. and a halo image may be displayed behind the character, and one of the display modes is selected.
These display modes will be described using a fighter character as an example. FIG. 337(b) shows an example in which the fighter character is displayed without displaying the halo image. FIG. 337(c) shows an example in which a fighter character is displayed in a manner in which a halo image is displayed.

After that, when three characters are displayed, that is, when the magician character is not selected in the "fourth silhouette display", the three characters of the martial arts character, the warrior character, and the samurai character are switched at high speed. After being displayed, one of the displayed three characters is finally stopped and displayed. The characters to be stopped and displayed are as shown in the column of "characters to be finally stopped and displayed" in FIG. In the case of pattern 07, a warrior character is stop-displayed, and in the case of production patterns 09-11, a samurai character is stop-displayed.
On the other hand, when four characters are displayed, that is, when a magician character is selected in the "fourth silhouette display", four characters of a fighter character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a magician character are switched at high speed. After being displayed, one of the displayed four characters is finally stopped and displayed. The characters to be stopped and displayed are as shown in the column "Characters to be finally stopped and displayed" in FIG. is stop-displayed, the samurai character is stop-displayed in the case of the production pattern 12, and the wizard character is stop-displayed in the case of the production pattern 13.

As shown in the column of "character display mode when character is confirmed" in FIG. 341, there are two types of character display modes during stop display: "silhouette display" and "non-silhouette display", and one of the modes is selected. be done.
These display modes will be described using a fighter character as an example. FIG. 337(b) shows an example in which the fighter character is displayed in the "silhouette display" display mode. FIG. 337(d) shows an example in which the fighter character is displayed in the "non-silhouette display" display mode.
When the character is displayed as a silhouette, the character gradually begins to be colored from this state, and becomes a state in which the character is painted in a plurality of colors without being silhouetted.

The latter case is more expected than the case where the backlight is not displayed and the case where the backlight is displayed.
Also, the degree of expectation is suggested by the type of displayed character. Specifically, the degree of expectation increases in the order of martial arts character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character.
Also, when a character is confirmed, there are cases where the character is displayed in silhouette and cases where the character is displayed in non-silhouette (that is, when the character is not displayed in silhouette and is displayed in multiple colors), but the latter is better. Expectations are high.
Further, when the character is determined, the expectation for the big win may be set higher when the character is displayed in silhouette than when the character is displayed in non-silhouette.
Further, when determining the character, the expectation level for either the non-silhouette display or the silhouette display of the character may be 100%, and the other expectation level may be less than 100%. By setting one of them to 100%, there is a sense of security when the performance with 100% expectation is displayed, and the expectation is maintained even if the performance with 100% expectation is not displayed. It is for

In a mode in which characters are displayed in multiple colors (that is, in non-silhouette display), a character image may be displayed together with the character to indicate the degree of expectation. As shown in the "character display when the character is displayed" column in FIG. One of the modes in which the character "hit" is displayed is selected. Taking the fighter character as an example, FIG. 337(e) shows an example in which the hammer of the fighter character is displayed with the characters "Gekiatsu" attached.
Expectations are higher in the order of the mode in which no characters are displayed, the mode in which the characters "Chance" are displayed, the mode in which the characters "GekiAtsu" are displayed, and the mode in which the characters "Hit" are displayed. The degree of expectation is 100% in the case of the mode in which the character "hit" is displayed. In addition, the appearance rate decreases in the order of the mode in which no characters are displayed, the mode in which the characters "Chance" are displayed, the mode in which the characters "Super Hot" are displayed, and the mode in which the characters "Hit" are displayed.

After the character is confirmed, a predetermined dialogue image is displayed next to the character. As shown in the "character dialogue" column in FIG. . For example, in the case of a martial arts character, the line "Go, fight, and come back! Always the same!" is displayed.
Simultaneously with the display of the lines, a display (dynamic display) in which the character performs a predetermined action such as swinging a weapon may be performed as shown in the "character action" column in FIG.
Taking the fighter character as an example, FIG. 337(f) shows a display mode in which the fighter character does not perform a predetermined action. FIG. 337(g) shows an example of dynamic display of a martial arts character in a manner of "waving the whole body".
When the character does not move (is not dynamically displayed), the latter has a higher expectation than when the character moves (dynamically displayed).
Note that the character may always be dynamically displayed.

Next, a more specific embodiment of the "silhouette announcement effect" will be described with reference to the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 341, the time chart of FIG. 342, display examples of FIGS.
In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 342, vertical lines indicating respective timings are shown in increments of 0.5 seconds. Also, there are cases where the timing is expressed in increments of 0.5 seconds, such as timing t44.5 and timing t50.5. Moreover, not only in this figure but also in other figures described in this specification, the same notation may be used.
Note that expressions such as timing t10.2, timing t10.4, timing t10.33, and timing t10.67 may be used as expressions for specifying arbitrary timings, not limited to 0.5 second increments. These are expressions indicating timings 10.2 seconds, 10.4 seconds, 10.33 seconds, and 10.67 seconds after timing t0, respectively.
In addition, although an example of writing vertical lines in the figure at 1 second or 0.5 second intervals has been shown, in order to explain the technical content described in the specification, it is necessary to write vertical lines at the timing you want to specify. is not necessarily required, for example, in a time chart in which vertical lines are written in increments of 1 second, a predetermined timing shorter than 1 second using decimal numbers (for example, timing t10.2, timing t10.33, etc. described above) ) can be specified.

First, the effect example 01 shown in FIG. 342(a) will be described. In production pattern 04 shown in FIG. 341, "absent" is selected as "presence or absence of backlight when displaying silhouette", and "silhouette display" is selected as "display mode of character, etc. when character is confirmed". This is an example of an effect when "None" is selected as the "character display when the character is displayed" and "None" is selected as the "movement of the character".

First, a predetermined timing (timing At t44.5), an effect window is displayed near the center of the display area. FIG. 343(a) shows a display example at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44) before the effect window is displayed. In this example, as a special ready-to-win presentation, a presentation of a fight between a fighter character and a bomb character is displayed, and as a result of the battle, if the fighter character wins, it is a big hit, and if the bomb character wins, it is a loss. Instead of the martial arts character, an effect may be displayed in which a warrior character, a samurai character, or a wizard character fights against a bomb character.
It should be noted that the effect window may be configured to effect using the entire display area. In that case, the player cannot recognize the special ready-to-win effects and decoration patterns.
FIG. 343(b) shows a display example during display of the effect window (for example, at a predetermined timing from timing t44.5 to timing t45). Note that the character is not displayed in the effect window during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t45, but the character image and the like are displayed during the period from timing t45 to timing t50.5.
Next, the details of the contents displayed in the rendering window will be described with reference to FIG. 343(d) and subsequent figures.
First, in a period from timing t45 to timing t45.5, an image of a silhouetted fighter character is displayed in the presentation window. FIG. 343(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in a period from timing t45.5 to timing t46, an image of a silhouetted warrior character is displayed in the effect window. FIG. 343(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in a period from timing t46 to timing t46.5, an image of a silhouetted samurai character is displayed in the presentation window. FIG. 343(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in a period from timing t46.5 to timing t47, an image of a silhouetted witch character is displayed in the effect window. FIG. 343(g) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in the period from timing t47 to timing t48, the images of the respective silhouetted characters are switched and displayed in turn at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds) within the effect window. FIG. 344(a) shows a state (perceived visually by the player) in which all four silhouetted characters are superimposed.

Next, during the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5, a silhouetted fighter character is stopped and displayed. FIG. 344(b) shows the display state at this time. By displaying the characters in silhouette in this way, it is possible to remind the player which characters are displayed in a colored manner.
In other words, in a situation where images of silhouetted characters are switched at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds) and displayed, it is impossible to remember which colored character is displayed. At the stage (timing t48) in which the character silhouettes are selectively displayed, it is possible to recall which colored character will be displayed. The display (display at timing t48) that can be performed may be hereinafter referred to as recall display.
Note that one of the plurality of silhouetted characters displayed during the period from timing t45 to timing t48 is displayed in a colored state. It can be said that it can be recalled by the plurality of silhouetted characters displayed up to t48. A plurality of silhouetted characters displayed up to t48 are not recalled.
Next, during the period from timing t48.5 to timing t49, the fighter character gradually changes from being silhouetted to being painted in a plurality of colors. FIG. 344(c) shows a display state in the middle of changing. Also, FIG. 344(d) shows the display state after the change is finished. It should be noted that when the silhouette character displayed in the recollection display gradually changes to a state in which it is painted in a plurality of colors, for example, if the silhouette character is a martial artist, the colors may change. If it gradually changes, it will not change to another character, such as becoming a wizard.
Next, during the period from timing t49 to timing t50, the fighter character is displayed in a stationary state. FIG. 344(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t50 to timing t50.5, a line image saying "Go, fight, and come back! Always the same!" is displayed on the left side of the fighter character. FIG. 344(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t50.5, display of the martial artist character and lines ends, and at timing t51, display of the effect window ends. FIG. 343(c) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t52) after the effect window has been displayed. In addition, at the timing when the display of the production window ends, a special reach production (such as the battle reach production mentioned above, all SP reach production except normal reach or a part of SP reach production except normal reach) The winning/losing notification effect (the effect suggesting whether it is a hit or a loss) has not yet been performed.

Next, the effect example 02 shown in FIG. 342(b) will be described. In effect pattern 13 shown in FIG. 341, "yes" is selected as "presence/absence of backlight when silhouette is displayed", and "non-silhouette display" is selected as "display mode of character, etc. when character is confirmed". is selected, "Extremely hot" is selected as the "character display when the character is displayed", and "raising the cane" is selected as the "movement of the character".

First, a predetermined timing (timing At t44.5), an effect window is displayed near the center, which is part of the display area. FIG. 343(a) shows a display example at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44) before the effect window is displayed.
It should be noted that the effect window may be configured to effect using the entire display area. In that case, the player cannot recognize the special ready-to-win effects and decoration patterns.
Also, FIG. 343(b) shows a display example during display of the effect window (for example, at a predetermined timing from timing t44.5 to timing t51). Note that no character is displayed in the effect window during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t45. It should be noted that the display contents up to this point are the same as in the case of example 01 of presentation.
Next, the details of the contents displayed in the rendering window will be described with reference to FIGS. 345(a) to 345(g).
First, in a period from timing t45 to timing t45.5, an image of a silhouetted fighter character is displayed in the presentation window. FIG. 345(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in a period from timing t45.5 to timing t46, an image of a silhouetted warrior character is displayed in the effect window. FIG. 345(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in a period from timing t46 to timing t46.5, an image of a silhouetted samurai character is displayed in the presentation window. FIG. 345(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in a period from timing t46.5 to timing t47, an image of a silhouetted witch character is displayed in the effect window. FIG. 345(d) shows the display state at this time.
As shown in the figure, a halo is displayed behind each character.
Next, in the period from timing t47 to timing t48.5, the images of the silhouetted characters are displayed in turn at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds) in the effect window. FIG. 345(e) shows a state (perceived visually by the player) in which all four silhouetted characters are superimposed.

Next, during a period from timing t48.5 to timing t49.5, a non-silhouette witch character painted in a plurality of colors is stopped and displayed. Also, a character image of "Gekiatsu" is displayed on the tip of the staff held by the character. FIG. 345(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t49.5 to timing t50, a dialogue image saying "Please wait!" is displayed on the left side of the wizard character. There is also a specific dynamic display in which the wizard character moves his left arm and changes to a wand-up pose. FIG. 345(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t50, the display of the witch character and lines ends, and at timing t50.5, the display of the effect window ends. FIG. 343(c) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t52) after the effect window has been displayed.

Here, the difference between the production example 01 and the production example 02 will be described.
As a first point of difference, the display mode of the character after the character is switched and displayed at high speed is different between the example 01 and the example 02 of the effect. In the case of production example 01, the silhouette is first displayed, and then gradually colored. On the other hand, in case of production example 02, the character is suddenly displayed in a colored state without being displayed in a silhouette form. That is, in production example 01, a recall display (stop display in silhouette display) is performed to remind which character has been selected among the characters that will be displayed in color later. In 02, recall display (stop display in silhouette display) is not performed.
In this way, in each production pattern, there is a production mode in which the character is first displayed in silhouette (with memory display), and a production mode in which the character is displayed in a non-silhouetted state suddenly colored (without memory display). may be executed. Also, depending on the mode of presentation (depending on whether or not there is a recall display), the degree of expectation for winning may differ. For example, there is a production mode in which the character is first displayed in a silhouette (with recollection display), and a rendition mode in which the character is displayed in a non-silhouetted state suddenly colored (without recollection display). expectations can be raised. In this case, the appearance rate of the latter may be lower than that of the former.
Alternatively, for example, a production mode in which the character is first displayed in silhouette (with recollection display) and a production mode in which the character is suddenly displayed in a non-silhouetted state in color (without recollection display). It is also possible to raise the expectations of the former. In this case, the appearance rate of the former may be lower than that of the latter.

Next, as a second point of difference between Rendering Example 01 and Rendering Example 02, in addition to the display mode of the character after the character is switched and displayed at high speed (whether or not there is a recall display), the character after being switched and displayed at high speed is displayed. The length of time (period) for high-speed switching display also differs depending on whether the display is silhouetted or non-silhouetted. Specifically, it is 1 second (period from timing t47 to timing t48) in production example 01, and 1.5 seconds (period from timing t47 to timing t48.5) in production example 02.
For this reason, the time (period) for switching and displaying characters at high speed is short, and the time (period) for switching and displaying characters at high speed ( Effect example 02, in which the character is stopped and displayed in a non-silhouette form, has a higher expectation for a win than in effect example 01, the high-speed switching display time ( The time (period) for switching and displaying the characters at high speed is shorter than in the production example 01 in which the display mode of the stopped character is displayed in a silhouette form (recall display). 3) Effect example 02, in which the time (period) during which the character is switched and displayed at high speed is longer than that in effect example 01, in which the character is stopped and displayed in a non-silhouette form, has a lower expectation for winning. can be made to think that high-speed switching should end early. Further, when the display mode of the stopped character is displayed in silhouette (recall display), the expectation for winning may be set to 100%. By doing so, the player is provided with a sense of security when the high-speed switching ends early, and the expectation is maintained even if the high-speed switching does not end early.

Thus, according to the "silhouette announcement effect", it is possible to determine whether or not there is a backlight display at the time of silhouette display, whether or not a magician character is displayed in the fourth silhouette display, and which character is finally displayed. Whether the displayed character is silhouetted (whether the high-speed switching display is long or not), the character displayed in silhouette is gradually colored and displayed as non-silhouette Display (a production display that changes from a state in which it is difficult to understand which character is displayed to a state in which it is clearly understood), whether or not a character image is attached to a character displayed in color, and whether a character image is attached In such a case, the player pays close attention to the progress of the production, focusing on which character image is attached, whether the character moves (whether or not dynamic display is performed), and the implied expectation. Depending on the degree, the expectation for the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern will be heightened.

An embodiment has been shown in which the "silhouette notice effect" is executed during a special reach effect, but after the "silhouette notice effect" ends (the display of the effect window ends), the battle between the characters ends at a predetermined timing. Then, a display is made that one of the characters wins. In addition, depending on the result of the battle, the decorative symbols are stop-displayed in either a mode of indicating a big win or a mode of indicating a loss.
In this embodiment, at timing t53, the battle result of the character is indicated, and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the battle result. The background image is changed from the background image dedicated to special reach to the background image for normal time, and at timing t55, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.
After timing t56, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, a big win game is started. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a loss and there is a hold, a new variable display is started. If the result of the special lottery is a loss and there is no hold, it will be in a standby state.

Audio may be output together with the display of the dialogue image. The entire dialogue may be output as voice, or only a part of the dialogue may be output as voice.
Alternatively, only voice output may be performed without displaying the dialogue image.

Note that the switching timing when the character images are switched and displayed at high speed is not limited to every 0.1 seconds, and may be, for example, every 0.33 to 0.2 seconds.

Depending on various effects (whether or not there is a backlight, the type of character that is finally stopped and displayed, the display mode of the character when the character is confirmed, the character display mode when the character is displayed, the presence or absence of the character's movement, etc.) , and the points that suggest the degree of expectation, it is better to increase the appearance rate as the degree of expectation is lower, and lower the appearance rate as the degree of expectation is higher.
For example, four characters, namely, a fighter character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character, are finally stopped and displayed. It is preferable to make the rate of occurrence decrease as the value increases.

"Silhouette announcement effect" is a special reach effect (such as the battle reach effect mentioned above, all SP reach effects excluding normal reach, or some SP reach effects of SP reach effects excluding normal reach). An example is shown in which (at timing t51 in the case of example 01 of presentation in FIG. 342) is finished before (effect suggesting whether it is a win or a loss) is performed, but after this timing t51 may continue to display the effect window. For example, the display of the effect window may be continued even when the timing for performing the win-lose notification effect has arrived, or the display of the effect window may be continued even when the win-lose notification effect is being performed. Alternatively, the display of the performance window may be continued even when the variable state of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (fixed stop period). When the timing for performing the win-lose notification effect arrives, or when the effect window is to continue to be displayed even when the win-lose notification effect is being performed, the effect window is set so that the win-lose notification effect can be visually recognized. It is desirable to display in a different manner, such as reducing the display of
For example, when the stop display result of the decorative symbols is a big win, the effect window may continue to be displayed during the big win game.
Further, when the stop display result of the decorative pattern is a loss, the effect window display may be continued if there is no suspension.
For example, a state in which a combination of decorative symbols "5", "6", and "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed (the display state shown in FIG. The display of the effect window may be continued until it is stopped by the combination of (display state shown in FIG. 346(b)).
In addition, it is preferable to lower the display priority of the effect window (including characters and letters; the same shall apply hereinafter) than the normal decoration pattern. Also, after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed for one second, the display priority of the effect window may be higher than that of the normal decorative symbols (display state shown in FIG. 346(c)).
In addition, if the start winning does not occur for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the stop display of the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern is interrupted, or a movie explaining the character) may be reproduced. Also, even in this situation, the effect window may be displayed continuously (display state shown in FIG. 346(d)). It should be noted that it is preferable to set the display priority of the demonstration moving image lower than the display priority of the effect window so that the effect window is displayed in front of the demonstration moving image. Alternatively, it is preferable to set the display priority of the demonstration moving image higher than the display priority of the effect window so that the effect window is displayed behind the demonstration moving image.
Note that the character may be statically displayed within the effect window. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 338(g), 339(g), and 340(g), it is preferable to continue displaying the state after the character has made a predetermined movement in a static manner.
Alternatively, the character may continue to be displayed dynamically. For example, in the case of the martial artist character shown in FIG. In addition, in the case of a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character, a display of continuously swinging the weapon they are holding may be performed.
It should be noted that the display of the effect window and the character will be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) after the start of the new variable display (when there is a hold or when the start winning occurs in the state where there is no hold) or after the stop display of the decorative pattern. It is better to end after the elapse.
In this way, by continuing the character display even after the end of the special ready-to-win effect, the player's heart can be softened.
It is more effective if the dynamic display of each character is comical. Also, as a dynamic display pattern, a dynamic display pattern that is not displayed during a special ready-to-win effect may be displayed.

For example, at timing t50 in production example 01, a dialog image prompting the user to operate the operating means may be displayed. For example, a character may prompt the user to operate the steering wheel 302 by displaying "I'm sorry, but I'm left-handed!"
By performing such a display, it is possible to prevent a player who has stopped shooting game balls during the special ready-to-win performance from quitting the game as it is, and it is possible to increase the operation rate of the game machine.
In addition, if there is a hold and there is a hold that will result in a big hit among them, the line "I'm sorry, but I'm hitting left right now!" , may indicate that a jackpot will occur.
In this case, first, after displaying the characters "It's a shame...", the characters "Left-handed!" and "Left-handed!" By displaying the characters , even if the special ready-to-win effect results in a failure, it contributes to suppressing the decrease in interest.

In production example 01, the fighter character is displayed in silhouette during the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5. On the other hand, in production example 01, the fighter character may be dynamically displayed during the period from timing t50 to timing t50.5.
An example has been shown in which the length of time during which the character is displayed in silhouette and the length of time during which the character is dynamically displayed are the same, but they may be different.
For example, the length of time that the character is displayed in silhouette may be longer than the length of time that the character is dynamically displayed. For example, the length of time during which the character is displayed in silhouette may be 2 seconds, and the length of time during which the character is dynamically displayed may be 0.5 seconds. It is possible to secure time for the player to fully recognize which character is displayed.
Alternatively, the length of time that the character is displayed in silhouette may be shorter than the length of time that the character is dynamically displayed. For example, the length of time during which the character is displayed in silhouette may be 0.5 seconds, and the length of time during which the character is dynamically displayed may be 2 seconds. In this case, even if the player does not seriously view the flow of the production in the middle, in the end it is necessary to have sufficient time to check the type of character, the presence or absence and type of character display, and the presence or absence of character movement. It can be reserved and can provide players with certain information about their expectations. In addition, it is possible to secure the time for the player to enjoy the action mode of the character.

It should be noted that the decorative member for effect described in the embodiment of the "hourglass holding change effect" may be employed in the "silhouette notice effect".
For example, the character moves during the period from timing t50 to timing t50.5 in production example 01 shown in FIG. There are cases where the characters are dynamically displayed and cases where they are not dynamically displayed. However, when the characters are dynamically displayed, the decorative members for effect may be moved.
Further, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the decorative member for presentation operates than when the decorative member for presentation does not operate.

It should be noted that the decorative member for presentation may always be operated when the character is dynamically displayed. This makes it possible to enhance the dynamic display of the character.
Conversely, when the character is displayed dynamically, the decorative member for presentation may be set so as not to operate. In this case, the player's attention can be focused on the dynamic display of the character.
Also, when the performance decorative member operates, it may always be a big win. Also, if the decorative member for presentation does not operate, it may always be a failure.

The period during which characters are displayed in silhouette (the period during which it is determined which colored character is displayed (for example, the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5 in production example 01)) , button operations (for example, operation of the operation button 401 or the attack button 3710) may be enabled. Also, a simulated image simulating an operation unit indicating that button operation is valid or an image indicating an operation mode (an image such as "PUSH") may be displayed. Then, in response to the button operation by the player, the displayed character may change to a character with a higher degree of expectation.
For example, in a state in which a fighter character is displayed in silhouette, a simulated image imitating the operation button 401 and an image "PUSH" indicating an operation mode are displayed in the display area, and the player presses the operation button 401. In this case, a warrior character (or a samurai character or a wizard character) may be displayed in silhouette instead of the fighter character.
In this case, the time during which the character is displayed as a silhouette should be longer than 0.5 seconds (for example, 3 seconds).
According to such a mode, the character with a low degree of expectation changes to a character with a high degree of expectation, so even when the character with a low degree of expectation is displayed, the expectation for the big win can be maintained.
It is also possible to provide a plurality of display modes of a simulated image simulating an operation unit and an image showing an operation mode, and to indicate the degree of expectation by different display modes. For example, a simulated image simulating an operation unit and an image showing an operation mode may be displayed in one of white, red, and gold, and the degree of expectation may increase in this order.

It should be noted that the decorative member for effect described in the embodiment of the "hourglass holding change effect" may be employed in the "silhouette notice effect".
For example, during the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5 of production example 01 shown in FIG. may
Further, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the decorative member for presentation operates than when the decorative member for presentation does not operate.

It should be noted that during the period in which the character is displayed in the form of a silhouette, the decorative member for effect may be always operated. This makes it possible to enhance the display of the silhouette character.
Conversely, when the character is displayed in a silhouette, the decorative member for presentation may be set so as not to operate. In this case, the player's attention can be focused on the display of the silhouetted character.
Also, when the performance decorative member operates, a big win may be guaranteed. Also, if the decorative member for presentation does not operate, it may always be a failure.

An example has been shown in which the silhouette display is performed four times in total, and the switching display is performed at high speed, and then a predetermined character is displayed. You may do so. In addition, even if various effects described above (such as the effects shown in the "character display when the character is displayed" column and the "character action" column in FIG. 341) are executed in correspondence with the character, good.
For example, after a silhouetted martial arts character is displayed for the first time, a non-silhouetted colored warrior character is displayed for the second time, and an expectation suggesting effect corresponding to the warrior character is performed. good too.
Alternatively, a silhouetted martial artist character is displayed for the first time, a silhouetted warrior character is displayed for the second time, a silhouetted samurai character is displayed for the third time, and a non-silhouetted colored magician character is displayed for the fourth time. may be displayed, and an expectation suggesting effect corresponding to the wizard character may be performed.

Note that the color of the rendering window (the color of the part displayed as the background of the character) may be made common regardless of the type of character.
Some players who are accustomed to the game know in advance the type of character to be displayed by the color of the effect window, so if they find out that a character with a low degree of expectation will be displayed, they will lose interest. However, you can prevent such situations from occurring.
Alternatively, the color of the effect window may be different depending on the type of character.
In this case, some players who are unfamiliar with the game can predict the type of character in advance from the color of the effect window, and if the displayed character matches the expected character, they have become accustomed to the effect. I can make you feel joy.

According to such a "silhouette announcement effect", it is possible to provide the player with a new interest.

As decorative members, a panel plate rear substrate 2420 (FIG. 130, etc.), a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 (FIG. 131, etc.), a tank character 3770 (FIG. 241, etc.), etc. are provided on the game board 5, and these decorative members are provided. has been shown as an example in which it may be used for production or the like, but a modified example applicable to the decorative member will be described below.

These decorative members can be moved between a standby position and a moving position. Therefore, these decorative members are sometimes called movable decorative members.
Note that the movement mode is not limited to linear movement between the standby position and the movement position, and various movement modes and operation modes can be adopted. For example, like the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown with reference to FIG. Also, the direction of the rotation shaft is not limited to the left-right direction, but may be the up-down direction or the front-rear direction. Alternatively, any direction can be used as the rotation axis. The movement of the movable decorative member is not limited to rotation, and may be configured to be rotatable.

Also, with reference to FIG. 241 and the like, an embodiment in which the tank accessory 3770 is movable in the vertical direction has been shown, but the direction in which the movable decorative member moves is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction. good. Alternatively, it may be movable along a straight line with an arbitrary inclination. For example, the decorative member may move diagonally from the upper left to the lower right of the display area, or the movable decorative member may move diagonally from the upper right to the lower left of the display area.

241 and the like, when the tank character 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position, the tank character 3770 approaches the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and overlaps the display area. However, when the movable decorative member moves along a straight line with an arbitrary inclination or rotates or moves, the movable decorative member moves from the standby position to the moving position. , the movable decorative member may change from a state in which it does not overlap the display area to a state in which the movable decorative member overlaps the display area and is visually recognized.

It should be noted that an operation mode in which the decorative member is vibrated at the standby position or the moving position may be adopted.
It should be noted that such an operation mode can be realized by using a known drive source and drive mechanism (pulse motor, link mechanism, etc.) (the same is true for realizing other operation modes described in this specification). be.).

Among these decorative members, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 and the tank accessory 3770 are provided with predetermined light sources (plural full-color LEDs) and can directly emit light in predetermined colors. Therefore, these decorative members are sometimes called luminous decorative members.
The panel board rear decorative member 2410 has a function of diffusely reflecting light of a predetermined color emitted from the panel board rear substrate 2420 provided behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410. The light emitted from the substrate 2420 finally passes through the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and is emitted toward the player side. As a result, the player can visually recognize the panel board rear decorative member 2410 illuminated and decorated with a predetermined color.
The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be integrated to function as a decorative member, a movable decorative member, a light-emitting decorative member, and the like.

As described above, the luminous decorative member can emit light in a specific color (white, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent, etc.) indicating the degree of expectation for a big win. Alternatively, without indicating the degree of expectation, it is possible to set the light emission mode in a predetermined color as a mere presentation. For example, during a demonstration in which a game is not being played, it can be made to emit light in a predetermined color.

Thus, the decorative member in this embodiment can have either one of the function of being movable (or moving) and the function of emitting light, or both. In addition, the decorative member has one of these functions (for example, moving from the standby position to the moving position, emitting light in a specific color or a predetermined color, etc.) or a combination of a plurality of functions (for example, moving from the standby position). After moving to a position, light is emitted in a specific color or a predetermined color, etc.) to suggest a predetermined game content (for example, the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern during the variation display will result in a big win), It can be used for various productions such as production to liven up a specific game period (for example, during a jackpot game state). Therefore, these decorative members are sometimes called staging decorative members.

A plurality of (two or more) decorative members may be provided. In this case, a plurality of decorative members having similar functions may be provided, or a plurality of decorative members having different functions may be provided. The term "function" as used herein refers to the manner in which the decorative member moves, the manner in which it emits light, and the like.
Also, one or more decorative members having a first function may be provided, and one or more decorative members having a second function different from the first function may be provided. Similarly, a decorative member having a third function different from the first and second functions, a decorative member having a fourth function different from the first to third functions, etc. (hereinafter the same) ) may be provided one or more.

For example, a vertically movable first tank character 3770 may be provided below the display area, and a second vertically movable tank character 3770 may be provided above the display area. A first panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and a first panel plate rear substrate 2420 which are movable in the horizontal direction are provided on the right side of the display area, and a second panel plate which is movable in the horizontal direction is provided on the left side of the display area. A rear decoration member 2410 and a second panel board rear substrate 2420 may be provided. As shown in FIG. 241, when these decorative members are at the standby position, they do not overlap the display area when viewed from the front. They may overlap when viewed from the front.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are decorative members representing a mountain range. A tank accessory 3770 is a decorative member imitating a tank. The shape of the decorative member is not limited to these examples. For example, it may simulate a predetermined image (such as a character) displayed in the display area. Alternatively, the decorative member and the predetermined image displayed in the display area may be integrated to represent one motif. Also, one motif may be represented by a plurality of decorative members.
It should be noted that the decorative member does not necessarily have to represent or imitate any object, and a decorative member that does not represent or imitate any object may be employed. This is because it is possible to exhibit the effect of presentation only by the movement mode and the light emission mode of the decorative member.

As in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 134, the decorative member is provided so as to be positioned between the panel plate 1110 and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the front-rear direction.
Note that the decorative member may be provided so as to be positioned between the glass plate 192 and the panel plate 1110 . In this case, a partition or the like may be provided to prevent the rolling game ball from colliding with the decorative member. may be less likely to occur.

Alternatively, the decorative member may be provided behind the game board side effect display device 1600 or the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . By reducing the size of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to arrange the decorative member at a position not overlapping the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, by moving the decorative member from the standby position to the moving position, the decorative member may be hidden behind the game-board-side effect display device 1600 and made invisible in front view to be visible in front view. In this case, the player sees the decoration member as if it appeared from the back side of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Although an example in which the decorative members are provided on the game board 5 has been shown, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 shown with reference to FIG. It is a light-emitting decorative member. In addition, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 are moved and rotated within a movement range that does not pose a danger to the player or the store clerk, and function as a movable decorative member. You may do so.
Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown with reference to FIG. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can emit light and move, and function as a light emitting decorative member and a movable decorative member.
It should be noted that the functions of various decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be appropriately applied to these decorative members provided on the door frame 3 to form an embodiment.

In some cases, instead of the name "decorative member", the names "decoration body", "decorating means", etc. may be used, but there is no substantial difference from the case of "decorating member". In addition, the various embodiments described above can be applied to the decorative body, the decorative means, and the like in the same manner as the decorative member.

In addition, when a game ball wins a winning opening (general winning opening 2001, first start opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, etc.), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. At this time, the game balls paid out are sometimes called prize balls. Also, the number of game balls to be paid out may be referred to as the number of prize balls.
The number of prize balls is appropriately set in the range of 1 to 15 according to the specifications and game characteristics of the gaming machine. The number of prize balls may be four, the number of prize balls in the second starting hole 2004 may be one, and the number of prize balls in the big winning hole 2005 may be ten.

As the number of prize balls in the general prize winning opening 2001, the number of prize balls in the first start opening 2002 and the number of prize balls in the second start opening 2004 increases, the number of game balls possessed by the player becomes less likely to decrease. Since the number of game balls is reduced, the gambling property can be reduced.
On the other hand, the fewer the number of prize balls in the general prize winning opening 2001 and the number of prize balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, the easier it is for the number of game balls possessed by the player to decrease, so that relatively large wins can be paid out. Since the number of game balls is increased, it is possible to make the specifications highly gambling.

Also, by increasing the number of prize balls in the big winning opening, the total number of game balls paid out during the big win can be increased.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of prize balls in the big winning opening, it is possible to reduce the total number of game balls to be paid out during the big win.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 135, etc., the second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the game area, and when the game ball can enter the second starting port 2004 when hitting to the right, By arranging the obstacle nail 1201 and the second starting port 2004 at a position such that the number of prize balls equal to or slightly less than the number of the game balls fired is paid out to the player, the game ball is hit rightward. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest is reduced due to the decrease in the number of games.
The number of prize balls of the second starting hole 2004 may be set to one, and almost all the game balls shot may win the second starting hole 2004.例文帳に追加Alternatively, the number of prize balls of the second starting hole 2004 may be set to two, and almost half of the game balls shot may win the second starting hole 2004.例文帳に追加
In this way, the number of winning balls of the winning openings (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, etc.) is determined by the probability of winning a winning opening, the probability of a big hit, and other various factors. It is determined comprehensively by considering.

An embodiment including a new effect "character current hold surprise effect" will be described below. This embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 346 and the like.
347 to 349 show various images displayed in the display area in this embodiment. 350 and 351 show time charts in this embodiment. 352 to 358 show display modes in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 of this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, the pending image is the current pending image, and the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas are the standby pending images (first to fourth standby pending images). standby hold image). The variable display of decorative patterns, the functions and effects of the reserved image, the reserved image, etc. are as described above with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125 and the like. 142 and 143 show that the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit in the low probability non-time saving state is 1/300, but the probability that it will be in the reach state is 30/300 (that is, 1 /10). With such a probability, when a ready-to-win state is reached, there is a probability of 29/30 that the player will lose the reach, and a probability of 1/30 will result in a big hit. According to such an embodiment, the player will have a feeling of anticipation for the big win when the ready-to-win state occurs.

FIG. 347 shows various images displayed in the display area.
FIG. 347(a) shows the normal background image A. FIG. The normal background image A is an image showing a state in which a highway is provided in the center of a meadow and trees are growing along the highway. In addition, the characters "highway stage" indicating the content of the background image are added to the upper left area of the image.
347(b) shows the normal background image B. FIG. The normal background image B is an image showing the appearance of a post town with two houses on the right side of the road. In addition, the characters "post station stage" indicating the contents of the background image are added to the upper left area of the image.
FIG. 347(c) shows the background image A during reach. The reach background image A is an image in which a plurality of winding lines are provided from the upper right to the lower left.
FIG. 347(d) shows the background image B during reach. The reach background image B is an image representing the state inside the limestone cave. A plurality of images of stalactites facing downward and stalactites facing upward are provided in the image.
FIG. 347(e) shows a monster character image. The monster character image occupies more than half of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . A monster character has eyes, a mouth, hands, and the like. FIGS. 347(f) and 347(g) show, in addition to the monster character image, a miasma image A and a miasma image B representing the miasma exhaled from the mouth of the monster character, respectively. As is clear from the figure, the miasma image B is larger than the miasma image A in size.
FIG. 347(h) shows the types of decorative designs displayed in the display area in this embodiment. There are seven kinds of decorative patterns, and numbers "1" to "7" are attached to each of them.

FIG. 348(a) shows the normal background image C. FIG. The background image C is usually an image representing a map of Japan. In addition, the background image C is normally an image displayed during right-handed hitting.
FIG. 348(b) shows an image having a higher display priority than the normal background image C and a lower display priority than the decorative symbol among the images displayed during right-handed hitting. Specifically, a frame having an opaque background portion is displayed at the upper left position of the display area as shown in the figure. Also displayed in this frame are the characters "Victory x 15", "Over 12,000 cars!!", and "Next destination: Owari". It should be noted that the numerical portion of "win x 15" indicates the number of consecutive wins, and in this case, indicates that the number of consecutive wins is 15 times. In addition, the numerical portion of "Over 12,000!!" indicates the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive chance. These numbers are displayed as numbers corresponding to the number of consecutive wins and the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive wins.
Also, the characters "Musha Shugyo RUSH" are displayed in the upper part of the display area.
In addition, at the lower left of the display area, a fighter character and a speech of the fighter character ("Musha training all over the country!") are displayed.
FIG. 348(c) shows an image having a higher display priority than the decorative symbols among the images displayed during right-handed hitting. Specifically, as shown in the figure, a rightward arrow image including characters "Right shot!" is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The player can recognize the game state (time-saving state) in which the game player hits to the right by visually recognizing the character of hitting to the right and the direction of the arrow.

349(a), 349(b), and 349(c) show lightning strike image A, lightning strike image B, and lightning strike image C. FIG.
A lightning strike image A represents a state in which lightning strikes occur from the upper right to the lower left of the display area.
A lightning strike image B represents a state in which lightning strikes occur from the upper right to the lower left of the display area and a state in which lightning strikes occur from the upper left to the lower right of the display area.
In the lightning strike image C, lightning strikes occur from the upper right to the lower left of the display area, lightning strikes occur from the upper left to the lower right of the display area, and lightning strikes occur from the top to the bottom of the display area. It represents
A lightning strike image may be displayed when a reach state is formed, but the details will be described later.

349(d), 349(e), and 349(f) show tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C. FIG.
Each tornado image contains three tornadoes. The positions where these three tornadoes are displayed correspond to the positions where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed. Tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C increase in size in this order.
A tornado image may be displayed when a reach condition is formed, but the details will be described later.

Effect patterns 1 to 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 350 and 351. FIG. Incidentally, the variable display time of the decorative symbols in each effect pattern is 10 seconds, and the fixed stop period of the decorative symbols is 0.5 seconds.
In addition, as decorative patterns, a total of seven types of decorative patterns with numbers 1 to 7 can be displayed. be.
Also, in FIG. 352 and the like, the case where the reserved number immediately before the start of variation of decorative symbols is 3 is taken as an example, but the reserved number may be any one of 1 to 4. In addition, the fighter character standby reserved image, which is a reserved image based on the result of the prefetching process, is displayed in the first reserved display area. This is the start of the dynamic display. Therefore, the fighter character standby image may be displayed in the second to fourth reservation display areas. In this case, at the same timing as when a new variable display is started, a display process is performed in which the fighter character standby reserved image moves leftward to the adjacent reserved display area.
Depending on the type of production pattern, the left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, and middle decorative pattern change from a state of high-speed fluctuation display to a state of low-speed fluctuation display, and a temporary stop from a state of low-speed fluctuation display. The timing to display, whether to generate reach state, whether to switch the background image, whether to hide the current hold image and standby hold image, the timing to hide, etc. are different. .

Effect pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 350(a) and 352. FIG.
At timing t0, variable display is started, and until timing t6, all decorative symbols are variably displayed at high speed. FIG. 352(a) shows the display mode in the display area before the start of the variable display. As shown in the drawing, a normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Also, as described above, the number of reserved items at this time is three. A martial artist character standby image is displayed in the first reserved display area. In addition, a normal circular standby image is displayed in white in the second suspension display area and the third suspension display area. Whether or not the fighter character standby image is to be displayed is determined based on the result of the prefetch processing.

FIG. 352(b) shows a display mode at a predetermined timing from timing t0 when the variable display is started to timing t6 when the left decorative pattern is displayed at low speed. During this period, all decorative patterns are displayed with high-speed fluctuation. Also, as the currently reserved image, the currently reserved image of the fighter character is displayed. Simultaneously with the start of the variable display, the image displayed as the martial arts character waiting pending image moves leftward within the display area and gradually increases in size until it stops at approximately the center in the horizontal direction and fights. It is displayed as a house character current pending image.

During the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the left decorative pattern is variably displayed at a low speed. FIG. 352(c) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is being variably displayed at a low speed.

At timing t7, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the right decorative pattern is variably displayed at a low speed. FIG. 352(d) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol with the number 2 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right decorative symbol is variably displayed at a low speed.

At timing t8, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, during the period from timing t8 to timing t9, the middle decorative pattern is variably displayed at a low speed. FIG. 352(e) shows a state in which the right decorative symbol with the number 2 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative symbol is variably displayed at a low speed. Here, the number attached to the left decorative design and the number attached to the right decorative design are the same number (number "2"), and the ready-to-win state has occurred.

At timing t9, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 352(f) shows a state in which the middle decorative pattern with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is "232", which indicates that the result of the variable display is reach loss.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stopped display continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the statically displayed decorative symbols is "232", which indicates that the result of the variable display is reach loss.
Also, at timing t10, the display of the current pending image of the fighter character ends. Alternatively, at timing t10, the end of the display of the fighter character currently pending image is started, and by timing t10.5 the display of the fighter character currently pending image is completed. , or a predetermined display image (for example, an image of smoke) may be displayed so as to overlap the current reserved image of the fighter character. It should be noted that the same mode can be adopted when the fighter character current pending image is hidden in production pattern 2 to production pattern 5 as well. FIG. 352(g) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display is started.

In the example of effect described above, an example was shown in which the variable display result stopped in a state of losing the reach, but there are cases where different numbers are attached to the left and right decorative symbols, and the reach state is not formed. Further, after the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped to form a ready-to-win state, at timing t9, there are cases where the middle decorative patterns having the same numbers as those given to the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped. . After that, at timing t10, all the numbers attached to the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are stop-displayed with the same number, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. In this case, a big win game state (strictly speaking, a big win opening effect suggesting the start of a big win game) occurs from timing t10.5.

In the present embodiment, when the decorative patterns are variably displayed at high speed, the decorative patterns are scrolled by 10 patterns per second and displayed.
Further, when the decorative patterns are variably displayed at a low speed, the decorative patterns are displayed by scrolling three patterns per second.
Further, when the decorative patterns are variably displayed at a very low speed (details of which will be described later in production pattern 2), the decorative patterns are displayed by scrolling one pattern per second.

In addition, when the decorative patterns are variably displayed at high speed, it becomes difficult or impossible to identify the types of decorative patterns (types of numbers attached to the decorative patterns).
On the other hand, when the decorative patterns are variably displayed at low speed or very low speed, it is possible to easily identify the types of decorative patterns (types of numbers attached to the decorative patterns).
In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed fluctuating at a low speed and when the decorative pattern is fluctuated and displayed at an ultra-low speed, the latter type of decorative pattern (the type of numbers attached to the decorative pattern) is more likely to be displayed. easily identifiable.

Next, effect pattern 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 350(b) and 353. FIG.
It should be noted that since the effect mode from timing t0 to time t6 is the same as effect pattern 1, for the sake of simplification, only the diagram will be described. FIG. 353(a) shows a display mode before the variable display is started, similar to FIG. 352(a). Also, FIG. 353(b) shows a state in which variable display is started and all decorative symbols are variably displayed at high speed, as in FIG. 352(b).

During the period from timing t6 to timing t7, left and right decorative patterns are variably displayed at a low speed. FIG. 353(c) shows the variable display mode of the decorative design during this period. As shown in the figure, decorative patterns with the same number as the left and right decorative patterns (specifically, the left decorative pattern with "7" and the right decorative pattern with "7", "1" is The left decorative pattern attached and the right decorative pattern attached with "1") are variably displayed in a manner of scrolling synchronously at the same speed.

At timing t7, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the left and right decorative patterns are synchronously and variably displayed, they are always displayed in the ready-to-win state at the time of temporary stop. In addition, at timing t7, the middle decorative pattern is variably displayed at a very low speed (one pattern is scrolled per second). Also, instead of the normal background image A, the reach background image A may be displayed. FIG. 353(d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 353(e) shows a state in which the middle decoration pattern with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is "232", which indicates that the result of the variable display is reach loss.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stopped display continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the stationary decorative symbols is "232", which indicates that the result of the variable display is reach loss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the current pending image of the fighter character ends. Further, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 353(f) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display is started.

In effect pattern 2, the ready-to-win state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 353, although the final result is reach-losing, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, at timing t9, the middle decorative symbols with the same numbers as the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the decorative symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed as the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.

Next, effect pattern 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 350(c) and 354. FIG. It should be noted that the mode of rendering other than the period from timing t7 to timing t9 is the same as that of rendering pattern 2, so for the sake of simplification, only the diagram will be described. FIG. 354(a) shows a display mode before the variable display is started, similar to FIG. 353(a). Also, FIG. 354(b) shows a state in which variable display is started and all decorative symbols are variably displayed at high speed, as in FIG. 353(b). Also, FIG. 354(c) shows a state in which the same decorative designs as left and right decorative designs are synchronously scrolled, similar to FIG. 353(c).

In production pattern 3, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t7, but the middle decorative symbols are also variably displayed at high speed during the period from timing t7 to timing t8. FIG. 354(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, during the period from timing t8 to timing t9, the medium decorative symbols are variably displayed at a low speed. FIG. 354(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 354(f) shows a state in which the middle decoration pattern with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stopped display continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the statically displayed decorative symbols is "232", which indicates that the result of the variable display is reach loss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the current pending image of the fighter character ends. Further, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 354(f) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display is started.

In effect pattern 3, the ready-to-win state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 354, although the final result is reach-losing, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, at timing t9, the middle decorative symbols with the same numbers as the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the decorative symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed as the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.

In the period from timing t7 to timing t10 in production pattern 2 and production pattern 3, instead of the normal background image A, an embodiment has been described in which the reach-time background image A is displayed. The normal background image A may be displayed as it is without changing the image. In addition, in this case, the degree of expectation when the reach-time background image A, which is not displayed when the decorative pattern does not change in place of the normal background image A, is displayed is It is preferable to set the degree of expectation higher than the degree of expectation when displayed as it is. As a result, it is possible to arouse the interest of the player as to whether or not the background image changes with the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and when the background image changes, it is possible to give great excitement to the player. status can be enhanced.

350(d), 351, and 355 to 357, the effect pattern 4 (“character current hold surprise effect”) will be described. It should be noted that the effect mode from timing t0 to timing t1 is the same as effect pattern 1, so for the sake of simplification, only the diagram will be described.
Also, FIG. 351(a) is a time chart showing the fluctuation state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the period from timing t8 to timing t10 when the result of the special lottery is a big win. Also, FIG. 351(b) is a time chart showing the fluctuation state of left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the period from timing t8 to timing t10 when the result of the special lottery is a loss.
FIG. 355(a) shows a display mode before the variable display is started, similar to FIG. 352(a). Also, FIG. 355(b) shows a state in which variable display is started and all decorative symbols are variably displayed at high speed in the same manner as in FIG. 352(b).

In production pattern 4, a monster character image is displayed at timing t1. In addition, a "!" mark (exclamation mark) is displayed at the upper left of the current pending image of the fighter character, indicating that the fighter character has noticed the appearance of the monster character.
FIG. 355(c) shows the display state at this time.

From timing t1 to timing t2, the current reserved image of the fighter character escapes leftward within the display area, moves out of the display area from the left end of the display area, and ends the display.
FIG. 355(d) shows a state in which the fighter character currently on hold image is running away. Also, FIG. 355(e) shows a state in which the display of the fighter character current pending image has ended.

At timing t4, the miasma image A is displayed in front of the monster character image. Also, at timing t6, a miasma image B is displayed in front of the monster character image.
FIG. 355(f) shows a state in which miasma image A is displayed at timing t4. FIG. 355(g) shows a state in which the miasma image B is displayed at timing t6.
Note that the miasma image may be displayed more dynamically. For example, a moving image in which a small amount of miasma is exhaled from the monster character's mouth and gradually increases over two seconds may be displayed in front of the monster character image.

During the period from timing t7 to timing t8, left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed at a low speed. Each pattern is scrolled and displayed at the same speed in synchronization. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed with the same number, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed with the number attached to the left and right decorative patterns. is displayed with a number preceding it in the variable display order of .
FIG. 355(h) shows a decoration pattern during low-speed variable display. A combination of "171" and "212" is shown in the drawing as a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns displayed in synchronism.

At timing t8, the decorative symbols scrolled synchronously are temporarily stopped and displayed. Fig. 356(a) and Fig. 357(a) show a state in which left, middle and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in combination with "212". The large miasma image makes the player perceive that the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right sides are stopped.

At timing t8.1, the master character image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area. Note that the master character is set to be the master of the fighter character. Also, at timing t8.1, the display priority of the decorative pattern and the monster character image is changed. Until timing t8.1, the display priority of the decoration pattern is higher than that of the monster character image, and after timing t8.1, the display priority of the monster character image is set higher than that of the decoration pattern. The display of the miasma image ends at the same time as the display priority is switched. Note that the display priority of the master character is set higher than that of the decoration pattern and the monster character image.
FIGS. 356(b) and 357(b) show a display state in which the master character image is displayed at timing t8.1 and the display priority of the monster character image and the decoration pattern is switched.

Next, at timing t8.5, the master character attacks (kicks) the monster character. The attack by the master character causes the monster character to rotate counterclockwise, tilt, and appear slightly smaller. This display continues until timing t9. FIGS. 356(c) and 357(c) show the display state at this time.

Figures 356(a) to 356(c) and Figures 357(a) to 357(c) show the same display modes, but Figures 351(a) and 356(d) to 356 351(b), 357(d) to 357(f), the special lottery results will be lost. A display mode in this case will be described.

A display mode when the result of the special lottery is a big win will be described with reference to FIGS.
At timing t9, the master character returns to the lower right position of the display area, and the monster character is displayed even smaller than when attacked by the master character. Incidentally, the monster character finally moves from the left side of the display area to the outside of the screen, is erased, and becomes invisible.
FIG. 356(d) shows the display state at timing t9.1.

As shown in FIG. 351(a), from timing t9.4 to timing t9.6, the middle decorative design moves by one design. As the middle decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "1" was temporarily stopped, but in this case, by moving by one pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "2" is temporarily stopped. will be displayed as Since the middle decorative pattern is shifted by one pattern and temporarily stopped, the numbers attached to the left, middle and right decorative patterns all become "2", suggesting to the player that the result of the special lottery is a big win ( period from timing t9.6 to timing t10).
FIG. 356(e) shows a display state in which the middle decorative pattern is moving.

During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. During this period, the numbers attached to the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are all "2", indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery was a big win.
FIG. 356(f) shows a state in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

A display mode when the result of the special lottery is a loss will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that, as shown in FIG. 351(b), the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are kept temporarily stopped during the period from timing t8 to timing t10.
At timing t9, the monster character returns to its original position and size and is displayed. Also, the master character is flipped by the monster character and rotates toward the lower right position of the display area. The master character finally moves from the bottom right of the display area to the outside of the screen and is erased and becomes invisible.
FIG. 357(d) shows the display state at timing t9.1.

At timing t9.5, the display priority of the decorative pattern becomes higher than the display priority of the monster character image. As a result, the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the monster character image, and the player clearly recognizes that the numbers attached to the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a combination of "212". This suggests to the player that the result of the special lottery is a loss.
FIG. 357(e) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the monster character image.

During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. During this period, the numbers attached to the left, middle, and right decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed are a combination of "212", indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery was a loss.
FIG. 357(f) shows a state in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

In production pattern 4, the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the monster character image until the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and at the timing (timing t8) when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the monster character is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. displaying an image. In this case, the impact of displaying the monster character image can be further enhanced. On the other hand, the visibility of the decorative pattern is hindered. Therefore, for example, without changing the display priority, the transparency of the decorative pattern is changed from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state, and the monster character displayed on the rear side through the decorative pattern displayed on the front side. The image may be made visible. Alternatively, without changing the display priority, only the numbers attached to the decorative pattern are displayed in an opaque manner, and the rectangular portion that constitutes the decorative pattern, which is the other area, is completely transparent. The visibility of the monster character image may be enhanced.

Next, production pattern 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 350(e) and 358. FIG. It should be noted that since the effect mode from timing t0 to time t5 is the same as effect pattern 3, only the drawing will be described for the sake of simplicity. FIG. 358(a) shows a display mode before the variable display is started, similar to FIG. 354(a). Also, FIG. 358(b) shows a state in which variable display is started and all decorative symbols are variably displayed at high speed, as in FIG. 354(b).

During the period from timing t5 to timing t6, left and right decorative patterns are variably displayed at a low speed. FIG. 358(c) shows the variable display mode of the decorative design during this period. As shown in the figure, decorative patterns with the same number as the left and right decorative patterns (specifically, the left decorative pattern with "7" and the right decorative pattern with "7", "1" is The left decorative pattern attached and the right decorative pattern attached with "1") are variably displayed in a manner of scrolling synchronously at the same speed.

At timing t6, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the left and right decorative patterns are synchronously and variably displayed, they are always displayed in the ready-to-win state at the time of temporary stop. The middle decorative pattern is displayed fluctuating at high speed. Also, instead of the normal background image A, a reach background image B is displayed. Also, the current pending image and the standby pending image are in a non-display state. FIG. 358(d) shows the display state at this time.

At the timing t7, the middle decorative pattern is changed and displayed at a very low speed (one pattern is scrolled per second). FIG. 358(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 358(f) shows a state in which the middle decorative pattern with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stopped display continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the stationary decorative symbols is "232", which indicates that the result of the variable display is reach loss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the standby pending image is resumed. Further, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 358(g) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display is started.

In effect pattern 5, the ready-to-win state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 358, although the final result is reach-losing, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, at timing t9, the middle decorative symbols with the same numbers as the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the decorative patterns with the same numbers are displayed as the left, middle, and right decorative patterns.

In effect pattern 5, the ready-to-win background image B is displayed at the same time as the ready-to-win state is formed, and the current pending image and standby pending image are not displayed. In addition, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a state of being varied at high speed, and does not immediately change to a state of being varied at low speed. Therefore, the visibility of the ready-to-reach background image B that has just been displayed can be sufficiently ensured.

According to the "character current pending surprise effect" executed in the effect pattern 4, the character current pending image is surprised by the appearance of the monster character, moves out of the display area, and disappears from the display area. It is possible to provide the player with a new interest not found in the original. On the other hand, since the reserved images in the first to fourth reserved display areas are not displayed, it is not difficult to confirm the number of reserved images.
In addition, the current pending image not only has the function of simply indicating the degree of expectation during the variable display, but also the current pending image displayed in the character mode is displayed so as to escape from other characters (monster characters). Thus, the current pending image can be used as part of the effect display using the character.
In addition, since the monster character is displayed large in front of the normal background image A, it is not necessary to switch the background image, so the display process can be simplified.

In effect pattern 4, the normal background image is not changed to the background image for reach (a part of the normal background image is recognizable), but the size of the monster character image is changed according to the effect display device on the game board side. By setting the size to occupy most of the 1600 display area (at least 1/2 the size), there is no need to change the background image, and the cost and storage area for creating a dedicated background image can be reduced. , it is possible to reduce the cost of manufacturing gaming machines.

As for the selection rate of each of the performance patterns 1 to 5, which are selected by the lottery as to whether or not it is a big hit, the performance pattern 1 is likely to be selected at the highest rate, followed by the performance pattern 2. easy to be Effect pattern 3 is less likely to be selected than effect patterns 1 and 2, but more likely to be selected than effect patterns 4 and 5. - 特許庁The effect pattern 4 may be made more likely to be selected than the effect pattern 5, may be made less likely to be selected than the effect pattern 5, or may be the same. The higher the selection rate, the lower the degree of expectation for a big hit. The selection rate is synonymous with appearance rate (probability of being displayed).

In addition, in production pattern 4, the monster character image is displayed in the area where the current reserved image of the fighter character was displayed, so that the impact of the monster character being displayed can be increased, and the reach state can be increased. can be raised.

An embodiment of the demonstration period has been described with reference to FIG. displayed in

Comparing production pattern 3 and production pattern 4, characters are not displayed in production pattern 3, so whether or not the background image is changed clearly tells the player whether the degree of expectation is high or not. be able to.
On the other hand, in the case of effect pattern 4, the characters (monster character and master character) are displayed in a form that occupies most of the display area. A performance in which a character and a master character fight) can be executed without changing the background image. In addition, since the background image is normally displayed as it is, there is no need to create a dedicated background image for reach, and the cost associated with image development and the storage capacity required for image storage can be reduced.

It is preferable to increase the degree of expectation for the case where the production pattern 3 is executed and the normal background image is displayed and the ready-to-win state occurs, and the case where the production pattern 4 is executed.
In addition, it is preferable to increase the degree of expectation for the latter between the case where the effect pattern 4 is executed and the case where the ready-to-win state is reached in the state where the effect pattern 3 is executed and the background image at the time of ready-to-win is displayed.

Also, in production pattern 3, during the time when the background image is displayed and the decorative pattern forms the ready state (3 seconds from timing t7 to timing t10), in production pattern 4, the decorative pattern is in the ready state. It is longer than the forming time (two seconds from timing t8 to timing t10). Further, as described above, when the production pattern 4 is executed and when the ready-to-win state is reached in the state where the production pattern 3 is executed and the background image is displayed in the ready-to-win state, it is preferable to increase the degree of expectation for the latter.
By lengthening the execution time of the performance with a high degree of expectation for the big win in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of expectation for the big win for a long time.

Further, when the decorative symbols in the production pattern 3 and the decorative symbols in the production pattern 4 are compared, the left and right decorative symbols show the ready-to-win state in both production patterns. In production pattern 3, the middle decorative pattern (decorative pattern that does not indicate the reach state) stops at which number while the left and right decorative patterns indicate the reach state. On the other hand, in production pattern 4, the monster character is displayed in a short time (timing t1) from the start of the fluctuation, and the monster character is defeated, as described above. It is a production that suggests the result of winning or losing depending on whether it is. In production pattern 4, the left and right decorative patterns show the ready-to-reach state, and the inner decorative patterns also show decorative patterns with numbers different from the left and right decorative patterns, and all the decorative patterns shake and fluctuate (temporary stop display). It is carried out. In this way, by swinging and fluctuating all the decorative patterns and displaying combinations of decorative patterns that are not big hits, the player can pay attention not to the decorative patterns but to the fight against the monster character. Hypothetically, if the decorative pattern of the production pattern 4 is displayed like the decorative pattern of the production pattern 3 (in the case of the production showing at which number the middle decorative pattern stops), should we pay attention to the decorative pattern, or the monster character? The player is puzzled as to whether or not he should pay attention to the fight against .
Further, in production pattern 4, when the battle with the monster character is defeated (when the result of winning or losing suggests that the game is lost), displaying a combination of losing symbols after the battle with the monster character is defeated, There is a possibility that the player will be appealed to the fact that he/she has missed the game multiple times, and that the player's feelings may be upset. In addition, displaying a combination of unsuccessful patterns after losing a battle with a monster character takes time, but by suppressing the time, the game machine has good variation efficiency, which in turn increases sales. lead to improvement.

Effect pattern 4 is a effect pattern that can be executed only in the variable display in which the character's current pending image is displayed. That is, the effect pattern 4 is not executed in the variable display in which the character current pending image is not displayed.
When it is decided to display the character standby reserved image based on the look-ahead processing, the character standby reserved image is displayed as the character current reserved image variable display. may be selected.
Alternatively, when the effect pattern 4 is selected as the effect pattern to be executed at the start of the variable display, the white circular current pending image may be changed to the character current pending image.

Further, depending on the display mode of the character standby reserved image and the character current reserved image, the fluctuation result of the variable display corresponding to the character standby reserved image and the character current reserved image may suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. For example, three colors of white, red, and gold may be provided for the bodice worn by the martial artist character, and expectations may be higher in the order of white, red, and gold.
Also, as described above, even the circular current pending image and standby pending image can be white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. Also, the degree of expectation of the variable display corresponding to the current pending image and the standby pending image may be increased in order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow.
As the characters displayed as the character standby pending image and the character current pending image, the fighter character was mentioned as an example, but other characters may be employed. For example, characters such as a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character shown with reference to FIGS. 338 to 340 may be displayed as a character standby pending image or a character current pending image. Also, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type of character. For example, the degree of expectation may increase in the order of martial arts character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character.
The degree of expectation is indicated by the same colors (white, red, and gold) in the circular current pending image, standby pending image, character standby pending image, and character current pending image, but in this case, It is preferable that the expectation level is higher for the character standby pending image and the character current pending image. For example, between a red character current pending image and a red circular current pending image, it is preferable to increase the expectation of the former.
In production pattern 4, the display of the current pending image ends immediately after the start of the fluctuation, but the display mode of the current pending image (for example, white, red, and gold three colors) If the degree of expectation is indicated In this case, the player needs to keep an eye on which level of expectation the player is expecting, and it is possible to make the game tense immediately after the start of the variable display.

It should be noted that the circular current pending image or the standby pending image may be changed to the character standby pending image or the character current pending image at a predetermined timing. For example, at the start of a new variable display, a circular standby pending image may change to a character standby pending image.
Similarly, a circular current pending image may change to a character current pending image. In this case, it is necessary to change the circular current pending image to the character current pending image before one second elapses from the start of the variable display (that is, before the monster character image is displayed).
When changing the circular standby reserved image or the circular current reserved image to the character standby reserved image or the character current reserved image, it is preferable to change to the same color or a color with a higher degree of expectation. For example, a white circular standby pending image may be changed to a white character standby pending image. Alternatively, the red circular current pending image may be changed to a gold character current pending image.

In the case of effect pattern 4, it is necessary to display some character current pending image as the current pending image at the timing when the monster character image is displayed. In this case, a current pending image (for example, a circular pending image) other than the character current pending image may be displayed as the current pending image.

In the embodiments (effect pattern 3, effect pattern 5) shown with reference to FIGS. 349, 359 to 361 for a modified embodiment in which the symbol forming the reach state during the temporary stop is changed from the normal symbol to the probability variable symbol.

FIG. 359(a) is a time chart (timing t5.0 to timing t8.0) in an embodiment in which the pattern forming the ready-to-win state is changed from the normal pattern to the variable probability pattern in the production pattern 3. . Also, FIG. 360 shows a display example of a predetermined timing in this time chart.
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t7.0 to timing t7.2, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the middle decorative symbols are variably displayed at high speed. FIG. 360(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t7.2, a lightning strike image is displayed in the display area. The type of lightning strike image to be displayed is one of lightning image A to lightning image C. FIG. At the same time when the thunderbolt image is displayed, the decorative pattern is hidden. This display state continues until timing t7.8.
FIG. 360(b) shows a display state in which the lightning strike image A is displayed. FIG. 360(c) shows a display state in which the lightning strike image B is displayed. FIG. 360(d) shows a display state in which the lightning strike image C is displayed.

At timing t7.8, the display of any one of the lightning strike images A to C ends, and the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-reach state by normal symbols or probability variable symbols, and the middle decorative symbols are displayed fluctuating at high speed. state.
FIG. 360(e) shows a display state in which normal symbols are displayed again as symbols forming a ready-to-win state. FIG. 360(f) shows a display state in which probability variation symbols are displayed instead of normal symbols as symbols forming a ready-to-win state.

At timing t7.2, one of the lightning strike images A to C is displayed, and depending on the type of the displayed lightning strike image, it suggests the degree of expectation that the symbol forming the reach state will change from the normal symbol to the probability variable symbol. do. Specifically, the degree of expectation that the normal symbol changes to the probability variable symbol is set in the order of the lightning image A, the lightning image B, and the lightning image C.
For example, when the lightning strike image A is displayed, the expectation that the normal symbol changes to the probability variable symbol is 10%, and when the lightning image B is displayed, the normal symbol is changed to the probability variable symbol. The degree of expectation that the normal symbol changes to the probability variation symbol when C is displayed may be 50%. Further, the degree of expectation for the big win may be increased in the order of the lightning strike image A, the lightning strike image B, and the lightning strike image C.

FIG. 359(b) is a time chart (timing t5.0 to timing t8.0) in an embodiment in which the design forming the ready-to-win state is changed from the normal design to the variable probability design in production pattern 5. . Also, FIG. 361 shows a display example of a predetermined timing in this time chart.
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t6.0 to timing t6.2, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the middle decorative symbols are variably displayed at high speed. FIG. 361(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t6.2, a tornado image is displayed in the display area. The type of tornado image displayed is one of tornado image A to tornado image C. FIG. At the same time when the tornado image is displayed, the decorative pattern is hidden. This display state continues until timing t6.8.
FIG. 361(b) shows a display state in which a tornado image A is displayed. FIG. 361(c) shows a display state in which a tornado image B is displayed. FIG. 361(d) shows a display state in which a tornado image C is displayed.

At timing t6.8, the display of any one of the tornado images A to C ends, and the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state by the normal symbols or the probability variable symbols, and the middle decorative symbols are displayed fluctuating at high speed. state.
FIG. 361(e) shows a display state in which normal symbols are displayed again as symbols forming a ready-to-win state. FIG. 361(f) shows a display state in which probability variation symbols are displayed instead of normal symbols as symbols forming a ready-to-win state.

At timing t6.2, one of the tornado images A to C is displayed, and depending on the type of tornado image displayed, it suggests the degree of expectation that the pattern forming the reach state will change from the normal pattern to the probability variable pattern. do. Specifically, the degree of expectation that the normal symbol changes to the definite variable symbol is set in the order of the tornado image A, the tornado image B, and the tornado image C.
For example, when the tornado image A is displayed, the normal pattern changes to the probability variation pattern by 10%, and when the tornado image B is displayed, the normal pattern changes to the probability variation pattern by 20%, and the tornado image. The degree of expectation that the normal symbol changes to the probability variation symbol when C is displayed may be 50%. Further, the degree of expectation for the big win may be increased in the order of the tornado image A, the tornado image B, and the tornado image C.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 359 to 361, even when the ready-to-win state is reached with the normal symbols, the effect of displaying a lightning strike image or a tornado image is executed to change to the ready-to-reach state with the variable probability symbols. In particular, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.
In addition, in the embodiment shown below, the modified example shown with reference to FIGS. That is, when the effect pattern 3 is executed, if the lightning strike image is not displayed, one of the lightning strike images A to C may be displayed.
Similarly, the modification shown in FIGS. 359(b) and 361 may be regarded as a part of production pattern 5 to describe the embodiment. That is, when effect pattern 5 is executed, if no tornado image is displayed, one of the tornado images may be displayed.

In addition, when the ready-to-win state is formed by the variable probability symbols, it is preferable not to execute the effect of displaying the thunderbolt image or the tornado image. Alternatively, an effect of displaying a thunderbolt image or a tornado image may be executed so that it can be changed to a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") with a high expectation of a big hit among the variable probability symbols.

359(a) and 360, an embodiment in which production pattern 3 is modified is shown. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is not displayed during the period in which the lightning strike image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t7.2 to timing t7.8).
On the other hand, in production pattern 4, during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), the decoration pattern may be hidden similarly.
In this way, in a state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win state or a ready-to-lose state, the decorative pattern is hidden for a predetermined period of time so that the player cannot recognize the decorative pattern. Whether or not the decorative pattern that forms the state is promoted from the normal pattern to the probability variation pattern, or whether the number attached to the decorative pattern that forms the ready-to-win state is promoted to a number with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Also, the result of the battle between the characters (whether or not the middle decorative pattern moves to indicate the occurrence of a big win) will tantalize the player for a while, but after the lapse of a predetermined time. Afterwards, the display of the decorative pattern is resumed, and a predetermined result (whether promotion or not, whether or not a big win is indicated) is displayed, so the result is advantageous to the player by the amount of teasing. It is possible to increase the joy felt by the player when it becomes.

Note that during the period (0.6 seconds from timing t7.2 to timing t7.8) in which the thunderbolt image is displayed in the embodiment in which production pattern 3 is modified, the master character in production pattern 4 attacks the monster character. In the period (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), an embodiment has been shown in which the decoration pattern is not displayed. The length of the period for performing (that is, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden) can be set as appropriate.
For example, the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be longer than the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed. For example, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 2 seconds. Since the performance pattern 4 has a higher expectation for winning than the performance pattern 3, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden in the performance pattern 4 (the period during which the monster character is attacked) is set to the performance pattern 3. , the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden (the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed) is longer than the length of the period (the period in which the highly anticipated production pattern is longer), which may change It can give a long-lasting feeling of exhilaration.
Also, the length of the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed and the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be set to the same length (for example, one second for both). By doing so, even in the production pattern 3, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than in the production pattern 4, it is possible to expect a change in the pattern (whether the production pattern 3 or the production pattern 4). (because the time between changes is the same).
Also, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be longer than the period during which the master character attacks the monster character. For example, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be 2 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 0.5 seconds. A performance pattern 4 having a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than a performance pattern 3 can give unexpectedness by shortening the time until the decorative pattern is redisplayed, and the expectation is rapidly increased when the pattern is changed. can be given.

When the left and right decorative patterns are displayed again after the display of the thunderbolt image in production pattern 3 is completed, the same decorative patterns as before the decorative patterns are hidden or the decorative patterns with different numbers are displayed. However, it is preferable that the ratio of displaying the same decorative patterns is set higher than that of displaying the decorative patterns with different numbers.
Also, when the same decorative pattern is displayed again, even if it is not completely the same before and after the display, for example, a decorative pattern consisting of numbers and characters will only be numbers when displayed again. Or, when a decorative pattern composed of numbers and dynamic characters is redisplayed, it is composed of numbers and static characters, the size of the decorative pattern is different, or the font of the decorative pattern is different. Thus, even if the numbers are the same but the appearances are different, they may be treated as the same (similar) decorative pattern.
In addition, in production pattern 4, all decorative patterns have a higher display priority than the master character and the monster character, and when the master character and the monster character are fighting (timings t8.1 to t9.0), The display mode may be such that all the decorative patterns are visible. In that case, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, all the visible decorative patterns are a combination of symbols corresponding to the loss, so they are displayed as they are, but if the result of the lottery is a big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 356(e), the middle decorative pattern may be changed again to display decorative patterns with the same numbers as the left and right decorative patterns, or all the decorative patterns may be changed again. It is good, but when all the decorative patterns are changed again, be sure to double the different decorative patterns (for example, in FIG. The symbol combination corresponding to ) should be displayed. For example, instead of "2" doublets, "3" or "7" doublets may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation for the probability variation.

During the period (timing t7 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped, the display mode of the standby pending image may be changed based on the prefetching process. For example, the white circular pending image displayed in the first pending display area may be changed to a red circular pending image.
On the other hand, in production pattern 4, since the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in production pattern 3, during the period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped, the display mode of the standby pending image is changed. You may leave it unchanged. It should be noted that from timing t8 to timing t9, although the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of symbols corresponding to a failure, at timing t9, the win-or-lose branch effect (a effect indicating whether the master character wins or loses) is started. , The decorative pattern from timing t8 to timing t9 is synonymous with indicating the ready-to-win mode.
In this way, in effect pattern 3, by making it so that the display mode of the standby pending image may change, not only the result of the variable display in the ready-to-reach state, but also the standby pending image It is also possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of a big hit.
On the other hand, in the production pattern 4, the player can concentrate on the result of the battle between the characters being displayed by not changing the display mode of the standby pending image.

During the period (from timing t0 to timing t7) until the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped, the display mode of the current pending image may be changed. For example, a white circular current pending image may be changed to a red circular current pending image. Alternatively, the white circular current pending image may be changed to a current pending image of a fighter character wearing a white bodice. Alternatively, the current pending image of the fighter character wearing the white bodice may be changed to the current pending image of the fighter character wearing the red bodice.
During the period (from timing t0 to timing t1) until the monster character image of production pattern 4 is displayed, the display mode of the current pending image may be changed. For example, a white circular current pending image may be changed to a current pending image of a fighter character wearing a white bodice. Alternatively, the current pending image of the fighter character wearing the white bodice may be changed to the current pending image of the fighter character wearing the red bodice. Also, the current pending image of the fighter character wearing the white bodice is displayed at timing t1, and changes from white to the current pending image of the fighter character wearing the red bodice by timing t2. You may do so. In such a case, the display mode of the current pending image changes while the fighter character is moving (dynamic display). When changing the display mode of the pending image, a predetermined display image may be displayed for the current pending image. It should be noted that this predetermined display image may also be moved in the same manner as the character.
In the period until the left and right decorative patterns of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t0 to timing t7) and the period until the left, middle, and right decorative patterns of production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t0 to timing t8) , the display mode of the standby hold image may be changed.
By changing the display mode of the current pending image and the standby pending image at a predetermined timing in this way, it is possible to increase expectations in advance for the occurrence of the ready-to-win state and for the variation result.

It is preferable that the rate of selection of the variation pattern for executing the effect pattern 3 is higher than the rate of selection of the variation pattern for executing the effect pattern 4. - 特許庁
Since the middle decorative pattern is variably displayed at high speed for a long period of time, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and to make the player feel an uplifting feeling that "Isn't there a special performance being performed?" can.
Conversely, the rate at which the variation pattern for executing effect pattern 3 is selected may be lower than the rate at which the variation pattern for executing effect pattern 4 is selected.

A period until the left and right decorative patterns of the production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped when the ratio of selecting the variation pattern for executing the production pattern 3 is set higher than the ratio of selecting the variation pattern for executing the production pattern 4 ( Timing t0 to timing t7), the ratio of changing the display mode of the current pending image (the ratio here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute production pattern 3) is the production In the period until the monster character image of pattern 4 is displayed (timing t0 to timing t1), the ratio of changing the display mode of the current pending image (the ratio here is selected to execute production pattern 4 the denominator of all the variability displayed). By doing so, it is possible for the player to expect that the effect pattern 4 will be executed when the display mode of the current pending image changes during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1.
Further, when the rate of selection of the variation pattern for executing the production pattern 3 is set higher than the rate of selection of the variation pattern for executing the production pattern 4, the left and right decorative patterns of the production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped. In the period (timing t0 to timing t7), the ratio of changing the display mode of the current pending image (the ratio here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 3 is selected) is , In the period until the monster character image of production pattern 4 is displayed (timing t0 to timing t1), the ratio of changing the display mode of the current pending image (the ratio here means that production pattern 4 is executed is the denominator of all of the selected variability representations). By doing so, the player can expect that the effect pattern 4 will be executed when the display mode of the current pending image does not change during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1.

Either the period during which the left and right decorative patterns of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10) or the period during which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns of production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10). Since it is before and after the timing of the branching of the display indicating the win or loss, it is necessary for the player to concentrate on the win or loss. Suppose a period during which the left and right decorative patterns of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10) and a period during which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns of production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10). By giving the player the misunderstanding that if the position of the standby pending image is changed in , the standby pending image may change, or a predetermined effect may occur near the standby pending image, Although the problem of being unable to concentrate occurs, the period (timing t7 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative patterns of the production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped and the left, middle and right decorative patterns of the production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped. By making the position where the standby holding image is displayed the same in any period (timing t8 to timing t10), it is possible to solve such a problem and make the player concentrate on winning or losing. can.

In the modified example of effect pattern 3 shown with reference to FIGS. 359(a) and 360, which of the lightning strike images A to C is displayed (the number of lightning strikes is one to The degree of expectation (and the degree of expectation of a big hit in the effect pattern 3) that the normal symbols constituting the ready-to-win state are promoted to the probability variable symbols are shown depending on which one of the three.
On the other hand, in production pattern 4, the master character kicks with only one leg as shown in FIGS. 356(c) and 357(c). You can let it be. Also, in this case, the degree of expectation for winning against the monster character (that is, the degree of expectation for a big win) may be higher than in the case of kicking with only one leg.
In this way, by making it possible to execute effects with different expectations while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win. In addition, in the modified example of production pattern 3, the degree of expectation (and the production pattern) that the normal symbols constituting the ready-to-win state are promoted to the probability variable symbols depends not only on whether or not the lightning image is displayed, but also on which lightning image is displayed. 3) changes, the player wishes to display a lightning strike image and also wishes to display a lightning strike image with a high degree of expectation. Since the performance pattern 4 has a higher degree of expectation for winning than the performance pattern 3, when a plurality of expectation degree-increasing performances can be displayed in the performance pattern 4, the expectation degree is increased if the expectation degree-increasing performance with the low expectation degree is displayed. In order to prevent the interest from decreasing even though the performance pattern 4 with a high level of performance is displayed, the performance pattern 4 is provided with one expectation level increasing performance.

In addition, when the thunderbolt image C is displayed, the normal symbol may always be changed to the probability variable symbol. Alternatively, when the thunderbolt image C is displayed, the normal symbol may or may not change to the probability variable symbol, but the variable display may always result in a big hit. Alternatively, when the thunderbolt image C is displayed, it may always change from the normal pattern to the probability variable pattern, and the result of the variable display may always be the result of the big hit.
Further, when the master character hits the monster character with both feet with a drop kick with both feet, the master character may always win against the monster character (that is, the result of the variable display is always the result of a big win).

In both production pattern 3 and production pattern 4, the period during which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed at high speed (the period during which it is not possible to determine whether it is production pattern 3 or production pattern 4 (period from timing t0 to timing t1) )), the same expectation level suggesting effect that suggests the level of expectation for a big win may be made executable. For example, as the expectation suggesting effect, a samurai character image may appear from the right side of the display area and disappear from the left side of the display area behind the decorative pattern for one second. Also, it is preferable that the degree of expectation for the big win when the samurai character image is displayed is higher than the degree of expectation for the big win when the samurai character image is not displayed.
By making it possible to execute the same expectation degree suggesting performance suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win regardless of whether it is the performance pattern 3 or the performance pattern 4, the big win is expected when the expectation degree suggesting performance is displayed. It is possible to make the player have a feeling of anticipation for the appearance of a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation.

It should be noted that the ratio of execution of the expectation-suggestion effect in production pattern 3 (the ratio here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of production pattern 3 is selected) is the same as in production pattern 4. It may be higher than the rate at which the expectation degree suggesting effect is executed (the rate referred to here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 4 is selected). By doing so, the production pattern 3 appears more often than the production pattern 4 when the expectation level suggesting production is executed, but the appearance ratio of the production pattern 3 is higher than that of the production pattern 4. , it is possible to prevent early arrival of boredom by frequently executing the expectation degree suggesting effect.
Alternatively, the ratio of execution of the expectation-suggestion effect in production pattern 3 (the ratio here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of production pattern 3 is selected) is the same as in production pattern 4 It may be lower than the rate at which the expectation degree suggesting effect is executed (the rate referred to here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 4 is selected). By doing so, the appearance of the performance pattern 4 can be expected when the expectation degree suggesting performance is executed, so that the excitement can be enhanced only by executing the expectation degree suggesting performance.

350 and the like, it has been shown that production pattern 1 to production pattern 5 can be executed, but after any one of production patterns 1 to 5 is executed, production pattern 1 to production pattern Any one of the pattern 5 effect patterns may be made executable. Incidentally, since the variable display time of the effect pattern 1 to the effect pattern 5 is 10 seconds, the variable display time is 20 seconds when the effect pattern can be continuously executed. In addition, when it is made possible to continuously execute the effect patterns in this way, there are 25 combinations.
In addition, when the effect pattern is executed continuously, at the end of the first effect pattern (period of timing t9 to timing t10), all the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of reach loss, but the second effect pattern is displayed. As soon as the game is started, all decorative patterns are variably displayed at a high speed, so even if the result of failure is shown when the first performance pattern is executed, the second performance pattern is started and the result is a big win. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that it may be possible.

Note that, when effect pattern 4 is executed, the current pending image is in a non-display state, so after effect pattern 4 is executed, other effect patterns may not be executed. Alternatively, the display of the current pending image may be resumed at timing t10, and after the effect pattern 4 is executed, another effect pattern may be executed.
Moreover, after executing the production pattern 3, the production pattern 4 may be executed continuously. Alternatively, the effect pattern 3 may be executed continuously after the effect pattern 4 is executed. Moreover, as for the degree of expectation in this case, the former degree of expectation may be higher, or the latter degree of expectation may be higher.

As for the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation in the case where a certain effect pattern is executed and then the second effect pattern is executed is higher than the degree of expectation in the case where a certain effect pattern is executed once and ends. can be increased or decreased.
For example, the expectation level when the performance pattern 3 is executed and then the performance pattern 4 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when the performance pattern 3 is executed.
Alternatively, the expectation level when the performance pattern 3 is executed after the performance pattern 4 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when the performance pattern 4 is executed.

During the period (timing t7-timing t10) in which the left and right decorative patterns of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped, operation reception for the operation unit (for example, operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled. For example, during the period from timing t7.5 to timing t9.0, it is preferable to enable reception of operations for the operation unit and to display an operation unit simulated image simulating the enabled operation unit in the display area. Further, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, it is preferable to display whether or not the result of the variable display is a big hit (for example, display of characters such as "big hit" or "losing"). Alternatively, instead of directly showing the result of the variable display, a display indicating the degree of expectation such as "high expectation!", "low expectation!" may be performed. After these displays are performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t10, and the result of the variable display is presented to the player.
On the other hand, during the period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns of the production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, it is preferable not to enable the operation reception for the operation unit (naturally, the operation unit simulated image is not displayed).
According to this embodiment, in the case of effect pattern 3, which has a relatively low degree of expectation compared to effect pattern 4, the player can know the result as to whether or not the player will win a big hit in advance according to his/her own intention. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is disgusted by being shown the performance of the degree of expectation for a long time.
On the other hand, in the case of the performance pattern 4, which has a relatively high degree of expectation compared to the performance pattern 3, it is not possible to know whether the result is a big hit or not until the decorative symbols stop regardless of the player's intention. To make a player feel expectation for the occurrence of a big win for a long period of time until the end of the variable display.

In the embodiment of the "hourglass holding change effect", the point that the decorative member for effect may be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, movement or light emission) was shown, but in this embodiment also, the decoration for effect is performed in a similar manner. You may drive a member. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 134, the effect decorative member is preferably arranged between the panel plate 1110 and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the front-rear direction. Further, when viewed from the front, when the effect decorative member is at the standby position, it does not overlap the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and when the effect decorative member is at the movement position, the game board side effect It is preferable to overlap the display area of the display device 1600 .
These decorative members may be driven even during the period (timing t7 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3, which is relatively less expected than production pattern 4, are temporarily stopped. For example, during the period from timing t7 to timing t10, by moving the effect decorative member from the standby position to the moving position, the variable display can be enhanced. It should be noted that the decorative member for presentation may be made to emit light. In this case, after the decorative member for presentation is put in the light emitting state at the standby position, it may be moved to the moving position while still in the light emitting state. Alternatively, it may be moved to the moving position in the off state, and the light emitting state may be changed from the off state to the timing when the movement to the moving position is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of the production pattern 4, which has a relatively high degree of expectation compared to the production pattern 3, during the period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols of the production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, By preventing the decorative member from moving from the standby position to the moving position, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the effect display (fight between characters). Also, the effect decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the movement position before timing t8, but it is desirable to move it to the standby position before timing t8. In the period (timing t8 to timing t10) during which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols of the production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, the production decorative member may emit light at the standby position.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation should be higher when the decorative member for presentation is moved than when the decorative member for presentation is not moved. Similarly, it is preferable to increase the degree of expectation when the decorative member for presentation emits light compared to when the decorative member for presentation does not emit light.

During the period (timing t7 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative patterns of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped, the first specific production sound is displayed as the background image in the situation where the normal background image is displayed. In a situation where the reach-time background image A indicated by , etc. is displayed, a second specific effect sound different from the first specific effect sound may be output as BGM or SE. On the other hand, during the period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols of production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, in a situation where the normal background image is displayed as the background image, the above-mentioned first specific production sound is Of course, other production sounds are not output at all. Since production pattern 4 has a higher expectation for winning than production pattern 3, it is possible to increase the tension by making it silent (however, in this situation where the sound is made silent, when the game ball enters the start opening, , the starting winning sound that is output when winning at the starting port is output).

Next, the difference between production pattern 4 described with reference to FIGS. 350(d) and 354 to 356 and production pattern 5 described with reference to FIGS. patterns) and modifications of these production patterns.

Comparing effect pattern 4 and effect pattern 5, in effect pattern 5, characters are not displayed. ), it is possible to clearly convey to the player that the degree of expectation is high.
On the other hand, in the case of effect pattern 4, the characters (monster character and master character) are displayed in a form that occupies most of the display area. A performance in which a character and a master character fight) can be executed without changing the background image. In addition, since the background image is normally displayed as it is, there is no need to create a dedicated background image during reach, and the cost associated with image development and the storage capacity required for image storage can be reduced.

Note that the degree of expectation for a big hit may be increased in the order of effect pattern 4, effect pattern 3 (when the background image A is displayed at the time of reach), and effect pattern 5.例文帳に追加Further, the time during which the left and right decorative patterns form the ready-to-win state and are temporarily stopped is 2 seconds in the production pattern 4, 3 seconds in the production pattern 3, and 4 seconds in the production pattern 5. - 特許庁
According to such a configuration, the higher the degree of expectation of the effect pattern, the longer the time during which the ready-to-win state is formed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively provide the player with a sense of expectation due to the ready-to-win state.

Further, when the decorative symbols in the production pattern 5 and the decorative symbols in the production pattern 4 are compared, the left and right decorative symbols show the ready-to-win state in both production patterns. In production pattern 5, the middle decorative pattern (decorative pattern that does not indicate the reach state) stops at which number while the left and right decorative patterns indicate the reach state. On the other hand, in production pattern 4, the monster character is displayed in a short time (timing t1) from the start of the fluctuation, as described above, and the monster character is displayed. It is a production that suggests the result of winning or losing depending on whether it is defeated or not. In the performance pattern 4, the right and left decorative patterns show the ready-to-win state, the inner decorative patterns also show the decorative patterns with numbers different from the left and right decorative patterns, and all the decorative patterns fluctuate. In this way, by swinging and fluctuating all the decorative patterns and displaying combinations of patterns that are not wins, the player can be made to pay attention not to the decorative patterns but to the fight against the monster character. Hypothetically, if the decorative pattern of the production pattern 4 is the same as the decorative pattern of the production pattern 5 (in the case of a production that shows at which number the middle decorative pattern stops), should we pay attention to the decorative pattern? The player is puzzled as to whether or not he should pay attention to the fight, and there arises a problem that the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect is ended without increasing interest. Further, in production pattern 4, when the player loses the battle with the monster character (when the result of the win-or-loss suggests that the game is lost), if the combination of the losing symbols is displayed after the battle with the monster character is defeated, There is a possibility that the player will be appealed to the fact that he/she has missed the game multiple times, and that the player's feelings may be upset. In addition, displaying a combination of unsuccessful patterns after losing the battle with the monster character takes time. lead to improvement.

An embodiment in which production pattern 5 is modified is shown with reference to FIGS. 359(b) and 361. FIG. In this embodiment, the decoration pattern is not displayed during the period in which the tornado image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t6.2 to timing t6.8). In effect pattern 4, the decoration pattern may be similarly hidden during the period (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0) in which the master character is attacking the monster character.
In this way, in the state in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state or the ready-to-win state, the decorative symbols are hidden for a predetermined period of time so that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols, thereby forming the ready-to-win state. Whether or not the decorative pattern being played will be promoted from the normal pattern to the variable pattern, whether the number attached to the decorative pattern that forms the reach state will be promoted to a number with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, and whether the character As to the outcome of the battle between the two players (whether or not the medium decoration symbol moves to indicate the occurrence of a big win), the player will be teased once, but after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decoration symbol will be displayed. The display of the symbols is resumed, and a predetermined result (whether promotion or not, whether or not a big win is shown) is displayed, so the result is advantageous to the player by the amount of teasing. It is possible to enhance the pleasure felt by the player at times.

Note that during the period in which the tornado image is displayed in the embodiment in which production pattern 5 is modified (0.6 seconds from timing t6.2 to timing t6.8), the master character in production pattern 4 attacks the monster character. In the period (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), the embodiment in which the decoration pattern is not displayed has been shown, but the display of the tornado image and the display of the master character attacking the monster character have been described. The length of the period for performing (that is, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden) can be set as appropriate.
For example, the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be longer than the period during which the tornado image is displayed. For example, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 2 seconds. Since the performance pattern 5 has a higher expectation for winning than the performance pattern 4, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden (the period during which the tornado image is displayed) in the performance pattern 5 is set in the performance pattern 4. It may change by making it longer than the length of the period during which the decoration pattern is hidden (the period during which the monster character is attacked). It can give a long-lasting feeling of exhilaration.
Also, the length of the period during which the tornado image is displayed and the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be the same length (for example, both are 1 second). By doing so, even in the production pattern 4, which has a lower expectation for winning than in the production pattern 5, it is possible to expect a change in the pattern (whether the production pattern 4 or the production pattern 5 (because the time between changes is the same).
Also, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be longer than the period during which the master character attacks the monster character. For example, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be 2 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 0.5 seconds.

When the display of the tornado image in production pattern 5 ends and the left and right decorative patterns are displayed again, the same decorative patterns as before the decorative patterns are hidden or the decorative patterns with different numbers are displayed. However, it is preferable that the ratio of displaying the same decorative patterns is set higher than that of displaying the decorative patterns with different numbers. Also, when the same decorative pattern is displayed again, even if it is not completely the same before and after the display, for example, a decorative pattern consisting of numbers and characters will only be numbers when displayed again. Or, when a decorative pattern composed of numbers and dynamic characters is redisplayed, it is composed of numbers and static characters, the size of the decorative pattern is different, or the font of the decorative pattern is different. Thus, even if the numbers are the same but the appearance is different, they can be treated as the same (similar) decorative pattern.
In addition, in production pattern 4, all decorative patterns have a higher display priority than the master character and the monster character, and when the master character and the monster character are fighting (timings t8.1 to t9.0), The display mode may be such that all the decorative patterns are visible. In that case, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, all the visible decorative patterns are a combination of symbols corresponding to the loss, so they are displayed as they are, but if the result of the lottery is a big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 356(e), the middle decorative pattern may be changed again to display decorative patterns with the same numbers as the left and right decorative patterns, or all the decorative patterns may be changed again. It is good, but when all the decorative patterns are changed again, be sure to double the different decorative patterns (for example, in FIG. The symbol combination corresponding to ) should be displayed. For example, instead of "2" doublets, "3" or "7" doublets may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation for the probability change.

It is preferable that the ratio of selecting the effect pattern 5 is higher than the ratio of selecting the effect pattern 4.例文帳に追加For example, the ratio of the ratio of selecting effect pattern 5 to the ratio of selecting effect pattern 4 may be 9:1. In this case, compared to the timing (timing t5) at which the high-speed fluctuation is switched to the low-speed fluctuation in the production pattern 5, the timing (timing t7) at which the high-speed fluctuation is switched to the low-speed fluctuation when the production pattern 4 is executed is the start of the fluctuation display. It is a late timing compared to . That is, when the performance pattern 4 is executed, the time period during which the decorative patterns fluctuate at high speed is felt to be long, giving the player a sense of discomfort and raising the expectation that an advantageous situation such as a big win may occur. A feeling can be provided to the player. Also, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display from becoming monotonous.

The ratio of selecting effect pattern 5 may be lower than the ratio of selecting effect pattern 4. - 特許庁For example, the ratio of the ratio of selecting effect pattern 5 to the ratio of selecting effect pattern 4 may be set to 1:9. In this case, the timing (timing t5) at which the high-speed fluctuation switches to the low-speed fluctuation in the production pattern 4 is compared with the timing (timing t7) at which the high-speed fluctuation switches to the low-speed fluctuation when the production pattern 5 is executed. This is an early timing compared to . That is, when the performance pattern 5 is executed, the time period during which the decorative patterns fluctuate at high speed is felt to be short, giving the player a sense of discomfort and an exhilarating feeling that an advantageous situation such as a big win may occur. can be provided to the player. Also, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display from becoming monotonous.

In the modified example of effect pattern 5 shown with reference to FIGS. 359(b) and 361, which tornado image among tornado images A to C is displayed (whether the size of the tornado is small). Depending on whether the size is medium or large), the degree of expectation (and the degree of expectation of the big hit in production pattern 5) that the normal symbols constituting the ready-to-win state are promoted to probability variable symbols was shown.
On the other hand, in production pattern 4, the master character kicks with only one leg as shown in FIGS. 356(c) and 357(c). You can let it be. Also, in this case, the degree of expectation for winning against the monster character (that is, the degree of expectation for a big win) may be higher than in the case of kicking with only one leg.
In this way, by making it possible to execute effects with different expectations while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win. In addition, in the modification of production pattern 5, not only whether the tornado image is displayed but also which tornado image is displayed, the degree of expectation (and the production pattern 5), the player wishes to display a tornado image and also wishes to display a tornado image with a high degree of expectation. Since the performance pattern 4 has a higher degree of expectation for winning than the performance pattern 5, when a plurality of expectation degree-increasing performances can be displayed in the performance pattern 4, the expectation degree increases if the expectation degree-increasing performance with the low expectation degree is displayed. In order to prevent the interest from decreasing even though the performance pattern 4 with a high level of performance is displayed, the performance pattern 4 is provided with one expectation level increasing performance.

In addition, when the tornado image C is displayed, the normal pattern may always be changed to the probability variation pattern. Alternatively, when the tornado image C is displayed, there may or may not be a change from the normal pattern to the probability variable pattern, but the result of the variable display may always be a big hit. Alternatively, when the tornado image C is displayed, it may always change from the normal pattern to the probability variable pattern, and the result of the variable display may always be the result of the big hit.
Further, when the master character hits the monster character with both feet with a drop kick with both feet, the master character may always win against the monster character (that is, the result of the variable display is always the result of a big win).

In both the performance pattern 4 and the performance pattern 5, the same expectation degree suggesting performance suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win may be executed during the period when the left, middle and right decorative patterns are variably displayed at high speed. For example, as an expectation suggesting effect, a samurai character image may appear from the right side of the display area and disappear to the left side behind the decorative pattern for one second. Also, it is preferable that the degree of expectation for the big win when the samurai character image is displayed is higher than the degree of expectation for the big win when the samurai character image is not displayed.
By making it possible to execute the expectation level suggesting performance, the player can have a sense of expectation as to in which mode the left, middle, and right decorative symbols will be temporarily stopped.

The rate at which the expectation level suggesting effect is executed in effect pattern 4 (the ratio here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 4 is selected) is the degree of expectation in effect pattern 5. It may be higher than the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed (the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 5 is selected).
Alternatively, the ratio of execution of the expectation degree suggestive effect in production pattern 4 (the ratio here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of production pattern 4 is selected) is the same as in production pattern 5 It may be lower than the rate at which the expectation level suggesting effect is executed (the rate referred to here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 5 is selected).

350 and the like, it has been shown that production pattern 1 to production pattern 5 can be executed, but after any one of production patterns 1 to 5 is executed, production pattern 1 to production pattern Any one of the pattern 5 effect patterns may be made executable. Incidentally, since the variable display time of the effect pattern 1 to the effect pattern 5 is 10 seconds, the variable display time is 20 seconds when the effect pattern can be continuously executed. In addition, when it is made possible to continuously execute the effect patterns in this way, there are 25 combinations.
In addition, when the effect pattern is executed continuously, at the end of the first effect pattern (period of timing t9 to timing t10), all the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of reach loss, but the second effect pattern is displayed. As soon as the game is started, all decorative patterns are variably displayed at a high speed, so even if the result of failure is shown when the first performance pattern is executed, the second performance pattern is started and the result is a big win. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that it may be possible.

Note that, when effect pattern 4 is executed, the current reserved image is in a non-display state, so after effect pattern 4 is executed, other effect patterns may not be executed. Alternatively, the display of the current pending image may be resumed at timing t10, and after the effect pattern 4 is executed, another effect pattern may be executed.
Also, after the performance pattern 4 is executed, the performance pattern 5 may be executed continuously. Alternatively, the effect pattern 4 may be executed continuously after the effect pattern 5 is executed. Moreover, as for the degree of expectation in this case, the former degree of expectation may be higher, or the latter degree of expectation may be higher.

As for the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation in the case where a certain effect pattern is executed and then the second effect pattern is executed is higher than the degree of expectation in the case where a certain effect pattern is executed once and ends. can be increased or decreased.
For example, the expectation level when the performance pattern 4 is executed and then the performance pattern 5 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when the performance pattern 4 is executed.
Alternatively, the expectation level when the performance pattern 5 is executed and then the performance pattern 4 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when the performance pattern 5 is executed.

During the period (timing t6-timing t10) in which the left and right decorative patterns of production pattern 5 are temporarily stopped, operation acceptance for the operation unit (for example, operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled. For example, during the period from timing t6.5 to timing t9.0, it is preferable to enable reception of operations for the operation unit and to display an operation unit simulated image simulating the enabled operation unit in the display area. Further, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, it is preferable to display whether or not the result of the variable display is a big hit (for example, display of characters such as "big hit" or "losing"). Alternatively, instead of directly showing the result of the variable display, a display indicating the degree of expectation such as "high expectation!", "low expectation!" may be performed. After these displays are performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t10, and the result of the variable display is presented to the player.
On the other hand, during the period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns of production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, it is preferable not to enable operation reception for the operation unit (naturally, operation unit simulated image is not displayed).
According to this embodiment, in the case of effect pattern 5, which has a relatively low degree of expectation as compared with effect pattern 4, the player can know the result of whether or not a big hit will be made in advance according to his/her own intention. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is disgusted by being shown the performance of the degree of expectation for a long time.
On the other hand, in the case of the performance pattern 4, which has a relatively high degree of expectation compared to the performance pattern 5, it is not possible to know whether the result is a big hit or not until the decorative symbols stop regardless of the player's intention. To make a player feel expectation for the occurrence of a big win for a long period of time until the end of the variable display.

In the embodiment of the "hourglass holding change effect", the point that the decorative member for effect may be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, movement or light emission) was shown, but in this embodiment also, the decoration for effect is performed in a similar manner. You may drive a member. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 134, the effect decorative member is preferably arranged between the panel plate 1110 and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the front-rear direction. Further, when viewed from the front, when the effect decorative member is at the standby position, it does not overlap the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and when the effect decorative member is at the movement position, the game board side effect It is preferable to overlap the display area of the display device 1600 .
These decorative members may be driven even during the period (timing t6 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 5, which is relatively less expected than production pattern 4, are temporarily stopped. For example, during the period from timing t6 to timing t10, by moving the effect decorative member from the standby position to the moving position, the variable display can be enhanced. It should be noted that the decorative member for presentation may be made to emit light. In this case, after the decorative member for presentation is put in the light emitting state at the standby position, it may be moved to the moving position while still in the light emitting state. Alternatively, it may be moved to the moving position in the off state, and the light emitting state may be changed from the off state to the timing when the movement to the moving position is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of production pattern 4, which has a relatively high degree of expectation compared to production pattern 5, during the period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols of production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, By preventing the decorative member from moving from the standby position to the moving position, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the performance display (fight between characters). Also, the effect decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the movement position before timing t8, but it is desirable to move it to the standby position before timing t8. In the period (timing t8 to timing t10) during which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols of the production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, the production decorative member may emit light at the standby position.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation should be higher when the decorative member for presentation is moved than when the decorative member for presentation is not moved. Similarly, it is preferable to increase the degree of expectation when the decorative member for presentation emits light compared to when the decorative member for presentation does not emit light.

Thus, according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 347 to 361, it is possible to provide the player with new interests.

Embodiments modified from the embodiments shown in FIGS. 123 to 361 and the like will be described below with reference to FIGS. 362 to 367 and the like. In this embodiment, after a "barbell training effect" in which the character trains with a barbell is performed in the display area, a special ready-to-win effect is executed, and the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the effect content. . In addition, there are times when a barbell falls from above during the training, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 362 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Figures 364 to 367 show the display contents in the display area or the display contents in the presentation window displayed in the display area.

In the "barbell training effect", one of the effect patterns 1-1 to 3-8 is selected and executed. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested based on the content of the effect that has been executed.
First, the display modes common to the effect pattern 1-1 to the effect pattern 3-8 will be described.
From timing t0 to timing t14 in production patterns 1-1 and 1-2 shown in FIG. 362(a), from timing t0 to timing t16 in production patterns 2-1 to 2-4 shown in FIG. 362(b) In the production pattern 3-1 to the production pattern 3-8 shown in FIG. 363, the ornamental pattern is variably displayed at high speed from the timing t0 to the timing t18. Of these, from timing t0 to timing t4, in addition to the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 364 (a), the normal background image (here, normal background image B shown in FIG. A standby hold image or the like is displayed. After timing t4, an effect window is displayed in the center of the display area, a "barbell training effect" is started, and a character training using a barbell is displayed in the effect window. FIG. 364(b) shows a state in which an effect window is displayed near the center of the display area.
365(a) to 365(h), FIG. 366(a), FIG. 366(b), and FIG. 366(e) are diagrams showing display modes in the presentation window.
Although an example in which the effect window occupies most of the display area has been shown, the effect window may occupy the entire display area, or may be displayed in a small effect window that does not occupy most of the display area. Also, the size of the effect window may be varied (increased or decreased) while the "barbell training effect" is being executed.

``Barbell training effect'' is the period during which the display of training using a barbell is performed, ``training end effect'' that displays the state in which training is completed, and the ``reaching effect'' that shows the character fighting when reaching. It consists of "character confirmation production".
In the "barbell training presentation", first, the "during training presentation" is executed. The time required to execute the "demonstration during training" is either 4 seconds, 6 seconds, or 8 seconds. The time required for execution differs depending on the selected effect pattern. After the "in-training effect", the "training end effect" is executed. The time required to execute the "training end presentation" is four seconds. After the "training end effect", the "ready character determination effect" is executed. The time required to execute the "ready-to-win character determination effect" is two seconds.
After the end of the "reach character confirmation effect", the "window enlargement display effect" in which the effect window is enlarged is executed. In addition, along with the start of the "window enlargement display effect", special reach decorative patterns are displayed in the reach state as left and right decorative patterns (details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 366(c) and 366(f)).
After the end of the "window enlargement display effect", a special ready-to-win effect ("character ready-to-win effect") is executed in which the character indicated by the "reachable character confirmation effect" appears.

The display contents in the effect window during the period from timing t4 to timing t6 are common to effect patterns 1-1 to 3-8.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 365(a), in the effect window, the text "Training Chance" is displayed in the upper left, the master character and lines of the master character are displayed in the lower left, and the master character is displayed on the right side. , the fighter character and the words of the fighter character are displayed. Also, a state in which the martial arts character is holding a guts barbell with the word "guts" is displayed.

When the effect pattern 1-1 and the effect pattern 1-2 are selected, the time required to execute the "training effect" is 4 seconds. Also, a 1-ton barbell may drop at timing t6.
When the effect pattern 2-1 to the effect pattern 2-4 are selected, the time required to execute the "training effect" is 6 seconds. Also, a 1-ton barbell may drop at timing t6. Also, at timing t8, a 1-ton barbell or a 5-ton barbell may drop.
When the effect pattern 3-1 to the effect pattern 3-8 are selected, the time required to execute the "effect during training" is 8 seconds. Also, a 1-ton barbell may drop at timing t6. Also, at timing t8, a 1-ton barbell or a 5-ton barbell may drop. Also, at timing t10, a 1-ton barbell, a 5-ton barbell, or a 10-ton barbell may drop.

FIG. 365(b) shows the display state when the 1-ton barbell is dropped. A 1-ton barbell is larger than a gut barbell, as shown in the diagram. In addition, the character of 1 ton is attached.
FIG. 365(c) shows the display state when the 5-ton barbell is dropped. A 5 ton barbell is larger than a 1 ton barbell as shown in the figure. Also, the characters 5 tons are attached.
FIG. 365(d) shows the display state when the 10-ton barbell is dropped. A 10 ton barbell is larger than a 5 ton barbell as shown in the figure. Also, the characters 10 tons are attached.
The barbells are dropped in order of 1-ton barbell, 5-ton barbell, and 10-ton barbell. In other words, a 5-ton barbell or a 10-ton barbell will not fall while the fighter character has only the guts barbell.
As shown in the figure, the lines of the fighter character and the master character change as the barbell falls.

When the "during training effect" ends, the "training end effect" is started. It should be noted that, as shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the timing at which the "training end effect" is started differs depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when either the effect pattern 1-1 or the effect pattern 1-2 is being executed, the "training end effect" is started at timing t8. Further, when any one of the production pattern 2-1 to the production pattern 2-4 is executed, the "training end production" is started at timing t10. Further, when any one of the production pattern 3-1 to the production pattern 3-8 is executed, the "training end production" is started at timing t12.
At the timing when the "Training end effect" starts, the combination of barbells held by the martial artist character is: Guts barbell only, Guts barbell and 1-ton barbell, Guts barbell and 1-ton barbell and 5-ton barbell, Guts barbell and 1 There are 4 types of ton barbells, 5 ton barbells and 10 ton barbells.
Figures 365(e) to 365(h) show display modes during the "training end presentation". Specifically, FIG. 365(e) shows a state in which the martial arts character holds only the guts barbell. FIG. 365(f) shows the martial arts character holding a guts barbell and a 1-ton barbell. FIG. 365(g) shows the martial arts character holding a guts barbell, a 1-ton barbell, and a 5-ton barbell. FIG. 365(h) shows a state in which the martial arts character holds a guts barbell, a 1-ton barbell, a 5-ton barbell, and a 10-ton barbell.

The degree of expectation increases as the length of time during which the “training performance” is executed increases. For example, when the length of time during which the "demonstration during training" is executed is 4 seconds, 6 seconds, and 8 seconds, the degree of expectation increases in this order.
Also, the more barbells fall, the higher the expectation. For example, if the barbell remains as it is, if it drops to a 1-ton barbell, if it drops to a 5-ton barbell, and if it drops to a 10-ton barbell, the degree of expectation increases in this order.
It should be noted that the higher the degree of expectation, the lower the performance probability (selection probability).
By adopting such a mode, the player visually recognizes the progress of the performance in anticipation that the “performance during training” will continue for a long time and that many barbells will fall.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363, only one barbell was dropped at a certain timing (for example, timing t6, timing t8, and timing t10) during the "demonstration during training". However, at these timings, a plurality of barbells may fall simultaneously. For example, even if two barbells (1 ton barbell and 5 ton barbell, or 5 ton barbell and 10 ton barbell) or three barbells (1 ton barbell to 10 ton barbell) fall at the same time, good.
Specifically, for example, at timing t10 of production pattern 3-2, instead of only the 1-ton barbell falling, the 1-ton barbell, the 5-ton barbell, and the 10-ton barbell fall simultaneously. good too.
By allowing a plurality of barbells to fall at the same time in this manner, the degree of expectation is raised at once, and the player can be made to feel great excitement.

It should be noted that an effect in which the barbell falls may be performed during the "training end effect". The execution time of "Training end effect" is 4 seconds. can be
For example, when effect pattern 3-5 is executed, at timing t6, a 1-ton barbell falls, but the next barbell, 5-ton barbell, does not fall until timing t12. In this situation, the 5-ton barbell may be dropped at timing t14, and the 10-ton barbell may be dropped at timing t15, during the "training end presentation". FIG. 366(a) shows a state in which a 5-ton barbell is falling.
In this way, by making it possible for the barbell to fall even during the "training end effect", the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the level of expectation will increase.

It should be noted that, even at the timing when the barbell can drop in the "training end presentation", a plurality of (two or three) barbells may drop at the same time, as in the "during training presentation". In this case as well, the degree of expectation for the big win increases at once, and the excitement felt by the player can be heightened.

When the "training end effect" ends, the "ready character confirmation effect" is started. It should be noted that, as shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the timing at which the "ready character confirmation effect" is started differs depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when production pattern 1-1 and production pattern 1-2 are being executed, the "ready character confirmation production" is started from timing t12, and production pattern 2-1 to production pattern 2-4 are executed. If it has been executed, the "ready-to-win character confirmed effect" is started from timing t14, and if the effect patterns 3-1 to 3-8 are being executed, the "ready-to-win character confirmed effect" starts from time t16. is started.
The "ready-to-win character determination effect" is an effect to notify whether the SP ready-to-win effect to be performed thereafter is the character ready-to-win effect 1 by the fighter character or the character ready-to-reach effect 2 by the master character.
FIG. 366(b) shows that a character ready-to-reach effect 1 is performed by a fighter character. Although the lines of both characters indicate that character reach production 1 is performed by the fighter character, a special production using the entire display area (for example, the face close-up of the fighter character is shown in the entire display area). display) may indicate that the character reach effect 1 is performed by the fighter character.
FIG. 366(c) shows that the character reach effect 2 is performed by the master character. Although the lines of both characters indicate that the character reach effect 2 is performed by the master character, a special effect using the entire display area (for example, the master character's face close-up is displayed in the entire display area) ) may indicate that the character reach effect 2 is performed by the master character. In addition, when the character ready-to-reach production 1 by the martial artist character is performed, the words of both characters are displayed, and when the character ready-to-reach production 2 by the master character is performed, the face of the master character is displayed in the entire display area. The size and display mode of the notification effect by the "ready-to-win character determination effect" may be changed depending on whether the game develops.
In addition, since it is the martial artist character who is training in the "barbell training performance", basically, the rate of development to the character reach performance 1 by the martial artist character is higher (for example, the character reach performance 1 by the martial artist character It is preferable that the ratio of development to reach performance 1 is 90% and the ratio of development to character reach performance 2 by the master character is 10%).
It should be noted that the higher the degree of expectation, the lower the execution probability (selection probability) of the ready-to-win effect.
In this way, I think that the "character reach production" in which the fighter character appears will occur by having the master character occasionally selected as the character that appears in the "character reach production" (the fighter character is not selected). It is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise and improve interest.

The ratio of development to the character ready-to-win production 1 by the fighter character and the ratio of developing to the character ready-to-win production 2 by the master character may be made the same. By setting the ratio to be the same, the character ready-to-reach performance 1 by the fighter character and the character ready-to-reach performance 2 by the master character appear evenly, and the interest is maintained for a long time by displaying various performances.
Also, the rate of development to the character ready-to-reach presentation 2 by the master character may be set higher than the rate of development to the character ready-to-reach presentation 1 by the martial artist character. It is possible to create a scenario that is easy for the player to understand, in which the degree of expectation for the character reach performance 1 by the martial arts character increases as the martial arts character becomes stronger through training.

When the "training end effect" ends (that is, the "barbell training effect" ends), the "window enlargement display effect" is started.
In the "window expansion display effect", the size of the effect window becomes the same size as the display area over 2 seconds, and the effect window continues to expand and the frame of the effect window moves outside the display area and is not displayed. state. During execution of the "window enlargement display effect", characters appearing in the "character reach effect" and the name of the "character reach effect" to be executed are displayed in the effect window. In addition, at the same time as the start of the "window enlargement display effect", the special ready-to-win decorative pattern (see FIG. 225(b)) is displayed in the ready-to-win state instead of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns that have been displayed at high speed until then. is displayed.
FIGS. 366(c) and 366(f) show the display state at the timing when one second has passed since the "window enlargement effect" was started.
In FIG. 366(c), a martial arts character and the character martial arts character reach are displayed. It also shows a state in which the size of the presentation window is being enlarged. In addition, the left and right special ready-to-win decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed with "2" respectively. In addition, among the special reach decorative patterns, the medium decorative patterns are not yet displayed at this timing.
In FIG. 366(f), the master character and characters "master character reach" are displayed. It also shows a state in which the size of the presentation window is being enlarged. In addition, the right and left special ready-to-win decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed with "2" at the upper left and upper right positions of the display area, respectively. In addition, among the special reach decorative patterns, the medium decorative patterns are not yet displayed at this timing. In addition, the timing to show the left and right special reach decoration patterns in the reach state is the same as the start of the "window enlargement display effect", and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the "window enlargement display effect", the character that is the SP reach effect It may be performed at the start of ready-to-win productions 1 and 2, or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of character ready-to-win productions 1 and 2, which are SP ready-to-win productions.

To change the display contents in the production window from the display contents shown in FIGS. 366(b) and 366(e) to the display contents shown in FIGS. 366(c) and 366(f), " It is preferable to change the positions and sizes of the characters (fighter character and master character) appearing in the "Character Reach Production" and the barbell held by the character, and terminate the display of other images in the production window. By adopting such a mode, it is possible to smoothly develop the performance from the "barbell training performance" to the "character reach performance", and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort in the performance.
In addition, the name of the "character reach effect" to be executed may be displayed at the same time as the "window enlargement display effect" is started, or may be displayed while the "window enlargement display effect" is being executed. good too.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the timing at which the "window enlargement display effect" is started differs depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when effect pattern 1-1 and effect pattern 1-2 are being executed, "window enlargement display effect" is started at timing t14, and effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 are executed. If it is executed, the "window enlargement display effect" is started at timing t16, and if the effect patterns 3-1 to 3-8 are being executed, the "window enlargement display effect" is started at time t18. is started.

When the "window enlargement display effect" ends, the display of the effect window ends. At this time, the background image is switched from the normal background image to the reach background image. Also, when the "window enlargement display effect" ends, a special reach effect "character reach effect"("fighter character reach effect" or "master character reach effect") is started.
FIG. 366(d) shows the display state at the timing when the "fighter character reach effect" is started. Here, as the background image, the reach-time background image B is displayed.
Also, FIG. 366(g) shows the display state at the timing when the "master character reaching effect" is started. Here, as the background image, the reach-time background image A is displayed.
When two seconds have passed since the start of the character reach production, the display of the name "character reach production" ends, and an enemy character fighting the fighter character or the master character is displayed.

It should be noted that the display of the current pending image and the standby pending image is stopped at the same time as the "window enlargement display effect" ends. As shown in FIGS. 366(c) and 366(f), the current pending image and standby pending image are displayed during the "window enlargement display effect", and as shown in FIGS. 366(d) and 366(g) The display of the current pending image and the standby pending image is discontinued after the timing at which the "window enlargement display effect" ends. In addition, the timing to hide the current pending image and the standby pending image is not exactly the timing when the "window enlargement display effect" ends, but slightly before the "window enlargement display effect" ends, or when the "window enlargement effect" ends. It may be a little after the end of the "display effect". If it is a little later, the current pending image and the standby pending image will be made recognizable at the start of the "character reach effect", but will soon become unrecognizable.
In addition, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display of the standby pending image is resumed at the timing when the "character reach effect" ends and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. No redisplay of the current pending image is performed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, even if the display of the standby pending image and the redisplay of the current pending image are not performed even at the timing when the "character reach effect" is finished and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the case where the result of the special lottery is a loss may be explained. Also, even if the result of the special lottery is a loss, it may be changed depending on the type of ready-to-win effect. For example, when the character ready-to-win effect by the fighter is lost, the current pending image is not displayed, and when the character ready-to-win effect by the master is lost, the current pending image is displayed. Incidentally, even if the result of the special lottery is a hit, it may be changed according to the type of ready-to-win effect as in the case of a loss.

In the "character reach presentation", a display is provided in which the character determined by the "barbell training presentation" fights with another character. Specifically, the reach performance of fighting a martial artist character and a samurai character (Fig. 367(a)), the reach performance of fighting a martial artist character and a warrior character (Fig. 367(b)), a master character and a fake samurai wearing sunglasses. Four types of "character reach effects" are executed: a reach effect in which characters fight (Fig. 367(c)), and a reach effect in which a master character fights a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses (Fig. 367(d)). Note that FIGS. 367(a) to 367(d) show one scene of the ready-to-win production. During the ready-to-win production, two characters move and fight with their weapons. display is performed.
Further, when the martial artist character or the master character wins in the "character ready-to-win effect", the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win after the end of the ready-to-win effect. Further, when the martial artist character or the master character loses in the "character ready-to-win effect", the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating failure after the end of the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the degree of expectation for the big hit differs depending on the type of "character reach production", such as a reach production in which a martial artist character and a samurai character fight, a reach production in which a martial artist character and a warrior character fight, a master character and a fake samurai wearing sunglasses. Expectations are higher in the order of the reach performance in which the character fights, and the reach performance in which the master character and the fake warrior character wearing sunglasses fight.
For example, the expected degree of reach performance of fighting between a martial artist character and a samurai character is set at 20%, the expectation degree of reach performance of fighting between a martial artist character and a warrior character is set at 30%, and the reach performance of fighting a master character and a fake samurai character wearing sunglasses. may be set to 40%, and the expectation of the ready-to-reach effect in which the teacher character and the fake warrior character wearing sunglasses fight may be set to 50%.

The time required for the "character reach effect" may be set to a predetermined number of seconds, such as 60 seconds or 90 seconds, independently of the execution time of the "barbell training effect". Alternatively, the time required for the "character reach effect" may be determined according to the type of fighting character. For example, the execution time of the "fighter character reach performance" may be set to 60 seconds, and the execution time of the "master character reach performance" may be set to 90 seconds.

It should be noted that the timing at which the ready-to-win effect is started differs depending on the effect pattern being executed. When production pattern 1-1 and production pattern 1-2 have been executed, the ready-to-win production is started from timing t16, and when production pattern 2-1 to production pattern 2-4 have been executed, timing The ready-to-win effect is started from t18, and if the effect pattern 3-1 to the effect pattern 3-8 are executed, the ready-to-win effect is started from timing t20.

In each production pattern shown in FIG. 362, the display mode up to timing t25 is shown, but the ready-to-win production continues even after timing t25, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing. In addition, in an embodiment in which the ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is not executed, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed before timing t25.

In this way, two characters appear in the "barbell training presentation", and the degree of expectation is indicated by the length of the execution time of the "training presentation" and to which barbell they have fallen. Therefore, the player can recognize in advance the degree of expectation in the "character ready-to-win effect" that will occur thereafter.
In addition to simply indicating the degree of expectation, the characters that have appeared in the "barbell training presentation" also appear in the "character reach presentation" as they are, so that the presentation can have a sense of unity.
Furthermore, the probability that the character (martial artist character) who was training among the characters that appeared in the "barbell training effect" will execute the "character reach effect" is set to be high, but the training guidance is performed. The "character reach effect" may also be executed for the character (master character) that was being performed, albeit with a low probability. By adopting such a mode, it is possible to make the player feel an unexpected feeling that a character who has not undergone training will appear in the ready-to-win effect (the fun of that!).
In addition, since the degree of expectation is higher when a character that has not undergone training appears in the ready-to-win performance, the player can be made to feel a sense of expectation for a big win in addition to a sense of surprise.

In the "training production", the contents of the lines of the master character only changed as various barbells fell. You can make it come.
For example, the barbell is set to drop only when the master character jumps and hits the upper side of the effect window one second before the timing (timing t6, timing t8, timing t10) at which the barbell can drop. good too. In this case, it is also possible to display the message "Watch your head!" as the line of the master character so that the player can easily understand the meaning of the production.
When the master character jumps, the barbell may always drop, or the barbell may drop with a predetermined probability (eg, 30% or 40%).
Also, if the master character jumps, the barbell will fall with a relatively high probability (eg, 60% or 50%), and if the master character does not jump, a relatively low probability (eg, 10%). %, 5%, etc.).
It should be noted that the same embodiment may be employed during the "training end presentation" as well as the "training presentation".
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to realistically represent the character training, and to enhance the unexpected feeling that the master character who has not been trained appears in the ready-to-win production.

Although the embodiment in which the master character instructs the martial artist character in training has been shown, an embodiment in which the master character performs training using a barbell instead of the martial artist character may be executed. In this case, the martial artist character is displayed on the left side of the production window, and the master character holding up the guts barbell is displayed on the right side of the martial artist character. You may make it fall.
Also, in this case, it is preferable to set the probability of executing the "fighter character ready-to-reach effect" to 10% and the probability of executing the "master character ready-to-reach effect" to 90%.
According to this aspect, the probability of execution of the "master character ready-to-reach effect", which has relatively higher expectations than the "fighter character ready-to-reach effect", is higher than that of the "warrior character ready-to-reach effect". Since it is recognizable, a strong expectation for the big win can be recognized at an early stage of the variable display, and the high expectation for the occurrence of the big win can be maintained for a long period of time until the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished. It is possible to

FIG. 368 is a table showing the relationship between the performance content and the degree of expectation of the "barbell training performance" and the "character reach performance" to be executed thereafter. Performance contents are set for each of the performance numbers in the table, one of the performance numbers is selected with a predetermined probability, and the performance corresponding to the selected performance number is executed.
For example, when production number 1 is selected, production pattern 1-1 is executed, the length of the training production is 4 seconds, and finally only the guts barbell is displayed as the type of character reach production. Martial Artist Character VS Samurai Character" is executed, and the degree of expectation at this time is 15%.
Note that this table assumes an embodiment in which the barbell is additionally dropped during the "training end presentation".

Any one of a plurality of colors predetermined as colors of 1 ton barbell to 10 ton barbell may be applied. Also, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color attached.
For example, three types of 1-ton barbells, a white 1-ton barbell, a red 1-ton barbell, and a gold 1-ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and any one of the barbells may drop in the presentation. Also, at this time, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher in order of the white 1-ton barbell, the red 1-ton barbell, and the gold 1-ton barbell.
Similarly, three types of 5-ton barbells, a white 5-ton barbell, a red 5-ton barbell, and a gold 5-ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and any one of the barbells may drop in the presentation. Also, at this time, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher in order of the white 5-ton barbell, the red 5-ton barbell, and the gold 5-ton barbell.
Similarly, three types of 10-ton barbells, a white 10-ton barbell, a red 10-ton barbell, and a gold 10-ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and any one of the barbells may drop during the presentation. Also, at this time, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher in order of the white 10-ton barbell, the red 10-ton barbell, and the gold 10-ton barbell.
In addition, it is preferable to use only one color (for example, white or brown) instead of using multiple colors for the color of the guts barbell.
According to such an embodiment, the player does not simply wait for the barbell to fall, but rather expects the barbell with a higher degree of anticipation to fall. can.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the master character jumps and hits the upper side of the production window to confirm that the barbell will fall, a production is executed in which it is confirmed which color of the barbell will fall. It may be possible. For example, the color of the falling barbell may be indicated by the type of dialogue displayed when the master character jumps.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to create a great sense of anticipation as to what color barbells will fall.

An embodiment was shown in which barbells of any one of white, red, and gold colors were dropped as 1 ton barbells to 10 ton barbells, and the degree of expectation was indicated by the color of the dropped barbells, but the red barbells were dropped. In this case, the barbells that fall next time should be red or gold barbells, and white barbells should not fall. Similarly, if a gold barbell falls, the next barbell that falls should be a gold barbell, and white or gold barbells should not fall.
For example, after a red 1-ton barbell falls, a red or gold 5-ton barbell will fall, but a white 5-ton barbell will not. Similarly, after a red 5-ton barbell falls, a red or gold 10-ton barbell falls, but a white 10-ton barbell does not.
An image with a relatively high degree of expectation when a plurality of types of images (in this embodiment, a plurality of types of images indicated by different colors) whose order of relative degree of expectation is fixed are continuously displayed. If an image with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed after is displayed, the player may feel that the degree of expectation has decreased and the interest may decrease. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 362, 363, 364(b), etc., the "barbell training presentation" is executed in a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are fluctuating at high speed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the "barbell training effect" without worrying about the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols. If the ready-to-reach state is generated during the "barbell training effect", it will be difficult for the player to concentrate on the "barbell training effect" Such a problem becomes conspicuous when the degree of expectation is indicated by ), but according to the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

During execution of the "barbell training effect", the decorative pattern may be in the reach state. For example, during the execution of any one of the "during training effect", the "end of training effect", and the "ready-to-reach character determination effect" of the "barbell training effect", the decorative pattern may be in the ready-to-reach state.

An embodiment has been described in which, when the "barbell training effect" is executed, the decorative pattern is always in the ready-to-reach state and the ready-to-reach effect is executed. state, but if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure without the ready-to-win effect (so-called normal reach failure), or if the "barbell training effect" is executed, the decorative pattern will not enter the ready-to-win state. A case may be provided in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure without (naturally, the ready-to-win effect is not executed).
In this case, at the timing of executing the "window enlargement display effect", it is preferable to perform an effect display in which the window is reduced and erased over a period of two seconds.
In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbols may be ended at the timing when these two seconds or several seconds (for example, one second to five seconds) have passed in addition to these two seconds.
Further, it may be notified during the "barbell training performance" that the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach state but the ready-to-reach effect is not executed or that the decorative pattern is not in the ready-to-reach state.
For example, the display of the master character saying "I'm going home today!" It may be performed during execution of either "Training end effect" or "Reach character confirmation effect").

As shown in FIGS. 364 to 367 and the like, the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed during the execution of the "barbell training effect", but the current pending image is displayed during the execution of the "character reach effect". and standby hold images are not displayed.
During the execution of the "barbell training effect", there may be cases where the suspension change effects shown with reference to FIGS. For example, although the current pending image and the standby pending image are white and circular in the present embodiment, they may be changed to a display mode indicating a higher degree of expectation. Specifically, the color may be changed from white to any color from blue to iridescent.

In addition, if the pending change effect only changes the color, it will end in an instant at a predetermined timing. ). For example, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 322 to 329 and the like, the hold change effect may be executed over several seconds.
In addition, the timing to start execution of the pending change effect and the timing to end the execution of the pending change effect are, for example, before the execution of the "barbell training effect" is started, and the "barbell training effect" is started. During execution of "effect", the pending change effect may end (the state of the pending display after the change is shown), or during the execution of "barbell training effect", the execution of the pending change effect is started and " The pending change effect may end during the execution of the "barbell training effect" (the mode of the pending display after the change is shown), or the execution of the pending change effect may be started during the execution of the "barbell training effect". , After the "barbell training effect" ends, the pending change effect may end (the state of the pending display after the change is shown) (In this case, the "character reach effect" is being executed Also, the current pending image and the standby pending image should be displayed).
According to such an embodiment, during the execution of the "barbell training effect" or the "character ready-to-reach effect", expectations can be heightened by another effect different from the "barbell training effect" or the "character reach effect". Therefore, the degree of expectation is increased, and the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

With reference to FIG. 278(b), a cut-in image is displayed during a special ready-to-win production to show the degree of expectation for a big hit. An image may be displayed.
The display mode of the cut-in image will be described with reference to FIGS. 369(a) to 369(c).
During the martial arts character reach production, the martial arts character and the samurai character approach and fight each other. FIG. 369(a) shows the display state at this time.
A cut-in image is then displayed. The cut-in image consists of a horizontally long rectangular frame, a character displayed within the frame (“magician character” in this embodiment), and lines of the character. The cut-in image is displayed for several seconds (for example, 3 seconds). FIG. 369(b) shows the display state at this time. The cut-in image indicates the degree of expectation of the big win by the color of the background inside the frame. For example, three colors of green, red, and gold may be displayed as background colors in the frame, and the degree of expectation may increase in this order. In addition to the color of the background in the frame, a plurality of types (for example, three or more types) of appearing characters may be provided, and expectations may be set for them in a predetermined order. In the figure, light is emitted from the tip of the wand held by the magician character, and three colors of green, red, and gold can be displayed for the part that represents this light. , the degree of expectation may increase in this order.
After the display of the cut-in image ends, the fight between the characters is concluded and one of the characters wins. If the martial arts character wins, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win. Conversely, if the samurai character wins, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure. FIG. 369(c) shows a display state in which the martial arts character wins the battle and the decorative symbols are stopped to indicate a big win.
Although the martial arts player character ready-to-reach production is taken as an example, a similar cut-in image may be displayed in the master character ready-to-reach production.
Note that the cut-in image is not displayed during the "barbell training effect". Also, the cut-in image is displayed immediately before the battle between characters is concluded. For example, after the cut-in image is displayed, the battle between the characters may be concluded after the battle has been held for 5 to 10 seconds. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a big win just before the result of the battle between the characters comes out. Also, the display of the cut-in image enables the player to recognize that the result of the battle between the characters will be displayed soon.

The same suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed in the "training effect" and the "character reach effect".
As a suggestive effect, for example, a magician character riding a cane appears from the right side of the display area and flies horizontally toward the left side, and depending on the type of dialogue displayed on the left side of the magician character, the expectation of a big hit is expected. The degree may be suggested (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character flight suggestion effect"). It should be noted that it is preferable to provide three types of lines, "hot", "extremely hot", and "super hot", so that the degree of expectation increases in this order.
FIG. 369(d) shows the display state in the effect window when the "character flight suggestion effect" is executed during the "training effect". As shown in the figure, the witch character's line is "hot".
FIG. 369(e) shows the display state in the display area when the "character flight suggestive effect" is executed during the "character reach effect". As shown in the figure, the witch character's line is "Gekiatsu".
It should be noted that the size of the witch character and dialogue window displayed by the execution of the "character flight suggestive effect" is the same during the "training effect" and the "character reach effect", but the effect shown in FIG. While the display in the window shows the display contents in a part of the display area, FIG. 369(e) shows the display contents in the entire display area. Therefore, compared to FIG. 369(e), the size of the wizard character and dialogue window shown in FIG. 369(d) is larger.
It should be noted that the "character flight suggestive effect" may be executed twice during the "training effect" and during the "character reaching effect". Alternatively, if one of the "training performance" and the "character reach performance" is executed, the other is not executed, and the "character flight suggestion performance" is performed once during one fluctuation display. may be executed only.

Predetermined BGM may be reproduced during execution of the "barbell training effect". Also, predetermined BGM may be similarly reproduced during the execution of the "character reach effect". The same BGM may be reproduced during execution of the "barbell training effect" and during execution of the "character reach effect". By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player recognize the "barbell training effect" and the "character ready-to-win effect" as a series of effects, thereby enhancing the sense of unity in the effect.
On the other hand, different BGM may be reproduced during execution of the "barbell training effect" and during execution of the "character reaching effect". For example, a first BGM may be reproduced during the execution of the "character reaching effect", and a second BGM different from the first BGM may be reproduced during the execution of the "barbell training effect". By adopting such an embodiment, the player can clearly recognize which effect is being performed.
In addition, there are two types of character reach productions, "martial artist character reach production" and "master character reach production". , the same BGM may be reproduced during execution.
Alternatively, the first BGM may be reproduced during the execution of the "fighter character reach production", and the second BGM may be reproduced during the execution of the "barbell training production" and the "master character reach production". can be
Alternatively, the first BGM may be reproduced during the execution of the "master character reach production", and the second BGM may be reproduced during the execution of the "barbell training production" and the "fighter character reach production". can be

When the "barbell training effect" is executed and the "character reach effect" is performed, the second BGM output when the "barbell training effect" is being executed is changed to the first BGM. (The output of the first BGM is stopped before the symbol variation is completed.) However, even if the "barbell training effect" is executed, if the "character reach effect" is not performed, , the second BGM, which was output while the "barbell training effect" was being executed, will continue to be output (not reproduced from the start of the second BGM) even after the end of the "barbell training effect". may In addition, the output of the continuously output second BGM may be stopped before the pattern variation is completed, or may be continued even after the pattern variation is completed (start of the second BGM). may be output instead of being reproduced from the If output is continued, it will be output across the next pattern variation, so it is possible to provide a sense of expectation that the "barbell training effect" may be executed even in the next symbol variation. can.

In the "barbell training effect", the reception of operations on the operation units (for example, the operation button 401, the attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled, and the barbell may drop based on the player's operation on the operation units. For example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display may be made in which the master character jumps and collides with the upper side of the effect window, causing the barbell to drop.
For example, at the timing when the guts barbell in the "barbell training effect" is displayed, it is preferable to enable the reception of operation for the operation unit and display the operation unit simulated image having a shape simulating the operation unit in the display area. Also, when the operation section is operated, the master character jumps and hits the upper side of the production window, causing the one-ton barbell to drop, and when the operation section is not operated. , the master character should not jump and not drop even a one-ton barbell.
Similarly, at the timing when the 1-ton barbell in the "barbell training effect" is displayed, it is preferable to validate the operation reception for the operation unit and display the operation unit simulated image in the shape of the operation unit in the display area. Further, when the operating section is operated, the master character jumps and hits the upper side of the production window, causing the 5-ton barbell to drop, and when the operating section is not operated. , the master character should not jump and the 5-ton barbell should not fall.
It should be noted that, while the 5-ton barbell is being displayed, it is preferable to display the falling barbell based on the acceptance of the operation on the operation unit in the same manner.
Note that the effective period of operation of the operation unit may be limited to a part of the "barbell training presentation" or may be the entire period of the "barbell training presentation". Alternatively, it may be performed only for the entire period during the "demonstration during training".
In addition, for example, when the barbell can be changed from 1 ton to 5 ton barbell, it may be changed to 5 ton barbell only when the player operates it, or even if the player does not operate it, the barbell may change to 5 ton barbell. You may make it change into a ton barbell.
By adopting such an embodiment, the barbell can be dropped at the timing of the player's preference, and the player's sense of exhilaration can be enhanced.

With reference to FIGS. 369(a) to 369(c), an embodiment in which a cut-in image is displayed during the "character ready-to-win effect" has been shown. 401, attack button 3710, etc.) is enabled, and an operation part simulated image having a shape simulating the operation part is displayed in the display area, and one of the cut-in images is displayed based on the player's operation on the operation part. may be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, the cut-in image can be displayed at the player's favorite timing, and the player's sense of exhilaration can be enhanced.

An embodiment in which the barbell falls based on the operation on the operating section during the "barbell training presentation" and an embodiment in which a cut-in image is displayed based on the operation on the operating section during the "character reach presentation" are shown. However, it is also possible to enable operation reception for the same operation unit in the two effects, and display the same operation unit simulated image in the display area as the operation unit simulated image.
For example, when the barbell is made to fall based on the operation of the operation button 401 during the "barbell training effect", a cut-in image is displayed based on the operation of the operation button 401 during the "character reach effect". It is recommended that In addition, during the operation valid period during both effects, a simulated image simulating the operation button 401 may be displayed in the display area.
Alternatively, if the barbell is made to fall based on the operation of the attack button 3710 during the "barbell training effect", a cut-in image is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 during the "character reach effect". It is recommended that In addition, during the operation valid period during both effects, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be displayed in the display area.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand the operation unit to be operated.

Although the same simulated image of the operation part is displayed during the "barbell training effect" and during the "character reach effect", the position where the simulated operation part image is displayed is also changed during the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect". It is good to put it in the same position as during the character reach production. In addition, it is preferable to set the size of the simulated image of the operation unit to the same size.
For example, during both the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect", it is preferable to display the operation unit simulated image in the center of the display area.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand the operation unit to be operated.

It should be noted that the effective period of operation of the operating unit may be the same length during the "barbell training presentation" and during the "character reaching presentation", or may be different lengths.
For example, the operation effective period during the "barbell training effect" may be longer than the operation effective period during the "character reach effect".
Alternatively, the operation valid period during the "barbell training effect" and the operation valid period during the "character reach effect" may be the same length.
Alternatively, the operation effective period during the "barbell training effect" may be shorter than the operation effective period during the "character ready-to-win effect".

Although the shape of the simulated operation part image is the same, the simulated image of the operation part may be displayed in a plurality of colors. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win may be different depending on the color of the simulated image of the operation unit.
For example, either a white simulated operation part image or a red simulated operation part image can be displayed as the simulated operation part image displayed during the "barbell training effect", and the "character reach effect" can be displayed. It is preferable that any one of a white operation part simulation image, a red operation part simulation image, and a gold operation part simulation image can be displayed as the operation part simulation image displayed inside.
Alternatively, any one of a white operation part simulation image, a red operation part simulation image, and a gold operation part simulation image can be displayed as the operation part simulation image displayed during the "barbell training performance". At the same time, it is preferable to display either a white operation part simulation image or a red operation part simulation image as the operation part simulation image displayed during the "character reach effect".
It should be noted that even if the number of types of simulated operation unit images displayed during the "barbell training effect" and the number of types of simulated operation unit images displayed during the "character reach effect" are different, good.

An embodiment has been described in which the reception of the operation of the operation unit is valid only once during execution of the "barbell training effect" or during the execution of the "character reach effect", but it may be possible to execute it multiple times. When the "barbell training effect" is being executed, it is preferable to make the barbell fall a plurality of times in response to a plurality of operations.
Further, when the "character reach effect" is being executed, it is preferable that the cut-in image is displayed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of operations.
It should be noted that the simulated image of the operation unit may be displayed each time the operation acceptance is enabled. In other words, when the operation acceptance is enabled multiple times, the simulated image of the operation unit is also displayed multiple times.
In addition, even if the number of times (one time or multiple times) during the execution of the "barbell training effect" and during the execution of the "character reach effect" that the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid is the same. Alternatively, different times (one time or multiple times) may be used.
For example, while the operation reception of the operation unit is valid only once during the execution of the "barbell training effect", the operation reception of the operation unit is valid once or twice or more during the execution of the "character reach effect". It may be made effective several times.
Alternatively, while the operation acceptance of the operation unit is valid once or more than once during the execution of the "barbell training effect", the operation acceptance of the operation part is valid once during the execution of the "character reach effect". may be enabled only.
Alternatively, while the operation reception of the operation unit is valid multiple times (2 or more times) during the execution of the "barbell training effect", the operation reception of the operation unit is valid multiple times (2 or more times) during the execution of the "character reach effect". It may be made effective several times. Also, in this case, the number of times the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect" are activated may be the same or different.
For example, the number of times the operation reception of the operation unit is enabled during the execution of the "barbell training effect" may be less than the number of times the operation reception of the operation unit is enabled during the execution of the "character reach effect", May be many.

The execution time of the "barbell training effect" (10 seconds, 12 seconds, 14 seconds) is longer than the execution time of the "character reach effect" (60 seconds, 90 seconds).
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide a player who prefers the ready-to-win effect after forming the ready-to-win effect for a longer time to enjoy the ready-to-win effect.

Conversely, the execution time of the "barbell training effect" may be longer than the execution time of the "character reach effect". For example, instead of 10 seconds, 12 seconds, and 14 seconds, the execution time of the "barbell training effect" is changed to 40 seconds, 48 seconds, and 56 seconds, and the execution time of the "character reach effect" is changed to 60 seconds and 90 seconds, It may be 20 seconds or 30 seconds.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to execute the "character ready-to-win effect" in a state of heightened expectations for the occurrence of a big win by the "barbell training effect". In addition, even if the "barbell training effect" suggests that the player's expectations are low, even if the player shifts to the "character reach effect", the execution time of the "character reach effect" is short. Thereafter, it is possible to quickly switch to the variable display.

We have shown that there are "fighter character reach production" and "master character reach production" as "character reach production", and various modifications that can be applied to "character reach production". The modification may be similarly applied to each of the "ready-to-reach effect" and the "master character ready-to-reach effect".
Alternatively, a modified example may be applied to one of the "fighter character ready-to-reach effect" and the "master character ready-to-reach effect", and the modified example may not be applied to the other.
Alternatively, different modifications may be applied to each of the "fighter character ready-to-reach presentation" and the "master character ready-to-reach presentation".
In addition, the number of modified examples to be applied may be one, or a plurality of two or more may be applied.

An embodiment is shown in which, after the "barbell training effect" is executed, the rate at which the "master character reach effect" is executed is lower than the rate at which the "martial artist character reach effect" is executed. For example, after the "barbell training effect" is executed, the proportion of execution of the "fighter character reach effect" is 90%, and the proportion of execution of the "master character reach effect" is 10%. Further, as shown in FIG. 368, even if the expectation level in the case of execution of the "master character reach production" is higher than the expectation level in the case of execution of the "warrior character reach production", good.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to give a sense of surprise to a player who thought that a martial arts character who was training with a barbell would appear in the ready-to-win production as it is, and to improve interest. .

Conversely, after the "barbell training effect" is executed, the ratio of execution of the "master character reach effect" may be higher than the proportion of execution of the "martial artist character reach effect". For example, the ratio of execution of the "fighter character reach performance" may be set to 10%, and the ratio of execution of the "master character reach performance" may be set to 90%.
At this time, the expectation level when the "master character reach performance" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when the "fighter character reach performance" is executed.
According to such an embodiment, the martial arts character who has been training with a barbell finally appears in the ready-to-win production, and the level of expectation at that time is high, so that the player is greatly excited. It can be made to remember and interest can be improved.
On the other hand, the expectation level when the "master character reach performance" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when the "fighter character reach performance" is executed.
According to such an embodiment, when a martial arts character who was training with a barbell appeared in the reach production, it was possible to see a rare production that reduced interest due to low expectations. It is possible to compensate for the feeling of satisfaction and prevent the interest from decreasing.

The display state is switched from the "training end effect" state to the "character reach effect" state without executing the "reach character confirmation effect" and the "window enlargement display effect". The embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 240 may be applied. For example, at the end of the "training end effect", a predetermined background masking image is displayed, the entire display area is blackened or whitened, and a predetermined character is displayed, and at the start of the "character reach effect" these The display may be terminated gradually. In this case, the display state changes from the display states shown in FIGS. 365(e) to 365(h) to the display states shown in FIGS. 366(d) and 366(g).
According to such an embodiment, it is possible for the player to have a sense of anticipation as to which character (whether it be the martial artist character or the master character) will start the ready-to-win effect when the "character ready-to-win effect" starts. .

Which character (a martial artist character or a master character) is displayed according to the length of time for displaying a predetermined background concealing image to make the entire display area black or white or displaying a predetermined character. may be suggested.
For example, prepare two types of display time for the background concealed image: a short time (e.g., 4 seconds) and a long time (e.g., 6 seconds). If it takes a long time, it is preferable to execute a "master character reaching effect".
Conversely, if it is for a short time, the "master character ready-to-reach effect" is executed, and if it is for a long time, the "fighter character ready-to-reach effect" is executed.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player interested in how long the display of the background concealing image will continue, and which ready-to-win effect will be started when the display of the background concealing image ends. .

Note that the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed is not determined according to the display time of the background-concealing image, but is selected with a predetermined probability according to the display time of the background-concealing image. can be For example, if the display time of the background masking image is 5 seconds, the probability of selecting the “fighter character reach effect” is 50%, and the probability of selecting the “master character reach effect” is 50%. may
Alternatively, if the display time of the background masking image is short (for example, 4 seconds), the probability of selecting the "fighter character reach effect" is 90%, and the probability of selecting the "master character reach effect". is 10%, and if the display time of the background masking image is long (for example, 6 seconds), the probability of selecting the "fighter character reach effect" is 10%, and the "master character The probability that "ready effect" is selected may be 90%.
Even in such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player more interested in which ready-to-win effect is to be started.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of background concealing image display time are prepared, and the type of "character reach effect" to be executed is selected according to the display time. Then, the type of enemy character that appears in the "character reach effect" may be selected.
For example, four types of background concealment image display time (for example, 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, and 10 seconds) are prepared. In the case of 6 seconds, a "fighter character reach production" in which a warrior character appears as an enemy character is executed, and in the case of 8 seconds, a "master character reach production" in which a fake samurai character appears as an enemy character is executed. In the case of 10 seconds, a "master character reach effect" in which a fake warrior character appears as an enemy character may be executed. In this case, the longer the display time of the background concealing image is, the more expected the character ready-to-win effect will be executed.
In addition, after executing the "reach character confirmation effect", two types of display time of the background concealed image (for example, 2 seconds and 4 seconds) were prepared, and it was shown that the "martial artist character reach effect" was executed. In the state, the samurai character should be displayed for 2 seconds, and the warrior character should be displayed for 4 seconds. Similarly, in a state in which it is indicated that the "Master Character Reach Production" is to be executed, the fake samurai character is displayed for 2 seconds, and the fake warrior character is displayed for 4 seconds.
According to such an embodiment, the player can predict what kind of ready-to-win effect will be executed and what kind of enemy character will be displayed by using the time to switch the background image. It is possible to heighten expectations for a big hit.

It should be noted that although the embodiment in which the effect display is performed within the window has been shown, the same effect display may be performed over the entire display area without displaying the window. In this case, the display priority of an image such as a character may be set higher than the background image and lower than the fourth pattern, the pending number display image, and the error notification image.
The display priority of the effect display may be higher or lower than the display priority of the decorative symbols.
When the display priority of the performance display is set higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the performance display can be ensured during any of the high-speed fluctuation, the low-speed fluctuation and the temporary stop of the decorative pattern.
If the display priority of the effect display is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the effect display may be hindered by the decorative pattern. By increasing the transparency of the decorative patterns during high-speed fluctuation, the player can recognize both that the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner and that the performance display is being performed.

Thus, according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 362 to 369, it is possible to provide the player with new interests.

An embodiment including a novel effect "bomb expectation level effect" will be described below. This embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 369 and the like.

First, an outline of the “bomb expectation degree production” will be explained. In the "bomb expectation level production", in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), a prize to the second starting port 2004 (the number of prize balls in this embodiment is 1) occurs A bomb image and a countdown image are displayed when the number of pending two-start ports 2004 reaches a predetermined maximum number (specifically, four). A part of the bomb image mimics a fuse, and the end of the fuse is lit. It should be noted that whether or not to start the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" when the condition that the number of pending items is the maximum is satisfied depends on when the second start port 2004 in the peripheral control board 1510 wins. A predetermined maximum number (specifically, four) is determined in advance at the time of winning.
When it is decided to start the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" when there is a predetermined maximum number (specifically 4) of prizes, a predetermined maximum number (specifically 4) When a prize is won, the number "8" is displayed as a countdown image together with the bomb image. After the bomb image is displayed, each time a prize is awarded to the second starting port 2004, the number of the countdown image decreases by one with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) and the length of the fuse. is getting shorter. Finally, when the number in the countdown image reaches 0, a display of the bomb exploding is displayed, and the changing decorative pattern at the position where the bomb was displayed suggests the degree of expectation that the result will be a big hit. An expectation level suggestion image is displayed. As the expectation-suggestion image, "Heat", "Extreme heat", and "Are you sure?" are displayed. Expectations are higher in the order of "heat", "extreme heat", and "true?".
It should be noted that "every time a prize is won at the second starting port 2004" may be a winning that is over winning at the starting gate described later, or a winning that is not over winning. The length of the fuse may be shortened as the number of the countdown image is decremented by one with probability (for example, probability of 1/2). Further, the predetermined probability may be set to 1/1, and when the second starting port 2004 is over-won, the number of the countdown image may be reduced by one and the length of the fuse may be shortened. Regardless of whether or not the player wins, the number of the countdown image may be decreased by one and the length of the fuse may be shortened whenever the player wins the second starting gate 2004 . Note that the numbers in the countdown image are not subtracted unless the length of the fuse is shortened.

Over-winning means that the game ball wins in the second start-up port 2004 when the number of reservations in the second start-up port 2004 is four, which is the upper limit. be.
In addition, similarly, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 2002 is 4 pieces of the upper limit, it may be said that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is over winning.
On the condition that a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening 2005, more than a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening 2005 when closing the open large winning opening 2005. Sometimes. This is because there is a time lag between the detection of the winning of a predetermined number of game balls and the completion of closing of the big winning hole 2005, and the game balls may win the big winning hole 2005 during this period. is. Such a game situation may also be referred to as over winning.

In the state where the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed, if the winning to the second starting port 2004 is not detected for a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds), the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted and the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed. The images are hidden (or only one of the images may be hidden so that the player can recognize that the bomb expectation effect itself is being performed).
Further, when 6 seconds have elapsed since the bomb image and the countdown image were hidden, the execution of the "expectation degree of bomb effect" is terminated.
On the other hand, when the bomb image and the countdown image are not displayed or only one of the images is not displayed, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed when winning at the second start opening 2004 is detected. When the display is resumed, the same processing as when the winning to the second starting port 2004 is detected while the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed is performed (applied with a probability of 1/2). A determination is made as to whether or not the number is decreased by one), and a bomb image and a countdown image are displayed according to the determination result.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 370 and 371, images displayed in the “expectation degree of bomb effect” will be described.
FIGS. 370(a) to 370(h) show eight bomb images, first to eighth bomb images, and countdown images corresponding to each bomb image. Each bomb image consists of a portion representing a spherical bomb, a portion representing a fuse, and a portion representing a burning portion at the end of the fuse. The length of the fuse is the longest in the eighth bomb image, decreases in order from the seventh bomb image to the sixth bomb image, and is the shortest in the first bomb image.
Also, as a countdown image, a predetermined number is positioned above the portion representing the spherical bomb. The size of the number on the countdown image corresponds to the length of the fuse of each bomb image. In other words, the length of the fuse can be recognized by the numbers displayed as the countdown image.
Also, as shown in the drawing, the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed at positions that do not overlap. This ensures the visibility of both images.
In the "bomb expectation effect" described later, by displaying the eighth bomb image, the seventh bomb image, the sixth bomb image, ..., the second bomb image, the first bomb image, the fuse It expresses how the length of is getting shorter.

FIG. 371(a) shows an explosion image. The explosion image is an image that is displayed when a starting prize is won while the first bomb image is being displayed.
FIGS. 371(b) to 371(d) show expectations suggestive images. The expectation-suggestion image is an image displayed after the display of the explosion image ends.
As shown in each figure, there are three types of expectation suggestive images, namely, "Heat", "Extreme Heat", and "Really?", each of which suggests a different degree of expectation. Specifically, the degree of expectation for “heat” is 20%, the degree of expectation for “extreme heat” is 40%, and the degree of expectation for “right?” is 100%.
This expectation level is merely an example, and the expectation level of "heat" may be 10%, the expectation level of "very hot" may be 20%, and the expectation level of "right?" may be 100%.
Also, although the expectation level of "correct?" is set to 100%, it may be set to 90% or 95%.
Note that the types of expectation level suggesting images are not limited to three types, and may be two or more types (for example, four to ten types may be used).

The “expectation level effect for bombs” will be described below with reference to the flow charts shown in FIGS.
FIG. 372 is a flow chart showing the bomb expectation effect execution processing. Note that the bomb expectation effect execution processing is executed periodically from the main routine of the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control unit regular processing described with reference to FIG. 95, etc.) when it is decided to execute the bomb expectation effect effect. It is a subroutine that is explicitly called. FIG. 373 is a flow chart showing bomb image display processing. Also, FIG. 374 is a flow chart showing bomb image display stop processing.
The bomb image display processing and the bomb image display stop processing are subroutines called from the bomb expectation effect execution processing.

At step S140 in the bomb expectation degree effect execution process, it is determined whether or not an expectation degree suggestion image is displayed. If the expectation level suggesting image is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S142, and if the expectation level suggesting image is displayed, the process proceeds to step S168.

In step S142, it is determined whether or not an explosion image is displayed. If the explosion image is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S146, and if the explosion image is displayed, the process proceeds to step S164.

In step S146, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations for the second starting port 2004 is four. If the number of reservations of the second start port 2004 is 4, the process proceeds to step S148, and if the number of reservations of the second start port 2004 is not 4 (that is, 0 to 3), go to step S162 Transition.

At step S148, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 2004. FIG. When the game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, the process proceeds to step S150, and when the game ball has not entered the second starting port 2004, the process proceeds to step S162.

In step S150, it is determined whether the display of the bomb image is being interrupted. When the display of the bomb image is being interrupted, the process proceeds to step S152. If the display of the bomb image is not being interrupted, the process proceeds to step S154.

In step S152, display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed. The displayed bomb image and countdown image may be the same bomb image and countdown image that were displayed before the display was interrupted, or an image that is advanced by one (for example, the countdown number is hidden at 5, 4, etc.) when resumed. After that, the process proceeds to step S154.

In step S154, it is determined whether or not the bomb expectation effect execution flag is 1. When the bomb expectation effect execution flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S156. If the bomb expectation effect execution flag is not 1, the process proceeds to step S158.

The bomb image display processing in step S156 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S180, it is determined whether or not the bomb image development lottery has been won. Note that the explosive image development lottery is, for example, a lottery that wins with a probability of 1/2 and loses with a probability of 1/2. If the bomb image development lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S182, and if the bomb image development lottery is lost, the process returns to the bomb expectation effect execution process.

In step S182, it is determined whether or not the first bomb image is displayed. When the first bomb image is displayed, the process proceeds to step S184, and when the first bomb image is not displayed (when the second to eighth bomb images are displayed), the process proceeds to step S186. Transition.

In step S184, the first bomb image is hidden and the explosion image is displayed. Also, the number "0" is displayed as the next countdown image. After that, it returns to the bomb expectation effect execution processing.

In step S186, the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed as the bomb image and countdown image. For example, when the number "8" is displayed as the eighth bomb image and the countdown image, the number "7" is displayed as the seventh bomb image and the countdown image. After that, it returns to the bomb expectation effect execution processing.

Although the bomb image display processing has been described with reference to FIG. 373, the description will return to the bomb expectation effect execution processing with reference to FIG.

In step S158, 1 is set to the bomb expectation effect execution flag.

In step S160, display of the bomb image and the countdown image is started. The bomb image displayed first is the eighth bomb image. Also, the number "8" is displayed as a countdown image.

The bomb image display stop processing in step S162 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S200, it is determined whether or not the winning to the second starting port 2004 continues for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds) while the bomb image is being displayed. If there is no winning to the second starting port 2004, the process proceeds to step S202. If there is a prize for the second starting port 2004, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S202, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image being displayed is interrupted. After that, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not the winning to the second opening 2004 continues for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds) from the start of interruption of display of the bomb image. If there is no winning to the second starting port 2004, the process proceeds to step S206. When there is a prize for the second starting port 2004, the process returns to the bomb expectation effect execution process.

In step S206, 0 is set to the bomb expectation effect execution flag. After that, it returns to the bomb expectation effect execution processing. Since there is no process to be executed in the returned bomb expectation effect execution process, the process returns to the main routine. In the main routine, when the bomb expectation effect execution flag changes from 1 to 0, the execution of the bomb expectation effect is terminated, and the bomb is continued until it is decided to execute the bomb expectation effect effect again. Expectation degree production execution processing is not executed.
In addition, it is possible to terminate the bomb expectation effect in the middle by judging whether the winning to the second starting port 2004 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 6 seconds) from the start of the interruption of the display of the bomb image (for example, counting down). The display does not progress to 0 and ends at 5, etc.), but it is also possible not to end the bomb expectation effect in the middle.

Although the bomb image display stop processing has been described with reference to FIG. 374, the description returns to the bomb expectation effect execution processing with reference to FIG.

In step S164, it is determined whether two seconds have elapsed since the display of the explosion image started. If two seconds have passed since the explosion image started to be displayed, the process proceeds to step S166. If two seconds have not elapsed since the explosion image started to be displayed, the process returns to the main routine.

In step S166, the explosion image and the countdown image are hidden, and the expectation suggesting image is displayed. The expectation suggesting image to be displayed is determined based on the result of the special lottery. After that, it returns to the main routine. In addition, based on the results of the special lottery, even for winnings that are not over-winning, the numbers in the countdown image will decrease by one with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) and the length of the fuse will be reduced. If it is set to become shorter, when the explosion image is displayed, it will either be in a state where there is a change but no suspension, or a state where there is a change and there is also a suspension. In some cases, the expectation suggestion image for the fluctuation is displayed, and the expectation suggestion image is displayed even if the fluctuation being performed is completed, and the expectation suggestion image is displayed for one of the holds. sometimes. In other words, it may be based on the result of a lottery performed at the start of fluctuation, or may be based on the result of a so-called look-ahead lottery.

In step S168, it is determined whether or not 3 seconds have passed since the display of the expectation suggestive image started. If three seconds have passed since the display of the expectation level suggesting image started, the process proceeds to step S170. If 3 seconds have not passed since the explosion image started to be displayed, the process returns to the main routine.

In step S170, the expectation suggestive image is hidden.
Subsequently, in step S172, 0 is set to the bomb expectation effect execution flag. After that, it returns to the main routine.
In the main routine, when the bomb expectation effect execution flag changes from 1 to 0, the execution of the bomb expectation effect is terminated, and the bomb is continued until it is decided to execute the bomb expectation effect effect again. Expectation degree production execution processing is not executed.
In other words, the expectation suggestive image is displayed 2 seconds after the explosion image is displayed, and the expectation suggestive image is hidden 3 seconds after the expectation suggestive image is displayed. The time to display the expectation suggestion image is longer than the time until it is displayed), but it may happen that the change is not performed 2 seconds after the explosion image is displayed. Therefore, the expectation level suggesting image may be displayed together with the explosion image. Concretely, if a single shot is performed while the bomb expectation degree performance is being executed although no variation is performed, the bomb expectation degree performance progresses each time the game ball wins the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加Because it can be done.

A specific display mode in the "expectation degree of bomb effect" will be described below with reference to FIGS. 375 and 376. FIG.
"Bomb expectation production" is executed in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). In the time-saving state, the probability that the game ball wins the second starting port 2004 is higher than in the non-time-saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Also, since the second starting port 2004 is provided on the right side of the game area, the player hits right.
It should be noted that FIG. 375 shows a time chart of an effect example in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 376 shows a display state at a predetermined timing during the production example.

First, with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 376, production example 1 will be described. Rendering example 1 shows an rendering example when it is assumed that the bomb image development lottery is won in all of the multiple starting prizes for the second starting port 2004 and the next bomb image is displayed. As described above, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2, and the probability of losing the lottery is 1/2. The original bomb image continues to be displayed, but now all the next bomb images are displayed.
In addition, the timings at which the starting prize is generated in the production example 1 are timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t22.

FIG. 376(a) shows the display state in the display area immediately before timing t0 (immediately before the start of the variable display). At this time, the number of reservations for the second starting port 2004 is four, and "4" is displayed as the number of reservations display image. In addition, it is in a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), and is a game state in which the player is required to hit to the right. In the display area, there are usually a background image C, the number of consecutive wins (the numerical part of "win x 15") and the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive chances (the numerical part of "Over 12,000 cars!"). , the characters ``Next destination: Owari'', the characters ``Musha training RUSH'', the martial artist character and the words of the martial artist character ("Musha training all over the country!"), and the characters ``Right-handed!'' The arrow image of , and the stationary decorative pattern are displayed. These characters and images are continuously displayed even during the variable display of the decorative symbols.
At timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the same time, the number of reserved images is reduced by one to three, and the standby reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is enlarged while moving leftward and displayed as the current reserved image in the current reserved display area. Further, the standby reserved images displayed in the second to fourth reserved display areas are moved to the left and displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. As a result, the standby reserved image is not displayed in the fourth reserved display area. Also, "3" is displayed as the pending number display image.
FIG. 376(b) shows the display state at this time (predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t9).
From timing t0 to at least timing t33, the decorative symbols are variably displayed at high speed. The variable display mode of the decorative symbols after timing t33 will be described later.

At timing t9, a game ball enters the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁A standby reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved display area according to the winning. Also, an eighth bomb image and a countdown image (number "8") are displayed on the left side of the display area. The display priority of the bomb images (first bomb image to eighth bomb image) and the countdown image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. Also, "4" is displayed as the number-of-holds display image.
FIG. 376(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, at timing t10, a game ball enters the second starting port 2004. Incidentally, this prize is generated when the number of pending games at the second starting port 2004 is four (as described above, this is an over prize). According to this winning, the eighth bomb image changes to the seventh bomb image. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "8" to the number "7". The length of the fuse is shortened by changing the eighth bomb image to the seventh bomb image.
FIG. 376(d) shows the display state at this time.

Similarly, at timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19, the game ball enters the second start hole 2004. According to each winning prize, the bomb image sequentially changes from the seventh bomb image to the first bomb image. At the same time, the countdown image sequentially changes from the number "7" to the number "1". Also, the length of the fuse is gradually shortened according to the change in the bomb image.
FIG. 376(e) shows a display state in which the first bomb image and the countdown image of the numeral "1" are displayed (the display period is from timing t19 to timing t22).

Next, at timing t22, a game ball enters the second starting port 2004. According to this winning, the first bomb image changes to an explosion image. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "1" to the number "0". The display priority of the explosion image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. The display of the explosion image is performed for 2 seconds.
FIG. 376(f) shows a display state in which the first bomb image and the countdown image of the numeral "0" are displayed (the display period is from timing t22 to timing t24).

Next, at timing t24, the display of the explosion image and the countdown image ends. Also, the expectation suggesting image is displayed at the position where the explosion image was displayed. Here, an expectation suggesting image of "extreme heat" is displayed. The expectation level suggestion image is displayed for 3 seconds.
FIG. 376(g) shows a display state in which the expectation suggesting image is displayed (the display period is from timing t24 to timing t27).

Next, at timing t27, the display of the expectation level suggesting image ends. Also, this completes the execution of the "expectation degree of bomb effect".
FIG. 376(h) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t30) after the display of the expectation level suggesting image ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 375(b) and 376, Effect Example 2 will be described. In production example 2, it is determined that the next bomb image will be displayed in some of the multiple start prizes for the second start gate 2004, and that the next bomb image will not be displayed in the other start prizes. Shows an example of the effect when it is assumed that As described above, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2, and the probability of losing the lottery is 1/2. Although the original bomb image continues to be displayed, there are cases where the next bomb image is displayed and cases where the original bomb image continues to be displayed.
In addition, the timing at which the starting prize is generated in Example 2 of effect is timing t9, timing t10, timing t12, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t17, timing t18, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t22. there is

Of these timings, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t22, the following bomb image is displayed in response to the occurrence of the starting prize. It is supposed to be done.
On the other hand, with respect to the starting winnings at timings t12, t17, and t21, the original bomb image continues to be displayed although the starting winnings have occurred. For example, at timing t12, it is determined that the original bomb image will continue to be displayed even though the starting prize will be won, so the display content of the display area will not change.
Note that the display content in the display area (specifically, the display mode of the bomb image, countdown image, explosion image, etc.) is the same as the display mode in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 375(a). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 375(c), effect example 3 will be described. In the example 3 of the effect, the start winning for the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the execution of the "expectation of the bomb effect" is started, but the player interrupts the shooting of the game ball, and the "expectation of the bomb effect" is in progress. After the change of the bomb image occurs only once in the first game, an example of the effect is shown assuming that the starting winning does not occur. Incidentally, as described above with reference to FIG. 374, if the starting prize does not occur for a predetermined period of time during execution of the "bomb expectation effect", the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted. Further, after the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted, the execution of the "expectation degree of bomb effect" is terminated when no starting prize is generated for a predetermined period of time.
It should be noted that the timings at which the starting prize is generated in example 3 of effect are timing t9 and timing t10. In addition, it is assumed that the bomb image development lottery executed in response to the starting prize at timing t10 has been won.

As shown in FIG. 375(c), at timing t9, a starting prize is generated, and display of the number "8" of the eighth bomb image and the countdown image is started. FIG. 376(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t10, a starting prize is generated, and by winning the bomb image development lottery, the number "7" is displayed as the seventh bomb image and the countdown image.
After that, no starting prize is generated, and at timing t16 (6 seconds after timing t10), the display of the number "7" as the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted. FIG. 376(h) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t22 (six seconds after timing t16), the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" ends. That is, even if a starting prize is won after timing t22, the number "7" of the seventh bomb image and the countdown image will not be displayed again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375(d), Effect Example 4 will be described. Effect example 4 is a partial modification of effect example 3. In addition to the timing shown in effect example 3, an effect example in the case of assuming that the starting prize for the second starting port 2004 occurs at timing t18 is shown. showing.
In the case of this production example, at timing t16, the display of the number "7" in the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted. The number "7" is displayed again as a countdown image.
At timing t24 (six seconds after timing t18), the display of the number "7" in the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted again.

Effect example 1 to effect example 4 in the "bomb expectation level effect" are shown, but after timing t33, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped manner in a manner indicating a failure without entering the ready-to-win state, or after entering the ready-to-win state. The decorative symbols are stop-displayed in a mode of showing a loss or a mode of showing a big hit.
After entering the ready-to-win state, a special ready-to-reach effect (for example, the above-described martial arts character ready-to-reach effect and master character ready-to-win effect) may be executed. In this case, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss or a manner indicating a big win after the performance content (result of a battle between characters, etc.) during the ready-to-win performance indicates whether or not the game is a big win.

Despite the short working hours state (low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state), a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) is selected, and then the “bomb expectation performance” is executed. When starting winnings are continuously generated for the start opening 2004, the "bomb expectation level effect" is executed only within one variation display, as in example 1 to example 4 of effect. However, in the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds) is selected at a high rate (for example, 1/2 or more). When such a relatively short variation time variation pattern (such as 1 second or 2 seconds) is selected to execute "bomb expectation degree production", time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability Even though the time saving state), a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, etc.) is selected, and the launch of the game ball is stopped even though the "bomb expectation effect" is executed. Since the starting prize does not occur for the second starting port 2004 when hitting left, before the explosion image is displayed in the "bomb expectation effect" (the first bomb image to the eighth bomb image and It is also assumed that the fluctuation is interrupted when the number as the corresponding countdown image is displayed).
In this case, even if the change is interrupted (the pattern is fixed, the next change does not start without any suspension), the "bomb expectation effect" itself continues to be displayed (the first bomb image to the eighth bomb image And the countdown image corresponding to them is displayed even if the change is interrupted (the pattern is confirmed, there is no hold and the next change does not start)), so that the "bomb expectation effect" is executed over multiple change displays. will be In this case, regarding the display result of the newly started variable display (specifically, the change that triggered the display of the explosion image in the "bomb expectation effect", or the "bomb expectation effect" ) is suggested by the expectation suggesting image for the variation prior to the variation that triggered the display of the explosion image in .
It should be noted that even when the "bomb expectation effect" is executed across the variable display, the bomb image and the countdown image continue to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to keep the player aware that the "bomb expectation effect" is being executed, thereby maintaining the interest.

According to the aspects such as the production example 1 and the production example 2, the bomb image is switched to the next bomb image with a predetermined probability corresponding to the occurrence of the starting prize, and the fuse gradually shortens and counts down. Since the image-based countdown is shown to the player, the player who wants to know the degree of expectation will actively play the game to generate the starting prize. Also, by displaying numbers as the countdown image, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the progress of the effect. In addition, when the bomb image is switched, the countdown image is always switched, and when the countdown image decreases toward 0 and reaches 0, the expectation suggesting image is displayed. For example, if you watch the ``bomb expectation effect'' a few times, you can quickly understand what kind of effect it is. Also, the player who understands the content of the presentation will feel an exhilaration as the numbers in the countdown image decrease toward zero.
Alternatively, there are a certain number of players who do not interrupt the shooting of game balls because they find it troublesome to interrupt the shooting of game balls. Also, some amusement arcades prohibit the interruption of shooting game balls. In such a case, over-winning may inevitably occur, and the player may feel as if he or she has lost any profit from the initial winning, and may lose interest. According to the embodiment, the occurrence of over-winning causes the fuse to gradually become shorter, and finally suggests the degree of expectation, so that the interest can be improved.
On the other hand, a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation, or a player who does not want to shoot a game ball considering the risk of reducing the number of game balls rather than knowing the degree of expectation, may temporarily shoot a game ball. Even if it does, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image can be interrupted or canceled by immediately stopping the shooting of the game ball (in this case, the mode such as the example 3 and the example 4 of the effect can be.).
Also, if such a player changes his mind in the middle of the game, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image can be restarted by restarting the shooting of the game balls. For example, in production example 4, if the player continues to shoot the game ball after timing t18, it is possible to display the expectation suggesting image.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, the player continues to shoot game balls, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, contributing to the sales of the gaming parlor. . In addition, since the player continues to shoot the game ball at least until the starting prize is generated a plurality of times, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. On the other hand, a player who does not like the suggestion of the degree of expectation can avoid the suggestion of the degree of expectation by the "expectation bomb performance" by interrupting the shooting of the game ball.

An embodiment has been described in which the display of the bomb image continues when the variable display ends while the bomb image is being displayed. The display may be ended, and the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" may be ended.
Alternatively, during the variable display, the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" may be terminated at the timing when the decorative pattern forms the ready-to-win state or at the timing when the ready-to-win effect is started.

Based on the pending number of the second starting port 2004 during the time saving state (during the low probability time saving state or high probability time saving state), the embodiment in which the "bomb expectation production" is started is shown. In addition, since the frequency that the movable piece 2004a is in the open state increases during the time saving state, it is possible to increase the number of reservations in a short time. For this reason, the number of pending second start ports 2004 tends to be maximized, which can be an opportunity for the player to stop shooting game balls. It becomes possible to give motivation to continue the launch.
On the other hand, based on the pending number of the first starting port 2002 during the left strike (during the low probability non-shortening working hours state or high probability non-shortening working hours state), it may be possible to execute the "bomb expectation degree production". It should be noted that the first starting port 2002 is not provided with a member that changes the winning rate, such as the movable piece 2004a in the second starting port 2004 . It should be noted that when executing the "bomb expectation effect" based on the number of pending first start openings 2002, it is preferable to display the normal background image A or the normal background image B as the background image.

In addition, when a bomb image is displayed (when one of the bomb images from the 8th bomb image to the 1st bomb image is displayed), the degree of expectation for the hit is assumed to be the same regardless of the type of bomb image. is desirable.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player who has been shooting the game ball because he/she wants to know the level of expectation indicated by the level of expectation suggestive image can "expect Even if you have a feeling of anxiety that "I don't want to see the expectation level suggestive image after all", you can immediately stop shooting the game ball Since the expectation level suggesting image is not displayed, it is possible to provide an effect capable of coping with the player's psychological change, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation until the expectation level suggesting image is displayed.

A plurality of colors may be provided for the color of the bomb image, and different expectations may be suggested depending on the color of the bomb image.
For example, a white bomb image, a red bomb image, and a gold bomb image may be displayed as the bomb images. Also, at this time, it is preferable that the degree of expectation increases in the order of the white bomb image, the red bomb image, and the gold bomb image.
The color of the entire bomb image may be changed, or only part of the bomb image may be changed.
When changing the color of a portion of the bomb image, the portion to be changed may be one or two of the portion representing the spherical bomb, the portion representing the fuse, and the burning portion at the end of the fuse. In the two cases, it is preferable to use the same color instead of using different colors.
It should be noted that when displaying the next bomb image, it is preferable to keep the same color for the part whose color has changed, or change it to a color with a higher degree of expectation. Conversely, it is better not to change to a color with a low degree of expectation.
For example, in a state where the 7th bomb image whose burning part is red is displayed, if the bomb image development lottery is won and it is decided to display the 6th bomb image, the 6th bomb image whose burning part is red is displayed. Either the bomb image or the sixth bomb image in which the burning portion is gold is displayed, but the sixth bomb image in which the burning portion is white should not be displayed.
It should be noted that the timing of changing to a mode with a high degree of expectation in this manner may be the timing of displaying the next bomb image, or after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of displaying the next bomb image. You may make it change. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the firing interval is generally about 0.6 seconds. Since it is triggered by winning a prize, it is desirable to set the time to be shorter than the interval time between shots. The reason why the expectation level is changed to a higher mode is that the game ball can be recognized as the game ball that has been shot, which increases the sense of exhilaration. In addition, if the predetermined time is longer than the firing interval time, for example, 1.0 seconds, the red color is displayed again before the red color is displayed even though it has been determined to change to red. It may be decided to enter the starter door 2004 and turn gold. In such a case, gold may be displayed after red is displayed once, or red may be skipped (without displaying) and gold may be displayed.

Instead of the bomb image, the color of the countdown image may be changed in the same manner as the bomb image. Alternatively, when changing the color of the entire bomb image or part of the bomb image, the color of the countdown image may be the same color or a different color, or only the countdown image may be changed.

The color of the explosion image may also be changed to the same color as the first bomb image (whole or part) or the countdown image. For example, if the golden first bomb image is displayed, the golden explosion image should be displayed.

Although the embodiment in which the degree of expectation is indicated by the color of the bomb image or the countdown image has been shown, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the type of the bomb image or the countdown image, which is not limited to the color. For example, three bomb images, a small bomb image, a medium bomb image, and a large bomb image, may be displayed, and the larger the size of the bomb image, the higher the expectation. Note that the same aspect can be adopted for the countdown image.

It should be noted that the eighth bomb image and the countdown number 8 are always displayed when the predetermined maximum number (specifically, four) is reached when the second start opening 2004 is won. When is displayed, any one of a white bomb image, a red bomb image, and a gold bomb image may be displayed. In this case, the red bomb image and the gold bomb image, which have relatively high expectations, are suddenly displayed at the start of the "bomb expectation rendering". At the timing when the game ball is likely to enter the second starting hole 2004, the player can feel the exhilaration that the highly anticipated bomb image will be displayed.
Although the bomb image is used as an example, the color of a part of the bomb image or the countdown image may be changed as described above.

An embodiment is shown in which the expectation suggesting image is displayed on the condition that the start winning occurs multiple times (for example, at least 8 times) during the "bomb expectation performance" and the bomb image development lottery is won a predetermined number of times. . Conversely, the degree of expectation is not suggested to the player until the start-up winning occurs multiple times. As a result, the operating rate of the game machine can be increased. It should be noted that the number of times is not limited to 8, and may be any number of times from 3 to 10, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine and the probability of starting winning.

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 (in both cases of over-winning and non-over-winning), a bomb image development lottery is carried out, and the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is set to 1/2. Although the embodiment is shown, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery may be other probability, such as 1/3 or 2/3.
Alternatively, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 2004 without performing the bomb image development lottery (both when over winning or not over winning), the next bomb image and countdown image are always displayed. Alternatively, an explosion image may be displayed. This modification can be realized by not performing the process of step S180 in the flow chart of FIG. 373 or by setting the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery to 1/1.

An example in which the expectation level suggestive image in the "bomb expectation effect" shows the expectation level for the display result of the decorative pattern during the variable display, and one of the standby displayed in the first to fourth reservation display areas An example is shown in which the degree of expectation for the hold is shown. It may be indicated by a display attached with an arrow or the like to the standby pending image whether or not the “performance effect” is being executed, or the display with the arrow or the like may be displayed in a plurality of standby pending (for example, the first pending display area and the third pending display area area), and may be a display effect corresponding to any of the attached standby reserves. In this case, both may be chances and only one may be chances.

In steps S150 and S152 of FIG. 372, an embodiment has been described in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed. You may make it display an image and a countdown image. If the number "1" is displayed as the first bomb image and the countdown image, it is preferable to display the number "0" as the explosion image and the countdown image.
According to this embodiment, when the display is resumed, the explosion image and the countdown image are displayed one step ahead of when the display was interrupted. It can make you feel that you got one ball.

As a special ready-to-reach performance, the first ready-to-reach performance during time-shortening, the second ready-to-reach performance during time-shortening, and the third ready-to-reach performance during time-shortening may be executed during the time-shortening state (low-probability time-shortening state, high-probability time-shortening state). In addition, in the time-saving first reach performance to the time-saving third reach performance, the martial arts character fights with different opponent characters, and if the martial arts character wins, the decorative pattern stops in a manner indicating a big hit after the end of the reach performance. is displayed, and then a big win game is started. On the other hand, when the martial arts character loses, after the end of the ready-to-win effect, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure, and then the next decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.
In addition, the first reach production during the time reduction, the second reach production during the time reduction, and the third reach production during the time reduction are each based on the production pattern determined at the start of the variable display, and after a predetermined number of seconds from the start of the variable display, reach production is started to run.
Expectations increase in the order of the first reach performance during time reduction, the second reach performance during time reduction, and the third reach performance during time reduction.

Since the period during which the "bomb expectation effect" is executed changes depending on the shooting state of the game ball, a game situation may occur in which the ready-to-win effect is started while the "bomb expectation effect" is being executed.
In this case, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image should be interrupted at the timing when all ready-to-win effects are started. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the ready-to-win effect.
Alternatively, for some reach effects, the bomb image and countdown image will continue to be displayed even during the reach effect, and for other reach effects, the display of the bomb image and countdown image will be interrupted at the timing when the reach effect starts. You may make it By adopting such an embodiment, depending on the type of ready-to-win effect, the bomb image and the countdown image may or may not be displayed during execution of the ready-to-win effect.
For example, during the execution of the third reach production during the time reduction with the highest degree of expectation, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted, and the first reach production during the time reduction and the second reach production during the time reduction with relatively low expectations During execution, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image may be continued.
In this way, by increasing the number of ready-to-reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is not interrupted (hidden) than the number of ready-to-reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden), It can be reminded that the ready-to-reach effect in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted (hidden) is a ready-to-reach effect with a high degree of special expectation.
Also, even if the number of ready-to-reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is not interrupted (hidden) is less than the number of ready-to-reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden) good. In this case, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation even in the second reach production during time saving, which has a relatively low degree of expectation (the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted in the third reach production during time saving, which has a high degree of expectation ( (Hiding), the player will have an illusion that the display of the bomb image and the countdown image will be interrupted (hidden).
Also, the number of ready-to-win effects in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted (hidden) may be the same as the number of ready-to-reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is not interrupted (hidden). It should be noted that the ready-to-reach production here is a ready-to-reach production excluding the so-called normal reach that is performed while the background image is displayed during time saving.
In such a case, the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed from the start of the fluctuation until the ready-to-win effect is started (until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation), and are hidden during the ready-to-win effect, but the bomb It is desirable that the time during which the bomb image and the countdown image are hidden is longer than the time during which the image and the countdown image are displayed.

If the martial artist character loses in the first reach performance during the time reduction to the third reach performance during the time reduction (when a display that suggests a loss is made in the display that suggests the result of the win), the result of the win is suggested. It is preferable to restart the display of the bomb image and the countdown image at the timing after the display of the display to be performed and before the timing at which the decorative pattern is displayed in a fixed stop. With such an embodiment, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image can alleviate the disappointment of the player who found out that the result of the special lottery was a loss.

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 during execution of the first reach performance during the time reduction to the third reach performance during the time reduction (including both cases of over winning and not over winning), any bomb image and the countdown image, the display should not be restarted. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the ready-to-win effect. Although it is desirable not to restart the display of any of the bomb images (the first bomb image to the eighth bomb image) and the countdown images corresponding to them, a predetermined bomb image (for example, the first bomb image) image) and the countdown image corresponding to them may be restarted.

When the martial artist character wins in the first reach production during the time reduction to the third reach production during the time reduction (when a display that suggests a big hit is performed in the display that suggests the result of winning), the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped. Then, the bomb image and the countdown image are kept in a non-display state until the big win game state is ended, and the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed at the timing when the next variable display is started after the big win game state is ended. be. By setting it as such an embodiment, a player can be made to concentrate on a jackpot game state.
It should be noted that the "expectation effect for bombs" may be ended at the timing when the variable display of decorative symbols is finished. In this case, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is not restarted after the big win game state is ended.
In addition, when the fighter character wins in the first reach performance during the time reduction to the third reach performance during the time reduction (when a display that suggests a hit is performed in a display that suggests the result of winning), the decorative pattern is confirmed. You may make it restart the display of a bomb image and a countdown image by the time it stops. In this case, expectations can be provided after the end of the big win game state.

An embodiment has been described in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed at the timing when the next variable display is started after the end of the jackpot game state. In the 1st reach production to the 3rd reach production in the short time, after the timing when the martial artist character won (the display indicating the result of winning and indicating the big hit was performed), until the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The display of the bomb image and the countdown image may be resumed at the timing of . According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that a further big win will occur (maybe consecutive wins will occur) with respect to the variable display that is executed after the big win. .
Although the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed at the timing when the big win game state ends and the next variable display starts, the big win game state ends and the next variable display starts. The bomb image and the countdown image may be displayed at an earlier timing. In such cases, a sense of anticipation can be provided even before the change is made.

An embodiment has been shown in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed at the timing when the big win game state ends and the next variable display is started. The bomb image and countdown image displayed at the time of restarting are the same bomb image and countdown image as before restarting. According to such an embodiment, the variation display that is executed after the big win can make the player feel the expectation that another big win will occur.
On the other hand, when restarting the display of the bomb image and the countdown image, the bomb image and the countdown image different from those before the interruption of display (become non-display) may be displayed.
For example, the eighth bomb image and the countdown image (the number "8") may be displayed regardless of the types of the displayed bomb image and countdown image, and the countdown may be performed from the beginning. According to such an embodiment, the operation of the game machine can be enhanced.
Alternatively, the bomb image and the countdown image may be displayed one step ahead compared to before the display was interrupted. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the game balls have been wasted.

An embodiment has been described in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted and hidden when no winning to the second starting port 2004 has occurred for six consecutive seconds while the bomb image is being displayed. The time during which the image and the countdown image are not displayed may be decided by a predetermined lottery instead of being set to 6 seconds. For example, 6 seconds may be selected with a probability of 1/2 and 10 seconds may be selected with a probability of 1/2 at the start of the "bomb expectation effect".
Further, when a prize is won in the second starting port 2004, 10 seconds may be added by a predetermined lottery with a probability of 3/4, for example. If 10 seconds are added in this way, it will be hidden if there is no winning to the second start gate 2004 for 16 seconds (6 seconds + 10 seconds). There will be multiple times of
Specifically, the case where 6 seconds is determined at the start of the "expectation degree of bomb effect" and no prize is awarded to the second starting port 2004 until all changes including suspension are completed will be described. In this case, if 6 seconds have elapsed before all the changes including suspension are completed, there will be no change, and the bomb image and the countdown image will be hidden. At this time, if the second starting gate 2004 is won, the bomb image and the countdown image are redisplayed (the redisplayed image may be the same image as before the non-display, or may be a different image). ), the time until it disappears again is sometimes 6 seconds and sometimes 16 seconds. In this way, there are multiple patterns of time from the start of the fluctuation until the bomb image and the countdown image are hidden, and the player who thought that the bomb image and the countdown image were hidden in 6 seconds was hidden in 6 seconds. Witnessing what was not done increases the sense of exhilaration. Also, by setting the number of seconds to be added to be substantially infinite, a pattern may be provided in which the bomb image and the countdown image are not hidden from the start of the variation until the end of the variation. This is because it is possible to make the user clearly recognize that the "bomb expectation effect" is being performed.

Although an embodiment has been described in which when a prize is awarded to the second starting port 2004, the next bomb image with a shorter fuse and the next countdown image are displayed at the same position instead of the currently displayed bomb image and countdown image. , the next bomb image and the countdown image may be displayed at positions different from those of the original bomb image and the countdown image.
For example, the next bomb image and the next countdown image may be displayed while swinging in the horizontal direction when a prize is awarded to the second starting port 2004 .
FIG. 377(a) shows the display state before the winning to the second starting port 2004 occurs. In addition, FIG. 377(b) shows the display state after the winning to the second starting port 2004 has occurred. In the drawing, the seventh bomb image and the number "7" of the countdown image are displayed with being moved to the right. FIG. 377(c) also shows the display state after the winning to the second starting port 2004 has occurred. In the drawing, the seventh bomb image and the number "7" of the countdown image are displayed while being moved to the left.
It should be noted that such a swinging display is preferably continued for a predetermined time (for example, one second) after the display of the next bomb image and new countdown image is started.
In this way, by making the bomb image visible as if it were swinging, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that a prize has been won in the second start opening 2004 . In addition, it is possible to make the player feel nervous that the bomb is about to explode.

Note that the bomb image and the countdown image may be dynamically displayed in a mode other than the shaking display. For example, each time a new bomb image and countdown image are displayed, the bomb image and countdown image may gradually move linearly toward a predetermined position.
For example, the bomb image and the countdown image may be moved toward the current pending display area and finally displayed to the immediate left of the current pending image. FIG. 377(d) shows a state in which a bomb image is displayed to the left of the current pending image.
The final display position of the bomb image and the countdown image may not be positioned immediately to the left of the current pending image, but may be a position where part or all of the current pending image and the bomb image overlap. At this time, the bomb image may be displayed in front of the current pending image, or may be displayed behind the current pending image.
FIG. 377(e) shows a display state in which the first bomb image is displayed in front of the current pending image.

At the start of the ``bomb expectation effect'', the number ``8'' of the eighth bomb image and the countdown image were displayed at the same time, but the timing of displaying the bomb image and the timing of displaying the countdown image may be different. .
For example, at the start of the "bomb expectation effect", only the 8th bomb image is displayed, and at the timing of displaying the 7th bomb image, a countdown image (in this case, the countdown starts from the number "7") is displayed. may start.
Alternatively, only the bomb image may be displayed from the start of the "bomb expectation effect" to the middle, and the display of the countdown image may be started at a predetermined stage. For example, display of a countdown image (in this case, the countdown starts from the number "4") may be started at the timing when the fourth bomb image is displayed.
According to such an embodiment, the bomb image, which is difficult for other players to distinguish, is displayed first compared to the countdown image, in which the stages are clearly indicated by numbers. It becomes difficult for other players to know that is being executed, and the player can enjoy himself/herself. Also, a player who does not want to shoot the game ball unnecessarily can stop the shooting of the game ball immediately even if the bomb image is displayed, thereby avoiding the display of the countdown image. Therefore, it is possible to suspend or cancel the "bomb expectation effect" before the volume of the effect as a whole appears.

An embodiment has been shown in which the bomb image and the countdown image can simultaneously change to the next bomb image and the countdown image at the timing of winning the second start gate 2004 when the "bomb expectation effect" is executed. The image may have different timings for changing to the next bomb image and the countdown image. For example, although the next bomb image is displayed at the timing of winning the second opening 2004, the next countdown image is not displayed at the timing of winning the second opening 2004, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds later), the next countdown image may be displayed. In this way, both a situation in which the next image is displayed at the same time, and a situation in which the next countdown image is displayed with a delay, meet predetermined conditions (for example, winning the delayed lottery, the first bomb, etc.). image to the eighth bomb image) may be displayed with a delay. In such cases, the percentage of situations that occur at the same time as the delay situations may be the same, or the delay situations may occur more easily or less frequently.

An embodiment has been described in which display is sequentially switched from the eighth bomb image to the first bomb image, but the portion representing the fuse and the portion representing the burning portion at the end of the fuse are more dynamically displayed. You may make it Specifically, when switching from one bomb image to the next bomb image, the fuse may be dynamically displayed so that the length of the fuse is gradually shortened. At this time, it is preferable to display dynamically such that the burning portion moves as the length of the fuse becomes shorter.
Also, the countdown image may be switched to the next countdown image at the timing when the dynamic display ends and the switching of one bomb image to the next bomb image is completed.

An embodiment has been described in which the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed on the condition that the second start gate 2004 is won, but the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed under other conditions. It may be possible to
For example, a predetermined time elapses after the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed with the start of the "bomb expectation performance" or the occurrence of a prize at the second starting port 2004 during execution of the "bomb expectation performance" as a trigger. , the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed.
Specifically, after the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed at the timing when two seconds have passed and the timing when four seconds have passed. If no game ball wins in the second starting hole 2004 for 6 consecutive seconds, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted. , it is necessary to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 during the remaining two seconds.
Similarly, after the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed at the timing when one second has passed and the timing when two seconds have passed. In this case, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 during the remaining four seconds.
It should be noted that, if a prize is won in the second starting port 2004 before the predetermined time has elapsed, it is preferable to measure again whether the predetermined time has elapsed or not from the beginning.
According to such an embodiment, part of the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is automatically performed, and the effect can be enjoyed with a relatively small number of shots of the game balls. There is an effect that a player who does not like to actively shoot a game ball can reduce the resistance to participate in the production.

Simultaneously with the end of the display of the explosion image and the countdown image, there is provided an embodiment in which an expectation suggestive image of one of "heat", "hot", and "hit?" is displayed at the position where the explosion image was displayed. Although shown, the following display modes may be employed.
For example, instead of the position where the explosion image was displayed, the position where the countdown image was displayed may be adopted as the position where the expectation level suggestive image is displayed. In this case, the expectation suggesting image is displayed at the position where the number "0" was displayed in the countdown image.
Alternatively, the expectation level suggesting image may be displayed at a position different from the positions where the explosion image and the countdown image were displayed. In this case, the position where the expectation level suggesting image is displayed is preferably a predetermined position.
According to such an embodiment, since the display of the explosion image and the countdown image is finished at the timing when the expectation level suggesting image is displayed, the player's attention can be focused on the expectation level suggesting image. . In addition, since the player can recognize in advance the position where the expectation level suggesting image is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the expectation level suggesting image.

As the expectation level suggesting image, a display of "change!" that suggests a change in the current pending image or the standby pending image may be displayed. In this case, it is suggested that the colors of the current pending image and the standby pending image change to colors with a higher degree of expectation (the relationship between the color of the pending image and the degree of expectation is as described above). For example, the color of the current pending image or the standby pending image may be changed from white to one of blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors.
Similarly, a display saying "change twice!" may be performed. In this case, the color change of the current pending image and the standby pending image is performed twice. Note that it is the same reserved image that changes twice, and different reserved images do not change once.
Note that it is preferable to change the current pending image and the standby pending image during the display of the expectation level suggesting image or at the timing when the display of the expectation level suggesting image ends.
Also, based on the look-ahead processing, the number of holdings in which the result of the special lottery is a big hit may be counted among the four waiting holdings, and the number may be notified by an expectation suggesting image.
For example, as the expectation level suggestive images, displays such as "win x 1", "win x 2", "win x 2", and "win x 4" may be displayed. In this case, it will be suggested to the player that the four waiting holds contain one to four special lottery results that result in big wins.
Also, an example of displaying an expectation suggestive image (such as "heat!" and "change!") is shown after the explosion image is displayed, but instead of the expectation suggestive image, it is displayed only during the time saving. Display that is not a production that does not happen and expects a big hit (as shown in FIG. 376 (b), unlike the basic information (such as the number of consecutive wins and the number of acquisitions) displayed during time saving, for example, time saving state and the time spent in the jackpot state (for example, "40 minutes and 30 seconds have passed now!") or a message such as "Today is Sports Day!") may be displayed.

The display of the countdown image ended when the display of the explosion image ended. good. According to this embodiment, the display mode of the "bomb expectation effect" is simple, and the player can concentrate on the fact that the bomb has exploded and the image that suggests the degree of expectation that is displayed after the display of the explosion image is finished. be able to.
Alternatively, the display of the countdown image may be finished before the bomb image. For example, the display of the countdown image may end at the timing of displaying the sixth bomb image, the seventh bomb image, or the eighth bomb image. According to such an embodiment, since a clear numerical countdown is not performed, it is possible to make the player feel the excitement of when the bomb will explode.
On the other hand, the bomb image may be displayed before the countdown image is displayed. For example, the display of the bomb image may end at the timing when the numbers "3", "2", and "1" of the countdown image are displayed. According to such an embodiment, since a clear numerical countdown is performed, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player when the explosion image will be displayed.

An embodiment has been shown in which the displayed bomb image and the countdown image correspond one-to-one (see, for example, FIG. 370), but after the start of the bomb expectation effect, the winning to the second starting port 2004 is not possible. When it occurs, the eighth bomb image may continue to be displayed as it is, and the next countdown image may be displayed for the countdown image. In this case, the display of the eighth bomb image is continued even when a prize is awarded to the second starting gate 2004 after the next time, and the display is performed so that only the number of the countdown image is decremented. Also, such an effect is executed only when the result of the special lottery is a big win. In addition, as the expectation level suggesting image, characters such as "Failure" and "It's the opposite of failure!" are displayed. Also, such an effect should be executed at a low probability (for example, 1/100) when the "bomb expectation level effect" is executed. According to such an embodiment, although a player who sees the performance for the first time feels uncomfortable, a player who has seen the performance a plurality of times can be made to recognize that a big win will occur. become.
It should be noted that such effects may be executed in a state in which other bomb images are displayed, not limited to the eighth bomb image.
It should be noted that it can also be used as a one-shot announcement mode in which the performance is executed only when the result of the special lottery is a big win, and when the result of the special lottery is a big win, the strange effect (the effect in which only the countdown progresses) is always executed. good. The player selects whether to suggest or announce the result of the special lottery in either this one-shot announcement mode or the normal announcement mode (an announcement mode in which the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed to the end as described above). You may make it possible.

In addition, when the user enters the second starting port 2004 and it is determined in advance that the hit is a hit, and the "bomb expectation effect" is to be executed, the eighth "8" in the bomb image and the countdown image is displayed, and when the player enters the second start gate 2004, the game progresses up to a predetermined number (for example, up to "5" in the fifth bomb image and the countdown image). When exceeding , a sense of incongruity effect that does not progress no matter how many times the second starting port 2004 is made to win may be executed. By doing so, although the player initially feels uncomfortable that the "bomb expectation level performance" does not progress midway, it is later confirmed that the hit is confirmed when the "bomb expectation level performance" stops progressing halfway. It will be known, and interest can be enhanced when the player is allowed to enter the second starting port 2004 and does not proceed. Regarding this predetermined number, for example, when progressing to "1" of the first bomb image and the countdown image, since the expectation suggesting image will be displayed shortly, which expectation suggesting image will be displayed Therefore, it is desirable that the predetermined number is "4" or less than "4", which is the first half of the "bomb expectation effect". By doing so, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the first half of the "bomb expectation level effect" will show a strange effect, and that the second half will display a high-expectation suggestive image. It is possible to provide a production in which the decline in interest is suppressed throughout the "bomb expectation level production". It should be noted that the player may be allowed to select whether or not to execute such an effect.

An embodiment has been shown in which the displayed bomb image and the countdown image correspond one-to-one (for example, see FIG. 370), but either one may be hidden during a predetermined period.
For example, the countdown image may be hidden until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then displayed from the middle. Specifically, during the execution of the "bomb expectation effect", the countdown image is not displayed during the period from the eighth bomb image to the fifth bomb image, and the period from the fourth bomb image to the first bomb image is displayed. displays a countdown image.
Alternatively, the countdown image may be displayed until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect", and may be hidden from the middle.
Alternatively, the bomb image may be hidden until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then displayed from the middle.
Alternatively, the bomb image may be displayed until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect", and may be hidden from the middle.
Note that the timing of such display switching may be any of the seven timings for changing the bomb image and the countdown image to the next bomb image and countdown image.
According to such an embodiment, when only one of them is displayed, the player thinks that they want to display both, and shoots the game ball, thereby enhancing the operation of the gaming machine. be able to. In addition, since one of the images is hidden from the middle, the player can concentrate on the countdown effect. In addition, when only the bomb image is displayed, the progress of the countdown becomes unclear, so there is a motivation to display the countdown image. Also, when only the countdown image is displayed, there is a motivation to reduce the numbers displayed as the countdown image. In either case, game balls are shot, and the operation of the game machine can be enhanced.

At the timing when the bomb image or the countdown image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the bomb image or the countdown image may be output.
For example, the same explosion sound may be output at each timing corresponding to the display of the eighth bomb image to the first bomb image. In addition, the same sound (such as "Pikon" sound) may be output at each timing corresponding to the number of the countdown image.
Alternatively, different explosion sounds may be output corresponding to the display of the eighth bomb image to the first bomb image. Also, different numbers may be output as voices ("Hachi", "Nana", etc.) corresponding to the numbers in the countdown image.
In addition, the same explosion sound and voice are output in the first half of the "bomb expectation effect" (for example, until the timing of displaying the fifth bomb image and the fourth bomb image), and different explosion sounds and voices are output in the second half. You may make it
According to such an embodiment, the progress of the "bomb expectation effect" can be clarified and the player's sense of exhilaration can be heightened.

As described above, if the timing at which the bomb image progresses (the next bomb image is displayed) and the timing at which the countdown image progresses (the next countdown image is displayed) are different, the bomb image The sound or voice corresponding to progressing (the next bomb image is displayed) is output, but the corresponding sound or voice is output when the countdown image progresses (the next countdown image is displayed). It is preferable not to do so. If the timing of the progress of the bomb image (the next bomb image is displayed) and the timing of the progress of the countdown image (the next countdown image is displayed) are different, and if you continue to hit right Since it is relatively easy to enter the second starting port 2004, many game balls enter the second starting port 2004. In such a case, if the firing interval is about 0.6 seconds, and the timing is different, some sound will be output twice during 0.6 seconds, that is, once every about 0.3 seconds on average. This is because there is a risk that the player will feel disgust because the player will lose the game. Note that the sound or voice corresponding to the progress of the bomb image (the next bomb image is displayed) is not output, but the sound corresponding to the progress of the countdown image (the next countdown image is displayed) Alternatively, the reverse pattern of outputting voice and the like may be used.

In the "bomb expectation effect", the decorative member may be operated or illuminated.
For example, the decorative member may not be operated when the bomb image or the countdown image is first displayed, but the movable decorative member may be operated when the subsequent bomb image or countdown image is displayed.
Also, the movement of the movable decorative member may gradually increase. For example, the movable decorative member may not be operated when the bomb image or countdown image is first displayed, and the movable decorative member may be operated when the second or subsequent bomb image or countdown image is displayed. . By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to enhance the excitement of the player.
A movable decorative member having a light-emitting means may be employed, and the light-emitting means may emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode in accordance with the operation timing of the movable decorative member or after the movable decorative member operates. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the excitement of the player.

At the timing when the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed, it is also possible to display an operation part simulated image that enables acceptance of operation on the operation part and prompts the user to operate the operation part. FIG. 377(f) shows an example in which an operation section simulation image is displayed above the number "7" of the countdown image.
Further, when an operation unit is operated on the operation unit and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the bomb image or the countdown image may change with a predetermined probability (for example, change from white bomb to red bomb). .
In addition, when the player does not operate even if the simulated operation part image is displayed (when one fluctuation is fixed and stopped before the operation), the simulated operation part image is hidden at the timing of the fixed stop. Instead, the simulated image of the operation unit may be displayed over a plurality of times of variable display by continuing to display even when the timing of the next variation start arrives.
Further, it is also possible to receive multiple operations on the operation unit while the operation unit simulated image is being displayed. Further, the display mode of the bomb image or the countdown image may be changed multiple times in response to multiple operation receptions. In such a case, even if an operation is performed on the operation unit, the display of the operation unit simulated image is continued.
Also, the operation unit simulation image may be displayed less conspicuously than the bomb image or the countdown image, so that the player is less likely to notice that the operation acceptance of the operation unit is enabled. FIG. 377(g) shows a state in which the simulated image of the operation section is displayed in the lower left corner of the display area. By displaying the simulated operation unit image at a position smaller than the bomb image and the countdown image and near the end of the display area in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the simulated operation unit image is displayed. .

Thus, according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 370 to 377, it is possible to provide the player with a new interest.

An embodiment including a novel effect "scroll stock effect" will be described below. This embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 377 and the like.

First, an outline of the “scroll stock effect” will be explained. In the ``scroll stock effect'', at the timing when the suspension occurs, prefetch processing is performed for the suspension, and it is determined whether or not to execute the ``scroll stock effect'' based on the result of the prefetch.
When it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect", a fighter character is displayed behind the current pending image, and a demon character is displayed behind each displayed standby pending image. be done. Although the characters are displayed so as to overlap the current pending image and each standby pending image, they may be displayed so as not to overlap each other.
When the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, the fighter character continues to be displayed at the same position, but along with the movement of the reserved image, it corresponds to the first standby reserved image that was closest to the fighter character. Then, the demon character that has been displayed moves, and the "scroll acquisition effect" of fighting with the fighter character is executed.
In the battle in the "scroll acquisition effect", the fighter character may win or lose the demon character, but the scroll can be obtained when the fighter character wins. Acquired scrolls are displayed at a predetermined position in the display area (for example, the top left position of the display area). If the fighter character loses, the scroll cannot be acquired.
In this way, every time the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed, the "scroll acquisition effect" is performed, and the fighting between the martial arts character and the ogre character is displayed. The final battle between the martial arts character and the ogre character is performed in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory that triggered the execution of the "scroll stock effect". Also, even if a new suspension occurs during the execution of the "scroll stock effect", the ogre character will not be newly displayed in response to the suspension.
After the battle with the final ogre character is over, a ``scroll release effect'' in which the scrolls acquired so far are opened is sequentially performed while the decoration pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Predetermined characters or the like are written in the opened scroll, and these indicate the degree of expectation, or change the display content of the advance notice effect to display content with a higher degree of expectation for a big win. In addition, in the variable display where the battle with the last demon character is performed, it may develop into a ready-to-win effect.
The timing at which the "scroll release effect" is executed is a predetermined timing within a period from immediately after the end of the battle with the last ogre character until the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. For example, before the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-win state, during the ready-to-win state, and at a predetermined timing during the ready-to-win effect, the “scroll release effect” can be executed.

FIG. 378 is an effect pattern table showing the number of waiting pending and the type and number of obtainable scrolls at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect". In the "scroll stock effect", the effect pattern is selected based on the look-ahead process.
Specifically, when the number of standby pending at the timing when it is determined to execute the "scroll stock effect", one of the effect patterns PTN01 to PTN03 is selected. be.
Further, when the number of standby pending at the timing when it is determined to execute the "scroll stock effect", one of the effect patterns PTN04 to PTN09 is selected.
Further, when the number of standby pending at the timing when it is decided to execute the ``scroll stock effect'', one of the effect patterns PTN10 to PTN19 is selected.
Further, when the number of standby pending at the timing when it is decided to execute the ``scroll stock effect'', one of the effect patterns PTN20 to PTN34 is selected.

Note that the effect pattern is selected such that the number of scrolls that can be finally obtained increases as the number of standby pending at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" increases. Also, the performance pattern is selected such that the greater the total number of acquired scrolls, the higher the expectation of a big win.

As shown in the figure, the maximum number of scrolls that can be obtained in the "scroll stock effect" is the same number as the number of standby pending at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect". For example, at the timing when the fourth standby hold occurs, if one of the production patterns PTN30 to PTN34 is selected and the "scroll stock production" is started, the martial artist character is the ogre character. is displayed to win 4 times, and 4 scrolls can be obtained.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of standby pending at the start of the "scroll stock effect", there may be a case where even one scroll cannot be obtained. For example, when production pattern PTN01, production pattern PTN04, production pattern PTN10, and production pattern PTN20 are selected, the martial arts character cannot win even once against the ogre character and cannot obtain even one scroll.

The types of scrolls that can be obtained include scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer.
FIG. 379 is a table showing the correspondence between the number of acquired scrolls and the acquisition order of the scrolls. Which scroll acquisition pattern is used to acquire the scroll is also determined based on the look-ahead result. For example, the scroll acquisition pattern PTN04 is a pattern in which a scroll with a timer is acquired as the first scroll, and a scroll without a timer is acquired as the second scroll. In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN25, a scroll without a timer is acquired as the first scroll, a scroll with a timer is acquired as the second scroll, a scroll without a timer is acquired as the third scroll, and a timer is acquired as the fourth scroll. It is a pattern to acquire a scroll.

In this way, in the ``scroll acquisition effect'', it is determined whether or not how many pieces of the ``scroll stock effect'' are waiting at the start of the ``scroll stock effect'', i.e., how many times the ``scroll acquisition effect'' will be performed. The player is interested in how many scrolls can be obtained.

At a predetermined timing in the variable display after the last "scroll acquisition effect" ends, a "scroll release effect" corresponding to each acquired scroll is executed. In the "scroll release effect", the scroll is opened and displayed in an enlarged manner in the vicinity of the center of the display area, giving a predetermined change to the contents of the effect being executed. Specifically, a display that raises the degree of expectation suggested by the production is performed.
In addition, there are two types of scrolls that can be obtained: scrolls without timers and scrolls with timers.
In a scroll with a timer, the timer is counted down from the point of acquisition, the scroll is opened at the timing when the timer reaches zero, and the contents of the predetermined performance executed when the scroll is opened are changed. In other words, the player can recognize when the "scroll release effect" will be executed. Also, the countdown may be started not at the timing when the scroll is obtained, but after the scroll is moved to the upper left and displayed as described later.
On the other hand, in the case of scrolls without a timer, the player is not shown when the scroll will be opened, but the scroll is opened at a predetermined timing, and changes are made to the predetermined effect content being executed when the scroll is opened. give. In other words, the player cannot recognize when the "scroll release effect" will be executed.
Also, the expectation of a big hit is higher when a scroll with a timer is obtained than when a scroll without a timer is obtained. As for the timer-equipped scrolls, the number of the timer is counted down from a predetermined number of seconds. Also, a scroll without a timer at the time of acquisition may be changed to a scroll with a timer when the scroll is moved to the upper left and a countdown may be started, as will be described later. In other words, in this case, the scroll without timer functions as an omen suggestive effect of the scroll with timer.

A specific example of the “scroll stock effect” will be described below with reference to FIGS. 378 to 385 and the like. FIG. 378 shows the effect pattern table in this embodiment as described above. FIG. 379 shows a scroll acquisition pattern table in this embodiment. Figures 380 and 381 show time charts of this production example. Also, FIGS. 382 to 387 show the display state of the display area at a predetermined timing in this rendering example.
In this production example, in a state in which there are three waiting reservations, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and the waiting reservations become four, and based on the look-ahead processing based on this winning, the production pattern PTN32. is selected and the "scroll stock effect" is started. After that, every time the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to each standby reservation is executed, the "scroll acquisition effect" is performed. In addition, the scroll acquisition pattern PTN25 is selected, and in the "scroll acquisition presentation", two scrolls without timer and two with timer are acquired. In the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the fourth waiting reservation targeted for the look-ahead process, the ``scroll release presentation'' is performed four times after the ``scroll acquisition presentation'' is executed.
That is, in this example of effect, the "scroll stock effect" is executed over five times of variable display. Of the five variable displays, the results of the first to fourth variable displays are a loss, and the fifth variable display is either a big hit or a loss.

FIGS. 380(a) to 380(d) show time charts corresponding to the first to fourth variable displays. Also, FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b) show time charts corresponding to the fifth variable display.
Also, the timing t20 (timing at which the stop display in the first variable display ends) in FIG. 380(a) is the same timing as the timing t0 (timing at which the second variable display starts) in FIG. 380(b). Similarly, timing t20 in FIG. 380(b) and timing t0 in H30(c), timing t20 in FIG. 380(c) and timing t0 in H30(d), timing t20 in FIG. 380(d) and timing H32(a) , timing t30 in FIG. 381(a) and timing t30 in H32(b) are the same timing.

Here, the execution time for each of the first to fourth fluctuation displays is 19 seconds, and the decorative pattern confirmation stop period is 1 second. The display execution time can be appropriately set within a range of, for example, 5 seconds to 40 seconds.
Similarly, the execution time of the fifth variable display is set to 59 seconds, but it is only necessary to secure the time for executing the ready-to-win effect and the "scroll release effect", and it can be appropriately set in the range of, for example, 30 to 180 seconds. In other words, it is preferable to make the average variation time of the suspension determined to perform the "scroll stock effect" longer than the average variation time in each variation from the first time to the fourth time. Also, even when performing the "scroll stock effect", the number of scrolls acquired may be 0, so the target fluctuation is the so-called normal fluctuation time (about 10 seconds in non-reach) or shortened It may be a variable time (for example, a variable time of about 3 seconds, which is most likely to be selected when holding 4). In addition, the more scrolls you have acquired, the longer the time for the 5th variable display will be. A pattern such as three scrolls may be provided in which the fluctuation time is long but the number of scrolls obtained is small.

The first variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 380(a). The number of standby pending at the start of the variable display is three. Also, the normal background image A (see FIG. 347(a)) is displayed as the background image. FIG. 382(a) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t0 to timing t10.
At timing t10, a game ball enters the first start hole 2002, and the "scroll stock effect" is started based on the look-ahead process. Here, a fighter character is displayed on the upper left side of the current pending image, and a demon character is displayed on the upper right side of each standby pending image. FIG. 382(b) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t10 to timing t17.
At timing t17, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t18, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t19, all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure, and the stopped display is continued until timing t20. . FIG. 382(c) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t19 to timing t20.
Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 382(d) and the like, the display priority of the martial arts character and the ogre character is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during variable display. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382(c), the display priority of the martial arts character and the ogre character is lower than the display priority of the decoration pattern during stop display.

Next, the second variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 380(b).
The second variable display is started at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t1, each reserved image moves one position to the left. At the same time, the demon character also moves with each reserved image. At timing t1, the movement of each reserved image and the demon character ends, and from timing t1 to timing t3, a battle between the fighter character and the demon character that has moved above the current reserved image is started. In addition, the character "Battle" is displayed behind both characters. FIG. 382(d) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t1 to timing t3.

At timing t3, the battle between the martial arts character and the ogre character ends, and from timing t3 to timing t4, either display that the martial artist character has won or that the ogre character has won is displayed.
When the martial arts character wins, the ogre character assumes a collapsed posture and is then hidden, and the martial arts character obtains the scroll and holds it in his left hand. FIGS. 382(e) and 382(f) show the display state at this time. Next, a display is performed in which the scroll acquired by the martial artist character is slightly enlarged and moved to the upper left of the display area, and the "scroll acquisition effect" ends. FIGS. 382(g) and 382(h) show the display state at this time. Also, the scroll displayed at the upper left may be made smaller than the scroll in which the fighter character has acquired the scroll and is holding it in his left hand.
On the other hand, when the fighter character loses, the fighter character assumes a collapsed posture, the demon character is hidden, and the "scroll acquisition effect" ends. If the fighter character loses, the scroll cannot be obtained and the scroll will not be displayed. FIG. 383(a) shows a display state when the fighter character is in a fallen posture. Also, FIG. 383(b) shows the display state when the "scroll acquisition effect" is finished.
After that, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t17, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t18, all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure at timing t19, and the stopped display is continued until timing t20. Continued.

As shown in FIGS. 380(c), 380(d), and 381(a), in the timings t3 to t4 of the third to fifth fluctuation displays, the martial arts character and the ogre character fight in the same way. Acquisition performance” will be performed. Also, in the third and fourth variable display, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the same manner as in the second variable display. In this production example, the martial arts character wins the fight against the demon character in all of the four "scroll acquisition productions" and acquires four scrolls. FIG. 383(c) shows a display example at timing t5 in FIG. 381(a).
Acquired scrolls are displayed side by side from the upper left to the right of the display area in the order of acquisition. In the case of this production example, the first and third scrolls from the left are scrolls without a timer, and the second and fourth scrolls from the left are scrolls with a timer. Scrolls with timers start counting down from the timing at which they are acquired, but at timing t5 in FIG. It is "38:00", and the "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t19 14 seconds after timing t5 and timing t43 after 38 seconds from timing t5. Also, the countdown may be started not at the timing when the scroll is acquired, but at the timing when the moving display to the upper left is started, or after the moving display to the upper left is finished.

At the start of the fifth variable display, if four scrolls have been obtained, the "scroll release effect" is executed four times. An example of the effect is shown below.
The first "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t10 during execution of the "step-up notice effect" during the period from timing t8 to timing t12 during high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbols.
The second "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t19 during the execution of the "line notice effect" during the period from timing t17 to timing t21 during high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbols.
The third "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t33 during execution of the "ready-to-win title announcement effect" in the period from timing t31 to timing t35 during the ready-to-win effect.
The fourth "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t43 during the execution of the "line announcement effect" in the period from timing t41 to timing t45 during the ready-to-win effect.
Below, the effect mode of each “scroll release effect” will be described. In addition, the "scroll release effect" by the scroll with timer and the "scroll release effect" by the scroll without timer are not performed at the same time. ” is not performed).

Here, with reference to FIG. 384, the "step-up notice effect" will be described.
The “step-up notice effect” is a effect in which a plurality of images are displayed in a predetermined order, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which image is displayed. Specifically, a rectangular frame is displayed near the center of the display area, and a fighter character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character are displayed in order within the frame.
The production patterns include a production pattern in which only the fighter character, which is the first-stage character, is displayed, a production pattern in which even the second-stage warrior character is displayed, a production pattern in which even the third-stage samurai character is displayed, and 4. There is an effect pattern in which up to the witch character of the stage is displayed.
FIG. 384(a) shows a display state in which a fighter character is displayed. FIG. 384(b) shows a display state in which a warrior character is displayed. FIG. 384(c) shows a display state in which a samurai character is displayed. FIG. 384(d) shows a display state in which a wizard character is displayed.
For example, when an effect pattern in which up to the fourth level magician character is displayed is executed, the display area is displayed in the order of FIGS. The display state will change.
The display time of each character can be appropriately set to ensure the visibility of the character, but in the example of presentation shown below, it is set to 2 seconds.

In the "step-up notice effect", the background color in the frame also suggests the degree of expectation. Specifically, it is assumed that one of the three colors of white, red, and gold is selected as the background color. Expectations are higher in the order of white, red, and gold. FIGS. 384(a) to 384(d) show the display state when white is selected as the background color.
The background color may remain unchanged at the start of execution of the "step-up notice effect", or may change to a color with a higher degree of expectation during the execution of the "step-up notice effect". For example, there is a case where a white background image is displayed continuously from the first stage to the fourth stage, and the color does not change. Alternatively, the background image color may change to a more expected color at the timing of changing from one stage to the next, or may change to a more expected color while the background image is displayed at a certain stage. . When the background image is changed in this way, the color of the background image after the change is adopted as the color of the background image in the next stage. Note that the color of the background image may change from white to red at a certain timing and then change from red to gold at another timing.
In such a "step-up notice effect", the degree of expectation is suggested to the player by what stage the character has been displayed and what color the background image was in the end.

Although the embodiment in which the color of the background image is changed has been shown, the color of the frame may be changed instead of the color of the background image. Also, the embodiment in which different characters are sequentially displayed from the first stage to the fourth stage has been shown, but the character may not be changed, and different poses of the same character may be sequentially displayed. Moreover, not only characters but also different images may be displayed up to the fourth stage.
Although the effect pattern in which the “step-up notice effect” is executed up to the fourth stage is shown, it is not limited to four stages, and may be in multiple stages (two stages or more). Whether or not to display can be set as appropriate. Similarly, the colors of the background image and frame are not limited to three colors, and may be a plurality of colors (two or more colors), and the maximum number of colors that can be displayed can be set as appropriate.

As shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 381(a), in the fifth variable display, the "step-up notice effect" is performed during the period from timing t6 to timing t14.
FIG. 384(e) shows the display state at timing t5 before execution of the "step-up notice effect" is started. FIG. 384(f) shows the display state at timing t10 when the display of the samurai character, which is the third stage character, is started during execution of the "step-up notice effect".
At timing t11, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect", the leftmost scroll without a timer moves to the center of the display area and then opens to make a predetermined character, such as "Rise!", visible, and the background color is white. to red (the background color may be changed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after a predetermined character is displayed). At the same time, the rest of the scrolls move to the left (or not). FIG. 384(g) shows the display state at timing t11.
At timing t12, a witch character, which is a fourth stage character, is displayed. At this time, the background color remains red. As shown in the drawing, the display of the opened scroll ends at timing t12. FIG. 384(h) shows the display state at timing t12.
At timing t14, the "step-up notice effect" ends, and the display of the horizontally long rectangular frame and the character ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 385, the “dialogue announcement effect” will be described.
The "line preview effect" is an effect in which one of a plurality of lines is displayed for a predetermined time (here, four seconds), and the type of displayed line suggests the degree of expectation. Specifically, one of the words "It's no good...", "I don't really understand...", and "I'll wait with anticipation!" A line is displayed. Expectations for these lines increase in the order of "It's no good...", "I don't really understand...", and "I'll wait and wait!".
FIG. 385(a) shows a display state in which a low-expectation dialogue "No, no, no..." is displayed. FIG. 385(b) shows a display state in which the line of medium expectation "I don't really understand..." is displayed. FIG. 385(c) shows a display state in which the high-expectation line "wait and wait!" is displayed. As shown in these drawings, a character that speaks lines (here, a master character) may be displayed.

As shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 381(a), in the fifth variable display, the "dialogue announcement effect" is performed during the period from timing t17 to timing t21.
FIG. 385(d) shows the display state at timing t16 before the execution of the "dialogue announcement effect" is started. Also, FIG. 385(e) shows the display state at timing t18 when the "words forewarning effect" is started and the words "no good..." are being displayed. Here, the number of seconds indicated by the leftmost scroll with timer is "1:00", indicating that the "scroll release effect" will be performed after one second.
At timing t19, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect", the leftmost scroll with a timer moves to the center of the display area and then opens to make certain characters (such as "Change the dialogue!") visible, and the dialogue changes to "It's no good..." to "I'm waiting with anticipation!" ). At the same time, the rest of the scrolls move to the left (or not). FIG. 385(f) shows the display state at timing t19.
At timing t21, the "line preview effect" ends, and the display of the line display frame, the lines, the master character, and the opened scroll ends.
In this way, when the ``scroll release effect'' is performed, an example of changing other notice effects and reach effects different from the ``scroll release effect'' to a display with high expectations was shown, but only the ``scroll release effect'' (does not affect the display of other notice effects or ready-to-win effects).
Also, in the "step-up notice effect" and "serif notice effect", an example was shown in which the display is changed to a highly expected display when a predetermined character is displayed by the "scroll release effect", but the "scroll release effect" The time from when a predetermined character is displayed by to when the display is changed to a highly anticipated display may be the same for the "step-up notice effect" and the "serif notice effect" shown in the example, or may be different. good too. For example, in the "step-up notice effect", the display is changed to a high-expectation display one second after a predetermined character is displayed, but in the "serif notice effect", the expectation level is changed two seconds after the predetermined character is displayed. For example, it is changed to a higher display.

At timing t25, the left decorative design (number "2") is temporarily stopped, and at timing t26, the right decorative design (number "2") with the same number as the left decorative design is temporarily stopped, resulting in a ready-to-win state. Next, the ready-to-win effect is started at timing t30. Specifically, at timing t30, the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to the ready-to-win effect (here, the ready-to-win background image A shown in FIG. A temporary stop display is displayed at the upper left and upper right of the area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 386, the "reach title announcement effect" will be described.
There are a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects, and the characters and background images that appear are different. Further, at the start of the ready-to-win effect, the name of the ready-to-win effect is displayed.
For example, FIG. 386(a) shows a display example at the start of the "martial artist character reach", showing a display example in which the fighter character, the background image A at the time of reach, and the characters "martial artist character reach!" are displayed. there is
FIG. 386(b) shows a display example at the start of "Warrior Character Reach", showing a display example in which a warrior character, background image B during reach, and characters "Warrior Character Reach!" are displayed.
The background color of the frame that displays the reach name is white, red, or gold. FIG. 386(c) shows a display example in which the background color in the reach title display frame displaying the reach name of "fighter character reach" is displayed in red. FIG. 386(d) shows a display example in which the background color of the reach title display frame of "warrior character reach" is displayed in red.
The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the type of reach production, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher for the "warrior character reach" than for the "fighter character reach".
In addition, the color of the background in the reach title display frame also indicates the degree of expectation for the big win, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and gold. In this way, the color of the background in the reach title display frame indicates the degree of expectation in the "reach title announcement effect".

As shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 381(a), in the fifth variable display, the "ready-to-win title announcement effect" is performed during the period from timing t31 to timing t35.
FIG. 385(e) shows the display state at timing t32 one second after the start of execution of the "ready-to-win title notice effect". Here, the color within the reach title display frame is white.
At timing t33, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect", the leftmost scroll without a timer moves to the center of the display area and then opens to make the specified characters ("rising!") visible and within the reach title display frame. changes from white to red. At the same time, the rest of the scrolls move to the left (or not). FIG. 386(f) shows the display state at timing t33.
At timing t35, the "reach title announcement effect" ends, and the display of the reach title display frame, the reach name, and the scroll ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 387, the "ready-to-win effect-during speech announcement effect" will be described.
The “advance notice effect of dialogue during reach effect” is an effect in which one of a plurality of different dialogues is displayed, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the type of displayed dialogue. The lines displayed are those of the combat opponent. Specifically, one of the lines "I won't lose~!", "I'll be strong~!", and "Absolutely impossible~!" is displayed in the line display frame displayed in the display area. Expectations for these lines increase in the order of "I won't lose~!", "I'll be strong~!"
FIG. 387(a) shows a display state in which the low-expectation line "Don't lose~!" is displayed. FIG. 387(b) shows a display state in which the dialogue of medium expectation level "strong!" is displayed. FIG. 387(c) shows a display state in which the high-expectation line "absolutely impossible~!" is displayed. As shown in these drawings, the facial expression of the fighting opponent character (here, the samurai character), the way the weapon is held, etc. may be displayed in a manner that matches the dialogue.

As shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 381(a), in the fifth variable display, the "ready-to-win effect-during speech announcement effect" is performed during the period from timing t41 to timing t45.
FIG. 387(d) shows the display state at timing t40 before the execution of the "line foretelling effect during reach effect" is started. Also, FIG. 387(e) shows the display state at timing t42 when the "line foretelling effect during ready-to-win effect" is started and the line "I won't lose~!" is being displayed. Here, the number of seconds indicated by the leftmost scroll with timer is "1:00", indicating that the "scroll release effect" will be performed after one second.
At timing t43, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect", the scroll with a timer moves to the center of the display area and then opens to make the predetermined characters ("Chance!") visible, and the dialogue changes from "I won't lose!" (The line may be changed after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after a predetermined character is displayed). At this time, the number of scrolls displayed on the upper left of the display area becomes zero. FIG. 387(f) shows the display state at timing t43.
At the timing t45, the "advance speech effect during the ready-to-win effect" ends, and the display of the dialogue display frame, the dialogue, and the scroll ends. Also, at this timing, the “scroll stock effect” ends.

During the period from timing t45 to timing t57, a display of a battle between the fighter character and the samurai character is performed. 2”, “2”, and “2”), and at timing t59, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.
On the other hand, when the samurai character wins, at timing t57, the decorative pattern during reach is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a loss (for example, "2", "3", "2"), and at timing t59, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode indicating a loss. Stop is displayed.

Next, with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d), examples of effects when the "scroll stock effect" is not executed will be shown.
The time charts shown in FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d) show the various effects executed in the fifth variable display shown with reference to FIGS. It shows an example of the effect when it is executed without the effect.
Acquisition and release of scrolls are not performed in this production example. Therefore, there is no change in the advance notice mode (type of dialogue, background color in the frame, etc.) at timing t4, timing t19, timing t33, and timing t43.

According to such an embodiment, it is not possible to know when a scroll without a timer will be released, and it is possible to clearly indicate the release timing of a scroll with a timer.
In addition, we have shown an embodiment in which scrolls are released in all of "step-up notice effect", "line notice effect", "reach title notice effect", and "reach effect dialogue notice effect", but the number of scrolls acquired is any one of 0 to 4. Therefore, for example, when the number of acquired scrolls is small (for example, in the case of one), it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of imagining in which advance notice performance the "scroll release performance" will be executed.
In addition, the "step-up notice effect" and "line notice effect" are executed before reaching the reach state, and the "ready-reach title notice effect" and "dialogue notice effect during reach effect" are executed during the reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of imagining whether or not the ready-to-win performance is generated and which advance notice performance the timer-equipped scroll corresponds to depending on the length of time indicated by the timer-equipped scroll.
In addition, the four productions of "step-up announcement effect", "line announcement effect", "reach title announcement effect", and "reach effect announcement announcement effect" were given as examples, but the announcement effect that is performed with one change , it is also possible to perform the advance notice effect more than the maximum acquisition number (4) of the scrolls. By doing so, it is possible to amuse the player as to which advance notice effect the scroll release effect will be executed.

In scroll acquisition pattern PTN04, scroll acquisition pattern PTN08, etc. shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (Fig. 379), after acquiring a scroll with a timer (while the countdown display for scrolls with a timer is being displayed), a scroll without a timer is acquired. It is possible to
According to such an embodiment, the player can be entertained even during the period until the timer of the scroll with timer reaches zero.
Also, if you obtain a scroll with a timer and before the countdown for that scroll starts (until the scroll with a timer starts or finishes moving to the top left of the display area), you can obtain a scroll without a timer. good.

In scroll acquisition pattern PTN05, scroll acquisition pattern PTN11, etc. shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (FIG. 379), it is possible to acquire a scroll with a timer after acquiring a scroll without a timer.
According to such an embodiment, when the player watches with anticipation what will be displayed from the non-timer scroll, it may be possible to obtain a new scroll with a timer, which further increases the excitement of the player. .

In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN03, the scroll acquisition pattern PTN08, etc. shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (FIG. 379), it is possible to acquire the timer-less scroll after acquiring the timer-less scroll.
According to such an embodiment, when the player is watching with anticipation what will be displayed from the scroll without a timer, it may be possible to acquire a new scroll without a timer, which can further increase the excitement of the player. .
In the embodiment described later, it is possible to obtain a plurality of types of timerless scrolls with different expectations depending on the display mode. In such an embodiment, it may be possible to acquire the same non-timer scroll after acquiring a non-timer scroll, or to acquire a different non-timer scroll after acquiring a non-timer scroll. may be For example, it may be possible to obtain a red scroll without a timer with a relatively high expectation after obtaining a blue scroll without a timer with a relatively low expectation.
According to such an embodiment, a high-expectation no-timer scroll may be acquired in a situation where a low-expectation no-timer scroll is acquired, so the player's interest in the "scroll stock presentation" is reduced. can be prevented.

A plurality of display modes may be provided for the fighter character. For example, as the display mode of the fighter character, two types of fighter character may be provided: a fighter character without a backlight and a fighter character with a backlight. The probability of winning the battle, that is, the probability of obtaining a scroll is higher (that is, the expectation of a big hit is higher) in the case with the halo than in the case without the halo. FIG. 388(a) shows a display state in which a halo is displayed behind the fighter character. The display mode of the fighter character is not limited to the presence or absence of a halo. It is possible to realize different display modes by having them or by combining these modes.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of obtaining the scroll varies depending on the display mode of the fighter character, so the expectation of obtaining the scroll can be enhanced.

A plurality of display modes may be provided for the demon character. For example, two types of demon characters, a demon character with one horn and a demon character with two horns, may be provided. Among demon characters with one horn and demon characters with two horns, the demon character with two horns is weaker, and the probability that the martial arts character can win the battle, that is, the probability that the scroll can be obtained is high (that is, , Expectations for big hits are high). FIG. 388(b) shows a display state in which, from the left, a demon character with one horn, a demon character with two horns, a demon character with two horns, and a demon character with one horn are displayed. . It should be noted that, without being limited to this example, either one of the demon character with one horn or the demon character with two horns can be appropriately arranged for each of the first to fourth standby reserves. Most preferable for the player is when all demon characters are two-horned demon characters. Conversely, the most unfavorable situation for the player is when all demon characters have one horn. It should be noted that the number of types of demon characters may be three or more.
In addition, not only demon characters but also other characters and multiple types of display objects such as treasure chests are displayed, and scrolls are acquired depending on the result of fighting between the fighter character and these characters and whether or not the fighter character was able to open the treasure chest. You may make it possible. Also, the probability of obtaining scrolls should be different for each type.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of obtaining the scroll differs depending on the type of the displayed character or object, so the expectation of obtaining the scroll can be heightened.

In addition, during the "scroll stock production" (at the end of the fluctuation, at the start of the fluctuation, after fighting the demon character and displaying the result (after the martial artist character won or lost the battle is displayed), etc. ), the fighter character without a halo may change into a fighter character with a halo, or the fighter character with a halo may change into a fighter character without a halo.
Similarly, a demon character with one horn changes into a demon character with two horns, or a demon character with two horns changes into a demon character with one horn in the middle of the "scroll stock production". It may be possible to do so.
For example, in the "scroll stock effect" started with four pending, the display mode of the fighter character and the type of demon character may be changed at the timing when the "scroll acquisition effect" is executed twice. .
According to such an embodiment, the probability of obtaining a scroll increases or decreases during the "scroll stock presentation", so that the interest of the player who expects to obtain the scroll can be enhanced.
It should be noted that only the effect that increases the probability of obtaining the scroll may be made executable, and the effect that decreases the probability of obtaining the scroll may not be executed.

Although an embodiment has been described in which the degree of expectation for obtaining scrolls varies depending on the display mode of the fighter character, three or more types of display modes may be used for the fighter character. Also, the probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the type of scroll.
One of a plurality of types of characters (for example, a fighter character, a samurai character, a warrior character, and a wizard character) may be displayed, and the probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the displayed character. Also, characters other than the martial arts character may be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and the probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the type and display mode of the character.
Although two types of demon characters are shown, three or more types may be used. Also, the probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the type of scroll.

An embodiment in which a demon character with one horn and a demon character with two horns appear has been shown, but the percentage of scrolls that can be obtained when winning a battle may differ depending on the type of demon character. . For example, when a demon character with one horn is beaten, a scroll without a timer is obtained with a probability of 1/3 and a scroll with a timer is obtained with a probability of 2/3, and the demon character with two horns is beaten. In some cases, the scroll without timer may be obtained with a probability of 2/3, and the scroll with a timer may be obtained with a probability of 1/3.
Alternatively, the scroll with a timer may be obtained when one horn beats a demon character, and the scroll without a timer may be obtained when two horns beat a demon character.

An embodiment has been described in which the acquisition ratio of scrolls with a timer and scrolls without a timer when winning a battle differs depending on the type of demon character. and timer-less scroll acquisition ratios may be different. For example, the probability of obtaining a scroll with a timer may be higher when a fighter character with a halo wins a battle than when a fighter character without a halo wins a battle.

Scrolls that can be obtained include scrolls with timers and scrolls without timers, but it is possible to set multiple types of display modes (timer time) when scrolls with timers are displayed, and the longer the time, the bigger the hit. expectations are high. Also, the time to be displayed at the start of the countdown is set so that the countdown ends at the timing when the predetermined notice effect is executed. The time to display at the start of the countdown is determined based on the time required for the display of the decorative symbols to fluctuate a plurality of times. In other words, the longer the time displayed on the scroll with timer (remaining time of the countdown) at the start of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize targeted for the look-ahead process, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. there is

A plurality of types (two or more types) of display modes for scrolls without a timer may also be used. Also, it is preferable that the degree of expectation for the jackpot differs depending on the type.
Specifically, three types of timer-less scrolls of blue, green, and red may be displayed. In this case, the expectation of a big win may be increased in the order of the blue no-timer scroll, the green no-timer scroll, and the red no-timer scroll. FIG. 388(c) shows a display state in which four scrolls without timers have been acquired. As for the scroll acquisition states, from the left, the blue scroll without timer, the blue scroll without timer, the green scroll without timer, and the red scroll without timer are shown.
Note that the thickness of the scroll may be different depending on the color of the timer-less scroll. For example, the blue scroll without timer, the green scroll without timer, and the red scroll without timer may be lengthened or thickened in this order.
According to such an embodiment, the degree of expectation of a big win can be indicated in advance by the display mode of the timer-less scroll, and the expectation of the occurrence of a big win can be enhanced.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a plurality of types of timer-less scrolls are displayed, different display contents may be displayed when the scroll is opened depending on the types of timer-less scrolls.
For example, a blue scroll without a timer will display either "rising!" or "change!", while a green scroll without a timer will display either "heat!" You may do so.
According to such an embodiment, since different displays are performed depending on the type of scroll without timer being displayed, the player can recognize in advance what kind of display will be performed depending on the type of scroll without timer.
In this way, by making the characters displayed on the blue scroll without a timer and the characters displayed on the green scroll without a timer completely different, which display is displayed for each color of the scroll without a timer. The player can hope that a display with the highest expectation for a win that can be displayed in a blue scroll without a timer is performed in the case of a blue scroll without a timer, and a green timer is displayed. Since the player can hope that a display with the highest degree of expectation for a win that can be displayed with a green scroll without a timer is performed in the case of the scroll without a timer, the player can expect the scroll of any color.
Also, for example, blue scrolls without a timer will display either "Rise!" or "Change!", and green scrolls without a timer will display either "Rise!" may be made. In this case, the part displayed by the scroll release effect in the scroll without timer will appear in multiple types of scrolls without timer, and the expectation of winning is lower than in the case of green scrolls without timer. You can expect even scrolls without a timer. In addition, all the scrolls displayed by the scroll release effect may be the same for a plurality of types of scrolls without a timer.

An embodiment has been described in which the degree of expectation always increases by changing the display mode of the advance notice effect being executed when the "scroll release effect" is executed, but a case in which the degree of expectation does not change may be provided.
For example, when a "scroll release effect" is executed by a scroll with a timer, the display mode of the advance notice effect being executed always changes, but when a "scroll release effect" is executed by a scroll without a timer, Even if the scroll is opened, no characters are written in the scroll, or the character "X" is written, and the display mode of the preview effect during execution may not change. good too.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to heighten the sense of tension when the effect of opening the scroll is performed. In addition, since the display that increases the expectation of the advance notice effect being executed is not performed, the appearance rate of the "scroll stock effect" can be increased.

With reference to FIGS. 389(a) to 389(c), an embodiment in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the pending change effect will be described.
At the timing t18 in FIG. 381, when the pending change effect is executed instead of the "dialog announcement effect", the display state at the timing t18 becomes the display state shown in FIG. 389(a). At this timing, the color of the current pending image is white.
Next, at timing t19, the timer-equipped scroll is opened and the message "Pending change!" is displayed. At this time, the color of the current pending image changes from white to a more expected color. FIG. 389(b) shows a display state in which the color of the current pending image changes from white to green as a result of the pending change effect. Also, FIG. 389(c) shows a display state in which the color of the current pending image changes from white to red as a result of the pending change effect.
The relationship between the expectation level and the color of the current pending image has been described above. For example, the expectation level increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and gold.
In this way, even when the target whose display mode is changed by the scroll releasing effect is the current pending image, interest can be improved. Note that the color of the current pending image may be changed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the message "Change pending!" is displayed.

With reference to FIGS. 389(d) to 389(f), an embodiment will be described in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the "character display effect" suggesting the degree of expectation.
At the timing t18 in FIG. 381, if the "character display effect" is executed instead of the "dialog announcement effect", the display state at the timing t18 becomes the display state shown in FIG. 389(d).
Next, at timing t19, a display for opening the scroll with a timer is displayed. Inside the opened scroll is the word "Maybe it's hot?" indicating relatively low expectations, or the word "Hot!" The character "Super heat !!" is written to indicate that the expectation is high. FIG. 389(e) shows a display state in which the characters "Maybe it's hot?" are displayed. Also, FIG. 389(f) shows a display state in which the characters "Super heat!!" are displayed.
In addition, although the types of characters to be displayed in the "character display effect" are three types with relatively different expectations, any number of types (two types or more) may be used.
In this way, the character display suggesting the degree of expectation may be performed by the "scroll release effect".

With reference to FIG. 390, an embodiment will be described in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the "cut-in notice effect" for displaying a cut-in image.
A display example when the "cut-in notice effect" is executed at the timing t50 in FIG. 381 is shown below. The display state at timing t49, which is the timing immediately before the cut-in announcement effect is executed, is the state shown in FIG. 390(a).
Next, at timing t50, execution of the "cut-in notice effect" is started, and a horizontally long rectangular frame and a witch character are displayed as a cut-in image. Note that the execution time of the "cut-in notice effect" is four seconds until timing t54. FIG. 390(b) shows the display state at timing t50.
At timing t52, a display of opening the scroll with timer is displayed. Inside the opened scroll is the word "Chance!", and the background color within the frame of the cut-in image changes from white to red. FIG. 390(c) shows the display state at this time.
There are three types of background colors in the frame of the cut-in image: white, red, and gold.
In this way, the background color of the cut-in image may be changed by the "scroll release effect" to increase the degree of expectation.

When displaying the title of the ready-to-win effect, a predetermined number of stars (any one of 1 to 5) may be displayed in the display area, and the degree of expectation of the ready-to-win effect may be indicated by the number of stars. In addition, when the expectation level of the ready-to-win effect is increased by the "scroll release effect", the number of displayed stars may be increased to indicate that the expectation level of the ready-to-win effect has increased.

Referring to FIGS. 380 to 387, during the execution of the "scroll stock presentation", after the "scroll acquisition presentation" in which the martial artist character and the ogre character battle is completed, the "scroll release presentation" is performed at a predetermined timing. is executed, but the "scroll release effect" may be executed before all the "scroll acquisition effects" are executed.
For example, the "scroll release effect" may be executed during the "scroll acquisition effect" to display that the martial artist character wins the battle with the ogre character. In this case, the scrolls that can be obtained should have higher expectations than the released scrolls. For example, a scroll with a timer may be obtained as a result of a scroll without a timer being released. Alternatively, as a result of releasing a blue scroll without a timer, a green or red scroll without a timer may be obtained.

It should be noted that if the scroll cannot be acquired despite the execution of the "scroll stock presentation", the interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, at least one scroll may be acquired.

When a scroll with a timer is obtained, the countdown may be started from the time the scroll is displayed (the timing shown in FIG. 382(f)). Alternatively, the countdown may be started at the timing when the scroll starts moving or when the scroll is in the middle of moving (the timing shown in FIG. 382(g)). Alternatively, the countdown may be started at the timing when the scroll finishes moving (the timing shown in FIG. 382(h)).

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 380, 381(a), 381(b), etc., the scrolls are released in the order in which they were acquired, but in other modes, the scrolls are released. It may be released.
For example, in a situation where both a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer are acquired, the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll without a timer is executed first, and then the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll with a timer is executed. may be executed. According to such an embodiment, the release timing of the scroll can be clarified in a relatively later period in the entire variable display.
In addition, in this case, the execution of the "scroll release effect" by the scroll with timer does not start until the predetermined display by the "scroll release effect" by the scroll without timer ends (the countdown display becomes 0). Therefore, the time during which the countdown is displayed is longer than the time during which the scroll without a timer is displayed.
In addition, by doing so, the ``scroll release effect'' by the scroll with timer can be recollected as a chance-up effect performed in the second half of the variable display of the target for which the ``scroll stock effect'' is performed (for example, reach effect (Remember that it is performed for the title display and the cut-in display during the reach production), the "scroll release production" by the scroll without timer is a chance-up production performed in the first half of the variable display (for example, "step up "Forecast performance"). When the "step-up notice effect" performed in the first half of the variable display is performed, the player who remembers in this way not only the display with the highest degree of expectation, but also the degree of expectation higher than the display with the highest degree of expectation It is possible to increase the interest by hoping that the display will be one step lower, and when the "step-up notice effect" is being performed, the "scroll release effect" by scrolls without a timer will be performed. This also has the effect of making it easier for the player who remembers the above to take the timing when the most expected display should be performed.

Conversely, in a situation where you have acquired both a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer, the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll with a timer is executed first, and then the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll without a timer is executed. ' may be executed. According to such an embodiment, the release timing of the scroll can be ambiguous in a relatively later period in the entire variable display.
Also, in this case, until the predetermined display by the "scroll release effect" by the scroll with timer ends (when the countdown is being displayed), the "scroll release effect" by the scroll without timer starts to be executed. The time during which the countdown is displayed is shorter than the time during which the non-timer scroll is displayed. can get.

Although the embodiments of "step-up notice effect", "line notice effect", "reach title notice effect", "reach effect during dialogue notice effect", and "cut-in notice effect" are shown, these notice effects are separately Two or more advance notice effects may be executed during at least a part of the period, instead of being executed during the period.
For example, execution of the second notice effect may be started during execution of the first notice effect. Further, execution of the first notice effect may be started during execution of the second notice effect. Also, the execution of the first notice effect and the second notice effect may be started at the same time.
Also, the execution of the second notice effect may end during the execution of the first notice effect. Also, the execution of the first notice effect may end while the second notice effect is being executed. Also, the execution of the first notice effect and the second notice effect may end at the same time.
Moreover, you may combine these.
For example, the execution of the "line notice effect" may be started while the "step-up notice effect" is being executed.

Specifically, for example, the character shown in FIG. 385(a) is displayed when displaying the third stage of the "step-up notice effect" shown in FIG. 384(c). By doing so, even when there are a plurality of obtained scrolls, it is possible to execute the "scroll release effect" using the obtained scrolls in a relatively short period of time. In this case, for example, when the "scroll release effect" (display such as rising!) performed in response to the scroll with timer is displayed, the "release scroll" performed in response to the scroll without timer is displayed. It is also possible to display "effect" (display such as rising!). In that case, the display of the "scroll release effect" performed for scrolls with a timer and the display of the "scroll release effect" performed for scrolls without a timer may overlap. Alternatively, they may be displayed so that they do not overlap. Further, the previously displayed "scroll release effect" may be hidden first, or the later displayed "scroll release effect" may be hidden first. can be hidden at the same time.
Also, when the "scroll release effect" (increase! display) performed for scrolls with a timer is displayed, the "scroll release effect" (increase!, etc.) performed for scrolls without a timer is displayed. display), the line of sight will go to the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" displayed later, so the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" displayed later will be displayed. By lengthening the time during which the display corresponding to the previously displayed 'scroll release performance' is performed, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to a plurality of 'scroll release performances' from being overlooked (forgotten).

Also, when the "scroll release effect" (increase! display) performed in response to the scroll with timer is displayed, the "scroll release effect" (increase! etc.) performed in response to the scroll without timer is displayed. display) is shown, but when the "scroll release effect" (display of rising!, etc.) performed in response to the timer scroll is displayed, When the "scroll release effect" (increase! etc. display) performed corresponding to the scroll without timer is displayed, the scroll with timer is displayed No timer When the "scroll release effect" (increase! display) performed in response to the scroll is displayed The same applies to the case of displaying the "scroll release effect" (display such as rising!) performed corresponding to the timerless scroll.
In addition, we have shown an example in which the time for which the display corresponding to the earlier displayed "scroll release effect" is performed is longer than the time for which the display corresponding to the later displayed "scroll release effect" is performed. The time during which the display corresponding to the ``scroll release performance'' displayed earlier may be made shorter than the time during which the display corresponding to the ``scroll release performance'' displayed later is performed. This is because the display corresponding to the previously displayed "scroll release effect" is not a little displayed, so there is a possibility that the player recognizes it.
Also, the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" may be displayed for the same time regardless of the "scroll release effect" performed earlier and the "scroll release effect" performed later. By setting the time to be the same, the time until it is hidden is fixed, so as not to mislead the player (not to give unnecessary consideration such as whether it is a chance because the display time is long). be able to.

When executing a plurality of advance notice effects at the same time, the display area may be divided into a plurality of areas, and the advance notice effects may be executed in each of the divided areas. For example, the display area may be divided into left and right, and the left side of the display area may display the "step-up notice effect", and the right side of the display area may display the "dialogue notice effect".

In addition, depending on the "scroll release effect", the display mode of "step-up notice effect", "line notice effect", "ready title notice effect", "reach effect line notice effect", "cut-in notice effect", etc. will change. Although the embodiment has been shown, as described above, for example, the "step-up notice effect" and the "line notice effect" are executed at approximately the same time, and the "scroll release effect" raises expectations. In some cases, both the display of "advance effect" and the display of "dialogue notice effect" whose level of expectation has increased due to the "scroll release effect" are displayed. In that case, the display period in the display mode after the display mode is changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "post-change display mode") overlaps at least part of the period.
In that case, the display of the second post-change display mode may be started during the display of the first post-change display mode. Further, the display of the first post-change display mode may be started while the second post-change display mode is being displayed. Further, the display of the first post-change display mode and the second post-change display mode may be started at the same time.
Further, the display of the second post-change display mode may end during the display of the first post-change display mode. Further, the display of the first post-change display mode may end while the second post-change display mode is being displayed. Moreover, the display of the first post-change display mode and the display of the second post-change display mode may end at the same time.
Moreover, you may combine these.
For example, the scroll is released during the execution of the "step-up notice effect" and the background color is displayed with the changed background color, and the scroll is released during the execution of the "serif notice effect" and the dialogue is At least a part of the period may overlap with the period in which the words after the change are displayed.
In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of post-change display modes, it is possible to further heighten the feeling of exhilaration at the occurrence of a big win.

During the period from obtaining a scroll with a timer until the "scroll release effect" performed in the scroll with a timer is performed (or until the display mode after change is changed by the "scroll release effect"), Player-participation type effects (“step-up notice effect”, “line notice effect”, “ "Reach title announcement effect", "Reach effect dialogue announcement effect", "Cut-in announcement effect") can be executed, and by operating the operation instruction display, player participation type effect and operation unit A result effect to be displayed (including a result effect to be displayed without operating the operation means) may be displayed. In this case, interest can be maintained even before the countdown display by the timer-equipped scroll becomes "0".
The same may be done for scrolls without a timer, but since the player does not know at what timing the "scroll release effect" will be executed for the scrolls without a timer, the player can use the scrolls without a timer after acquiring the scroll without a timer. It is preferable not to perform the aforementioned player-participation-type presentation (start of operation instruction display) until the "scroll release presentation" is executed.
On the other hand, when both a scroll with a timer and a scroll without a timer are obtained, the above-mentioned player participation type effect (start of operation instruction display) is not performed until the first scroll release effect is executed. However, after that, the player participation type production (start of operation instruction display) may be performed, or the player participation type production (operation instruction Alternatively, a player-participation type effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after a predetermined number of "scroll release effects" that are less than the number of acquired scrolls are executed. Alternatively, the player-participation type effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after the "scroll release effect" corresponding to all acquired scrolls is executed. In addition, the player-participation type effect may be performed multiple times in the variations targeted by the "scroll stock effect". In that case, a plurality of player-participation-type effects (starting operation instruction display) may be performed before the first "scroll release effect", or the "scroll release effect" may be performed a plurality of times. is executed and until the next "scroll release effect" is executed, the player participation type effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed a plurality of times, or the scroll release effect is executed and the next "scroll One player-participation type effect (start of operation instruction display) is performed before the "release effect" is executed, and the remaining player-participation type effect (start of operation instruction display) is performed at the next "scroll release It may be executed after the "effect" is executed, or after the "scroll release effect" corresponding to all the acquired scrolls is executed, the player participation type effect (operation instruction display start) may be performed.

The above-described light-emitting decorative member may be caused to emit light in response to the execution of the "scroll release effect".
Examples of light emitting decorative members include a door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550, a door frame top unit 570, a right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, and a game board. 5, one or more of the panel plate rear substrate 2420, the tank accessory 3770, and the like can be adopted.
When the "scroll release effect" is performed for the scroll without a timer, it is preferable to cause the light-emitting decorative member to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode.
The timing of starting light emission in a specific light emission mode shall be any of the following: before the start of the ``scroll release effect'', at the same time as the start of the ``scroll release effect'', or after the start of the ``scroll release effect''. can be done. In addition, the timing to end the light emission by the specific light emission mode shall be either before the start of the ``scroll release effect'', at the same time as the start of the ``scroll release effect'', or after the start of the ``scroll release effect''. can be done.
The light-emitting decorative member having a specific light-emitting mode may be one or a plurality of the above-described light-emitting decorative members. As a specific light emission mode, the light emitting decorative member provided on the door frame 3 and the light emitting decorative member provided on the game board 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, and then the light emitting decorative member provided on the door frame 3 is lighted in a predetermined manner. A light emission mode in which light is emitted may be adopted.
Since it is not known when the scroll without a timer will be released, the player may miss the post-change display mode, but according to such an embodiment, the player is prevented from overlooking the post-change display mode. can.
In addition, when the "scroll release effect" is performed for the scroll with a timer, the light-emitting decorative member may not emit light in a specific light-emitting mode. At this time, it is preferable to adopt a light emission mode suitable for the output BGM as the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative member. This is because the timer counts down so that the player can recognize the release timing of the scroll. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming excessive.

The above-described movable decorative member may be moved in correspondence with the execution of the "scroll release effect".
The movable decorative members include, for example, a door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550, a door frame top unit 570, a right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, and a game board. 5, one or more of the panel plate rear substrate 2420, the tank accessory 3770, and the like can be adopted.
A specific movable decorative member (one or more) may be operated at the timing of executing the "scroll release effect" for the scroll without timer and the scroll with timer.
Also, at the timing of executing the "scroll release effect" for scrolls without a timer, a specific movable decorative member is operated, but when performing the "scroll release effect" for a scroll with a timer, the specific movable decorative member is not operated. can be
Also, at the timing of executing the "scroll release effect" for scrolls without a timer, a specific movable decorative member is not activated, but when the "scroll release effect" is performed for a scroll with a timer, a specific movable decorative member is activated. can be
Further, at the timing of executing the "scroll release effect" for the scroll without timer and the scroll with timer, a specific movable decorative member (one or more) may not be operated.
As for the operation of the movable decorative member, for example, it is preferable to move it from the standby position to the moving position. Further, when the movable decorative member moves to the moving position, it is preferable that the predetermined advance notice display in the post-change display mode and the movable decorative member overlap when viewed from the front. For example, part or all of the predetermined notice display in the post-change display mode may overlap the movable decorative member. In this case, the visibility of the notice display in the post-change display mode is reduced, but it is possible to make the player feel excited wondering what was displayed.
On the other hand, when the movable decorative member moves to the movement position, the predetermined advance notice display in the post-change display mode and the movable decorative member may not overlap when viewed from the front.
Further, when the plurality of movable decorative members are moved to the movement position, the predetermined advance notice display in the post-change display mode overlaps a part of the movable decorative members in a front view, and the predetermined display state in the post-change display mode is displayed. and the other movable decorative member may not overlap when viewed from the front.

In addition, depending on the "scroll release effect", the display mode of "step-up notice effect", "line notice effect", "reach title notice effect", "reach effect dialogue notice effect", and "cut-in notice effect" will change. Although the form is shown, the type of display mode after the display mode is changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "post-change display mode") may be different between the scroll without timer and the scroll with timer.
For example, the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released may be larger than the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the user wait with excitement as to which post-change display mode will be in the period until the countdown reaches zero.
The number of post-change display modes displayed when the scroll without timer is released may be the same number as the number of post-change display modes displayed when the scroll with timer is released. Alternatively, the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released may be smaller than the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released.

A predetermined sound effect may be output in response to the execution of the "scroll release effect".
Also, different sound effects may be output depending on whether the scroll without timer is released or the scroll with timer is released.
Also, it is possible to output a sound effect when a scroll without a timer is released, and not to output a sound effect when a scroll with a timer is released.
When the scroll without timer is released, one of a plurality of sound effects corresponding to each of the plurality of post-change display modes is output, and when the scroll with timer is released, the sound effect is output. may not be output, or the same effect sound may be output regardless of the post-change display mode.
Since it is not known when the scroll without a timer will be released, the player may miss the post-change display mode, but according to such an embodiment, the player is prevented from overlooking the post-change display mode. can.
As for the scroll with a timer, a countdown sound may be output in accordance with the countdown display from a predetermined number of seconds before the scroll is released. For example, voice output of "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1" may be performed in a period from 5 seconds to 1 second before the scroll is released.

Thus, according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 378 to 390, it is possible to provide the player with new interests.

The light guide plate 1140 functioning as a decorative member will be described below with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. FIG.
FIG. 391(a) shows a front view, and FIG. 391(b) shows a plan view (cross-sectional view). FIG. 392 shows a state in which the light guide plate 1140 and the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 are viewed from the front.
A panel plate opening 1118 is provided in the panel plate 1110 . A light guide plate 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from behind so as to partially cover the panel plate opening 1118 . The size of the light guide plate 1140 is slightly larger than the display area 1600a.
The light guide plate 1140 is a plate-like member made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 formed by fine unevenness on the rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 1140 is 2 mm. The shape of the portion where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided is a decorative shape such as a predetermined character, pattern, pattern, or letter (in an example described later, the shape of a monster character and a plurality of lightning bolts is expressed). ing.
A light guide plate illumination member 1146 is attached along the vertical direction of the right end of the light guide plate 1140 . The light guide plate illumination member 1146 is composed of a thin plate-like light guide plate substrate 1147 and a plurality of light guide plate light emitting members 1148 mounted on the light guide plate substrate 1147 along the longitudinal direction of the light guide plate substrate 1147 . ing. The light guide plate light emitting member 1148 is composed of a full-color LED. Light emission control of the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is performed by the peripheral control board 1510 .

Light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 reaches the left end of the light guide plate 1140 while being reflected within the light guide plate 1140 . Therefore, the light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 reaches the entire area inside the light guide plate 1140 .
The light entering the light guide plate 1140 is irregularly reflected by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 . Since part of the diffusely reflected light changes its optical path to the player side, the part where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided emits light and is visually recognized by the player.
On the other hand, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 does not irradiate light, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is visually recognized in a substantially transparent state, and the presence of the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is difficult for the player to notice. In addition, the portion of the light guide plate 1140 where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is not provided is in a smooth state, and the light guide plate 1140 exists regardless of whether the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light. It is difficult for the player to notice.
Therefore, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 emits light, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is visually recognized as emitting light in a predetermined manner. In addition, the player can visually recognize the display contents of the display area 1600a located behind the light guide plate 1140 in a state where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is superimposed on the light guide plate.
Further, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 does not emit light, the player can visually recognize the display contents of the entire display area 1600 a located behind the light guide plate 1140 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, a specific visual recognition mode of display area 1600a and light guide plate 1140 will be described. Figures 392(a) to 392(c) are front views.
FIG. 392(a) shows how the light guide plate 1140 (broken line portion) overlaps the display area 1600a (solid line portion). Also, a light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 provided on the light guide plate 1140 is shown. A light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 in the shape of a monster character is provided near the center of the light guide plate 1140 . Further, light guide plate rough surface portions 1142 are provided radially around the monster character in the shape of a lightning bolt.
FIG. 392(b) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is changing and the light guide plate illumination member 1146 does not emit light. In this state, no light is introduced onto the light guide plate 1140, so the monster character and the lightning bolt are not visible, and the entire display content of the display area 1600a is visible.
On the other hand, FIG. 392(c) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is changing and the light guide plate illumination member 1146 emits light. In this state, the light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is introduced into the light guide plate 1140, the light is scattered at the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142, and the monster character and the lightning are visible.

In this way, by introducing the light emitted by the light guide plate illumination member 1146 into the light guide plate 1140 , the light is diffusely reflected at the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 provided in the light guide plate 1140 , and the predetermined pattern (monster character, lightning, etc.) can be displayed. Also, when the player is visually recognizing the display area 1600a, a predetermined image (here, an image of a monster character or an image of lightning) is suddenly displayed on the light guide plate 1140 located on the front side of the display area 1600a. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a great surprise.

A plurality of colors of light emitted by the light guide plate illumination member 1146 may be provided. For example, when light of a color such as blue, green, or red is irradiated, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 having the same shape can be made to emit light in a different color. In the above example, the degree of expectation is indicated by various images (holding image, preview image, etc.) and the color of light emitted from the light-emitting decorative member. can be shown.
For example, blue, green, and red may be provided as the colors of light to be introduced into the light guide plate 1140, and the degree of expectation may be increased in the order of blue, green, and red. In this case, the monster character and the lightning bolt are displayed in any one of blue, green, and red.

The “weather forecast effect” will be described below with reference to FIG.
The "weather forecast effect" is an effect in which an image representing a weather phenomenon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "weather phenomenon image") is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the degree of expectation for a big win is indicated by the type of the displayed weather phenomenon image. be.
As weather phenomenon images, there are three types of images: a rain image, a thunder image, and a tornado image, and one of the images is displayed in the "weather forecast effect". The degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the order of the rain image, the lightning image, and the tornado image. For example, the expectation level when a rain image is displayed is 3%, the expectation level when a thunder image is displayed is 7%, and the expectation level when a tornado image is displayed is 10%.
The "weather forecast effect" is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and the state in which any one of the weather phenomenon images is displayed continues during the execution of the effect.

FIG. 393(a) shows an example of the display state when the "weather forecast effect" is not executed. Here, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image, the decorative pattern is in a state of high-speed fluctuation, and the current pending image and two standby pending images are displayed.
A display example when execution of the "weather notice effect" is started in this state is shown below.
FIG. 393(b) shows a state in which the "weather forecast effect" is executed and a rain image is displayed. Also, FIG. 393(c) shows a state in which the "weather forecast effect" is executed and a thunder image is displayed. FIG. 393(d) shows a state in which a "weather forecast effect" is executed and a tornado image is displayed.
As shown in each figure, the display priority of the weather phenomenon image is higher than the display priority of the background image. is set lower than the display priority of

By means of the "weather notice effect", the variation result of the ornamental pattern during variation may indicate the degree of expectation of the big win, or based on the look-ahead processing, the variation result corresponding to one of the standby reserved images will be the big win. You may make it show an expectation level.
Note that the weather phenomenon image may be dynamically displayed. For example, the meteorological phenomenon image may be displayed in such a manner that rain or thunder falls from top to bottom, or a tornado moves left and right.
In the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 393, the timing for executing the "weather forecast effect" was a state in which the decorative patterns were fluctuating at high speed, but one to three of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns The "weather forecast effect" may be executed in a state in which one is temporarily stopped. For example, in the "pseudo continuous effect", the "weather forecast effect" may be executed in a state in which the left, middle and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped, or in a reach state in which the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped with the same pattern. .

A variation pattern table for determining variation patterns will be described with reference to FIG. Here, as a result of the special lottery, there are a loss and a big hit, and in the case of a loss, the variation pattern table at loss shown in FIG. 394(a) is referred to and the variation pattern is determined. Also, in the case of a big hit, a variation pattern is determined with reference to a variation pattern table at the time of a big hit shown in FIG. 394(b).
Execution of the special lottery and determination of the variation pattern are performed by the main control board 1310, and the result of the special lottery and the determined variation pattern are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as commands. The peripheral control board 1510 executes display using the game board side effect display device 1600, output of sound, operation and light emission of decoration members, etc. as effects based on the received special lottery result and variation pattern.

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability is 1/300. In addition, for the sake of simplification of explanation, it is assumed that there will be no small hits or losses with reduced working hours. In addition, the exemplified variation pattern table is a normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and when the number of reservations of the first start port 2002 is 0, the variation referred to when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 Shall be a pattern table.
In the fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing, from fluctuation pattern 01 to fluctuation pattern 07, the fluctuation time becomes longer, but the allocation probability becomes lower. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern table, from variation pattern 08 to variation pattern 14, the variation time becomes longer, but the distribution probability becomes higher. Here, the probability that the variation pattern 07 and the variation pattern 08 are selected is 0%.

From FIGS. 394(a) and 394(b), it can be said that the longer the variation time of the decorative pattern is, the higher the expectation of the big hit is. For example, the expectation level of the variation display with a variation time of 10 seconds (variation pattern 01, variation pattern 08) is 0%, but the expectation level of the variation display with a variation time of 120 seconds (variation pattern 05, variation pattern 12) is Approximately 1.6%, the expected degree of fluctuation display with a fluctuation display of 180 seconds (variation pattern 06, fluctuation pattern 13) is approximately 9.1%, and a fluctuation display with a fluctuation display of 240 seconds (variation pattern 07, fluctuation pattern 14) is 100%.

By adopting such a variation pattern table, it becomes possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect or a special ready-to-win effect when the variable display is long.
In addition, the longer the variable display time of the decorative pattern is, the higher the degree of expectation for the big win becomes, so that it is possible to make the player feel the expectation of the big win and to enjoy the performance for a long period of time.
In addition, in the variation pattern table for the same number of seconds (for example, variation pattern 06 and variation pattern 13), the same effect display is executed until a predetermined timing of the variation display, and after the predetermined timing, the result of the special lottery is lost. or a big hit (for example, a win-lose display at the end of a special ready-to-win effect). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can estimate the degree of expectation of the big win in the middle of the performance display, and expect what kind of display will be finally performed, while watching the result of the performance display. I will watch over you.

It should be noted that the number of variation patterns, variation time, and distribution probability shown in FIG. Seconds may also be used. By adopting such a mode, it is possible to execute various effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

The state when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 shows a table that is referred to when the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and the number of reservations of the first start port 2002 is 0, but the game The type of starting port where the ball won (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), game state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), number of reservations Different variation pattern tables may be used depending on (0 to 4).
For example, the variation time is the same as the five types shown in the example, but the distribution probability may be changed. Alternatively, a variation pattern table in which the types of variation time (number of seconds) are increased or decreased may be used.

Especially in the case of the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state, many game balls win the second starting port 2004 in a short period of time. Therefore, in the variation pattern table of the second start port 2004, the distribution probability is set so that the variation time is relatively short compared to the variation pattern table used in the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state. By adopting such a variation pattern table, it is possible to increase the number of times of variation display of decorative patterns per unit time, so that over-winning of the second start port 2004 is less likely to occur, suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Also, a variation pattern table may be set according to the number of reservations. In this case, it is preferable to set the distribution probability such that the larger the number of reserved items, the shorter the fluctuation time. Conversely, it is preferable to set the distribution probability such that the smaller the number of reserved items, the longer the fluctuation time. By adopting such a variation pattern table, the variation display of the decorative pattern is less likely to be interrupted, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

395 to 405, etc., the special effect "holding change color indication effect" in the embodiment modified from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 123 to 390 will be described below. FIG. 395 shows an example of an image displayed in this embodiment (or modification). 396 and 397 show effect pattern tables in this embodiment. 398 and 399 show time charts in this embodiment. 400, 401, 403, 404, and 405 show display examples in the display area 1600a of this embodiment.

The outline of the "holding change color indication effect" will be described below. In the "suspended changing color indication effect", the color of the suspended image is suggested by the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern.
In the ``suspended changing color predictive effect'', the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' and the ``second pending change color predictive effect'' are executed, but only the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' is executed. In other cases, the "second pending color change predictive effect" is executed after the "first pending color change predictive effect" is executed.

FIG. 395(a) shows an example of decorative symbols displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment.
There are three types of numbers in the decorative pattern: blue, green, and red. Numbers "1" to "9" are given to the decorative patterns. As shown in the figure, ``2'', ``4'', ``6'' and ``8'' are blue, ``1'', ``5'' and ``9'' are green, and ``3'' and ``7'' are red. ing. In the drawing, blue is represented by left-sloping diagonal lines, green is represented by right-sloping diagonal lines, and red is represented by grid-like lines. This point may also be applied to other drawings, and images other than decorative patterns may also indicate the color of the image depending on the type of line. The part other than the numbers of the decorative pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "background area") should be white, gray, black, or the like. Alternatively, use a color similar to the color of the decorative pattern (dark blue or light blue if the decorative pattern is blue, yellowish green if the decorative pattern is green, orange or pink if the decorative pattern is red) may be adopted.
The decorative patterns with blue numbers are normal patterns, and the decorative patterns with green numbers and red numbers are variable patterns.
Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested by the types of symbols forming the ready-to-win state. For example, if the numbers attached to the decorative pattern are "1", "2", "4", "5", "8", "9", the expected degree is less than 5%, and if it is "6", it is 20%, " 50% for 3" and 90% for 7 (or 100%). As a result, in addition to simply determining whether the reach pattern is a normal pattern or a variable pattern (that is, whether it is an even number or an odd number), whether the number attached to the pattern is "1" to "9" It is also possible to increase the player's interest in whether or not there is.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 395(b), the color of the background area of the decorative pattern may be set to a color (blue, green, or red) corresponding to the type of the number, not limited to the number. In this case, it is preferable to use a color such as white, gray, or black for the number portion of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, use a color similar to the background area color (dark blue or light blue if the background area color is blue, yellowish green if the background area color is green, orange or pink if the background area color is red). may be adopted.

FIG. 395(c) is a background image for indication effect displayed as a background image in the “second pending color change indication effect” of the “suspended color change indication effect”. The foreshadowing background image simulates a slot machine installed in a casino facility. Although the characters "PAYS", "BET", and "SPIN" are also part of the background, they do not indicate that the operation reception from the player is valid, but simply function as a decoration.

White, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are adopted as the colors of the pending images (the current pending image and the standby pending image). The color of the pending image is determined based on a look-ahead process. White is the color used as the color of the normal held image. Expectations increase in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. Expectation is less than 100% (eg, 80%) when a gold pending image is displayed. The expectation level is 100% when the rainbow-colored pending image is displayed. Note that the appearance probability decreases in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow.

When the game ball wins the first start port 2002 during the variable display of the decorative pattern and a hold occurs, the random number obtained at the time of winning is pre-determined in the look-ahead process, and based on the result of the pre-determination, "hold change color It is determined whether or not to execute the predictive effect. When it is decided to execute the "holding change color indication effect", the three decorative patterns on the left, middle and right are immediately displayed (under any circumstances (for example, all of the decorative patterns Temporary stop display is displayed immediately) even in the situation where the player is present or in the situation where the reach effect is being executed). Although the details will be described later, the conditions under which it is determined that the "suspended change color indication effect" is to be executed are that the result of the variable display being executed is a failure and that the remaining variable time of the variable display being executed is It is an effect that can be determined when it is left for a predetermined time or longer.
In addition, all of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed have the same color. For example, combinations such as ``2'', ``4'', ``8'' and ``2'', ``2'' and ``8'' with blue decorative patterns, and ``9'', ``1'', ``1'' and ``1'', ``5'' with green decorative patterns. These decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in combinations such as "9" and combinations of red decorative patterns such as "3", "3", "7" and "7", "3", and "3". As long as the condition that the colors of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same is satisfied, it goes without saying that combinations other than these may be employed.

In addition, in the combination of decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped in the "first reserved changing color indication effect" and the "second reserved changing color indication effect" described later, a combination that indicates reach loss (the left and right decorative patterns are the same decorative pattern , and the decorative patterns with different middle decorative patterns) and combinations that indicate a big hit (decorative patterns with the same decorative patterns on the left, middle and right) are not adopted. For example, a combination of "2", "4", "2" or "2", "2", and "2" will not temporarily stop the decorative symbols. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a reach loss has occurred or that a big win has occurred after the temporary stop display is finished.

In addition, when the game ball wins not only in the first starting port 2002 but also in the second starting port 2004, the "holding change color predictive effect" may be executed.

A look-ahead process is performed based on the start winning, and whether or not to execute a "suspended change color indication effect" is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the look-ahead process.
In addition, when there are a plurality (2 to 4) of suspensions, the display mode of the suspension image of any one of the existing suspensions is changed by the "suspension change color indication effect".
Also, the result of the variable display being executed is always "loss". That is, when the result of the variable display being executed is a big hit, the "suspended changing color predictive effect" is not executed.
In addition, the higher the number of pending colors, the higher the probability that the "suspended change color indication effect" will be executed. That is, the greater the number of reservations, the higher the probability that the reservations that result in a big hit will be included in the reservations. As a result, the greater the number of reservations, the higher the probability that the "holding change color indication effect" will be executed. .
According to such an embodiment, since the player who wants to start the "holding change color indication effect" tries to increase the number of holdings, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

It should be noted that the display mode of the standby pending image corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the execution of the look-ahead process may be changed by the "holding change color predictive effect". In this case, the display mode of the standby holding image displayed most recently changes.
Also in this case, since the player who wants to start the "holding change color indication effect" tries to increase the number of holdings, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The effect pattern table shown in FIG. 396 shows the relationship between the color of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol, the color of the displayed aura image, and the change mode of the standby/suspended image in the "first pending change color predictive effect".
This effect pattern table shows the relationship between the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern (the color of the aura image displayed) and the change mode of the standby holding image. For example, when the effect pattern PTN-1-02 is executed, the blue decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and after the blue aura image is displayed, the standby pending image changes from white to blue. Further, when the performance pattern PTN-1-07 is executed, the green decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and after the green aura image is displayed, the standby pending image changes from white to red. Further, when the performance pattern PTN-1-09 is executed, the red decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and after the red aura image is displayed, the standby pending image changes from white to red.
On the other hand, when production pattern PTN-1-01, production pattern PTN-1-05, and production pattern PTN-1-08 are executed, the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern (the color of the displayed aura image) , the color of any of the pending images does not change.

In this way, the standby reserved image may change to a reserved image of a color with a higher degree of expectation than the color of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol. On the other hand, there is no change to a standby reserved image of a color with a lower degree of expectation than the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern.
For example, if the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is blue, the standby reserved image of white may change to a reserved image of any of blue, green, and red. On the other hand, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is green, the white standby reserved image may change to a green or red reserved image, but it will not change to a blue reserved image. Further, when the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is red, the white standby image may change to a red standby image, but it will not change to a blue or green standby image.
Therefore, even if the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is blue, the player can expect the possibility of changing to red. Also, when the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is red, it does not change to blue or green.

398(a) and 398(b), and FIGS. 400 and 401. , with reference to the display example shown in FIG. Here, an example is shown in which the combination of decorative symbols "2", "4" and "8" is temporarily stopped. Note that FIGS. 398(a), 400, and 401 show examples of effects in which the color of the standby holding image does not change. On the other hand, FIGS. 398(b), 400, and 402 show examples of effects in which the color of the standby holding image changes. The contents of the production in both production examples are the same until the middle. Therefore, the explanation up to the middle is for both production examples. In addition, in the state where the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed and there are two standby pending, it is decided that the game ball newly enters the first start port 2002 and executes the "suspended change color predictive effect". will be explained in the case of

At timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. The color of the current reserved image and the color of the two standby reserved images are white, which has the highest display ratio as the reserved display. FIG. 400(a) shows a display state during high-speed variation of decorative symbols.
At timing t4.5, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, a white third standby holding image is displayed, and prefetch processing is performed. At timing t5, the "suspended change color predictive effect" is started based on the result of the look-ahead processing. Here, the performance pattern PTN-1-01 is selected, and the decoration patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of "2", "4" and "8". The color of these decorative designs is blue. FIG. 400(b) shows a display state when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. It should be noted that the “holding change color predictive effect” may be started at the timing when the look-ahead process is performed.
Subsequently, at timing t6.0 one second after the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols "2", "4" and "8", the current pending image is hidden. FIG. 400(c) shows a display state in which the current pending image is hidden.
When the "holding change color indication effect" starts, it is confirmed that the variable display being executed will result in a failure, so it is better to hide the current holding image in order not to provide a sense of useless expectation. Although preferred, the current pending image may remain displayed.
In this case, the current pending image may be displayed by moving it to the upper right of the display area 1600a in the same manner as the standby pending image, and the current pending image may be displayed until the variable display ends.

From timing t6.5 to timing t7.5, each standby holding image moves at a constant speed from the bottom right of display area 1600a toward the bottom center of display area 1600a. FIG. 400(d) shows a state in which the standby pending image has completely moved to the lower center of the display area 1600a.
Since the "suspended change color indication effect" is an effect that may change the standby pending image, it is easier for the player to recognize it if it is moved to the vicinity of the center of the display area 1600a. In addition, although the image is moved at a constant speed, it may be moved at a different speed, the timing of movement may be shifted, or a combination thereof may be used. When shifting the timing of movement, it is preferable to move the standby reserved image earlier as the lottery is earlier so that the plurality of standby reserved images are not overlapped and displayed.
It should be noted that the arrows in the drawing indicate the movement mode of the standby holding image, and are not actually displayed in the display area 1600a. Note that arrows may be shown in other drawings for the purpose of indicating the trajectory of the current reserved image and the standby reserved image.
At timing t7.5, a blue aura image is displayed near the center of display area 1600a. FIG. 400(e) shows a display state in which a blue aura image is displayed.

From timing t7.5 to timing t10, the aura image moves downward and then gradually becomes smaller so that it overlaps with any one of the standby holding images. FIG. 400(f) shows a display state in which the blue aura image moves downward and is displayed so as to overlap the standby holding image. Also, FIG. 400(g) shows a display state in which a reduced blue aura image is displayed overlapping one standby reserved image (here, the first standby reserved image). In addition, as described above, the display mode of the standby pending image corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the execution of the look-ahead process may be changed by the "holding change color predictive effect". In this case, the display mode of the most recently displayed standby pending image (the third standby pending image shown in FIG. 400) changes.

An example of effect (effect pattern PTN-1-01) in which the color of the standby pending image does not change will be described below with reference to FIG. 398(a).
At timing t10, the display of the aura image ends, and the aura image becomes a non-display state. The color of the first standby reserved image that overlapped with the aura image remains white without any change. FIG. 401(a) shows the display state after the display of the aura image is completed.
From timing t11 to timing t12, the standby holding image moves toward the upper right of the display area 1600a at a constant speed. FIG. 401(b) shows a display state during movement of the standby holding image. Also, FIG. 401(c) shows a state in which the movement of the standby pending image has been completed.
At timing t13, each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols changes at high speed. At the same time when the high-speed fluctuation resumes, the color of the decorative design returns to the original color of the decorative design. FIG. 401(d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is completed, and the high-speed fluctuation state resumes. In addition, when the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are brought into a state of high-speed fluctuation, the swinging and fluctuating decorative patterns are made translucent (the type of the decorative pattern can be recognized when it is translucent), and then the high-speed fluctuation is performed. Good. This is because smooth movement does not give the player a sense of discomfort.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t29.5, the middle decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t30, left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 401(e) shows a display state in which the variable display is finished and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at timing t30 without temporarily stopping and displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.
At timing t31, a new variable display is started, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state. In addition, each of the pending images displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a as the first to third standby pending images is displayed at timing t31, and at the same time, the current pending image to the second standby pending image are displayed in the display area. Displayed at the bottom right of 1600a, the "first pending color change indication rendering" ends. FIG. 401(f) shows a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are in a state of high speed fluctuation.

An example of effect (effect pattern PTN-1-02) in which the color of the standby holding image changes will be described below with reference to FIG. 398(b).
At timing t10, the display of the aura image ends, and the aura image becomes a non-display state. The color of the first standby reserved image overlapping the aura image changes from white to blue, which is the color of the aura image. FIG. 402(a) shows the display state after the display of the aura image is completed.
From timing t11 to timing t12, the standby holding image moves toward the upper right of the display area 1600a at a constant speed. FIG. 402(b) shows a display state during movement of the standby holding image. Also, FIG. 402(c) shows a state in which the movement of the standby pending image has been completed.
At timing t13, each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols changes at high speed. At the same time when the high-speed fluctuation resumes, the color of the decorative design returns to the original color of the decorative design. FIG. 402(d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is completed, and the high-speed fluctuation state resumes. In addition, when the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are brought into a state of high-speed fluctuation, the swinging and fluctuating decorative patterns are made translucent (the type of the decorative pattern can be recognized when it is translucent), and then the high-speed fluctuation is performed. Good. This is because smooth movement does not give the player a sense of discomfort.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t29.5, the middle decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t30, left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 402(e) shows a display state in which the variable display is finished and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at timing t30 without temporarily stopping and displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.
At timing t31, a new variable display is started, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state. In addition, each of the pending images displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a as the first to third standby pending images is displayed at timing t31, and at the same time, the current pending image to the second standby pending image are displayed in the display area. Displayed at the bottom right of 1600a, the "first pending color change indication rendering" ends. FIG. 402(f) shows a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are in a state of high speed fluctuation.

Thus, in the "first pending change color indication effect", an aura image having the same color as the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is displayed. Also, the color of any one of the standby pending images may change to the color of the aura image or a color with a higher degree of expectation than the color of the aura image. For example, when a blue aura image is displayed as shown in production patterns PTN-1-02 to PTN-1-04, the color of the standby pending image changes to one of blue, green, and red. I can.

Although an example of the effect in the case of three standby pending images has been shown, the "first pending color changing predictive effect" can be executed also in the case of one, two, or four standby pending images. Note that, regardless of the number of standby reserved images, only one standby reserved image is changed.

The player may be shown in advance which standby holding image the display mode of which can be changed. For example, from the same timing (timing t7.5) as the display of the aura image starts, an arrow or marker is attached around a certain standby pending image whose display mode may change, or a certain standby pending image whose display mode may change is displayed. The image may be displayed by being enlarged/reduced periodically. According to such an embodiment, it is easier for the player to recognize which standby hold image can change. Note that such a display mode may be performed until the "suspended changing color predictive effect" ends. Alternatively, it may be terminated at the timing when the standby holding image is changed by any of the effects.

Further, when the display mode of the standby pending image changes, an arrow or marker indicating the change may be attached, or the standby pending image whose display mode has changed may be displayed by being enlarged or reduced periodically. good. For example, such a display may be started at timing t10. After repeating enlargement/reduction a predetermined number of times, the standby pending image may be displayed in the final enlarged state. It may be made to have a predetermined size.
Such display emphasizing the standby pending image may be performed until the timing (timing t13) at which the execution of the “first pending changing color indication effect” ends, or the standby pending image is displayed at the upper right position of the display area 1600a. to the timing (timing t31) of returning to the lower right position of the display area 1600a.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to recognize that the standby pending image has changed. Further, when a plurality of standby images are displayed, it is possible to recognize which standby image has changed.

As shown in FIGS. 401(e), 401(f), 402(e), and 402(f), the standby hold image displayed above the display area 1600a is the next variable display. Erased as soon as it starts. At the same time, the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed in the pending image display area provided below the display area 1600a.
It should be noted that dynamic display may be performed in which the pending image displayed on the upper side is moved to the lower side.

By executing the ``first pending change color indication performance'' in this way, the player is made to recognize which color the standby pending image may change to depending on the color of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed. be able to. In addition, when there are a plurality of standby reserved images, the player can have a sense of expectation as to which standby reserved image will change.

Further, when the "first pending change color indication effect" is executed, the display position of the standby pending image within the display area 1600a is changed from the normal lower right position to the upper right position finally. be done. Thereby, the standby holding image can be visually recognized dynamically. In addition, since the standby reserved image is moved while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the player can be made to recognize the movement more clearly. Further, since the standby holding image is positioned at a position different from the usual position, other players can recognize that the highly anticipated performance has been performed.

Next, the “second pending change color indication effect” will be described. The ``second pending color change indication effect'' is an effect that may be performed after the execution of the ``first pending color change indication effect''. In some cases, the standby pending image that has changed in the “holding change color indication effect” may further change.
The effect pattern table shown in FIG. 397 shows the color of the standby pending image after change by the "first pending change color predictive effect", the type of decoration pattern to be temporarily stopped in the "second pending change color predictive effect", and the It shows the relationship between the color, the combination of the temporarily stopped decorative patterns, whether the decorative patterns continue the temporary stop, the type and color of the decorative patterns when the temporary stop is continued, and the display mode of the standby holding image.

In the "second reserved changing color predictive effect", the left, middle and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same manner as in the "first reserved changing color predictive effect". After that, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols change to a high-speed fluctuation state in order. When all the three decorative patterns are in the high-speed change state, the standby reserved image is not changed. On the other hand, two decorative patterns are in a state of high-speed fluctuation, but when one decorative pattern maintains the temporarily stopped state for a predetermined time, the color of the standby reserved image changes to the color of the decorative design that maintains the temporarily stopped state. is displayed.
It should be noted that, during the "second pending change color indication effect", the correspondence relationship between the numbers of the decorative symbols and the colors changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 397, the decorative pattern is temporarily in one of green, red, gold, and rainbow colors.
In addition, in the "second pending change color predictive effect", the background image changes to the predictive effect background image shown with reference to FIG. 395(c).

Below, the effect pattern PTN-1-02 and the effect pattern PTN-2-06 (the effect pattern in which the color of the standby pending image does not change from blue in the "second pending change color predictive effect") is selected and executed. Effect pattern PTN-1-02 and effect pattern PTN-2-08 (the effect pattern in which the standby pending image changes from blue to red in the “second pending change color indication effect”) is selected. 399(a) and 399(b) and display examples shown in FIGS. and explain. It should be noted that the contents of the presentation before timing t13 are as shown with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 399(a) is a time chart when effect pattern PTN-2-06 is executed. Also, FIG. 399(b) is a time chart when effect pattern PTN-2-08 is executed.

FIG. 403(a) shows the display state from timing t12 to timing t13. Here, a state in which the first standby hold is changed to blue and displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a is shown.
From timing t13 to timing t13.5, an "advancement effect" of displaying the characters "ka~kara~no~" is executed. FIG. 403(b) shows the display state at this time.
That is, when the "development effect" is executed after the "first pending change color predictive effect" is completed, the "second pending change color predictive effect" is started after that, but the "first pending change color predictive effect" is started. After the "color predictive effect" is completed, if the "development effect" is not executed, then the "second pending change color predictive effect" is not started.

It should be noted that even when the "advancement effect" is executed, the "second pending change color indication effect" may not be executed. In this case, at timing t13.5, the display of the characters "from" ends, and the display state shown in FIG. 398 is obtained.

At timing t13.5, the "second pending change color predictive effect" is started. At the timing when the "second pending change color predictive effect" is started, the background image changes from the normal background image A shown with reference to FIG. 347(a) to the predictive effect shown with reference to FIG. background image. As described above, the background image for predictive effect is modeled after the slot machine installed in the casino facility. By displaying the background image for indication effect, it is suggested to the player that the standby pending image may change further.
In addition, a red "3" as a left decorative pattern, a green "2" as a middle decorative pattern, and a red "7" as a right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped as initial patterns.
In addition, as a character display indicating the content of the effect, a character "Hold promotion chance!" is displayed at the bottom of the display area 1600a.
FIG. 403(c) shows the display state from timing t13.5 to timing t14.5.

At timing t14.5, instead of the text "Hold promotion chance!", the text "Pending color will be promoted to the symbol color of the reel that does not move until the end!" is displayed.
FIG. 403(d) shows the display state from timing t14.5 to timing t15.5.
At timing t15.5, instead of the character "READY GO!"
FIG. 403(e) shows the display state from timing t15.5 to timing t16.
By performing such a display, it is possible to allow the player to sufficiently grasp the content of the presentation.

At timing t16, the display of the characters "READY GO!" ends, and a horizontally long remaining time gauge image is displayed. The remaining time gauge image is displayed for three seconds from timing t16 to timing t19.
The remaining time gauge image is completely black when it is displayed, but as time passes after the display is started, it gradually turns white from the left side, and finally becomes white and the display disappears. finish.
FIG. 403(f) shows the state immediately after the remaining time gauge image is displayed.
FIG. 403(g) shows the display state two seconds after the remaining time gauge image is displayed (timing t18).

An example of effect (effect pattern PTN-2-06) in which the color of the standby pending image does not change will be described below with reference to FIG. 399(a).
At timing t19, the display of the remaining time gauge image ends. At the same time, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are in a state of high-speed fluctuation. FIG. 404(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t20.5, the display of the background image for indication effect ends, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 404(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t29.5, the middle decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t30, left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 404(c) shows a display state in which the variable display is finished and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at timing t30 without temporarily stopping and displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.
At timing t31, a new variable display is started, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state. In addition, each of the pending images displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a as the first to third standby pending images is displayed at timing t24, and at the same time, the current pending image to the second standby pending image are displayed in the display area. Displayed at the bottom right of 1600a, the "second pending color change indication rendering" ends. FIG. 404(d) shows a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are in a state of high speed fluctuation.

An example of effect (effect pattern PTN-2-08) in which the color of the standby holding image changes will be described below with reference to FIG. 399(b).
At timing t19, the display of the remaining time gauge image ends. At the same time, the middle decorative design and the right decorative design are in a state of high speed fluctuation. The left decorative pattern continues to be temporarily stopped. FIG. 405(a) shows the display state at this time. At this timing, it is determined that the standby pending image changes to red, which is the color of the left decorative design.
From timing t19 to timing t19.5, a display emphasizing the left decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped is performed. Here, the decorative design shown in FIG. 395(a) and the decorative design shown in FIG. 395(b) are alternately displayed multiple times. FIG. 405(b) shows a display state in which the decorative symbol "3" shown in FIG. 395(b) is displayed.
From timing t19.5 to timing t20, the left decorative design moves to a position overlapping the standby reserved image while shrinking, and at the timing when the movement is completed, the color of the standby reserved image changes to the color of the decorative design. Since the color of the left decorative pattern is red, the color of the first standby reserved image changes to red. FIG. 405(c) shows a display state during movement of the left decorative design. Note that the above-described highlighting may be continued even during movement.
The left decorative pattern is erased from that position at the timing (timing t20) when it overlaps with the first standby reserved image, and instantly starts high-speed fluctuation on the left side of the display area 1600a. FIG. 405(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t20.5, the display of the background image for indication effect ends, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 405(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t29.5, the middle decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t30, left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 405(f) shows a display state in which the variable display is finished and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at timing t30 without temporarily stopping and displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.
At timing t31, a new variable display is started, and the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are in a high-speed variable state. In addition, each of the pending images displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a as the first to third standby pending images is displayed at timing t24, and at the same time, the current pending image to the second standby pending image are displayed in the display area. Displayed at the bottom right of 1600a, the "second pending color change indication rendering" ends. FIG. 405(g) shows a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are in a state of high speed fluctuation.

In this way, in the ``second pending change color indication effect'', the player is allowed to recognize in advance which color the standby pending image may change to depending on the color of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed. can be done.
In addition, since the suggestive effect of displaying the background image for the predictive effect is executed simultaneously with the start of the ``second pending change color predictive effect'', the player can be made to recognize that the standby pending image can change.
In addition, in the "first pending color change indication effect", even if it is likely to change to a pending image of a color with a low degree of expectation (for example, a blue pending image) or actually changes, the "second pending color change indication effect" If "effect" is executed, there is a possibility that the image will change to a hold image with a higher degree of expectation, so the player can be relieved.

In this way, in the "suspended changing color predictive effect" in this embodiment, only the "first retained changing color predictive effect" is executed and the retained image changes (FIG. 398(b)) and does not change ( FIG. 398(a)). Also, after the execution of the "first pending change color predictive effect", the "second pending change color predictive effect" is executed and the pending image changes (Fig. 399(b)) and does not change (Fig. 399 ( a)).

Although the embodiment has been described in which timing t31 is set as the end timing (the timing at which the standby pending image is returned to the lower right of the display area 1600a) of the "first pending change color predictive effect" and the "second pending change color predictive effect". , the timing (timing t28) immediately before the end of the high-speed fluctuation, the timing (timing t28.5) at which the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and the timing (timing t29) at which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped .5) and the timing (timing t30) at which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state is used as the end timing of the "first pending change color indication effect" and the "second pending change color indication effect". good too. In this case, at these timings, the standby holding image displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a is displayed in the lower right of the display area 1600a.
By returning the position of the standby pending image to the original position before the timing at which the next variable display is started in this way, the player can fully recognize the number of pending pending images and the display mode of the standby pending image. In this state, the next variable display can be started. Further, even when various effects are executed immediately after the start of the next variable display, the display contents in the display area 1600a do not become complicated, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

Other timing may be employed as the timing for returning the position of the standby pending image to the lower right of display area 1600a, which is the original position. For example, the timing (timing t13.5) at which the background image for predictive effect is started to be displayed, the predetermined timing during the period (timing t13.5 to timing t16) during which the display explaining the content of the effect is being performed, At a predetermined timing within the period (timing t16 to timing t19) during which the remaining time gauge image is displayed, the position of the standby holding image may be returned to its original position. In this case, the display mode of the standby holding image changes in the state displayed in the lower right of the display area 1600a.

Although the standby reserved image moved to the upper right of the display area 1600a does not overlap the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern, the standby reserved image is placed at a position where it overlaps the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern. may be displayed in
In this case, the display priority of the standby pending image may be higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during temporary stop or stop display, or the display priority of the temporary stop or stop display may be higher than the display priority of the standby hold image. The display priority of the decorative pattern inside may be increased.
Alternatively, the display priority of the standby reserved image is set higher than the display priority of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern so that the standby reserved image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the standby reserved image is displayed during the stop display. The display priority of the decorative design during stop display may be set higher than the display priority of the image, and the decorative design may be displayed on the front side of the standby reservation image.

The "suspended change color indication effect" does not straddle the variable display, is started in the middle of a certain variable display, and ends at the same time as the end of the stop display (timing t31 in FIGS. 398 and 399). By the way, the time for the variable display is determined in advance by a random number obtained by the main control board 1310 when the starting prize is generated. Therefore, the "suspended change color indication effect" is executed only when the remaining time of the variable display is sufficiently secured.
Specifically, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is less than 15 seconds at the timing when the starting prize is generated, the "suspended changing color predictive effect" is not executed.
At the timing when the start winning is generated, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 15 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds, the ``first pending change color indication effect'' is executed, but the ``second pending change color indication effect'' is executed. "Color indication effect" is not executed.
At the timing when the starting prize is generated, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 20 seconds or more and less than 35 seconds, only the ``first pending change color indication effect'' is executed, and the ``first There is a case where the "second pending color change predictive effect" is executed after the "second pending color change predictive effect" is executed.
If the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 35 seconds or longer at the timing when the starting prize is generated, the "suspended changing color predictive effect" is not executed. As shown with reference to FIG. 394, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. Also, in that case, the probability of executing the highly anticipated special ready-to-win effect over a long period of time increases. Therefore, if the remaining time of the variable display is long, if the "suspended change color prediction effect" is started, it will be confirmed that it is a failure despite the high expectations. Although the player may feel a great disappointment, in this embodiment, when the remaining time of the variable display is long (35 seconds or more), the "suspended change color indication effect" is not started. , the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels discouraged can be prevented.

Note that when execution of the "suspended change color indication effect" is determined, various displays related to the variable display being executed are basically stopped. This is because the variable display during execution results in a failure. Incidentally, the canceled effects and images include a pseudo-continuous effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a current pending image. On the other hand, as images that are not canceled, there are a fourth symbol and a number of pending images.

The summary of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the "second pending change color indication effect" is shown in the "type and color of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped" column of the production pattern table in FIG. As shown in the "Combination" column, the combination of numbers should be determined randomly so that the numbers are evenly distributed.
In addition, as in the case of "first pending change color indication effect", combinations such as "3", "1", and "3" that indicate reach loss, and jackpots such as "3", "3", and "3" The combination shown should be hidden.

In production patterns PTN-2-01 to PTN-2-12, the more the number of red decorative symbols increases, the higher the probability that the standby holding image will change to red (that is, the degree of expectation for a big win).
In production pattern PTN-2-16, the combination of decorative patterns to be temporarily stopped is two golden decorative patterns and one rainbow colored decorative pattern, but the two golden decorative patterns are always in a state of high speed fluctuation, The rainbow-colored decorative pattern is always temporarily stopped, and the standby reserved image changes to rainbow-colored. It should be noted that the expectation level of the rainbow-colored standby pending image is 100%. Therefore, it is determined that a big hit will occur at the timing when the rainbow-colored decorative pattern is displayed.

An embodiment has been described in which two or three of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing when the display period (timing t16 to timing t19) of the remaining time gauge image ends are in the high-speed fluctuation state at the same time. may be in the high-speed fluctuation state in order.
For example, at the timing (timing t17) when one second has elapsed since the start of display of the remaining time gauge image, one of the decorative symbols changes from a temporary stop state to a high-speed fluctuation state, and two seconds have elapsed since the start of display of the remaining time gauge image. At the timing (timing t18), any one of the decorative symbols changes from the temporary stop state to the high-speed fluctuation state, and at the timing (timing t19) when the display of the remaining time gauge image ends, the remaining one decorative pattern maintains the temporary stop state. , may be in a high-speed fluctuation state.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of whether or not the decoration pattern of the highly anticipated color remains in the temporarily stopped state.

As the remaining time decreases, the decorative symbols do not change to a high-speed change state evenly (after 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds after the display of the remaining time gauge image starts). A high-speed fluctuation state may be used. For example, after 0.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds from the start of display of the remaining time gauge image, the decorative symbols may be changed from the temporary stop state to the high-speed change state. Alternatively, after 0.5 seconds, 1 second, and 3 seconds from the start of display of the remaining time gauge image, the decorative symbols may be changed from the temporary stop state to the high-speed change state.
According to such an embodiment, decorative design candidates (that is, colors in which the standby reserved image can change) are narrowed down early, so that interest can be enhanced.

FIG. 406 is a diagram showing how the standby pending image moves in the "first pending change color indication effect". The arrows in the drawing indicate the moving route of the standby holding image (the arrows are not actually displayed, but are illustrated for explanation).
FIG. 406(a) shows the path (movement start position, intermediate position, movement end position) of the standby hold image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 400 to 402 and the like. FIGS. 406(b), 406(c), 406(d), and 406(e) respectively show examples in which the path of the standby hold image is modified.
Although an embodiment has been described in which the standby holding image is paused at the intermediate position, it is not paused at the intermediate position, but instead is moved from the movement start position to the movement end position via the intermediate position at a constant speed. good too.
Further, the standby reserved image may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced while the standby reserved image is being moved. Alternatively, the standby holding image is gradually enlarged so that it reaches the maximum size at the intermediate position, gradually becomes smaller after passing the intermediate position, and is displayed at the original size at the movement end position. You may do so.
It should be noted that the order of the standby reserved images does not change in any case when the standby reserved images are moved along the paths shown in FIGS. 406(a) to 406(e). Therefore, when the color of the standby holding image changes, the player can easily grasp after how many changes the expected variable display will be performed.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 398, 399, and 403 to 405, the decorative design was displayed to overlap the reserved image, but instead of the decorative design, another image overlaps the reserved image. You may do so.
Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 407, an aura image having the same color as the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the decorative symbol, and the aura image moves toward the reserved image. An embodiment modified to change colors will be described.
From timing t19 to timing t19.5, a display emphasizing the left decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped is performed. Here, an aura image of the same color as the decorative design is displayed on the front side of the decorative design. FIG. 407(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t19.5, the left decorative pattern enters a state of high-speed fluctuation, and from timing t19.5 to timing t20, the aura image gradually shrinks and moves toward a position overlapping the standby holding image, and the movement ends. At the timing, the color of the standby reserved image changes to the color of the decorative pattern, and the display of the aura image ends. FIG. 407(b) shows a display state in which the aura image is moving. FIG. 407(c) shows the display state at the timing when the aura image reaches the position overlapping the standby image. FIG. 407(d) shows the display state when the standby pending image changes to the color of the aura image. FIG. 407(e) shows the display state when the display of the aura image is completed.
Note that the display contents after timing t20 are the same as those in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS.
In this way, the specific image in the color of the decorative pattern may be moved so as to overlap the standby reserved image, thereby changing the color of the standby reserved image.

When only the "first pending change color indication effect" is executed, a predetermined timing in a period from a predetermined timing after the completion of the movement of the standby pending image or a timing after that until the next variable display is started. , the standby holding image may be hidden.
Similarly, when the "second pending color change predictive effect" is executed following the "first pending color change predictive effect", a specified The standby holding image may be hidden at the timing.
In either case, the display of the standby pending image is resumed at the timing when the next variable display is started.
According to such an embodiment, even if the color of the standby holding image does not change, or even if it changes to a color with a relatively low degree of expectation, the player can You can prevent the occurrence of a situation where you feel embarrassed about
Also, in the case of a change to a color with a relatively high degree of expectation, if the change display results in a false result, the standby pending image of the color with a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed for a long period of time. However, by hiding the standby image, the display time of the standby image with the relatively high expectation can be shortened. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels embarrassed.

When only the ``first pending color change predictive effect'' is executed, or when the ``second pending color change predictive effect'' is executed following the ``first pending color change predictive effect'', standby Although an embodiment has been shown in which the pending image may be hidden, it may be hidden at a predetermined percentage rather than always hidden.
In this way, by making the ratio of non-display of the standby reserved image higher than the ratio of non-display of the standby reserved image, it is possible to lose the original purpose of the effect of making the player recognize the mode of the standby reserved image. There is no
When only the "first pending change color indication effect" is executed, it is preferable to increase the ratio of the former between the ratio of not hiding the standby pending image and the ratio of hiding the standby pending image.
When the "second pending color changing sign effect" is executed following the "first pending color changing sign effect", the ratio of not hiding the standby pending image and the ratio of hiding the standby pending image, and Then, it is better to increase the ratio of the former.
In this case, it is possible to feel embarrassed if the performance is not performed in a situation where the performance is executed up to the "second pending change color indication effect" and the expectation is high. be able to.
Conversely, between the ratio of not hiding the standby reserved image and the ratio of hiding the standby reserved image, the latter ratio may be higher.
In this case, the expectation of the player can be heightened by showing the standby reserved image in a situation where the ``second pending changing color predictive effect'' is executed and the effect with a high degree of expectation is performed.

Regarding the probability that only the “first pending color change sign effect” is executed and the probability that the “second pending color change sign effect” is executed following the “first pending color change sign effect”, the former Increase the probability. Alternatively, the probability of the latter may be increased. The "probability" referred to here is the probability that the effect will be executed when the variable display is executed once.
By increasing the probability of the former, it is possible to increase expectations for a big hit when the game develops to the "second pending change color indication effect". On the other hand, by increasing the probability of the latter, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation even if the image changes to a standby pending image with a low degree of expectation in the "first pending change color indication effect".
Similarly, the probability that only the "first pending color changing sign effect" is executed and the standby pending image is not displayed, and the "second pending changing color predictive effect" following the "first pending color changing color As for the probability that the "predictive effect" is executed and the standby pending image is hidden, the probability of the former should be increased. Alternatively, the probability of the latter may be increased.
By increasing the probability of the former, it is possible to increase expectations for a big hit when the game develops to the "second pending change color indication effect". On the other hand, by increasing the probability of the latter, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation even if the image changes to a standby pending image with a low degree of expectation in the "first pending change color indication effect".

An embodiment in which the display of the standby pending image is hidden has been shown, but in this case, it is only displayed in a state where the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed on the front side of the normal background image. In addition, it is assumed that the result of the variable display during execution is a failure, and the display content lacks interest.
Therefore, a predetermined ready-to-win effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the period until the variable display in which the "suspended change color predictive effect" is executed ends.
As the predetermined ready-to-win performance, two or more ready-to-win performances can be executed, and the degree of expectation for a big win may be different depending on the type of ready-to-win performance.
It should be noted that the predetermined ready-to-win effect to be executed as the look-ahead effect corresponds to the standby pending image changed in the "suspended change color predictive effect". Then, the same predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed even when the variable display corresponding to the standby reserved image is executed.

In this way, the execution time when executing the predetermined ready-to-win effect as the look-ahead effect and the original execution time of the predetermined ready-to-win effect may not match ("suspended change color prediction effect" is triggered by the start winning Since it is a production that starts as , the probability that it does not match is extremely high). Therefore, when the high-speed fluctuation time is longer than the execution time of the predetermined ready-to-win effect, and sufficient time is secured to execute the entire predetermined ready-to-win effect as the look-ahead effect, the entire predetermined ready-to-win effect should be executed. Alternatively, the predetermined ready-to-win effect may be executed until immediately before the effect indicating the winning or losing at the end of the predetermined ready-to-reach effect.
On the other hand, when the high-speed fluctuation time is shorter than the execution time of the predetermined ready-to-win effect, and there is not enough time to execute the entire predetermined ready-to-win effect as the look-ahead effect, the predetermined ready-to-win effect is obtained. may be executed only a part of. For example, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed from the beginning, and the execution of the predetermined ready-to-reach effect ends at the timing of several seconds before the end of the predetermined fluctuation display time (for example, two seconds before the start of the fluctuation stop period). can be
After these ready-to-win effects are finished, the background image and decoration pattern that were displayed before the start of the ready-to-win effects are displayed again.
In addition, when the high-speed fluctuation time is even shorter, the predetermined ready-to-win effect may not be executed. Alternatively, only the ready-to-win effect name of a predetermined ready-to-win effect may be displayed as the look-ahead effect.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance what kind of ready-to-win effect will be executed. In addition, since there are a plurality of ready-to-win effects with different expectations in the ready-to-win effects to be executed, it is possible to inform the player in advance of the degree of expectation for the big win.
Further, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize a predetermined ready-to-win effect based on the look-ahead process in an appropriate manner corresponding to the remaining time of the high-speed fluctuation display.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect, the timing to start executing the predetermined ready-to-win effect is the timing when the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are in a state of high-speed fluctuation (timing t13 in FIG. 398(a) and FIG. 398(b), FIG. 399(a) timing t19, FIG. 399(b) timing t20) after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, after 1 second).
Further, when execution of a predetermined ready-to-win effect is started as a look-ahead effect, instead of maintaining the high-speed fluctuation state of the decorative pattern, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern in the actual predetermined ready-to-win effect. The same number should be displayed as a temporary stop reach state.

In the "first pending change color predictive effect", an effect of operating the operation unit (operation button 410, attack button 3710, etc.) may be executed. An embodiment in which an operation on the attack button 3710 is effective will be described below. Note that FIG. 408 shows a display example when an effect for operating the operation unit is executed.
FIG. 408(a) shows a state in which display of a blue aura image has started.
While the aura image is being displayed, an operation instruction image is displayed in which the letters "PUSH!" are added in a horizontally long ellipse. FIG. 408(b) shows a state in which an operation instruction image is displayed. Here, at the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated, or at the timing when the operation valid period expires without the attack button 3710 being operated, the suspended display color after the change is displayed in the center of the display area 1600a instead of the aura image. A small aura image with a color corresponding to is displayed, and either the display of the aura image ends ( Either of FIG. 408(e)) is performed.

FIG. 408(c) shows a display example in the case where the display mode of the standby holding image is changed. Here, a small aura image starts moving toward the first standby reserved image.
FIG. 408(d) shows a state in which the movement of the aura image has been completed and the color of the first standby reserved image has changed from white to blue.

FIG. 408(e) shows a display example when no display for changing the display mode of the standby holding image is performed. In this case, the display of the small aura image is not performed, and the standby pending image is not changed.

In this way, even if the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid during the execution of the "first pending change color indication effect", and the display mode of the aura image changes due to the operation of the operation unit or the end of the effective period of operation. good.

Referring to FIG. 408, when the operation unit is operated or when the valid period of operation expires, a small aura image having a color corresponding to the changed pending display color is displayed in place of the currently displayed aura image. Although the embodiment has been shown, a reserved image having the same shape and size (or a different size) as the standby reserved image is displayed instead of the small aura image, and this reserved image moves toward the standby reserved image, and the existing may be superimposed on the upper side of the standby pending image and displayed as the standby pending image after the change.
FIG. 409(a) shows a state in which an operation instruction image is displayed.

FIG. 409(b) shows a state in which a pending image having the same color as the changed pending image is displayed in accordance with the operation of the operation unit or the expiration of the operation effective period, and the state is being moved toward the standby pending image.
FIG. 409(c) shows a state in which the movement of the reserved image having the same color as the aura image is completed and displayed as the first standby reserved image.

FIG. 409(d) shows the display state when the display of the aura image ends in response to the operation of the operation unit or the end of the valid period of operation.

The operation instruction image includes characters "PUSH!" indicating the operation method of pushing, but as the operation instruction image, an operation unit simulated image imitating the shape of the operation unit to be operated may be displayed. Further, characters (such as "PUSH!") indicating the operation method may be added to the simulated image of the operation unit.

As in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 408 and 409, an operation instruction may always be requested.
On the other hand, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 400, an operation instruction is not required, and as in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 408 and 409, an operation instruction is required. can be In this case, the probability that the color of the pending image will change (that is, the degree of expectation of a big win) may differ between when an operation instruction is not requested and when an operation instruction is requested.
For example, it is preferable to increase the probability that the color of the pending image changes when an operation instruction is requested than when an operation instruction is not requested. Alternatively, the color of the standby pending image may be more likely to change to a highly anticipated color when an operation instruction is requested than when an operation instruction is not requested.
For example, when the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is blue (production pattern PTN-1-01 to production pattern PTN-1-04), if no operation instruction is requested, there is a probability that it will change to blue. 10%, 7% probability of changing to green, 3% probability of changing to red, and when an operation instruction is requested, 20% probability of changing to blue, 14% probability of changing to green, The probability of changing to red may be 6%.

White, red, and rainbow colors may be used as the colors of the characters of the operation instruction image and the background portion other than the characters. Moreover, the degree of expectation may be indicated by these colors, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow. Note that the degree of expectation for the rainbow color is 100%.

Two types of operation reception effects may be provided as the "operation reception effect" for receiving the player's operation on the operation unit. Specifically, before the valid operation period becomes effective, after displaying a suggestive image suggesting that the operation becomes valid, the operation instruction image is displayed at the same time as the operation valid period starts. 'operation acceptance presentation', and 'the second 2 operation reception effect” may be provided.
Further, as the suggestive image and the operation instructing image, an operation unit simulated image imitating the operation unit may be employed.
Note that the display mode of the suggestive image indicating that the operation is valid and the operation instruction image indicating that the operation acceptance is valid may be different. For example, it is preferable that the suggestion image is a semi-transparent operation part simulation image, and the operation instruction image is an opaque operation part simulation image. In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the valid operation period has started by changing the simulated image of the operation unit from a translucent state to an opaque state.
Alternatively, a predetermined image that does not simulate the operation unit may be used as the suggestive image, and an operation unit simulation image that simulates the operation unit may be used as the operation instruction image.
In addition, when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation valid period of the "operation reception effect", or when the operation valid period of the "operation reception effect" ends, a predetermined "post-operation effect" is executed. be started. For example, an image of a predetermined color (either blue, green, or red) is displayed in the display area 1600a to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 408 and 409, the operation reception may be performed not by the "first operation acceptance presentation" but by the "second operation acceptance presentation".
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to execute the "operation acceptance effect" while ensuring the visibility of the color of the decorative pattern (the color in which the standby pending image can change).

On the other hand, the "second operation reception effect" may not be executed during the "first pending color change sign effect", and only the "first operation reception effect" may be executed. At this time, during execution of the "first pending change color indication effect", only a suggestive image that suggests that the operation in the "first operation acceptance effect" is valid is displayed, and the "first After the "suspended change color predictive effect" ends, the effective period of operation in the "first operation acceptance effect" may be started and the operation instruction image may be displayed. In addition, due to this "first operation acceptance effect", the standby pending image that has finished moving to the upper right of the display area 1600a changes to a more expected standby pending image (for example, changes from white to blue). A change effect may be executed, and unlike the pending change effect, for example, a comment notice in which a predetermined message is displayed ("line notice effect" shown with reference to FIG. 385) or FIG. An advance notice display such as "Weather advance notice effect" shown in .
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the "first pending change color predictive effect". Further, even if the change of the standby reserved image based on the display of the aura image is not executed, by operating the operation unit after that, the standby reserved image is changed to the standby reserved image of the color with higher expectation. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a long period of time, and if the effect is different from the pending change effect such as the above comment notice, the expectation is high due to the "suspended change color prediction effect". The expectation is maintained even if the pending display is not performed.

Instead of or in addition to executing the "operation reception effect", the operating unit (for example, the attack button 3710) may be vibrated during the execution of the "first pending change color indication effect". In this case, when the operation unit vibrates, the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win is higher than when it does not vibrate.
Alternatively, the operating section is formed of a transparent member, and a predetermined movable decorative member visible to the player is provided inside the operating section, and the movable decorative member is rotated, vibrated, or moved. You may do so. Also, when the movable decorative member performs such an operation, the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win is higher than when it does not perform such an operation.
It should be noted that during the period in which the operation unit is operating in this manner, the reception of operations by the operation unit is not valid, and the display of the operation instruction image as described above is not performed.
In this way, by executing an action effect using the operation unit (sometimes referred to as an "operation part action effect"), the degree of expectation is tactilely or visually indicated to the player, and the interest is improved. can do. Also, during the display of the aura image, an action effect using the operation unit is executed in parallel with the effect of whether or not the hold changes, so what color does it change? It is possible to provide a sense of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit at the time of "between".
The special lottery result here means the result of the special lottery corresponding to the standby pending image whose display mode is changed by the "holding change color indication effect". Alternatively, in the case of an embodiment in which the standby suspension that changes due to the "suspension change color indication effect" is the standby suspension image corresponding to the most recent standby suspension, a special lottery determined to execute the "suspension change color indication effect" means the result of The same applies to other notations of the degree of expectation in the “holding change color indication effect”.

It should be noted that the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 may display that the "operation part operation effect" is being executed. For example, characters such as "Attack button is vibrating!" may be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the "operation part action presentation" is being executed on the operation part.
Alternatively, the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 may not display that the action effect of the operation unit is being executed. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player who has noticed that the "manipulation section action presentation" is being executed. In addition, since it is difficult for the surrounding players to notice that the "operation section operation presentation" is being executed, the player can enjoy the state in which the degree of expectation for the big win is high by himself/herself.

It should be noted that, in the "manipulation section action rendering", a plurality of patterns in which the manipulation section vibrates and patterns in which the movable decorative member operates may be provided. For example, a production pattern in which vibration or motion continues for 1 second, a production pattern in which vibration or motion continues for 1 second, a performance pattern in which vibration or motion continues for 1 second, is interrupted for 1 second, and then continues for 1 second may be adopted. Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be increased in this order. Alternatively, vibration may be performed with a plurality of different intensities such as weak vibration and strong vibration. In this case as well, the degree of expectation for the big win should be increased in this order.
In the case of a movable decorative member, it is also possible to provide performance patterns with different operating speeds. For example, it is possible to provide a performance pattern in which the speed of the movable decorative member is slow and a performance pattern in which the speed of the movable decorative member is high. Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be increased in this order. Further, although the operation mode of the movable decorative member is the same, the degree of expectation may be changed according to the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration of the movable decorative member during operation. For example, when the movable decorative member emits white light and when it emits red light, the latter may be more expected.

The vibration generated by the vibration of the operating section or the movement of the movable decorative member may be made stronger and transmitted to the handle 302. Alternatively, the vibration generated by the vibration of the operating section or the movement of the movable decorative member may be: Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting vibrations to handle 302 may be operated to transmit the vibrations to handle 302 . In this case, only the player who is holding the handle 302 can recognize that the "operation part action effect" is being executed, and the surrounding players can notice that the "operation part action effect" is being executed. Since it becomes difficult, you can enjoy the state that the expectation of a big hit is high by yourself. In addition, it is possible to make the player who does not gaze at the display area 1600a by operating the smartphone with the left hand recognize that the “holding change color indication effect” has been started.

The timing for starting the "operation section action effect" is the same timing as the timing for starting the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" (timing t6.5 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). ).
Also, the timing of ending the "operation section action effect" is the same timing as the timing of ending the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" (timing t12 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). ).
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to impress the player that the standby holding image has moved.

On the other hand, the timing of ending the "operation section action effect" is earlier than the timing of ending the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" (timing in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). timing before t12). For example, the timing of ending the "operation section action effect" may be timing t9 during display of the aura image or timing t10.5 after the display of the aura image is finished.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to firmly confirm whether or not the standby holding image has changed.

Alternatively, the timing of ending the "operation section action effect" is later than the timing of ending the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" (timing in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). timing after t12). For example, the timing at which the "operation section action rendering" ends may be the timing (timing t13) at which the high-speed fluctuations shown in FIGS. t15). Alternatively, the timing (for example, timing t15) at which the display explaining the content of the effects in FIGS. It may be the timing (timing t19) when the display of the time gauge image ends.
According to such an embodiment, even after the standby holding image is changed, it is possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the big win. Further, even when the standby holding image does not change, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by the execution of the "operation section operation presentation". As for the "operation part action presentation", the player may not notice it easily, but it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the "operation part action presentation" has started.

An embodiment has been described in which the timing for starting the "operation section operation effect" and the timing for starting the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending changing color indication effect" are the same. Before the standby pending image starts to move in the indication effect, the “operation part operation effect” may be started. Alternatively, the "operation unit action effect" may be started after the standby pending image starts moving in the "first pending change color predictive effect".

An effect of moving the movable decorative member from the standby position to the moving position (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "movable decorative member movement effect") may be executed simultaneously with the "first pending change color predictive effect".
Specifically, at the timing of starting the "movable decorative member movement effect" (the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position), the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" starts moving. 398 and 399). In addition, the timing at which the "movable decorative member movement effect" ends (the timing at which the movable decorative member completes the movement to the moving position) is the timing at which the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" ends the movement. (timing t12 in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 398 and 399) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “operation pattern A”).

As the movable decorative member, as described above, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 (FIG. 130, etc.), the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 (FIG. 131, etc.), the tank accessory 3770 (FIG. 241, etc.), etc. may be adopted. can be done. Further, as the operation mode of the movable decorative member, the above-described operation modes (for example, vertical direction, horizontal direction, oblique direction, etc.) can be adopted.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to impress the player that the standby holding image has moved.

On the other hand, the execution period of the "movable decorative member moving effect" and the moving period of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" (period from timing t6.5 to timing t12) may be shifted.
For example, after the standby reserved image starts moving, the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position to the moving position, and after the standby reserved image finishes moving, the movable decorative member starts moving to the moving position. It may be completed. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t9 to timing t13 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation pattern B").
Alternatively, after the standby reserved image starts moving, the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position to the moving position, and after the movable decorative member completes the movement to the moving position, the standby reserved image starts moving. It may be terminated. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t8 to timing t10.5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation pattern C").
It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big win should be higher when the "movable decorative member moving effect" is executed than when it is not executed.
The timing of starting the execution of the "movable decorative member moving effect" may be until the timing (timing t10) when the color of the standby reserved image changes, or after the timing (timing t10) when the color of the standby reserved image changes. may be

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a big win during the "pause" of the color change of the standby reserved image.
Alternatively, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation for a big win after the timing when the color of the standby holding image changes.

On the other hand, the "movable decorative member moving effect" may be started after the moving period of the standby pending image (period from timing t6.5 to timing t12) in the "first pending change color predictive effect".
For example, after the standby reserved image starts moving and the standby reserved image finishes moving, the movable decorative member may start moving from the standby position and complete the movement to the moving position. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t13 to timing t16 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation pattern D").
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the movement of the standby pending image and the change in the color of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect".

As a predetermined movable decorative member to be moved in the "movable decorative member movement effect", one movable decorative member may be adopted, or two or more movable decorative members may be adopted. When two or more movable decorative members are employed in the "movable decorative member movement effect", all movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A", or all movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern B". , all movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern C", or all movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern D".
Alternatively, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A", and other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern B", "operation pattern C", or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern B", and other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A", "operation pattern C", or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern C", and other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A", "operation pattern B", or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern D", and other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A", "operation pattern B", or "operation pattern C".
In this way, by operating the plurality of movable decorative members in various modes, the "first pending change color indication effect" can be enhanced.

406(a), 406(b), and 406(e), the moving path of the standby reserved image is shown. It may be longer than the length.
On the other hand, the length of the moving path of the movable decorative member may be longer than the length of the moving path of the standby reserved image.
Alternatively, the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member may be the same as the length of the movement path of the standby reserved image.

It should be noted that even if the linear paths shown in FIGS. 406(c) and 406(d) are adopted as the movement path of the standby reserved image and the moving distance of the standby reserved image and the moving distance of the movable decorative member are compared, good. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a linear path for the movable decorative member as well.
For example, the moving distance of the standby reserved image may be longer than the moving distance of the movable decorative member.
On the other hand, the moving distance of the movable decorative member may be longer than the moving distance of the standby reserved image.
Alternatively, the moving distance of the movable decorative member may be the same as the moving distance of the standby reserved image.

When the moving path or moving distance of the standby reserved image is set longer than the moving path or moving distance of the movable decorative member, it is possible to appeal that the standby reserved image has changed.
In addition, when the moving path or moving distance of the movable decorative member is made longer than the moving path or moving distance of the reserved image, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the movement of the movable decorative member.
In addition, if the movement path or distance of the standby reserved image and the movement path or distance of the movable decorative member are set to be the same, either the movement of the standby reserved image or the movement of the movable decorative member may be overlooked. can be suppressed.

The moving speed of the standby reserved image may be slower than the moving speed of the movable decorative member.
Alternatively, the moving speed of the movable decorative member may be slower than the moving speed of the standby reserved image.
Alternatively, the moving speed of the movable decorative member may be the same as the moving speed of the standby reserved image.
Although an embodiment in which the standby holding image is temporarily stopped at the intermediate position has been shown, the speed when moving from the movement start position to the intermediate position and the speed when moving from the intermediate position to the movement end position may be the same. Further, when the standby reserved image does not pause at the intermediate position, it is preferable to move the image from the movement start position to the movement end position at a constant speed.

When the speed of the standby reserved image is made slower than the speed of the movable decorative member, the movement of the standby reserved image is executed for a long time, so that the player can be assured that the standby reserved image is moving. can be recognized.
When the speed of the movable decorative member is made slower than the speed of the standby reserved image, the movement of the movable decorative member is executed for a long time, and the player is assured that the movable decorative member is moving. can be recognized.
By making the moving speed of the standby reserved image and the moving speed of the movable decorative member the same, it is possible to prevent either the movement of the standby reserved image or the movement of the movable decorative member from being overlooked.

When the movable decorative member moves from the standby position to the moving position, the state in which the display area 1600a and the movable decorative member do not overlap in the front view is changed to the state in which the display area 1600a and the movable decorative member overlap in the front view. good. Alternatively, when viewed from the front, the movable decorative member originally overlaps a portion of the display area 1600a, and the overlapping area is increased by moving the movable decorative member from the standby position to the moving position. . As a result, the player who mainly looks at the display area 1600a can be made to recognize that the movable decorative member has moved.
When moving the movable decorative member, the movable decorative member is arranged so as to maintain a state in which the movable decorative member during or after movement does not overlap with a certain standby image during or after movement when viewed from the front. It is preferable to move the standby holding image. That is, during the period from the start of movement of a certain standby reserved image to the end of movement thereof, the movable decorative member and the certain standby reserved image do not overlap when viewed from the front.
Note that after the certain standby reserved image is moved, the moving movable decorative member and the stationary standby reserved image may overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, if the entire waiting reserved image overlaps the movable decorative member, the certain waiting reserved image becomes difficult or invisible to be seen. ) overlaps the movable decorative member when viewed from the front, or the entire standby reserved image may overlap the movable decorative member when viewed from the front.
It should be noted that not only a certain standby reserved image, but also all standby reserved images that are displayed in plurality may take the same effect mode as a certain standby reserved image, or all standby reserved images that are displayed in plurality Some of the standby reserved images may have the same effect mode as a certain standby reserved image.
It should be noted that at least the standby pending image whose display mode is changed by the "holding change color predictive effect" may take the same rendering mode as a certain standby pending image.

According to the embodiment in which the entire standby reserved image does not overlap the movable decorative member, the visibility of the standby reserved image during movement is not hindered, and the display mode of the standby reserved image after the change. It is never impossible to confirm (color). In addition, the movement range of the movable decorative member is not excessively restricted, and the mode of presentation using the movable decorative member is less likely to be restricted.

In the "first pending change color indication effect", the standby pending image moves to a predetermined position over a predetermined period of time. A suggested predetermined advance notice effect may be executed.
As the predetermined notice effect, the "step-up notice effect" shown with reference to FIG. 384 and the "weather notice effect" shown with reference to FIG. 393 can be employed.
For example, during the period from timing t8 to timing t10, it is preferable to execute a "step-up notice effect" or a "weather notice effect". Note that the timing t10 is the timing at which the color of the standby pending image can change. In the "step-up notice effect", the effect execution time differs according to the number of stages, but it is preferable to divide the effect execution time into four equal periods and use the first to fourth stage execution periods for each period. For example, when the "step-up notice effect" is to be executed for 2 seconds, the display times of the first stage, second stage, third stage, and fourth stage should each be set to 0.5 seconds.
The degree of expectation indicated by the "step-up notice effect" and "weather notice effect" is not the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern during fluctuation will result in a big hit, but the fluctuation corresponding to the standby pending image whose color can change at timing t10. It is the degree of expectation that the result will be a big hit.
The display priority of the horizontally long frame and character in the "step-up notice effect" and the weather phenomenon image in the "weather notice effect" should be lower than the display priority of the standby pending image and the aura image.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of anticipation for a big win during the period of whether or not the standby holding image changes. In addition, since the predetermined notice effect is not the effect that the player is required to accept the operation of the operation unit, the player can feel the anticipation without being rushed. In addition, since the moving waiting and holding image is displayed closer to the user than the image displayed by the predetermined notice effect, the moving waiting and holding image is hidden by the image displayed by the predetermined notice effect, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a person loses sight of the standby reserved image.

An embodiment has been described in which the timing at which the execution of a predetermined notice effect ("step-up notice effect", "weather notice effect", etc.) ends is the timing t10, which is the timing at which the color of the standby holding image can change. It may be a predetermined timing during the period until the end of the variable display of the symbols.
For example, a predetermined advance notice effect may be executed until the timing (timing t12.5 in FIGS. 398 and 399) immediately after the end of movement of the standby holding image.
For example, the timing (timing t13) at which the “first pending change color predictive effect” in FIGS. 398(a) and 398(b) ends, or during the resumed high-speed fluctuation display (timing t13 to timing t28.5) A predetermined advance notice effect may be executed until a predetermined timing.
399(a) and 399(b), the timing (timing t20.5) at which the display of the background image for predictive effect of the "second pending change color predictive effect" ends, or during the resumed high-speed fluctuation display A predetermined advance notice effect may be executed until a predetermined timing (from timing t20 to timing t28.5).

According to such an embodiment, since the predetermined announcement effect is executed even after the movement of the standby pending image is completed, the "first pending change color predictive effect" and the "second pending change color predictive effect" are executed. , even if the standby holding image does not change or only changes to a color with a low degree of expectation, the player can be made to feel interest by the predetermined notice performance.
In particular, it is determined that the "holding change color indication effect" is executed with the start winning as a trigger (in the example of effect shown with reference to FIGS. 398 and 399, the start winning occurs at timing t4.5). A series of performances are executed, but the timing at which the starting prize is generated is not limited to timing t4.5), so there is a risk that the restarted high-speed fluctuation will take a long time. In addition, it is also confirmed that the stop result of the changing decorative pattern is a loss. Therefore, it can be said that it becomes a period in which the player can see the variable display which is boring in a sense.
In the present embodiment, since the predetermined notice effect is continuously executed during the restarted high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to make the player have expectations for the fluctuation results of the fluctuation display from the next time onwards. .

It should be noted that it is also possible to make it possible to execute a display effect in which it is determined that a big win will occur during execution of the variable display (a display effect in which the degree of expectation of the big win is 100%). As a display effect for confirming that a big win will occur, it is preferable to display the characters "Big win confirmed!" In this case, during the execution of the ``first pending change color predictive effect'', the execution of the display effect for confirming the occurrence of the big win is not started, and the big win is won after the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' is finished. You may make it perform the display production|presentation which confirms that generate|occur|produces. It should be noted that the big hit is determined at this time by the specific standby pending image whose color has changed (or the display that is about to change has been performed but has not changed) by the "first pending change color indication effect". is.
As shown in the effect pattern table in FIG. 396, in the "first pending change color predictive effect", the standby pending image does not change to the standby pending image with the degree of expectation of 100%. That is, in the "first pending change color indication effect", the display effect that confirms the occurrence of the big win using the standby pending image is not executed.

In this way, by not executing a display effect with a degree of expectation of 100% during the execution of the "first pending color change predictive effect", the interest of the "first pending change color predictive effect" is reduced. Therefore, the player can expect the result of the "first pending change color indication effect".

Preferably, the period from the start of movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" to the end of movement (period from timing t6.5 to timing t12 in FIGS. 398 and 399) , it is preferable not to execute a display effect with a degree of expectation of 100%.

Conversely, for the purpose of giving unexpectedness, the period from the start of the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" to the end of the movement (timing t6. 5 to timing t12), a display effect with a degree of expectation of 100% may be executed.

In the "second pending change color indication effect" described with reference to FIGS. is provided (timing t16 to timing t19). explain.

In the present embodiment, during the period (timing t16 to timing t19) in which the remaining time gauge image is displayed, an operation reception effect is performed in which the operation reception of the attack button 3710 is enabled.
Specifically, in response to repeated hits of the attack button 3710, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped swing vertically within a range that does not protrude from the display area 1600a. In addition, a predetermined number of small aura images are provided around the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in response to repeated hitting operations.
There are three types of aura image colors, white, blue, and red. Two white aura images, four blue aura images, and six red aura images are displayed.
Also, the expectation of a big win increases in the order of the white aura image, the blue aura image, and the red aura image.
The type of aura image to be finally displayed is determined in advance to be one of white, blue, and red based on the result of a special lottery, and the color of the aura image is determined according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. changes step by step.

For example, when it is determined that a red aura image should be displayed, the aura image is not displayed when the operation unit is not operated. By operating the part five times, a blue aura image is displayed, and by operating the operating part five times, a red aura image is displayed.
On the other hand, when it is decided to display a white aura image, the aura image is not displayed when no operation is performed, but a white aura image is displayed by operating the operation unit five times. After that, the white aura image is displayed as it is even when the operation unit is operated five times, and the white aura image is displayed as it is even when the operation unit is operated five times.

Shown below is an example of an effect when it is determined that a red aura image is to be displayed.
FIG. 410(a) shows the display state when the display of the remaining time gauge image is started. Here, an attack button simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the left side of the remaining time gauge image. Note that the simulated image of the attack button includes the character "continuous hit".
FIG. 410(b) shows a state in which the attack button 3710 is pressed five times and a white aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(c) shows a state in which the attack button 3710 is pressed five more times and a blue aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(d) shows a state in which the attack button 3710 is pressed five more times and a red aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(e) shows a display state in which display of the remaining time gauge image is finished and display of the aura image is finished. Also, here, the left decorative design maintains the state of temporary stop, and the middle decorative design and the right decorative design are in the state of high speed fluctuation.
As shown in FIGS. 410(a) to 410(e), the display priority of the standby holding image, the remaining time gauge image, and the simulated attack button image is higher than the display priority of the decoration pattern and the aura image.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to excite the player while the remaining time gauge image is being displayed.

Note that the operation mode required of the player is not limited to repeated hits, and for example, a long press may be requested, or an operation mode of pressing only once may be used. In the case of long pressing, it is preferable to change the color of the aura image step by step according to the long pressing time. In the case of the operation mode of pressing only once, it is preferable to display an aura image of any one of white, blue, and red corresponding to one operation. In addition, the operation unit such as the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can be tilted back and forth or left and right many times (corresponding to repeatedly pressing the attack button 3710), or tilted for a long period of time (corresponding to a long press of the attack button 3710). ), or an action of tilting once (corresponding to an operation of pressing the attack button 3710 only once) may be requested.

The operation acceptance effect in this embodiment may be always executed. Alternatively, there may be cases in which the operation acceptance effect is executed and cases in which it is not executed. Further, the degree of expectation may be higher in the case of executing the operation acceptance effect than in the case of not executing it.

In the "second pending change color indication effect" described with reference to FIGS. In a situation where an image simulating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for predictive effect) is displayed), an effect (operation acceptance effect) prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation is executed. In this case, the timing of displaying the image simulating the operating unit may be after the image suggesting that the standby pending image may change in the "second pending change color indication effect" is displayed. By doing so, the predetermined operation can be performed after the player recognizes that the standby holding image may change, so that the predetermined operation can be performed with a sense of anticipation. .

In addition, the timing of displaying the image simulating the operation unit is set to be displayed before the image suggesting that the standby pending image may change in the "second pending change color indication effect" is displayed. good too. By doing so, an image suggesting that the standby pending image may change is displayed when the player attempts to operate the operation unit before recognizing that the standby pending image may change. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. Therefore, when an image simulating the operating unit is displayed before the image suggesting that the standby pending image may change in the "second pending change color indication effect", the operating unit is simulated. It is preferable to display an image suggesting that the standby pending image may change in a very short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) after the displayed image is displayed. In this case, the image simulating the operating unit is displayed in a manner straddling the timing at which the image suggesting that the standby image can change is displayed.

When the player performs a predetermined operation or when the effective period of the operation expires, for example, as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern of the selected color) is displayed as a post-operation effect. Since the image simulating the operation unit is hidden at the same time as this post-operation effect is displayed, the image simulating the operation unit when the image suggesting that the standby image can change is displayed is hidden. In this way, it is possible to focus on the waiting hold image which may change. Further, when hiding the image simulating the operation unit, the display may be gradually hidden instead of being suddenly hidden. "Gradually" means a display that gradually increases the transparency of an image simulating an operation unit, a display that makes an image simulating an operation unit pop, or an image simulating an operation unit with a predetermined effect. and so on. In such a case, the timing at which the image simulating the operation unit is completely hidden is such that the image simulating the operation unit is not displayed even if the image suggesting that the standby image may change is hidden. It may happen that it is not displayed. Even in such a case, it is possible to provide a display that does not give the player a sense of incongruity because the image is flowing and beautiful.

In addition, in the "second pending change color predictive effect" (an image that suggests that the standby pending image can change in the "second pending change color predictive effect" (an image installed in the casino facility as a background image for predictive effect) (image simulating a slot machine) is displayed), if an effect (operation acceptance effect) prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation is executed, an image simulating the operating unit is displayed. ``First operation reception effect'' that displays a suggestive image that suggests that an image simulating the operation unit will be displayed (suggesting that the operation is valid) before the Suggesting that an image simulating the operation unit is displayed before the image is displayed (suggesting that the operation is valid) may be applied. This is because the "first operation acceptance effect" can provide the player with a sense of anticipation in advance, and the "second operation acceptance effect" can provide the player with surprise.

In addition, when a decorative design that is finally temporarily stopped as a post-operation effect (decorative pattern with a color corresponding to the color of the standby reserved image that can change) is displayed, an image that suggests that the standby reserved image can change ( An image simulating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for an indication effect) is displayed. (Decorative pattern of color corresponding to the color) is displayed, the image suggesting that the standby image can change (the image imitating the slot machine installed in the casino facility as the background image for the indication effect) is not displayed. You may make it display. By doing so, only the final temporary stop decoration pattern is displayed as a performance after the operation, and the player can be clearly made aware of the changeable color of the standby holding image. In addition, instead of displaying a decorative pattern that is finally temporarily stopped as a post-operation effect (a decorative pattern with a color corresponding to the color of the standby hold image that can change), for example, "chance" or "hot heat!" As in the display of , instead of suggesting the color of the waiting and pending image that can change, it may be used as a notice effect that indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit, or a decorative pattern that will eventually stop temporarily as a effect after operation (Decorative pattern of a color corresponding to the color of the standby hold image that can change) may be displayed (hold change effect), or a notice effect such as "chance" or "hot heat!" There may also be

It should be noted that there may be a case where a predetermined "operation acceptance effect" is executed in a state in which the display of the background image for predictive effect is finished and the decorative pattern changes at high speed. Also, the standby holding image may be promoted in this operation acceptance effect. As a result, even when the standby pending image does not change in the "second pending changing color indication effect", the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win can be maintained. Further, in this operation acceptance effect, a predetermined notice effect as described above may be executed instead of promoting the standby holding image. In addition, this operation reception effect may be performed multiple times, or all of these multiple times may be performed by promoting the standby pending image or executing a predetermined notice effect, or promoting the standby pending image and performing a predetermined advance notice effect. , each of the advance notice effects may be executed.
In this case, as the "operation acceptance effect", a "first operation acceptance effect" that displays a suggestive image suggesting that the operation is valid, or "not display a suggestive image that suggests that the operation becomes valid" A "second operation reception presentation" can be employed.

In this way, by executing the "operation acceptance effect" during or before or after the background image for indication effect is displayed, the effect of whether or not the display mode of the standby pending image changes can be made more lively.

The ``movable decorative member moving effect'' for moving the movable decorative member from the standby position to the moving position may be executed simultaneously with the display of the indication effect background image in the ``second pending change color indication effect''.
Specifically, the timing for starting the "movable decorative member movement effect" (timing for the movable decorative member to start moving from the standby position) is the display of the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect". (timing t13.5 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 399). Also, the timing of ending the "movable decorative member movement effect" (timing of completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position) is the end of the display of the predictive effect background image in the "second pending change color predictive effect". It is preferable to use the same timing (timing t20.5 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 399) as the timing for
It should be noted that, as described above, when the "movable decorative member movement effect" is executed and when it is not executed, the expectation of a big win should be higher when executed.

On the other hand, even if the execution period of the ``movable decorative member moving effect'' and the display period of the background image for the indication effect in the ``second pending change color indication effect'' (period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) are shifted. good.
For example, after starting the display of the background image for the indication effect in the "second pending changing color indication effect", the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position while the background image for the indication effect is being displayed. , the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position may be completed after the display of the background image for indication effect in the "second pending changing color indication effect" is completed. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t15 to timing t22.

Alternatively, after starting the display of the background image for the indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect", the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position while the background image for the indication effect is being displayed. After the movable decorative member completes the movement to the moving position, the display of the background image for indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" may end. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t15 to timing t18.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation even during the waiting time such as at the time of explaining the performance, and if the remaining time gauge is decreasing, two types of expectation performances are provided, thereby increasing interest. can be done.

On the other hand, during the display period of the background image for indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5), the "movable decorative member movement effect" is not executed. good too. As a result, the player can be made to concentrate on the "second pending changing color indication effect".

On the other hand, after the display period of the background image for indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) ends, the "movable decorative member movement effect" is started. good too.
For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the moving position from timing t21 to timing t22 after the background image for indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" is finished being displayed.
According to such an embodiment, even if the standby pending image is not promoted in the "second pending changing color indication effect", the expectation for the big win can be maintained.

In the “second pending change color predictive effect”, the background image for predictive effect is displayed for a predetermined period (period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5), but the background image for predictive effect is being displayed. A predetermined advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed during the period from to the end.
As the predetermined notice effect, the "step-up notice effect" shown with reference to FIG. 384 and the "weather notice effect" shown with reference to FIG. 393 can be employed.
For example, during the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5, the "step-up notice effect" and the "weather notice effect" may be executed. In the "step-up notice effect", the effect execution time differs according to the number of stages. For example, when the "step-up notice effect" is to be executed for 2 seconds, the display times of the first stage, second stage, third stage, and fourth stage should each be set to 0.5 seconds.
The degree of expectation indicated by the "step-up notice effect" and "weather notice effect" is not the degree of expectation that the fluctuation result of the decorative pattern during fluctuation will result in a big hit, but the fluctuation corresponding to the standby pending image whose color can change at timing t20. It is the degree of expectation that the result will be a big hit.
The display priority of the horizontally long frame and character in the "step-up notice effect" and the weather phenomenon image in the "weather notice effect" should be lower than the display priority of the standby hold image and the remaining time gauge image.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of anticipation for a big win during the period of whether or not the standby holding image changes. In addition, since the predetermined notice effect is not the effect that the player is required to accept the operation of the operation unit, the player can feel the anticipation without being rushed. In addition, since the moving waiting and holding image is displayed closer to the user than the image displayed by the predetermined notice effect, the moving waiting and holding image is hidden by the image displayed by the predetermined notice effect, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a person loses sight of the standby reserved image.

Instead of starting a predetermined notice effect ("step-up notice effect", "weather notice effect", etc.) at the same time as the start of display of the background image for predictive effect, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display of the background image for predictive effect , a predetermined advance notice effect may be started. For example, at a predetermined timing in the period from timing t13.5 to timing t16 during which a display explaining the effect content is performed, or in the period from timing t16 to timing t19 during which the remaining time gauge image is displayed. The predetermined timing may be the timing for starting a predetermined advance notice effect.

Before the end of the display of the background image for predictive effect, instead of ending the predetermined notice effect ("step-up notice effect", "weather notice effect", etc.) at the same time as the end of the display of the background image for predictive effect A predetermined advance notice effect may be terminated. For example, timing t18 may be the timing at which the predetermined advance notice effect is terminated.
Alternatively, the predetermined advance notice effect may end after the display of the background image for predictive effect ends. For example, timing t21 may be the timing at which a predetermined advance notice effect is terminated.

Execution of a predetermined notice effect ("step-up notice effect", "weather notice effect", etc.) may be started after the display of the background image for predictive effect ends. For example, in the period from timing t22 to timing t27, a predetermined advance notice effect may be executed. Instead of a predetermined notice effect (“step-up notice effect”, “weather notice effect”, etc.), a display effect that confirms that a big hit will occur (display effect that the expectation of a big hit is 100%) is executed. can be
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to maintain the expectation of a big win even when the standby reserved image is not promoted.

Although the embodiment and the modified example of the "first pending change color predictive effect" and the embodiment and modified example of the "second retained change color predictive effect" have been described above, they can be combined as appropriate. .
For example, a "holding It can be executed as "change color indication effect".

It should be noted that predetermined effects (the above-described "first operation reception effect" and "second operation reception effect" are provided across the "first pending change color predictive effect" to the "second pending change color predictive effect"). , ``operating part operation effect'', ``movable decorative member moving effect'', ``step-up notice effect'', ``weather notice effect'', etc.) may be executed.
Further, after the "first pending color change indication effect", the "development effect" is executed, and the "second pending color change effect" is started. (Approximately 0.5 seconds to 10 seconds) may be set to arouse the player's sense of anticipation. Further, during the execution of the "development effect", the predetermined effect executed during the "first pending change color indication effect" ends, or the execution of the predetermined effect is started and the "second pending change It may be executed until a predetermined timing in "Color Prediction Effect".

After the "first pending change color indication effect" is completed and the decorative pattern is changed at high speed, it may be possible to accept the operation to the operation unit. Moreover, after that, the “second pending changing color indication effect” may be started.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399 and the like, the decorative symbols are displayed with high-speed fluctuation from timing t12.5 to timing t13.5, and the “development effect” is executed from timing t13 to timing t13.5. may In addition, at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing within the period from timing t12.5 to timing t13.0) after the timing when the decorative pattern becomes a high-speed change, and at a predetermined timing (timing t13 to At a predetermined timing within the period of timing t13.5), the execution of the “second operation reception effect” in which no suggestive image is displayed in advance may be started.

Based on the operation reception of the "second operation reception presentation", the color of the characters "from ka~~~~no~" may be changed to indicate the degree of expectation for the big win. For example, even if the character "ka~~~~no~" is displayed in white, depending on the operation of the operation unit, it may change to red or remain white without changing to red. good. Also, it is preferable that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the color changes to red.
Note that instead of changing the color of the characters "ka-kara-no-", either a white predetermined image or a red predetermined image (for example, an aura image) is displayed based on the operation reception. An image may be displayed and the color of the image may indicate the likelihood of a big win. Also in this case, it is preferable that the predetermined red image has a higher expectation of a big win. Instead of executing the "second operation reception effect" in which the suggestive image is not displayed in advance, the execution of the "first operation reception effect" in which the suggestive image is displayed in advance may be started.

According to such an embodiment, after the high-speed fluctuation is resumed, it is confirmed that the "development effect" is executed and the "second pending change color indication effect" is executed, and the "development effect" is executed. Since the ``operation reception performance'' is started during the execution of , the player can have a great expectation for the occurrence of a big win.

If no operation is performed on the operating unit, the execution period of the "second operation reception effect" ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing when the "development effect" ends.
When an operation is performed on the operation unit, an image corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the display also ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing at which the "development effect" ends.

In this way, by making the period during which the operation unit can accept the operation and the period during which the image corresponding to the operation reception is displayed extremely short, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the game.

It should be noted that until a predetermined timing within the period (timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) during which the "second pending change color predictive effect" is started and the background image for predictive effect is displayed, operation reception is supported. may continue to display the image. Alternatively, the display of the image corresponding to the reception of the operation may be continued until a predetermined timing after the display of the background image for indication effect ends.

According to such an embodiment, although the operation reception period is short, the image corresponding to the operation reception is displayed for a long period of time. can be done.

At timing t13.5, which is the timing at which the “development effect” ends, the “second operation reception effect” ends, but the “second pending change color indication effect” is started and the indication effect is started. The “second operation reception effect” may be continued even during the period when the background image for the game is displayed. In this case, the image corresponding to the operation reception is displayed even during the "second pending change color indication effect".
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to lengthen the effective period of operation, so that the operation unit can be reliably operated.

The display of the image corresponding to the operation reception will be performed even during the "second pending change color predictive effect", but it is necessary to stop the display of the image corresponding to the operation reception during the display of the background image for the predictive effect. Alternatively, the display of the image corresponding to the reception of the operation may be continued even after the background image for indication effect is displayed.

A modification has been shown in which the decorative pattern is changed at high speed during the period from the end of the "first reserved changing color predictive effect" to the start of the "second reserved changing color predictive effect". During the high-speed fluctuation period, the execution of the "movable decorative member movement effect" may be started to start moving the movable decorative member from the standby position to the movement position. Further, it is preferable that the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed while the background image for indication effect is being displayed.
Alternatively, after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the "second pending change color predictive effect" may be started, or after the background image for predictive effect is displayed, the movable decoration The movement of the member to the movement position may be completed.
When the movable decorative member operates, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it does not operate. Therefore, when the movable decorative member is operated, the "second pending change color indication effect" can be enhanced.

A modified example is shown in which the decorative pattern is changed at high speed during the period from the end of the "first pending change color predictive effect" to the start of the "second pending change color predictive effect". Depending on the type of the background image for indication effect displayed in the pending change color indication effect, the "movable decorative member movement effect" may not be executed during the period in which the decorative pattern is changing at high speed.
For example, when the background image for the first indication effect is displayed in the "second pending change color indication effect", the "movable decorative member movement effect" may or may not be executed. When the background image for the second indication effect is displayed in the second pending change color indication effect, the “movable decorative member movement effect” may not always be executed.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big win may be varied depending on the type of background image for indication effect. For example, between the first predictive effect background image and the second predictive effect background image, the former may have a higher degree of expectation, or the latter may have a higher degree of expectation, Both expectations may be the same.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to guess the type of background image for indication effect to be displayed and also the degree of expectation for a big win depending on whether or not the "movable decorative member movement effect" is executed. can be done. In addition, since the "movable decorative member moving effect" is not executed, the player can be made to concentrate on the "second pending change color predictive effect".

A modification has been shown in which the decorative pattern is changed at high speed during the period from the end of the "first reserved changing color predictive effect" to the start of the "second reserved changing color predictive effect". In the period of high-speed fluctuation, the display of the characters "from ~ to ~" may be started. In addition, as the color of the characters "Kara-no", three colors are provided: white (low expectation), red (medium expectation), and rainbow color (big hit confirmed). You can show your expectations. In addition, it is preferable that the display of the characters "Kara~no~" is terminated while the background image for the indication effect is being displayed.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player look forward to the "second pending changing color indication effect".

In addition, instead of ending the display of the characters "ka~ra~no~" during the display of the background image for indication effect, before the background image for indication effect is displayed, The display of the characters "of ~" may be terminated. According to such an embodiment, since the display of the characters ``ka~~~~~no~'' ends in a short period of time, the player can concentrate on the ``second pending change color predictive effect''.

Below are the "second operation reception effect", "movable decorative member movement effect", the start timing of the predetermined notice effect ("step up notice effect" and "weather notice effect"), and the predetermined timing during the execution of the effect ( Hereinafter, the time relationship of the end timing will be described.

First, regarding the "second operation reception effect", the timing of starting the display of the operation instruction display, the timing of ending the display of the operation instruction display (the end timing of the operation effective period, and the timing of starting the display of the post-operation display) timing), and there is a timing for ending the display of the post-operation display. Note that when the operation instruction display is started and the operation unit is operated, the post-operation display is immediately performed. Note that the end timing of the post-operation display does not change regardless of the presence or absence of the operation.
In addition, the "movable decorative member movement effect" includes timing to start moving the movable decorative member to the movement position, timing to complete movement to the movement position, and timing to complete movement to the standby position.
In addition, there are start timings and end timings for predetermined notice effects ("step-up notice effects" and "weather notice effects").
For each of these timings, a temporal relationship with other timings will be described.
As shown in FIG. 411, the earliest of the start timings of these effects (at least one of the start timing of the operation instruction display, the start timing of the movement of the movable decorative member, and the start timing of the advance notice effect) is "development effect". This is the timing (timing t13) at which the display of "ka-kara-no-" is started.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other start timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member is started after the operation instruction display is started, the movement of the movable decorative member is started at the same time as the operation instruction display is started, or the operation instruction display is started after the movement of the movable decorative member is started. can be
Execution of a predetermined notice effect is started after the operation instruction display is started, execution of the predetermined notice effect is started simultaneously with the start of the operation instruction display, or operation instruction display is started after the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started. You may start.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the operation instruction display is started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at the same time as the operation instruction display is started, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed. The operation instruction display may be started after the movement is completed.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed after the operation instruction display is started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at the same time as the operation instruction display is started, or the movable decorative member is completed to the standby position. The operation instruction display may be started after the movement is completed.
Execution of a predetermined notice effect is ended after the operation instruction display is started, execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended simultaneously with the start of the operation instruction display, or operation instruction display is ended after the execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended. You may start.

The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other start timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member is started after the display of the operation instruction is finished, the movement of the decorative member is started at the same time when the display of the operation instruction is finished, or the display of the operation instruction is finished after the movement of the movable decorative member is started. can be
Execution of a predetermined notice effect is started after the operation instruction display is ended, execution of the predetermined notice effect is started simultaneously with the end of the operation instruction display, or operation instruction display is started after the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started. It may be terminated.

The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the operation instruction is displayed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at the same time as the operation instruction is displayed, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed. The operation instruction display may be ended after the movement is completed.

The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed after the display of the operation instruction is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at the same time as the display of the operation instruction is completed, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed. The operation instruction display may be ended after the movement is completed.
Execution of a predetermined notice effect is ended after the operation instruction display is ended, execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended simultaneously with the end of the operation instruction display, or operation instruction display is ended after the execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended. It may be terminated.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other start timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member is started after the post-operation display is ended, the movement of the movable decorative member is started simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display is ended after the movement of the movable decorative member is started. can be
Execution of a predetermined notice effect is started after the post-operation display is ended, execution of the predetermined notice effect is started simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or post-operation display is started after the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started. It may be terminated.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the post-operation display is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at the same time as the post-operation display is completed, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed. The post-operation display may end after the movement is completed.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed after the post-operation display is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at the same time as the post-operation display is completed, or the movable decorative member is completed to the standby position. The post-operation display may end after the movement is completed.
Execution of a predetermined notice effect is ended after the post-operation display is ended, execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or post-operation display is ended after the execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended. It may be terminated.

The relationship between the movement start timing of the movable decorative member and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the movement start timing of the movable decorative member and other start timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is started after the movement of the movable decorative member is started, the operation instruction display is started at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member is started, or the movement of the movable decorative member is started after the operation instruction display is started. can be
Starting execution of a predetermined notice effect after starting movement of a movable decorative member, starting execution of a predetermined notice effect at the same time as starting movement of a movable decorative member, or starting execution of a predetermined notice effect You may make it start the movement of a movable decorative member.

The relationship between the movement start timing of the movable decorative member and other intermediate timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is ended after the movement of the movable decorative member is started, the operation instruction display is ended at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member is started, or the movement of the movable decorative member is started after the operation instruction display is ended. can be

The relationship between the movement start timing of the movable decorative member and other end timings will be described.
The post-operation display is ended after the movement of the movable decorative member is started, the post-operation display is ended at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member is started, or the movement of the movable decorative member is started after the post-operation display is ended. can be
Execution of a predetermined advance notice effect is finished after the movement of the movable decorative member is started, execution of the predetermined notice effect is finished simultaneously with the start of movement of the movable decorative member, or after execution of the predetermined notice effect is finished. You may make it start an operation instruction display.

The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the movement position and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the movement position and other start timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the operation instruction display is started at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, or the operation instruction display is started after the operation instruction display is started. The movement of the decorative member to the movement position may be completed.
After the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, or the predetermined notice effect is started. The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the execution of the advance notice effect is started.

The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the movement position and other intermediate timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the operation instruction display is ended at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, or the operation instruction display is ended after the operation instruction display is completed. The movement of the decorative member to the movement position may be completed.

The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the movement position and other end timings will be described.
The post-operation display is ended after the movable decorative member has been moved to the movement position, the post-operation display is ended at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, or the post-operation display is ended and the movement is possible. The movement of the decorative member to the movement position may be completed.
After completing the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, or the predetermined notice effect is ended. The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the execution of the advance notice effect is completed.

The relationship between the timing of completing the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the completion timing of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position and other start timings will be described.
The display of operation instructions is started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, the display of the operation instruction is started at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, or the display of the operation instruction is started and then the movement is started. The movement of the decorative member to the standby position may be completed.
After the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, execution of a predetermined notice effect is started, execution of a predetermined notice effect is started at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, or a predetermined notice effect is started. The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the advance notice effect is started.

The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the standby position and other intermediate timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is ended after the movable decorative member has been moved to the standby position, the operation instruction display is ended at the same time as the movable decorative member has been moved to the standby position, or the operation instruction display is ended and the operation instruction is moved. The movement of the decorative member to the standby position may be completed.

The relationship between the completion timing of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position and other end timings will be described.
The post-operation display is ended after the movable decorative member has been moved to the standby position, the post-operation display is ended at the same time as the movable decorative member has been moved to the standby position, or the post-operation display is ended and the movement is possible. The movement of the decorative member to the standby position may be completed.
After completing the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, or the predetermined notice effect is ended. The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the advance notice effect is completed.

The relationship between the execution start timing of the predetermined advance notice effect and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the execution start timing of the predetermined advance notice effect and other start timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is started after starting the execution of the predetermined notice effect, the operation instruction display is started at the same time as the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started, or the predetermined notice effect is started after the operation instruction display is started. You may start.
The movement of the movable decorative member is started after execution of a predetermined notice effect is started, the movement of the movable decorative member is started at the same time as the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started, or the movement of the movable decorative member is started and then the movement of the movable decorative member is started. You may make it start execution of the notice production of .

The relationship between the execution start timing of the predetermined advance notice effect and other intermediate timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is ended after starting the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect, the operation instruction display is ended at the same time as the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is started, or the predetermined notice effect is executed after the operation instruction display is ended. You may start.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at the same time as the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started, or the movable decoration is completed. Execution of a predetermined advance notice effect may be started after the movement of the member to the movement position is completed.

The relationship between the execution start timing of the predetermined advance notice effect and the other end timing will be described.
The post-operation display is ended after starting execution of a predetermined advance notice effect, the post-operation display is ended simultaneously with the start of execution of the predetermined advance notice effect, or the execution of the predetermined notice effect is ended after the post-operation display is ended. You may start.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at the same time as the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is started, or the movable decoration is completed. Execution of a predetermined advance notice effect may be started after the movement of the member to the standby position is completed.

The relationship between the execution end timing of the predetermined advance notice effect and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the execution end timing of the predetermined advance notice effect and other start timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is started after execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is finished, the operation instruction display is started at the same time as the execution of the predetermined notice effect is finished, or the operation instruction display is started after the execution of the predetermined notice effect is started. It may be terminated.
The movement of the movable decorative member is started after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is finished, the movement of the movable decorative member is started at the same time as the execution of the predetermined notice effect is finished, or the movement of the movable decorative member is started after the start of the predetermined advance notice effect. may be terminated.

The relationship between the execution end timing of the predetermined advance notice effect and other intermediate timings will be described.
The operation instruction display is ended after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is finished, the operation instruction display is ended at the same time as the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is finished, or the predetermined notice effect is executed after the operation instruction display is finished. It may be terminated.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at the same time as the execution of the predetermined notice effect is completed, or the movable decoration is completed. The execution of the predetermined announcement effect may be terminated after the movement of the member to the movement position is completed.

The relationship between the execution end timing of the predetermined advance notice effect and other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at the same time as the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is completed, or the movable decoration is completed. The execution of the predetermined announcement effect may be terminated after the movement of the member to the standby position is completed.
The post-operation display is ended after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is finished, the post-operation display is ended simultaneously with the end of the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect, or the predetermined notice effect is executed after the post-operation display is ended. It may be terminated.

Although the temporal relationship between two timings, one timing and the other timing, is shown, the above-described temporal relationships of each timing may be combined. In this case, temporal relationships are shown for three or more timings.

Embodiments in which three or more timings are combined will be exemplified below with reference to the time charts shown in FIGS. FIG. 411 is a time chart showing how the "second operation reception effect", "movable decorative member movement effect", and "predetermined advance notice effect" are executed during the period from timing t11 to timing t20 shown in FIG. be. In FIGS. 411(a) to 411(c), the execution timing of each effect and the length of time for executing the effect are different in the period from timing t11 to timing t20.

After starting the operation instruction display, the movement of the movable decorative member is started, after starting the movement of the movable decorative member, execution of a predetermined notice effect is started, and after starting the execution of the predetermined notice effect, the operation instruction display is ended. Then, after completing the operation instruction display, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, and after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is finished, and the predetermined notice effect is performed. The post-operation display may be terminated after the execution is completed, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display is terminated.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(a), the operation instruction display is started at timing t13, the movement of the movable decorative member is started at timing t13.5, the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is started at timing t14, At timing t14.5, the post-operation display is started, at timing t15.5, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, at timing t16, execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is completed, and at timing t16.5, after operation The display ends, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t17.5.

After starting the operation instruction display, execution of a predetermined notice effect is started, after starting execution of the predetermined notice effect, the movement of the movable decorative member is started, and after starting the movement of the movable decorative member, the operation instruction display is ended. Then, after completing the operation instruction display, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, and after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is finished, and the predetermined notice effect is performed. The post-operation display may be terminated after the execution is completed, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display is terminated.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(b), operation instruction display is started at timing t13, execution of a predetermined advance notice effect is started at timing t13.5, movement of the movable decorative member is started at timing t14, At timing t14.5, the post-operation display is started, at timing t16, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, at timing t16.5, execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is completed, and at timing t17, the post-operation display is displayed. At timing t18, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed.

The movement of the movable decorative member is started after execution of a predetermined advance notice performance is started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the movement of the movable decorative member is started, and the movable decorative member is moved to the movement position. is completed, the operation instruction display is started, after the operation instruction display is started, the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is finished, and after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is finished, the operation instruction display is finished, and the operation instruction display is finished. After that, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed, and the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(c), execution of a predetermined advance notice effect is started at timing t13, movement of the movable decorative member is started at timing t13.5, and movement of the movable decorative member is started at timing t15.5. The movement to the position is completed, the operation instruction display is started at timing t16, the execution of the predetermined announcement effect is finished at timing t16.5, the post-operation display is started at timing t17.5, and the movable decoration is started at timing t18. The movement of the member to the standby position is completed, and the post-operation display ends at timing t19.5.

It is desirable that the difference between the occurrence timing of a certain event and the occurrence timing of another event occurring after that is at least 0.5 seconds or more. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 411, it is set to 0.5 seconds or more. This allows the player to recognize whether a certain event and another event have occurred simultaneously or whether the other event has occurred with a delay.
It should be noted that the time interval may be set to at least 1 second instead of at least 0.5 seconds. In this case, the delayed occurrence can be more clearly recognized.

A "second operation reception effect" may be adopted as the operation reception effect instead of the "first operation reception effect". In this case, a suggestive image indicating that the operation is effective is displayed at a predetermined timing before the operation instruction display is started. The display timing of the suggestive image can also have the same temporal relationship as the above-described temporal relationship between the start timing of the operation instruction display and other timings.
For example, in relation to the timing of starting the movement of the movable decorative member, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the display of the suggestive image is started, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started at the same time as the display of the suggestive image is started. Alternatively, the display of the suggestive image may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member is started.
The same applies to the relationship between the display start timing of the suggestive image and various other timings.

The relation of each timing when the three effects of "operation acceptance effect", "movable decorative member moving effect", and "predetermined advance notice effect" are executed is shown. may define the relationship of each timing when is executed.
For example, as the execution timing of the "operation reception effect" and "movable decorative member movement effect", the movement of the movable decorative member is started after the operation instruction display is started, and the operation instruction display is ended after the movement of the movable decorative member is started. Then, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the operation instruction display is completed, the post-operation display is completed after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, and the movement is completed after the post-operation display is completed. The movement of the decorative member to the standby position may be completed.
It should be noted that, among the three effects of "operation acceptance effect", "movable decorative member movement effect", and "predetermined advance notice effect", the greater the number of effects that have been executed, the higher the degree of expectation should be. In other words, the degree of expectation when two effects are executed is higher than when only one effect is executed, and the expectation when three effects are executed is higher than when two effects are executed. A higher degree is recommended.

As shown in FIG. 399, the length (5.5 seconds) required for moving the standby pending image (timing t6.5 to timing t12) in the "first pending change color indication effect" is shorter than the length (5.5 seconds) of the "second The length of the period (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) during which the background image for indication effect is displayed in "holding change color indication effect" is longer (7 seconds).
It should be noted that the length of the period during which the background image for indication effect is displayed may be set longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is preferable to increase the display time of the display explaining the content of the effect and the display time of the remaining time gauge image.
Both the “first pending color change indication effect” and the “second pending color change sign effect” are effects for changing the display mode of the standby pending image. It is possible to make the player aware that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the game progresses to the ``second reserved changing color predictive performance'' rather than when the game ends only with the ''held changing color predictive performance''.

In addition, the length of the period required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" is the same as the length of the period for displaying the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect". may be In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the effect contents and the display time of the remaining time gauge image. Since both the "first pending color change indication effect" and the "second pending color change sign effect" are effects for changing the display mode of the standby pending image, the timing at which the standby pending image changes can be adjusted by setting the same time. This makes it easy for the player to grasp, and it is possible to suppress the player's frustration that the timing at which the standby holding image changes is unknown or difficult to understand.
Alternatively, the length of the period required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" is set to be longer than the length of the period for displaying the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect". It can be long. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the content of the effect and the display time of the remaining time gauge image (for example, to 3 seconds in total).
Since the expectation of a big hit is higher when it develops to the ``second pending change color indication effect'' than when it ends only with the ``first pending change color indication effect'', the ``second pending change color indication effect'' ” is shown to the player for a long time, the player has to maintain a long-term tension, and fatigue accumulates. By making the length of the period required for movement longer than the length of the period during which the background image for indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" is displayed, it is possible to eliminate the accumulation of fatigue and shorten the time. You can raise your expectations.

As shown in FIG. 399, the length (5.5 seconds) required for moving the standby pending image (timing t6.5 to timing t12) in the "first pending change color indication effect" is shorter than the length (5.5 seconds) of the "second The length of the period (6.5 seconds) from the timing t13.5 to the timing t20 from when the background image for the indication effect in the pending change color indication effect is displayed until the display mode of the standby pending image changes It is long.
It should be noted that the length of the period from when the background image for indication effect is displayed to when the display mode of the standby pending image is changed may be set longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is preferable to increase the display time of the display explaining the content of the effect and the display time of the remaining time gauge image.
Both the “first pending color change indication effect” and the “second pending color change sign effect” are effects for changing the display mode of the standby pending image. It is possible to make the player aware that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the game progresses to the ``second reserved changing color predictive effect'' rather than when the game ends only with the ``held changing color predictive effect''.

It should be noted that the length of time required to move the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication effect" is set to the time period after the background image for indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" is displayed. may be the same as the length of the period until the display mode changes. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the content of the effect and the display time of the remaining time gauge image. Since both the "first pending color change indication effect" and the "second pending color change sign effect" are effects for changing the display mode of the standby pending image, the timing at which the standby pending image changes can be adjusted by setting the same time. This makes it easy for the player to grasp, and it is possible to suppress the player's frustration that the timing at which the standby holding image changes is unknown or difficult to understand.
Alternatively, the length of the period required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending color change sign effect" is set to the length of time required to move the standby pending image after the background image for sign effect in the "second pending color change sign effect" is displayed. may be longer than the length of the period until the display mode changes. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the content of the effect and the display time of the remaining time gauge image (for example, to 3 seconds in total).
Since the expectation of a big hit is higher when it develops to the ``second pending change color indication effect'' than when it ends only with the ``first pending change color indication effect'', the ``second pending change color indication effect'' ” is shown to the player for a long time, the player has to maintain a long-term tension, and fatigue accumulates. By making the length of the period required for movement longer than the length of the period during which the background image for indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" is displayed, it is possible to eliminate the accumulation of fatigue and shorten the time. You can raise your expectations.

As shown in FIG. 398, the length (5.5 seconds) required for the movement of the standby pending image (timing t6.5 to timing t12) in the "first pending change color indication effect" is It is longer than the length (1 second) of the period (timing t12 to timing t13) from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image in the "change color prediction effect" to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern. As described above, in the modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be changed to a high-speed change state at timing t12.5 when executing the "development effect". be.
The reason why such an embodiment is adopted is that the "first pending color change sign effect" does not necessarily develop into the "second pending color change sign effect". It is not necessary to set the time period (timing t12 to timing t13) from the end of the movement of the standby pending image to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the "effect" so long. This is because it is preferable to make the player firmly aware of the change in hold.

The length of time required to move the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication effect" is defined as the period from the end of the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" until the decorative pattern changes at high speed. It may be the same as the length of the period until the start. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop for 5.5 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby holding image).
Although the "first pending color change sign effect" does not necessarily develop into the "second hold change color sign effect", by adopting such an embodiment, the "first hold change color sign effect" can be achieved. ” to the ``second pending change color indication effect'', the time required for moving the standby pending image in the ``first pending color change indication effect'' performed before the branch By setting the length (5.5 seconds) of (timing t6.5 to timing t12) to be the same, it is possible to branch whether or not the first pending color change predictive effect develops into the second pending change color predictive effect. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the timing of .
Alternatively, the length of the period required for the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication effect" is determined by the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern from the end of the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect". It may be shorter than the length of the period to start. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop for 10 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby holding image).
It is not necessarily the case that the “first pending color change sign effect” develops into the “second pending change color sign effect”, but the “first hold change color sign effect” is changed to the “second hold change color sign effect”. The time up to the branch as to whether or not it develops into the "effect" is the period (timing t6. By making it longer than the length (5.5 seconds), even if it develops into the second pending color change sign effect, in the "first hold change color sign effect" performed before the branch Since it does not develop to the length of the period required for moving the standby reserved image, it is possible to reduce excessive tension.

As shown in FIGS. 398 and 399, the length (1 seconds), the display period (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) of the background image for indication effect in the “second pending change color indication effect” is longer (7 seconds). there is As described above, in the modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be changed to a high-speed change state at timing t12.5 when executing the "advancement effect". be.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to firmly recognize the change in the standby pending image in the "second pending change color indication effect".

In addition, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern is set as the predictive effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" It may be the same as the length of the display period of the background image. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop for 7 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby holding image). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can firmly grasp the timing of the change of the hold in the "second hold change color predictive effect".
Alternatively, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern is set as the predictive effect in the "second pending change color indication effect". It may be longer than the display period of the background image. In this case, it is preferable to further lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop for 10 seconds after the end of the movement of the standby holding image). The ``second pending change color indication performance'' itself has a high degree of expectation for winning, and when it develops into the ``second pending change color indication performance'', the degree of expectation for winning increases, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, it is better to make the time for whether the "second pending change color predictive effect" develops longer than the time required for the change of the pending by the "second pending change color predictive effect". can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 398 and 399, the length (1 Seconds) than the period from the start of the display of the background image for indication effect in the "second pending change color indication effect" until the display mode of the standby pending image changes (timing t13.5 to timing t20) The length (6.5 seconds) is longer. As described above, in the modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be changed to a high-speed change state at timing t12.5 when executing the "development effect". be.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to firmly recognize the change in the standby pending image in the "second pending change color predictive effect".

The length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby pending image to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the "first pending change color predictive effect" is the predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect". It may be the same as the length of the period from when the display of the background image is started until the display mode of the standby image is changed. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop for 6 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby holding image). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can firmly grasp the timing of the change of the hold in the "second hold change color predictive effect".
Alternatively, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern is set as the predictive effect in the "second pending change color indication effect". It may be longer than the length of the period from when the display of the background image is started until the display mode of the standby image is changed. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop for 10 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby holding image). The ``second pending change color indication performance'' itself has a high degree of expectation for winning, and when it develops into the ``second pending change color indication performance'', the degree of expectation for winning increases, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, it is better to make the time for whether the "second pending change color predictive effect" develops longer than the time required for the change of the pending by the "second pending change color predictive effect". can be improved.

If the remaining time of the variable display is 15 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds at the timing when the start winning a prize occurs, the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' is executed, but the ``second pending change color predictive effect'' is executed. ' is not executed, but the 'suspended change color predictive effect' may not be executed when the remaining time of the variable display is 15 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds.
In this case, the "suspended change color predictive effect" is executed only when the remaining time of the variable display is 20 seconds or more and less than 35 seconds at the timing when the start winning is generated.
It should be noted that the "suspended changing color indication effect" may be executed even when the remaining time of the variable display is 35 seconds or longer. In this case, when the remaining time of the variable display is 20 seconds or longer at the timing when the starting prize is generated, the "suspended changing color predictive effect" is executed.
In the execution of the "suspended changing color predictive effect", only the "first retained changing color predictive effect" is executed, and after the "first retained changing color predictive effect" is executed, the "second retained changing color predictive effect" is executed. As described above, there is a case where the "prediction effect" is executed, but the following ratio can be adopted as the execution ratio.

The rate at which only the ``first pending color change predictive effect'' is executed is set higher than the rate at which the ``second pending color change predictive effect'' is executed after the ``first pending color change predictive effect'' is executed. may
For example, the ratio of executing only the "first pending color change predictive effect" is 90%, and the ratio of executing the "second pending color change predictive effect" after the execution of the "first pending color change predictive effect". may be 10%.
According to such an embodiment, since the "second pending color change predictive effect" is less likely to be executed, it is possible to heighten expectations when the "second pending color change predictive effect" is executed.

Conversely, the ratio of execution of only the "first pending color change sign effect" is more than the ratio of execution of the "second pending color change sign effect" after the execution of the "first pending color change sign effect". can also be lower.
For example, the ratio of executing only the "first pending color change predictive effect" to 10%, and the ratio of executing the "second pending color change predictive effect" after the execution of the "first pending color change predictive effect". may be 90%.
According to such an embodiment, the probability that the "second pending change color indication effect" is executed increases, so that more timings at which the standby pending image may change can be provided to the player. .

In the variable display, when the "suspended change color predictive effect" is not executed, only the "first retained change color predictive effect" is executed. There is a case where a "suspended change color predictive effect" is executed in which a "second pending change color predictive effect" is executed after the "color predictive effect" is executed.
As these execution ratios, the ratio of not executing the "suspended color change predictive effect" is made higher than the ratio of executing the "suspended color change predictive effect" in which only the "first pending color change predictive effect" is executed. may In addition, regarding the ratio of execution of the "suspended color change indication effect" in which only the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed, the "second pending It may be higher or lower than the rate at which the "holding color change predictive effect" is executed at which the "color change predictive effect" is executed.
For example, the ratio of not executing the “suspended color change predictive effect” is 70%, the ratio of the “suspended color change predictive effect” in which only the “first pending color change predictive effect” is executed is 20%, and the “second The ratio of execution of the "suspended color change predictive effect" in which the "second retained color change predictive effect" is executed after the execution of the "one reserved color change predictive effect" may be set to 10%.
Alternatively, the ratio of not executing the “suspended color change predictive effect” to 70%, the ratio of executing the “suspended color change predictive effect” in which only the “first pending color change predictive effect” is executed to 10%, and the “second The ratio of execution of the "suspended color change predictive effect" in which the "second retained color change predictive effect" is executed after the execution of the "one reserved color change predictive effect" may be set to 20%.
According to such an embodiment, since the "suspended changing color predictive effect" is less likely to be executed, it is possible to heighten expectations when the "sustained changing color predictive effect" is executed.

Conversely, the rate at which the "suspended change color indication effect" is not executed is the rate at which the "suspended change color indication effect" in which only the "first pending change color indication effect" is performed It may be lower than the execution rate of the "suspended change color predictive effect" in which the "second pending change color predictive effect" is executed after the execution of the "color predictive effect". In addition, regarding the ratio of execution of the "suspended color change indication effect" in which only the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed, the "second pending It may be higher or lower than the rate at which the "holding color change predictive effect" is executed at which the "color change predictive effect" is executed.
For example, the ratio of not executing the “suspended color change predictive effect” is 10%, the ratio of the “suspended color change predictive effect” in which only the “first pending color change predictive effect” is executed is 70%, and the “second The ratio of execution of the "suspended color change predictive effect" in which the "second retained color change predictive effect" is executed after the execution of the "one reserved color change predictive effect" may be set to 20%.
Alternatively, the ratio of not executing the “suspended color change predictive effect” to 10%, the ratio of executing the “suspended color change predictive effect” in which only the “first pending color change predictive effect” is executed to 20%, and the “second The ratio of execution of the "suspended color change predictive effect" in which the "second pending color change predictive effect" is executed after the execution of the "one reserved color change predictive effect" may be 70%.
According to such an embodiment, the probability that the "holding change color indication effect" is executed increases, so that more timings at which the waiting holding image may change can be provided to the player.

It should be noted that the percentage of the "suspended change color predictive effect" that is not executed may be set to 0%.
For example, if only the "first pending color change predictive effect" is executed, the rate of execution of the "suspended color change predictive effect" is set to 70%, and after the "first pending color change predictive effect" is executed, the "second The rate at which the "suspended color change predictive effect" is executed may be 30%.
Alternatively, the rate of execution of the "suspended color change sign effect" in which only the "first pending color change sign effect" is executed is set to 30%, and after the execution of the "first pending color change sign effect", the "second The rate at which the "suspended color change indication effect" is executed may be 70%.

During the execution of the "holding change color indication effect", a specific song (for example, a specific song or a specific BGM) is output for a predetermined period as a fluctuating effect sound from the speaker (upper speaker 573 or lower speaker 921). good too. In this case, the output of the fluctuating effect sound being output is stopped at the same timing as the start of output of the specific music or at a predetermined timing before the start of output of the specific music.
For example, a specific song is output from the timing (timing t5) when the decoration pattern in the time chart shown in FIGS. You may do so.
Alternatively, a specific song may be output from a timing before the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. For example, the output of a specific song may be started at the same time as the starting prize is won, and the decoration pattern may be temporarily stopped two seconds later (the "first pending change color indication effect" may be started).
Further, predetermined light-emitting members provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 may be caused to emit light in a light-emitting mode in accordance with the melody of the fluctuating effect sound. As a result, the production effect of the variable production sound can be enhanced.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to enhance the "holding change color indication effect".

In the ``suspended color change predictive effect'', only the ``first pending color change predictive effect'' is executed, and after the ``first pending color change predictive effect'' is executed, the ``second pending color change predictive effect'' is executed. ” may be executed, but in any case, it is preferable to continue outputting a specific piece of music until a predetermined timing (timing t31 when a new variable display is started).
Specifically, in the time chart shown in FIG. 398, it is preferable to continue outputting the specific tune even in the period after timing t13 when the “second pending change color indication effect” is not performed. In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 399, it is preferable to continue outputting the specific tune even during the period after timing t13 during execution of the "advancement effect" or the "second pending change color predictive effect".
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to enhance the "holding change color indication effect". In addition, the specific music can alleviate the disappointment felt by the player when the display mode of the standby holding image does not change. The time during which the decorative pattern in this embodiment changes at high speed is an indefinite length (it depends on the timing of the start winning that triggers the start of the change time of the variable display being executed and the start of the "holding change color prediction effect"). Such an output mode is effective.

The variable performance sound output at the start of the variable display and the variable performance sound output before the start of the variable display may be kept output as a specific music even in the ``holding change color predictive performance''. In this case, the volume of the output fluctuating effect sound may be made larger than usual at the start of the "holding changing color predictive effect" to make the start of the "holding changing color predictive effect" exciting.

Although the display mode of the standby pending image may change based on the execution of the "holding change color indication effect", the output of a specific song is not performed until the variable display corresponding to the standby pending image whose display mode has changed stops. You may continue. Alternatively, after starting the variable display corresponding to the standby holding image whose display mode has changed, the output of a specific song may be continued until a predetermined timing. In this case, it is preferable to start executing a special ready-to-win effect at a predetermined timing, and output music corresponding to the special ready-to-win effect. It should be noted that if the time required to end the variable display corresponding to the standby holding image whose display mode has changed is long, the reproduction of a specific song may end. It is preferable to restart the reproduction of the specific song after the reproduction is finished.
In the period until the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the standby reserved image whose display mode is changed by continuously outputting the same music over a plurality of variable displays is started, the expectation for the big win is expected. can be raised.

A function for adjusting the sound volume output from the gaming machine may be provided so that the sound volume can be changed during execution of the "holding change color indication effect".
Specifically, a volume-up button and a volume-down button that enable volume adjustment are provided at predetermined positions near the upper plate 321, and each time the volume-up button is pressed, the volume is raised by one level. It is preferable that the volume is lowered by one step each time the down button is pressed.
Although the number of stages of volume can be two or more, it is preferable to provide ten stages, for example. In this case, the level with the lowest volume is the first level, and the level with the highest volume is the tenth level. Also, the volume of the sound output when the minimum volume is set is 70 decibels, and the volume of the sound output when the maximum volume is set is 90 decibels. It is good to configure so that it goes up and down.

It is preferable to set a standby time during which continuous operation of the volume adjustment button is not accepted. Specifically, even if a pressing operation is performed during a period from a certain pressing operation until a predetermined waiting time elapses, the pressing operation may not be treated as a valid operation. By adopting such a mode, even if the volume adjustment button is hit repeatedly, it is possible to prevent the volume from suddenly increasing or decreasing. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the sound volume suddenly increases and causes trouble to other players.
If the waiting time is too long, it may take time to change the volume, causing the player to feel stressed. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a predetermined time of about 0.1 to 1 second as the waiting time.
When the operation of pressing and holding the volume adjustment button is performed, the volume level may be changed by one level. In this case as well, the volume level does not change until the standby time elapses, and each time the standby time elapses, the volume level changes by one.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible for the player to operate the volume adjustment button to set the desired volume.

The length of the waiting time may be a predetermined constant length, or the length of the waiting time may be changed according to the game situation.
For example, during the period in which the decorative symbols during the ``first pending color change indication effect'' are temporarily stopped, the length of the standby time is set to 1 second, and the decorative symbols during the ``second pending change color indication effect'' is temporarily stopped, the length of the standby time may be set to 0.2 seconds.
According to such an embodiment, during the period in which the decorative pattern in the "first pending changing color predictive effect" is temporarily stopped (or the period in which the background image for predictive effect is displayed), the button is repeatedly pressed. It is not possible to change the volume from the 1st step, which is the lowest volume, to the 10th step, which is the highest volume, by pressing or long pressing. Similarly, the volume cannot be changed from the 10th level, which is the maximum volume, to the 1st level, which is the minimum volume.
In addition, even in the moving period of the standby holding image that is shorter than the period during which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the volume cannot be changed from the first level, which is the lowest volume, to the tenth level, which is the highest volume. The volume cannot be changed from the 10th level, which is the maximum volume, to the 1st level, which is the minimum volume.
However, if the volume setting is at a predetermined intermediate level (for example, second or third level), it is possible to minimize the volume. Similarly, if the volume setting is at a predetermined intermediate level (e.g., level 8 or level 9), it is possible to maximize the volume.

On the other hand, during the period in which the decorative pattern in the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped, by repeatedly pressing the button or pressing the button for a long time, the sound volume is in 1st level, which is the lowest level, to 10 levels, which is the highest level. You can quickly change the volume up to your eyes. Similarly, the volume can be quickly changed from the 10th level, which is the maximum volume, to the 1st level, which is the minimum volume.
It should be noted that even during the period in which the background image for indication effect is displayed, the volume can be changed from the first level, which is the lowest volume, to the tenth level, which is the highest volume. The volume can be changed from the first level to the first level where the volume is the lowest.
Although the embodiment in which the volume changes by one step by pressing or holding down the button has been described, the volume may be changed in multiple steps (for example, two steps or three steps) by pressing or holding down the button. good. For example, the volume may be raised by three steps each time the volume up button is pressed. According to such an embodiment, the volume can be changed more quickly.

In addition, it is good also as the following embodiment.
When the volume level is at the maximum value, the period in which the decorative pattern of the ``first pending changing color indication effect'' is temporarily stopped starts, and the decorative pattern of the ``first pending changing color predictive effect'' is temporarily stopped. Even if you try to set the volume adjustment to the minimum value at the same time as the period in which it is stopped, it will not reach the minimum value until the period in which the "first pending change color prediction effect" decoration pattern is temporarily stopped ends. may be used).
When the sound volume level is at the minimum value, the period in which the decorative pattern of the ``first pending changing color indication effect'' is temporarily stopped starts, and the decorative pattern of the ``first pending changing color predictive effect'' is temporarily stopped. Even if you try to set the volume adjustment to the maximum value at the same time as the period in which it is stopped, it will not reach the maximum value until the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color sign effect" is temporarily stopped ends ( can be made).
A period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped in a situation where the volume level is at a predetermined level value other than the maximum value or the minimum value (for example, the level is 4) is started, Even if you try to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending color change sign effect" is temporarily stopped starts, the decorative pattern of the "first hold change color sign effect" will temporarily stop. It does not reach the maximum value by the end of the period of suspension (it may be set to reach the maximum value).
A period in which the decorative pattern of the ``first pending change color indication effect'' is temporarily stopped in a situation where the volume level is at a predetermined level value other than the maximum value or the minimum value (for example, the level is 4) is started, Even if you try to set the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending color change sign effect" is temporarily stopped starts, the decorative pattern of the "first hold change color sign effect" will temporarily stop. It does not reach the minimum value by the end of the stopped period (it may be set).

When the volume level is at the maximum value, the period during which the decorative pattern of the ``second pending changing color indication effect'' is temporarily stopped starts, and the decorative pattern of the ``second pending changing color predictive effect'' is temporarily stopped. Even if you try to set the volume adjustment to the minimum value at the same time as the period when the period is started, the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color prediction effect" will not reach the minimum value until the period when the temporary stop is over. may be used).
When the volume level is at the minimum value, the period during which the decorative pattern of the ``second pending change color indication effect'' is temporarily stopped starts, and the decorative pattern of the ``second pending change color indication effect'' is temporarily stopped. Even if you try to set the volume adjustment to the maximum value at the same time as the period where it is stopped, it will not reach the maximum value until the end of the period where the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color sign effect" is temporarily stopped ( can be made).
A period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped in a situation where the volume level is at a predetermined level value other than the maximum value or the minimum value (for example, the level is 4) is started, Even if you try to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time as the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change sign effect" is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern of the "second hold change color sign effect" is temporarily stopped. It does not reach the maximum value by the end of the period of suspension (it may be set to reach the maximum value).
A period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped in a situation where the volume level is at a predetermined level value other than the maximum value or the minimum value (for example, the level is 4) is started, Even if you try to set the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change sign effect" is temporarily stopped starts, the decorative pattern of the "second hold change color sign effect" will temporarily stop. It does not reach the minimum value by the end of the stopped period (it may be set).
It should be noted that instead of the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color predictive effect" is temporarily stopped, the period during which the background image for predictive effect of the "second pending change color predictive effect" is displayed. good.

The embodiment and the modified example regarding the volume adjustment during the execution of the above-mentioned "first pending change color predictive effect" and the embodiment and the modified example regarding the volume adjustment during the execution of the "second pending change color predictive effect" are described. You may combine suitably.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to adjust the volume of the music output during execution of the "holding change color indication effect" during execution of the "holding change color indication effect".
Since it is difficult to greatly change the sound volume in the "first pending change color indication effect", the player can concentrate on the effect itself.
On the other hand, when the "second pending change color predictive effect" is executed, a standby pending image (for example, a golden standby pending image ) may be displayed, but the player may feel embarrassed if the result is a loss in spite of the display of such a highly anticipated standby image. Therefore, in the ``second pending change color indication effect'', the ``second pending change color indication effect'' that makes it easy to greatly change the volume and displays the highly anticipated standby image is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice the presence.
In addition, in the "second pending change color indication effect", if the expected temporary stop state is high (for example, "production pattern PTN-2-16" is executed and the rainbow-colored decorative pattern is temporarily stopped When it is confirmed that a big hit will occur in the game), on the contrary, even if the volume is at the minimum level, it can be increased to the maximum level. You can be proud of yourself.

Instead of or in addition to providing a volume up button and a volume down button that enable volume adjustment at predetermined positions near the upper plate 321, a light amount up button and a light amount down button that enable adjustment of the light amount are provided. may be provided at a predetermined position near the upper plate 321 .
In addition, the above-described embodiment for volume adjustment can be applied not only to volume adjustment, but also to light amount adjustment. For example, it is possible to change the light intensity from the first stage where the light intensity is the minimum to the tenth stage where the light intensity is the maximum. You may enable it to adjust a light quantity.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effect as when the volume can be adjusted.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, the number of executions of the "second pending color change indication effect" was once, but after the "second pending change color indication effect" is completed, the "second 2 pending change color indication effect” may be executed.
For example, in the period from timing t20 to timing t20.5 in FIG. 399(a), the “development effect” is executed to display “from ~ to ~”, and at timing t20.5, it becomes a state of high speed fluctuation. The "second pending changing color predictive effect" may be executed again with all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols temporarily stopped.
Similarly, in the period from timing t21 to timing t21.5 in FIG. The "second pending change color predictive effect" may be executed again with all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols temporarily stopped.
Further, the number of times the "second pending change color indication effect" is executed is not limited to two times, and may be three times or more.
It should be noted that the remaining time of the variable display is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to execute the "second pending change color indication effect". Specifically, when the execution of the ``second reserved changing color predictive effect'' ends before the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the ``second reserved changing color predictive effect'' is executed, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. If the execution of the ``second reserved changing color predictive effect'' is not completed before the pattern is temporarily stopped, the ``second reserved changing color predictive effect'' is not executed.

According to such an embodiment, the "second pending change color indication effect" can be executed a plurality of times (twice or more), so that the chances of changing the mode of change of the standby pending image can be increased. Also, since the remaining time of the variable display can be effectively used, it is possible to prevent the player from having a boring time.

A part of the normal background image A is visible in the ``first pending color change indication effect'', and the background image for indication effect is displayed instead of the normal background image A in the ``second pending color change indication effect''. Although an embodiment has been shown in which a common image is displayed, a common image may be displayed. For example, in front of the normal background image A, an image indicating that the "suspended change color indication effect" is being performed may be displayed. For example, an image including the characters "Hold promotion chance!" may be displayed in front of the normal background image A. FIG.
The image including the characters ``suspended promotion chance!'' starts to be displayed at the start timing of the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' and the start timing of the ``second pending change color predictive effect''.
Further, the display ends at the end timing of the "first pending color change predictive effect" and the end timing of the "second pending change color predictive effect". Alternatively, the display may be ended when a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has passed after the timing at which the pending image changes.
In addition, the display priority of the image containing the characters "Hold Promotion Chance!" be done.

With reference to FIG. 412, the display mode of the image including the characters "Hold promotion chance!" will be described.
Figures 412(a) to 412(c) show "suspended promotion Chance!” is displayed.
412(a), 412(b), and 412(c), the size of the image containing the characters "hold promotion chance!"

FIGS. 412(d) to 412(f) show the timing of the display explaining the content of the effect during the "second pending change color predictive effect" (displaying the characters "READY GO!"). 399 shows a display state in which an image including characters "Hold promotion chance!"
412(d), FIG. 412(e), and FIG. 412(f), the size of the image containing the characters "Hold promotion chance!" increases.

It should be noted that the size of the image containing the characters "suspended promotion chance!" are the same.
In addition, the size of the image containing the characters "suspended promotion chance!" are the same.
In addition, the size of the image containing the characters "suspended promotion chance!" are the same. 412(c) and 412(f), the size of the image containing the characters "Hold promotion chance!" is the same as the size of the display area 1600a. Here, the background image A) is normally invisible.

The display mode of the image including the characters ``suspension promotion chance!'' is different between the execution of the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' and the execution of the ``second pending change color predictive effect''. may be For example, during the execution of the ``first pending change color indication effect'', a large image including the characters ``pending promotion chance!'' shown in FIG. During the execution of the effect, a small image containing the characters "Hold promotion chance!" shown in FIG. 412(d) may be displayed.
Conversely, during the execution of the ``first pending changing color indication effect'', a small image containing the words ``hold promotion chance!'' shown in FIG. A large image containing the characters "Hold promotion chance!" shown in FIG.
Not limited to this example, during the execution of the ``first pending change color predictive effect'', the characters ``suspended promotion chance!'' shown in FIGS. Any of the images can be displayed. Similarly, during the execution of the "second pending change color indication effect", any of the images containing the characters "holding promotion chance!" shown in FIGS. can be displayed.

According to such an embodiment, the visible area of the background image (here, the normal background image A) changes depending on the size of the image containing the characters "hold promotion chance!" It is possible to clearly appeal that the "color indication effect" has started.
Also, if the size of the image containing the characters "holding promotion chance!" is being executed by the player.
It should be noted that if the size of the image containing the characters "Hold promotion chance!" is small, it is difficult for other players to notice it. On the other hand, if the image containing the characters "Hold promotion chance!" is large, other players will easily notice it.
Although an image containing characters has been taken as an example, similar effects can be obtained when character images or other images are displayed instead of characters.

400 to 402, etc., an embodiment in which the standby reserved image moves to the near side of the aura image has been shown, but the display priority of the aura image is set higher than the display priority of the standby reserved image, and the aura image The standby holding image may be moved behind the .
For example, before the standby reserved image starts moving, an aura image may be displayed in front of the standby reserved image to make the standby reserved image invisible. Alternatively, the standby reserved image may move to the position of the aura image being displayed, and the standby reserved image may be positioned behind the aura image. In this case as well, the standby reserved image becomes invisible.
Further, when the standby reserved image moves and the standby reserved image appears behind the aura image, the display mode of the standby reserved image may change. Alternatively, when the standby reserved image is positioned behind the aura image, the display of the aura image may be ended, and the display mode of the standby reserved image that has become visible may change. .
As the size and display position of the aura image, the size and display position overlapping the display position of the standby reserved image (lower right of display area 1600a) may be adopted, or the display position of the standby reserved image (display area 1600a The size and display position may be adopted so that they do not overlap with the lower right of ).
Alternatively, aura images of different sizes may be displayed, and the larger the size of the aura image, the higher the possibility of changing the display mode of the standby holding image.

In the “holding change color indication effect”, an effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a light emitting effect) may be executed in which the light-emitting decorative member provided in the gaming machine is put into a light-emitting state. The light emitting decorative members include a door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550, and a door frame top unit 570 provided on the door frame 3, a light guide plate 1140 provided on the game board 5, a panel plate rear substrate 2420, and a tank. One or more of the characters 3770 can be employed.
Specifically, the luminous effect changes the predetermined luminous decorative member from the extinguished state to the luminous state, and after continuing the luminous state for a predetermined time, the luminous state is changed from the luminous state to the extinguished state. In addition, in the light emitting state, the light source may continuously emit light, or the light source may blink periodically so that the light emitting decorative member blinks and is visible.

As a specific timing for executing the light emitting effect, for example, the timing immediately before the change of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color indication effect" from the timing when the start winning has occurred (in the example of FIGS. 398 and 399 It is preferable that the light-emitting decorative member emits light until timing t9.5).
Alternatively, the light-emitting decorative member is caused to emit light from the timing when the starting prize is generated to a predetermined timing (timing t7 in the examples of FIGS. 398 and 399) during the movement of the standby reserved image in the "first reserved changing color indication effect". good too.
Alternatively, from the timing (timing t6.5 in the examples of FIGS. 398 and 399) at which the movement of the standby image is started in the "first pending change color indication effect", the standby in the "first pending change color indication effect" It is preferable to cause the light-emitting decorative member to emit light until the timing (timing t12 in the examples of FIGS. 398 and 399) until the movement of the reserved image is completed.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to appeal to the player that the "suspended change color indication effect" has started.

During the period in which the background image for indication effect in the ``second pending color change indication effect'' is displayed, the luminous decorative member that has been changed to the luminous state in the ``first pending color change indication effect'' is brought into the luminous state. You may leave it unchanged.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the "suspended change color indication effect" from becoming an excessive effect, and allow the player to concentrate on the display content in the display area 1600a.

Even if the light emitting effect started in accordance with the execution of the "first pending change color indication effect" is continued during the execution period of the "development effect" (the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399). good. For example, the lighting effect may be executed during the period from timing t5 to timing t13.5 in FIG.
Alternatively, during the "first pending change color indication effect" or the "second pending change color indication effect", the light emission effect is not performed, and the execution period of the "development effect" (from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399) period), the light emitting effect may be executed.
Alternatively, the light emission effect is executed from the execution period of the "development effect" (the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399) to a predetermined timing of the execution period of the "second pending change color indication effect". may
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to appeal that the "second pending changing color indication effect" is started.

An embodiment has been shown in which the light emitting effect using the light emitting decorative member ends during the execution of the "first pending change color predictive effect" or during the execution of the "development effect", but the "second pending change color predictive effect" is shown. You may make it finish in the middle.
For example, during the display of the remaining time gauge image (the period from timing t16 to timing t19 in FIG. 399), the light emitting effect is terminated at a predetermined timing, or the display of the background image for indication effect is terminated (timing t20 in FIG. 399). 5), or at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing within the period from timing t20.5 to timing t28.5 in FIG. 399) after the display of the background image for predictive effect ends. You may make it

As an example of the light emitting effect using the light emitting decorative member, a light emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light and a light emitting state in which the light source blinks are shown, but the degree of expectation may be indicated by these light emitting states. For example, it is preferable that the expected degree of expectation for the light emission state in which the light source blinks is higher than the degree of expectation in the light emission state in which the light source continuously emits light. Alternatively, the degree of expectation for the light emission state in which the light source continuously emits light may be set higher than the degree of expectation in the light emission state in which the light source blinks.
The degree of expectation may be indicated by the color of the light emitted by the light source.
For example, the light source may emit three kinds of light, white, blue, and red, and the light-emitting decorative member may emit light in any one of white, blue, and red. Alternatively, the degree of expectation may increase in the order of white, blue, and red.
According to such an embodiment, since the degree of expectation is indicated by the light emitting mode of the light emitting decorative member, it is possible to enliven the "holding change color indication effect".

The display time of the standby pending image whose display mode is changed by the "second pending changing color predictive effect" is indefinite (because the "suspended changing color predictive effect" is started based on the timing of the start winning). , the time during which the standby pending image whose display mode is changed by the "second pending changing color indication effect" may be different.

When the variable display corresponding to the pending image whose display mode is changed by the ``first pending change color indication effect'' is performed, the decorative pattern shows the ready-to-win mode in the variable display, and the ready-to-win effect to expect a big win is executed. Then, there is a case where the decorative pattern does not show the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win effect for expecting a big win is not executed. Further, when the variable display corresponding to the pending image whose display mode is changed by performing the "first pending change color predictive effect" and the "second pending change color predictive effect" is performed, decoration is performed in the variable display. There are a case where the ready-to-win performance is executed to expect a big hit with the pattern showing a ready-to-win mode, and a case where the decorative pattern does not show the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win performance to expect the big win is not executed. The degree of expectation for a big win when the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' and the ``second pending change color predictive effect'' are performed than when only the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' is performed. is higher when the "first pending color change sign effect" and "second pending color change sign effect" are performed than when only the "first pending color change sign effect" is performed. It is preferable to execute the ready-to-win effect at a rate.

When it is decided to execute the ``suspended changing color indication effect'', all decorative patterns corresponding to the current variable display are temporarily stopped, and the current variable display is executed, for example, a predetermined ready-to-win effect. When it is decided to execute the "suspended change color indication effect", it is determined that the result of the current variable display is a failure, so the predetermined reach effect is canceled and the "suspended change color indication effect" is performed. ” is executed (as the background image at this time, a normal background image is displayed), and an example of executing a reach effect as a look-ahead effect is shown. The display of the effect can be said to be a rare effect because it is not displayed in the variable display every time. Therefore, even if it is decided to execute the "suspended changing color indication effect" while the predetermined ready-to-win effect is being displayed, the predetermined ready-to-win effect etc. that are being executed are continued to be executed. good too. This is because there are players who become more interested just by seeing the presentation itself, even if they know that the result of the variable display will be a loss. In such a case, while the ready-to-win effect is being performed, only the ``first pending color change predictive effect'' may be performed, or only the ``second pending color change predictive effect'' may be performed. may

In the predetermined ready-to-win effect, a simulated image simulating the operation means is displayed immediately before the timing of suggesting the win-lose result, the operation of the operating means is enabled, and a display suggesting the win-lose result is displayed based on the operation. There is also a reach performance. In the case of such a ready-to-win effect, during the period in which the operation of the operation means is valid (the period in which the simulated image is displayed) immediately before the timing indicating the win-lose result, the "first pending change color indication Effect" or "second pending changing color predictive effect" is not executed (it is not decided to execute the pending changing color predictive effect as a look-ahead effect), and in the predetermined ready-to-win effect, "first reserved changing color In the case of executing the "prediction effect" or the "second pending change color predictive effect" (it can be determined to execute the "suspended change color predictive effect" as a look-ahead effect), after the predetermined ready-to-win effect is started If there is, it may be executed at a predetermined timing before the period (the period during which the simulated image is displayed). In addition, there is also a reach effect in which a display that suggests a win-lose result is displayed without activating the operation of the operation means (without displaying a simulated image simulating the operation means) immediately before the timing that suggests the win-lose result. Even in the case of the ready-to-win effect, the ``first pending change color predictive effect'' or the ``second pending change color predictive effect'' is not executed immediately before the timing that suggests the win-lose result. It is preferable to set it as "not determined to execute the indication effect". Suppose that in the case of such a ready-to-win effect, the ``first pending color change predictive effect'' or the ``second pending color change predictive effect'' is executed (it can be determined to execute the pending color change predictive effect as the look-ahead effect). In that case, it is desirable to avoid the timing immediately before the timing indicating the win-lose result, such as before 1/2 of the length (time) of the ready-to-win effect elapses.

An embodiment may be obtained by combining and applying each technical matter in the structure of the game machine, the example of the effect executed in the game machine, and the like in the embodiment. Further, the embodiment may be formed by applying a combination of some of the technical matters in the structure of the game machine and examples of effects executed in the game machine. In addition, an embodiment may be obtained by combining and applying each technical matter in each role product configuration. Moreover, each of these technical matters may be applied in combination to form an embodiment. Note that the number of technical items to be combined is not limited to two, and may be any number of two or more. Further, another embodiment may be obtained by applying an embodiment obtained by modifying a certain embodiment (or another embodiment) to an embodiment obtained by modifying a certain embodiment. Also, one embodiment described in the specification may be modified in multiple ways. For example, it is possible to apply two embodiments and two modified embodiments to one embodiment. In addition, a plurality of embodiments that can be conceived by those skilled in the art may be employed in one game machine.
It should be noted that the "embodiment" here includes, in addition to those explicitly described as "embodiment" in this specification, various modifications, examples, modifications, Technical matters, problem-solving means, etc. can also be included.

Although preferred embodiments of the invention have been described, the invention is not limited to these embodiments and is susceptible to various modifications and design changes as noted above.

In the embodiments, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine, but gaming machines to which the embodiments can be applied are not limited to pachinko machines, and other gaming machines other than pachinko machines can be used. may For example, Jankyu machines, enclosed-type machines in which game balls are sealed inside (managed machines), pachislot machines, pachislot machines that do not require the insertion of medals (medal-less machines), pachinko machines and pachislot machines The embodiment may be adopted in a game machine (parrot etc.) etc. that fuses. Also in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main frame 5 game board 5' game board 5a game area 6 CR unit 190 glass unit 530 door frame left side unit 550 door frame right side unit 570 door frame top unit 931 power supply board 1000 front Components 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel plate 1110a Obstacle nail penetration hole 1110b Panel plate back rough surface portion 1118 Panel plate opening portion 1140 Light guide plate 1142 Light guide plate rough surface portion 1146 Light guide plate illumination member 1147 Guide Substrate for light plate 1148 Light emitting member for light guide plate 1201 Obstacle nail 1201a Obstacle nail head 1201b Obstacle nail first body part 1201c Obstacle nail spiral shape part 1201d Obstacle nail second body part 1201e Obstacle nail tip part 1230 Life nail 1231 Jump nail 1232 Left side Guidance nail 1310 Main control board 1402 Ordinary pattern display 1403 First special pattern display 1404 First special reserved number display 1405 Second special pattern display 1406 Second special reserved number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Display area 2000 Front unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2004a Movable piece 2005 Big winning opening 2100 Starting opening unit 2400 Panel board lower light emitting board 2410 Panel plate rear decoration member 2410a Panel plate rear decoration member rough surface portion 2410c Panel plate rear decoration member rotating shaft 2420 Panel plate rear substrate 2425 Panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 3700 Mission button 3710 Attack button 3720 Left lever 3722 Left lever vibration source 3724 Left lever light source 3730 Right lever 3732 Right lever vibration source 3734 Right lever light source 3740 Defense button 3770 Tank accessory 7000 Door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7010 Door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body first surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7114 Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7116 Right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7118 Right ear Frame movable body outer light emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body first surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7214 Left ear frame movable body first Surface outer decorative portion 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface HKB Whitening portion YGK Game ball

Claims (1)

determination means for acquiring lottery information regarding a win based on the establishment of a starting condition, and determining whether or not a win is made based on the lottery information;
production execution means for executing production;
a display device capable of displaying a predetermined image;
a decorative design variation means for displaying a decorative design on the display device, performing variable display of the decorative design based on establishment of a start condition, and indicating the result of the determination at the end of the variable display of the decorative design;
holding means for storing the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied although the establishment of the start condition is satisfied;
advance determination means for determining whether or not a win is made based on the lottery information stored by the holding means before the start condition is satisfied;
holding display means for displaying on the display device as a holding display that the lottery information is stored by the holding means;
As modes of variable display of the decorative design, there are a first display mode in which the decorative design is difficult or impossible to recognize, and a second display mode in which the decorative design is easy to recognize,
enabling the pending display displayed on the display device to be moved;
The production includes a first production and a second production,
The first production is
When starting to move the holding display displayed on the display device, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode,
Even when the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device is finished, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode,
an effect in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode until a predetermined time elapses after the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device is completed;
The second production is
At least one of the decorative symbols is set in the first display mode when the suggestive display displayed by the suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the reserved display displayed on the display device is changed is displayed. ,
an effect in which all of the decorative patterns are in the first display mode when the pending display is shown in the display mode after the display of the suggestive display is finished and changed,
During the period from the start to the end of the movement of the holding display displayed on the display device in the first effect, an advance notice effect that provides a sense of expectation for winning can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the advance notice effect does not require a player to operate.

Images